FCC ID: LDK102087P Cisco Aironet 802.11ac Dual Band Access Points

 

ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 1 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM GETTING STARTED GUIDE Cisco Aironet 3702P Access Points 1 About this Guide 2 Safety Instructions 3 Unpacking 4 Configurations 5 Access Point Ports and Connectors 6 Configuring the Access Point 7 Mounting the Access Point 8 Deploying the Access Point on the Wireless Network 9 Troubleshooting 10 Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information 11 Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 12 Access Point Specifications ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 2 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Revised: September 4, 2013 1 About this Guide This Guide provides instructions on how to install and configure your Cisco Aironet 3702P Access Point. This guide also provides mounting instructions and limited troubleshooting procedures. The 3702P Access Point is referred to as the access point in this document. 2 Safety Instructions Translated versions of the following safety warnings are provided in the translated safety warnings document that is shipped with your access point. The translated warnings are also in the Translated Safety Warnings for Cisco Aironet Access Points, which is available on Cisco.com. Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device. Statement 1071 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Warning Read the installation instructions before you connect the system to its power source. Statement 1004 Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes. Statement 1074 Warning This product relies on the buildings installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection. Ensure that the protective device is rated not greater than:

20A. Statement 1005 2 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 3 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Warning Do not operate your wireless network device near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Statement 245B Warning In order to comply with FCC radio frequency (RF) exposure limits, antennas should be located at a minimum of 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more from the body of all persons. Statement 332 Caution Caution The fasteners you use to mount an access point on a ceiling must be capable of maintaining a minimum pullout force of 20 lbs (9 kg) and must use all 4 indented holes on the mounting bracket. This product and all interconnected equipment must be installed indoors within the same building, including the associated LAN connections as defined by Environment A of the IEEE 802.af Standard. Note The access point is suitable for use in environmental air space in accordance with section 300.22.C of the National Electrical Code and sections 2-128, 12-010(3), and 12-100 of the Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, C22.1. You should not install the power supply or power injector in air handling spaces. Note Use only with listed ITE equipment. 3 Unpacking To unpack the access point, follow these steps:

Step 1 Unpack and remove the access point and the accessory kit from the shipping box. Step 2 Return any packing material to the shipping container and save it for future use. 3 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 4 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Step 3 Verify that you have received the items listed below. If any item is missing or damaged, contact your Cisco representative or reseller for instructions. The access point Mounting bracket (selected when you ordered the access point) Adjustable ceiling-rail clip (selected when you ordered the access point) 4 Configurations The 3702P access point contains two simultaneous dual-band radios, the 2.4-GHz MIMO radio and the 5-GHz 802.11ac MIMO radio. For information on the regulatory domains (shown as x in the model numbers) see Countries Supported section on page 4. External Antennas The 3702P access point is configured with up to four external dual-band dipole antennas, and two 2.4-GHz/ 5-GHz dual-band radios. The radio and antennas support frequency bands 24002500 MHz and 51805865 MHz through a common dual-band RF interface. Features of the external dual-band dipole antennas are:

Four RTNC antenna connectors on the top of the access point

Four TX/RX antennas These antennas are supported on the 3702P:

AIR-ANT2524DB-R

AIR-ANT2524DW-R

AIR-ANT2524DG-R

AIR-ANT2524V4C-R

AIR-ANT2544V4M-R

AIR-ANT2566P4W-R Countries Supported Click this URL to browse to a list of countries and regulatory domains supported by the 3700:

www.cisco.com/go/aironet/compliance 4 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 5 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM 5 Access Point Ports and Connectors The 3702P model access point has external antenna connectors and the LED indictor on the top of the model, as shown in Figure 1. Figure 1 Access Point Ports and Connections (top)3702P Model 1 4 A D UAL B A N D D D UAL B A N D B D UAL B A N D C D UAL B A N D 2 3 1 Dual-band antenna connector A 2 Dual-band antenna connector B 3 Dual-band antenna connector C 4 Dual-band antenna connector D The ports and connections on the bottom of the access point are shown in Figure 2. 5 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 6 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Figure 2 Access Point Ports and Connections (bottom)-AIR3702P 1 5 6 2 3 4 1 Kensington lock slot DC Power connection 2 3 Gbit Ethernet port 6 7 7 3 2 7 2 4 Console port Security padlock and hasp (padlock not included) 5 6 Mounting bracket pins (feet for desk or table-top mount) 6 Configuring the Access Point This section describes how to connect the access point to a wireless LAN controller. Because the configuration process takes place on the controller, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide for additional information. This guide is available on Cisco.com. The Controller Discovery Process The access point uses standard Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol

(CAPWAP) to communicate between the controller and other wireless access points on the network. CAPWAP is a standard, interoperable protocol which enables an access controller to manage a 6 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 7 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM collection of wireless termination points. The discovery process using CAPWAP is identical to the Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP) used with previous Cisco Aironet access points. LWAPP-enabled access points are compatible with CAPWAP, and conversion to a CAPWAP controller is seamless. Deployments can combine CAPWAP and LWAPP software on the controllers. The functionality provided by the controller does not change except for customers who have Layer 2 deployments, which CAPWAP does not support. In a CAPWAP environment, a wireless access point discovers a controller by using CAPWAP discovery mechanisms and then sends it a CAPWAP join request. The controller sends the access point a CAPWAP join response allowing the access point to join the controller. When the access point joins the controller, the controller manages its configuration, firmware, control transactions, and data transactions. Note Note Note For additional information about the discovery process and CAPWAP, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Software Configuration Guide. This document is available on Cisco.com. CAPWAP support is provided in controller software release 5.2 or later. However, your controller must be running release 7.5.0.0 or later to support 3702P access points. You cannot edit or query any access point using the controller CLI if the name of the access point contains a space. Note Make sure that the controller is set to the current time. If the controller is set to a time that has already occurred, the access point might not join the controller because its certificate may not be valid for that time. Access points must be discovered by a controller before they can become an active part of the network. The access point supports these controller discovery processes:

Layer 3 CAPWAP discoveryCan occur on different subnets than the access point and uses IP addresses and UDP packets rather than MAC addresses used by Layer 2 discovery.

Locally stored controller IP address discoveryIf the access point was previously joined to a controller, the IP addresses of the primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers are stored in the access points non-volatile memory. This process of storing controller IP addresses on an access point for later deployment is called priming the access point. For more information about priming, see the Performing a Pre-Installation Configuration section on page 9. 7 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 8 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM

DHCP server discoveryThis feature uses DHCP option 43 to provide controller IP addresses to the access points. Cisco switches support a DHCP server option that is typically used for this capability. For more information about DHCP option 43, see the Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 section on page 34.

DNS discoveryThe access point can discover controllers through your domain name server

(DNS). For the access point to do so, you must configure your DNS to return controller IP addresses in response to CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER.localdomain, where localdomain is the access point domain name. Configuring the CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER provides backwards compatibility in an existing customer deployment. When an access point receives an IP address and DNS information from a DHCP server, it contacts the DNS to resolve CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER.localdomain. When the DNS sends a list of controller IP addresses, the access point sends discovery requests to the controllers. Preparing the Access Point Before you mount and deploy your access point, we recommend that you perform a site survey (or use the site planning tool) to determine the best location to install your access point. You should have the following information about your wireless network available:

Access point locations.

Access point mounting options: below a suspended ceiling, on a flat horizontal surface, or on a desktop. Note You can mount the access point above a suspended ceiling but you must purchase additional mounting hardware: See Mounting the Access Point section on page 12 for additional information.

Access point power options: power supplied by the recommended external power supply (Cisco AIR-PWR-B), a DC power supply, PoE from a network device, or a PoE power injector/hub

(usually located in a wiring closet). Note Access points mounted in a buildings environmental airspace must be powered using PoE to comply with safety regulations. Cisco recommends that you make a site map showing access point locations so that you can record the device MAC addresses from each location and return them to the person who is planning or managing your wireless network. 8 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 9 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Installation Summary Installing the access point involves these operations:

Performing a pre-installation configuration (optional)

Mounting the access point

Grounding the access point

Deploying the access point on the wireless network Performing a Pre-Installation Configuration The following procedures ensure that your access point installation and initial operation go as expected. A pre-installation configuration is also known as priming the access point. This procedure is optional. Note Performing a pre-installation configuration is an optional procedure. If your network controller is properly configured, you can install your access point in its final location and connect it to the network from there. See the Deploying the Access Point on the Wireless Network section on page 12 for details. Pre-Installation Configuration Setup The pre-installation configuration setup is shown in Figure 3. 9 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 10 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Figure 3 Pre-Installation Configuration Setup Controller Layer 3 devices Cisco Aironet access points 8 8 4 2 7 2 To perform pre-installation configuration, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Make sure that the Cisco wireless LAN controller DS port is connected to the network. Use the CLI, web-browser interface, or Cisco WCS procedures as described in the appropriate Cisco wireless LAN controller guide. a. Make sure that access points have Layer 3 connectivity to the Cisco wireless LAN controller Management and AP-Manager Interface. b. Configure the switch to which your access point is to attach. See the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release x.x for additional information. c. Set the Cisco wireless LAN controller as the master so that new access points always join with it. d. Make sure DHCP is enabled on the network. The access point must receive its IP address through DHCP. e. CAPWAP UDP ports must not be blocked in the network. 10 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 11 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM f. The access point must be able to find the IP address of the controller. This can be accomplished using DHCP, DNS, or IP subnet broadcast. This guide describes the DHCP method to convey the controller IP address. For other methods, refer to the product documentation. See also the Using DHCP Option 43 section on page 14 for more information. Step 2 Apply power to the access point:

a. The access point is 802.3af (15.4 W) compliant and can be powered by any 802.3af-compliant device. The recommended external power supply for the access point is the Cisco AIR-PWR-B power supply. The access point can also be powered by the following optional external power sources:

Access point power injector (AIR-PWRINJ5) Any 802.3af compliant power injector Note The 3702P access point requires a Gigibit Ethernet link to prevent the Ethernet port from becoming a bottleneck for traffic because wireless traffic speeds exceed transmit speeds of a 10/100 Ethernet port. b. As the access point attempts to connect to the controller, the LEDs cycle through a green, red, and amber sequence, which can take up to 5 minutes. Note If the access point remains in this mode for more than five minutes, the access point is unable to find the Master Cisco wireless LAN controller. Check the connection between the access point and the Cisco wireless LAN controller and be sure that they are on the same subnet. If the access point shuts down, check the power source. c. d. After the access point finds the Cisco wireless LAN controller, it attempts to download the new operating system code if the access point code version differs from the Cisco wireless LAN controller code version. While this is happening, the Status LED blinks dark blue. If the operating system download is successful, the access point reboots. e. Step 3 Configure the access point if required. Use the controller CLI, controller GUI, or Cisco Prime Step 4 Infrastructure to customize the access-point-specific 802.11ac network settings. If the pre-installation configuration is successful, the Status LED is green indicating normal operation. Disconnect the access point and mount it at the location at which you intend to deploy it on the wireless network. 11 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 12 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Step 5 If your access point does not indicate normal operation, turn it off and repeat the pre-installation configuration. Note When you are installing a Layer 3 access point on a different subnet than the Cisco wireless LAN controller, be sure that a DHCP server is reachable from the subnet on which you will be installing the access point, and that the subnet has a route back to the Cisco wireless LAN controller. Also be sure that the route back to the Cisco wireless LAN controller has destination UDP ports 5246 and 5247 open for CAPWAP communications. Ensure that the route back to the primary, secondary, and tertiary wireless LAN controller allows IP packet fragments. Finally, be sure that if address translation is used, that the access point and the Cisco wireless LAN controller have a static 1-to-1 NAT to an outside address. (Port Address Translation is not supported.) 7 Mounting the Access Point Cisco Aironet 3702P access points can be mounted in several configurations, including on a suspended ceiling, on a hard ceiling or wall, on an electrical or network box, and above a suspended ceiling. Click this URL to browse to complete access point mounting instructions:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/wireless/access_point/mounting/guide/apmount.html 8 Deploying the Access Point on the Wireless Network After you have mounted the access point, follow these steps to deploy it on the wireless network:

Step 1 Connect and power up the access point. Step 2 Observe the access point LED (for LED descriptions, see Checking the Access Point LED section on page 14). a. When you power up the access point, it begins a power-up sequence that you can verify by observing the access point LED. If the power-up sequence is successful, the discovery and join process begins. During this process, the LED blinks sequentially green, red, and off. When the access point has joined a controller, the LED is green if no clients are associated or blue if one or more clients are associated. If the LED is not on, the access point is most likely not receiving power. b. 12 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 13 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM c. If the LED blinks sequentially for more than 5 minutes, the access point is unable to find its primary, secondary, and tertiary Cisco wireless LAN controller. Check the connection between the access point and the Cisco wireless LAN controller, and be sure the access point and the Cisco wireless LAN controller are either on the same subnet or that the access point has a route back to its primary, secondary, and tertiary Cisco wireless LAN controller. Also, if the access point is not on the same subnet as the Cisco wireless LAN controller, be sure that there is a properly configured DHCP server on the same subnet as the access point. See the Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 section on page 34 for additional information. Step 3 Reconfigure the Cisco wireless LAN controller so that it is not the Master. Note A Master Cisco wireless LAN controller should be used only for configuring access points and not in a working network. 9 Troubleshooting If you experience difficulty getting your access point installed and running, look for a solution to your problem in this guide or in additional access point documentation. These, and other documents, are available on Cisco.com. Guidelines for Using Cisco Aironet Lightweight Access Points Keep these guidelines in mind when you use 3702P access points:

The access point can only communicate with Cisco wireless LAN controllers.

The access point does not support Wireless Domain Services (WDS) and cannot communicate with WDS devices. However, the controller provides functionality equivalent to WDS when the access point joins it.

CAPWAP does not support Layer 2. The access point must get an IP address and discover the controller using Layer 3, DHCP, DNS, or IP subnet broadcast.

The access point console port is enabled for monitoring and debug purposes. All configuration commands are disabled when the access point is connected to a controller. 13 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 14 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Using DHCP Option 43 You can use DHCP Option 43 to provide a list of controller IP addresses to the access points, enabling them to find and join a controller. For additional information, refer to the Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 section on page 34. Checking the Access Point LED The location of the access point status LED is shown in Figure 4. Note Regarding LED status colors: it is expected that there will be small variations in color intensity and hue from unit to unit. This is within the normal range of the LED manufacturers specifications and is not a defect. Figure 4 Access Point LED Location 1 8 7 3 2 7 2 1 Status LED The access point status LED indicates various conditions and are described in Table 1. 14 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 15 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Table 1 LED Status Indications Message Type Boot loader status sequence Status LED Blinking green Association status Green Operating status Boot loader warnings Blue Blinking blue Cycling through green, red, and off Rapidly cycling through blue, green, and red Blinking red Blinking blue Red Blinking green Message Meaning DRAM memory test in progress DRAM memory test OK Board initialization in progress Initializing FLASH file system FLASH memory test OK Initializing Ethernet Ethernet OK Starting Cisco IOS Initialization successful Normal operating condition, but no wireless client associated Normal operating condition, at least one wireless client association Software upgrade in progress Discovery/join process in progress Access point location command invoked Ethernet link not operational Configuration recovery in progress (MODE button pushed for 2 to 3 seconds) Ethernet failure or image recovery (MODE button pushed for 20 to 30 seconds) Image recovery in progress (MODE button released) 15 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 16 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Table 1 LED Status Indications (continued) Message Type Boot loader errors Status LED Red Blinking red and blue Blinking red and off Cisco IOS errors Red Cycling through blue, green, red, and off Message Meaning DRAM memory test failure FLASH file system failure Environment variable failure Bad MAC address Ethernet failure during image recovery Boot environment failure No Cisco image file Boot failure Software failure; try disconnecting and reconnecting unit power General warning; insufficient inline power Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process Access points can fail to join a controller for many reasons: a RADIUS authorization is pending;

self-signed certificates are not enabled on the controller; the access points and controllers regulatory domains dont match, and so on. Controller software enables you to configure the access points to send all CAPWAP-related errors to a syslog server. You do not need to enable any debug commands on the controller because all of the CAPWAP error messages can be viewed from the syslog server itself. The state of the access point is not maintained on the controller until it receives a CAPWAP join request from the access point. Therefore, it can be difficult to determine why the CAPWAP discovery request from a certain access point was rejected. In order to troubleshoot such joining problems without enabling CAPWAP debug commands on the controller, the controller collects information for all access points that send a discovery message to it and maintains information for any access points that have successfully joined it. The controller collects all join-related information for each access point that sends a CAPWAP discovery request to the controller. Collection begins with the first discovery message received from the access point and ends with the last configuration payload sent from the controller to the access point. 16 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 17 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM You can view join-related information for up to three times the maximum number of access points supported by the platform for the 2500 series controllers and the Controller Network Module within the Cisco 28/37/38xx Series Integrated Services Routers. Note The maximum number of access points varies for the Cisco WiSM2, depending on which controller software release is being used. When the controller is maintaining join-related information for the maximum number of access points, it does not collect information for any more access points. An access point sends all syslog messages to IP address 255.255.255.255 by default when any of the following conditions are met:

An access point running software release 5.2 or later has been newly deployed.

An existing access point running software release 5.2 or later has been reset after clearing the configuration. If any of these conditions are met and the access point has not yet joined a controller, you can also configure a DHCP server to return a syslog server IP address to the access point using option 7 on the server. The access point then starts sending all syslog messages to this IP address. When the access point joins a controller for the first time, the controller sends the global syslog server IP address (the default is 255.255.255.255) to the access point. After that, the access point sends all syslog messages to this IP address until it is overridden by one of the following scenarios:

The access point is still connected to the same controller, and the global syslog server IP address configuration on the controller has been changed using the config ap syslog host global syslog_server_IP_address command. In this case, the controller sends the new global syslog server IP address to the access point.

The access point is still connected to the same controller, and a specific syslog server IP address has been configured for the access point on the controller using the config ap syslog host specific Cisco_AP syslog_server_IP_address command. In this case, the controller sends the new specific syslog server IP address to the access point.

The access point is disconnected from the controller and joins another controller. In this case, the new controller sends its global syslog server IP address to the access point.

Whenever a new syslog server IP address overrides the existing syslog server IP address, the old address is erased from persistent storage, and the new address is stored in its place. The access point also starts sending all syslog messages to the new IP address provided the access point can reach the syslog server IP address. You can configure the syslog server for access points and view the access point join information only from the controller CLI. A detailed explanation of the join process is on Cisco.com at the following URL:

http://www.Cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6366/products_tech_note09186a00808f8599.shtml 17 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 18 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM 10 Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information This section provides declarations of conformity and regulatory information for the Cisco Aironet 3702P Access Points. You can find additional information at this URL:

www.cisco.com/go/aironet/compliance Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Access Point Models AIR-CAP3702P-A-K9 Module Models

(Not applicable) Manufacturer:

Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA Certification Number LDK102087P Certification Number

(Not applicable) This device complies with Part 15 rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 18 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 19 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Note Review the FCC guidelines for installing and operating outdoor wireless LAN devices at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/prod/collateral/routers/ps272/data_sheet_c78-647116_ps11451 _Products_Data_Sheet.html LDK102087P is restricted to indoor operation in the 5150-5250Mhz band per FCC guidance. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment. This equipment generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. Increase separation between the equipment and receiver. Caution The Part 15 radio device operates on a non-interference basis with other devices operating at this frequency when using the integrated antennas. Any changes or modification to the product not expressly approved by Cisco could void the users authority to operate this device. 19 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 20 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM VCCI Statement for Japan Warning This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. 20 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 21 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Access Points in Japan This section provides guidelines for avoiding interference when operating Cisco Aironet access points in Japan. These guidelines are provided in both Japanese and English. Japanese Translation 03-6434-6500 7 9 6 8 0 2 English Translation This equipment operates in the same frequency bandwidth as industrial, scientific, and medical devices such as microwave ovens and mobile object identification (RF-ID) systems (licensed premises radio stations and unlicensed specified low-power radio stations) used in factory production lines. 1. Before using this equipment, make sure that no premises radio stations or specified low-power 2. 3. radio stations of RF-ID are used in the vicinity. If this equipment causes RF interference to a premises radio station of RF-ID, promptly change the frequency or stop using the device; contact the number below and ask for recommendations on avoiding radio interference, such as setting partitions. If this equipment causes RF interference to a specified low-power radio station of RF-ID, contact the number below. Contact Number: 03-6434-6500 21 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 22 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Statement 371Power Cable and AC Adapter English Translation When installing the product, please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/AC adaptors. Using any other cables/adaptors could cause a malfunction or a fire. Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law prohibits the use of UL-certified cables (that have the UL shown on the code) for any other electrical devices than products designated by CISCO. The use of cables that are certified by Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law (that have PSE shown on the code) is not limited to CISCO-designated products. Industry Canada Canadian Compliance Statement Access Point Models AIR-CAP3702P-A-K9 Module Models

(Not applicable) Certification Number 2461B-102087P Certification Number

(Not applicable) This Class B Digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. 22 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 23 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM This device complies with Class B Limits of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Cisco Aironet Access Points are certified to the requirements of RSS-210. The use of this device in a system operating either partially or completely outdoors may require the user to obtain a license for the system according to the Canadian regulations. For further information, contact your local Industry Canada office. This device has been designed to operate with antennas having a maximum gain of 6 dBi. Antennas having a gain greater than 6 dBi are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted for successful communication. French Translation Cet appareil numerique de la classe B respecte les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada. Cet appareil respecte les limites prescrites pour les appareils de classe B par Industrie Canada. Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterf_rences nuisibles, et

(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interf_rences, y compris celles susceptibles de perturber le fonctionnement de lappareil. Les points d'acc_s Aironet de Cisco sont certifi_s conform_ment aux exigences du CNR-210. L'utilisation de cet appareil dans un syst_me fonctionnant partiellement ou enti_rement l'ext_rieur peut n_cessiter l'obtention d'une licence pour le syst_me, conform_ment la r_glementation canadienne. Pour plus de renseignements, communiquez avec le bureau local d'Industrie Canada. Cet appareil a _t_ con_u pour fonctionner avec une antenne d'un gain maximum de 6 dBi. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser des antennes ayant un gain sup_rieur 6 dBi avec cet appareil. L'antenne doit avoir une imp_dance de 50 ohms. Afin de r_duire le risque d'interf_rence aux autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent _tre choisis de fa_on ce que la puissance isotrope rayonn_e _quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas sup_rieure au niveau requis pour obtenir une communication satisfaisante. 23 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 24 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein Access Point Models:

AIR-CAP3702P-E-K9 Module Models:

(Not applicable) 24 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 25 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC & Medical Directive 93/42/EEC 25 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 26 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM The following standards were applied:

EMCEN 301.489-1 v1.8.1; EN 301.489-17 v2.1.1 Health & SafetyEN60950-1: 2005; EN 50385: 2002 RadioEN 300 328 v 1.7.1; EN 301.893 v 1.5.1 The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10.4 and Annex III of Directive 1999/5/EC has been followed. 26 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 27 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM This device also conforms to the EMC requirements of the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC. Note This equipment is intended to be used in all EU and EFTA countries. Outdoor use may be restricted to certain frequencies and/or may require a license for operation. For more details, contact Cisco Corporate Compliance. The product carries the CE Mark:

Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure This section contains information on compliance with guidelines related to RF exposure. Generic Discussion on RF Exposure The Cisco products are designed to comply with the following national and international standards on Human Exposure to Radio Frequencies:

US 47 Code of Federal Regulations Part 2 Subpart J

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers /

IEEE C 95.1 (99) International Commission on Non Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 98

Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits on Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in the range from 3kHz to 300 GHz

Australia Radiation Protection Standard To ensure compliance with various national and international Electromagnetic Field (EMF) standards, the system should only be operated with Cisco approved antennas and accessories. Note The minimum separation distance from the antenna to a general bystander is 7.9 inches

(20 cm) to maintain compliance. Installations utilizing antennas with gain greater than 10 dBi will assure a separation distance of at least 9 inches (23 cm). 27 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 28 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM This Device Meets International Guidelines for Exposure to Radio Waves The 3702P device includes a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves (radio frequency electromagnetic fields) recommended by international guidelines. The guidelines were developed by an independent scientific organization (ICNIRP) and include a substantial safety margin designed to ensure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. As such the systems are designed to be operated as to avoid contact with the antennas by the end user. It is recommended to set the system in a location where the antennas can remain at least a minimum distance as specified from the user in accordance to the regulatory guidelines which are designed to reduce the overall exposure of the user or operator. Separation Distance MPE 0.63 mW/cm2 Distance 20 cm (7.9 inches) Limit 1.00 mW/cm2 Note The minimum separation distance from the antenna to a general bystander is 7.9 inches

(20 cm) to maintain compliance. Installations utilizing antennas with gain greater than 10 dBi will assure a separation distance of at least 9 inches (23 cm). The World Health Organization has stated that present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of wireless devices. They recommend that if you are interested in further reducing your exposure then you can easily do so by reorienting antennas away from the user or placing he antennas at a greater separation distance then recommended. This Device Meets FCC Guidelines for Exposure to Radio Waves The 3702P device includes a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves (radio frequency electromagnetic fields) as referenced in FCC Part 1.1310. The guidelines are based on IEEE ANSI C 95.1 (92) and include a substantial safety margin designed to ensure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. As such the systems are designed to be operated as to avoid contact with the antennas by the end user. It is recommended to set the system in a location where the antennas can remain at least a minimum distance as specified from the user in accordance to the regulatory guidelines which are designed to reduce the overall exposure of the user or operator. The device has been tested and found compliant with the applicable regulations as part of the radio certification process. 28 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 29 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Separation Distance MPE 0.63 mW/cm2 Distance 20 cm (7.87 inches) Limit 1.00 mW/cm2 Note The minimum separation distance from the antenna to a general bystander is 7.9 inches

(20 cm) to maintain compliance. Installations utilizing antennas with gain greater than 10 dBi will assure a separation distance of at least 9 inches (23 cm). The US Food and Drug Administration has stated that present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of wireless devices. The FCC recommends that if you are interested in further reducing your exposure then you can easily do so by reorienting antennas away from the user or placing the antennas at a greater separation distance then recommended or lowering the transmitter power output. This Device Meets the Industry Canada Guidelines for Exposure to Radio Waves The 3702P device includes a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves (radio frequency electromagnetic fields) as referenced in Health Canada Safety Code 6. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed into the limit to ensure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. As such the systems are designed to be operated as to avoid contact with the antennas by the end user. It is recommended to set the system in a location where the antennas can remain at least a minimum distance as specified from the user in accordance to the regulatory guidelines which are designed to reduce the overall exposure of the user or operator. Separation Distance MPE 0.63 mW/cm2 Distance 20 cm (7.87 inches) Limit 1.00 mW/cm2 Note The minimum separation distance from the antenna to a general bystander is 7.9 inches

(20 cm) to maintain compliance. Installations utilizing antennas with gain greater than 10 dBi will assure a separation distance of at least 9 inches (23 cm). 29 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 30 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Health Canada states that present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of wireless devices. They recommend that if you are interested in further reducing your exposure you can easily do so by reorienting antennas away from the user, placing the antennas at a greater separation distance than recommended, or lowering the transmitter power output. Additional Information on RF Exposure You can find additional information on the subject at the following links:

Cisco Systems Spread Spectrum Radios and RF Safety white paper at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/cc/pd/witc/ao340ap/prodlit/rfhr_wi.htm

FCC Bulletin 56: Questions and Answers about Biological Effects and Potential Hazards of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields

FCC Bulletin 65: Evaluating Compliance with the FCC guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields

FCC Bulletin 65C (01-01): Evaluating Compliance with the FCC guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields: Additional Information for Evaluating Compliance for Mobile and Portable Devices with FCC limits for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Emission You can obtain additional information from the following organizations:

World Health Organization Internal Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection at this URL: www.who.int/emf

United Kingdom, National Radiological Protection Board at this URL: www.nrpb.org.uk

Cellular Telecommunications Association at this URL: www.wow-com.com

The Mobile Manufacturers Forum at this URL: www.mmfai.org Administrative Rules for Cisco Aironet Access Points in Taiwan This section provides administrative rules for operating Cisco Aironet access points in Taiwan. The rules for all access points are provided in both Chinese and English. 30 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 31 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Chinese Translation 31 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 32 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM English Translation Administrative Rules for Low-power Radio-Frequency Devices Article 12 For those low-power radio-frequency devices that have already received a type-approval, companies, business units or users should not change its frequencies, increase its power or change its original features and functions. Article 14 The operation of the low-power radio-frequency devices is subject to the conditions that no harmful interference is caused to aviation safety and authorized radio station; and if interference is caused, the user must stop operating the device immediately and can't re-operate it until the harmful interference is clear. The authorized radio station means a radio-communication service operating in accordance with the Communication Act. The operation of the low-power radio-frequency devices is subject to the interference caused by the operation of an authorized radio station, by another intentional or unintentional radiator, by industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) equipment, or by an incidental radiator. Chinese Translation 32 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 33 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM English Translation Low-power Radio-frequency Devices Technical Specifications 4.7 Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.7.7 Within the 5.25-5.35 GHz band, U-NII devices will be restricted to indoor operations to reduce any potential for harmful interference to co-channel MSS operations. The U-NII devices shall accept any interference from legal communications and shall not interfere the legal communications. If interference is caused, the user must stop operating the device immediately and can't re-operate it until the harmful interference is clear. Manufacturers of U-NII devices are responsible for ensuring frequency stability such that an emission is maintained within the band of operation under all conditions of normal operation as specified in the user manual. Operation of Cisco Aironet Access Points in Brazil This section contains special information for operation of Cisco Aironet access points in Brazil. Access Point Models:

AIR-CAP3702P-T-K9 Module Models:

(Not applicable) Portuguese Translation Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. English Translation This equipment operates on a secondary basis and consequently must accept harmful interference, including interference from stations of the same kind. This equipment may not cause harmful interference to systems operating on a primary basis. 33 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 34 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Declaration of Conformity Statements All the Declaration of Conformity statements related to this product can be found at the following location: http://www.ciscofax.com 11 Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 This section contains a DHCP Option 43 configuration example on a Windows 2003 Enterprise DHCP server for use with Cisco Aironet lightweight access points. For other DHCP server implementations, consult product documentation for configuring DHCP Option 43. In Option 43, you should use the IP address of the controller management interface. Note DHCP Option 43 is limited to one access point type per DHCP pool. You must configure a separate DHCP pool for each access point type. The 3702P access point uses the type-length-value (TLV) format for DHCP Option 43. DHCP servers must be programmed to return the option based on the access points DHCP Vendor Class Identifier

(VCI) string (DHCP Option 60). The VCI string for the 3702P access point is:

Cisco AP c3700 Note If your access point was ordered with the Service Provider Option (AIR-OPT60-DHCP) selected in the ordering tool, the VCI string for the access point contains ServiceProvider. For example, a 3702P with this option will return this VCI string:

Cisco AP c3700-ServiceProvider The format of the TLV block is listed below:

Type: 0xf1 (decimal 241)

Length: Number of controller IP addresses * 4

Value: List of WLC management interfaces To configure DHCP Option 43 in the embedded Cisco IOS DHCP server, follow these steps:

Enter configuration mode at the Cisco IOS CLI. Step 1 Step 2 Create the DHCP pool, including the necessary parameters such as default router and name server. A DHCP scope example is as follows:

ip dhcp pool <pool name>

network <IP Network> <Netmask>

default-router <Default router>

ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 35 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM dns-server <DNS Server>

Where:

<pool name> is the name of the DHCP pool, such as AP3702

<IP Network> is the network IP address where the controller resides, such as 10.0.15.1

<Netmask> is the subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0

<Default router> is the IP address of the default router, such as 10.0.0.1

<DNS Server> is the IP address of the DNS server, such as 10.0.10.2 Step 3 Add the option 60 line using the following syntax:

option 60 ascii VCI string For the VCI string, Cisco AP c3700. The quotation marks must be included. Step 4 Add the option 43 line using the following syntax:

option 43 hex <hex string>

The hex string is assembled by concatenating the TLV values shown below:

Type + Length + Value Type is always f1(hex). Length is the number of controller management IP addresses times 4 in hex. Value is the IP address of the controller listed sequentially in hex. For example, suppose that there are two controllers with management interface IP addresses, 10.126.126.2 and 10.127.127.2. The type is f1(hex). The length is 2 * 4 = 8 = 08 (hex). The IP addresses translate to 0a7e7e02 and 0a7f7f02. Assembling the string then yields f1080a7e7e020a7f7f02. The resulting Cisco IOS command added to the DHCP scope is option 43 hex f1080a7e7e020a7f7f02. 12 Access Point Specifications Table 2 lists the technical specifications for 3702P access points. Table 2 Access Point Specifications Category Dimensions (LxWxD) Weight Operating temperatures AP3702P: -4 to 131 degrees F (-20 to 55 degrees C) Specification 8.68 x 8.68 x 1.84 in. (22.04 x 22.04 x 4.67 cm) 1.9 lbs (0.86 kg) 35 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 36 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Table 2 Access Point Specifications (continued) Category Storage temperature Humidity Antennas Compliance Safety EMI and Susceptibility Radio Maximum power and channel settings Specification 22 to 185 degrees F (30 to 85 degrees C) 10% to 90% (noncondensing) AP3702P: External The 3702P access point complies with UL 2043 for products installed in a buildings environmental air handling spaces, such as above suspended ceilings. UL 60950-1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1 IEC 60950-1 with all national deviations EN 60950-1 UL 2043 FCC Part 15.107 and 15.109 Class B ICES-003 Class B (Canada) EN 301.489 EN 55022 Class B EN 55024 VCCI Class B FCC Part 15.247, 15.407 Canada RSS-210 Japan Telec 33, 66, T71 EN 330.328, EN 301.893 FCC Bulletin OET-65C Industry Canada RSS-102 Maximum power and the channels allowed in your regulatory domain, refer to Channels and Maximum Power Settings for Cisco Aironet Lightweight Access Points. This document is available on Cisco.com. 36 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 37 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM 37 ap3702pgetstart.fm Page 38 Monday, September 9, 2013 8:58 AM Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. San Jose, CA Asia Pacific Headquarters Cisco Systems (USA) Pte. Ltd. Singapore Europe Headquarters Cisco Systems International BV Amsterdam, The Netherlands Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco Website at www.cisco.com/go/offices. Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R) 2013 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA on recycled paper containing 10% postconsumer waste.

 

 

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 First Published: January 08, 2013 Last Modified: March 26, 2013 Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000 800 553-NETS (6387) Fax: 408 527-0883 Text Part Number: OL-28744-01 THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS. THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY. The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB's public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright 1981, Regents of the University of California. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED AS IS" WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE. IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers. Any examples, command display output, network topology diagrams, and other figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental. Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: http://

www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R) 2013 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. C O N T E N T S P r e f a c e Preface xlvii Audience xlvii Conventions xlvii Related Documentation xlviii Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request xlix P A R T I System Management 1 C H A P T E R 1 Overview 3 Cisco Wireless Overview 3 Single-Controller Deployments 4 Multiple-Controller Deployments 5 Operating System Software 6 Operating System Security 6 Layer 2 and Layer 3 Operation 7 Operational Requirements 7 Configuration Requirements 7 Cisco Wireless LAN Controllers 8 Client Location 8 Controller Platforms 8 Cisco 2500 Series Controllers 8 Cisco 5500 Series Controller 9 Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controllers 9 Cisco 8500 Series Controllers 9 Cisco Virtual Wireless LAN Controllers 10 Cisco Wireless Services Module 2 10 Cisco Wireless Controller on Cisco Services-Ready Engine (SRE) 10 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 iii Contents Cisco UWN Solution WLANs 11 File Transfers 11 Power over Ethernet 11 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Memory 12 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Failover Protection 12 C H A P T E R 2 Getting Started 15 Configuring the Controller Using the Configuration Wizard 15 Connecting the Console Port of the Controller 16 Configuring the Controller (GUI) 16 Configuring the ControllerUsing the CLI Configuration Wizard 27 Using the Controller Web GUI 29 Guidelines and Limitations 30 Logging On to the Web GUI 30 Logging out of the GUI 31 Enabling Web and Secure Web Modes 31 Enabling Web and Secure Web Modes (GUI) 31 Enabling Web and Secure Web Modes (CLI) 32 Loading an Externally Generated SSL Certificate 33 Information About Externally Generated SSL Certificates 33 Loading an SSL Certificate (GUI) 34 Loading an SSL Certificate (CLI) 35 Using the Controller CLI 36 Logging on to the Controller CLI 36 Guidelines and Limitations 36 Using a Local Serial Connection 37 Using a Remote Ethernet Connection 37 Logging Out of the CLI 38 Navigating the CLI 38 Using the AutoInstall Feature for Controllers Without a Configuration 39 Information About the AutoInstall Feature 39 Guidelines and Limitations 40 Obtaining an IP Address Through DHCP and Downloading a Configuration File from a TFTP Server 40 Selecting a Configuration File 41 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 iv OL-28744-01 Contents Example: AutoInstall Operation 42 Managing the Controller System Date and Time 43 Information About Controller System Date and Time 43 Guidelines and Limitations 43 Configuring an NTP Server to Obtain the Date and Time 43 Configuring NTP Authentication (GUI) 44 Configuring NTP Authentication (CLI) 44 Configuring the Date and Time (GUI) 45 Configuring the Date and Time (CLI) 46 Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions 48 Information About Telnet and SSH 48 Restrictions for Telnet and SSH 48 Configuring Telnet and SSH Sessions (GUI) 48 Configuring Telnet and SSH Sessions (CLI) 49 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH_old 51 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH (GUI) 51 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH (CLI) 51 Managing the Controller Wirelessly 52 Enabling Wireless Connections (GUI) 52 Enabling Wireless Connections (CLI) 53 C H A P T E R 3 Managing Licenses 55 Installing and Configuring Licenses 55 Information About Installing and Configuring Licenses 55 Restrictions for Using Licenses 56 Obtaining an Upgrade or Capacity Adder License 56 Information About Obtaining an Upgrade or Capacity Adder License 56 Obtaining and Registering a PAK Certificate 57 Installing a License 58 Installing a License (GUI) 58 Installing a License (CLI) 59 Viewing Licenses 59 Viewing Licenses (GUI) 59 Viewing Licenses (CLI) 60 Troubleshooting Licensing Issues 63 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 v Contents Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License 63 Information About Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License 63 Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License (GUI) 63 Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License (CLI) 64 Configuring Right to Use Licensing 65 Information About Right to Use Licensing 65 Configuring Right to Use Licensing (GUI) 66 Configuring Right to Use Licensing (CLI) 66 Rehosting Licenses 67 Information About Rehosting Licenses 67 Rehosting a License 68 Rehosting a License (GUI) 68 Rehosting a License (CLI) 69 Transferring Licenses to a Replacement Controller after an RMA 70 Information About Transferring Licenses to a Replacement Controller after an RMA 70 Transferring a License to a Replacement Controller after an RMA 71 Configuring the License Agent 71 Information About Configuring the License Agent 71 Configuring the License Agent (GUI) 72 Configuring the License Agent (CLI) 72 C H A P T E R 4 Configuring 802.11 Bands 75 Configuring 802.11 Bands 75 Information About Configuring 802.11 Bands 75 Configuring the 802.11 Bands (GUI) 75 Configuring the 802.11 Bands (CLI) 76 Configuring Band Selection 78 Information About Configuring Band Selection 78 Restrictions on Band Selection 79 Configuring Band Selection 80 Configuring Band Selection (GUI) 80 Configuring Band Selection (CLI) 80 C H A P T E R 5 Configuring 802.11 Parameters 83 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 vi OL-28744-01 Contents Configuring the 802.11n Parameters 83 Information About Configuring the 802.11n Parameters 83 Configuring the 802.11n Parameters (GUI) 83 Configuring the 802.11n Parameters (CLI) 84 Configuring 802.11h Parameters 86 Information About Configuring 802.11h Parameters 86 Configuring the 802.11h Parameters (GUI) 86 Configuring the 802.11h Parameters (CLI) 87 C H A P T E R 6 Configuring DHCP Proxy 89 Information About Configuring DHCP Proxy 89 Restrictions on Using DHCP Proxy 89 Configuring DHCP Proxy (GUI) 90 Configuring DHCP Proxy (GUI) 90 Configuring DHCP Proxy (CLI) 90 Configuring DHCP Proxy (CLI) 91 Configuring a DHCP Timeout (GUI) 91 Configuring a DHCP Timeout (CLI) 91 C H A P T E R 7 Configuring SNMP 93 Configuring SNMP (CLI) 93 SNMP Community Strings 95 Changing the SNMP Community String Default Values (GUI) 95 Changing the SNMP Community String Default Values (CLI) 95 Configuring Real Time Statistics (CLI) 96 SNMP Trap Enhancements 96 C H A P T E R 8 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing 97 Information About Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing 97 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (GUI) 98 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (CLI) 98 C H A P T E R 9 Configuring Fast SSID Changing 101 Information About Configuring Fast SSID Changing 101 Configuring Fast SSID Changing (GUI) 101 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 vii Contents Configuring Fast SSID Changing (CLI) 101 C H A P T E R 1 0 Configuring 802.3 Bridging 103 Configuring 802.3 Bridging 103 Information About Configuring 802.3 Bridging 103 Restrictions on 802.3 Bridging 103 Configuring 802.3 Bridging 104 Configuring 802.3 Bridging (GUI) 104 Configuring 802.3 Bridging (CLI) 104 Enabling 802.3X Flow Control 104 C H A P T E R 1 1 Configuring Multicast 105 Configuring Multicast Mode 105 Information About Multicast Mode 105 Restrictions for Configuring Multicast Mode 107 Enabling Multicast Mode (GUI) 108 Enabling Multicast Mode (CLI) 108 Viewing Multicast Groups (GUI) 109 Viewing Multicast Groups (CLI) 110 Viewing an Access Points Multicast Client Table (CLI) 110 Configuring Multicast Domain Name System 111 Information About Multicast Domain Name System 111 Restrictions for Configuring Multicast DNS 111 Configuring Multicast DNS (GUI) 111 Configuring Multicast DNS (CLI) 113 C H A P T E R 1 2 Configuring Client Roaming 115 Information About Client Roaming 115 Inter-Controller Roaming 115 Intra-Controller Roaming 115 Inter-Subnet Roaming 116 Voice-over-IP Telephone Roaming 116 CCX Layer 2 Client Roaming 116 Guidelines and Limitations 117 Configuring CCX Client Roaming Parameters (GUI) 117 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 viii OL-28744-01 Contents Configuring CCX Client Roaming Parameters (CLI) 118 Obtaining CCX Client Roaming Information (CLI) 118 Debugging CCX Client Roaming Issues (CLI) 119 C H A P T E R 1 3 Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding 121 Information About Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding 121 Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding (CLI) 121 C H A P T E R 1 4 Configuring Quality of Service 123 Configuring Quality of Service 123 Information About Quality of Service 123 Configuring Quality of Service Profiles 124 Configuring QoS Profiles (GUI) 124 Configuring QoS Profiles (CLI) 125 Configuring Quality of Service Roles 126 Information About Quality of Service Roles 126 Configuring QoS Roles 127 Configuring QoS (GUI) 127 Configuring QoS Roles (CLI) 128 C H A P T E R 1 5 Configuring Application Visibility and Control 131 Information About Application Visibility and Control 131 Restrictions for Application Visibility and Control 131 Configuring Application Visibility and Control (GUI) 132 Configuring Application Visibility and Control (CLI) 133 Configuring NetFlow 134 Information About NetFlow 134 Configuring NetFlow (GUI) 134 Configuring NetFlow (CLI) 134 C H A P T E R 1 6 Configuring Media and EDCA Parameters 137 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters 137 Information About Configuring Voice and Video Parameters 137 Call Admission Control 137 Bandwidth-Based CAC 138 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 ix Contents Load-Based CAC 138 Expedited Bandwidth Requests 138 U-APSD 139 Traffic Stream Metrics 139 Configuring Voice Parameters 140 Configuring Voice Parameters (GUI) 140 Configuring Voice Parameters (CLI) 142 Configuring Video Parameters 143 Configuring Video Parameters (GUI) 143 Configuring Video Parameters (CLI) 144 Viewing Voice and Video Settings 145 Viewing Voice and Video Settings (GUI) 145 Viewing Voice and Video Settings (CLI) 146 Configuring SIP-Based CAC 149 Restrictions for SIP-Based CAC 149 Configuring SIP-Based CAC (GUI) 149 Configuring SIP-Based CAC (CLI) 150 Configuring Media Parameters 151 Configuring Media Parameters (GUI) 151 Configuring Voice Prioritization Using Preferred Call Numbers 151 Information About Configuring Voice Prioritization Using Preferred Call Numbers 151 Prerequisites for Configuring Voice Prioritization Using Preferred Call Numbers 152 Configuring a Preferred Call Number (GUI) 152 Configuring a Preferred Call Number (CLI) 152 Configuring EDCA Parameters 153 Information About EDCA Parameters 153 Configuring EDCA Parameters (GUI) 153 Configuring EDCA Parameters (CLI) 154 C H A P T E R 1 7 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol 157 Information About Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol 157 Restrictions for Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol 157 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol 159 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol (GUI) 159 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CLI) 160 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 x OL-28744-01 Contents Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information 161 Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information (GUI) 161 Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information (CLI) 163 Getting CDP Debug Information 163 C H A P T E R 1 8 Configuring Authentication for the Controller and NTP Server 165 Information About Configuring Authentication for the Controller and NTP Server 165 Configuring the NTP Server for Authentication (GUI) 165 Configuring the NTP Server for Authentication (CLI) 166 C H A P T E R 1 9 Configuring RFID Tag Tracking 167 Information About Configuring RFID Tag Tracking 167 Configuring RFID Tag Tracking (CLI) 168 Viewing RFID Tag Tracking Information (CLI) 169 Debugging RFID Tag Tracking Issues (CLI) 169 C H A P T E R 2 0 Resetting the Controller to Default Settings 171 Information About Resetting the Controller to Default Settings 171 Resetting the Controller to Default Settings (GUI) 171 Resetting the Controller to Default Settings (CLI) 172 C H A P T E R 2 1 Managing Controller Software and Configurations 173 Upgrading the Controller Software 173 Restrictions for Upgrading Controller Software 173 Upgrading Controller Software (GUI) 176 Upgrading Controller Software (CLI) 178 Predownloading an Image to an Access Point 180 Access Point Predownload Process 180 Restrictions for Predownloading an Image to an Access Point 181 Predownloading an Image to Access PointsGlobal Configuration (GUI) 182 Configuring Predownload Image to an Access Point (GUI) 183 Predownloading an Image to Access Points (CLI) 185 Transferring Files to and from a Controller 187 Downloading a Login Banner File 187 Downloading a Login Banner File (GUI) 188 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xi Contents Downloading a Login Banner File (CLI) 189 Clearing the Login Banner (GUI) 190 Downloading Device Certificates 190 Downloading Device Certificates (GUI) 191 Downloading Device Certificates (CLI) 192 Downloading CA Certificates 193 Download CA Certificates (GUI) 193 Downloading CA Certificates (CLI) 194 Uploading PACs 195 Uploading PACs (GUI) 195 Uploading PACs (CLI) 196 Uploading and Downloading Configuration Files 197 Uploading Configuration Files 197 Uploading the Configuration Files (GUI) 198 Uploading the Configuration Files (CLI) 198 Downloading Configuration Files 199 Downloading the Configuration Files (GUI) 199 Downloading the Configuration Files (CLI) 200 Saving Configurations 202 Editing Configuration Files 202 Clearing the Controller Configuration 203 Erasing the Controller Configuration 203 Resetting the Controller 204 C H A P T E R 2 2 Managing User Accounts 205 Configuring Guest User Accounts 205 Information About Creating Guest Accounts 205 Restrictions for Managing User Accounts 205 Creating a Lobby Ambassador Account 205 Creating a Lobby Ambassador Account (GUI) 205 Creating a Lobby Ambassador Account (CLI) 206 Creating Guest User Accounts as a Lobby Ambassador (GUI) 207 Viewing Guest User Accounts 208 Viewing the Guest Accounts (GUI) 208 Viewing the Guest Accounts (CLI) 208 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xii OL-28744-01 Contents Configuring Administrator Usernames and Passwords 208 Information About Configuring Administrator Usernames and Passwords 208 Configuring Usernames and Passwords (GUI) 208 Configuring Usernames and Passwords (CLI) 209 Restoring Passwords 209 Changing the Default Values for SNMP v3 Users 210 Information About Changing the Default Values for SNMP v3 Users 210 Changing the SNMP v3 User Default Values (GUI) 210 Changing the SNMP v3 User Default Values (CLI) 211 C H A P T E R 2 3 Managing Web Authentication 213 Obtaining a Web Authentication Certificate 213 Information About Web Authentication Certificates 213 Obtaining a Web Authentication Certificate (GUI) 213 Obtaining a Web Authentication Certificate (CLI) 214 Web Authentication Process 215 Disabling Security Alert for Web Authentication Process 216 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page 218 Information About Default Web Authentication Login Page 218 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page (GUI) 219 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page (CLI) 219 Example: Creating a Customized Web Authentication Login Page 221 Example: Modified Default Web Authentication Login Page Example 224 Using a Customized Web Authentication Login Page from an External Web Server 224 Information About Customized Web Authentication Login Page 224 Choosing a Customized Web Authentication Login Page from an External Web Server

(GUI) 225 Choosing a Customized Web Authentication Login Page from an External Web Server

(CLI) 225 Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page 225 Prerequisites for Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page 226 Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page (GUI) 226 Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page (CLI) 227 Example: Customized Web Authentication Login Page 228 Verifying the Web Authentication Login Page Settings (CLI) 228 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xiii Contents Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN 229 Information About Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN 229 Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN (GUI) 229 Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN (CLI) 230 C H A P T E R 2 4 Configuring Wired Guest Access 233 Information About Wired Guest Access 233 Prerequisites for Configuring Wired Guest Access 234 Restrictions for Configuring Wired Guest Access 234 Configuring Wired Guest Access (GUI) 235 Configuring Wired Guest Access (CLI) 236 Supporting IPv6 Client Guest Access 238 C H A P T E R 2 5 Troubleshooting 241 Interpreting LEDs 241 Information About Interpreting LEDs 241 Interpreting Controller LEDs 242 Interpreting Lightweight Access Point LEDs 242 System Messages 242 Information About System Messages 242 Viewing System Resources 245 Information About Viewing System Resources 245 Viewing System Resources (GUI) 246 Viewing System Resources (CLI) 246 Using the CLI to Troubleshoot Problems 246 Configuring System and Message Logging 247 Information About System and Message Logging 247 Configuring System and Message Logging (GUI) 248 Viewing Message Logs (GUI) 250 Configuring System and Message Logging (CLI) 251 Viewing System and Message Logs (CLI) 254 Viewing Access Point Event Logs 254 Information About Access Point Event Logs 254 Viewing Access Point Event Logs (CLI) 254 Uploading Logs and Crash Files 255 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xiv OL-28744-01 Contents Prerequisites to Upload Logs and Crash Files 255 Uploading Logs and Crash Files (GUI) 255 Uploading Logs and Crash Files (CLI) 256 Uploading Core Dumps from the Controller 257 Information About Uploading Core Dumps from the Controller 257 Configuring the Controller to Automatically Upload Core Dumps to an FTP Server

(GUI) 258 Configuring the Controller to Automatically Upload Core Dumps to an FTP Server

(CLI) 258 Uploading Core Dumps from Controller to a Server (CLI) 259 Uploading Packet Capture Files 260 Information About Uploading Packet Capture Files 260 Restrictions for Uploading Packet Capture Files 261 Uploading Packet Capture Files (GUI) 262 Uploading Packet Capture Files (CLI) 262 Monitoring Memory Leaks 263 Monitoring Memory Leaks (CLI) 263 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices 264 Information About Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices 264 Restrictions for CCXv5 Client Devices 264 Configuring Diagnostic Channel 265 Configuring the Diagnostic Channel (GUI) 265 Configuring the Diagnostic Channel (CLI) 266 Configuring Client Reporting 270 Configuring Client Reporting (GUI) 270 Configuring Client Reporting (CLI) 270 Configuring Roaming and Real-Time Diagnostics 271 Configuring Roaming and Real-Time Diagnostics (CLI) 271 Using the Debug Facility 274 Information About Using the Debug Facility 274 Configuring the Debug Facility (CLI) 275 Configuring Wireless Sniffing 279 Information About Wireless Sniffing 279 Prerequisites for Wireless Sniffing 279 Restrictions for Wireless Sniffing 279 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xv Contents Configuring Sniffing on an Access Point (GUI) 280 Configuring Sniffing on an Access Point (CLI) 280 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH_old 281 Information About Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH 281 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH (GUI) 282 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH (CLI) 282 Debugging the Access Point Monitor Service 283 Information About Debugging the Access Point Monitor Service 283 Debugging Access Point Monitor Service Issues (CLI) 283 Troubleshooting OfficeExtend Access Points 284 Information About Troubleshooting OfficeExtend Access Points 284 Interpreting OfficeExtend LEDs 284 Positioning OfficeExtend Access Points for Optimal RF Coverage 284 Troubleshooting Common Problems 284 P A R T I I Configuring Ports and Interfaces 287 C H A P T E R 2 6 Overview of Ports and Interfaces 289 Information About Ports 289 Information About Distribution System Ports 290 Restrictions for Configuring Distribution System Ports 290 Information About Service Port 291 Information About Interfaces 291 Restrictions for Configuring Interfaces 292 Information About Dynamic AP Management 292 Information About WLANs 293 C H A P T E R 2 7 Configuring the Management Interface 295 Information About the Management Interface 295 Configuring the Management Interface (GUI) 296 Configuring the Management Interface (CLI) 297 C H A P T E R 2 8 Configuring the AP-Manager Interface 299 Information the About AP-Manager Interface 299 Restrictions for Configuring AP Manager Interfaces 299 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xvi OL-28744-01 Contents Configuring the AP-Manager Interface (GUI) 300 Configuring the AP Manager Interface (CLI) 300 Configuration Example: Configuring AP-Manager on a Cisco 5500 Series Controller 301 C H A P T E R 2 9 Configuring Virtual Interfaces 305 Information About the Virtual Interface 305 Configuring Virtual Interfaces (GUI) 306 Configuring Virtual Interfaces (CLI) 306 C H A P T E R 3 0 Configuring Service-Port Interfaces 307 Information About Service-Port Interfaces 307 Restrictions for Configuring Service-Port Interfaces 307 Configuring Service-Port Interfaces (GUI) 307 Configuring Service-Port Interfaces (CLI) 308 C H A P T E R 3 1 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces 309 Information About Dynamic Interface 309 Pre - requisites for Configuring Dynamic Interfaces 310 Restrictions for Configuring Dynamic Interfaces 310 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (GUI) 310 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (CLI) 312 C H A P T E R 3 2 Configuring Ports 315 Configuring Ports (GUI) 315 C H A P T E R 3 3 Information About Using Cisco 5500 Series Controller USB Console Port 317 USB Console OS Compatibility 317 Changing the Cisco USB Systems Management Console COM Port to an Unused Port 318 C H A P T E R 3 4 Configuring Link Aggregation 319 Information About Link Aggregation 319 Restrictions for Link Aggregation 319 Enabling Link Aggregation (GUI) 321 Enabling Link Aggregation (CLI) 321 Verifying Link Aggregation Settings (CLI) 322 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xvii Contents Configuring Neighbor Devices to Support Link Aggregation 322 Choosing Between Link Aggregation and Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces 322 C H A P T E R 3 5 Configuring Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces 323 Information About Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces 323 Restrictions for Configuring Multiple AP Manager Interfaces 323 Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (GUI) 324 Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (CLI) 324 C H A P T E R 3 6 Configuring VLAN Select 327 Information About VLAN Select 327 Restrictions for Configuring VLAN Select 328 Configuring Interface Groups 328 Information About Interface Groups 328 Restrictions for Configuring Interface Groups 328 Creating Interface Groups (GUI) 328 Creating Interface Groups (CLI) 329 Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (GUI) 329 Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (CLI) 329 Viewing VLANs in Interface Groups (CLI) 330 Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (GUI) 330 Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (CLI) 330 C H A P T E R 3 7 Configuring Interface Groups 331 Information About Interface Groups 331 Restrictions for Configuring Interface Groups 332 Creating Interface Groups (GUI) 332 Creating Interface Groups (CLI) 332 Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (GUI) 333 Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (CLI) 333 Viewing VLANs in Interface Groups (CLI) 333 Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (GUI) 333 Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (CLI) 334 C H A P T E R 3 8 Configuring Multicast Optimization 335 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xviii OL-28744-01 Contents Information About Multicast Optimization 335 Configuring a Multicast VLAN (GUI) 335 Configuring a Multicast VLAN (CLI) 336 P A R T I I I Configuring VideoStream 337 C H A P T E R 3 9 Configuring VideoStream 339 Information about VideoStream 339 Prerequisites for VideoStream 339 Restrictions for Configuring VideoStream 339 Configuring VideoStream (GUI) 340 Configuring VideoStream (CLI) 343 Viewing and Debugging Media Streams 344 P A R T I V Configuring Security Solutions 347 C H A P T E R 4 0 Cisco Unified Wireless Network Solution Security 349 Security Overview 349 Layer 1 Solutions 349 Layer 2 Solutions 349 Restrictions for Layer 2 Solutions 350 Layer 3 Solutions 350 Integrated Security Solutions 350 C H A P T E R 4 1 Configuring RADIUS 351 Information About RADIUS 351 Configuring RADIUS on the ACS 353 Configuring RADIUS (GUI) 354 Configuring RADIUS (CLI) 358 RADIUS Authentication Attributes Sent by the Controller 361 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) 364 RADIUS Accounting Attributes 371 C H A P T E R 4 2 Configuring TACACS+ 373 Information About TACACS+ 373 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xix Contents TACACS+ VSA 375 Configuring TACACS+ on the ACS 376 Configuring TACACS+ (GUI) 378 Configuring TACACS+ (CLI) 379 Viewing the TACACS+ Administration Server Logs 380 C H A P T E R 4 3 Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries 383 Information About Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries 383 Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries (GUI) 383 Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries (CLI) 384 C H A P T E R 4 4 Configuring Local Network Users on the Controller 385 Information About Local Network Users on Controller 385 Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (GUI) 385 Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (CLI) 386 C H A P T E R 4 5 Configuring Password Policies 389 Information About Password Policies 389 Configuring Password Policies (GUI) 390 Configuring Password Policies (CLI) 390 C H A P T E R 4 6 Configuring LDAP 393 Information About LDAP 393 Configuring LDAP (GUI) 394 Configuring LDAP (CLI) 396 C H A P T E R 4 7 Configuring Local EAP 399 Information About Local EAP 399 Restrictions for Local EAP 400 Configuring Local EAP (GUI) 401 Configuring Local EAP (CLI) 404 C H A P T E R 4 8 Configuring the System for SpectraLink NetLink Telephones 409 Information About SpectraLink NetLink Telephones 409 Configuring SpectraLink NetLink Phones 409 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xx OL-28744-01 Contents Enabling Long Preambles (GUI) 409 Enabling Long Preambles (CLI) 410 Configuring Enhanced Distributed Channel Access (CLI) 410 C H A P T E R 4 9 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support 413 Information About RADIUS NAC Support 413 Device Registration 414 Central Web Authentication 414 Local Web Authentication 414 Restrictions for RADIUS NAC Support 414 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support (GUI) 415 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support (CLI) 416 C H A P T E R 5 0 Using Management Over Wireless 417 Information About Management over Wireless 417 Enabling Management over Wireless (GUI) 417 Enabling Management over Wireless (CLI) 417 C H A P T E R 5 1 Using Dynamic Interfaces for Management 419 Information About Using Dynamic Interfaces for Management 419 Configuring Management using Dynamic Interfaces (CLI) 420 C H A P T E R 5 2 Configuring DHCP Option 82 421 Information About DHCP Option 82 421 Restrictions for DHCP Option 82 422 Configuring DHCP Option 82 (GUI) 422 Configuring DHCP Option 82 (CLI) 422 C H A P T E R 5 3 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists 425 Information About Access Control Lists 425 Restrictions for Access Control Lists 425 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (GUI) 426 Configuring Access Control Lists 426 Applying an Access Control List to an Interface 428 Applying an Access Control List to the Controller CPU 429 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxi Contents Applying an Access Control List to a WLAN 429 Applying a Preauthentication Access Control List to a WLAN 430 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (CLI) 430 Configuring Access Control Lists 430 Applying Access Control Lists 431 C H A P T E R 5 4 Configuring Management Frame Protection 433 Information About Management Frame Protection 433 Restrictions for Management Frame Protection 435 Configuring Management Frame Protection (GUI) 435 Viewing the Management Frame Protection Settings (GUI) 435 Configuring Management Frame Protection (CLI) 436 Viewing the Management Frame Protection Settings (CLI) 436 Debugging Management Frame Protection Issues (CLI) 436 C H A P T E R 5 5 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies 439 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (GUI) 439 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (CLI) 440 C H A P T E R 5 6 Configuring Identity Networking 443 Information About Identity Networking 443 RADIUS Attributes Used in Identity Networking 444 C H A P T E R 5 7 Configuring AAA Override 449 Information About AAA Override 449 Restrictions for AAA Override 449 Updating the RADIUS Server Dictionary File for Proper QoS Values 450 Configuring AAA Override (GUI) 451 Configuring AAA Override (CLI) 451 C H A P T E R 5 8 Managing Rogue Devices 453 Information About Rogue Devices 453 Configuring Rogue Detection (GUI) 456 Configuring Rogue Detection (CLI) 457 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxii OL-28744-01 Contents C H A P T E R 5 9 Classifying Rogue Access Points 461 Information About Classifying Rogue Access Points 461 Restrictions for Classifying Rogue Access Points 463 Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (GUI) 464 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (GUI) 466 Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (CLI) 469 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (CLI) 471 C H A P T E R 6 0 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP 475 Information About Cisco TrustSec SXP 475 Restrictions for Cisco TrustSec SXP 476 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (GUI) 477 Creating a New SXP Connection (GUI) 477 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (CLI) 478 C H A P T E R 6 1 Configuring Cisco Intrusion Detection System 481 Information About Cisco Intrusion Detection System 481 Shunned Clients 481 Additional Information 482 Configuring IDS Sensors (GUI) 482 Viewing Shunned Clients (GUI) 483 Configuring IDS Sensors (CLI) 483 Viewing Shunned Clients (CLI) 484 C H A P T E R 6 2 Configuring IDS Signatures 487 Information About IDS Signatures 487 Configuring IDS Signatures (GUI) 489 Uploading or Downloading IDS Signatures 489 Enabling or Disabling IDS Signatures 490 Viewing IDS Signature Events (GUI) 492 Configuring IDS Signatures (CLI) 493 Viewing IDS Signature Events (CLI) 494 C H A P T E R 6 3 Configuring wIPS 497 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxiii Contents Information About wIPS 497 Restrictions for wIPS 503 Configuring wIPS on an Access Point (GUI) 503 Configuring wIPS on an Access Point (CLI) 504 Viewing wIPS Information (CLI) 505 C H A P T E R 6 4 Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy 507 Information About the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy 507 Restrictions for the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy 507 Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (GUI) 507 Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (CLI) 508 Monitoring and Troubleshooting the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (CLI) 508 C H A P T E R 6 5 Configuring Web Auth Proxy 509 Information About the Web Authentication Proxy 509 Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (GUI) 510 Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (CLI) 510 C H A P T E R 6 6 Detecting Active Exploits 513 Detecting Active Exploits 513 P A R T V Working with WLANs 515 C H A P T E R 6 7 Overview 517 Information About WLANs 517 Prerequisites for WLANs 517 Restrictions for WLANs 518 C H A P T E R 6 8 Configuring WLANs 521 Prerequisites for WLANs 521 Restrictions for WLANs 522 Information About WLANs 523 Creating and Removing WLANs (GUI) 523 Enabling and Disabling WLANs (GUI) 524 Creating and Deleting WLANs (CLI) 524 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxiv OL-28744-01 Contents Enabling and Disabling WLANs (CLI) 525 Viewing WLANs (CLI) 525 Searching WLANs (GUI) 526 Assigning WLANs to Interfaces 526 Configuring Network Access Identifier (CLI) 526 C H A P T E R 6 9 Setting the Client Count per WLAN 529 Restrictions for Setting Client Count for WLANs 529 Information About Setting the Client Count per WLAN 530 Configuring the Client Count per WLAN (GUI) 530 Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients per WLAN (CLI) 530 Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients for each AP Radio per WLAN (GUI) 531 Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients for each AP Radio per WLAN (CLI) 531 C H A P T E R 7 0 Configuring DHCP 533 Restrictions for Configuring DHCP for WLANs 533 Information About the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 533 Internal DHCP Servers 533 External DHCP Servers 534 DHCP Assignments 534 Configuring DHCP (GUI) 535 Configuring DHCP (CLI) 536 Debugging DHCP (CLI) 536 C H A P T E R 7 1 Configuring DHCP Scopes 537 Restrictions for Configuring DHCP Scopes 537 Information About DHCP Scopes 537 Configuring DHCP Scopes (GUI) 537 Configuring DHCP Scopes (CLI) 538 C H A P T E R 7 2 Configuring MAC Filtering for WLANs 541 Restrictions for MAC Filtering 541 Information About MAC Filtering of WLANs 541 Enabling MAC Filtering 541 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxv Contents C H A P T E R 7 3 Configuring Local MAC Filters 543 Prerequisites for Configuring Local MAC Filters 543 Information About Local MAC Filters 543 Configuring Local MAC Filters (CLI) 543 C H A P T E R 7 4 Configuring Timeouts 545 Configuring a Timeout for Disabled Clients 545 Information About Configuring a Timeout for Disabled Clients 545 Configuring Timeout for Disabled Clients (CLI) 545 Configuring Session Timeout 545 Information About Session Timeouts 545 Configuring a Session Timeout (GUI) 546 Configuring a Session Timeout (CLI) 546 Configuring the User Idle Timeout 547 Information About the User Idle Timeout Per WLAN 547 Configuring Per-WLAN User Idle Timeout (CLI) 547 C H A P T E R 7 5 Configuring the DTIM Period 549 Information About DTIM Period 549 Configuring the DTIM Period (GUI) 550 Configuring the DTIM Period (CLI) 550 C H A P T E R 7 6 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking 551 Restrictions for Peer-to-Peer Blocking 551 Information About Peer-to-Peer Blocking 551 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (GUI) 552 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (CLI) 552 C H A P T E R 7 7 Configuring Layer2 Security 555 Prerequisites for Layer 2 Security 555 Configuring Static WEP Keys (CLI) 556 Configuring Dynamic 802.1X Keys and Authorization (CLI) 556 Configuring 802.11r BSS Fast Transition 557 Restrictions for 802.11r Fast Transition 557 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxvi OL-28744-01 Contents Information About 802.11r Fast Transition 558 Configuring 802.11r Fast Transition (GUI) 560 Configuring 802.11r Fast Transition (CLI) 561 Troubleshooting 802.11r BSS Fast Transition 562 Configuring MAC Authentication Failover to 802.1X Authentication 562 Configuring MAC Authentication Failover to 802.1x Authentication (GUI) 562 Configuring MAC Authentication Failover to 802.1X Authentication (CLI) 562 Configuring 802.11w 563 Restrictions for 802.11w 563 Information About 802.11w 563 Configuring 802.11w (GUI) 564 Configuring 802.11w (CLI) 565 C H A P T E R 7 8 Configuring a WLAN for Both Static and Dynamic WEP 567 Restrictions for Configuring Static and Dynamic WEP 567 Information About WLAN for Both Static and Dynamic WEP 567 WPA1 and WPA2 568 Configuring WPA1 +WPA2 569 Configuring WPA1+WPA2 (GUI) 569 Configuring WPA1+WPA2 (CLI) 569 C H A P T E R 7 9 Configuring Sticky Key Caching 571 Information About Sticky Key Caching 571 Restrictions for Sticky Key Caching 571 Configuring Sticky Key Caching (CLI) 572 C H A P T E R 8 0 Configuring CKIP 575 Information About CKIP 575 Configuring CKIP (GUI) 576 Configuring CKIP (CLI) 576 C H A P T E R 8 1 Configuring Layer 3 Security 579 Configuring Layer 3 Security Using VPN Passthrough 579 Restrictions for Layer 3 Security Using VPN Passthrough 579 Information About VPN Passthrough 579 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxvii Contents Configuring VPN Passthrough 580 Configuring VPN Passthrough (GUI) 580 Configuring VPN Passthrough (CLI) 580 Configuring Layer 3 Security Using Web Authentication 580 Prerequisites for Configuring Web Authentication on a WLAN 580 Restrictions for Configuring Web Authentication on a WLAN 581 Information About Web Authentication 581 Configuring Web Authentication 582 Configuring Web Authentication (GUI) 582 Configuring Web Authentication (CLI) 582 C H A P T E R 8 2 Configuring Captive Bypassing 583 Information About Captive Bypassing 583 Configuring Captive Bypassing (CLI) 584 C H A P T E R 8 3 Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication 585 Information About Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication 585 Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication (GUI) 585 Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication (CLI) 586 C H A P T E R 8 4 Assigning QoS Profiles 587 Information About QoS Profiles 587 Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (GUI) 588 Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (CLI) 589 C H A P T E R 8 5 Configuring QoS Enhanced BSS 591 Prerequisites for Using QoS Enhanced BSS on Cisco 7921 and 7920 Wireless IP Phones 591 Restrictions for QoS Enhanced BSS 592 Information About QoS Enhanced BSS 592 Configuring QBSS (GUI) 593 Configuring QBSS (CLI) 593 C H A P T E R 8 6 Configuring Media Session Snooping and Reporting 595 Restrictions for Media Session Snooping and Reporting 595 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxviii OL-28744-01 Contents Information About Media Session Snooping and Reporting 595 Configuring Media Session Snooping (GUI) 596 Configuring Media Session Snooping (CLI) 596 C H A P T E R 8 7 Configuring Key Telephone System-Based CAC 601 Restrictions for Key Telephone System-Based CAC 601 Information About Key Telephone System-Based CAC 601 Configuring KTS-based CAC (GUI) 602 Configuring KTS-based CAC (CLI) 602 Related Commands 603 C H A P T E R 8 8 Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients 605 Restrictions for Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients 605 Information About Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients 605 Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients (GUI) 606 Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients (CLI) 606 C H A P T E R 8 9 Configuring Seamless IPv6 Mobility 607 Prerequisites for Configuring IPv6 Mobility 607 Restrictions for Configuring IPv6 Mobility 607 Information About IPv6 Mobility 608 Configuring IPv6 Globally 608 Configuring IPv6 Globally (GUI) 608 Configuring IPv6 Globally (CLI) 608 Configuring RA Gaurd for IPv6 Clients 609 Information About RA Guard 609 Configuring RA Guard (GUI) 609 Configuring RA Guard (CLI) 609 Configuring RA Throttling for IPv6 Clients 609 Information about RA Throttling 609 Configuring RA Throttling (GUI) 610 Configuring the RA Throttle Policy (CLI) 610 Configuring IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Caching 611 Information About IPv6 Neighbor Discovery 611 Configuring Neighbor Binding (GUI) 611 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxix Contents Configuring Neighbor Binding (CLI) 611 C H A P T E R 9 0 Configuring Cisco Client Extensions 613 Prerequisites for Configuring Cisco Client Extensions 613 Restrictions for Configuring Cisco Client Extensions 613 Information About Cisco Client Extensions 614 Configuring CCX Aironet IEs (GUI) 614 Viewing a Clients CCX Version (GUI) 614 Configuring CCX Aironet IEs (CLI) 614 Viewing a Clients CCX Version (CLI) 615 C H A P T E R 9 1 Configuring Remote LANs 617 Prerequisites for Configuring Remote LANs 617 Restrictions for Configuring Remote LANs 617 Information About Remote LANs 617 Configuring a Remote LAN (GUI) 618 Configuring a Remote LAN (CLI) 618 C H A P T E R 9 2 Configuring AP Groups 621 Prerequisites for Configuring AP Groups 621 AP Groups Supported on Controller Platforms 621 Restrictions for Configuring Access Point Groups 622 Information About Access Point Groups 622 Configuring Access Point Groups 624 Creating Access Point Groups (GUI) 624 Creating Access Point Groups (CLI) 626 Viewing Access Point Groups (CLI) 626 C H A P T E R 9 3 Configuring RF Profiles 629 Prerequisites for Configuring RF Profiles 629 Restrictions for Configuring RF Profiles 629 Information About RF Profiles 630 Configuring an RF Profile (GUI) 632 Configuring an RF Profile (CLI) 633 Applying an RF Profile to AP Groups (GUI) 634 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxx OL-28744-01 Contents Applying RF Profiles to AP Groups (CLI) 635 C H A P T E R 9 4 Configuring Web Redirect with 8021.X Authentication 637 Information About Web Redirect with 802.1X Authentication 637 Conditional Web Redirect 637 Splash Page Web Redirect 638 Configuring the RADIUS Server (GUI) 638 Configuring Web Redirect 639 Configuring Web Redirect (GUI) 639 Configuring Web Redirect (CLI) 639 Disabling Accounting Servers per WLAN (GUI) 640 Disabling Coverage Hole Detection per WLAN 640 Disabling Coverage Hole Detection on a WLAN (GUI) 641 Disabling Coverage Hole Detection on a WLAN (CLI) 641 C H A P T E R 9 5 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration 643 Prerequisites for NAC Out Of Band 643 Restrictions for NAC Out of Band 644 Information About NAC Out-of-Band Integration 645 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (GUI) 645 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (CLI) 647 C H A P T E R 9 6 Configuring Passive Clients 649 Restrictions for Passive Clients 649 Information About Passive Clients 649 Configuring Passive Clients (GUI) 650 Enabling the Multicast-Multicast Mode (GUI) 650 Enabling the Global Multicast Mode on Controllers (GUI) 651 Enabling the Passive Client Feature on the Controller (GUI) 651 Configuring Passive Clients (CLI) 651 C H A P T E R 9 7 Configuring Client Profiling 653 Prerequisites for Configuring Client Profiling 653 Restrictions for Configuring Client Profiling 653 Information About Client Profiling 654 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxi Contents Configuring Client Profiling (GUI) 654 Configuring Client Profiling (CLI) 654 C H A P T E R 9 8 Configuring Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support 657 Prerequisites for Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support 657 Restrictions for Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support 657 Information About Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support 657 Configuring Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI) 658 Monitoring the Status of Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI) 658 C H A P T E R 9 9 Configuring Mobile Concierge 661 Information About Mobile Concierge 661 Configuring Mobile Concierge (802.11u) 661 Configuring Mobile Concierge (802.11u) (GUI) 661 Configuring Mobile Concierge (802.11u) (CLI) 662 Configuring 802.11u Mobility Services Advertisement Protocol 663 Information About 802.11u MSAP 663 Configuring 802.11u MSAP (GUI) 664 Configuring MSAP (CLI) 664 664 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot 664 Information About 802.11u HotSpot 664 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot (GUI) 664 Configuring HotSpot 2.0 (CLI) 665 665 Configuring Access Points for HotSpot2 (GUI) 666 Configuring Access Points for HotSpot2 (CLI) 667 C H A P T E R 1 0 0 Configuring Assisted Roaming 673 Restrictions for Assisted Roaming 673 Information About Assisted Roaming 673 Configuring Assisted Roaming (CLI) 674 P A R T V I Controlling Lightweight Access Points 677 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxii OL-28744-01 Contents C H A P T E R 1 0 1 Using Access Point Communication Protocols 679 Information About Access Point Communication Protocols 679 Restrictions for Access Point Communication Protocols 680 Configuring Data Encryption 680 Guidelines for Data Encryption 680 Upgrading or Downgrading DTLS Images for Cisco 5500 Series Controllers 681 Guidelines When Upgrading to or from a DTLS Image 681 Configuring Data Encryption (GUI) 682 Configuring Data Encryption (CLI) 682 Viewing CAPWAP Maximum Transmission Unit Information 683 Debugging CAPWAP 683 Controller Discovery Process 684 Restrictions for Controller Discovery Process 685 Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller 685 Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller (GUI) 685 Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller (CLI) 685 C H A P T E R 1 0 2 Searching for Access Points 687 Information About Searching for Access Points 687 Searching the AP Filter (GUI) 687 Monitoring the Interface Details 690 Searching for Access Point Radios 692 Information About Searching for Access Point Radios 692 Searching for Access Point Radios (GUI) 692 C H A P T E R 1 0 3 Searching for Access Point Radios 695 Information About Searching for Access Point Radios 695 Searching for Access Point Radios (GUI) 695 C H A P T E R 1 0 4 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points 697 Information About Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points 697 Restrictions for Global Credentials for Access Points 698 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points (GUI) 698 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points (CLI) 699 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxiii Contents C H A P T E R 1 0 5 Configuring Authentication for Access Points 701 Information About Configuring Authentication for Access Points 701 Prerequisites for Configuring Authentication for Access Points 701 Restrictions for Authenticating Access Points 702 Configuring Authentication for Access Points (GUI) 702 Configuring Authentication for Access Points (CLI) 703 Configuring the Switch for Authentication 704 C H A P T E R 1 0 6 Configuring Embedded Access Points 705 Information About Embedded Access Points 705 C H A P T E R 1 0 7 Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode 707 Information About Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode 707 Restrictions for Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode 708 Reverting from Lightweight Mode to Autonomous Mode 708 Reverting to a Previous Release (CLI) 708 Reverting to a Previous Release Using the MODE Button and a TFTP Server 709 Authorizing Access Points 709 Authorizing Access Points Using SSCs 709 Authorizing Access Points for Virtual Controllers Using SSC 709 Configuring SSC (GUI) 710 Configuring SSC (CLI) 710 Authorizing Access Points Using MICs 710 Authorizing Access Points Using LSCs 711 Configuring Locally Significant Certificates (GUI) 711 Configuring Locally Significant Certificates (CLI) 712 Authorizing Access Points (GUI) 714 Authorizing Access Points (CLI) 714 Configuring VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points 715 Information About VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points 715 Configuring VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points (GUI) 715 Configuring VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points (CLI) 715 Using DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 716 Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process 717 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxiv OL-28744-01 Contents Configuring the Syslog Server for Access Points (CLI) 718 Viewing Access Point Join Information 719 Viewing Access Point Join Information (GUI) 719 Viewing Access Point Join Information (CLI) 720 Sending Debug Commands to Access Points Converted to Lightweight Mode 721 Understanding How Converted Access Points Send Crash Information to the Controller 721 Understanding How Converted Access Points Send Radio Core Dumps to the Controller 721 Retrieving Radio Core Dumps (CLI) 722 Uploading Radio Core Dumps (GUI) 722 Uploading Radio Core Dumps (CLI) 723 Uploading Memory Core Dumps from Converted Access Points 723 Uploading Access Point Core Dumps (GUI) 724 Uploading Access Point Core Dumps (CLI) 724 Viewing the AP Crash Log Information 724 Viewing the AP Crash Log information (GUI) 725 Viewing the AP Crash Log information (CLI) 725 Displaying MAC Addresses for Converted Access Points 725 Disabling the Reset Button on Access Points Converted to Lightweight Mode 725 Configuring a Static IP Address on a Lightweight Access Point 726 Configuring a Static IP Address (GUI) 726 Configuring a Static IP Address (CLI) 726 Supporting Oversized Access Point Images 727 Recovering the Access PointUsing the TFTP Recovery Procedure 728 C H A P T E R 1 0 8 Configuring Packet Capture 729 Information About Packet Capture 729 Restrictions for Packet Capture 730 Configuring Packet Capture (CLI) 730 C H A P T E R 1 0 9 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points 733 Information About OfficeExtend Access Points 733 OEAP 600 Series Access Points 734 OEAP in Local Mode 734 Supported WLAN Settings for 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point 735 WLAN Security Settings for the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point 735 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxv Contents Authentication Settings 739 Supported User Count on 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point 740 Remote LAN Settings 740 Channel Management and Settings 741 Additional Caveats 742 Implementing Security 742 Licensing for an OfficeExtend Access Point 743 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points 743 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points (GUI) 744 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points (CLI) 745 Configuring a Personal SSID on an OfficeExtend Access Point 747 Viewing OfficeExtend Access Point Statistics 749 C H A P T E R 1 1 0 Using Cisco Workgroup Bridges 751 Information About Cisco Workgroup Bridges 751 Restrictions for Cisco Workgroup Bridges 753 WGB Configuration Example 754 Viewing the Status of Workgroup Bridges (GUI) 755 Viewing the Status of Workgroup Bridges (CLI) 755 Debugging WGB Issues (CLI) 756 C H A P T E R 1 1 1 Using Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges 757 Information About Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges 757 Restrictions for Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges 758 C H A P T E R 1 1 2 Configuring Backup Controllers 759 Information About Configuring Backup Controllers 759 Restrictions for Configuring Backup Controllers 760 Configuring Backup Controllers (GUI) 760 Configuring Backup Controllers (CLI) 761 C H A P T E R 1 1 3 Configuring High Availability 765 Information About High Availability 765 Restrictions for High Availability 767 Configuring High Availability (GUI) 769 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxvi OL-28744-01 Contents Configuring High Availability (CLI) 770 C H A P T E R 1 1 4 Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points 773 Information About Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points 773 Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points (GUI) 774 Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points (CLI) 774 Viewing Failover Priority Settings (CLI) 774 C H A P T E R 1 1 5 Configuring AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count 777 Information About Configuring the AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count 777 Restrictions for Access Point Retransmission Interval and Retry Count 777 Configuring the AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (GUI) 778 Configuring the Access Point Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (CLI) 778 C H A P T E R 1 1 6 Configuring Country Codes 781 Information About Configuring Country Codes 781 Restrictions for Configuring Country Codes 782 Configuring Country Codes (GUI) 782 Configuring Country Codes (CLI) 783 C H A P T E R 1 1 7 Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points 785 Information About Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points 785 Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points (GUI) 785 Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points (CLI) 786 C H A P T E R 1 1 8 Configuring Probe Request Forwarding 787 Information About Configuring Probe Request Forwarding 787 Configuring Probe Request Forwarding (CLI) 787 C H A P T E R 1 1 9 Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points 789 Information About Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points 789 Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points (GUI) 789 Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points (CLI) 790 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxvii Contents C H A P T E R 1 2 0 Performing a Link Test 791 Information About Performing a Link Test 791 Performing a Link Test (GUI) 792 Performing a Link Test (CLI) 792 C H A P T E R 1 2 1 Configuring Link Latency 795 Information About Configuring Link Latency 795 Restrictions for Link Latency 796 Configuring Link Latency (GUI) 796 Configuring Link Latency (CLI) 796 C H A P T E R 1 2 2 Configuring the TCP MSS 799 Information About Configuring the TCP MSS 799 Configuring TCP MSS (GUI) 799 Configuring TCP MSS (CLI) 800 C H A P T E R 1 2 3 Configuring Power Over Ethernet 801 Information About Configuring Power over Ethernet 801 Configuring Power over Ethernet (GUI) 803 Configuring Power over Ethernet (CLI) 804 C H A P T E R 1 2 4 Viewing Clients 807 Viewing Clients (GUI) 807 Viewing Clients (CLI) 808 C H A P T E R 1 2 5 Configuring LED States for Access Points 809 Configuring LED States 809 Information About Configuring LED States for Access Points 809 Configuring the LED State for Access Points in a Network Globally (GUI) 809 Configuring the LED State for Access Point in a Network Globally (CLI) 809 Configuring LED State on a Specific Access Point (GUI) 810 Configuring LED State on a Specific Access Point (CLI) 810 Configuring Flashing LEDs 810 Information About Configuring Flashing LEDs 810 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxviii OL-28744-01 Contents Configuring Flashing LEDs (CLI) 810 C H A P T E R 1 2 6 Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios 813 Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios (GUI) 813 Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios (CLI) 814 P A R T V I I Configuring Radio Resource Management 815 C H A P T E R 1 2 7 Configuring RRM 817 Information About Radio Resource Management 817 Radio Resource Monitoring 818 Transmit Power Control 818 Overriding the TPC Algorithm with Minimum and Maximum Transmit Power Settings 819 Dynamic Channel Assignment 819 Coverage Hole Detection and Correction 821 Benefits of RRM 821 Information About Configuring RRM 821 Restrictions for Configuring RRM 822 Configuring the RF Group Mode (GUI) 822 Configuring the RF Group Mode (CLI) 823 Configuring Transmit Power Control (GUI) 823 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer 825 Information About Off-Channel Scanning Defer 825 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer for WLANs 825 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer for a WLAN (GUI) 825 Configuring Off Channel Scanning Defer for a WLAN (CLI) 826 Configuring Dynamic Channel Assignment (GUI) 826 Configuring Coverage Hole Detection (GUI) 829 Configuring RRM Profile Thresholds, Monitoring Channels, and Monitor Intervals

(GUI) 830 Configuring RRM (CLI) 831 Viewing RRM Settings (CLI) 835 Debug RRM Issues (CLI) 836 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xxxix Contents C H A P T E R 1 2 8 Configuring RRM Neighbor Discovery Packets 837 Information About RRM NDP and RF Grouping 837 Configuring RRM NDP (CLI) 837 C H A P T E R 1 2 9 Configuring RF Groups 839 Information About RF Groups 839 RF Group Leader 840 RF Group Name 841 Configuring RF Groups 841 Configuring an RF Group Name (GUI) 842 Configuring an RF Group Name (CLI) 842 Viewing the RF Group Status 842 Viewing the RF Group Status (GUI) 842 Viewing the RF Group Status (CLI) 843 Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups 843 Information About Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups 843 Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups 844 Enabling Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups (GUI) 844 Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups (CLI) 844 C H A P T E R 1 3 0 Overriding RRM 847 Information About Overriding RRM 847 Prerequisites for Overriding RRM 847 Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings to Access Point Radios 848 Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings (GUI) 848 Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings (CLI) 849 Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment Globally for a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller 852 Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment (GUI) 852 Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment (CLI) 852 C H A P T E R 1 3 1 Configuring CCX Radio Management Features 855 Information About CCX Radio Management Features 855 Radio Measurement Requests 855 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xl OL-28744-01 Contents Location Calibration 856 Configuring CCX Radio Management 856 Configuring CCX Radio Management (GUI) 856 Configuring CCX Radio Management (CLI) 857 Viewing CCX Radio Management Information (CLI) 857 Debugging CCX Radio Management Issues (CLI) 858 P A R T V I I I Configuring Cisco CleanAir 861 C H A P T E R 1 3 2 Information About CleanAir 863 Information About CleanAir 863 Role of the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller in a Cisco CleanAir System 864 Interference Types that Cisco CleanAir Can Detect 864 Persistent Devices 865 Persistent Devices Detection 865 Persistent Devices Propagation 865 Detecting Interferers by an Access Point 866 C H A P T E R 1 3 3 Prerequisites and Restrictions for CleanAir 867 Prerequisites for CleanAir 867 Restrictions for CleanAir 868 C H A P T E R 1 3 4 Configuring Cisco CleanAir 869 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Controller 869 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller (GUI) 869 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller (CLI) 871 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point 875 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point (GUI) 875 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point (CLI) 876 C H A P T E R 1 3 5 Monitoring the Interference Devices 877 Prerequisites for Monitoring the Interference Devices 877 Monitoring the Interference Device (GUI) 877 Monitoring the Interference Device (CLI) 879 Detecting Interferers by an Access Point 879 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xli Contents Detecting Interferers by Device Type 879 Detecting Persistent Sources of Interference 879 Monitoring Persistent Devices (GUI) 880 Monitoring Persistent Devices (CLI) 880 Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands 881 Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands (GUI) 881 Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands (CLI) 881 Viewing a Summary of the Air Quality 881 Viewing Air Quality for all Access Points on a Radio Band 881 Viewing Air Quality for an Access Point on a Radio Band 881 Monitoring the Worst Air Quality of Radio Bands (GUI) 882 Monitoring the Worst Air Quality of Radio Bands (CLI) 882 Viewing a Summary of the Air Quality (CLI) 882 Viewing the Worst Air Quality Information for all Access Points on a Radio Band

(CLI) 882 Viewing the Air Quality for an Access Point on a Radio Band (CLI) 882 Viewing the Air Quality for an Access Point by Device Type (CLI) 883 Detecting Persistent Sources of Interference (CLI) 883 C H A P T E R 1 3 6 Configuring a Spectrum Expert Connection 885 Information About Spectrum Expert Connection 885 Configuring Spectrum Expert (GUI) 885 P A R T I X Configuring FlexConnect 889 C H A P T E R 1 3 7 Configuring FlexConnect 891 Information About FlexConnect 891 FlexConnect Authentication Process 892 Restrictions for FlexConnect 896 Configuring FlexConnect 897 Configuring the Switch at a Remote Site 897 Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect 898 Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect for a Centrally Switched WLAN Used for Guest Access 899 Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect (GUI) 900 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xlii OL-28744-01 Contents Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect (CLI) 901 Configuring an Access Point for FlexConnect 903 Configuring an Access Point for FlexConnect (GUI) 903 Configuring an Access Point for FlexConnect (CLI) 905 Configuring an Access Point for Local Authentication on a WLAN (GUI) 907 Configuring an Access Point for Local Authentication on a WLAN (CLI) 907 Connecting Client Devices to WLANs 907 C H A P T E R 1 3 8 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs 909 Information About Access Control Lists 909 Restrictions for FlexConnect ACLs 909 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (GUI) 910 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (CLI) 912 Viewing and Debugging FlexConnect ACLs (CLI) 913 C H A P T E R 1 3 9 Configuring FlexConnect Groups 915 Information About FlexConnect Groups 915 FlexConnect Groups and Backup RADIUS Servers 916 FlexConnect Groups and CCKM 916 FlexConnect Groups and Opportunistic Key Caching 916 FlexConnect Groups and Local Authentication 917 Configuring FlexConnect Groups 917 Configuring FlexConnect Groups (GUI) 917 Configuring FlexConnect Groups (CLI) 920 Configuring VLAN-ACL Mapping on FlexConnect Groups 922 Configuring VLAN-ACL Mapping on FlexConnect Groups (GUI) 922 Configuring VLAN-ACL Mapping on FlexConnect Groups (CLI) 922 Viewing VLAN-ACL Mappings (CLI) 922 C H A P T E R 1 4 0 Configuring AAA Overrides for FlexConnect 923 Information About Authentication, Authorization, Accounting Overrides 923 Restrictions for AAA Overrides for FlexConnect 924 Configuring AAA Overrides for FlexConnect on an Access Point (GUI) 924 Configuring VLAN Overrides for FlexConnect on an Access Point (CLI) 925 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xliii Contents C H A P T E R 1 4 1 Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades for FlexConnect APs 927 Information About FlexConnect AP Upgrades 927 Restrictions for FlexConnect AP Upgrades for FlexConnect Access Points 927 Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades (GUI) 928 Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades (CLI) 928 P A R T X Configuring Mobility Groups 929 C H A P T E R 1 4 2 Configuring Mobility Groups 931 Information About Mobility 931 Information About Mobility Groups 935 Messaging Among Mobility Groups 937 Using Mobility Groups with NAT Devices 937 Prerequisites for Configuring Mobility Groups 938 Configuring Mobility Groups (GUI) 940 Configuring Mobility Groups (CLI) 941 C H A P T E R 1 4 3 Viewing Mobility Group Statistics 943 Viewing Mobility Group Statistics (GUI) 943 Viewing Mobility Group Statistics (CLI) 944 C H A P T E R 1 4 4 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility 945 Information About Auto-Anchor Mobility 945 Guidelines and Limitations 946 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (GUI) 947 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (CLI) 947 C H A P T E R 1 4 5 Validating WLAN Mobility Security Values 951 Information About WLAN Mobility Security Values 951 C H A P T E R 1 4 6 Using Symmetric Mobility Tunneling 953 Information About Symmetric Mobility Tunneling 953 Guidelines and Limitations 954 Verifying Symmetric Mobility Tunneling (GUI) 954 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xliv OL-28744-01 Contents Verifying if Symmetric Mobility Tunneling is Enabled (CLI) 954 C H A P T E R 1 4 7 Running Mobility Ping Tests 955 Information About Mobility Ping Tests 955 Guidelines and Limitations 955 Running Mobility Ping Tests (CLI) 956 C H A P T E R 1 4 8 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring for Clients with Static IP Addresses 957 Information About Dynamic Anchoring for Clients with Static IP 957 How Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients Works 957 Guidelines and Limitations 958 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients (GUI) 958 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients (CLI) 959 C H A P T E R 1 4 9 Configuring Foreign Mappings 961 Information About Foreign Mappings 961 Configuring Foreign Controller MAC Mapping (GUI) 961 Configuring Foreign Controller MAC Mapping (CLI) 961 C H A P T E R 1 5 0 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 963 Information About Proxy Mobile IPv6 963 Guidelines and Limitations 963 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (GUI) 964 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (CLI) 965 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xlv Contents Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xlvi OL-28744-01 Preface This preface describes the audience, organization, and conventions of this document. It also provides information on how to obtain other documentation. This chapter includes the following sections:

Audience, page xlvii Conventions, page xlvii Related Documentation, page xlviii Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request, page xlix Audience This publication is for experienced network administrators who configure and maintain Cisco wireless LAN controllers and Cisco lightweight access points. Conventions This document uses the following conventions:

Table 1: Conventions Convention bold font italic font

[ ]

{x | y | z }

[ x | y | z ]

Indication Commands and keywords and user-entered text appear in bold font. Document titles, new or emphasized terms, and arguments for which you supply values are in italic font. Elements in square brackets are optional. Required alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. Optional alternative keywords are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xlvii Related Documentation Preface Convention string courier font

<>

[]

!, #

Indication A nonquoted set of characters. Do not use quotation marks around the string or the string will include the quotation marks. Terminal sessions and information the system displays appear in courier font. Nonprinting characters such as passwords are in angle brackets. Default responses to system prompts are in square brackets. An exclamation point (!) or a pound sign (#) at the beginning of a line of code indicates a comment line. Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the manual. Tip Means the following information will help you solve a problem. Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might perform an action that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. Related Documentation These documents provide complete information about Cisco Wireless:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller configuration guides:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10315/products_installation_and_configuration_guides_list.html Cisco Wireless LAN Controller command references:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10315/prod_command_reference_list.html Cisco Wireless LAN Controller System Message Guide:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10315/products_system_message_guides_list.html Release Notes for Cisco Wireless LAN Controllers and Lightweight Access Points:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10315/prod_release_notes_list.html Cisco Wireless Mesh Access Points, Design and Deployment Guide:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps11451/products_implementation_design_guides_list.html Cisco Prime Infrastructure documentation:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps12239/products_documentation_roadmaps_list.html Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xlviii OL-28744-01 Preface Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request Cisco Mobility Services Engine documentation:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9806/tsd_products_support_series_home.html Click this link to access user documentation pertaining to Cisco Wireless solution:

http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/psa/default.html?mode=prod Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request For information on obtaining documentation, using the Cisco Bug Search Tool (BST), submitting a service request, and gathering additional information, see What's New in Cisco Product Documentation, at: http://

www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html. Subscribe to What's New in Cisco Product Documentation, which lists all new and revised Cisco technical documentation, as an RSS feed and deliver content directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free service. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 xlix Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request Preface Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 l OL-28744-01 P A R T I System Management Overview, page 3 Getting Started, page 15 Managing Licenses, page 55 Configuring 802.11 Bands, page 75 Configuring 802.11 Parameters, page 83 Configuring DHCP Proxy, page 89 Configuring SNMP, page 93 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing, page 97 Configuring Fast SSID Changing, page 101 Configuring 802.3 Bridging, page 103 Configuring Multicast, page 105 Configuring Client Roaming, page 115 Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding, page 121 Configuring Quality of Service, page 123 Configuring Application Visibility and Control, page 131 Configuring Media and EDCA Parameters, page 137 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol, page 157 Configuring Authentication for the Controller and NTP Server, page 165 Configuring RFID Tag Tracking, page 167 Resetting the Controller to Default Settings, page 171 Managing Controller Software and Configurations, page 173 Managing User Accounts, page 205 Managing Web Authentication, page 213 Configuring Wired Guest Access, page 233 Troubleshooting, page 241 C H A P T E R 1 Overview Cisco Wireless Overview, page 3 Operating System Software, page 6 Operating System Security, page 6 Layer 2 and Layer 3 Operation, page 7 Cisco Wireless LAN Controllers, page 8 Controller Platforms, page 8 Cisco UWN Solution WLANs, page 11 File Transfers, page 11 Power over Ethernet, page 11 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Memory, page 12 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Failover Protection, page 12 Cisco Wireless Overview Cisco Wireless is designed to provide 802.11 wireless networking solutions for enterprises and service providers. Cisco Wireless simplifies deploying and managing large-scale wireless LANs and enables a unique best-in-class security infrastructure. The operating system manages all data client, communications, and system administration functions, performs radio resource management (RRM) functions, manages system-wide mobility policies using the operating system security solution, and coordinates all security functions using the operating system security framework. Cisco Wireless solution consists of Cisco wireless LAN controllers and their associated lightweight access points controlled by the operating system, all concurrently managed by any or all of the operating system user interfaces:

An HTTP and/or HTTPS full-featured Web User Interface hosted by Cisco wireless LAN controllers can be used to configure and monitor individual controllers. A full-featured command-line interface (CLI) can be used to configure and monitor individual Cisco wireless LAN controllers. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 3 Cisco Wireless Overview The Cisco Prime Infrastructure, which you use to configure and monitor one or more Cisco wireless LAN controllers and associated access points. The Prime Infrastructure has tools to facilitate large-system monitoring and control. For more information about Cisco Prime Infrastructure, see http://www.cisco.com/

en/US/products/ps12239/tsd_products_support_series_home.html. An industry-standard SNMP V1, V2c, and V3 interface can be used with any SNMP-compliant third-party network management system. The Cisco Wireless solution supports client data services, client monitoring and control, and all rogue access point detection, monitoring, and containment functions. It uses lightweight access points, Cisco wireless LAN controllers, and the optional Cisco Prime Infrastructure to provide wireless services to enterprises and service providers. Note Unless otherwise noted in this publication, all of the Cisco wireless LAN controllers are referred to as controllers, and all of the Cisco lightweight access points are referred to as access points. Single-Controller Deployments A standalone controller can support lightweight access points across multiple floors and buildings simultaneously and support the following features:

Autodetecting and autoconfiguring lightweight access points as they are added to the network. Full control of lightweight access points. Lightweight access points connect to controllers through the network. The network equipment may or may not provide Power over Ethernet (PoE) to the access points. Some controllers use redundant Gigabit Ethernet connections to bypass single network failures. Note Some controllers can connect through multiple physical ports to multiple subnets in the network. This feature can be helpful when you want to confine multiple VLANs to separate subnets. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 4 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless Overview This figure shows a typical single-controller deployment. Figure 1: Single-Controller Deployment Multiple-Controller Deployments Each controller can support lightweight access points across multiple floors and buildings simultaneously. However, full functionality of the Cisco wireless LAN solution occurs when it includes multiple controllers. A multiple-controller system has the following additional features:

Autodetecting and autoconfiguring RF parameters as the controllers are added to the network. Same-subnet (Layer 2) roaming and inter-subnet (Layer 3) roaming. Automatic access point failover to any redundant controller with a reduced access point load. The following figure shows a typical multiple-controller deployment. The figure also shows an optional dedicated management network and the three physical connection types between the network and the controllers. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 5 Operating System Software Figure 2: Typical Multiple-Controller Deployment Operating System Software The operating system software controls controllers and lightweight access points. It includes full operating system security and radio resource management (RRM) features. Operating System Security Operating system security bundles Layer 1, Layer 2, and Layer 3 security components into a simple, Cisco WLAN solution-wide policy manager that creates independent security policies for each of up to 16 wireless LANs. The 802.11 Static WEP weaknesses can be overcome using the following robust industry-standard security solutions:

802.1X dynamic keys with extensible authentication protocol (EAP). Wi-Fi protected access (WPA) dynamic keys. The Cisco WLAN solution WPA implementation includes:

Temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) and message integrity code checksum dynamic keys WEP keys, with or without a preshared key passphrase Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 6 OL-28744-01 Layer 2 and Layer 3 Operation RSN with or without a preshared key Optional MAC filtering The WEP problem can be further solved using the following industry-standard Layer 3 security solutions:

Passthrough VPNs Local and RADIUS MAC address filtering Local and RADIUS user/password authentication Manual and automated disabling to block access to network services. In manual disabling, you block access using client MAC addresses. In automated disabling, which is always active, the operating system software automatically blocks access to network services for a user-defined period of time when a client fails to authenticate for a fixed number of consecutive attempts. This feature can be used to deter brute-force login attacks. These and other security features use industry-standard authorization and authentication methods to ensure the highest possible security for your business-critical wireless LAN traffic. Layer 2 and Layer 3 Operation Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP) communications between the controller and lightweight access points can be conducted at Layer 2 or Layer 3. Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points protocol

(CAPWAP) communications between the controller and lightweight access points are conducted at Layer 3. Layer 2 mode does not support CAPWAP. Note The IPv4 network layer protocol is supported for transport through a CAPWAP or LWAPP controller system. IPv6 (for clients only) and AppleTalk are also supported but only on Cisco 5500 Series Controllers and the Cisco WiSM2. Other Layer 3 protocols (such as IPX, DECnet Phase IV, OSI CLNP, and so on) and Layer 2 (bridged) protocols (such as LAT and NetBeui) are not supported. Operational Requirements The requirement for Layer 3 LWAPP communications is that the controller and lightweight access points can be connected through Layer 2 devices on the same subnet or connected through Layer 3 devices across subnets. Another requirement is that the IP addresses of access points should be either statically assigned or dynamically assigned through an external DHCP server. The requirement for Layer 3 CAPWAP communications is that the controller and lightweight access points can be connected through Layer 2 devices on the same subnet or connected through Layer 3 devices across subnets. Configuration Requirements When you are operating the Cisco wireless LAN solution in Layer 2 mode, you must configure a management interface to control your Layer 2 communications. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 7 Cisco Wireless LAN Controllers When you are operating the Cisco wireless LAN solution in Layer 3 mode, you must configure an AP-manager interface to control lightweight access points and a management interface as configured for Layer 2 mode. Cisco Wireless LAN Controllers When you are adding lightweight access points to a multiple-controller deployment network, it is convenient to have all lightweight access points associate with one master controller on the same subnet. That way, the you do not have to log into multiple controllers to find out which controller newly-added lightweight access points associated with. One controller in each subnet can be assigned as the master controller while adding lightweight access points. As long as a master controller is active on the same subnet, all new access points without a primary, secondary, and tertiary controller assigned automatically attempt to associate with the master controller. This process is described in Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Failover Protection, on page 12. You can monitor the master controller using the Cisco Prime Infrastructure Web User Interface and watch as access points associate with the master controller. You can then verify the access point configuration and assign a primary, secondary, and tertiary controller to the access point, and reboot the access point so it reassociates with its primary, secondary, or tertiary controller. Note Lightweight access points without a primary, secondary, and tertiary controller assigned always search for a master controller first upon reboot. After adding lightweight access points through the master controller, you should assign primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers to each access point. We recommend that you disable the master setting on all controllers after initial configuration. Client Location When you use Cisco Prime Infrastructure in your Cisco wireless LAN solution, controllers periodically determine the client, rogue access point, rogue access point client, radio frequency ID (RFID) tag location and store the locations in the Cisco Prime Infrastructure database. Controller Platforms Controllers are enterprise-class high-performance wireless switching platforms that support 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n protocols. They operate under control of the operating system, which includes the radio resource management (RRM), creating a Cisco UWN solution that can automatically adjust to real-time changes in the 802.11 RF environment. Controllers are built around high-performance network and security hardware, resulting in highly reliable 802.11 enterprise networks with unparalleled security. The following controllers are supported:

Cisco 2500 Series Controllers The Cisco 2500 Series Wireless Controller works in conjunction with Cisco lightweight access points and the Cisco Prime Infrastructure to provide system-wide wireless LAN functions. The Cisco 2500 Series controller provides real-time communication between a wireless access points and other devices to deliver centralized security policies, guest access, wireless intrusion prevention system (wIPS), context-aware Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 8 OL-28744-01 Controller Platforms

(location), RF management, quality of services for mobility services such as voice and video, and OEAP support for the teleworker solution. For more information about Cisco 2500 series controllers, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps11630/

index.html. Cisco 5500 Series Controller The Cisco 5500 Series Wireless LAN Controller is currently available in one model: 5508. The Cisco 5500 Series Wireless Controller is a highly scalable and flexible platform that enables systemwide services for mission-critical wireless networking in medium-sized to large enterprises and campus environments. The Cisco 5500 Series Controller can be equipped with one or two power supplies. When the controller is equipped with two power supplies, the power supplies are redundant, and either power supply can continue to power the controller if the other power supply fails. For more information about the Cisco 5500 Series Controller, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/

ps10315/tsd_products_support_series_home.html. Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controllers The Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller enables you to deploy full featured, scalable, and secure FlexConnect network services across geographic locations. Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller virtualizes the complex security, management, configuration and troubleshooting operations within the data center and then transparently extends those services to each store. Deployments using Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller are easier for IT to set up, manage and scale. The Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller is designed to meet the scaling requirements to deploy the FlexConnect solution in branch networks. Cisco Wireless supports two major deployment models: FlexConnect and monitor mode. FlexConnect is designed to support wireless branch networks by allowing the data to be switched locally while the access points are being controlled and managed by a centralized controller. It aims at delivering a cost effective FlexConnect solution on a large scale. Restrictions For a FlexConnect only deployment, the following restrictions apply:

Multicast-unicast is the only available default mode. Global multicast and IGMP snooping are not supported. IPv6 and Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) are supported but not multicast data. For more information about the Cisco Flex 7500 series controllers, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/

ps11635/tsd_products_support_series_home.html. Cisco 8500 Series Controllers Cisco 8500 Series Controllers were introduced in the 7.3 release with support for local mode, FlexConnect, and mesh modes. The Cisco 8500 Series Controller is a highly scalable and flexible platform that enables mission-critical wireless networking in large-scale service provider and large-campus deployments. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 9 Controller Platforms Note The DC powered 8510 controller is not available with any of the country-specific power cords. Therefore, we recommend that you use a 12 gauge wire and connect to the DC power supply. Restrictions Local mode only deploymentMulticast-multicast is the default mode. Local and FlexConnect mode deployment:

If you require IPv6 on FlexConnect mode APs, disable global multicast and change to multicast-unicast mode. IPv6 and Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) works, but multicast data and video streaming are not supported across the controller. If you do not require IPv6 and GARP on FlexConnect APs, change the mode to multicast-multicast and enable global multicast and IGMP/MLD snooping. IPv6, GARP, multicast data, and VideoStream are supported on FlexConnect APs. For more information about the Cisco 8500 series controllers, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/

ps12722/tsd_products_support_series_home.html. Cisco Virtual Wireless LAN Controllers The virtual wireless LAN controller is software that can run on hardware that is compliant with an industry standard virtualization infrastructure. Virtual Wireless LAN controllers provide flexibility for users to select the hardware based on their requirement. Note When you take a snapshot of the virtual wireless LAN controller, the VMware suspends activities for about 15 seconds. During this time, the APs are disconnected from the virtual wireless LAN controller. For more information about the Cisco Virtual Wireless LAN controllers, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/

products/ps12723/tsd_products_support_series_home.html. Cisco Wireless Services Module 2 The Cisco Wireless Services Module 2 (WiSM2) provides medium-sized to large single-site WLAN deployments with exceptional performance, security, and scalability to support mission-critical wireless business communications. It helps to lower hardware costs and offers flexible configuration options that can reduce the total cost of operations and ownership for wireless networks. For more information about Cisco WiSM2, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps11634/index.html. Cisco Wireless Controller on Cisco Services-Ready Engine (SRE) The Cisco wireless controller application on the Cisco Services-Ready Engine (SRE) enables systemwide wireless functions in small to medium-sized enterprises and branch offices. Delivering 802.11n performance and scalability, the Cisco wireless controller on the SRE is an entry-level controller that provides low total cost of ownership and investment protection by integrating seamlessly with the existing network. The Cisco Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 10 OL-28744-01 Cisco UWN Solution WLANs SRE modules are router blades for the Cisco Integrated Services Routers Generation 2 (ISR G2), which allows you to provision the Cisco Wireless Controller applications on the module remotely at any time. This can help your organization to quickly deploy wireless on-demand, reduce operating costs, and consolidate the branch office infrastructure. This controller provides real-time communication between Cisco Aironet access points, the Cisco Prime Infrastructure, and the Cisco Mobility Services Engine (MSE) to deliver centralized security policies, wireless intrusion prevention system (wIPS) capabilities, award-winning RF management, context-aware capabilities for location tracking, and quality of service (QoS) for voice and video. For more information about Cisco wireless controller application on the Cisco Services-Ready Engine (SRE), see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps11716/index.html. Cisco UWN Solution WLANs The Cisco UWN solution can control up to 512 WLANs for lightweight access points. Each WLAN has a separate WLAN ID (1 through 512), a separate profile name, and a WLAN SSID and can be assigned with unique security policies. The lightweight access points broadcast all active Cisco UWN solution WLAN SSIDs and enforce the policies defined for each WLAN. Note We recommend that you assign one set of VLANs for WLANs and a different set of VLANs for management interfaces to ensure that controllers operate with optimum performance and ease of management. If management over wireless is enabled across the Cisco UWN solution, you can manage the system across the enabled WLAN using CLI and Telnet, HTTP/HTTPS, and SNMP. File Transfers You can upload and download operating system code, configuration, and certificate files to and from the controller using the GUI, CLI, or Cisco Prime Infrastructure. Power over Ethernet Lightweight access points can receive power through their Ethernet cables from 802.3af-compatible Power over Ethernet (PoE) devices, which can reduce the cost of discrete power supplies, additional wiring, conduits, outlets, and installation time. PoE frees you from having to mount lightweight access points or other powered equipment near AC outlets, which provides greater flexibility in positioning the access points for maximum coverage. When you are using PoE, you run a single CAT-5 cable from each lightweight access point to PoE-equipped network elements, such as a PoE power hub or a Cisco WLAN solution single-line PoE injector. When the PoE equipment determines that the lightweight access point is PoE-enabled, it sends 48 VDC over the unused pairs in the Ethernet cable to power the access point. The PoE cable length is limited by the 100BASE-T or 10BASE-T specification to 100 m or 200 m, respectively. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 11 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Memory Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Memory The controller contains two kinds of memory: volatile RAM, which holds the current, active controller configuration, and NVRAM (nonvolatile RAM), which holds the reboot configuration. When you are configuring the operating system in the controller, you are modifying volatile RAM; you must save the configuration from the volatile RAM to the NVRAM to ensure that the controller reboots in the current configuration. Knowing which memory you are modifying is important when you are doing the following tasks:

Using the configuration wizard Clearing the controller configuration Saving configurations Resetting the controller Logging out of the CLI Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Failover Protection During installation, we recommend that you connect all lightweight access points to a dedicated controller, and configure each lightweight access point for final operation. This step configures each lightweight access point for a primary, secondary, and tertiary controller and allows it to store the configured mobility group information. During the failover recovery, the following tasks are performed:

The configured access point attempts to contact the primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers, and then attempts to contact the IP addresses of the other controllers in the mobility group. DNS is resolved with the controller IP address. DHCP servers get the controller IP addresses (vendor-specific option 43 in DHCP offer). In multiple-controller deployments, if one controller fails, the access points perform the following tasks:

If the lightweight access point has a primary, secondary, and tertiary controller assigned, it attempts to associate with that controller. If the access point has no primary, secondary, or tertiary controllers assigned or if its primary, secondary, or tertiary controllers are unavailable, it attempts to associate with a master controller. If the access point finds no master controller, it attempts to contact stored mobility group members by the IP address. If the mobility group members are available, and if the lightweight access point has no primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers assigned and there is no master controller active, it attempts to associate with the least-loaded controller to respond to its discovery messages. When controllers are deployed, if one controller fails, active access point client sessions are momentarily dropped while the dropped access point associates with another controller, allowing the client device to immediately reassociate and reauthenticate. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 12 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Failover Protection To know more about high availability, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6366/products_tech_ note09186a00809a3f5d.shtml OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 13 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Failover Protection Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 14 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 2 Getting Started Configuring the Controller Using the Configuration Wizard, page 15 Connecting the Console Port of the Controller, page 16 Configuring the Controller (GUI), page 16 Configuring the ControllerUsing the CLI Configuration Wizard, page 27 Using the Controller Web GUI, page 29 Loading an Externally Generated SSL Certificate, page 33 Information About Externally Generated SSL Certificates, page 33 Loading an SSL Certificate (GUI), page 34 Loading an SSL Certificate (CLI), page 35 Using the Controller CLI, page 36 Logging on to the Controller CLI, page 36 Using the AutoInstall Feature for Controllers Without a Configuration, page 39 Information About the AutoInstall Feature, page 39 Guidelines and Limitations, page 40 Managing the Controller System Date and Time, page 43 Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions, page 48 Managing the Controller Wirelessly, page 52 Configuring the Controller Using the Configuration Wizard The configuration wizard enables you to configure basic settings on the controller. You can run the wizard after you receive the controller from the factory or after the controller has been reset to factory defaults. The configuration wizard is available in both GUI and CLI formats. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 15 Connecting the Console Port of the Controller Connecting the Console Port of the Controller Before you can configure the controller for basic operations, you need to connect it to a PC that uses a VT-100 terminal emulation program (such as HyperTerminal, ProComm, Minicom, or Tip). Note On Cisco 5500 Series Controllers, you can use either the RJ-45 console port or the USB console port. If you use the USB console port, plug the 5-pin mini Type B connector into the controllers USB console port and the other end of the cable into the PCs USB Type A port. The first time that you connect a Windows PC to the USB console port, you are prompted to install the USB console driver. Follow the installation prompts to install the driver. The USB console driver maps to a COM port on your PC; you then need to map the terminal emulator application to the COM port. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Connect one end of a null-modem serial cable to the controllers console port and the other end to your PCs serial port. Start the PCs VT-100 terminal emulation program. Configure the terminal emulation program for these parameters:

9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit No parity No hardware flow control Step 4 Plug the AC power cord into the controller and a grounded 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60-Hz electrical outlet.Turn on the power supply. The bootup script displays operating system software initialization (code download and power-on self test verification) and basic configuration. If the controller passes the power-on self test, the bootup script runs the configuration wizard, which prompts you for basic configuration input. Configuring the Controller (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Connect your PC to the service port and configure it to use the same subnet as the controller. Start Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 (or later) or Firefox 2.0.0.11 (or later) on your PC and browse to http://192.168.1.1. The configuration wizard appears. Note You can use both HTTP and HTTPS when using the service port interface. HTTPS is enabled by default and HTTP can also be enabled. The default IP address to connect to the service port interface is 192.168.1.1. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 16 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Controller (GUI) Figure 3: Configuration Wizard System Information Screen Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 In the System Name text box, enter the name that you want to assign to this controller. You can enter up to 31 ASCII characters. In the User Name text box, enter the administrative username to be assigned to this controller. You can enter up to 24 ASCII characters. The default username is admin. In the Password and Confirm Password text boxes, enter the administrative password to be assigned to this controller. You can enter up to 24 ASCII characters. The default password is admin. Starting in release 7.0.116.0, the following password policy has been implemented:

The password must contain characters from at least three of the following classes:

Lowercase letters Uppercase letters Digits Special characters No character in the password must be repeated more than three times consecutively. The new password must not be the same as the associated username and not be the username reversed. The password must not be cisco, ocsic, or any variant obtained by changing the capitalization of letters of the word Cisco. In addition, you cannot substitute 1, I, or ! for i, 0 for o, or $ for s. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 17 Configuring the Controller (GUI) Step 6 Click Next. The SNMP Summary screen appears. Figure 4: Configuration Wizard SNMP Summary Screen Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 If you want to enable Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) v1 mode for this controller, choose Enable from the SNMP v1 Mode drop-down list. Otherwise, leave this parameter set to Disable. Note SNMP manages nodes (servers, workstations, routers, switches, and so on) on an IP network. Currently, there are three versions of SNMP: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. If you want to enable SNMPv2c mode for this controller, leave this parameter set to Enable. Otherwise, choose Disable from the SNVP v2c Mode drop-down list. If you want to enable SNMPv3 mode for this controller, leave this parameter set to Enable. Otherwise, choose Disable from the SNVP v3 Mode drop-down list. Click Next. When the following message appears, click OK:

Default values are present for v1/v2c community strings. Please make sure to create new v1/v2c community strings once the system comes up. Please make sure to create new v3 users once the system comes up. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 18 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Controller (GUI) The Service Interface Configuration screen appears. Figure 5: Configuration Wizard Service Interface Configuration Screen Step 12 If you want the controllers service-port interface to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server, select the DHCP Protocol Enabled check box. If you do not want to use the service port or if you want to assign a static IP address to the service port, leave the check box unselected. Note The service-port interface controls communications through the service port. Its IP address must be on a different subnet from the management interface. This configuration enables you to manage the controller directly or through a dedicated management network to ensure service access during network downtime. Step 13 Perform one of the following:

If you enabled DHCP, clear out any entries in the IP Address and Netmask text boxes, leaving them blank. If you disabled DHCP, enter the static IP address and netmask for the service port in the IP Address and Netmask text boxes. Step 14 Click Next. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 19 Configuring the Controller (GUI) The LAG Configuration screen appears. Figure 6: Configuration Wizard LAG Configuration Screen Step 15 Step 16 To enable link aggregation (LAG), choose Enabled from the Link Aggregation (LAG) Mode drop-down list. To disable LAG, leave this text box set to Disabled. Click Next The Management Interface Configuration screen appears. Figure 7: Configuration Wizard Management Interface Configuration Screen Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 20 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Controller (GUI) Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 Step 23 Step 24 Step 25 Note The management interface is the default interface for in-band management of the controller and connectivity to enterprise services such as AAA servers. In the VLAN Identifier text box, enter the VLAN identifier of the management interface (either a valid VLAN identifier or 0 for an untagged VLAN). The VLAN identifier should be set to match the switch interface configuration. In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the management interface. In the Netmask text box, enter the IP address of the management interface netmask. In the Gateway text box, enter the IP address of the default gateway. In the Port Number text box, enter the number of the port assigned to the management interface. Each interface is mapped to at least one primary port. In the Backup Port text box, enter the number of the backup port assigned to the management interface. If the primary port for the management interface fails, the interface automatically moves to the backup port. In the Primary DHCP Server text box, enter the IP address of the default DHCP server that will supply IP addresses to clients, the controllers management interface, and optionally, the service port interface. In the Secondary DHCP Server text box, enter the IP address of an optional secondary DHCP server that will supply IP addresses to clients, the controllers management interface, and optionally, the service port interface. Click Next. The AP-Manager Interface Configuration screen appears. Note This screen does not appear for Cisco 5500 Series Controllers because you are not required to configure an AP-manager interface. The management interface acts like an AP-manager interface by default. Step 26 Step 27 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the AP-manager interface. Click Next. The Miscellaneous Configuration screen appears. Figure 8: Configuration Wizard Miscellaneous Configuration Screen Step 28 In the RF Mobility Domain Name text box, enter the name of the mobility group/RF group to which you want the controller to belong. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 21 Configuring the Controller (GUI) Note Although the name that you enter here is assigned to both the mobility group and the RF group, these groups are not identical. Both groups define clusters of controllers, but they have different purposes. All of the controllers in an RF group are usually also in the same mobility group and vice versa. However, a mobility group facilitates scalable, system-wide mobility and controller redundancy while an RF group facilitates scalable, system-wide dynamic RF management. The Configured Country Code(s) text box shows the code for the country in which the controller will be used. If you want to change the country of operation, select the check box for the desired country. Note You can choose more than one country code if you want to manage access points in multiple countries from a single controller. After the configuration wizard runs, you must assign each access point joined to the controller to a specific country. Click Next. When the following message appears, click OK:

Warning! To maintain regulatory compliance functionality, the country code setting may only be modified by a network administrator or qualified IT professional. Ensure that proper country codes are selected before proceeding.?

Step 29 Step 30 Step 31 The Virtual Interface Configuration screen appears. Figure 9: Configuration Wizard Virtual Interface Configuration Screen Step 32 Step 33 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the controllers virtual interface. You should enter a fictitious, unassigned IP address. Note The virtual interface is used to support mobility management, DHCP relay, and embedded Layer 3 security such as guest web authentication and VPN termination. All controllers within a mobility group must be configured with the same virtual interface IP address. In the DNS Host Name text box, enter the name of the Domain Name System (DNS) gateway used to verify the source of certificates when Layer 3 web authorization is enabled. Note To ensure connectivity and web authentication, the DNS server should always point to the virtual interface. If a DNS hostname is configured for the virtual interface, then the same DNS hostname must be configured on the DNS servers used by the client. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 22 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Controller (GUI) Step 34 Click Next. The WLAN Configuration screen appears. Figure 10: Configuration Wizard WLAN Configuration Screen Step 35 Step 36 Step 37 Step 38 In the Profile Name text box, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the profile name to be assigned to this WLAN. In the WLAN SSID text box, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the network name, or service set identifier

(SSID). The SSID enables basic functionality of the controller and allows access points that have joined the controller to enable their radios. Click Next. When the following message appears, click OK:

Default Security applied to WLAN is: [WPA2(AES)][Auth(802.1x)]. You can change this after the wizard is complete and the system is rebooted.?

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 23 Configuring the Controller (GUI) The RADIUS Server Configuration screen is displayed. Figure 11: Configuration Wizard RADIUS Server Configuration Screen Step 39 Step 40 In the Server IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the RADIUS server. From the Shared Secret Format drop-down list, choose ASCII or Hex to specify the format of the shared secret. Note Due to security reasons, the RADIUS shared secret key reverts to ASCII mode even if you have selected HEX as the shared secret format from the Shared Secret Format drop-down list. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 24 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Controller (GUI) Step 41 Step 42 Step 43 Step 44 In the Shared Secret and Confirm Shared Secret text boxes, enter the secret key used by the RADIUS server. In the Port Number text box, enter the communication port of the RADIUS server. The default value is 1812. To enable the RADIUS server, choose Enabled from the Server Status drop-down list. To disable the RADIUS server, leave this text box set to Disabled. Click Apply. The 802.11 Configuration screen appears. Figure 12: Configuration Wizard 802.11 Configuration Screen Step 45 Step 46 To enable the 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g lightweight access point networks, leave the 802.11a Network Status, 802.11b Network Status, and 802.11g Network Status check boxes selected. To disable support for any of these networks, unselect the check boxes. To enable the controllers radio resource management (RRM) auto-RF feature, leave the Auto RF check box selected. To disable support for the auto-RF feature, unselect this check box. Note The auto-RF feature enables the controller to automatically form an RF group with other controllers. The group dynamically elects a leader to optimize RRM parameter settings, such as channel and transmit power assignment, for the group. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 25 Configuring the Controller (GUI) Step 47 Click Next. The Set Time screen appears. Figure 13: Configuration Wizard Set Time Screen Step 48 Step 49 To manually configure the system time on your controller, enter the current date in Month/DD/YYYY format and the current time in HH:MM:SS format. To manually set the time zone so that Daylight Saving Time (DST) is not set automatically, enter the local hour difference from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) in the Delta Hours text box and the local minute difference from GMT in the Delta Mins text box. Note When manually setting the time zone, enter the time difference of the local current time zone with respect to GMT (+/). For example, Pacific time in the United States is 8 hours behind GMT. Therefore, it is entered as 8. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 26 OL-28744-01 Configuring the ControllerUsing the CLI Configuration Wizard Step 50 Click Next. The Configuration Wizard Completed screen appears. Figure 14: Configuration Wizard Configuration Wizard Completed Screen Step 51 Step 52 Click Save and Reboot to save your configuration and reboot the controller. When the following message appears, click OK:

Configuration will be saved and the controller will be rebooted. Click ok to confirm.?

The controller saves your configuration, reboots, and prompts you to log on. Configuring the ControllerUsing the CLI Configuration Wizard Before You Begin The available options appear in brackets after each configuration parameter. The default value appears in all uppercase letters. If you enter an incorrect response, the controller provides you with an appropriate error message, such as Invalid Response, and returns you to the wizard prompt. Press the hyphen key if you ever need to return to the previous command line. Step 1 When prompted to terminate the AutoInstall process, enter yes. If you do not enter yes, the AutoInstall process begins after 30 seconds. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 27 Configuring the ControllerUsing the CLI Configuration Wizard Step 2 Step 3 Note The AutoInstall feature downloads a configuration file from a TFTP server and then loads the configuration onto the controller automatically. Enter the system name, which is the name that you want to assign to the controller. You can enter up to 31 ASCII characters. Enter the administrative username and password to be assigned to this controller. You can enter up to 24 ASCII characters for each. Starting in release 7.0.116.0, the following password policy has been implemented:

The password must contain characters from at least three of the following classes:

Lowercase letters Uppercase letters Digits Special characters No character in the password must be repeated more than three times consecutively. The new password must not be the same as the associated username and not be the username reversed. The password must not be cisco, ocsic, or any variant obtained by changing the capitalization of letters of the word Cisco. In addition, you cannot substitute 1, I, or ! for i, 0 for o, or $ for s. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 If you want the controllers service-port interface to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server, enter DHCP. If you do not want to use the service port or if you want to assign a static IP address to the service port, enter none. Note The service-port interface controls communications through the service port. Its IP address must be on a different subnet from the management interface. This configuration enables you to manage the controller directly or through a dedicated management network to ensure service access during network downtime. If you entered none in Step 4, enter the IP address and netmask for the service-port interface on the next two lines. Enable or disable link aggregation (LAG) by choosing yes or NO. Enter the IP address of the management interface. Note The management interface is the default interface for in-band management of the controller and connectivity to enterprise services such as AAA servers. Enter the IP address of the management interface netmask. Enter the IP address of the default router. Enter the VLAN identifier of the management interface (either a valid VLAN identifier or 0 for an untagged VLAN). The VLAN identifier should be set to match the switch interface configuration. Enter the IP address of the default DHCP server that will supply IP addresses to clients, the management interface of the controller, and optionally, the service port interface. Enter the IP address of the AP-manager interface. Note This prompt does not appear for Cisco 5500 Series Controllers because you are not required to configure an AP-manager interface. The management interface acts like an AP-manager interface by default. Enter the IP address of the controllers virtual interface. You should enter a fictitious unassigned IP address. Note The virtual interface is used to support mobility management, DHCP relay, and embedded Layer 3 security such as guest web authentication and VPN termination. All controllers within a mobility group must be configured with the same virtual interface IP address. Step 13 If desired, enter the name of the mobility group/RF group to which you want the controller to belong. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 28 OL-28744-01 Using the Controller Web GUI Note Although the name that you enter here is assigned to both the mobility group and the RF group, these groups are not identical. Both groups define clusters of controllers, but they have different purposes. All of the controllers in an RF group are usually also in the same mobility group and vice versa. However, a mobility group facilitates scalable, system-wide mobility and controller redundancy while an RF group facilitates scalable, system-wide dynamic RF management. Enter the network name or service set identifier (SSID). The SSID enables basic functionality of the controller and allows access points that have joined the controller to enable their radios. Enter YES to allow clients to assign their own IP address or no to require clients to request an IP address from a DHCP server. To configure a RADIUS server now, enter YES and then enter the IP address, communication port, and secret key of the RADIUS server. Otherwise, enter no. If you enter no, the following message appears: Warning! The default WLAN security policy requires a RADIUS server. Please see the documentation for more details. Enter the code for the country in which the controller will be used. Note Enter help to view the list of available country codes. You can enter more than one country code if you want to manage access points in multiple countries from a single controller. To do so, separate the country codes with a comma (for example, US,CA,MX). After the configuration wizard runs, you need to assign each access point joined to the controller to a specific country. Note Enable or disable the 802.11b, 802.11a, and 802.11g lightweight access point networks by entering YES or no. Enable or disable the controllers radio resource management (RRM) auto-RF feature by entering YES or no. Note The auto-RF feature enables the controller to automatically form an RF group with other controllers. The group dynamically elects a leader to optimize RRM parameter settings, such as channel and transmit power assignment, for the group. If you want the controller to receive its time setting from an external Network Time Protocol (NTP) server when it powers up, enter YES to configure an NTP server. Otherwise, enter no. Note The controller network module installed in a Cisco Integrated Services Router does not have a battery and cannot save a time setting. Therefore, it must receive a time setting from an external NTP server when it powers up. If you entered no in Step 20 and want to manually configure the system time on your controller now, enter YES. If you do not want to configure the system time now, enter no. If you entered YES in Step 21, enter the current date in the MM/DD/YY format and the current time in the HH:MM:SS format. When prompted to verify that the configuration is correct, enter yes or NO. The controller saves your configuration, reboots, and prompts you to log on. Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 Step 23 Using the Controller Web GUI A web browser, or graphical user interface (GUI), is built into each controller. It allows up to five users to simultaneously browse into the controller HTTP or HTTPS (HTTP + SSL) management pages to configure parameters and monitor the operational status for the controller and its associated access points. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 29 Using the Controller Web GUI Note We recommend that you enable the HTTPS interface and disable the HTTP interface to ensure more robust security for your Cisco UWN solution. Guidelines and Limitations Follow these guidelines when using the controller GUI:

The GUI must be used on a PC running Windows 7, Windows XP SP1 (or later releases), or Windows 2000 SP4 (or later releases). The controller GUI is compatible with Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6.0 SP1 (or later versions) or Mozilla Firefox 2.0.0.11 (or later versions). Note Opera and Netscape are not supported. You can use either the service port interface or the management interface to access the GUI. We recommend that you use the service-port interface. You can use both HTTP and HTTPS when using the service port interface. HTTPS is enabled by default and HTTP can also be enabled. The default IP address to connect to the service port interface is 192.168.1.1. Click Help at the top of any page in the GUI to display online help. You might need to disable your browsers pop-up blocker to view the online help. Logging On to the Web GUI Step 1 Step 2 Enter the controller IP address in your browsers address bar. For a secure connection, enter https://ip-address. For a less secure connection, enter http://ip-address. When prompted, enter a valid username and password, and click OK. The Summary page is displayed. Note The administrative username and password that you created in the configuration wizard are case sensitive. The default username is admin, and the default password is admin. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 30 OL-28744-01 Using the Controller Web GUI Logging out of the GUI Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Click Logout in the top right corner of the page. Click Close to complete the log out process and prevent unauthorized users from accessing the controllercontroller GUI. When prompted to confirm your decision, click Yes. Enabling Web and Secure Web Modes This section provides instructions to enable the distribution system port as a web port (using HTTP) or as a secure web port (using HTTPS). You can protect communication with the GUI by enabling HTTPS. HTTPS protects HTTP browser sessions by using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol. When you enable HTTPS, the controller generates its own local web administration SSL certificate and automatically applies it to the GUI. You also have the option of downloading an externally generated certificate. You can configure web and secure web mode using the controller GUI or CLI. Enabling Web and Secure Web Modes (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Management > HTTP-HTTPS. The HTTP-HTTPS Configuration page is displayed. To enable web mode, which allows users to access the controller GUI using http://ip-address, choose Enabled from the HTTP Access drop-down list. Otherwise, choose Disabled. The default value is Disabled. Web mode is not a secure connection. To enable secure web mode, which allows users to access the controller GUI using https://ip-address, choose Enabled from the HTTPS Access drop-down list. Otherwise, choose Disabled. The default value is Enabled. Secure web mode is a secure connection. In the Web Session Timeout text box, enter the amount of time, in minutes, before the web session times out due to inactivity. You can enter a value between 10 and 160 minutes (inclusive). The default value is 30 minutes. Click Apply. If you enabled secure web mode in Step 3, the controller generates a local web administration SSL certificate and automatically applies it to the GUI. The details of the current certificate appear in the middle of the HTTP-HTTPS Configuration page. Note If desired, you can delete the current certificate by clicking Delete Certificate and have the controller generate a new certificate by clicking Regenerate Certificate. Step 7 Click Save Configuration. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 31 Using the Controller Web GUI Enabling Web and Secure Web Modes (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Enable or disable web mode by entering this command:

config network webmode {enable | disable}

This command allows users to access the controller GUI using "http://ip-address." The default value is disabled. Web mode is not a secure connection. Enable or disable secure web mode by entering this command:

config network secureweb {enable | disable}

This command allows users to access the controller GUI using https://ip-address. The default value is enabled. Secure web mode is a secure connection. Enable or disable secure web mode with increased security by entering this command:

config network secureweb cipher-option high {enable | disable}

This command allows users to access the controller GUI using https://ip-address but only from browsers that support 128-bit (or larger) ciphers. The default value is disabled. Enable or disable SSLv2 for web administration by entering this command:

config network secureweb cipher-option sslv2 {enable | disable}

If you disable SSLv2, users cannot connect using a browser configured with SSLv2 only. They must use a browser that is configured to use a more secure protocol such as SSLv3 or later. The default value is disabled. Enable or disable preference for RC4-SHA (Rivest Cipher 4-Secure Hash Algorithm) cipher suites (over CBC cipher suites) for web authentication and web administration by entering this command:

config network secureweb cipher-option rc4-preference {enable | disable}

Verify that the controller has generated a certificate by entering this command:

show certificate summary Information similar to the following appears:

Web Administration Certificate................. Locally Generated Web Authentication Certificate................. Locally Generated Certificate compatibility mode:................ off

(Optional) Generate a new certificate by entering this command:

config certificate generate webadmin After a few seconds, the controller verifies that the certificate has been generated. Save the SSL certificate, key, and secure web password to nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) so that your changes are retained across reboots by entering this command:

save config Reboot the controller by entering this command:

reset system Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 32 OL-28744-01 Loading an Externally Generated SSL Certificate Loading an Externally Generated SSL Certificate This section describes how to load an externally generated SSL certificate. Information About Externally Generated SSL Certificates You can use a TFTP server to download an externally generated SSL certificate to the controller. Follow these guidelines for using TFTP:

If you load the certificate through the service port, the TFTP server must be on the same subnet as the controller because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. Also, if you load the certificate through the distribution system network port, the TFTP server can be on any subnet. A third-party TFTP server cannot run on the same PC as the Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP server and the third-party TFTP server require the same communication port. Note Chained certificates are supported for web authentication only and not for the management certificate. Note Every HTTPS certificate contains an embedded RSA key. The length of the key can vary from 512 bits, which is relatively insecure, to thousands of bits, which is very secure. When you obtain a new certificate from a Certificate Authority, make sure that the RSA key embedded in the certificate is at least 768 bits long. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 33 Loading an SSL Certificate (GUI) Loading an SSL Certificate (GUI) Step 1 On the HTTP Configuration page, select the Download SSL Certificate check box. Figure 15: HTTP Configuration Page Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 In the Server IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the TFTP server. In the Maximum Retries text box, enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the certificate. In the Timeout text box, enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the certificate. In the Certificate File Path text box, enter the directory path of the certificate. In the Certificate File Name text box, enter the name of the certificate (webadmincert_name.pem).

(Optional) In the Certificate Password text box, enter a password to encrypt the certificate. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Choose Commands > Reboot > Reboot > Save and Reboot to reboot the controller for your changes to take effect, Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 34 OL-28744-01 Loading an SSL Certificate (CLI) Loading an SSL Certificate (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Use a password to encrypt the HTTPS certificate in a .PEM-encoded file. The PEM-encoded file is called a web administration certificate file (webadmincert_name.pem). Move the webadmincert_name.pem file to the default directory on your TFTP server. To view the current download settings, enter this command and answer n to the prompt:

transfer download start Information similar to the following appears:

Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Mode........................................... TFTP Data Type...................................... Admin Cert TFTP Server IP................................. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx TFTP Path...................................... <directory path>

TFTP Filename.................................. Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) n Transfer Canceled Use these commands to change the download settings:

transfer download mode tftp transfer download datatype webauthcert transfer download serverip TFTP_server IP_address transfer download path absolute_TFTP_server_path_to_the_update_file transfer download filename webadmincert_name.pem To set the password for the .PEM file so that the operating system can decrypt the web administration SSL key and certificate, enter this command:

transfer download certpassword private_key_password To confirm the current download settings and start the certificate and key download, enter this command and answer y to the prompt:

transfer download start Information similar to the following appears:

Mode........................................... TFTP Data Type...................................... Site Cert TFTP Server IP................................. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx TFTP Path...................................... directory path TFTP Filename.................................. webadmincert_name Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y TFTP Webadmin cert transfer starting. Certificate installed. Please restart the switch (reset system) to use the new certificate. Step 7 To save the SSL certificate, key, and secure web password to NVRAM so that your changes are retained across reboots, enter this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 35 Using the Controller CLI Step 8 save config To reboot the controller, enter this command:

reset system Using the Controller CLI A Cisco UWN solution command-line interface (CLI) is built into each controller. The CLI enables you to use a VT-100 terminal emulation program to locally or remotely configure, monitor, and control individual controllers and its associated lightweight access points. The CLI is a simple text-based, tree-structured interface that allows up to five users with Telnet-capable terminal emulation programs to access the controller. Note See the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Command Reference for information on specific commands. Note If you want to input any strings from the XML configuration into CLI commands, you must enclose the strings in quotation marks. Logging on to the Controller CLI You can access the controller CLI using one of the following two methods:

A direct serial connection to the controller console port A remote console session over Ethernet through the preconfigured service port or the distribution system ports Before you log on to the CLI, configure your connectivity and environment variables based on the type of connection you use. Guidelines and Limitations On Cisco 5500 Series Controllers, you can use either the RJ-45 console port or the USB console port. If you use the USB console port, plug the 5-pin mini Type B connector into the controllers USB console port and the other end of the cable into the PCs USB Type A port. The first time that you connect a Windows PC to the USB console port, you are prompted to install the USB console driver. Follow the installation prompts to install the driver. The USB console driver maps to a COM port on your PC; you then need to map the terminal emulator application to the COM port. See the Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions section for information on enabling Telnet sessions. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 36 OL-28744-01 Logging on to the Controller CLI Using a Local Serial Connection Before You Begin You need these items to connect to the serial port:

A PC that is running a VT-100 terminal emulation program (such as HyperTerminal, ProComm, Minicom, or Tip) A null-modem serial cable To log on to the controller CLI through the serial port, follow these steps:

Step 1 Step 2 Connect one end of a null-modem serial cable to the controllers console port and the other end to your PCs serial port. Start the PCs VT-100 terminal emulation program. Configure the terminal emulation program for these parameters:

9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit No parity No hardware flow control Note Note Minimum serial timeout on Controller is 15 seconds instead of 1 minute. The controller serial port is set for a 9600 baud rate and a short timeout. If you would like to change either of these values, enter config serial baudrate baudrate and config serial timeout timeout to make your changes. If you enter config serial timeout 0, serial sessions never time out. Step 3 When prompted, enter a valid username and password to log into the controller. The administrative username and password that you created in the configuration wizard are case sensitive. Note The default username is admin, and the default password is admin. The CLI displays the root level system prompt:

#(system prompt)>

Note The system prompt can be any alphanumeric string up to 31 characters. You can change it by entering the config prompt command. Using a Remote Ethernet Connection Before You Begin You need these items to connect to a controller remotely:

A PC with access to the controller over the Ethernet network OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 37 Logging on to the Controller CLI The IP address of the controller A VT-100 terminal emulation program or a DOS shell for the Telnet session Note By default, controllers block Telnet sessions. You must use a local connection to the serial port to enable Telnet sessions. Step 1 Verify that your VT-100 terminal emulation program or DOS shell interface is configured with these parameters:

Ethernet address Port 23 Step 2 Step 3 Use the controller IP address to Telnet to the CLI. When prompted, enter a valid username and password to log into the controller. The administrative username and password that you created in the configuration wizard are case sensitive. Note The default username is admin, and the default password is admin. The CLI displays the root level system prompt. Note The system prompt can be any alphanumeric string up to 31 characters. You can change it by entering the config prompt command. Logging Out of the CLI When you finish using the CLI, navigate to the root level and enter logout. The system prompts you to save any changes you made to the volatile RAM. Note The CLI automatically logs you out without saving any changes after 5 minutes of inactivity. You can set the automatic logout from 0 (never log out) to 160 minutes using the config serial timeout command. Navigating the CLI The CLI is organized into five levels:

Root Level Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 38 OL-28744-01 Using the AutoInstall Feature for Controllers Without a Configuration When you log into the CLI, you are at the root level. From the root level, you can enter any full command without first navigating to the correct command level. The following table lists commands you use to navigate the CLI and to perform common tasks. Table 2: Commands for CLI Navigation and Common Tasks Command help

?

command ?

exit Ctrl-Z save config reset system Action At the root level, view system wide navigation commands View commands available at the current level View parameters for a specific command Move down one level Return from any level to the root level At the root level, save configuration changes from active working RAM to nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) so they are retained after reboot At the root level, reset the controller without logging out Using the AutoInstall Feature for Controllers Without a Configuration This section describes how to use the AutoInstall feature for controllers without a configuration. Information About the AutoInstall Feature When you boot up a controller that does not have a configuration, the AutoInstall feature can download a configuration file from a TFTP server and then load the configuration onto the controller automatically. If you create a configuration file on a controller that is already on the network (or through a Prime Infrastructure filter), place that configuration file on a TFTP server, and configure a DHCP server so that a new controller can get an IP address and TFTP server information, the AutoInstall feature can obtain the configuration file for the new controller automatically. When the controller boots, the AutoInstall process starts. The controller does not take any action until AutoInstall is notified that the configuration wizard has started. If the wizard has not started, the controller has a valid configuration. If AutoInstall is notified that the configuration wizard has started (which means that the controller does not have a configuration), AutoInstall waits for an additional 30 seconds. This time period gives you an opportunity to respond to the first prompt from the configuration wizard:

Would you like to terminate autoinstall? [yes]:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 39 Guidelines and Limitations When the 30-second abort timeout expires, AutoInstall starts the DHCP client. You can abort the AutoInstall task even after this 30-second timeout if you enter Yes at the prompt. However, AutoInstall cannot be aborted if the TFTP task has locked the flash and is in the process of downloading and installing a valid configuration file. Guidelines and Limitations AutoInstall uses the following interfaces:

Cisco 5500 Series Controllers eth0Service port (untagged) dtl0Gigabit port 1 through the NPU (untagged) Obtaining an IP Address Through DHCP and Downloading a Configuration File from a TFTP Server AutoInstall attempts to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server until the DHCP process is successful or until you abort the AutoInstall process. The first interface to successfully obtain an IP address from the DHCP server registers with the AutoInstall task. The registration of this interface causes AutoInstall to begin the process of obtaining TFTP server information and downloading the configuration file. Following the acquisition of the DHCP IP address for an interface, AutoInstall begins a short sequence of events to determine the host name of the controller and the IP address of the TFTP server. Each phase of this sequence gives preference to explicitly configured information over default or implied information and to explicit host names over explicit IP addresses. The process is as follows:

If at least one Domain Name System (DNS) server IP address is learned through DHCP, AutoInstall creates a /etc/resolv.conf file. This file includes the domain name and the list of DNS servers that have been received. The Domain Name Server option provides the list of DNS servers, and the Domain Name option provides the domain name. If the domain servers are not on the same subnet as the controller, static route entries are installed for each domain server. These static routes point to the gateway that is learned through the DHCP Router option. The host name of the controller is determined in this order by one of the following:

If the DHCP Host Name option was received, this information (truncated at the first period [.]) is used as the host name for the controller. A reverse DNS lookup is performed on the controller IP address. If DNS returns a hostname, this name (truncated at the first period [.]) is used as the hostname for the controller. The IP address of the TFTP server is determined in this order by one of the following:

If AutoInstall received the DHCP TFTP Server Name option, AutoInstall performs a DNS lookup on this server name. If the DNS lookup is successful, the returned IP address is used as the IP address of the TFTP server. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 40 OL-28744-01 Guidelines and Limitations If the DHCP Server Host Name (sname) text box is valid, AutoInstall performs a DNS lookup on this name. If the DNS lookup is successful, the IP address that is returned is used as the IP address of the TFTP server. If AutoInstall received the DHCP TFTP Server Address option, this address is used as the IP address of the TFTP server. AutoInstall performs a DNS lookup on the default TFTP server name (cisco-wlc-tftp). If the DNS lookup is successful, the IP address that is received is used as the IP address of the TFTP server. If the DHCP server IP address (siaddr) text box is nonzero, this address is used as the IP address of the TFTP server. The limited broadcast address (255.255.255.255) is used as the IP address of the TFTP server. If the TFTP server is not on the same subnet as the controller, a static route (/32) is installed for the IP address of the TFTP server. This static route points to the gateway that is learned through the DHCP Router option. Selecting a Configuration File After the hostname and TFTP server have been determined, AutoInstall attempts to download a configuration file. AutoInstall performs three full download iterations on each interface that obtains a DHCP IP address. If the interface cannot download a configuration file successfully after three attempts, the interface does not attempt further. The first configuration file that is downloaded and installed successfully triggers a reboot of the controller. After the reboot, the controller runs the newly downloaded configuration. AutoInstall searches for configuration files in the order in which the names are listed:

The filename that is provided by the DHCP Boot File Name option The filename that is provided by the DHCP File text box host name-confg host name.cfg base MAC address-confg (for example, 0011.2233.4455-confg) serial number-confg ciscowlc-confg ciscowlc.cfg AutoInstall runs through this list until it finds a configuration file. It stops running if it does not find a configuration file after it cycles through this list three times on each registered interface. Note The downloaded configuration file can be a complete configuration, or it can be a minimal configuration that provides enough information for the controller to be managed by the Cisco Prime Infrastructure. Full configuration can then be deployed directly from the Prime Infrastructure. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 41 Guidelines and Limitations Note AutoInstall does not expect the switch connected to the controller to be configured for either channels. AutoInstall works with a service port in LAG configuration. Note Cisco Prime Infrastructure provides AutoInstall capabilities for controllers. A Cisco Prime Infrastructure administrator can create a filter that includes the host name, the MAC address, or the serial number of the controller and associate a group of templates (a configuration group) to this filter rule. The Prime Infrastructure pushes the initial configuration to the controller when the controller boots up initially. After the controller is discovered, the Prime Infrastructure pushes the templates that are defined in the configuration group. For more information about the AutoInstall feature and Cisco Prime Infrastructure, see the Cisco Prime Infrastructure documentation. Example: AutoInstall Operation The following is an example of an AutoInstall process from start to finish:

Welcome to the Cisco Wizard Configuration Tool Use the '-' character to backup Would you like to terminate autoinstall? [yes]:

AUTO-INSTALL: starting now... AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' - setting DHCP TFTP Filename ==> 'abcd-confg'

AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' - setting DHCP TFTP Server IP ==> 1.100.108.2 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' - setting DHCP siaddr ==> 1.100.108.2 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' - setting DHCP Domain Server[0] ==> 1.100.108.2 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' - setting DHCP Domain Name ==> 'engtest.com'

AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' - setting DHCP yiaddr ==> 172.19.29.253 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' - setting DHCP Netmask ==> 255.255.255.0 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' - setting DHCP Gateway ==> 172.19.29.1 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'service-port' registered AUTO-INSTALL: interation 1 -- interface 'service-port'

AUTO-INSTALL: DNS reverse lookup 172.19.29.253 ===> 'wlc-1'

AUTO-INSTALL: hostname 'wlc-1'

AUTO-INSTALL: TFTP server 1.100.108.2 (from DHCP Option 150) AUTO-INSTALL: attempting download of 'abcd-confg'

AUTO-INSTALL: TFTP status - 'TFTP Config transfer starting.' (2) AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP file ==> 'bootfile1'

AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP TFTP Filename ==> 'bootfile2-confg'

AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP siaddr ==> 1.100.108.2 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP Domain Server[0] ==> 1.100.108.2 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP Domain Server[1] ==> 1.100.108.3 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP Domain Server[2] ==> 1.100.108.4 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP Domain Name ==> 'engtest.com'

AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP yiaddr ==> 1.100.108.238 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP Netmask ==> 255.255.254.0 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' - setting DHCP Gateway ==> 1.100.108.1 AUTO-INSTALL: interface 'management' registered AUTO-INSTALL: TFTP status - 'Config file transfer failed - Error from server: File not found' (3) AUTO-INSTALL: attempting download of 'wlc-1-confg'

AUTO-INSTALL: TFTP status - 'TFTP Config transfer starting.' (2) AUTO-INSTALL: TFTP status - 'TFTP receive complete... updating configuration.' (2) AUTO-INSTALL: TFTP status - 'TFTP receive complete... storing in flash.' (2) AUTO-INSTALL: TFTP status - 'System being reset.' (2) Resetting system Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 42 OL-28744-01 Managing the Controller System Date and Time Managing the Controller System Date and Time This section describes how to manage the date and time of a controller system. Information About Controller System Date and Time You can configure the controller system date and time at the time of configuring the controller using the configuration wizard. If you did not configure the system date and time through the configuration wizard or if you want to change your configuration, you can follow the instructions in this section to configure the controller to obtain the date and time from a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server or to configure the date and time manually. Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) is used as the standard for setting the time zone on the controller. You can also configure an authentication mechanism between various NTP servers. Guidelines and Limitations If you are configuring wIPS, you must set the controller time zone to UTC. Cisco Aironet lightweight access points might not connect to the controller if the date and time are not set properly. Set the current date and time on the controller before allowing the access points to connect to it. You can configure an authentication channel between the controller and the NTP server. Configuring an NTP Server to Obtain the Date and Time Each NTP server IP address is added to the controller database. Each controller searches for an NTP server and obtains the current time upon reboot and at each user-defined polling interval (daily to weekly). Use these commands to configure an NTP server to obtain the date and time:

To specify the NTP server for the controller, enter this command:

config time ntp server index ip_address To specify the polling interval (in seconds), enter this command:

config time ntp interval OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 43 Managing the Controller System Date and Time Configuring NTP Authentication (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Choose Controller > NTP > Servers to open the NTP Servers page. Click New to add an NTP server. Choose a server priority from the Server Index (Priority) drop-down list. Enter the NTP server IP address in the Server IP Address text box. Enable NTP server authentication by selecting the NTP Server Authentication check box. Click Apply. Choose Controller > NTP > Keys. Click New to create a key. Enter the key index in the Key Index text box. Choose the key format from the Key Format drop-down list. Enter the key in the Key text box. Click Apply. Configuring NTP Authentication (CLI) Note By default, MD5 is used. config time ntp auth enable server-index key-index config time ntp auth disable server-index config time ntp key-auth add key-index md5 key-format key Delete an authentication key by entering this command:

config time ntp key-auth delete key-index View the list of NTP key Indices by entering this command:

show ntp-keys Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 44 OL-28744-01 Managing the Controller System Date and Time Configuring the Date and Time (GUI) Step 1 Choose Commands > Set Time to open the Set Time page. Figure 16: Set Time Page The current date and time appear at the top of the page. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 In the Timezone area, choose your local time zone from the Location drop-down list. Note When you choose a time zone that uses Daylight Saving Time (DST), the controller automatically sets its system clock to reflect the time change when DST occurs. In the United States, DST starts on the second Sunday in March and ends on the first Sunday in November. You cannot set the time zone delta on the controller GUI. However, if you do so on the controller CLI, the change is reflected in the Delta Hours and Mins text boxes on the controller GUI. Note Click Set Timezone to apply your changes. In the Date area, choose the current local month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists, and enter the year in the Year text box. In the Time area, choose the current local hour from the Hour drop-down list, and enter the minutes and seconds in the Minutes and Seconds text boxes. Note If you change the time zone location after setting the date and time, the values in the Time area are updated to reflect the time in the new time zone location. For example, if the controller is currently configured for noon Eastern time and you change the time zone to Pacific time, the time automatically changes to 9:00 a.m. Step 6 Step 7 Click Set Date and Time to apply your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 45 Managing the Controller System Date and Time Configuring the Date and Time (CLI) Step 1 Configure the current local date and time in GMT on the controller by entering this command:

config time manual mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss Note When setting the time, the current local time is entered in terms of GMT and as a value between 00:00 and 24:00. For example, if it is 8:00 a.m. Pacific time in the United States, you would enter 16:00 because the Pacific time zone is 8 hours behind GMT. Step 2 Perform one of the following to set the time zone for the controller:

Set the time zone location in order to have Daylight Saving Time (DST) set automatically when it occurs by entering this command:

config time timezone location location_index where location_index is a number representing one of the following time zone locations:

1 (GMT-12:00) International Date Line West 2 (GMT-11:00) Samoa 3 (GMT-10:00) Hawaii 4 (GMT-9:00) Alaska 5 (GMT-8:00) Pacific Time (US and Canada) 6 (GMT-7:00) Mountain Time (US and Canada) 7 (GMT-6:00) Central Time (US and Canada) 8 (GMT-5:00) Eastern Time (US and Canada) 9 (GMT-4:00) Atlantic Time (Canada) 10 (GMT-3:00) Buenos Aires (Argentina) 11 (GMT-2:00) Mid-Atlantic 12 (GMT-1:00) Azores 13 (GMT) London, Lisbon, Dublin, Edinburgh (default value) 14 (GMT +1:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Vienna 15 (GMT +2:00) Jerusalem 16 (GMT +3:00) Baghdad 17 (GMT +4:00) Muscat, Abu Dhabi 18 (GMT +4:30) Kabul 19 (GMT +5:00) Karachi, Islamabad, Tashkent 20 (GMT +5:30) Colombo, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi 21 (GMT +5:45) Katmandu 22 (GMT +6:00) Almaty, Novosibirsk Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 46 OL-28744-01 Managing the Controller System Date and Time 23 (GMT +6:30) Rangoon 24 (GMT +7:00) Saigon, Hanoi, Bangkok, Jakarta 25 (GMT +8:00) Hong Kong, Beijing, Chongqing 26 (GMT +9:00) Tokyo, Osaka, Sapporo 27 (GMT +9:30) Darwin 28 (GMT+10:00) Sydney, Melbourne, Canberra 29 (GMT+11:00) Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia 30 (GMT+12:00) Kamchatka, Marshall Is., Fiji 31 (GMT+12:00) Auckland (New Zealand) Note If you enter this command, the controller automatically sets its system clock to reflect DST when it occurs. In the United States, DST starts on the second Sunday in March and ends on the first Sunday in November. Manually set the time zone so that DST is not set automatically by entering this command:

config time timezone delta_hours delta_mins where delta_hours is the local hour difference from GMT, and delta_mins is the local minute difference from GMT. When manually setting the time zone, enter the time difference of the local current time zone with respect to GMT

(+/). For example, Pacific time in the United States is 8 hours behind GMT. Therefore, it is entered as 8. Note You can manually set the time zone and prevent DST from being set only on the controller CLI. Step 3 Step 4 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Verify that the controller shows the current local time with respect to the local time zone by entering this command:

show time Information similar to the following appears:

Time.................................... Thu Apr 7 13:56:37 2011 Timezone delta........................... 0:0 Timezone location....................... (GMT +5:30) Colombo, New Delhi, Chennai, Kolkata NTP Servers NTP Polling Interval......................... 3600 Index

------- ---------------------------------------------------------------

NTP Msg Auth Status NTP Key Index NTP Server 1 1 209.165.200.225 AUTH SUCCESS Note If you configured the time zone location, the Timezone Delta value is set to 0:0. If you manually configured the time zone using the time zone delta, the Timezone Location is blank. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 47 Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions This section describes how to configure Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) sessions. Information About Telnet and SSH Telnet is a network protocol used to provide access to the controllers CLI. Secure Shell (SSH) is a more secure version of Telnet that uses data encryption and a secure channel for data transfer. You can use the controller GUI or CLI to configure Telnet and SSH sessions. Restrictions for Telnet and SSH Only the FIPS approved algorithm aes128-cbc is supported when using SSH to control WLANs. The controller does not support raw Telnet mode. Configuring Telnet and SSH Sessions (GUI) Step 1 Choose Management > Telnet-SSH to open the Telnet-SSH Configuration page. Figure 17: Telnet-SSH Configuration Page Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 48 OL-28744-01 Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 In the Telnet Login Timeout text box, enter the number of minutes that a Telnet session is allowed to remain inactive before being terminated. The valid range is 0 to 160 minutes (inclusive), and the default value is 5 minutes. A value of 0 indicates no timeout. From the Maximum Number of Sessions drop-down list, choose the number of simultaneous Telnet or SSH sessions allowed. The valid range is 0 to 5 sessions (inclusive), and the default value is 5 sessions. A value of zero indicates that Telnet/SSH sessions are disallowed. From the Allow New Telnet Sessions drop-down list, choose Yes or No to allow or disallow new Telnet sessions on the controller. The default value is No. From the \ drop-down list, choose Yes or No to allow or disallow new SSH sessions on the controller. The default value is Yes. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. To see a summary of the Telnet configuration settings, choose Management > Summary. The Summary page appears. Figure 18: Summary Page This page shows whether additional Telnet and SSH sessions are permitted. Configuring Telnet and SSH Sessions (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Allow or disallow new Telnet sessions on the controller by entering this command:

config network telnet {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. Allow or disallow new SSH sessions on the controller by entering this command:

config network ssh {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 49 Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 The default value is enabled. Specify the number of minutes that a Telnet session is allowed to remain inactive before being terminated by entering this command:

config sessions timeout timeout where timeout is a value between 0 and 160 minutes (inclusive). The default value is 5 minutes. A value of 0 indicates no timeout. Specify the number of simultaneous Telnet or SSH sessions allowed by entering this command:

config sessions maxsessions session_num where session_num is a value between 0 and 5 (inclusive). The default value is 5 sessions. A value of zero indicates that Telnet/SSH sessions are disallowed. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the Telnet and SSH configuration settings by entering this command:

show network summary Information similar to the following appears:

RF-Network Name............................. TestNetwork1 Web Mode.................................... Enable Secure Web Mode............................. Enable Secure Web Mode Cipher-Option High.......... Disable Secure Web Mode Cipher-Option SSLv2......... Disable Secure Shell (ssh).......................... Enable Telnet................................... Disable

... Step 7 See the Telnet session configuration settings by entering this command:

show sessions Information similar to the following appears:

CLI Login Timeout (minutes)............ 5 Maximum Number of CLI Sessions....... 5 Step 8 See all active Telnet sessions by entering this command:

show loginsession Information similar to the following appears:

User Name ID Session Time

-- --------------- --------------- ------------ ------------

00 Connection From Idle Time 00:19:04 00:00:00 EIA-232 admin Step 9 You can close all active Telnet sessions or a specific Telnet session by entering this command:

config loginsession close {all | session_id}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 50 OL-28744-01 Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH_old The controller supports the use of the Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) protocols to troubleshoot lightweight access points. Using these protocols makes debugging easier, especially when the access point is unable to connect to the controller. To avoid potential conflicts and security threats to the network, the following commands are unavailable while a Telnet or SSH session is enabled: config terminal, telnet, ssh, rsh, ping, traceroute, clear, clock, crypto, delete, fsck, lwapp, mkdir, radius, release, reload, rename, renew, rmdir, save, set, test, upgrade. Commands available during a Telnet or SSH session include debug, disable, enable, help, led, login, logout, more, no debug, show, systat, undebug and where. Note For instructions on configuring Telnet or SSH SSH sessions on the controller, see the Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions section. Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the access point for which you want to enable Telnet or SSH. Choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Select the Telnet check box to enable Telnet connectivity on this access point. The default value is unchecked. Select the SSH check box to enable SSH connectivity on this access point. The default value is unchecked. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Enable Telnet or SSH connectivity on an access point by entering this command:

config ap {telnet | ssh} enable Cisco_AP The default value is disabled. Note Disable Telnet or SSH connectivity on an access point by entering this command: config ap {telnet | ssh}

disable Cisco_AP Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See whether Telnet or SSH is enabled on an access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 51 Managing the Controller Wirelessly Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 5 Cisco AP Name.................................... AP33 Country code..................................... Multiple Countries:US,AE,AR,AT,AU,BH Reg. Domain allowed by Country................... 802.11bg:-ABCENR 802.11a:-ABCEN AP Country code.................................. US - United States AP Regulatory Domain............................. 802.11bg:-A 802.11a:-A Switch Port Number .............................. 2 MAC Address...................................... 00:19:2f:11:16:7a IP Address Configuration......................... Static IP assigned IP Address....................................... 10.22.8.133 IP NetMask....................................... 255.255.248.0 Gateway IP Addr.................................. 10.22.8.1 Domain........................................... Name Server...................................... Telnet State..................................... Enabled Ssh State........................................ Enabled

... Managing the Controller Wirelessly You can monitor and configure controllers using a wireless client. This feature is supported for all management tasks except uploads from and downloads to the controller. Before you can open the GUI or the CLI from a wireless client device, you must configure the controller to allow the connection. Enabling Wireless Connections (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Log onto the GUI. Choose Management > Mgmt Via Wireless page. Enable the Controller Management to be accessible from wireless clients. Click Apply. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 52 OL-28744-01 Managing the Controller Wirelessly Enabling Wireless Connections (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Log onto the CLI. Enter the config network mgmt-via-wireless enable command. Use a wireless client to associate to a lightweight access point connected to the controller. On the wireless client, open a Telnet session to the controller, or browse to the controller GUI. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 53 Managing the Controller Wirelessly Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 54 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 3 Managing Licenses Installing and Configuring Licenses, page 55 Rehosting Licenses, page 67 Configuring the License Agent, page 71 Installing and Configuring Licenses Information About Installing and Configuring Licenses You can order Cisco 5500 Series Controllers with support for 12, 25, 50, 100, 250 or 500 access points as the controllers base capacity. You can add additional access point capacity through capacity adder licenses available at 25, 50, 100 and 250 access point capacities. You can add the capacity adder licenses to any base license in any combination to arrive at the maximum capacity of 500 access points. The base and adder licenses are supported through both rehosting and RMAs. The base license supports the standard base software set, and the premium software set is included as part of the base feature set, which includes this functionality:

Datagram Transport Layer Security (DTLS) data encryption for added security across remote WAN and LAN links. The availability of data DTLS is as follows:

Cisco 5500 Series ControllerThe Cisco 5500 Series Controller is available with two licensing options: One with data DTLS capabilities and another image without data DTLS. 2500, WiSM2These platforms by default do not contain DTLS. To turn on data DTLS, you must install a license. These platforms will have a single image with data DTLS turned off. To use data DTLS, you must have a license. Support for OfficeExtend access points, which are used for secure mobile teleworking. All features included in a Wireless LAN Controller WPLUS license are now included in the base license. There are no changes to Cisco Prime Infrastructure BASE and PLUS licensing. These WPlus license features are included in the base license:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 55 Installing and Configuring Licenses OfficeExtend AP Enterprise Mesh CAPWAP Data Encryption For information about upgrade and capacity adder licenses, see the product data sheet of your controller model. Restrictions for Using Licenses The following are the restrictions you must keep in mind when using licenses for the controllers:

The licensing change can affect features on your wireless LAN when you upgrade or downgrade software releases, so you should be aware of these guidelines:

If you have a WPlus license and you upgrade from 6.0.x.x to 7.x.x.x, your license file contains both Basic and WPlus license features. There is no disruption in feature availability and operation. If you have a WPlus license and you downgrade from 7.x.x.x to 6.0.196.0 or 6.0.188.0 or 6.0.182.0, your license file contains only base license, and you will lose all WPlus features. If you have a base license and you downgrade from 6.0.196.0 to 6.0.188.0 or 6.0.182.0, when you downgrade, you lose all WPlus features. In the controller software 7.0.116.0 and later releases, the AP association trap is ciscoLwappApAssociated. In prior releases, the trap was bsnAPAssociated. The ap-count licenses and their corresponding image-based licenses are installed together. The controller keeps track of the licensed access point count and does not allow more than the number of access points to associate to it. The Cisco 5500 Series Controller is shipped with both permanent and evaluation base and base-ap-count licenses. If desired, you can activate the evaluation licenses, which are designed for temporary use and set to expire after 60 days. No licensing steps are required after you receive your Cisco 5500 Series Controller because the licenses you ordered are installed at the factory. In addition, licenses and product authorization keys (PAKs) are preregistered to serial numbers. However, as your wireless network evolves, you might want to add support for additional access points or upgrade from the standard software set to the base software set. To do so, you must obtain and install an upgrade license. Obtaining an Upgrade or Capacity Adder License This section describes how to get an upgrade or capacity adder license. Information About Obtaining an Upgrade or Capacity Adder License A certificate with a product authorization key (PAK) is required before you can obtain an upgrade license. You can use the capacity adder licenses to increase the number of access points supported by the controller up to a maximum of 500 access points. The capacity adder licenses are available in access point capacities of 10, 25, 50, 100 and 250 access points. You can add these licenses to any of the base capacity licenses of 12, 25, 50, 100 and 250 access points. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 56 OL-28744-01 Installing and Configuring Licenses For example, if your controller was initially ordered with support for 100 access points (base license AIR-CT5508-100-K9), you could increase the capacity to 500 access points by purchasing a 250 access point, 100 access point, and a 50 access point additive capacity license (LIC-CT5508-250A, LIC-CT5508-100A, and LIC-CT5508-50A). You can find more information on ordering capacity adder licenses at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/

US/products/ps10315/products_data_sheets_list.html Note If you skip any tiers when upgrading (for example, if you do not install the -25U and -50U licenses along with the -100U), the license registration for the upgraded capacity fails. For a single controller, you can order different upgrade licenses in one transaction (for example, -25U, -50U,

-100U, and -250U), for which you receive one PAK with one license. Then you have only one license (instead of four) to install on your controller. If you have multiple controllers and want to upgrade all of them, you can order multiple quantities of each upgrade license in one transaction (for example, you can order 10 each of the -25U, -50U, -100U, and -250 upgrade licenses), for which you receive one PAK with one license. You can continue to register the PAK for multiple controllers until it is exhausted. For more information about the base license SKUs and capacity adder licenses, see the respective controllers data sheet. Obtaining and Registering a PAK Certificate Step 1 Step 2 Order the PAK certificate for an upgrade license through your Cisco channel partner or your Cisco sales representative, or order it online at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/go/ordering If you are ordering online, begin by choosing the primary upgrade SKU L-LIC-CT5508-UPG or LIC CT5508-UPG. Then, choose any number of the following options to upgrade one or more controllers under one PAK. After you receive the certificate, use one of the following methods to register the PAK:

Cisco License Manager (CLM)This method automates the process of obtaining licenses and deploying them on Cisco devices. For deployments with more than five controllers, we recommend using CLM to register PAKs and install licenses. You can also use CLM to rehost or RMA a license. Note You cannot use CLM to change the licensed feature set or activate an ap-count evaluation license. To perform these operations, you must follow the instructions in the Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License section. Because you can use CLM to perform all other license operations, you can disregard the remaining licensing information in this chapter except these two sections and the Configuring the License Agent section if you want your controller to use HTTP to communicate with CLM. You can download the CLM software and access user documentation at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/

go/clm Note Licensing portalThis alternative method enables you to manually obtain and install licenses on your controller. If you want to use the licensing portal to register the PAK, follow the instructions in Step 3. Step 3 Use the licensing portal to register the PAK as follows:

a) Go to http://tools.cisco.com/SWIFT/Licensing/PrivateRegistrationServlet OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 57 Installing and Configuring Licenses b) On the main Product License Registration page, enter the PAK mailed with the certificate in the Product Authorization Key (PAK) text box and click Submit. c) On the Validate Features page, enter the number of licenses that you want to register in the Qty text box and click Update. d) To determine the controllers product ID and serial number, choose Controller > Inventory on the controller GUI or enter the show license udi command on the controller CLI. Information similar to the following appears on the controller CLI:

Device#

------- ------------------- --------------- -----------------------

*0 AIR-CT5508-K9:FCW1308L030 AIR-CT5508-K9 CW1308L030 UDI PID SN e) On the Designate Licensee page, enter the product ID and serial number of the controller on which you plan to install the license, read and accept the conditions of the end-user license agreement (EULA), complete the rest of the text boxes on this page, and click Submit. f) On the Finish and Submit page, verify that all information is correct and click Submit. g) When a message appears indicating that the registration is complete, click Download License. The license is e-mailed within 1 hour to the address that you specified. h) When the e-mail arrives, follow the instructions provided. i) Copy the license file to your TFTP server. Installing a License Installing a License (GUI) Choose Management > Software Activation > Commands to open the License Commands page. From the Action drop-down list, choose Install License. The Install License from a File section appears. In the File Name to Install text box, enter the path to the license (*.lic) on the TFTP server. Click Install License. A message appears to show whether the license was installed successfully. If the installation fails, the message provides the reason for the failure, such as the license is an existing license, the path was not found, the license does not belong to this device, you do not have correct permissions for the license, and so on. If the end-user license agreement (EULA) acceptance dialog box appears, read the agreement and click Accept to accept the terms of the agreement. Note Typically, you are prompted to accept the EULA for evaluation, extension, and rehost licenses. The EULA is also required for permanent licenses, but it is accepted during license generation. Save a backup copy of all installed licenses as follows:

a) From the Action drop-down list, choose Save License. b) In the File Name to Save text box, enter the path on the TFTP server where you want the licenses to be saved. Note You cannot save evaluation licenses. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 58 OL-28744-01 Installing and Configuring Licenses c) Click Save Licenses. Reboot the controller. Step 7 Installing a License (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Install a license on the controller by entering this command:

license install url where url is tftp://server_ip/path/filename. Note To remove a license from the controller, enter the license clear license_name command. For example, you might want to delete an expired evaluation license or any unused license. You cannot delete unexpired evaluation licenses, the permanent base image license, or licenses that are in use by the controller. If you are prompted to accept the end-user license agreement (EULA), read and accept the terms of the agreement. Note Typically, you are prompted to accept the EULA for evaluation, extension, and rehost licenses. The EULA is also required for permanent licenses, but it is accepted during license generation. Add comments to a license or delete comments from a license by entering this command:

license comment {add | delete} license_name comment_string Save a backup copy of all installed licenses by entering this command:

license save url where url is tftp://server_ip/path/filename. Reboot the controller by entering this command:

reset system. Viewing Licenses Viewing Licenses (GUI) Step 1 Choose Management > Software Activation > Licenses to open the Licenses page. This page lists all of the licenses installed on the controller. For each license, it shows the license type, expiration, count

(the maximum number of access points allowed for this license), priority (low, medium, or high), and status (in use, not in use, inactive, or EULA not accepted). Note Controller platforms do not support the status of grace period or extension as a license type. The license status will always show evaluation even if a grace period or an extension evaluation license is installed. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 59 Installing and Configuring Licenses Note If you ever want to remove a license from the controller, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the license and click Remove. For example, you might want to delete an expired evaluation license or any unused license. You cannot delete unexpired evaluation licenses, the permanent base image license, or licenses that are in use by the controller. Step 2 Click the link for the desired license to view more details for a particular license. The License Detail page appears. This page shows the following additional information for the license:

The license type (permanent, evaluation, or extension) The license version The status of the license (in use, not in use, inactive, or EULA not accepted) The length of time before the license expires Note Permanent licenses never expire. Whether the license is a built-in license The maximum number of access points allowed for this license The number of access points currently using this license Step 3 Step 4 If you want to enter a comment for this license, type it in the Comment text box and click Apply. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Viewing Licenses (CLI) Before You Begin See the license level, license type, and number of access points licensed on the controller by entering this command:

show sysinfo Information similar to the following appears:

Manufacturer's Name.............................. Cisco Systems Inc. Product Name..................................... Cisco Controller Product Version.................................. 7.0 RTOS Version..................................... 7.0 Bootloader Version............................... 5.2 Emergency Image Version.......................... N/A Build Type....................................... DATA + WPS System Name...................................... Cisco 69 System Location.................................. na System Contact................................... abc@cisco.com System ObjectID.................................. 1.3.6.1.4.1.14179.1.1.4.3 IP Address....................................... 10.10.10.10 System Up Time................................... 3 days 1 hrs 12 mins 42 secs System Timezone Location......................... CurrentBoot License Level..........................base CurrentBoot License Type...........................Permanent NextBoot License Level............................base NextBoot License Type.............................Permanent Operating Environment............................ Commercial (0 to 40 C) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 60 OL-28744-01 Installing and Configuring Licenses Internal Temp Alarm Limits....................... 0 to 65 C Internal Temperature............................. +40 C State of 802.11b Network......................... Enabled State of 802.11a Network......................... Enabled Number of WLANs.................................. 4 Number of Active Clients......................... 0 Burned-in MAC Address............................ 00:1A:6D:DD:1E:40 Crypto Accelerator 1............................. Absent Crypto Accelerator 2............................. Absent Power Supply 1................................... Absent Power Supply 2................................... Present, OK Maximum number of APs supported.................. 12 Note The Operating Environment and Internal Temp Alarm Limits data are not displayed for Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controllers. See a brief summary of all active licenses installed on the controller by entering this command:

show license summary Information similar to the following appears:

Period left: 0 minute 0 second Feature: base Index 1 Feature: wplus Index 2 Feature: wplus-ap-count Period left: 0 minute 0 second Index3 Period left: Life time License Type: Permanent License State: Active, In Use License Count: Non-Counted License Priority: Medium Index 4 Feature: base-ap-count Period left: 6 weeks, 4 days License Type: Evaluation License State: Active, In Use License Count: 250/250/0 License Priority: High See all of the licenses installed on the controller by entering this command:

show license all Information similar to the following appears:

License Store: Primary License Storage StoreIndex: 1 Feature: base Version: 1.0 License Type: Permanent License State: Active, Not in Use License Count: Non-Counted License Priority: Medium StoreIndex: 3 Feature: base-ap-count License Type: Evaluation License State: Active, In Use Version: 1.0 Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 3 days License Count: 250/0/0 License Priority: High See the details for a particular license by entering this command:

show license detail license_name OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 61 Installing and Configuring Licenses Information similar to the following appears:

Index: 1 Feature: base-ap-count License Type: Permanent License State: Active, Not in Use License Count: 12/0/0 License Priority: Medium Store Index: 0 Store Name: Primary License Storage Version: 1.0 Index: 2 Feature: base-ap-count Version: 1.0 License Type: Evaluation License State: Inactive Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 4 days License Count: 250/0/0 License Priority: Low Store Index: 3 Store Name: Evaluation License Storage See all expiring, evaluation, permanent, or in-use licenses by entering this command:

show license {expiring | evaluation | permanent | in-use}

Information similar to the following appears for the show license in-use command:

Version: 1.0 StoreIndex: 2 Feature: base-ap-count License Type: Permanent License State: Active, In Use License Count: 12/12/0 License Priority: Medium License Type: Permanent License State: Active, In Use License Count: Non-Counted License Priority: Medium StoreIndex: 3 Feature: base Version: 1.0 Note Controller platforms do not support the status of grace period or extension as a license type. The license status will always show evaluation even if a grace period or an extension evaluation license is installed. See the maximum number of access points allowed for this license on the controller, the number of access points currently joined to the controller, and the number of access points that can still join the controller by entering this command:

show license capacity Information similar to the following appears:

250 Max Count

---------

Current Count

-------------

Licensed Feature

----------------

AP Count See statistics for all licenses on the controller by entering this command:

show license statistics See a summary of license-enabled features by entering this command:

show license feature 4 Remaining Count

---------------

246 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 62 OL-28744-01 Installing and Configuring Licenses Troubleshooting Licensing Issues Configure debugging of license agent by entering this command:

debug license agent {errors | all} {enable | disable}

Configure debugging of licensing core events and core errors by entering this command:

debug license core {all | errors | events} {enable | disable}

Configure debugging of licensing errors by entering this command:

debug license errors {enable | disable}

Configure debugging of licensing events by entering this command:

debug license events {enable | disable}

Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License Information About Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License If you are considering upgrading to a license with a higher access point count, you can try an evaluation license before upgrading to a permanent version of the license. For example, if you are using a permanent license with a 50-access-point count and want to try an evaluation license with a 100-access-point count, you can try out the evaluation license for 60 days. AP-count evaluation licenses are set to low priority by default so that the controller uses the ap-count permanent license. If you want to try an evaluation license with an increased access point count, you must change its priority to high. If you no longer want to have this higher capacity, you can lower the priority of the ap-count evaluation license, which forces the controller to use the permanent license. Note To prevent disruptions in operation, the controller does not switch licenses when an evaluation license expires. You must reboot the controller in order to return to a permanent license. Following a reboot, the controller defaults to the same feature set level as the expired evaluation license. If no permanent license at the same feature set level is installed, the controller uses a permanent license at another level or an unexpired evaluation license. Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License (GUI) Choose Management > Software Activation > Licenses to open the Licenses page. The Status column shows which licenses are currently in use, and the Priority column shows the current priority of each license. Activate an ap-count evaluation license as follows:

a) Click the link for the ap-count evaluation license that you want to activate. The License Detail page appears. b) Choose High from the Priority drop-down list and click Set Priority. Note You can set the priority only for ap-count evaluation licenses. AP-count permanent licenses always have a medium priority, which cannot be configured. Step 1 Step 2 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 63 Installing and Configuring Licenses c) Click OK when prompted to confirm your decision about changing the priority of the license. d) When the EULA appears, read the terms of the agreement and then click Accept. e) When prompted to reboot the controller, click OK. f) Reboot the controller in order for the priority change to take effect. g) Click Licenses to open the Licenses page and verify that the ap-count evaluation license now has a high priority and is in use. You can use the evaluation license until it expires. Step 3 If you decide to stop using the ap-count evaluation license and want to revert to using an ap-count permanent license, follow these steps:

a) On the Licenses page, click the link for the ap-count evaluation license that is in use. b) Choose Low from the Priority drop-down list and click Set Priority. Note You can set the priority only for ap-count evaluation licenses. AP-count permanent licenses always have a medium priority, which cannot be configured. c) Click OK when prompted to confirm your decision about changing the priority of the license. d) When the EULA appears, read the terms of the agreement and then click Accept. e) When prompted to reboot the controller, click OK. f) Reboot the controller in order for the priority change to take effect. g) Click Licenses to open the Licenses page and verify that the ap-count evaluation license now has a low priority and is not in use. Instead, the ap-count permanent license should be in use. Activating an AP-Count Evaluation License (CLI) Step 1 See the current status of all the licenses on your controller by entering this command:

show license all Information similar to the following appears:

License Store: Primary License Storage StoreIndex: 0 Feature: base-ap-count Version: 1.0 StoreIndex: 1 Feature: base Version: 1.0 License Type: Permanent License State: Active, In Use License Count: 12/0/0 License Priority: Medium License Type: Permanent License State: Active, In Use License Count: Non-Counted License Priority: Medium License Type: Evaluation License State: Inactive StoreIndex: 2 Feature: base Version: 1.0 Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 4 days License Count: Non-Counted License Priority: Low StoreIndex: 3 Feature: base-ap-count Version: 1.0 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 64 OL-28744-01 Installing and Configuring Licenses License Type: Evaluation License State: Inactive Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 4 days License Count: 250/0/0 License Priority: Low The License State text box shows the licenses that are in use, and the License Priority text box shows the current priority of each license. Note In the 7.2.110.0 release, the command output displays the full in-use count for active base-ap-count license even though there are no APs connected. Step 2 Activate an ap-count evaluation license as follows:

a) Raise the priority of the base-ap-count evaluation license by entering this command:

license modify priority license_name high Note You can set the priority only for ap-count evaluation licenses. AP-count permanent licenses always have a medium priority, which cannot be configured. b) Reboot the controller in order for the priority change to take effect by entering this command:

reset system c) Verify that the ap-count evaluation license now has a high priority and is in use by entering this command:

show license all You can use the evaluation license until it expires. Step 3 If you decide to stop using the ap-count evaluation license and want to revert to using an ap-count permanent license, follow these steps:

a) Lower the priority of the ap-count evaluation license by entering this command:

license modify priority license_name low b) Reboot the controller in order for the priority change to take effect by entering this command:

reset system c) Verify that the ap-count evaluation license now has a low priority and is not in use by entering this command:

show license all Instead, the ap-count permanent license should be in use. Configuring Right to Use Licensing Information About Right to Use Licensing Right to Use (RTU) licensing is a model in which licenses are not tied to a unique device identifier (UDI), product ID, or serial number. Use RTU licensing to enable a desired AP license count on the controller after you accept the End User License Agreement (EULA). This allows you to add AP counts on a controller interacting with external tools. RTU licensing is supported only on Cisco Flex 7500 Series and Cisco 8500 Series Wireless LAN Controllers. In the RTU licensing model, the following types of licenses are available:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 65 Installing and Configuring Licenses Permanent or base licensesThese licenses are programmed into the controller hardware at the time of manufacturing. These licenses are base count licenses that cannot be deleted or transferred. Adder licensesThese licenses are wireless access point count licenses that you can activate by accepting the RTU EULA. The EULA states that you are obliged to purchase the specified access point count licenses at the time of activation. You must activate these licenses for the purchased access points count and accept the EULA. You can remove an adder license from one controller and transfer the license to another controller in the same product family. For example, an adder license such as LIC-CT7500-100A can be transferred

(partially or fully) from one Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller to another Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller. Note Licenses embedded in the controller at the time of shipment is not transferrable. Evaluation licensesThese licenses are demo or trial mode licenses that are valid for 90 days. Fifteen days prior to the expiry of the 90-day period, you are notified about the requirement to buy the permanent license. These evaluation licenses are installed with the license image. You can activate the evaluation licenses anytime with a command. A EULA is prompted after you run the activation command on the controller CLI. The EULA states that you are obligated to pay for the specified license count within 90 days of usage. The countdown starts after you accept the EULA. Whenever you add or delete an access point adder license on the controller, you are prompted with an RTU EULA. You can either accept or decline the RTU EULA for each add or delete operation. For high-availability (HA) controllers when you enable HA, the controllers synchronize with the enabled license count of the primary controller and support high availability for up to the license count enabled on the primary controller. You can view the RTU licenses through the controller GUI or CLI. You can also view these licenses across multiple wireless controllers through Cisco Prime Infrastructure. Configuring Right to Use Licensing (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Management > Software Activation > Licenses to open the Licenses page. In the Adder License area, choose to add or delete the number of APs that an AP license can support, enter a value, and click Set Count. Click Save Configuration. Configuring Right to Use Licensing (CLI) Add or delete the number of APs that an AP license can support by entering this command:

license {add | delete} ap-count count Add or delete a license for a feature by entering this command:

license {add | delete} feature license_name Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 66 OL-28744-01 Rehosting Licenses Activate or deactivate an evaluation AP count license by entering this command:

license {activate | deactivate} ap-count eval Note When you activate the license, you are prompted to accept or reject the End User License Agreement (EULA) for the given license. If you activate a license that supports fewer number of APs than the current number of APs connected to the controller, the activation command fails. Activate or deactivate a feature license by entering this command:

license {activate | deactivate} feature license_name See the licensing information by entering this command:

show license all Rehosting Licenses This section describes how to rehost licenses. Information About Rehosting Licenses Revoking a license from one controller and installing it on another is called rehosting. You might want to rehost a license in order to change the purpose of a controller. For example, if you want to move your OfficeExtend or indoor mesh access points to a different controller, you could transfer the adder license from one controller to another controller of the same model (intramodel transfer). This can be done in the case of RMA or a network rearchitecture that requires you to transfer licenses from one appliance to another. It is not possible to rehost base licenses in normal scenarios of network rearchitecture. The only exception where the transfer of base licenses is allowed is for RMA when you get a replacement hardware when your existing appliance has a failure. Evaluation licenses cannot be rehosted. In order to rehost a license, you must generate credential information from the controller and use it to obtain a permission ticket to revoke the license from the Cisco licensing site. Next, you must obtain a rehost ticket and use it to obtain a license installation file for the controller on which you want to install the license. Note A revoked license cannot be reinstalled on the same controller. Note Starting in the release 7.3, the Right-to-Use licensing is supported on the Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controllers, thereby the rehosting behavior changes on these controllers. If you require to rehost licenses, you need to plan rehosting the installed adder licenses prior to an upgrade. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 67 Rehosting Licenses Rehosting a License Rehosting a License (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Management > Software Activation > Commands to open the License Commands page. From the Action drop-down list, choose Rehost. The Revoke a License from the Device and Generate Rehost Ticket area appears. In the File Name to Save Credentials text box, enter the path on the TFTP server where you want the device credentials to be saved and click Save Credentials. To obtain a permission ticket to revoke the license, follow these steps:

a) Click Cisco Licensing (https://tools.cisco.com/SWIFT/Licensing/PrivateRegistrationServlet). b) On the Product License Registration page, click Look Up a License under Manage Licenses. c) Enter the product ID and serial number for your controller. Note To find the controllers product ID and serial number, choose Controller > Inventory on the controller GUI. d) Open the device credential information file that you saved in Step 3 and copy and paste the contents of the file into the Device Credentials text box. e) Enter the security code in the blank box and click Continue. f) Choose the licenses that you want to revoke from this controller and click Start License Transfer. g) On the Rehost Quantities page, enter the number of licenses that you want to revoke in the To Rehost text box and click Continue. h) On the Designate Licensee page, enter the product ID and serial number of the controller for which you plan to revoke the license, read and accept the conditions of the End User License Agreement (EULA), complete the rest of the text boxes on this page, and click Continue. i) On the Review and Submit page, verify that all information is correct and click Submit. j) When a message appears indicating that the registration is complete, click Download Permission Ticket. The rehost permission ticket is e-mailed within 1 hour to the address that you specified. k) After the e-mail arrives, copy the rehost permission ticket to your TFTP server. Use the rehost permission ticket to revoke the license from this controller and generate a rehost ticket as follows:

a) In the Enter Saved Permission Ticket File Name text box, enter the TFTP path and filename (*.lic) for the rehost permission ticket that you generated in Step 4. b) In the Rehost Ticket File Name text box, enter the TFTP path and filename (*.lic) for the ticket that will be used to rehost this license on another controller. c) Click Generate Rehost Ticket. d) When the End User License Agreement (EULA) acceptance dialog box appears, read the agreement and click Accept to accept the terms of the agreement. Use the rehost ticket generated in Step 5 to obtain a license installation file, which can then be installed on another controller as follows:

a) Click Cisco Licensing. b) On the Product License Registration page, click Upload Rehost Ticket under Manage Licenses. c) On the Upload Ticket page, enter the rehost ticket that you generated in Step 5 in the Enter Rehost Ticket text box and click Continue. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 68 OL-28744-01 Rehosting Licenses d) On the Validate Features page, verify that the license information for your controller is correct, enter the rehost quantity, and click Continue. e) On the Designate Licensee page, enter the product ID and serial number of the controller on which you plan to use the license, read and accept the conditions of the End User License Agreement (EULA), complete the rest of the text boxes on this page, and click Continue. f) On the Review and Submit page, verify that all information is correct and click Submit. g) When a message appears indicating that the registration is complete, click Download License. The rehost license key is e-mailed within 1 hour to the address that you specified. h) After the e-mail arrives, copy the rehost license key to your TFTP server. i) Follow the instructions in the Installing a License section to install this on another controller. Rehosting a License (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Save device credential information to a file by entering this command:

license save credential url where url is tftp://server_ip/path/filename. Obtain a permission ticket to revoke the license as follows:

a) Go to https://tools.cisco.com/SWIFT/Licensing/PrivateRegistrationServlet. The Product License Registration page appears. b) Under Manage Licenses, click Look Up a License. c) Enter the product ID and serial number for your controller. Note To find the controllers product ID and serial number, enter the show license udi command on the controller CLI. d) Open the device credential information file that you saved in Step 1 and copy and paste the contents of the file into the Device Credentials text box. e) Enter the security code in the blank box and click Continue. f) Choose the licenses that you want to revoke from this controller and click Start License Transfer. g) On the Rehost Quantities page, enter the number of licenses that you want to revoke in the To Rehost text box and click Continue. h) On the Designate Licensee page, enter the product ID and serial number of the controller for which you plan to revoke the license, read and accept the conditions of the End-User License Agreement (EULA), complete the rest of the text boxes on this page, and click Continue. i) On the Review and Submit page, verify that all information is correct and click Submit. j) When a message appears indicating that the registration is complete, click Download Permission Ticket. The rehost permission ticket is e-mailed within 1 hour to the address that you specified. k) After the e-mail arrives, copy the rehost permission ticket to your TFTP server. Use the rehost permission ticket to revoke the license from this controller and generate a rehost ticket as follows:

a) Revoke the license from the controller by entering this command:

license revoke permission_ticket_url where permission_ticket_url is tftp://server_ip/path/filename. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 69 Rehosting Licenses b) Generate the rehost ticket by entering this command:

license revoke rehost rehost_ticket_url where rehost_ticket_url is tftp://server_ip/path/filename. Step 4 c) If prompted, read and accept the terms of the End-User License Agreement (EULA). Use the rehost ticket generated in Step 3 to obtain a license installation file, which can then be installed on another controller as follows:

a) Go to https://tools.cisco.com/SWIFT/Licensing/PrivateRegistrationServlet. b) On the Product License Registration page, click Upload Rehost Ticket under Manage Licenses. c) On the Upload Ticket page, enter the rehost ticket that you generated in Step 3 in the Enter Rehost Ticket text box and click Continue. d) On the Validate Features page, verify that the license information for your controller is correct, enter the rehost quantity, and click Continue. e) On the Designate Licensee page, enter the product ID and serial number of the controller on which you plan to use the license, read and accept the conditions of the End-User License Agreement (EULA), complete the rest of the text boxes on this page, and click Continue. f) On the Review and Submit page, verify that all information is correct and click Submit. g) When a message appears indicating that the registration is complete, click Download License. The rehost license key is e-mailed within 1 hour to the address that you specified. h) After the e-mail arrives, copy the rehost license key to your TFTP server. i) Follow the instructions in the Installing a License (GUI), on page 58 section to install this license on another controller. Transferring Licenses to a Replacement Controller after an RMA Information About Transferring Licenses to a Replacement Controller after an RMA If you return a Cisco 5500 Series Controller to Cisco as part of the Return Material Authorization (RMA) process, you must transfer that controllers licenses within 60 days to a replacement controller that you receive from Cisco. Replacement controllers come preinstalled with the following licenses: permanent base and evaluation base, base-ap-count. No other permanent licenses are installed. The SKU for replacement controllers is AIR-CT5508-CA-K9. Because licenses are registered to the serial number of a controller, you can use the licensing portal on Cisco.com to request that the license from your returned controller be revoked and authorized for use on the replacement controller. After your request is approved, you can install the old license on the replacement controller. Any additional ap-count licenses if installed in the returned controller has to be rehosted on the replacement controller. Before you begin, you need the product ID and serial number of both the returned controller and the replacement controller. This information is included in your purchase records. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 70 OL-28744-01 Configuring the License Agent Note The evaluation licenses on the replacement controller are designed for temporary use and expire after 60 days. To prevent disruptions in operation, the controller does not switch licenses when an evaluation license expires. You must reboot the controller in order to return to a permanent license. If the evaluation licenses expire before you transfer the permanent licenses from your defective controller to your replacement controller, the replacement controller remains up and running using the permanent base license, but access points are no longer able to join the controller. Transferring a License to a Replacement Controller after an RMA Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Browse to http://cisco.com/go/license. On the Product License Registration page, choose Transfer > License for RMA. Click Specify Device and then choose the controller model from the Product Family drop-down list. Complete the on-screen instructions to generate the license file. The license is provided online or in an e-mail. Copy the license file to the TFTP server. Install the license by choosing Management > Software Activation > Commands > Action > Install License. Configuring the License Agent Information About Configuring the License Agent If your network contains various Cisco-licensed devices, you might want to consider using the Cisco License Manager (CLM) to manage all of the licenses using a single application. CLM is a secure client/server application that manages Cisco software licenses network wide. The license agent is an interface module that runs on the controller and mediates between CLM and the controllers licensing infrastructure. CLM can communicate with the controller using various channels, such as HTTP, Telnet, and so on. If you want to use HTTP as the communication method, you must enable the license agent on the controller. The license agent receives requests from CLM and translates them into license commands. It also sends notifications to CLM. It uses XML messages over HTTP or HTTPS to receive the requests and send the notifications. For example, CLM sends a license install command, and the agent notifies CLM after the license expires. Note You can download the CLM software and access user documentation at http://www.cisco.com/go/clm. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 71 Configuring the License Agent Configuring the License Agent (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Management > Software Activation > License Agent to open the License Agent Configuration page. Select the Enable Default Authentication check box to enable the license agent, or leave it unselected to disable this feature. The default value is unselected. In the Maximum Number of Sessions text box, enter the maximum number of sessions for the license agent. The valid range is 1 to 25 sessions (inclusive). Configure the license agent to listen for requests from the CLM as follows:

a) Select the Enable Listener check box to enable the license agent to receive license requests from the CLM, or unselect this check box to disable this feature. The default value is unselected. b) In the Listener Message Processing URL text box, enter the URL where the license agent receives license requests

(for example, http://209.165.201.30/licenseAgent/custom). The Protocol parameter indicates whether the URL requires HTTP or HTTPS. Note You can specify the protocol to use on the HTTP Configuration page. c) Select the Enable Authentication for Listener check box to enable authentication for the license agent when it is receiving license requests, or unselect this check box to disable this feature. The default value is unselected. d) In the Max HTTP Message Size text box, enter the maximum size for license requests. The valid range is 0 to 9999 bytes, and the default value is 0. Step 5 Configure the license agent to send license notifications to the CLM as follows:

a) Select the Enable Notification check box to enable the license agent to send license notifications to the CLM, or unselect this check box to disable this feature. The default value is unselected. b) In the URL to Send the Notifications text box, enter the URL where the license agent sends the notifications (for example, http://www.cisco.com/license/notify). c) In the User Name text box, enter the username required in order to view the notification messages at this URL. d) In the Password and Confirm Password text boxes, enter the password required in order to view the notification messages at this URL. Step 6 Step 7 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring the License Agent (CLI) Step 1 Enable the license agent by entering one of these commands:

config license agent default authenticateEnables the license agent default listener with authentication. config license agent default authenticate noneEnables the license agent default listener without authentication. Note To disable the license agent default listener, enter the config license agent default disable command. The default value is disabled. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 72 OL-28744-01 Configuring the License Agent Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Specify the maximum number of sessions for the license agent by entering this command:

config license agent max-sessions sessions The valid range for the sessions parameter is 1 to 25 (inclusive), and the default value is 9. Enable the license agent to receive license requests from the CLM and to specify the URL where the license agent receives the requests by entering this command:

config license agent listener http {plaintext | encrypt} url authenticate [none] [max-message size] [acl acl]

The valid range for the size parameter is 0 to 65535 bytes, and the default value is 0. Note To prevent the license agent from receiving license requests from the CLM, enter the config license agent listener http disable command. The default value is disabled. Configure the license agent to send license notifications to the CLM and to specify the URL where the license agent sends the notifications by entering this command:

config license agent notify url username password Note To prevent the license agent from sending license notifications to the CLM, enter the config license agent notify disable username password command. The default value is disabled. Enter the save config command to save your changes. See statistics for the license agents counters or sessions by entering this command:

show license agent {counters | sessions}

Information similar to the following appears for the show license agent counters command:

License Agent Counters Request Messages Received:10: Messages with Errors:1 Request Operations Received:9: Operations with Errors:0 Notification Messages Sent:12: Transmission Errors:0: Soap Errors:0 Information similar to the following appears for the show license agent sessions command:

License Agent Sessions: 1 open, maximum is 9 Note To clear the license agents counter or session statistics, enter the clear license agent {counters | sessions}

command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 73 Configuring the License Agent Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 74 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 4 Configuring 802.11 Bands Configuring 802.11 Bands, page 75 Configuring Band Selection, page 78 Configuring 802.11 Bands Information About Configuring 802.11 Bands You can configure the 802.11b/g/n (2.4-GHz) and 802.11a/n (5-GHz) bands for the controller to comply with the regulatory requirements in your country. By default, both 802.11b/g/n and 802.11a/n are enabled. When a controller is configured to allow only 802.11g traffic, 802.11b client devices are able to successfully connect to an access point but cannot pass traffic. When you configure the controller for 802.11g traffic only, you must mark 11g rates as mandatory. Configuring the 802.11 Bands (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the Global Parameters page. Select the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box to enable the 802.11a or 802.11b/g band. To disable the band, unselect the check box. The default value is enabled. You can enable both the 802.11a and 802.11b/g bands. If you enabled the 802.11b/g band in Step 2, select the 802.11g Support check box if you want to enable 802.11g network support. The default value is enabled. If you disable this feature, the 802.11b band is enabled without 802.11g support. Specify the period at which the SSID is broadcast by the access point by entering a value between 20 and 1000 milliseconds

(inclusive) in the Beacon Period text box. The default value is 100 milliseconds. Note The beacon period in controllers is listed in terms of milliseconds. The beacon period can also be measured in time units, where one time unit equals 1024 microseconds or 102.4 milliseconds. If a beacon interval is listed as 100 milliseconds in a controller, it is only a rounded off value for 102.4 milliseconds. Due to hardware limitation in certain radios, even though the beacon interval is, say 100 time units, it is adjusted to 102 time units, which roughly equals 104.448 milliseconds. When the beacon period is to be represented in terms of time units, the value is adjusted to the nearest multiple of 17. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 75 Configuring 802.11 Bands Step 5 Step 6 Specify the size at which packets are fragmented by entering a value between 256 and 2346 bytes (inclusive) in the Fragmentation Threshold text box. Enter a low number for areas where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of radio interference. Make access points advertise their channel and transmit power level in beacons and probe responses for CCX clients. Select the DTPC Support check box. Otherwise, unselect this check box. The default value is enabled. Client devices using dynamic transmit power control (DTPC) receive the channel and power level information from the access points and adjust their settings automatically. For example, a client device used primarily in Japan could rely on DTPC to adjust its channel and power settings automatically when it travels to Italy and joins a network there. Note On access points that run Cisco IOS software, this feature is called world mode. DTPC and 801.11h power constraint cannot be enabled simultaneously. Note Step 7 Step 8 Specify the maximum allowed clients by entering a value between 1 to 200 in the Maximum Allowed Client text box. The default value is 200. Use the Data Rates options to specify the rates at which data can be transmitted between the access point and the client. These data rates are available:

802.11a6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 Mbps 802.11b/g1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps For each data rate, choose one of these options:

MandatoryClients must support this data rate in order to associate to an access point on the controller. SupportedAny associated clients that support this data rate may communicate with the access point using that rate. However, the clients are not required to be able to use this rate in order to associate. DisabledThe clients specify the data rates used for communication. Step 9 Step 10 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring the 802.11 Bands (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Disable the 802.11a band by entering this command:

config 802.11a disable network Note The 802.11a band must be disabled before you can configure the 802.11a network parameters in this section. Disable the 802.11b/g band by entering this command:

config 802.11b disable network Note The 802.11b band must be disabled before you can configure the 802.11b network parameters in this section. Step 3 Specify the rate at which the SSID is broadcast by the access point by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} beaconperiod time_unit Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 76 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11 Bands Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 where time_unit is the beacon interval in time units (TUs). One TU is 1024 microseconds. You can configure the access point to send a beacon every 20 to 1000 milliseconds. Specify the size at which packets are fragmented by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} fragmentation threshold where threshold is a value between 256 and 2346 bytes (inclusive). Specify a low number for areas where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of radio interference. Make access points advertise their channel and transmit power level in beacons and probe responses by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b } dtpc {enable | disable}

The default value is enabled. Client devices using dynamic transmit power control (DTPC) receive the channel and power level information from the access points and adjust their settings automatically. For example, a client device used primarily in Japan could rely on DTPC to adjust its channel and power settings automatically when it travels to Italy and joins a network there. Note On access points that run Cisco IOS software, this feature is called world mode. Specify the maximum allowed clients that can be configured by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} max-clients max_allow_clients The valid range is between 1 to 200. Specify the rates at which data can be transmitted between the controller and the client by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} rate {disabled | mandatory | supported} rate where disabledClients specify the data rates used for communication. mandatoryClients support this data rate in order to associate to an access point on the controller. supportedAny associated clients that support this data rate may communicate with the access point using that rate. However, the clients are not required to be able to use this rate in order to associate. rateThe rate at which data is transmitted:

6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 Mbps (802.11a) 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps (802.11b/g) Step 8 Step 9 Enable the 802.11a band by entering this command:

config 802.11a enable network The default value is enabled. Enable the 802.11b band by entering this command:

config 802.11b enable network The default value is enabled. Step 10 Enable or disable 802.11g network support by entering this command:

config 802.11b 11gSupport {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 77 Configuring Band Selection The default value is enabled. You can use this command only if the 802.11b band is enabled. If you disable this feature, the 802.11b band is enabled without 802.11g support. Step 11 Step 12 Enter the save config command to save your changes. View the configuration settings for the 802.11a or 802.11b/g band by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b}

Information similar to the following appears:

802.11a Network............................... Enabled 11nSupport.................................... Enabled 802.11a Low Band........................... Enabled 802.11a Mid Band........................... Enabled 802.11a High Band.......................... Enabled 802.11a Operational Rates 802.11a 6M Rate.............................. Mandatory 802.11a 9M Rate.............................. Supported 802.11a 12M Rate............................. Mandatory 802.11a 18M Rate............................. Supported 802.11a 24M Rate............................. Mandatory 802.11a 36M Rate............................. Supported 802.11a 48M Rate............................. Supported 802.11a 54M Rate............................. Supported

... Beacon Interval.................................. 100

... Default Channel............................... 36 Default Tx Power Level........................ 1 DTPC Status................................... Enabled Fragmentation Threshold....................... 2346 Maximum Number of Clients per AP................. 200 Configuring Band Selection Information About Configuring Band Selection Band selection enables client radios that are capable of dual-band (2.4- and 5-GHz) operation to move to a less congested 5-GHz access point. The 2.4-GHz band is often congested. Clients on this band typically experience interference from Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, and cordless phones as well as co-channel interference from other access points because of the 802.11b/g limit of three nonoverlapping channels. To prevent these sources of interference and improve overall network performance, you can configure band selection on the controller. Band selection is enabled globally by default. Band selection works by regulating probe responses to clients. It makes 5-GHz channels more attractive to clients by delaying probe responses to clients on 2.4-GHz channels. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 78 OL-28744-01 Configuring Band Selection Restrictions on Band Selection Band-selection enabled WLANs do not support time-sensitive applications like voice and video because of roaming delays. Band selection can be used only with Cisco Aironet 1040, 1140, 1250, 1260, 3500, and the 3600 series access points. Note OEAP 600 Series access points do not support band select. Band selection operates only on access points that are connected to a controller. A FlexConnect access point without a controller connection does not perform band selection after a reboot. The band-selection algorithm directs dual-band clients only from the 2.4-GHz radio to the 5-GHz radio of the same access point, and it only runs on an access point when both the 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz radios are up and running. You can enable both band selection and aggressive load balancing on the controller. They run independently and do not impact one another. It is not possible to enable or disable band selection and client load balancing globally through the controller GUI or CLI. You can, however, enable or disable band selection and client load balancing for a particular WLAN. Band selection and client load balancing are enabled globally by default. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 79 Configuring Band Selection Configuring Band Selection Configuring Band Selection (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Choose Wireless > Advanced > Band Select to open the Band Select page. In the Probe Cycle Count text box, enter a value between 1 and 10. The cycle count sets the number of suppression cycles for a new client. The default cycle count is 2. In the Scan Cycle Period Threshold (milliseconds) text box, enter a value between 1 and 1000 milliseconds for the scan cycle period threshold. This setting determines the time threshold during which new probe requests from a client come from a new scanning cycle. The default cycle threshold is 200 milliseconds. In the Age Out Suppression (seconds) text box, enter a value between 10 and 200 seconds. Age-out suppression sets the expiration time for pruning previously known 802.11b/g/n clients. The default value is 20 seconds. After this time elapses, clients become new and are subject to probe response suppression. In the Age Out Dual Band (seconds) text box, enter a value between 10 and 300 seconds. The age-out period sets the expiration time for pruning previously known dual-band clients. The default value is 60 seconds. After this time elapses, clients become new and are subject to probe response suppression. In the Acceptable Client RSSI (dBm) text box, enter a value between 20 and 90 dBm. This parameter sets the minimum RSSI for a client to respond to a probe. The default value is 80 dBm. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. To enable or disable band selection on specific WLANs, choose WLANs > WLAN ID. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Click the Advanced tab. In the Load Balancing and Band Select text area, if you want to enable band selection, select the Client Band Select check box. If you want to disable band selection, leave the check box unselected. The default value is disabled. Click Save Configuration. Configuring Band Selection (CLI) Set the probe cycle count for band select by entering this command:

config band-select cycle-count cycle_count You can enter a value between 1 and 10 for the cycle_count parameter. Set the time threshold for a new scanning cycle period by entering this command:

config band-select cycle-threshold milliseconds You can enter a value for threshold between 1 and 1000 for the milliseconds parameter. Set the suppression expire to the band select by entering this command:

config band-select expire suppression seconds Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 80 Configuring Band Selection Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 You can enter a value for suppression between 10 to 200 for the seconds parameter. Set the dual band expire by entering this command:

config band-select expire dual-band seconds You can enter a value for dual band between 10 and 300 for the seconds parameter. Set the client RSSI threshold by entering this command:

config band-select client-rssi client_rssi You can enter a value for minimum dBm of a client RSSI to respond to a probe between 20 and 90 for the client_rssi parameter. Enter the save config command to save your changes. Enable or disable band selection on specific WLANs by entering this command:

config wlan band-select allow {enable | disable} wlan_ID You can enter a value between 1 and 512 for wlan_ID parameter. Verify your settings by entering this command:

show band-select Information similar to the following appears:

Band Select Probe Response....................... Enabled Cycle Count................................... 3 cycles Cycle Threshold............................... 300 milliseconds Age Out Suppression........................... 20 seconds Age Out Dual Band............................. 20 seconds Client RSSI................................... -30 dBm Step 9 Enter the save config command to save your changes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 81 Configuring Band Selection Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 82 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 5 Configuring 802.11 Parameters Configuring the 802.11n Parameters, page 83 Configuring 802.11h Parameters, page 86 Configuring the 802.11n Parameters Information About Configuring the 802.11n Parameters This section provides instructions for managing 802.11n devices such as the Cisco Aironet 1140 and 3600 Series Access Points on your network. The 802.11n devices support the 2.4- and 5-GHz bands and offer high-throughput data rates. The 802.11n high-throughput rates are available on all 802.11n access points for WLANs using WMM with no Layer 2 encryption or with WPA2/AES encryption enabled. Note Some Cisco 802.11n APs may intermittently emit incorrect beacon frames, which can trigger false wIPS alarms. We recommend that you ignore these alarms. The issue is observed in the following Cisco 802.11n APs: 1140, 1250, 2600, 3500, and 3600. Configuring the 802.11n Parameters (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > High Throughput to open the (5 GHz or 2.4 GHz) High Throughput page. Select the 11n Mode check box to enable 802.11n support on the network. The default value is enabled. Select the check boxes of the desired rates to specify the modulation and coding scheme (MCS) rates at which data can be transmitted between the access point and the client. These data rates, which are calculated for a 20-MHz channel width using a short guard interval, are available:

0 (7 Mbps) OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 83 Configuring the 802.11n Parameters 1 (14 Mbps) 2 (21 Mbps) 3 (29 Mbps) 4 (43 Mbps) 5 (58 Mbps) 6 (65 Mbps) 7 (72 Mbps) 8 (14 Mbps) 9 (29 Mbps) 10 (43 Mbps) 11 (58 Mbps) 12 (87 Mbps) 13 (116 Mbps) 14 (130 Mbps) 15 (144 Mbps) Any associated clients that support the selected rates may communicate with the access point using those rates. However, the clients are not required to be able to use this rate in order to associate. The MCS settings determine the number of spatial streams, the modulation, the coding rate, and the data rate values that are used. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Click Apply. Use the 802.11n data rates that you configured by enabling WMM on the WLAN as follows:

a) Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. b) Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure WMM mode. c) When the WLANs > Edit page appears, choose the QoS tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Qos) page. d) From the WMM Policy drop-down list, choose Required or Allowed to require or allow client devices to use WMM. Devices that do not support WMM cannot join the WLAN. If you choose Allowed, devices that cannot support WMM can join the WLAN but will not benefit from the 802.11n rates. e) Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Note To determine if an access point supports 802.11n, look at the 11n Supported text box on either the 802.11a/n

(or 802.11b/g/n) Cisco APs > Configure page or the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) AP Interfaces > Details page. Configuring the 802.11n Parameters (CLI) Enable 802.11n support on the network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} 11nsupport {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 84 OL-28744-01 Configuring the 802.11n Parameters Specify the modulation and coding scheme (MCS) rates at which data can be transmitted between the access point and the client by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} 11nsupport mcs tx {0-15} {enable | disable}

Use the 802.11n data rates that you configured by enabling WMM on the WLAN as follows:

config wlan wmm {allow | disable | require} wlan_id The require parameter requires client devices to use WMM. Devices that do not support WMM cannot join the WLAN. If set to allow, devices that cannot support WMM can join the WLAN but do not benefit from 802.11n rates. Specify the aggregation method used for 802.11n packets as follows:

a) Disable the network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable network b) Specify the aggregation method entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} 11nsupport {a-mpdu | a-msdu} tx priority {0-7 | all} {enable | disable}

Aggregation is the process of grouping packet data frames together rather than transmitting them separately. Two aggregation methods are available: Aggregated MAC Protocol Data Unit (A-MPDU) and Aggregated MAC Service Data Unit (A-MSDU). A-MSDU is performed in hardware and therefore is the default method. You can specify the aggregation method for various types of traffic from the access point to the clients. This table defines the priority levels (0-7) assigned per traffic type. Table 3: Traffic Type Priority Levels User Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Traffic Type Best effort Background Spare Excellent effort Controlled load Video, less than 100-ms latency and jitter Voice, less than 10-ms latency and jitter Network control You can configure each priority level independently, or you can use the all parameter to configure all of the priority levels at once. When you use the enable command, the traffic associated with that priority level uses A-MPDU transmission. When you use the disable command, the traffic associated with that priority level uses A-MSDU transmission. Configure the priority levels to match the OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 85 Configuring 802.11h Parameters aggregation method used by the clients. By default, A-MPDU is enabled for priority level 0, 4 and 5 and the rest are disabled. By default, A-MSDU is enabled for all priorities except 6 and 7. c) Reenable the network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} enable network Configure the 802.11n-5 GHz A-MPDU transmit aggregation scheduler by entering this command:

config 802.11{a | b} 11nsupport a-mpdu tx scheduler {enable | disable | timeout rt timeout-value}

The timeout value is in milliseconds. The valid range is between 1 millisecond to 1000 milliseconds. Configure the guard interval for the network by entering this command:

config 802.11{a | b} 11nsupport guard_interval {any | long}

Configure the Reduced Interframe Space (RIFS) for the network by entering this command:

config 802.11{a | b} 11nsupport rifs rx {enable | disable}

Save your changes by entering this command:

save config View the configuration settings for the 802.11 networks by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b}

Configuring 802.11h Parameters Information About Configuring 802.11h Parameters 802.11h informs client devices about channel changes and can limit the transmit power of those client devices. Configuring the 802.11h Parameters (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 86 Disable the 802.11 band as follows:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n > Network to open the 802.11a Global Parameters page. b) Unselect the 802.11a Network Status check box. c) Click Apply. Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n > DFS (802.11h) to open the 802.11h Global Parameters page. In the Power Constraint area, enter the local power constraint. The valid range is between 0 dBm and 30 dBm. In the Channel Switch Announcement area, select the Channel Announcement check box if you want the access point to announce when it is switching to a new channel and the new channel number, or unselect this check box to disable the channel announcement. The default value is disabled. If you enabled the channel announcement, the Channel Quiet Mode check box appears. Select this check box if you want the access point to stop transmitting on the current channel, or unselect this check box to disable quiet mode. The default value is disabled. Click Apply. Reenable the 802.11a band as follows:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n > Network to open the 802.11a Global Parameters page. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11h Parameters b) Select the 802.11a Network Status check box. c) Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Step 8 Configuring the 802.11h Parameters (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Disable the 802.11a network by entering this command:

config 802.11a disable network Enable or disable an access point to announce when it is switching to a new channel, and the new channel number by entering this command:

config 802.11h channelswitch {enable | disable} switch_mode Enter either 0 or 1 for the switch_mode parameter to specify whether transmissions are restricted until the actual channel switch (0), or are not restricted (1). By default, this feature is in disabled state. Configure a new channel using the 802.11h channel announcement by entering this command:

config 802.11h setchannel channel channel Configure the 802.11h power constraint value by entering this command:

config 802.11h powerconstraint value Use increments of 3 dB for the value so that the AP goes down one power level at a time. Reenable the 802.11a network by entering this command:

config 802.11a enable network View the status of the 802.11h parameters by entering this command:

show 802.11h Information similar to the following appears:

Power Constraint................................. 0 Channel Switch................................... Disabled Channel Switch Mode.............................. 0 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 87 Configuring 802.11h Parameters Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 88 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 6 Configuring DHCP Proxy Information About Configuring DHCP Proxy, page 89 Restrictions on Using DHCP Proxy, page 89 Configuring DHCP Proxy (GUI), page 90 Configuring DHCP Proxy (CLI), page 90 Configuring a DHCP Timeout (GUI), page 91 Configuring a DHCP Timeout (CLI), page 91 Information About Configuring DHCP Proxy When DHCP proxy is enabled on the controller, the controller unicasts DHCP requests from the client to the configured servers. At least one DHCP server must be configured on either the interface associated with the WLAN or the WLAN itself. When DHCP proxy is disabled on the controller, those DHCP packets transmitted to and from the clients are bridged by the controller without any modification to the IP portion of the packet. Packets received from the client are removed from the CAPWAP tunnel and transmitted on the upstream VLAN. DHCP packets directed to the client are received on the upstream VLAN, converted to 802.11, and transmitted through a CAPWAP tunnel toward the client. As a result, the internal DHCP server cannot be used when DHCP proxy is disabled. The ability to disable DHCP proxy allows organizations to use DHCP servers that do not support Ciscos native proxy mode of operation. It should be disabled only when required by the existing infrastructure. Note DHCP proxy is enabled by default. Restrictions on Using DHCP Proxy DHCP proxy must be enabled in order for DHCP option 82 to operate correctly. All controllers that will communicate must have the same DHCP proxy setting. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 89 Configuring DHCP Proxy (GUI) Configuring DHCP Proxy (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Controller > Advanced > DHCP to open the DHCP Parameters page. Select the Enable DHCP Proxy check box to enable DHCP proxy on a global basis. Otherwise, unselect the check box. The default value is selected. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring DHCP Proxy (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Controller > Interfaces. Select the interface you want to configure the DHCP proxy. You can configure the DHCP proxy on the management, virtual, ap manager, or dynamic interfaces in the controller. The Interfaces > Edit page is displayed with DHCP information on the primary and secondary DHCP servers configured in the controller. If the primary and secondary servers are not listed, you must enter values for the IP address of the DHCP servers in the text boxes displayed in this window. Select from the following option of the proxy mode drop-down to enable DHCP proxy on the selected management interface:GlobalUses the global DHCP proxy mode on the controller.EnabledEnables the DHCP proxy mode on the interface. When you enable DHCP proxy on the controller; the controller unicasts the DHCP requests from the client to the configured servers. You must configure at least one DHCP server on either the interface associated with the WLAN or on the WLAN.DisabledDisables the DHCP proxy mode on the interface. When you disable the DHCP proxy on the controller, the DHCP packets transmitted to and from the clients are bridged by the controller without any modification to the IP portion of the packet. Packets received from the client are removed from the CAPWAP tunnel and transmitted on the upstream VLAN. DHCP packets directed to the client are received on the upstream VLAN, converted to 802.11, and transmitted through a CAPWAP tunnel toward the client. As a result, the internal DHCP server cannot be used when DHCP proxy is disabled. Check the Enable DHCP option 82 checkbox to ensure additional security when DHCP is used to allocate network addresses, check the Enable DHCP option 82 checkbox. Click Apply to save the configuration. Configuring DHCP Proxy (CLI) Step 1 Enable or disable DHCP proxy by entering this command:

config dhcp proxy {enable | disable}

Step 2 View the DHCP proxy configuration by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 90 OL-28744-01 Configuring a DHCP Timeout (GUI) show dhcp proxy Information similar to the following appears:

DHCP Proxy Behavior: enabled Configuring DHCP Proxy (CLI) Step 1 Configure the DHCP primary and secondary servers on the interface. To do this, enter the following commands:

config interface dhcp management primary primary-server config interface dhcp dynamic-interface interface-name primary primary-s Step 2 Configure DHCP proxy on the management or dynamic interface of the controller. To do this, enter the following command:

config interface dhcp management proxy-mode enableglobaldisable config interface dhcp dynamic-interface interface-name proxy-mode enableglobaldisable. Note To ensure additional security when DHCP is configured, use the config interface dhcpinterface typeoption-82 enable command. Enter the save config command. To view the proxy settings of the controller interface enter the show dhcp proxy command. Step 3 Step 4 Configuring a DHCP Timeout (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Controller > Advanced > DHCP to open the DHCP Parameters page. Select the DHCP Timeout (5 - 120 seconds) check box to enable a DHCP timeout on a global basis. Otherwise, unselect the check box. The valid range is 5 through 120 seconds. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring a DHCP Timeout (CLI) Configure a DHCP timeout by entering this command:

config dhcp timeout seconds OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 91 Configuring a DHCP Timeout (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 92 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 7 Configuring SNMP Configuring SNMP (CLI), page 93 SNMP Community Strings, page 95 Configuring Real Time Statistics (CLI), page 96 Configuring SNMP (CLI) Note To view the controller trap log, choose Monitor and click View All under Most Recent Traps on the controller GUI. Create an SNMP community name by entering this command:

config snmp community create name Delete an SNMP community name by entering this command:

config snmp community delete name Configure an SNMP community name with read-only privileges by entering this command:

config snmp community accessmode ro name Configure an SNMP community name with read-write privileges by entering this command:

config snmp community accessmode rw name Configure an IP address and subnet mask for an SNMP community by entering this command:

config snmp community ipaddr ip-address ip-mask name Note This command behaves like an SNMP access list. It specifies the IP address from which the device accepts SNMP packets with the associated community. An AND operation is performed between the requesting entitys IP address and the subnet mask before being compared to the IP address. If the subnet mask is set to 0.0.0.0, an IP address of 0.0.0.0 matches to all IP addresses. The default value is 0.0.0.0. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 93 Configuring SNMP (CLI) Note The controller can use only one IP address range to manage an SNMP community. Enable or disable a community name by entering this command:

config snmp community mode {enable | disable}

Configure a destination for a trap by entering this command:

config snmp trapreceiver create name ip-address Delete a trap by entering this command:

config snmp trapreceiver delete name Change the destination for a trap by entering this command:

config snmp trapreceiver ipaddr old-ip-address name new-ip-address Enable or disable the traps by entering this command:

config snmp trapreceiver mode {enable | disable}

Configure the name of the SNMP contact by entering this command:

config snmp syscontact syscontact-name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the contact name. Configure the SNMP system location by entering this command:

config snmp syslocation syslocation-name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the location. Verify that the SNMP traps and communities are correctly configured by entering these commands:

show snmpcommunity show snmptrap See the enabled and disabled trap flags by entering this command:

show trapflags If necessary, use the config trapflags command to enable or disable trap flags. Configure when the warning message should be displayed after the number of clients or RFID tags associated with the controller hover around the threshold level by entering this command:

config trapflags {client | rfid} max-warning-threshold {threshold-between-80-to-100 | enable | disable}

The warning message is displayed at an interval of 600 seconds (10 minutes). Configure the SNMP engine ID by entering this command:

config snmp engineID engine-id-string Note The engine ID string can be a maximum of 24 characters. View the engine ID by entering this command:

show snmpengineID Configure the SNMP version by entering this command:

config snmp version {v1 | v2c | v3} {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 94 OL-28744-01 SNMP Community Strings SNMP Community Strings The controller has commonly known default values of "public" and "private" for the read-only and read-write SNMP community strings. Using these standard values presents a security risk. If you use the default community names, and since these are known, the community names could be used to communicate to the controller using SNMP. Therefore, we strongly advise that you change these values. Changing the SNMP Community String Default Values (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose Management and then Communities under SNMP. The SNMP v1 / v2c Community page appears. If public or private appears in the Community Name column, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired community and choose Remove to delete this community. Click New to create a new community. The SNMP v1 / v2c Community > New page appears. In the Community Name text box, enter a unique name containing up to 16 alphanumeric characters. Do not enter public or private. In the next two text boxes, enter the IP address from which this device accepts SNMP packets with the associated community and the IP mask. Choose Read Only or Read/Write from the Access Mode drop-down list to specify the access level for this community. Choose Enable or Disable from the Status drop-down list to specify the status of this community. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your settings. Repeat this procedure if a public or private community still appears on the SNMP v1 / v2c Community page. Changing the SNMP Community String Default Values (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 See the current list of SNMP communities for this controller by entering this command:

show snmp community If "public" or "private" appears in the SNMP Community Name column, enter this command to delete this community:

config snmp community delete name The name parameter is the community name (in this case, public or private). Create a new community by entering this command:

config snmp community create name Enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the name parameter. Do not enter public or private. Enter the IP address from which this device accepts SNMP packets with the associated community by entering this command:

config snmp community ipaddr ip_address ip_mask name OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 95 Configuring Real Time Statistics (CLI) Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Specify the access level for this community by entering this command, where ro is read-only mode and rw is read/write mode:

config snmp community accessmode {ro | rw} name Enable or disable this SNMP community by entering this command:

config snmp community mode {enable | disable} name Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Repeat this procedure if you still need to change the default values for a public or private community string. Configuring Real Time Statistics (CLI) SNMP traps are defined for CPU and memory utilization of AP and controller. The SNMP trap is sent out when the threshold is crossed. The sampling period and statistics update interval can be configured using SNMP and CLI. Configure the sampling interval by entering this command:

config service statistics sampling-interval seconds Configure the statistics interval by entering this command:

config service statistics statistics-interval seconds See sampling and service interval statistics by entering this command:

show service statistics interval SNMP Trap Enhancements This feature provides soaking of SNMP traps and resending of traps after a threshold that you can configure called the hold time. The hold time helps in suppressing false traps being generated. The traps that are supported are for CPU and memory utilization of AP and controller. The retransmission of the trap occurs until the trap is cleared. Configure the hold time after which the SNMP traps are to be resent by entering this command:

config service alarm hold-time seconds Configure the retransmission interval of the trap by entering this command:

config service alarm trap retransmit-interval seconds Configure debugging of the traps by entering this command:

debug service alarm {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 96 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 8 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing Information About Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing, page 97 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (GUI), page 98 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (CLI), page 98 Information About Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing Enabling aggressive load balancing on the controller allows lightweight access points to load balance wireless clients across access points. You can enable aggressive load balancing using the controller. Note Clients are load balanced between access points on the same controller. Load balancing does not occur between access points on different controllers. When a wireless client attempts to associate to a lightweight access point, association response packets are sent to the client with an 802.11 response packet including status code 17. The code 17 indicates that the AP is busy. The AP responds with an association response bearing 'success' if the AP threshold is not met, and with code 17 (AP busy) if the AP utilization threshold is reached or exceeded and another less busy AP heard the client request. For example, if the number of clients on AP1 is more than the number of clients on AP2 plus the load-balancing window, then AP1 is considered to be busier than AP2. When a client attempts to associate to AP1, it receives an 802.11 response packet with status code 17, indicating that the access point is busy, and the client attempts to associate to a different access point. You can configure the controller to deny client associations up to 10 times (if a client attempted to associate 11 times, it would be allowed to associate on the 11th try). You can also enable or disable load balancing on a particular WLAN, which is useful if you want to disable load balancing for a select group of clients (such as time-sensitive voice clients). Passive scanning clients will be able to associate to an AP irrespective of whether load balancing is enabled or not. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 97 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (GUI) Note Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Points do not support client load balancing. With the 7.4 release, FlexConnect access points do support client load balancing. You can configure the controller to analyze the WAN interface utilization of neighboring APs and then load balance the clients across the lightly loaded APs. You can configure this by defining a load balancing threshold. By defining the threshold, you can measure the WAN interface utilization percentage. For example, a threshold value of 50 triggers the load balancing upon detecting utilization of 50% or more on an AP-WAN interface. Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Wireless > Advanced > Load Balancing to open the Load Balancing page. In the Client Window Size text box, enter a value between 1 and 20. The window size becomes part of the algorithm that determines whether an access point is too heavily loaded to accept more client associations:

load-balancing window + client associations on AP with the lightest load = load-balancing threshold In the group of access points accessible to a client device, each access point has a different number of client associations. The access point with the lowest number of clients has the lightest load. The client window size plus the number of clients on the access point with the lightest load forms the threshold. Access points with more client associations than this threshold is considered busy, and clients can associate only to access points with client counts lower than the threshold. In the Maximum Denial Count text box, enter a value between 0 and 10. The denial count sets the maximum number of association denials during load balancing. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. To enable or disable aggressive load balancing on specific WLANs, do the following:

a) Choose WLANs > WLAN ID. The WLANs > Edit page appears. b) In the Advanced tab, select or unselect the Client Load Balancing check box. c) Click Apply. d) Click Save Configuration. Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (CLI) Step 1 Set the client window for aggressive load balancing by entering this command:

config load-balancing window client_count You can enter a value between 0 and 20 for the client_count parameter. Step 2 Set the denial count for load balancing by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 98 OL-28744-01 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (CLI) Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 config load-balancing denial denial_count You can enter a value between 1 and 10 for the denial_count parameter. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Enable or disable aggressive load balancing on specific WLANs by entering this command:

config wlan load-balance allow {enable | disable} wlan_ID You can enter a value between 1 and 512 for wlan_ID parameter. Verify your settings by entering this command:

show load-balancing Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Configure the load balance mode on a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan load-balance mode {client-count | uplink-usage} wlan-id This feature requires the AP to upload its uplink usage statistics to the controller periodically. Check these statistics by entering this command:

show ap stats system cisco-AP OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 99 Configuring Aggressive Load Balancing (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 100 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 9 Configuring Fast SSID Changing Information About Configuring Fast SSID Changing, page 101 Configuring Fast SSID Changing (GUI), page 101 Configuring Fast SSID Changing (CLI), page 101 Information About Configuring Fast SSID Changing When fast SSID changing is enabled, the controller allows clients to move faster between SSIDs. When fast SSID is enabled, the client entry is not cleared and the delay is not enforced. When fast SSID changing is disabled, the controller enforces a delay before clients are allowed to move to a new SSID. When fast SSID is disabled and the client sends a new association for a different SSID, the client entry in the controller connection table is cleared before the client is added to the new SSID. Configuring Fast SSID Changing (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Controller to open the General page. From the Fast SSID Change drop-down list, choose Enabled to enable this feature or Disabled to disable it. The default value is disabled. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Fast SSID Changing (CLI) Step 1 Enable or disable fast SSID changing by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 101 Configuring Fast SSID Changing (CLI) config network fast-ssid-change {enable | disable}

Step 2 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 102 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 10 Configuring 802.3 Bridging Configuring 802.3 Bridging, page 103 Enabling 802.3X Flow Control, page 104 Configuring 802.3 Bridging Information About Configuring 802.3 Bridging The controller supports 802.3 frames and the applications that use them, such as those typically used for cash registers and cash register servers. However, to make these applications work with the controller, the 802.3 frames must be bridged on the controller. You can also configure 802.3 bridging using the Cisco Prime Network Control System. See the Cisco Prime Network Control System Configuration Guide for instructions. Restrictions on 802.3 Bridging Support for raw 802.3 frames allows the controller to bridge non-IP frames for applications not running over IP. The raw 802.3 frame contains destination MAC address, source MAC address, total packet length, and payload. By default, Cisco 5500 Series Controllers bridge all non-IPv4 packets (such as AppleTalk, IPv6, and so on). You can also use ACLs to block the bridging of these protocols. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 103 Enabling 802.3X Flow Control Configuring 802.3 Bridging Configuring 802.3 Bridging (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Controller > General to open the General page. From the 802.3 Bridging drop-down list, choose Enabled to enable 802.3 bridging on your controller or Disabled to disable this feature. The default value is Disabled. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring 802.3 Bridging (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 See the current status of 802.3 bridging for all WLANs by entering this command:

show network Enable or disable 802.3 bridging globally on all WLANs by entering this command:

config network 802.3-bridging {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Enabling 802.3X Flow Control 802.3X Flow Control is disabled by default. To enable it, enter the config switchconfig flowcontrol enable command. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 104 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 11 Configuring Multicast Configuring Multicast Mode, page 105 Configuring Multicast Domain Name System, page 111 Configuring Multicast Mode Information About Multicast Mode If your network supports packet multicasting, you can configure the multicast method that the controller uses. The controller performs multicasting in two modes:

Unicast modeIn this mode, the controller unicasts every multicast packet to every access point associated to the controller. This mode is inefficient but might be required on networks that do not support multicasting. Multicast modeIn this mode, the controller sends multicast packets to a CAPWAP multicast group. This method reduces overhead on the controller processor and shifts the work of packet replication to your network, which is much more efficient than the unicast method. When you enable multicast mode and the controller receives a multicast packet from the wired LAN, the controller encapsulates the packet using CAPWAP and forwards the packet to the CAPWAP multicast group address. The controller always uses the management interface for sending multicast packets. Access points in the multicast group receive the packet and forward it to all the BSSIDs mapped to the interface on which clients receive multicast traffic. From the access point perspective, the multicast appears to be a broadcast to all SSIDs. The controller supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) v1 snooping for IPv6 multicast. This feature keeps track of and delivers IPv6 multicast flows to the clients that request them. To support IPv6 multicast, you must enable Global Multicast Mode. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 105 Configuring Multicast Mode Note When you disable the Global Multicast Mode, the controller still forwards the IPv6 ICMP multicast messages, such as router announcements and DHCPv6 solicits, as these are required for IPv6 to work. As a result, enabling the Global Multicast Mode on the controller does not impact the ICMPv6 and the DHCPv6 messages. These messages will always be forwarded irrespective of whether or not the Global Multicast Mode is enabled. In controller software 4.2 or later releases, Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is introduced to better direct multicast packets. When this feature is enabled, the controller gathers IGMP reports from the clients, processes them, creates unique multicast group IDs (MGIDs) from the IGMP reports after selecting the Layer 3 multicast address and the VLAN number, and sends the IGMP reports to the infrastructure switch. The controller sends these reports with the source address as the interface address on which it received the reports from the clients. The controller then updates the access point MGID table on the access point with the client MAC address. When the controller receives multicast traffic for a particular multicast group, it forwards it to all the access points, but only those access points that have active clients listening or subscribed to that multicast group send multicast traffic on that particular WLAN. IP packets are forwarded with an MGID that is unique for an ingress VLAN and the destination multicast group. Layer 2 multicast packets are forwarded with an MGID that is unique for the ingress interface. When IGMP snooping is disabled, the following is true:

The controller always uses Layer 2 MGID when it sends multicast data to the access point. Every interface created is assigned one Layer 2 MGID. For example, the management interface has an MGID of 0, and the first dynamic interface created is assigned an MGID of 8, which increments as each dynamic interface is created. The IGMP packets from clients are forwarded to the router. As a result, the router IGMP table is updated with the IP address of the clients as the last reporter. When IGMP snooping is enabled, the following is true:

The controller always uses Layer 3 MGID for all Layer 3 multicast traffic sent to the access point. For all Layer 2 multicast traffic, it continues to use Layer 2 MGID. IGMP report packets from wireless clients are consumed or absorbed by the controller, which generates a query for the clients. After the router sends the IGMP query, the controller sends the IGMP reports with its interface IP address as the listener IP address for the multicast group. As a result, the router IGMP table is updated with the controller IP address as the multicast listener. When the client that is listening to the multicast groups roams from one controller to another, the first controller transmits all the multicast group information for the listening client to the second controller. As a result, the second controller can immediately create the multicast group information for the client. The second controller sends the IGMP reports to the network for all multicast groups to which the client was listening. This process aids in the seamless transfer of multicast data to the client. If the listening client roams to a controller in a different subnet, the multicast packets are tunneled to the anchor controller of the client to avoid the reverse path filtering (RPF) check. The anchor then forwards the multicast packets to the infrastructure switch. Note The MGIDs are controller specific. The same multicast group packets coming from the same VLAN in two different controllers may be mapped to two different MGIDs. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 106 OL-28744-01 Configuring Multicast Mode Note If Layer 2 multicast is enabled, a single MGID is assigned to all the multicast addresses coming from an interface. Restrictions for Configuring Multicast Mode The Cisco Unified Wireless Network solution uses some IP address ranges for specific purposes, and you should keep these ranges in mind when configuring a multicast group:

224.0.0.0 through 224.0.0.255Reserved link local addresses 224.0.1.0 through 238.255.255.255Globally scoped addresses 239.0.0.0 through 239.255.x.y /16Limited scope addresses When you enable multicast mode on the controller, you also must configure a CAPWAP multicast group address. Access points subscribe to the CAPWAP multicast group using IGMP. Cisco 1100, 1130, 1200, 1230, and 1240 access points use IGMP versions 1, 2, and 3. Access points in monitor mode, sniffer mode, or rogue detector mode do not join the CAPWAP multicast group address. The CAPWAP multicast group configured on the controllers should be different for different controllers. Access points running recent Cisco IOS versions transmit multicast frames at the highest configured basic rate and management frames at the lowest basic mandatory rates, can cause reliability problems. Access points running LWAPP or autonomous Cisco IOS should transmit multicast and management frames at the lowest configured basic rate. Such behavior is necessary to provide good coverage at the cell's edge, especially for unacknowledged multicast transmissions where multicast wireless transmissions might fail to be received. Because multicast frames are not retransmitted at the MAC layer, clients at the edge of the cell might fail to receive them successfully. If reliable reception is a goal, multicast frames should be transmitted at a low data rate. If support for high data rate multicast frames is required, it might be useful to shrink the cell size and disable all lower data rates. Depending on your requirements, you can take the following actions:

If you need to transmit multicast data with the greatest reliability and if there is no need for great multicast bandwidth, then configure a single basic rate, that is low enough to reach the edges of the wireless cells. If you need to transmit multicast data at a certain data rate in order to achieve a certain throughput, you can configure that rate as the highest basic rate. You can also set a lower basic rate for coverage of nonmulticast clients. Multicast mode does not operate across intersubnet mobility events such as guest tunneling. It does, however, operate with interface overrides using RADIUS (but only when IGMP snooping is enabled) and with site-specific VLANs (access point group VLANs). For LWAPP, the controller drops multicast packets sent to UDP control port 12223. For CAPWAP, the controller drops multicast packets sent to UDP control and data ports 5246 and 5247, respectively. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 107 Configuring Multicast Mode Therefore, you may want to consider not using these port numbers with the multicast applications on your network. We recommend that any multicast applications on your network not use the multicast address configured as the CAPWAP multicast group address on the controller. For multicast to work on 2500 series controller, you have to configure the multicast IP address. Multicast mode is not supported on Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controllers. Enabling Multicast Mode (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose Controller > Multicast to open the Multicast page. Select the Enable Global Multicast Mode check box to configure sending multicast packets. The default value is disabled. Note FlexConnect supports unicast mode only. If you want to enable IGMP snooping, select the Enable IGMP Snooping check box. If you want to disable IGMP snooping, leave the check box unselected. The default value is disabled. To set the IGMP timeout, enter a value between 30 and 7200 seconds in the IGMP Timeout text box. The controller sends three queries in one timeout value at an interval of timeout/ 3 to see if any clients exist for a particular multicast group. If the controller does not receive a response through an IGMP report from the client, the controller times out the client entry from the MGID table. When no clients are left for a particular multicast group, the controller waits for the IGMP timeout value to expire and then deletes the MGID entry from the controller. The controller always generates a general IGMP query (that is, to destination address 224.0.0.1) and sends it on all WLANs with an MGID value of 1. Enter the IGMP Query Interval (seconds). Select the Enable MLD Snooping check box to support IPv6 forwarding decisions. Note To enable MLD Snooping, you must enable Global Multicast Mode of the controller. In the MLD Timeout text box, enter a value between 30 and 7200 seconds to set the MLD timeout. Enter the MLD Query Interval (seconds). The valid range is between 15 and 2400 seconds. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Enabling Multicast Mode (CLI) Step 1 Enable or disable multicasting on the controller by entering this command:

config network multicast global {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. Note The config network broadcast {enable | disable} command allows you to enable or disable broadcasting without enabling or disabling multicasting as well. This command uses the multicast mode currently on the controller to operate. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 108 OL-28744-01 Configuring Multicast Mode Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Perform either of the following:

a) Configure the controller to use the unicast method to send multicast packets by entering this command:

config network multicast mode unicast b) Configure the controller to use the multicast method to send multicast packets to a CAPWAP multicast group by entering this command:

config network multicast mode multicast multicast_group_ip_address Enable or disable IGMP snooping by entering this command:

config network multicast igmp snooping {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. Set the IGMP timeout value by entering this command:

config network multicast igmp timeout timeout You can enter a timeout value between 30 and 7200 seconds. The controller sends three queries in one timeout value at an interval of timeout/3 to see if any clients exist for a particular multicast group. If the controller does not receive a response through an IGMP report from the client, the controller times out the client entry from the MGID table. When no clients are left for a particular multicast group, the controller waits for the IGMP timeout value to expire and then deletes the MGID entry from the controller. The controller always generates a general IGMP query (that is, to destination address 224.0.0.1) and sends it on all WLANs with an MGID value of 1. Enable or disable MLD snooping by entering this command:

config network multicast mld snooping {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. Note To enable MLD snooping, you must enable global multicast mode of the controller. Set the MLD timeout value by entering this command:

config network multicast mld timeout timeout Enter the MLD Query Interval (seconds). The valid range is between 15 and 2400 seconds. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Viewing Multicast Groups (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Monitor > Multicast. The Multicast Groups page appears. This page shows all the multicast groups and their corresponding MGIDs. Click the link for a specific MGID (such as MGID 550) to see a list of all the clients joined to the multicast group in that particular MGID. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 109 Configuring Multicast Mode Viewing Multicast Groups (CLI) Before You Begin See all the multicast groups and their corresponding MGIDs by entering this command:

show network multicast mgid summary Information similar to the following appears:

Layer2 MGID Mapping:

-------------------

vlanId InterfaceName

-------------------------------- ------

0 management test 0 wired 20 Layer3 MGID Mapping:

-------------------

Number of Layer3 MGIDs........................... 1 Vlan MGID Group address

--------------- ---- ----

239.255.255.250 0 550 MGID

----

0 9 8 See all the clients joined to the multicast group in a specific MGID by entering this command:

show network multicast mgid detail mgid_value where the mgid_value parameter is a number between 550 and 4095. Information similar to the following appears:

Mgid........................................ 550 Multicast Group Address..................... 239.255.255.250 Vlan........................................ 0 Rx Packet Count............................. 807399588 No of clients............................... 1 Client List................................. Client MAC 00:13:02:23:82:ad Expire Time (mm:ss) 0:20 Viewing an Access Points Multicast Client Table (CLI) To help troubleshoot roaming events, you can view an access points multicast client table from the controller by performing a remote debug of the access point. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 110 Initiate a remote debug of the access point by entering this command:

debug ap enable Cisco_AP See all of the MGIDs on the access point and the number of clients per WLAN by entering this command:

debug ap command show capwap mcast mgid all Cisco_AP See all of the clients per MGID on the access point and the number of clients per WLAN by entering this command:

debug ap command show capwap mcast mgid id mgid_value Cisco_AP Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring Multicast Domain Name System Configuring Multicast Domain Name System Information About Multicast Domain Name System Multicast Domain Name System (mDNS) service discovery provides a way to announce and discover the services on the local network. The mDNS service discovery enables wireless clients to access Apple services such as Apple Printer and Apple TV advertised in a different Layer 3 network. mDNS performs DNS queries over IP multicast. mDNS supports zero-configuration IP networking. As a standard, mDNS uses multicast IP address 224.0.0.251 as the destination address and 5353 as the UDP destination port. Restrictions for Configuring Multicast DNS mDNS over IPv6 is not supported. mDNS is not supported on access points in FlexConnect mode in a locally switched WLAN and mesh access points. mDNS is not supported on remote LANs. mDNS is not supported on Cisco AP1240 and Cisco AP1130. Third-party mDNS servers or applications are not supported on the Cisco WLC using the mDNS feature. Devices that are advertised by the third-party servers or applications are not populated on the mDNS service or device table correctly on the Cisco WLC. Video is not supported on Apple iOS 6 with WMM in enabled state. Configuring Multicast DNS (GUI) Step 1 Configure the global mDNS parameters and the Master Services Database by following these steps:

a) Choose Controller > mDNS > General. b) Select or unselect the mDNS Global Snooping check box to enable or disable snooping of mDNS packets, respectively. c) Enter the mDNS query interval in minutes. The query interval is the frequency at which the controller queries for a service. d) Choose a service from the Select Service drop-down list. Note To add a new mDNS-supported service to the list, choose Other. Specify the service name and the service string. The controller snoops and learns about the mDNS service advertisements only if the service is available in the Master Services Database. The controller can snoop and learn a maximum of 64 services. e) Select or unselect the Query Status check box to enable or disable an mDNS query for a service, respectively. f) Click Add. g) Click Apply. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 111 Configuring Multicast Domain Name System h) To view the details of an mDNS service, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow of a service, and choose Details. Step 2 Configure an mDNS profile by following these steps:

a) Choose Controller > mDNS > Profiles. The controller has a default mDNS profile, which is default-mdns-profile. It is not possible to delete the default profile. b) To create a new profile, click New, enter a profile name, and click Apply. c) To edit a profile, click a profile name on the mDNS Profiles page; from the Service Name drop-down list, choose a service to be associated with the profile, and click Apply. You can add multiple services to a profile. Step 3 Click Save Configuration. What to Do Next After creating a new profile, you must map the profile to an interface group, an interface, or a WLAN. Clients receive service advertisements only for the services associated with the profile. The highest priority is given to the profiles associated with interface groups, followed by the interface profiles, and then the WLAN profiles. Each client is mapped to a profile based on the order of priority. Map an mDNS profile to an interface group by following these steps:

1 Choose Controller > Interface Groups. 2 Click the corresponding interface group name. The Interface Groups > Edit page is displayed. 3 From the mDNS Profile drop-down list, choose a profile. Map an mDNS profile to an interface by following these steps:

1 Choose Controller > Interfaces. 2 Click the corresponding interface name. The Interfaces > Edit page is displayed. 3 From the mDNS Profile drop-down list, choose a profile. Map an mDNS profile to a WLAN by following these steps:

1 Choose WLANs. click the WLAN ID to open the WLANs > Edit page. 2 Click the corresponding WLAN ID. The WLANs > Edit page is displayed. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Select the mDNS Snooping check box. 5 From the mDNS Profile drop-down list, choose a profile. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 112 OL-28744-01 Configuring Multicast Domain Name System Configuring Multicast DNS (CLI) Configure mDNS snooping by entering this command:

config mdns snooping {enable | disable}

Configure an mDNS service by entering this command:

config mdns service {{create service-name service-string query {enable | disable}} | delete service-name}

Configure a query for an mDNS service by entering this command:

config mdns service query {enable | disable} service-name Configure a query interval for mDNS services by entering this command:

config mdns query interval value-in-minutes Configure an mDNS profile by entering this command:

config mdns profile {create | delete} profile-name Note If you try to delete an mDNS profile that is already associated with an interface group, an interface, or a WLAN, an error message is displayed. Configure mDNS services to a profile by entering this command:

config mdns profile service {add | delete} profile-name service-name Map an mDNS profile to an interface group by entering this command:

config interface group mdns-profile {interface-group-name | all} {mdns-profile-name | none}

Note If the mDNS profile name is none, no profiles are attached to the interface group. Any existing profile that is attached is removed. View information about an mDNS profile that is associated with an interface group by entering this command:

show interface group detailed interface-group-name Map an mDNS profile to an interface by entering this command:

config interface mdns-profile {management | {interface-name | all}} {mdns-profile-name | none}

View information about the mDNS profile that is associated with an interface by entering this command:

show interface detailed interface-name Configure mDNS for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan mdns {enable | disable} {wlan-id | all}

Map an mDNS profile to a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan mdns profile {wlan-id | all} {mdns-profile-name | none}

View information about an mDNS profile that is associated with a WLAN by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 113 Configuring Multicast Domain Name System show wlan wlan-id View information about all mDNS profiles or a particular mDNS profile by entering this command:

show mdns profile {summary | detailed mdns-profile-name}

View information about all mDNS services or a particular mDNS service by entering this command:

show mdns service {summary | detailed mdns-service-name}

View information about the mDNS domain names that are learned by entering this command:

show mdns domain-name-ip summary View the mDNS profile for a client by entering this command:

show client detail client-mac-address View the mDNS details for a network by entering this command:

show network summary Clear the mDNS service database by entering this command:

clear mdns service-database {all | service-name}

View events related to mDNS by entering this command:

debug mdns message {enable | disable}

View mDNS details of the events by entering this command:

debug mdns detail {enable | disable}

View errors related to mDNS processing by entering this command:

debug mdns error {enable | disable}

Configure debugging of all mDNS details by entering this command:

debug mdns all {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 114 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 12 Configuring Client Roaming Information About Client Roaming, page 115 Guidelines and Limitations, page 117 Configuring CCX Client Roaming Parameters (GUI), page 117 Configuring CCX Client Roaming Parameters (CLI), page 118 Obtaining CCX Client Roaming Information (CLI), page 118 Debugging CCX Client Roaming Issues (CLI), page 119 Information About Client Roaming The Cisco UWN solution supports seamless client roaming across lightweight access points managed by the same controller, between controllers in the same mobility group on the same subnet, and across controllers in the same mobility group on different subnets. Also, in controller software release 4.1 or later releases, client roaming with multicast packets is supported. You can adjust the default RF settings (RSSI, hysteresis, scan threshold, and transition time) to fine-tune the operation of client roaming using the controller GUI or CLI. Inter-Controller Roaming Multiple-controller deployments support client roaming across access points managed by controllers in the same mobility group and on the same subnet. This roaming is also transparent to the client because the session is sustained and a tunnel between controllers allows the client to continue using the same DHCP- or client-assigned IP address as long as the session remains active. The tunnel is torn down, and the client must reauthenticate when the client sends a DHCP Discover with a 0.0.0.0 client IP address or a 169.254.*.* client auto-IP address or when the operator-set session timeout is exceeded. Intra-Controller Roaming Each controller supports same-controller client roaming across access points managed by the same controller. This roaming is transparent to the client as the session is sustained, and the client continues using the same DHCP-assigned or client-assigned IP address. The controller provides DHCP functionality with a relay OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 115 Information About Client Roaming function. Same-controller roaming is supported in single-controller deployments and in multiple-controller deployments. Inter-Subnet Roaming Multiple-controller deployments support client roaming across access points managed by controllers in the same mobility group on different subnets. This roaming is transparent to the client because the session is sustained and a tunnel between the controllers allows the client to continue using the same DHCP-assigned or client-assigned IP address as long as the session remains active. The tunnel is torn down, and the client must reauthenticate when the client sends a DHCP Discover with a 0.0.0.0 client IP address or a 169.254.*.*

client auto-IP address or when the operator-set user timeout is exceeded. Voice-over-IP Telephone Roaming 802.11 voice-over-IP (VoIP) telephones actively seek out associations with the strongest RF signal to ensure the best quality of service (QoS) and the maximum throughput. The minimum VoIP telephone requirement of 20-millisecond or shorter latency time for the roaming handover is easily met by the Cisco Unified Wireless Network (Cisco UWN) solution, which has an average handover latency of 5 or fewer milliseconds when open authentication is used. This short latency period is controlled by controllers rather than allowing independent access points to negotiate roaming handovers. The Cisco UWN solution supports 802.11 VoIP telephone roaming across lightweight access points managed by controllers on different subnets, as long as the controllers are in the same mobility group. This roaming is transparent to the VoIP telephone because the session is sustained and a tunnel between controllers allows the VoIP telephone to continue using the same DHCP-assigned IP address as long as the session remains active. The tunnel is torn down, and the VoIP client must reauthenticate when the VoIP telephone sends a DHCP Discover with a 0.0.0.0 VoIP telephone IP address or a 169.254.*.* VoIP telephone auto-IP address or when the operator-set user timeout is exceeded. CCX Layer 2 Client Roaming The controller supports five CCX Layer 2 client roaming enhancements:

Access point assisted roamingThis feature helps clients save scanning time. When a CCXv2 client associates to an access point, it sends an information packet to the new access point listing the characteristics of its previous access point. Roaming time decreases when the client recognizes and uses an access point list built by compiling all previous access points to which each client was associated and sent (unicast) to the client immediately after association. The access point list contains the channels, BSSIDs of neighbor access points that support the clients current SSID(s), and time elapsed since disassociation. Enhanced neighbor listThis feature focuses on improving a CCXv4 clients roam experience and network edge performance, especially when servicing voice applications. The access point provides its associated client information about its neighbors using a neighbor-list update unicast message. Enhanced neighbor list request (E2E)The End-2-End specification is a Cisco and Intel joint program that defines new protocols and interfaces to improve the overall voice and roaming experience. It applies only to Intel clients in a CCX environment. Specifically, it enables Intel clients to request a neighbor list at will. When this occurs, the access point forwards the request to the controller. The controller receives the request and replies with the current CCX roaming sublist of neighbors for the access point to which the client is associated. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 116 OL-28744-01 Guidelines and Limitations Note To see whether a particular client supports E2E, choose Wireless > Clients on the controller GUI, click the Detail link for the desired client, and look at the E2E Version text box in the Client Properties area. Roam reason reportThis feature enables CCXv4 clients to report the reason why they roamed to a new access point. It also allows network administrators to build and monitor a roam history. Directed roam requestThis feature enables the controller to send directed roam requests to the client in situations when the controller can better service the client on an access point different from the one to which it is associated. In this case, the controller sends the client a list of the best access points that it can join. The client can either honor or ignore the directed roam request. Non-CCX clients and clients running CCXv3 or below must not take any action. No configuration is required for this feature. Guidelines and Limitations Controller software release 4.2 or later releases support CCX versions 1 through 5. CCX support is enabled automatically for every WLAN on the controller and cannot be disabled. The controller stores the CCX version of the client in its client database and uses it to generate and respond to CCX frames appropriately. Clients must support CCXv4 or v5 (or CCXv2 for access point assisted roaming) in order to utilize these roaming enhancements. The roaming enhancements mentioned above are enabled automatically, with the appropriate CCX support. FlexConnect access points in standalone mode do not support CCX Layer 2 roaming. Client roaming between 600 Series Access points is not supported. Configuring CCX Client Roaming Parameters (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Client Roaming. The 802.11a (802.11b) > Client Roaming page appears. If you want to fine-tune the RF parameters that affect client roaming, choose Custom from the Mode drop-down list and go to Step 3. If you want to leave the RF parameters at their default values, choose Default and go to Step 8. In the Minimum RSSI text box, enter a value for the minimum received signal strength indicator (RSSI) required for the client to associate to an access point. If the clients average received signal power dips below this threshold, reliable communication is usually impossible. Therefore, clients must already have found and roamed to another access point with a stronger signal before the minimum RSSI value is reached. The range is 90 to 50 dBm. The default is 85 dBm. In the Hysteresis text box, enter a value to indicate how much greater the signal strength of a neighboring access point must be in order for the client to roam to it. This parameter is intended to reduce the amount of roaming between access points if the client is physically located on or near the border between two access points. The range is 3 to 20 dB. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 117 Configuring CCX Client Roaming Parameters (CLI) The default is 3 dB. Step 5 Step 6 In the Scan Threshold text box, enter the minimum RSSI that is allowed before the client should roam to a better access point. When the RSSI drops below the specified value, the client must be able to roam to a better access point within the specified transition time. This parameter also provides a power-save method to minimize the time that the client spends in active or passive scanning. For example, the client can scan slowly when the RSSI is above the threshold and scan more rapidly when the RSSI is below the threshold. The range is 90 to 50 dBm. The default is 72 dBm. In the Transition Time text box, enter the maximum time allowed for the client to detect a suitable neighboring access point to roam to and to complete the roam, whenever the RSSI from the clients associated access point is below the scan threshold. The Scan Threshold and Transition Time parameters guarantee a minimum level of client roaming performance. Together with the highest expected client speed and roaming hysteresis, these parameters make it possible to design a wireless LAN network that supports roaming simply by ensuring a certain minimum overlap distance between access points. The range is 1 to 5 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Repeat this procedure if you want to configure client roaming for another radio band. Configuring CCX Client Roaming Parameters (CLI) Configure CCX Layer 2 client roaming parameters by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} l2roam rf-params {default | custom min_rssi roam_hyst scan_thresh trans_time}

Obtaining CCX Client Roaming Information (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 View the current RF parameters configured for client roaming for the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} l2roam rf-param View the CCX Layer 2 client roaming statistics for a particular access point by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} l2roam statistics ap_mac This command provides the following information:

The number of roam reason reports received The number of neighbor list requests received The number of neighbor list reports sent Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 118 OL-28744-01 Debugging CCX Client Roaming Issues (CLI) The number of broadcast neighbor updates sent Step 3 View the roaming history for a particular client by entering this command:

show client roam-history client_mac This command provides the following information:

The time when the report was received The MAC address of the access point to which the client is currently associated The MAC address of the access point to which the client was previously associated The channel of the access point to which the client was previously associated The SSID of the access point to which the client was previously associated The time when the client disassociated from the previous access point The reason for the client roam Debugging CCX Client Roaming Issues (CLI) If you experience any problems with CCX Layer 2 client roaming, enter this command:

debug l2roam [detail | error | packet | all] {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 119 Debugging CCX Client Roaming Issues (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 120 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 13 Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding Information About Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding, page 121 Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding (CLI), page 121 Information About Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding In the controller software Release 5.2 or later releases, the controller enforces strict IP address-to-MAC address binding in client packets. The controller checks the IP address and MAC address in a packet, compares them to the addresses that are registered with the controller, and forwards the packet only if they both match. In previous releases, the controller checks only the MAC address of the client and ignores the IP address. You must disable IP-MAC address binding to use an access point in sniffer mode if the access point is associated with a 5500 series controller, a 2500 series controller, or a controller network module. To disable IP-MAC address binding, enter the config network ip-mac-binding disable. WLAN must be enabled to use an access point in sniffer mode if the access point is associated with a 5500 series controller, a 2500 series controller, or a controller network module. If WLAN is disabled, the access point cannot send packets. Note If the IP address or MAC address of the packet has been spoofed, the check does not pass, and the controller discards the packet. Spoofed packets can pass through the controller only if both the IP and MAC addresses are spoofed together and changed to that of another valid client on the same controller. Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding (CLI) Step 1 Enable or disable IP-MAC address binding by entering this command:

config network ip-mac-binding {enable | disable}

The default value is enabled. Note You might want to disable this binding check if you have a routed network behind a workgroup bridge (WGB). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 121 Configuring IP-MAC Address Binding (CLI) Note You must disable this binding check in order to use an access point in sniffer mode if the access point is joined to a Cisco 5500 Series Controller. Step 2 Step 3 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config View the status of IP-MAC address binding by entering this command:

show network summary Information similar to the following appears:

RF-Network Name............................. ctrl4404 Web Mode.................................... Disable Secure Web Mode............................. Enable Secure Web Mode Cipher-Option High.......... Disable Secure Web Mode Cipher-Option SSLv2......... Disable

... IP/MAC Addr Binding Check ............... Enabled

...<?Line-Break?><?HardReturn?>

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 122 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 14 Configuring Quality of Service Configuring Quality of Service, page 123 Configuring Quality of Service Roles, page 126 Configuring Quality of Service Information About Quality of Service Quality of service (QoS) refers to the capability of a network to provide better service to selected network traffic over various technologies. The primary goal of QoS is to provide priority including dedicated bandwidth, controlled jitter and latency (required by some real-time and interactive traffic), and improved loss characteristics. The controller supports four QoS levels:

Platinum/VoiceEnsures a high quality of service for voice over wireless. Gold/VideoSupports high-quality video applications. Silver/Best EffortSupports normal bandwidth for clients. This is the default setting. Bronze/BackgroundProvides the lowest bandwidth for guest services. Note VoIP clients should be set to Platinum. You can configure the bandwidth of each QoS level using QoS profiles and then apply the profiles to WLANs. The profile settings are pushed to the clients associated to that WLAN. In addition, you can create QoS roles to specify different bandwidth levels for regular and guest users. Follow the instructions in this section to configure QoS profiles and QoS roles. You can also define the maximum and default QoS levels for unicast and multicast traffic when you assign a QoS profile to a WLAN. The wireless rate limits can be defined on both upstream and downstream traffic. Rate limits can be defined per SSID and/or specified as a maximum rate limit for all clients. These rate limits can be individually configured. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 123 Configuring Quality of Service Configuring Quality of Service Profiles You can configure the Platinum, Gold, Silver, and Bronze QoS profiles. Configuring QoS Profiles (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Disable the 802.11a and 802.11b/g networks so that you can configure the QoS profiles. To disable the radio networks, choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network, unselect the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply. Choose Wireless > QoS > Profiles to open the QoS Profiles page. Click the name of the profile that you want to configure to open the Edit QoS Profile page. Change the description of the profile by modifying the contents of the Description text box. Define the data rates on a per-user basis as follows:

a) Define the average data rate for TCP traffic per user by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Data Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. b) Define the peak data rate for TCP traffic per user by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Data Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note The burst data rate should be greater than or equal to the average data rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic to and from the wireless client. Ensure that you configure the average data rate before you configure the burst data rate. c) Define the average real-time rate for UDP traffic per user by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Real-Time Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note Average Data Rate is used to measure TCP traffic while Average Real-time rate is used for UDP traffic. They are measured in kbps for all the entries. The values for Average Data Rate and Average Real-time rate can be different because they are applied to different upper layer protocols such as TCP and UDP. These different values for the rates do not impact the bandwidth. d) Define the peak real-time rate for UDP traffic per user by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Real-Time Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note The burst real-time rate should be greater than or equal to the average real-time rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic to and from the wireless client. Step 6 Define the data rates on a per-SSID basis as follows:

a) Define the average data rate TCP traffic per SSID by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Data Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. b) Define the peak data rate for TCP traffic per SSID by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Data Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note The burst data rate should be greater than or equal to the average data rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic in the WLANs. c) Define the average real-time rate for UDP traffic per SSID by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Real-Time Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. d) Define the peak real-time rate for UDP traffic per SSID by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Real-Time Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note The burst real-time rate should be greater than or equal to the average real-time rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic in the WLANs. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 124 OL-28744-01 Configuring Quality of Service Step 7 Define the maximum and default QoS levels for unicast and multicast traffic when you assign a QoS profile to a WLAN. a) From the Maximum Priority drop-down list, choose the maximum QoS priority for any data frames transmitted by the AP to any station in the WLAN. For example, a QoS profile named gold targeted for video applications has the maximum priority set to video by default. b) From the Unicast Default Priority drop-down list, choose the QoS priority for unicast data frames transmitted by the AP to non-WMM stations in the WLAN c) From the Multicast Default Priority drop-down list, choose the QoS priority for multicast data frames transmitted by the AP to stations in the WLAN, Note The default unicast priority cannot be used for non-WMM clients in a mixed WLAN. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Choose 802.1p from the Protocol Type drop-down list and enter the maximum priority value in the 802.1p Tag text box to define the maximum value (07) for the priority tag associated with packets that fall within the profile. The tagged packets include CAPWAP data packets (between access points and the controller) and packets sent toward the core network. Note If a QoS profile has 802.1p tagging configured and if this QoS profile is assigned to a WLAN that uses an untagged interface on the controller, the client traffic will be blocked. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Reenable the 802.11 networks. To enable the radio networks, choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network, select the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply. Configuring QoS Profiles (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Disable the 802.11a and 802.11b/g networks so that you can configure the QoS profiles by entering these commands:

config 802.11{a | b} disable network Change the profile description by entering this command:

config qos description {bronze | silver | gold | platinum }description Define the average data rate for TCP traffic per user or per SSID by entering this command:

config qos average-data-rate {bronze | silver | gold | platinum} {per-ssid | per-client} {downstream | upstream}

rate Note For the rate parameter, you can enter a value between 0 and 512,000 Kbps (inclusive). A value of 0 imposes no bandwidth restriction on the QoS profile. Define the peak data rate for TCP traffic per user or per SSID by entering this command:

config qos burst-data-rate {bronze | silver | gold | platinum} {per-ssid | per-client} {downstream | upstream} rate Define the average real-time data rate for UDP traffic per user or per SSID by entering this command:

config qos average-realtime-rate {bronze | silver | gold | platinum} {per-ssid | per-client} {downstream | upstream}

rate OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 125 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Configuring Quality of Service Roles Define the peak real-time data rate for UDP traffic per user or per SSID by entering this command:

config qos burst-realtime-rate {bronze | silver | gold | platinum} {per-ssid | per-client} {downstream | upstream}

rate Define the maximum and default QoS levels for unicast and multicast traffic when you assign a QoS profile to a WLAN by entering this command:

config qos priority {bronze | gold | platinum | silver} {maximum priority} {default unicast priority} {default multicast priority}

You choose from the following options for the maximum priority, default unicast priority, and default multicast priority parameters:

besteffort background video voice Define the maximum value (07) for the priority tag associated with packets that fall within the profile, by entering these commands:

config qos protocol-type {bronze | silver | gold | platinum} dot1p config qos dot1p-tag {bronze | silver | gold | platinum} tag The tagged packets include CAPWAP data packets (between access points and the controller) and packets sent toward the core network. Note The 802.1p tagging has impact only on wired packets. Wireless packets are impacted only by the maximum priority level set for a QoS profile. If a QoS profile has 802.1p tagging configured and if this QoS profile is assigned to a WLAN that uses an untagged interface on the controller, the client traffic will be blocked. Note Step 9 Reenable the 802.11a and 802.11b/g networks so that you can configure the QoS profiles by entering these commands:

config 802.11{a | b} enable network Configuring Quality of Service Roles Information About Quality of Service Roles After you configure a QoS profile and apply it to a WLAN, it limits the bandwidth level of clients associated to that WLAN. Multiple WLANs can be mapped to the same QoS profile, which can result in bandwidth contention between regular users (such as employees) and guest users. In order to prevent guest users from using the same level of bandwidth as regular users, you can create QoS roles with different (and presumably lower) bandwidth contracts and assign them to guest users. You can configure up to ten QoS roles for guest users. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 126 OL-28744-01 Configuring Quality of Service Roles Note If you choose to create an entry on the RADIUS server for a guest user and enable RADIUS authentication for the WLAN on which web authentication is performed rather than adding a guest user to the local user database from the controller, you need to assign the QoS role on the RADIUS server itself. To do so, a guest-role Airespace attribute needs to be added on the RADIUS server with a datatype of string and a return value of 11. This attribute is sent to the controller when authentication occurs. If a role with the name returned from the RADIUS server is found configured on the controller, the bandwidth associated to that role is enforced for the guest user after authentication completes successfully. Configuring QoS Roles Configuring QoS (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Choose Wireless > QoS > Roles to open the QoS Roles for the Guest Users page. This page shows any existing QoS roles for guest users. Note If you want to delete a QoS role, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that role and choose Remove. Note Click New to create a new QoS role. The QoS Role Name > New page appears. In the Role Name text box, enter a name for the new QoS role. The name should uniquely identify the role of the QoS user (such as Contractor, Vendor, and so on). Click Apply. Click the name of the QoS role to edit the bandwidth of a QoS role. The Edit QoS Role Data Rates page appears. Note The values that you configure for the per-user bandwidth contracts affect only the amount of bandwidth going downstream (from the access point to the wireless client). They do not affect the bandwidth for upstream traffic

(from the client to the access point). The Access Points that support per-user bandwidth contracts for upstream (from the client to the access point) are - AP1140, AP1040, AP3500, AP3600, AP1250, and AP1260. Define the average data rate for TCP traffic on a per-user basis by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Data Rate text box. You can enter a value between 0 and 60,000 Kbps (inclusive). A value of 0 imposes no bandwidth restriction on the QoS role. Define the peak data rate for TCP traffic on a per-user basis by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Data Rate text box. You can enter a value between 0 and 60,000 Kbps (inclusive). A value of 0 imposes no bandwidth restriction on the QoS role. Note The burst data rate should be greater than or equal to the average data rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic to and from the wireless client. Ensure that you configure the average data rate before you configure the burst data rate. Define the average real-time rate for UDP traffic on a per-user basis by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Real-Time Rate text box. You can enter a value between 0 and 60,000 Kbps (inclusive). A value of 0 imposes no bandwidth restriction on the QoS role. Define the peak real-time rate for UDP traffic on a per-user basis by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Real-Time Rate text box. You can enter a value between 0 and 60,000 Kbps (inclusive). A value of 0 imposes no bandwidth restriction on the QoS role. Note The burst real-time rate should be greater than or equal to the average real-time rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic to and from the wireless client. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 127 Configuring Quality of Service Roles Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Apply a QoS role to a guest user by following the instructions in the Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller

(GUI) section. Configuring QoS Roles (CLI) Step 1 Create a QoS role for a guest user by entering this command:

config netuser guest-role create role_name Note If you want to delete a QoS role, enter the config netuser guest-role delete role_name command. Step 2 Configure the bandwidth contracts for a QoS role by entering these commands:

config netuser guest-role qos data-rate average-data-rate role_name rateConfigures the average data rate for TCP traffic on a per-user basis. config netuser guest-role qos data-rate burst-data-rate role_name rateConfigures the peak data rate for TCP traffic on a per-user basis. Note The burst data rate should be greater than or equal to the average data rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic to and from the wireless client. config netuser guest-role qos data-rate average-realtime-rate role_name rateConfigures the average real-time rate for UDP traffic on a per-user basis. config netuser guest-role qos data-rate burst-realtime-rate role_name rateConfigures the peak real-time rate for UDP traffic on a per-user basis. Note The burst real-time rate should be greater than or equal to the average real-time rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic to and from the wireless client. For the role_name parameter in each of these commands, enter a name for the new QoS role. The name should uniquely identify the role of the QoS user (such as Contractor, Vendor, and so on). For the rate parameter, you can enter a value between 0 and 60,000 Kbps (inclusive). A value of 0 imposes no bandwidth restriction on the QoS role. Note Step 3 Apply a QoS role to a guest user by entering this command:

config netuser guest-role apply username role_name For example, the role of Contractor could be applied to guest user jsmith. Note If you do not assign a QoS role to a guest user, the Role text box in the User Details shows the role as default. The bandwidth contracts for this user are defined in the QoS profile for the WLAN. If you want to unassign a QoS role from a guest user, enter the config netuser guest-role apply username default command. This user now uses the bandwidth contracts defined in the QoS profile for the WLAN. Note Step 4 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Step 5 See a list of the current QoS roles and their bandwidth parameters by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 128 OL-28744-01 Configuring Quality of Service Roles show netuser guest-roles Information similar to the following appears:

Role Name........................................ Contractor Average Data Rate........................... 10 Burst Data Rate............................. 10 Average Realtime Rate....................... 100 Burst Realtime Rate......................... 100 Role Name........................................ Vendor Average Data Rate........................... unconfigured Burst Data Rate............................. unconfigured Average Realtime Rate....................... unconfigured Burst Realtime Rate...................... unconfigured OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 129 Configuring Quality of Service Roles Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 130 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 15 Configuring Application Visibility and Control Information About Application Visibility and Control, page 131 Restrictions for Application Visibility and Control, page 131 Configuring Application Visibility and Control (GUI), page 132 Configuring Application Visibility and Control (CLI), page 133 Configuring NetFlow, page 134 Information About Application Visibility and Control Application Visibility and Control (AVC) classifies applications using deep packet inspection techniques with the Network-Based Application Recognition (NBAR) engine, and provides application-level visibility and control into Wi-Fi networks. After the applications are recognized, the AVC feature enables you to either drop or mark the data traffic. Using AVC, we can detect more than 1000 applications. AVC enables you to perform real-time analysis and create policies to reduce network congestion, costly network link usage, and infrastructure upgrades. AVC is supported on the following controller platforms: Cisco 2500 Series Wireless LAN Controllers, Cisco 5500 Series Wireless LAN Controllers, Cisco Flex 7500 Series Wireless LAN Controllers in central switching mode, Cisco 8500 Series Wireless LAN Controllers, and Cisco Wireless Services Module 2 (WiSM2). AVC DSCP marks only the DSCP of the original packet in the controller in both directions (upstream and downstream). It does not affect the outer CAPWAP DCSP. AVC DSCP is applicable only when the application is classified. For example, based on the AVC profile configuration, if an application is classified as ftp or http, the corresponding DSCP marking is applied irrespective of the WLAN QoS. For downstream, the DSCP value of outer CAPWAP header and inner packets DSCP are taken from AVC DSCP. WLAN QoS is only applicable for all traffic from WLC to AP through CAPWAP. It does not change the DSCP of the original packet Restrictions for Application Visibility and Control IPv6 packet classification is not supported. Layer 2 roaming is not supported across controllers. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 131 Configuring Application Visibility and Control (GUI) Multicast traffic is not supported. Configuring Application Visibility and Control (GUI) Step 1 Create and configure an AVC profile by following these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > Application Visibility and Control > AVC Profiles. b) Click New. c) Enter the AVC profile name. d) Click Apply. e) On the AVC Profile Name page, click the corresponding AVC profile name. The AVC Profile > Edit page is displayed. f) Click Add New Rule. g) Choose the application group and the application name from the respective drop-down lists. View the list of default AVC applications available by choosing Wireless > Application Visibility and Control >

AVC Applications. h) From the Action drop-down list, choose either of the following:

DropDrops the upstream and downstream packets that correspond to the chosen application. MarkMarks the upstream and downstream packets that correspond to the chosen application with the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value that you specify in the DSCP (0 to 63) drop-down list. The DSCP value helps you provide differentiated services based on the QoS levels. Note The default action is to give permission to all applications. i) If you choose Mark from the Action drop-down list, choose a DSCP value from the DSCP (0 to 63) drop-down list. The DSCP value is a packet header code that is used to define QoS across the Internet. The DSCP values are mapped to the following QoS levels:

Platinum (Voice)Assures a high QoS for Voice over Wireless. Gold (Video)Supports high-quality video applications. Silver (Best Effort)Supports normal bandwidth for clients. Bronze (Background)Provides the lowest bandwidth for guest services. You can also choose Custom and specify the DSCP value. The valid range is from 0 to 63. Step 2 j) Click Apply. k) Click Save Configuration. Associate an AVC profile to a WLAN by following these steps:

a) Choose WLANs and click the corresponding WLAN ID. The WLANs > Edit page is displayed. b) Click the QoS tab. c) Choose the AVC profile from the AVC Profile drop-down list. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 132 OL-28744-01 Configuring Application Visibility and Control (CLI) d) Click Apply. e) Click Save Configuration. Configuring Application Visibility and Control (CLI) Create or delete an AVC profile by entering this command:

config avc profile avc-profile-name {create | delete}

Add a rule for an AVC profile by entering this command:

config avc profile avc-profile-name rule add application application-name {drop | mark dscp-value}

Remove a rule for an AVC profile by entering this command:

config avc profile avc-profile-name rule remove application application-name Configure an AVC profile to a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan avc wlan-id profile avc-profile-name {enable | disable}

Configure application visibility for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan avc wlan-id visibility {enable | disable}

Note Application visibility is the subset of an AVC profile. Therefore, visibility is automatically enabled when you configure an AVC profile on the WLAN. View information about all AVC profile or a particular AVC profile by entering this command:

show avc profile {summary | detailed avc-profile-name}

View information about AVC applications by entering this command:

show avc applications [application-group]

View various statistical information about AVC by entering this command:

show avc statistics Configure troubleshooting for AVC events by entering this command:

debug avc events {enable | disable}

Configure troubleshooting for AVC errors by entering this command:

debug avc error {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 133 Configuring NetFlow Configuring NetFlow Information About NetFlow NetFlow is a protocol that provides information about network users and applications, peak usage times, and traffic routing. The NetFlow protocol collects IP traffic information from network devices to monitor traffic. The NetFlow architecture consists of the following components:

CollectorEntity that collects all the IP traffic information from various network elements. ExporterNetwork entity that exports the template with the IP traffic information. The controller acts as an exporter. Configuring NetFlow (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Configure the Exporter by following these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > Netflow > Exporter. b) Click New. c) Enter the Exporter name, IP address, and the port number. The valid range for the port number is from 1 to 65535. d) Click Apply. e) Click Save Configuration. Configure the NetFlow Monitor by following these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > Netflow > Monitor. b) Click New and enter the Monitor name. c) On the Monitor List page, click the Monitor name to open the Netflow Monitor > Edit page. d) Choose the Exporter name and the Record name from the respective drop-down lists. e) Click Apply. f) Click Save Configuration. Associate a NetFlow Monitor to a WLAN by following these steps:

a) Choose WLANs and click the WLAN ID to open the WLANs > Edit page. b) In the QoS tab, choose the NetFlow Monitor from the Netflow Monitor drop-down list. c) Click Apply. d) Click Save Configuration. Configuring NetFlow (CLI) Create an Exporter by entering this command:

config flow create exporter exporter-name ip-addr port-number Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 134 OL-28744-01 Configuring NetFlow Create a NetFlow Monitor by entering this command:

config flow create monitor monitor-name Associate or dissociate a NetFlow Monitor with an Exporter by entering this command:

config flow {add | delete} monitor monitor-name exporter exporter-name Associate or dissociate a NetFlow Monitor with a Record by entering this command:

config flow {add | delete} monitor monitor-name record ipv4_client_app_flow_record Associate or dissociate a NetFlow Monitor with a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan flow wlan-id monitor monitor-name {enable | disable}

See a summary of NetFlow Monitors by entering this command:

show flow monitor summary See information about the Exporter by entering this command:

show flow exporter {summary | statistics}

Configure a debug of NetFlow by entering this command:

debug flow {detail | error | info} {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 135 Configuring NetFlow Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 136 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 16 Configuring Media and EDCA Parameters Configuring Voice and Video Parameters, page 137 Configuring SIP-Based CAC, page 149 Configuring Media Parameters, page 151 Configuring Voice Prioritization Using Preferred Call Numbers, page 151 Configuring EDCA Parameters, page 153 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Information About Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Three parameters on the controller affect voice and/or video quality:

Call admission control Expedited bandwidth requests Unscheduled automatic power save delivery Each of these parameters is supported in Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) v4 and v5. Note Traffic stream metrics (TSM) can be used to monitor and report issues with voice quality. Call Admission Control Call admission control (CAC) enables an access point to maintain controlled quality of service (QoS) when the wireless LAN is experiencing congestion. The Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) protocol deployed in CCXv3 ensures sufficient QoS as long as the wireless LAN is not congested. However, in order to maintain QoS under differing network loads, CAC in CCXv4 is required. Two types of CAC are available: bandwidth-based CAC and load-based CAC. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 137 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Bandwidth-Based CAC Bandwidth-based, or static, CAC enables the client to specify how much bandwidth or shared medium time is required to accept a new call and in turn enables the access point to determine whether it is capable of accommodating this particular call. The access point rejects the call if necessary in order to maintain the maximum allowed number of calls with acceptable quality. The QoS setting for a WLAN determines the level of bandwidth-based CAC support. To use bandwidth-based CAC with voice applications, the WLAN must be configured for Platinum QoS. To use bandwidth-based CAC with video applications, the WLAN must be configured for Gold QoS. Also, make sure that WMM is enabled for the WLAN. See the Information About Configuring 802.3 Bridging, on page 103 section for QoS and WMM configuration instructions. Note You must enable admission control (ACM) for CCXv4 clients that have WMM enabled. Otherwise, bandwidth-based CAC does not operate properly. Load-Based CAC Load-based CAC incorporates a measurement scheme that takes into account the bandwidth consumed by all traffic types (including that from clients), co-channel access point loads, and collocated channel interference, for voice applications. Load-based CAC also covers the additional bandwidth consumption resulting from PHY and channel impairment. In load-based CAC, the access point continuously measures and updates the utilization of the RF channel

(that is, the percentage of bandwidth that has been exhausted), channel interference, and the additional calls that the access point can admit. The access point admits a new call only if the channel has enough unused bandwidth to support that call. By doing so, load-based CAC prevents oversubscription of the channel and maintains QoS under all conditions of WLAN loading and interference. Note Load-based CAC is supported only on lightweight access points. If you disable load-based CAC, the access points start using bandwidth-based CAC. Expedited Bandwidth Requests The expedited bandwidth request feature enables CCXv5 clients to indicate the urgency of a WMM traffic specifications (TSPEC) request (for example, an e911 call) to the WLAN. When the controller receives this request, it attempts to facilitate the urgency of the call in any way possible without potentially altering the quality of other TSPEC calls that are in progress. You can apply expedited bandwidth requests to both bandwidth-based and load-based CAC. Expedited bandwidth requests are disabled by default. When this feature is disabled, the controller ignores all expedited requests and processes TSPEC requests as normal TSPEC requests. This table lists examples of TSPEC request handling for normal TSPEC requests and expedited bandwidth requests. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 138 OL-28744-01 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Table 4: TSPEC Request Handling Examples CAC Mode Bandwidth-based CAC Reserved bandwidth for voice calls1 75%

(default setting) Usage2 Normal TSPEC Request TSPEC with Expedited Bandwidth Request Less than 75%

Admitted Admitted Between 75% and 90%

(reserved bandwidth for voice calls exhausted) Rejected Admitted More than 90%

Rejected Rejected Load-based CAC Less than 75%

Admitted Admitted Between 75% and 85%

(reserved bandwidth for voice calls exhausted) Rejected Admitted More than 85%

Rejected Rejected 1 For bandwidth-based CAC, the voice call bandwidth usage is per access point and does not take into account co-channel access points. For load-based CAC, 2 Bandwidth-based CAC (consumed voice and video bandwidth) or load-based CAC (channel utilization [Pb]). the voice call bandwidth usage is measured for the entire channel. Note Admission control for TSPEC g711-40ms codec type is supported. Note When video ACM is enabled, the controller rejects a video TSPEC if the non-MSDU size in the TSPEC is greater than 149 or the mean data rate is greater than 1 Kbps. U-APSD Unscheduled automatic power save delivery (U-APSD) is a QoS facility defined in IEEE 802.11e that extends the battery life of mobile clients. In addition to extending battery life, this feature reduces the latency of traffic flow delivered over the wireless media. Because U-APSD does not require the client to poll each individual packet buffered at the access point, it allows delivery of multiple downlink packets by sending a single uplink trigger packet. U-APSD is enabled automatically when WMM is enabled. Traffic Stream Metrics In a voice-over-wireless LAN (VoWLAN) deployment, traffic stream metrics (TSM) can be used to monitor voice-related metrics on the client-access point air interface. It reports both packet latency and packet loss. You can isolate poor voice quality issues by studying these reports. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 139 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters The metrics consist of a collection of uplink (client side) and downlink (access point side) statistics between an access point and a client device that supports CCX v4 or later releases. If the client is not CCX v4 or CCXv5 compliant, only downlink statistics are captured. The client and access point measure these metrics. The access point also collects the measurements every 5 seconds, prepares 90-second reports, and then sends the reports to the controller. The controller organizes the uplink measurements on a client basis and the downlink measurements on an access point basis and maintains an hours worth of historical data. To store this data, the controller requires 32 MB of additional memory for uplink metrics and 4.8 MB for downlink metrics. TSM can be configured through either the GUI or the CLI on a per radio-band basis (for example, all 802.11a radios). The controller saves the configuration in flash memory so that it persists across reboots. After an access point receives the configuration from the controller, it enables TSM on the specified radio band. Note Access points support TSM entries in both local and FlexConnect modes. This table shows the upper limit for TSM entries in different controller series. TSM Entries MAX AP TSM entries MAX Client TSM entries 5500 100 250 7500 100 250 MAX TSM entries 100*250=25000 100*250=25000 Note Once the upper limit is reached, additional TSM entries cannot be stored and sent to Cisco Prime Infrastructure. If client TSM entries are full and AP TSM entries are available, then only the AP entries are stored, and vice versa. This leads to partial output. TSM cleanup occurs every one hour. Entries are removed only for those APs and clients that are not in the system. Configuring Voice Parameters Configuring Voice Parameters (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 140 Ensure that the WLAN is configured for WMM and the Platinum QoS level. Disable all WLANs with WMM enabled and click Apply. Choose Wireless and then Network under 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n, unselect the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply to disable the radio network. Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Media. The 802.11a (or 802.11b) > Media page appears. The Voice tab is displayed by default. Select the Admission Control (ACM) check box to enable bandwidth-based CAC for this radio band. The default value is disabled. Select the Admission Control (ACM) you want to use by choosing from the following choices:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Load-basedTo enable channel-based CAC. This is the default option. StaticTo enable radio-based CAC. Step 7 Step 8 In the Max RF Bandwidth text box, enter the percentage of the maximum bandwidth allocated to clients for voice applications on this radio band. Once the client reaches the value specified, the access point rejects new calls on this radio band. The range is 5% to 85%. The sum of maximum bandwidth percentage of voice and video should not exceed 85%. The default is 75%. In the Reserved Roaming Bandwidth text box, enter the percentage of maximum allocated bandwidth that is reserved for roaming voice clients. The controller reserves this bandwidth from the maximum allocated bandwidth for roaming voice clients. The range is 0% to 25%. The default is 6%. Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 To enable expedited bandwidth requests, select the Expedited Bandwidth check box. By default, this text box is disabled. To enable SIP CAC support, select the SIP CAC Support check box. By default, SIP CAC support is disabled. From the SIP Codec drop-down list, choose one of the following options to set the codec name. The default value is G.711. The options are as follows:

User Defined G.711 G.729 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 In the SIP Bandwidth (kbps) text box, enter the bandwidth in kilobits per second. The possible range is 8 to 64. The default value is 64. Note The SIP Bandwidth (kbps) text box is highlighted only when you select the SIP codec as User-Defined. If you choose the SIP codec as G.711, the SIP Bandwidth (kbps) text box is set to 64. If you choose the SIP codec as G.729, the SIP Bandwidth (kbps) text box is set to 8. In the SIP Voice Sample Interval (msecs) text box, enter the value for the sample interval. In the Maximum Calls text box, enter the maximum number of calls that can be made to this radio. The maximum call limit includes both direct and roaming-in calls. If the maximum call limit is reached, the new or roaming-in calls result in failure. The possible range is 0 to 25. The default value is 0, which indicates that there is no check for maximum call limit. Note If SIP CAC is supported and the CAC method is static, the Maximum Possible Voice Calls and Maximum Possible Roaming Reserved Calls fields appear. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 141 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Select the Metrics Collection check box to collect traffic stream metrics. By default, this box is unselected. That is, the traffic stream metrics is not collected by default. Click Apply. Reenable all WMM WLANs and click Apply. Choose Network under 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n, select the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply to reenable the radio network. Click Save Configuration. Repeat this procedure if you want to configure voice parameters for another radio band. Configuring Voice Parameters (CLI) Before You Begin Ensure that you have configured SIP-based CAC. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 See all of the WLANs configured on the controller by entering this command:

show wlan summary Make sure that the WLAN that you are planning to modify is configured for WMM and the QoS level is set to Platinum by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Disable all WLANs with WMM enabled prior to changing the voice parameters by entering the command:

config wlan disable wlan_id Disable the radio network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable network Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Enable or disable bandwidth-based voice CAC for the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac voice acm {enable | disable}

Set the percentage of maximum bandwidth allocated to clients for voice applications on the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac voice max-bandwidth bandwidth The bandwidth range is 5 to 85%, and the default value is 75%. Once the client reaches the value specified, the access point rejects new calls on this network. Set the percentage of maximum allocated bandwidth reserved for roaming voice clients by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac voice roam-bandwidth bandwidth The bandwidth range is 0 to 25%, and the default value is 6%. The controller reserves this much bandwidth from the maximum allocated bandwidth for roaming voice clients. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 142 OL-28744-01 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Configure the codec name and sample interval as parameters and to calculate the required bandwidth per call by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac voice sip codec {g711 | g729} sample-interval number_msecs Configure the bandwidth that is required per call by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac voice sip bandwidth bandwidth_kbps sample-interval number_msecs Reenable all WLANs with WMM enabled by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan_id Reenable the radio network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} enable network View the TSM voice metrics by entering this command:

show [802.11a | 802.11b] cu-metrics AP_Name The command also displays the channel utilization metrics. Enter the save config command to save your settings. Configure voice automatically for a WLAN by entering this command:

config auto-configure voice cisco wlan-id radio {802.11a | 802.11b | all}

Step 16 Enter the save config command to save your settings. Configuring Video Parameters Configuring Video Parameters (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Ensure that the WLAN is configured for WMM and the Gold QoS level. Disable all WLANs with WMM enabled and click Apply. Choose Wireless and then Network under 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n, unselect the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply to disable the radio network. Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Media. The 802.11a (or 802.11b) > Media page appears. In the Video tab, select the Admission Control (ACM) check box to enable video CAC for this radio band. The default value is disabled. From the CAC Method drop-down list, choose between Static and Load Based methods. The static CAC method is based on the radio and the load-based CAC method is based on the channel. Note For TSpec and SIP based CAC for video calls, only Static method is supported. In the Max RF Bandwidth text box, enter the percentage of the maximum bandwidth allocated to clients for video applications on this radio band. When the client reaches the value specified, the access point rejects new requests on this radio band. The range is 5% to 85%. The sum of maximum bandwidth percentage of voice and video should not exceed 85%. The default is 0%. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 143 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 In the Reserved Roaming Bandwidth text box, enter the percentage of the maximum RF bandwidth that is reserved for roaming clients for video. Configure the SIP CAC Support by selecting or unselecting the SIP CAC Support check box. SIP CAC is supported only if SIP Snooping is enabled. Note You cannot enable SIP CAC if you have selected the Load Based CAC method. Click Apply. Reenable all WMM WLANs and click Apply. Choose Network under 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n, select the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply to reenable the radio network. Click Save Configuration. Repeat this procedure if you want to configure video parameters for another radio band. Configuring Video Parameters (CLI) Before You Begin Ensure that you have configured SIP-based CAC. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 See all of the WLANs configured on the controller by entering this command:

show wlan summary Make sure that the WLAN that you are planning to modify is configured for WMM and the QoS level is set to Gold by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Disable all WLANs with WMM enabled prior to changing the video parameters by entering this command:

config wlan disable wlan_id Disable the radio network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable network Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Enable or disable video CAC for the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac video acm {enable | disable}

To configure the CAC method as either static or load-based, enter this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac video cac-method {static | load-based}

Set the percentage of maximum bandwidth allocated to clients for video applications on the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac video max-bandwidth bandwidth The bandwidth range is 5 to 85%, and the default value is 5%. However, the maximum RF bandwidth cannot exceed 85% for voice and video. Once the client reaches the value specified, the access point rejects new calls on this network. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 144 OL-28744-01 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Note If this parameter is set to zero (0), the controller assumes that you do not want to do any bandwidth allocation and, therefore, allows all bandwidth requests. To configure the percentage of the maximum RF bandwidth that is reserved for roaming clients for video, enter this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac video roam-bandwidth bandwidth To configure the CAC parameters for SIP-based video calls, enter this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac video sip {enable | disable}

Process or ignore the TSPEC inactivity timeout received from an access point by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac video tspec-inactivity-timeout {enable | ignore}

Reenable all WLANs with WMM enabled by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan_id Reenable the radio network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} enable network Step 14 Enter the save config command to save your settings. Viewing Voice and Video Settings Viewing Voice and Video Settings (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Monitor > Clients to open the Clients page. Click the MAC address of the desired client to open the Clients > Detail page. This page shows the U-APSD status (if enabled) for this client under Quality of Service Properties. Click Back to return to the Clients page. See the TSM statistics for a particular client and the access point to which this client is associated as follows:

a) Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired client and choose 802.11aTSM or 802.11b/g TSM. The Clients > AP page appears. b) Click the Detail link for the desired access point to open the Clients > AP > Traffic Stream Metrics page. This page shows the TSM statistics for this client and the access point to which it is associated. The statistics are shown in 90-second intervals. The timestamp text box shows the specific interval when the statistics were collected. See the TSM statistics for a particular access point and a particular client associated to this access point, as follows:

a) Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n. The 802.11a/n Radios or 802.11b/g/n Radios page appears. b) Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired access point and choose 802.11aTSM or 802.11b/g TSM. The AP > Clients page appears. c) Click the Detail link for the desired client to open the AP > Clients > Traffic Stream Metrics page. This page shows the TSM statistics for this access point and a client associated to it. The statistics are shown in 90-second intervals. The timestamp text box shows the specific interval when the statistics were collected. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 145 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Viewing Voice and Video Settings (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 See the CAC configuration for the 802.11 network by entering this command:

show ap stats {802.11a | 802.11b}

See the CAC statistics for a particular access point by entering this command:

show ap stats {802.11a | 802.11b} ap_name Information similar to the following appears:

Call Admission Control (CAC) Stats Voice Bandwidth in use(% of config bw)......... 0 Total channel MT free........................ 0 Total voice MT free.......................... 0 Na Direct.................................... 0 Na Roam...................................... 0 Video Bandwidth in use(% of config bw)......... 0 Total num of voice calls in progress........... 0 Num of roaming voice calls in progress......... 0 Total Num of voice calls since AP joined....... 0 Total Num of roaming calls since AP joined..... 0 Total Num of exp bw requests received.......... 5 Total Num of exp bw requests admitted.......... 2 Num of voice calls rejected since AP joined...... 0 Num of roam calls rejected since AP joined..... 0 Num of calls rejected due to insufficient bw....0 Num of calls rejected due to invalid params.... 0 Num of calls rejected due to PHY rate.......... 0 Num of calls rejected due to QoS policy..... 0 In the example above, MT is medium time, Na is the number of additional calls, and exp bw is expedited bandwidth. Suppose an AP has to be rebooted when a voice client associated with the AP is on an active call. After the AP Note is rebooted, the client continues to maintain the call, and during the time the AP is down, the database is not refreshed by the controller. Therefore, we recommend that all active calls are ended before the AP is taken down. See the U-APSD status for a particular client by entering this command:

show client detail client_mac See the TSM statistics for a particular client and the access point to which this client is associated by entering this command:

show client tsm {802.11a | 802.11b} client_mac {ap_mac | all}

The optional all command shows all access points to which this client has associated. Information similar to the following appears:

Step 3 Step 4 Client Interface Mac:

00:01:02:03:04:05 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 146 OL-28744-01 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters Measurement Duration:

90 seconds Timestamp UpLink Stats

================

1st Jan 2006, 06:35:80 Average Delay (5sec intervals)............................35 Delay less than 10 ms.....................................20 Delay bet 10 - 20 ms......................................20 Delay bet 20 - 40 ms......................................20 Delay greater than 40 ms..................................20 Total packet Count.........................................80 Total packet lost count (5sec).............................10 Maximum Lost Packet count(5sec)............................5 Average Lost Packet count(5secs)...........................2 DownLink Stats

================

Average Delay (5sec intervals)............................35 Delay less than 10 ms.....................................20 Delay bet 10 - 20 ms......................................20 Delay bet 20 - 40 ms......................................20 Delay greater than 40 ms..................................20 Total packet Count.........................................80 Total packet lost count (5sec).............................10 Maximum Lost Packet count(5sec)............................5 Average Lost Packet count(5secs)...........................2 Note Note The statistics are shown in 90-second intervals. The timestamp text box shows the specific interval when the statistics were collected. Clear the TSM statistics for a particular access point or all the access points to which this client is associated by entering this clear client tsm {802.11a | 802.11b} client_mac {ap_mac | all} command. Step 5 See the TSM statistics for a particular access point and a particular client associated to this access point by entering this command:

show ap stats {802.11a | 802.11b} ap_name tsm {client_mac | all}

The optional all command shows all clients associated to this access point. Information similar to the following appears:

AP Interface Mac:

Client Interface Mac:

Measurement Duration:

Timestamp UpLink Stats

================

00:0b:85:01:02:03 00:01:02:03:04:05 90 seconds 1st Jan 2006, 06:35:80 Average Delay (5sec intervals)............................35 Delay less than 10 ms.....................................20 Delay bet 10 - 20 ms......................................20 Delay bet 20 - 40 ms......................................20 Delay greater than 40 ms..................................20 Total packet Count.........................................80 Total packet lost count (5sec).............................10 Maximum Lost Packet count(5sec)............................5 Average Lost Packet count(5secs)...........................2 DownLink Stats OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 147 Configuring Voice and Video Parameters

================

Average Delay (5sec intervals)............................35 Delay less than 10 ms.....................................20 Delay bet 10 - 20 ms......................................20 Delay bet 20 - 40 ms......................................20 Delay greater than 40 ms..................................20 Total packet Count.........................................80 Total packet lost count (5sec).............................10 Maximum Lost Packet count(5sec)............................5 Average Lost Packet count(5secs)...........................2 Note The statistics are shown in 90-second intervals. The timestamp text box shows the specific interval when the statistics were collected. Enable or disable debugging for call admission control (CAC) messages, events, or packets by entering this command:

debug cac {all | event | packet}{enable | disable}

where all configures debugging for all CAC messages, event configures debugging for all CAC events, and packet configures debugging for all CAC packets. Use the following command to perform voice diagnostics and to view the debug messages between a maximum of two 802.11 clients:

debug voice-diag {enable | disable} mac-id mac-id2 [verbose]

The verbose mode is an optional argument. When the verbose option is used, all debug messages are displayed in the console. You can use this command to monitor a maximum of two 802.11 clients. If one of the clients is a non-WiFi client, only the 802.11 client is monitored for debug messages. Note It is implicitly assumed that the clients being monitored are on call. The debug command automatically stops after 60 minutes. Note Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Use the following commands to view various voice-related parameters:

show client voice-diag status Displays information about whether voice diagnostics is enabled or disabled. If enabled, will also displays information about the clients in the watch list and the time remaining for the diagnostics of the voice call. If voice diagnostics is disabled when the following commands are entered, a message indicating that voice diagnostics is disabled appears. show client voice-diag tspec Displays the TSPEC information sent from the clients that are enabled for voice diagnostics. show client voice-diag qos-map Displays information about the QoS/DSCP mapping and packet statistics in each of the four queues: VO, VI, BE, BK. The different DSCP values are also displayed. show client voice-diag avrg_rssi Display the clients RSSI values in the last 5 seconds when voice diagnostics is enabled. show client voice-diag roam-history Displays information about the last three roaming calls. The output contains the timestamp, access point associated with roaming, roaming reason, and if there is a roaming failure, the reason for the roaming-failure. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 148 OL-28744-01 Configuring SIP-Based CAC show client calls {active | rejected} {802.11a | 802.11bg | all}

This command lists the details of active TSPEC and SIP calls on the controller. Step 9 Use the following commands to troubleshoot video debug messages and statistics:

debug ap show stats {802.11b | 802.11a} ap-name multicastDisplays the access points supported multicast rates. debug ap show stats {802.11b | 802.11a} ap-name loadDisplays the access points QBSS and other statistics. debug ap show stats {802.11b | 802.11a} ap-name tx-queueDisplays the access points transmit queue traffic statistics. debug ap show stats {802.11b | 802.11a} ap-name client {all | video | client-mac}Displays the access points client metrics. debug ap show stats {802.11b | 802.11a} ap-name packetDisplays the access points packet statistics. debug ap show stats {802.11b | 802.11a} ap-name video metricsDisplays the access points video metrics. debug ap show stats video ap-name multicast mgid number Displays an access points Layer 2 MGID database number. debug ap show stats video ap-name admissionDisplays an access points admission control statistics. debug ap show stats video ap-name bandwidthDisplays an access points video bandwidth. Configuring SIP-Based CAC Restrictions for SIP-Based CAC SIPs are available only on the Cisco 5500 Series Controllers, Cisco 8500 Series Controllers, and on the 1240, 1130, and 11n access points. SIP CAC should only be used for phones that support status code 17 and do not support TSPEC-based admission control. SIP CAC will be supported only if SIP snooping is enabled. Configuring SIP-Based CAC (GUI) Before You Begin Ensure that you have set the voice to the platinum QoS level. Ensure that you have enabled call snooping for the WLAN. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 149 Configuring SIP-Based CAC Ensure that you have enabled the Admission Control (ACM) for this radio. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Wireless > Advanced > SIP Snooping to open the SIP Snooping page. Specify the call-snooping ports by entering the starting port and the ending port. Click Apply and then click Save Configuration. Configuring SIP-Based CAC (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Set the voice to the platinum QoS level by entering this command:

config wlan qos wlan-id Platinum Enable the call-snooping feature for a particular WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan call-snoop enable wlan-id Enable the ACM to this radio by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac {voice | video} acm enable To configure the call snooping ports, enter this command:

config advanced sip-snooping-ports starting-port ending-port To troubleshoot SIP-based CAC events, enter this command:

debug sip event {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 150 OL-28744-01 Configuring Media Parameters Configuring Media Parameters Configuring Media Parameters (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Ensure that the WLAN is configured for WMM and the Gold QoS level. Disable all WLANs with WMM enabled and click Apply. Choose Wireless and then Network under 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n, unselect the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply to disable the radio network. Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Media. The 802.11a (or 802.11b) > Media > Parameters page appears. Choose the Media tab to open the Media page. Select the Unicast Video Redirect check box to enable Unicast Video Redirect. The default value is disabled. In the Maximum Media Bandwidth (0-85%) text box, enter the percentage of the maximum bandwidth to be allocated for media applications on this radio band. Once the client reaches the specified value, the access point rejects new calls on this radio band. The default value is 85%; valid values are from 0 to 85%. In the Client Phy Rate text box, enter the value for the rate in kilobits per second at which the client operates. In the Maximum Retry Percent (0-100%) text box, enter the percentage of the maximum retry. The default value is 80. Select the Multicast Direct Enable check box to enable the Multicast Direct Enable text box. The default value is enabled. From the Max Streams per Radio drop-down list, choose the maximum number of allowed multicast direct streams per radio. Choose a value between 1 to 20 or No Limit. The default value is set to No Limit. From the Max Streams per Client drop-down list, choose the maximum number of allowed clients per radio. Choose a value between 1 to 20 or No Limit. The default value is set to No Limit. If you want to enable the best radio queue for this radio, select the Best Effort QoS Admission check box. The default value is disabled. Configuring Voice Prioritization Using Preferred Call Numbers Information About Configuring Voice Prioritization Using Preferred Call Numbers You can configure a controller to support calls from clients that do not support TSPEC-based calls. This feature is known as voice prioritization. These calls are given priority over other clients utilizing the voice pool. Voice prioritization is available only for SIP-based calls and not for TSPEC-based calls. If the bandwidth is available, it takes the normal flow and allocates the bandwidth to those calls. You can configure up to six preferred call numbers. When a call comes to one of the configured preferred numbers, the controller does not check on the maximum call limit. It invokes the CAC to allocate bandwidth for the preferred call. The bandwidth allocation is 85 percent of the entire bandwidth pool, not just from the maximum configured voice pool. The bandwidth allocation is the same even for roaming calls. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 151 Configuring Voice Prioritization Using Preferred Call Numbers Prerequisites for Configuring Voice Prioritization Using Preferred Call Numbers You must configure the following before configuring voice prioritization:

Set WLAN QoS to platinum. Enable ACM for the radio. Enable SIP call snooping on the WLAN. Configuring a Preferred Call Number (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Set the WLAN QoS profile to Platinum. Enable ACM for the WLAN radio. Enable SIP call snooping for the WLAN. Choose Wireless > Advanced > Preferred Call to open the Preferred Call page. All calls configured on the controller appear. Note To remove a preferred call, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow and choose Remove. Click Add Number to add a new preferred call. In the Call Index text box, enter the index that you want to assign to the call. Valid values are from 1 through 6. In the Call Number text box, enter the number. Click Apply to add the new number. Configuring a Preferred Call Number (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 152 Set the voice to the platinum QoS level by entering this command:

config wlan qos wlan-id Platinum Enable the ACM to this radio by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac {voice | video} acm enable Enable the call-snooping feature for a particular WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan call-snoop enable wlan-id Add a new preferred call by entering this command:

config advanced sip-preferred-call-no call_index {call_number | none}

Remove a preferred call by entering this command:

config advanced sip-preferred-call-no call_index none View the preferred call statistics by entering the following command:

show ap stats {802.11{a | b} | wlan} ap_name Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring EDCA Parameters Step 7 Enter the following command to list the preferred call numbers:

show advanced sip-preferred-call-no Configuring EDCA Parameters Information About EDCA Parameters Enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA) parameters are designed to provide preferential wireless channel access for voice, video, and other quality-of-service (QoS) traffic. Configuring EDCA Parameters (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Wireless and then Network under 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n, unselect the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply to disable the radio network. Choose EDCA Parametersunder 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n. The 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) > EDCA Parameters page appears. Choose one of the following options from the EDCA Profile drop-down list:

WMMEnables the Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) default parameters. This is the default value. Choose this option when voice or video services are not deployed on your network. Spectralink Voice PriorityEnables SpectraLink voice priority parameters. Choose this option if SpectraLink phones are deployed on your network to improve the quality of calls. Voice OptimizedEnables EDCA voice-optimized profile parameters. Choose this option when voice services other than SpectraLink are deployed on your network. Voice & Video OptimizedEnables EDCA voice- and video-optimized profile parameters. Choose this option when both voice and video services are deployed on your network. Custom VoiceEnables custom voice EDCA parameters for 802.11a. The EDCA parameters under this option also match the 6.0 WMM EDCA parameters when this profile is applied. If you deploy video services, admission control (ACM) must be Note disabled. Step 4 If you want to enable MAC optimization for voice, select the Enable Low Latency MAC check box. Otherwise, leave this check box unselected, which is the default value. This feature enhances voice performance by controlling packet retransmits and appropriately aging out voice packets on lightweight access points, which improves the number of voice calls serviced per access point. Note We do not recommend you to enable low latency MAC. You should enable low latency MAC only if the WLAN allows WMM clients. If WMM is enabled, then low latency MAC can be used with any of the EDCA profiles. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 153 Configuring EDCA Parameters Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Click Apply to commit your changes. To reenable the radio network, choose Network under 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n, select the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box, and click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Configuring EDCA Parameters (CLI) Disable the radio network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable network Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Enable a specific EDCA profile by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} edca-parameters {wmm-default | svp-voice| optimized-voice|

optimzed-voice-video| custom-voice}

wmm-defaultEnables the Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) default parameters. This is the default value. Choose this option when voice or video services are not deployed on your network. svp-voiceEnables SpectraLink voice priority parameters. Choose this option if SpectraLink phones are deployed on your network to improve the quality of calls. optimized-voiceEnables EDCA voice-optimized profile parameters. Choose this option when voice services other than SpectraLink are deployed on your network. optimized-video-voiceEnables EDCA voice- and video-optimized profile parameters. Choose this option when both voice and video services are deployed on your network. custom-voiceEnables custom voice EDCA parameters for 802.11a. The EDCA parameters under this option also match the 6.0 WMM EDCA parameters when this profile is applied. Note If you deploy video services, admission control (ACM) must be disabled. View the current status of MAC optimization for voice by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b}

Information similar to the following appears:

Voice-mac-optimization...................Disabled Enable or disable MAC optimization for voice by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} voice-mac-optimization {enable | disable}

This feature enhances voice performance by controlling packet retransmits and appropriately aging out voice packets on lightweight access points, which improves the number of voice calls serviced per access point. The default value is disabled. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 154 OL-28744-01 Configuring EDCA Parameters Step 6 Reenable the radio network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} enable network Step 7 Enter the save config command to save your settings. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 155 Configuring EDCA Parameters Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 156 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 17 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol Information About Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol, page 157 Restrictions for Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol, page 157 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol, page 159 Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information, page 161 Getting CDP Debug Information, page 163 Information About Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) is a device discovery protocol that runs on all Cisco-manufactured equipment. A device enabled with CDP sends out periodic interface updates to a multicast address in order to make itself known to neighboring devices. The default value for the frequency of periodic transmissions is 60 seconds, and the default advertised time-to-live value is 180 seconds. The second and latest version of the protocol, CDPv2, introduces new time-length-values (TLVs) and provides a reporting mechanism that allows for more rapid error tracking, which reduces downtime. Note Cisco recommends that you disable Cisco Discovery Protocol on the controller and access point when connected to non-Cisco switches as CDP is unsupported on non-Cisco switches and network elements. Restrictions for Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol CDPv1 and CDPv2 are supported on the following devices:

Cisco 5500 and 2500 Series Controllers CAPWAP-enabled access points An access point connected directly to a Cisco 5500 Series Controller OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 157 Restrictions for Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol Note To use the Intelligent Power Management feature, ensure that CDPv2 is enabled on the Cisco 2500 Series Controllers. CDP v2 is enabled by default. The Cisco 600 Series OEAP access points do not support CDP. The support of CDPv1 and CDPv2 enables network management applications to discover Cisco devices. The following TLVs are supported by both the controller and the access point:

Device-ID TLV: 0x0001The hostname of the controller, the access point, or the CDP neighbor. Address TLV: 0x0002The IP address of the controller, the access point, or the CDP neighbor. Port-ID TLV: 0x0003The name of the interface on which CDP packets are sent out. Capabilities TLV: 0x0004The capabilities of the device. The controller sends out this TLV with a value of Host: 0x10, and the access point sends out this TLV with a value of Transparent Bridge:

0x02. Version TLV: 0x0005The software version of the controller, the access point, or the CDP neighbor. Platform TLV: 0x0006The hardware platform of the controller, the access point, or the CDP neighbor. Power Available TLV: 0x001a The amount of power available to be transmitted by power sourcing equipment to permit a device to negotiate and select an appropriate power setting. Full/Half Duplex TLV: 0x000bThe full- or half-duplex mode of the Ethernet link on which CDP packets are sent out. These TLVs are supported only by the access point:

Power Consumption TLV: 0x0010The maximum amount of power consumed by the access point. Power Request TLV:0x0019The amount of power to be transmitted by a powerable device in order to negotiate a suitable power level with the supplier of the network power. Changing the CDP configuration on the controller does not change the CDP configuration on the access points that are connected to the controller. You must enable and disable CDP separately for each access point. You can enable or disable the CDP state on all or specific interfaces and radios. This configuration can be applied to all access points or a specific access point. The following is the behavior assumed for various interfaces and access points:

CDP is disabled on radio interfaces on indoor (nonindoor mesh) access points. Nonmesh access points have CDPs disabled on radio interfaces when they join the controller. The persistent CDP configuration is used for the APs that had CDP support in its previous image. CDP is enabled on radio interfaces on indoor-mesh and mesh access points. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 158 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol Mesh access points will have CDP enabled on their radio interfaces when they join the controller. The persistent CDP configuration is used for the access points that had CDP support in a previous image. The CDP configuration for radio interfaces is applicable only for mesh APs. Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Choose Controller > CDP > Global Configuration to open the CDP > Global Configuration page. Select the CDP Protocol Status check box to enable CDP on the controller or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is selected. Note Enabling or disabling this feature is applicable to all controller ports. From the CDP Advertisement Version drop-down list, choose v1 or v2 to specify the highest CDP version supported on the controller. The default value is v1. In the Refresh-time Interval text box, enter the interval at which CDP messages are to be generated. The range is 5 to 254 seconds, and the default value is 60 seconds. In the Holdtime text box, enter the amount of time to be advertised as the time-to-live value in generated CDP packets. The range is 10 to 255 seconds, and the default value is 180 seconds. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Perform one of the following:

To enable or disable CDP on a specific access point, follow these steps:

Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the link for the desired access point. Choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Select the Cisco Discovery Protocol check box to enable CDP on this access point or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is enabled. Note If CDP is disabled in Step 2, a message indicating that the Controller CDP is disabled appears. Enable CDP for a specific Ethernet interface, radio, or slot as follows:

Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the link for the desired access point. Choose the Interfaces tab and select the corresponding check boxes for the radios or slots from the CDP Configuration section. Note Configuration for radios is only applicable for mesh access points. Click Apply to commit your changes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 159 Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol To enable or disable CDP on all access points currently associated to the controller, follow these steps:

Choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. Select the CDP State check box to enable CDP on all access points associated to the controller or unselect it to disable CDP on all access points. The default value is selected. You can enable CDP on a specific Ethernet interface, radio, or slot by selecting the corresponding check box. This configuration will be applied to all access points associated with the controller. Click Apply to commit your changes. Step 9 Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 160 Enable or disable CDP on the controller by entering this command:

config cdp {enable | disable}

CDP is enabled by default. Specify the interval at which CDP messages are to be generated by entering this command:

config cdp timer seconds The range is 5 to 254 seconds, and the default value is 60 seconds. Specify the amount of time to be advertised as the time-to-live value in generated CDP packets by entering this command:

config cdp holdtime seconds The range is 10 to 255 seconds, and the default value is 180 seconds. Specify the highest CDP version supported on the controller by entering this command:

config cdp advertise {v1 | v2}

The default value is v1. Enable or disable CDP on all access points that are joined to the controller by entering the config ap cdp {enable |

disable} all command. The config ap cdp disable all command disables CDP on all access points that are joined to the controller and all access points that join in the future. CDP remains disabled on both current and future access points even after the controller or access point reboots. To enable CDP, enter the config ap cdp enable all command. Note After you enable CDP on all access points joined to the controller, you may disable and then reenable CDP on individual access points using the command in Step 6. After you disable CDP on all access points joined to the controller, you may not enable and then disable CDP on individual access points. Enable or disable CDP on a specific access point by entering this command:

config ap cdp {enable | disable} Cisco_AP Configure CDP on a specific or all access points for a specific interface by entering this command:

config ap cdp {ethernet | radio} interface_number slot_id {enable | disable} {all | Cisco_AP}

Note When you use the config ap cdp command to configure CDP on radio interfaces, a warning message appears indicating that the configuration is applicable only for mesh access points. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information Step 8 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information (GUI) Step 1 Choose Monitor > CDP > Interface Neighbors to open the CDP > Interface Neighbors page appears. This page shows the following information:

The controller port on which the CDP packets were received The name of each CDP neighbor The IP address of each CDP neighbor The port used by each CDP neighbor for transmitting CDP packets The time left (in seconds) before each CDP neighbor entry expires The functional capability of each CDP neighbor, defined as follows: R - Router, T - Trans Bridge, B - Source Route Bridge, S - Switch, H - Host, I - IGMP, r - Repeater, or M - Remotely Managed Device The hardware platform of each CDP neighbor device Step 2 Click the name of the desired interface neighbor to see more detailed information about each interfaces CDP neighbor. The CDP > Interface Neighbors > Detail page appears. This page shows the following information:

The controller port on which the CDP packets were received The name of the CDP neighbor The IP address of the CDP neighbor The port used by the CDP neighbor for transmitting CDP packets The CDP version being advertised (v1 or v2) The time left (in seconds) before the CDP neighbor entry expires The functional capability of the CDP neighbor, defined as follows: Router, Trans Bridge,?Source Route Bridge, Switch, Host, IGMP, Repeater, or Remotely Managed Device The hardware platform of the CDP neighbor device The software running on the CDP neighbor OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 161 Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information Step 3 Step 4 Choose AP Neighbors to see a list of CDP neighbors for all access points connected to the controller. The CDP AP Neighbors page appears. Click the CDP Neighbors link for the desired access point to see a list of CDP neighbors for a specific access point. The CDP > AP Neighbors page appears. This page shows the following information:

The name of each access point The IP address of each access point The name of each CDP neighbor The IP address of each CDP neighbor The port used by each CDP neighbor The CDP version being advertised (v1 or v2) Step 5 Click the name of the desired access point to see detailed information about an access points CDP neighbors. The CDP

> AP Neighbors > Detail page appears. This page shows the following information:

The name of the access point The MAC address of the access points radio The IP address of the access point The interface on which the CDP packets were received The name of the CDP neighbor The IP address of the CDP neighbor The port used by the CDP neighbor The CDP version being advertised (v1 or v2) The time left (in seconds) before the CDP neighbor entry expires The functional capability of the CDP neighbor, defined as follows: R - Router, T - Trans Bridge,?B - Source Route Bridge, S - Switch, H - Host, I - IGMP, r - Repeater, or M - Remotely Managed Device The hardware platform of the CDP neighbor device The software running on the CDP neighbor Step 6 Choose Traffic Metrics to see CDP traffic information. The CDP > Traffic Metrics page appears. This page shows the following information:

The number of CDP packets received by the controller The number of CDP packets sent from the controller The number of packets that experienced a checksum error The number of packets dropped due to insufficient memory The number of invalid packets Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 162 OL-28744-01 Getting CDP Debug Information Viewing Cisco Discovery Protocol Information (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 See the status of CDP and to view CDP protocol information by entering this command:

show cdp See a list of all CDP neighbors on all interfaces by entering this command:

show cdp neighbors [detail]

The optional detail command provides detailed information for the controllers CDP neighbors. Note This command shows only the CDP neighbors of the controller. It does not show the CDP neighbors of the controllers associated access points. Additional commands are provided below to show the list of CDP neighbors per access point. See all CDP entries in the database by entering this command:

show cdp entry all See CDP traffic information on a given port (for example, packets sent and received, CRC errors, and so on) by entering this command:

show cdp traffic See the CDP status for a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap cdp ap-name Cisco_AP See the CDP status for all access points that are connected to the controller by entering this command:

show ap cdp all Step 7 See a list of all CDP neighbors for a specific access point by entering these commands:

show ap cdp neighbors ap-name Cisco_AP show ap cdp neighbors detail Cisco_AP Note The access point sends CDP neighbor information to the controller only when the information changes. Step 8 See a list of all CDP neighbors for all access points connected to the controller by entering these commands:

show ap cdp neighbors all show ap cdp neighbors detail all Note The access point sends CDP neighbor information to the controller only when the information changes. Getting CDP Debug Information Get debug information related to CDP packets by entering by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 163 Getting CDP Debug Information debug cdp packets Get debug information related to CDP events by entering this command:

debug cdp events Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 164 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 18 Configuring Authentication for the Controller and NTP Server Information About Configuring Authentication for the Controller and NTP Server, page 165 Configuring the NTP Server for Authentication (GUI), page 165 Configuring the NTP Server for Authentication (CLI), page 166 Information About Configuring Authentication for the Controller and NTP Server Starting in release 7.0.116.0, the controller software is now compliant with RFC 1305. As per this requirement, controllers must synonymize time with an NTP server by authentication. By default, an MD5 checksum is used. Configuring the NTP Server for Authentication (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose Controller > NTP > Server to open the NTP Severs page. Click New to add a new NTP Server. In the Server Index (Priority) text box, enter the NTP server index. The controller tries Index 1 first, then Index 2 through 3, in a descending order. Set this to 1 if your network is using only one NTP server. Enter the server IP address. Enable or disable the NTP Authentication. If you enable the NTP Authentication, enter the Key Index. Click Apply. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 165 Configuring the NTP Server for Authentication (CLI) Configuring the NTP Server for Authentication (CLI) Before You Begin config time ntp auth enable server-index key-indexEnables NTP authentication on a given NTP server. config time ntp key-auth add key-index md5 key-format keyAdds an authentication key. By default MD5 is used. The key format can be "ascii" or "hex". config time ntp key-auth delete key-indexDeletes authentication keys. config time ntp auth disable server-indexDisables NTP authentication. show ntp-keysDisplays the NTP authentication related parameter. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 166 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 19 Configuring RFID Tag Tracking Information About Configuring RFID Tag Tracking, page 167 Configuring RFID Tag Tracking (CLI), page 168 Viewing RFID Tag Tracking Information (CLI), page 169 Debugging RFID Tag Tracking Issues (CLI), page 169 Information About Configuring RFID Tag Tracking The controller enables you to configure radio-frequency identification (RFID) tag tracking. RFID tags are small wireless devices that are affixed to assets for real-time location tracking. They operate by advertising their location using special 802.11 packets, which are processed by access points, the controller, and the mobility services engine. To know more about the tags supported by controller, see http://www.cisco.com/web/partners/pr46/pr147/

ccx_wifi_tags.html. The mobility services engine receives telemetry and chokepoint information from tags that are compliant with this CCX specification. Table 5: Cisco Compatible Extensions for RFID Tags Summary Partners Product Name Telemetry Temperature Pressure Humidity Status Fuel AeroScout T2 T3 WhereNet Wheretag IV Pango (InnerWireless) V3 X X X OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 167 Configuring RFID Tag Tracking (CLI) Partners Quantity Distance Motion Detection Number of Panic Buttons Tampering Battery Information Multiple-Frequency Tags3 AeroScout X 1 X X X 2 X X X WhereNet Pango (InnerWireless) 0 X X X X 1 X X 3 For chokepoint systems, note that the tag can work only with chokepoints coming from the same vendor. Note The Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) runs on the mobility services engine. For NMSP to function, the TCP port (16113) over which the controller and the mobility services engine communicate must be open (not blocked) on any firewall that exists between these two devices. The Cisco-approved tags support these capabilities:

Information notificationsEnables you to view vendor-specific and emergency information. Information pollingEnables you to monitor battery status and telemetry data. Many telemetry data types provide support for sensory networks and a large range of applications for RFID tags. Measurement notificationsEnables you to deploy chokepoints at strategic points within your buildings or campuses. Whenever an RFID tag moves to within a defined proximity of a chokepoint, the tag begins transmitting packets that advertise its location in relation to the chokepoint. You can configure and view RFID tag tracking information through the controller CLI. Configuring RFID Tag Tracking (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 168 Enable or disable RFID tag tracking by entering this command:

config rfid status {enable | disable}

The default value is enabled. Specify a static timeout value (between 60 and 7200 seconds) by entering this command:

config rfid timeout seconds Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Viewing RFID Tag Tracking Information (CLI) The static timeout value is the amount of time that the controller maintains tags before expiring them. For example, if a tag is configured to beacon every 30 seconds, we recommend that you set the timeout value to 90 seconds (approximately three times the beacon value). The default value is 1200 seconds. Step 3 Enable or disable RFID tag mobility for specific tags by entering these commands:

config rfid mobility vendor_name enableEnables client mobility for a specific vendors tags. When you enter this command, tags are unable to obtain a DHCP address for client mode when attempting to select and/or download a configuration. config rfid mobility vendor_name disableDisables client mobility for a specific vendors tags. When you enter this command, tags can obtain a DHCP address. If a tag roams from one subnet to another, it obtains a new address rather than retaining the anchor state. Note These commands can be used only for Pango tags. Therefore, the only valid entry for vendor_name is pango in all lowercase letters. Viewing RFID Tag Tracking Information (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 See the current configuration for RFID tag tracking by entering this command:

show rfid config See detailed information for a specific RFID tag by entering this command:

show rfid detail mac_address where mac_address is the tags MAC address. See a list of all RFID tags currently connected to the controller by entering this command:

show rfid summary See a list of RFID tags that are associated to the controller as clients by entering this command:

show rfid client Debugging RFID Tag Tracking Issues (CLI) If you experience any problems with RFID tag tracking, use these debug commands. Configure MAC address debugging by entering this command:

debug mac addr mac_address OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 169 Debugging RFID Tag Tracking Issues (CLI) Note We recommend that you perform the debugging on a per-tag basis. If you enable debugging for all of the tags, the console or Telnet screen is inundated with messages. Enable or disable debugging for the 802.11 RFID tag module by entering this command:

debug dot11 rfid {enable | disable}

Enable or disable RFID debug options by entering this command:

debug rfid {all | detail | error | nmsp | receive} {enable | disable}

where all configures debugging of all RFID messages. detail configures debugging of RFID detailed messages. error configures debugging of RFID error messages. nmsp configures debugging of RFID NMSP messages. receive configures debugging of incoming RFID tag messages. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 170 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 20 Resetting the Controller to Default Settings Information About Resetting the Controller to Default Settings, page 171 Resetting the Controller to Default Settings (GUI), page 171 Resetting the Controller to Default Settings (CLI), page 172 Information About Resetting the Controller to Default Settings You can return the controller to its original configuration by resetting the controller to factory-default settings. Resetting the Controller to Default Settings (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Start your Internet browser. Enter the controller IP address in the browser address line and press Enter. An Enter Network Password dialog box appears. Enter your username in the User Name text box. The default username is admin. Enter the wireless device password in the Password text box and press Enter. The default password is admin. Choose Commands > Reset to Factory Default. Click Reset. When prompted, confirm the reset. Reboot the controller without saving the configuration. Use the configuration wizard to enter configuration settings. See the Configuring the ControllerUsing the CLI Configuration Wizard section for more information. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 171 Resetting the Controller to Default Settings (CLI) Resetting the Controller to Default Settings (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Enter the reset system command. At the prompt that asks whether you need to save changes to the configuration, enter N. The unit reboots. When you are prompted for a username, enter the recover-config command to restore the factory-default configuration. The controller reboots and displays this message:

Welcome to the Cisco WLAN Solution Wizard Configuration Tool Step 3 Use the configuration wizard to enter configuration settings. See the Configuring the ControllerUsing the CLI Configuration Wizard section for more information. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 172 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 21 Managing Controller Software and Configurations Upgrading the Controller Software, page 173 Transferring Files to and from a Controller, page 187 Saving Configurations, page 202 Editing Configuration Files, page 202 Clearing the Controller Configuration, page 203 Erasing the Controller Configuration, page 203 Resetting the Controller, page 204 Upgrading the Controller Software When you upgrade the controller software, the software on the access points associated with the controller is also automatically upgraded. When an access point is loading software, each of its LEDs blinks in succession. Up to 10 access points can be concurrently upgraded from the controller. Caution Do not power down the controller or any access point during this process; otherwise, you might corrupt the software image. Upgrading a controller with a large number of access points can take as long as 30 minutes, depending on the size of your network. However, with the increased number of concurrent access point upgrades supported in the controller software release, the upgrade time should be significantly reduced. The access points must remain powered, and the controller must not be reset during this time. Restrictions for Upgrading Controller Software If you require a downgrade from one release to another, you might lose the configuration from your current release. The workaround is to reload the previous controller configuration files saved on the backup server or to reconfigure the controller. It is not possible to directly upgrade to this release from a release that is older than 6.0.182.0. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 173 Upgrading the Controller Software You can upgrade or downgrade the controller software only between certain releases. In some instances, you must first install an intermediate release prior to upgrading to the latest software release. When you upgrade the controller to an intermediate software release, you must wait until all of the access points that are associated with the controller are upgraded to the intermediate release before you install the latest controller software. In large networks, it can take some time to download the software on each access point. When you upgrade to the latest software release, the software on the access points associated with the controller is also automatically upgraded. When an access point is loading software, each of its LEDs blinks in succession. We recommend that you access the controller GUI using Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 (or a later release) or Mozilla Firefox 2.0.0.11 (or a later release). Cisco controllers support standard SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) files. MIBs can be downloaded from the Software Center on Cisco.com. The controller software is factory installed on your controller and automatically downloaded to the access points after a release upgrade and whenever an access point joins a controller. We recommend that you install the latest software version available for maximum operational benefit. We recommend that you install Wireless LAN Controller Field Upgrade Software for Release 1.7.0.0-FUS, which is a special AES package that contains several system-related component upgrades. These include the bootloader, field recovery image, and FPGA/MCU firmware. Installing the FUS image requires special attention because it installs some critical firmware. The FUS image is independent of the runtime image. For more information, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/wireless/controller/release/notes/

fus_rn_1_7_0_0.html. Ensure that you have a TFTP or FTP server available for the software upgrade. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP or FTP server:

Ensure that your TFTP server supports files that are larger than the size of the controller software release. Some TFTP servers that support files of this size are tftpd32 and the TFTP server within the Cisco Prime Infrastructure. If you attempt to download the controller software and your TFTP server does not support files of this size, the following error message appears: TFTP failure while storing in flash. If you are upgrading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP or FTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable When you plug a controller into an AC power source, the bootup script and power-on self-test run to initialize the system. During this time, you can press Esc to display the bootloader Boot Options Menu. The menu options for the 5500 and Flex 7500 series controllers are different than for other controller platforms. Bootloader menu for 5500 Series Controllers:

Boot Options Please choose an option from below:

1. Run primary image 2. Run backup image 3. Change active boot image 4. Clear Configuration 5. Format FLASH Drive 6. Manually update images Please enter your choice:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 174 OL-28744-01 Upgrading the Controller Software Bootloader menu for other controller platforms:

Boot Options Please choose an option from below:

1. Run primary image 2. Run backup image 3. Manually update images 4. Change active boot image 5. Clear Configuration Please enter your choice:

Enter 1 to run the current software, enter 2 to run the previous software, enter 4 (on a 5500 series controller), or enter 5 (on another controller platform) to run the current software and set the controller configuration to factory defaults. Do not choose the other options unless directed to do so. Note See the Installation Guide or the Quick Start Guide for your controller for more details on running the bootup script and power-on self-test. Control which address(es) are sent in CAPWAP discovery responses when NAT is enabled on the Management Interface using the following command:

config network ap-discovery nat-ip-only {enable | disable}

where enableEnables use of NAT IP only in Discovery response. This is the default. Use this command if all APs are outside of the NAT gateway. disableEnables use of both NAT IP and non-NAT IP in discovery response. Use this command if APs are on the inside and outside of the NAT gateway; for example, Local Mode and OfficeExtend APs on the same controller. Note To avoid stranding APs, you must disable AP link-latency (if enabled) before you use the disable option for the config network ap-discovery nat-ip-only command. To disable AP link-latency, use the config ap link-latency disable all command. You can configure 802.1p tagging by using the config qos dot1p-tag {bronze | silver | gold | platinum}

tag. For the 7.2.103.0 and later releases, if you tag 802.1p packets, the tagging has impact only on wired packets. Wireless packets are impacted only by the maximum priority level set for QoS. You can reduce the network downtime using the following options:

You can predownload the AP image. For FlexConnect access points, use the FlexConnect Efficient AP upgrade feature to reduce traffic between the controller and the AP (main site and the branch). Do not power down the controller or any access point during the upgrade process; otherwise, you might corrupt the software image. Upgrading a controller with a large number of access points can take as long as 30 minutes, depending on the size of your network. However, with the increased number of concurrent access point upgrades supported, the upgrade time should be significantly reduced. The access points must remain powered, and the controller must not be reset during this time. If you want to downgrade to a previous release, do either of the following:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 175 Upgrading the Controller Software Delete all WLANs that are mapped to interface groups and create new ones. Ensure that all WLANs are mapped to interfaces rather than interface groups. After you perform these functions on the controller, you must reboot the controller for the changes to take effect:

Enable or disable link aggregation (LAG) Enable a feature that is dependent on certificates (such as HTTPS and web authentication) Add new or modify existing SNMP v3 users Modify an existing SNMP v3 engine ID Add a new license or modify an existing license Increase the priority for a license The controller bootloader stores a copy of the active primary image and the backup image. If the primary image becomes corrupted, you can use the bootloader to boot with the backup image. With the backup image stored before rebooting, be sure to choose Option 2: Run Backup Image from the boot menu to boot from the backup image. Then, upgrade with a known working image and reboot the controller. The recovery image provides a backup image that can be used if an access point power-cycles during an image upgrade. The best way to avoid the need for access point recovery is to prevent an access point from power-cycling during a system upgrade. If a power-cycle occurs during an upgrade to an oversized access point image, you can recover the access point using the TFTP recovery procedure. To recover the access point using the TFTP recovery procedure, follow these steps:

1 Download the required recovery image from Cisco.com (c1100-rcvk9w8-mx, c1200-rcvk9w8-mx, or c1310-rcvk9w8-mx) and install it in the root directory of your TFTP server. 2 Connect the TFTP server to the same subnet as the target access point and power-cycle the access point. The access point boots from the TFTP image and then joins the controller to download the oversized access point image and complete the upgrade procedure. 3 After the access point has been recovered, you can remove the TFTP server. You can upgrade to a new release of the controller software or downgrade to an older release even if Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) is enabled. Upgrading Controller Software (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 176 Upload your controller configuration files to a server to back them up. Note We highly recommend that you back up your configuration files of the controller prior to upgrading the controller software. Otherwise, you must manually reconfigure the controller. Get the controller software image by following these steps:

a) Browse to the Cisco Software Center: http://www.cisco.com/cisco/software/navigator.html. b) Choose Wireless > Wireless LAN Controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Upgrading the Controller Software The following options are available: Integrated Controllers and Controller Modules and Standalone Controllers. c) Depending on your controller platform, click one of the above options. d) Click the controller model number or name. The Download Software page is displayed. e) Click a controller software release. The software releases are labeled as follows to help you determine which release to download:

Early Deployment (ED)These software releases provide new features, new hardware platform support, and bug fixes. Maintenance Deployment (MD)These software releases provide bug fixes and ongoing software maintenance. Deferred (DF)These software releases have been deferred. We recommend that you migrate to an upgraded release. f) Choose a software release number. g) Click the filename (filename.aes). h) Click Download. i) Read Ciscos End User Software License Agreement and then click Agree. j) Save the file to your hard drive. k) Repeat steps a through k to download the remaining file. Copy the controller software image (filename.aes) to the default directory on your TFTP or FTP server.

(Optional) Disable the 802.11 networks. Note For busy networks, controllers on high utilization, or small controller platforms, we recommend that you disable the 802.11 networks as a precautionary measure. Disable any WLANs on the controller. Choose Commands > Download File to open the Download File to Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Code. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available in 7.4 and later releases) In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. If you are using a TFTP server, the default values of 10 retries and 6 seconds for the Maximum Retries and Timeout text boxes should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. If you are using a TFTP server, the default values of 10 retries for the Maximum Retries text field, and 6 seconds for the Timeout text field should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values if desired. To do so, enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the software in the Maximum Retries text box and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the software in the Timeout text box. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the software. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the controller software file (filename.aes). If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 177 Upgrading the Controller Software c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 Click Download to download the software to the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the download. After the download is complete, click Reboot. If prompted to save your changes, click Save and Reboot. Click OK to confirm. After the controller reboots, repeat step 6 to step 17 to install the remaining file. Reenable the WLANs. For Cisco WiSM2, reenable the controller port channel on the Catalyst switch. If you have disabled the 802.11 networks in Step 4, reenable them. To verify the controller software version, choose Monitor on the controller GUI and see Software Version in the Controller Summary area. Upgrading Controller Software (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 178 Upload your controller configuration files to a server to back them up. Note We highly recommend that you back up your controller's configuration files prior to upgrading the controller software. Otherwise, you must manually reconfigure the controller. Get the controller software image by following these steps:

a) Browse to the Cisco Software Center: http://www.cisco.com/cisco/software/navigator.html. b) Choose Wireless > Wireless LAN Controller. The following options are available: Integrated Controllers and Controller Modules and Standalone Controllers. c) Depending on your controller platform, click one of the above options. d) Click the controller model number or name. The Download Software page is displayed. e) Click a controller software release. The software releases are labeled as follows to help you determine which release to download:

Early Deployment (ED)These software releases provide new features, new hardware platform support, and bug fixes. Maintenance Deployment (MD)These software releases provide bug fixes and ongoing software maintenance. Deferred (DF)These software releases have been deferred. We recommend that you migrate to an upgraded release. f) Choose a software release number. g) Click the filename (filename.aes). h) Click Download. i) Read Ciscos End User Software License Agreement and then click Agree. j) Save the file to your hard drive. k) Repeat steps a through k to download the remaining file. Copy the controller software image (filename.aes) to the default directory on your TFTP or FTP server.

(Optional) Disable the 802.11 networks. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Upgrading the Controller Software Note For busy networks, controllers on high utilization, or small controller platforms, we recommend that you disable the 802.11 networks as a precautionary measure. Disable any WLANs on the controller (using the config wlan disable wlan_id command). Log onto the controller CLI. Enter the ping server-ip-address command to verify that the controller can contact the TFTP or FTP server. View current download settings by entering the transfer download start command. Answer n to the prompt to view the current download settings. Change the download settings, if necessary by entering these commands:

Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 transfer download mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

transfer download datatype code transfer download serverip server-ip-address transfer download filename filename transfer download path server-path-to-file Note Pathnames on a TFTP or FTP server are relative to the servers default or root directory. For example, in the case of the Solaris TFTP server, the path is /. If you are using a TFTP server, also enter these commands:

transfer download tftpMaxRetries retries transfer download tftpPktTimeout timeout Note The default values of 10 retries and a 6-second timeout should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. To do so, enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the retries parameter and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the timeout parameter. If you are using an FTP server, also enter these commands:

transfer download username username transfer download password password transfer download port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 View the current updated settings by entering the transfer download start command. Answer y to the prompt to confirm the current download settings and start the software download. Save the code update to nonvolatile NVRAM and reboot the controller by entering this command:

reset system The controller completes the bootup process. After the controller reboots, repeat Steps 6 through 11 to install the remaining file. Reenable the WLANs by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan_id OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 179 Upgrading the Controller Software Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 For Cisco WiSMs, re-enable the controller port channel on the Catalyst switch. If you have disabled the 802.11 networks in Step 4, renable them. To verify the controller software that is installed, enter the show sysinfo command and see Product Version. To verify the Cisco Unified Wireless Network Controller Boot Software file that is installed on the controller, enter the show sysinfo command on the controller CLI and see Recovery Image Version or Emergency Image Version. Note If a Cisco Unified Wireless Network Controller Boot Software ER.aes file is not installed, Recovery Image Version or Emergency Image Version show 'N/A.'

Predownloading an Image to an Access Point To minimize a network outages, you can now download an upgrade image to the access point from the controller without resetting the access point or losing network connectivity. Previously, you would download an upgrade image to the controller and reset it, which causes the access point to go into discovery mode. After the access point discovers the controller with the new image, the access point downloads the new image, resets, goes into discovery mode, and rejoins the controller. You can now download the upgrade image to the controller and then download the image to the access point while the network is still up. You can also schedule a reboot of the controller and access points, either after a specified amount of time or at a specific date and time. When both devices are up, the access point discovers and rejoins the controller. Access Point Predownload Process The access point predownload feature works as follows:

The controller image is downloaded. The primary image becomes the backup image of the controller and the downloaded image becomes the new primary image. Change the current boot image as the backup image by using the config boot backup command to ensure that if a system failure occurs, the controller boots with the last working image of the controller. To switch over to the new downloaded image, start predownload of the upgraded image using the config ap image predownload primary all command. The upgrade image is downloaded as the backup image on the access points. You can verify this by using the show ap image all command. Change the boot image to primary image manually using the config boot primary command and reboot the controller for the upgrade image to be activated. or You issue a scheduled reboot with the swap keyword. The swap keyword has the following importance: The swapping occurs to the primary and backup images on the access point and the currently active image on controller with the backup image. When the controller reboots, the access points are disassociated and eventually come up with an upgraded image. Once the controller responds to the discovery request sent by an access point with its discovery response packet, the access point sends a join request. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 180 OL-28744-01 Upgrading the Controller Software The actual upgrade of the images occur. The following sequence of actions occur:

During boot time, the access point sends a join request. The controller responds with the join response with the image version that the controller is running. The access point compares its running image with the running image on the controller. If the versions match, the access point joins the controller. If the versions do not match, the access point compares the version of the backup image and if they match, the access point swaps the primary and backup images and reloads and subsequently joins the controller. If the primary image of the access point is the same as the controller image, the access point reloads and joins the controller. If none of the above conditions are true, the access point sends an image data request to the controller, downloads the latest image, reloads, and joins the controller. Restrictions for Predownloading an Image to an Access Point The maximum number of concurrent predownloads is limited to half the number of concurrent normal image downloads. This limitation allows new access points to join the controller during image downloading. If you reach the predownload limit, then the access points that cannot get an image sleep for a time between 180 to 600 seconds and then reattempt the predownload. Before you predownload, you should change the active controller boot image to the backup image to ensure that if the controller reboots for some reason, it comes back up with the earlier running image, not the partially downloaded upgrade image. Access points with 16-MB total available memory (1130 and 1240 access points) may not have enough free memory to download an upgrade image and may automatically delete crash info files, radio files, and any backup images to free up space. However, this limitation does not affect the predownload process because the predownload image replaces any backup image on the access point. When the system time is changed by using the config time command, the time set for a scheduled reset is not valid and the scheduled system reset is canceled. You are given an option either to cancel the scheduled reset before configuring the time or retain the scheduled reset and not configure the time. All the primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers should run the same images as the primary and backup images. That is, the primary image of all three controllers should be X and the secondary image of all three controllers should be Y or the feature is not effective. At the time of the reset, if any AP is downloading the controller image, the scheduled reset is canceled. The following message appears with the reason why the scheduled reset was canceled:

%OSAPI-3-RESETSYSTEM_FAILED: osapi_task.c:4458 System will not reset as software is being upgraded. Predownloading a 7.2 or later version of image on a Cisco Aironet 1240 access point is not supported when upgrading from a previous controller release. If predownloading is attempted to the Cisco Aironet 1240 access point, the AP gets disconnected. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 181 Upgrading the Controller Software Predownloading an Image to Access PointsGlobal Configuration (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Upload your controller configuration files to a server to back them up. Note We highly recommend that you back up your controller's configuration files prior to upgrading the controller software. Otherwise, you must manually reconfigure the controller. Follow these steps to obtain the controller software:

a) Browse to the Cisco Software Center: http://www.cisco.com/cisco/software/navigator.html b) Choose Wireless from the center selection window. c) Click Wireless LAN Controllers. The following options are available: Integrated Controllers and Controller Modules and Standalone Controllers. d) Depending on your controller platform, click one of the above options. e) Click the controller model number or name. The Download Software page is displayed. f) Click a controller software release. The software releases are labeled as follows to help you determine which release to download:

Early Deployment (ED)These software releases provide new features, new hardware platform support, and bug fixes. Maintenance Deployment (MD)These software releases provide bug fixes and ongoing software maintenance. Deferred (DF)These software releases have been deferred. We recommend that you migrate to an upgraded release. g) Choose a software release number. h) Click the filename (filename.aes). i) Click Download. j) Read Ciscos End User Software License Agreement and then click Agree. k) Save the file to your hard drive. l) Repeat steps a through k to download the remaining file. Copy the controller software file (filename.aes) to the default directory on your TFTP or FTP server.

(Optional) Disable the controller 802.11X networks. Note For busy networks, controllers on high utilization, or small controller platforms, we recommend that you disable the 802.11X networks as a precautionary measure. For Cisco WiSM2, shut down the controller port channel on the Catalyst switch to allow the controller to reboot before the access points start downloading the software. Disable any WLANs on the controller. Choose Commands > Download File to open the Download File to Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Code. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available in 7.4 and later releases) Step 10 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. If you are using a TFTP server, the default values of 10 retries and 6 seconds for the Maximum Retries and Timeout text boxes should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 182 OL-28744-01 Upgrading the Controller Software Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the software in the Maximum Retries text box and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the software in the Timeout text box. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the software. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the controller software file (filename.aes). If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Click Download to download the software to the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the download. To configure the predownloading of access point images globally, choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. In the AP Image Pre-download section, perform one of the following:

To instruct all the access points to predownload a primary image from the controller, click Download Primary under the AP Image Pre-download. To instruct all the access points to swap their primary and backup images, click Interchange Image. To download an image from the controller and store it as a backup image, click Download Backup. To abort the predownload operation, click Abort Predownload. Step 18 Step 19 Click OK. Click Apply. Configuring Predownload Image to an Access Point (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Upload your controller configuration files to a server to back them up. Note We highly recommend that you back up your controller's configuration files prior to upgrading the controller software. Otherwise, you must manually reconfigure the controller. Follow these steps to obtain the controller software:

a) Browse to the Cisco Software Center: http://www.cisco.com/cisco/software/navigator.html b) Select Wireless from the center selection window. c) Click Wireless LAN Controllers. The following options are available: Integrated Controllers and Controller Modules and Standalone Controllers. d) Depending on your controller platform, click one of the above options. e) Click the controller model number or name. The Download Software page is displayed. f) Click a controller software release. The software releases are labeled as follows to help you determine which release to download:

Early Deployment (ED)These software releases provide new features, new hardware platform support, and bug fixes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 183 Upgrading the Controller Software Maintenance Deployment (MD)These software releases provide bug fixes and ongoing software maintenance. Deferred (DF)These software releases have been deferred. We recommend that you migrate to an upgraded release. g) Choose a software release number. h) Click the filename (filename.aes). i) Click Download. j) Read Ciscos End User Software License Agreement and then click Agree. k) Save the file to your hard drive. l) Repeat steps a through k to download the remaining file. Copy the controller software file (filename.aes) to the default directory on your TFTP or FTP server.

(Optional) Disable the 802.11 networks. Note For busy networks, controllers on high utilization, or small controller platforms, we recommend that you disable the 802.11 networks as a precautionary measure. For Cisco WiSM2, shut down the controller port channel on the Catalyst switch to allow the controller to reboot before the access points start downloading the software. Disable any WLANs on the controller. Choose Commands > Download File to open the Download File to Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Code. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available from the 7.4 release onwards In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the TFTP or FTP server. If you are using a TFTP server, the default values of 10 retries and 6 seconds for the Maximum Retries and Timeout text boxes should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. Enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the software in the Maximum Retries text box and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the software in the Timeout text box. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the software. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the controller software file (filename.aes). If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Click Download to download the software to the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the download. To configure the predownloading of a specific access point, choose Wireless > All APs > AP_Name to open the All AP Details page for the selected AP. Click the Advanced tab. In the AP Image Pre-download section, perform one of the following:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 184 OL-28744-01 Upgrading the Controller Software To instruct the access point to predownload a primary image from the controller, click Download Primary under the AP Image Pre-download. To instruct the access point to swap its primary and backup images, click Interchange Image. To download an image from the controller and store it as a backup image, click Download Backup. To abort the predownload operation, click Abort Predownload. Step 19 Step 20 Click OK. Click Apply. Predownloading an Image to Access Points (CLI) Using the CLI, you can predownload an image to a specific access point or to all access points. Step 1 Follow these steps to obtain the controller software:

a) Browse to the Cisco Software Center: http://www.cisco.com/cisco/software/navigator.html b) Select Wireless from the center selection window. c) Click Wireless LAN Controllers. The following options are available: Integrated Controllers and Controller Modules and Standalone Controllers. d) Depending on your controller platform, click one of the above options. e) Click the controller model number or name. The Download Software page is displayed. f) Click a controller software release. The software releases are labeled as follows to help you determine which release to download:

Early Deployment (ED)These software releases provide new features, new hardware platform support, and bug fixes. Maintenance Deployment (MD)These software releases provide bug fixes and ongoing software maintenance. Deferred (DF)These software releases have been deferred. We recommend that you migrate to an upgraded release. g) Choose a software release number. h) Click the filename (filename.aes). i) Click Download. j) Read Ciscos End User Software License Agreement and then click Agree. k) Save the file to your hard drive. l) Repeat steps a through n to download the remaining file. Copy the controller software file (filename.aes) to the default directory on your TFTP or FTP server.

(Optional) Disable the 802.11 networks. Note For busy networks, controllers on high utilization, or small controller platforms, we recommend that you disable the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n networks as a precautionary measure. Step 2 Step 3 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 185 Upgrading the Controller Software Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 For Cisco WiSM2, shut down the controller port channel on the Catalyst switch to allow the controller to reboot before the access points start downloading the software. Disable any WLANs on the controller using the config wlan disable wlan_id command. Specify access points that will receive the predownload image. Use one of these commands to specify access points for predownload:

Specify access points for predownload by entering this command:

config ap image predownload {primary | backup} {ap_name | all}

The primary image is the new image; the backup image is the existing image. Access points always boot with the primary image. Swap an access points primary and backup images by entering this command:

config ap image swap {ap_name | all}

Display detailed information on access points specified for predownload by entering this command:

show ap image {all | ap-name}

The output lists access points that are specified for predownloading and provides for each access point, primary and secondary image versions, the version of the predownload image, the predownload retry time (if necessary), and the number of predownload attempts. The output also includes the predownload status for each device. The status of the access points is as follows:

NoneThe access point is not scheduled for predownload. PredownloadingThe access point is predownloading the image. Not supportedThe access point (1120, 1230, and 1310) does not support predownloading. InitiatedThe access point is waiting to get the predownload image because the concurrent download limit has been reached. FailedThe access point has failed 64 predownload attempts. CompleteThe access point has completed predownloading. Step 7 Set a reboot time for the controller and the access points. Use one of these commands to schedule a reboot of the controller and access points:

Specify the amount of time delay before the devices reboot by entering this command:

reset system in HH:MM:SS image {swap | no-swap} reset-aps [save-config]

Note The swap operand in the reset command will result in the swapping of the primary and backup images on both the controller and the access point. The controller sends a reset message to all joined access points, and then the controller resets. Specify a date and time for the devices to reboot by entering this command:

reset system at YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS image {swap | no-swap} reset-aps [save-config]

The controller sends a reset message to all joined access points, and then the controller resets. Note The swap operand in the reset command will result in the swapping of the primary and backup images on both the controller and the access point. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 186 OL-28744-01 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Set up an SNMP trap message that announces the upcoming reset by entering this command:

reset system notify-time minutes The controller sends the announcement trap the configured number of minutes before the reset. Cancel the scheduled reboot by entering this command:

reset system cancel Note If you configure reset times and then use the config time command to change the system time on the controller, the controller notifies you that any scheduled reset times will be canceled and must be reconfigured after you set the system time. Use the show reset command to display scheduled resets. Information similar to the following appears:

System reset is scheduled for Apr 08 01:01:01 2010. Current local time and date is Apr 07 02:57:44 2010. A trap will be generated 10 minutes before each scheduled system reset. Use 'reset system cancel' to cancel the reset. Configuration will be saved before the system reset. Transferring Files to and from a Controller Controllers have built-in utilities for uploading and downloading various files. Follow the instructions in these sections to import files using either the controller GUI or CLI:

Downloading a Login Banner File Downloading Device Certificates Downloading CA Certificates Uploading PACs Uploading and Downloading Configuration Files Downloading a Login Banner File You can download a login banner file using either the GUI or the CLI. The login banner is the text that appears on the page before user authentication when you access the controller GUI or CLI using Telnet, SSH, or a console port connection. You save the login banner information as a text (*.txt) file. The text file cannot be larger than 1296 characters and cannot have more than 16 lines of text. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 187 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Note The ASCII character set consists of printable and nonprintable characters. The login banner supports only printable characters. Here is an example of a login banner:

Welcome to the Cisco Wireless Controller!

Unauthorized access prohibited. Contact sysadmin@corp.com for access. Follow the instructions in this section to download a login banner to the controller through the GUI or CLI. However, before you begin, make sure that you have a TFTP or FTP server available for the file download. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP or FTP server:

If you are downloading through the service port, the TFTP or FTP server must be on the same subnet as the service port because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. If you are downloading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP or FTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable. A third-party TFTP or FTP server cannot run on the same computer as Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP or FTP server and the third-party TFTP or FTP server require the same communication port. Note Clearing the controller configuration does not remove the login banner. See the Clearing the Login Banner (GUI) section for information about clearing the login banner using the controller GUI or CLI. Note The controller can have only one login banner file. If you download another login banner file to the controller, the first login banner file is overwritten. Downloading a Login Banner File (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Copy the login banner file to the default directory on your server. Choose Commands > Download File to open the Download File to Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Login Banner. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 188 OL-28744-01 Transferring Files to and from a Controller SFTP (available in 7.4 and later releases) Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server type you chose in Step 4. If you are using a TFTP server, the default values of 10 retries and 6 seconds for the Maximum Retries and Timeout text boxes should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. Enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the certificate in the Maximum Retries text box and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the certificate in the Timeout text box. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the login banner file. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the login banner text (*.txt) file. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 10 Click Download to download the login banner file to the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the download. Downloading a Login Banner File (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Log into the controller CLI. Specify the transfer mode used to download the config file by entering this command:

transfer download mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

Download the controller login banner by entering this command:

transfer download datatype login-banner Specify the IP address of the TFTP or FTP server by entering this command:

transfer download serverip server-ip-address Specify the name of the config file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download path server-path-to-file Specify the directory path of the config file by entering this command:

transfer download filenamefilename.txt Step 7 If you are using a TFTP server, enter these commands:

transfer download tftpMaxRetries retries transfer download tftpPktTimeout timeout Note The default values of 10 retries and a 6-second timeout should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. To do so, enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the retries parameter and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the timeout parameter. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 189 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Step 8 If you are using an FTP server, enter these commands:

transfer download username username transfer download password password transfer download port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 9 View the download settings by entering the transfer download start command. Enter y when prompted to confirm the current settings and start the download process. Clearing the Login Banner (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Commands > Login Banner to open the Login Banner page. Click Clear. When prompted, click OK to clear the banner. To clear the login banner from the controller using the controller CLI, enter the clear login-banner command. Downloading Device Certificates Each wireless device (controller, access point, and client) has its own device certificate. For example, the controller is shipped with a Cisco-installed device certificate. This certificate is used by EAP-FAST (when not using PACs), EAP-TLS, PEAP-GTC, and PEAP-MSCHAPv2 to authenticate wireless clients during local EAP authentication. However, if you want to use your own vendor-specific device certificate, it must be downloaded to the controller. Note For more information about configuring local EAP, see the Configuring Local EAP section. Follow the instructions in this section to download a vendor-specific device certificate to the controller through the GUI or CLI. However, before you begin, make sure you have a TFTP or FTP server available for the certificate download. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP or FTP server:

If you are downloading through the service port, the TFTP or FTP server must be on the same subnet as the service port because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. If you are downloading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP or FTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 190 OL-28744-01 Transferring Files to and from a Controller A third-party TFTP or FTP server cannot run on the same computer as Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP or FTP server and the third-party TFTP or FTP server require the same communication port. Note All certificates downloaded to the controller must be in PEM format. Downloading Device Certificates (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Copy the device certificate to the default directory on your server. Choose Commands > Download File to open the Download File to Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Vendor Device Certificate. In the Certificate Password text box, enter the password that was used to protect the certificate. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available in 7.4 and later releases) Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. If you are using a TFTP server, the default values of 10 retries and 6 seconds for the Maximum Retries and Timeout text boxes should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. Enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the certificate in the Maximum Retries text box and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the certificate in the Timeout text box. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the certificate. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the certificate. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Click Download to download the device certificate to the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the download. After the download is complete, choose Commands > Reboot > Reboot. If prompted to save your changes, click Save and Reboot. Click OK to confirm your decision to reboot the controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 191 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Downloading Device Certificates (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Log onto the controller CLI. Specify the transfer mode used to download the config file by entering this command:

transfer download mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

Specify the type of the file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download datatype eapdevcert Specify the certificates private key by entering this command:

transfer download certpassword password Specify the IP address of the TFTP or FTP server by entering this command:

transfer download serverip server-ip-address Specify the name of the config file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download path server-path-to-file Specify the directory path of the config file by entering this command:

transfer download filename filename.pem Step 8 If you are using a TFTP server, enter these commands:

transfer download tftpMaxRetries retries transfer download tftpPktTimeout timeout Note The default values of 10 retries and a 6-second timeout should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. To do so, enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the retries parameter and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the timeout parameter. Step 9 If you are using an FTP server, enter these commands:

transfer download username username transfer download password password transfer download port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 10 Step 11 View the updated settings by entering the transfer download start command. Answer y when prompted to confirm the current settings and start the download process. Reboot the controller by entering this command:

reset system Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 192 OL-28744-01 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Downloading CA Certificates Controllers and access points have a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate that is used to sign and validate device certificates. The controller is shipped with a Cisco-installed CA certificate. This certificate may be used by EAP-FAST (when not using PACs), EAP-TLS, PEAP-GTC, and PEAP-MSCHAPv2 to authenticate wireless clients during local EAP authentication. However, if you want to use your own vendor-specific CA certificate, it must be downloaded to the controller. Note For more information about configuring local EAP, see the Configuring Local EAP section. Follow the instructions in this section to download CA certificates to the controller through the GUI or CLI. However, before you begin, make sure that you have a TFTP or FTP server available for the certificate download. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP or FTP server:

If you are downloading through the service port, the TFTP or FTP server must be on the same subnet as the service port because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. If you are downloading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP or FTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable. A third-party TFTP or FTP server cannot run on the same computer as Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP or FTP server and the third-party TFTP or FTP server require the same communication port. Note All certificates downloaded to the controller must be in PEM format. Download CA Certificates (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Copy the CA certificate to the default directory on your server. Choose Commands > Download File to open the Download File to Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Vendor CA Certificate. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available in 7.4 and later releases) Step 5 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. If you are using a TFTP server, the default values of 10 retries and 6 seconds for the Maximum Retries and Timeout text boxes should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 193 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the certificate in the Maximum Retries text box and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the certificate in the Timeout text box. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the certificate. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the certificate. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log on to the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log on to the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Click Download to download the CA certificate to the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the download. After the download is complete, choose Commands > Reboot > Reboot. If prompted to save your changes, click Save and Reboot. Click OK to confirm your decision to reboot the controller. Downloading CA Certificates (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Log on to the controller CLI. Specify the transfer mode used to download the config file by entering this command:

transfer download mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

Specify the type of the file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download datatype eapdevcert Specify the IP address of the TFTP or FTP server by entering this command:

transfer download serverip server-ip-address Specify the directory path of the config file by entering this command:

transfer download path server-path-to-file Specify the name of the config file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download filename filename.pem Step 7 If you are using a TFTP server, enter these commands:

transfer download tftpMaxRetries retries transfer download tftpPktTimeout timeout Note The default values of 10 retries and a 6-second timeout should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. To do so, enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the retries parameter and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the timeout parameter. Step 8 If you are using an FTP server, enter these commands:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 194 OL-28744-01 Transferring Files to and from a Controller transfer download username username transfer download password password transfer download port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 9 Step 10 View the updated settings by entering the transfer download start command. Answer y when prompted to confirm the current settings and start the download process. Reboot the controller by entering the reset system command. Uploading PACs Protected access credentials (PACs) are credentials that are either automatically or manually provisioned and used to perform mutual authentication with a local EAP authentication server during EAP-FAST authentication. When manual PAC provisioning is enabled, the PAC file is manually generated on the controller. Follow the instructions in this section to generate and load PACs from the controller through the GUI or CLI. However, before you begin, make sure you have a TFTP or FTP server available for the PAC upload. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP or FTP server:

If you are uploading through the service port, the TFTP or FTP server must be on the same subnet as the service port because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. If you are uploading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP or FTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable. A third-party TFTP or FTP server cannot run on the same computer as Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP or FTP server and the third-party TFTP or FTP server require the same communication port. Uploading PACs (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Commands > Upload File to open the Upload File from Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose PAC (Protected Access Credential). In the User text box, enter the name of the user who will use the PAC. In the Validity text box, enter the number of days for the PAC to remain valid. The default setting is zero (0). In the Password and Confirm Password text boxes, enter a password to protect the PAC. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 195 Transferring Files to and from a Controller SFTP (available in 7.4 and later releases) Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the PAC. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the PAC file. PAC files have a .pac extension. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the upload occurs. The default value is 21. Step 11 Step 12 Click Upload to upload the PAC from the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the upload. Follow the instructions for your wireless client to load the PAC on your client devices. Make sure to use the password that you entered above. Uploading PACs (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Log on to the controller CLI. Specify the transfer mode used to upload the config file by entering this command:

transfer upload mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

Upload a Protected Access Credential (PAC) by entering this command:

transfer upload datatype pac Specify the identification of the user by entering this command:

transfer upload pac username validity password Specify the IP address of the TFTP or FTP server by entering this command:

transfer upload serverip server-ip-address Specify the directory path of the config file by entering this command:

transfer upload path server-path-to-file Specify the name of the config file to be uploaded by entering this command:

transfer upload filename manual.pac. Step 8 If you are using an FTP server, enter these commands:

transfer upload username username transfer upload password password transfer upload port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 196 OL-28744-01 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Step 9 Step 10 View the updated settings by entering the transfer upload start command. Answer y when prompted to confirm the current settings and start the upload process. Follow the instructions for your wireless client to load the PAC on your client devices. Make sure to use the password that you entered above. Uploading and Downloading Configuration Files We recommend that you upload your controllers configuration file to a server to back it up. If you lose your configuration, you can then download the saved configuration to the controller. Note Do not download a configuration file to your controller that was uploaded from a different controller platform. For example, a Cisco 5500 Series Controller does not support the configuration file from a Cisco 2500 Series Controller. Follow these guidelines when working with configuration files:

Any CLI with an invalid value is filtered out and set to default by the XML validation engine. Validation occurs during bootup. A configuration may be rejected if the validation fails. A configuration may fail if you have an invalid CLI. For example, if you have a CLI where you try to configure a WLAN without adding appropriate commands to add the WLAN. A configuration may be rejected if the dependencies are not addressed. For example, if you try to configure dependent parameters without using the add command. The XML validation may succeed but the configuration download infrastructure will immediately reject the configuration with no validation errors. An invalid configuration can be verified by using the show invalid-config command. The show invalid-config command reports the configuration that is rejected by the controller either as part of download process or by XML validation infrastructure. Note You can also read and modify the configuration file. Uploading Configuration Files You can upload configuration files using either the GUI or the CLI. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 197 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Uploading the Configuration Files (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Choose Commands > Upload File to open the Upload File from Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Configuration. Encrypt the configuration file by selecting the Configuration File Encryption check box and entering the encryption key in the Encryption Key text box. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available in 7.4 and later releases) In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the configuration file. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the configuration file. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the upload occurs. The default value is 21. Step 9 Click Upload to upload the configuration file to the server. A message appears indicating the status of the upload. If the upload fails, repeat this procedure and try again. Uploading the Configuration Files (CLI) Specify the transfer mode used to upload the configuration file by entering this command:

transfer upload mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

Specify the type of file to be uploaded by entering this command:

transfer upload datatype config Encrypt the configuration file by entering these commands:

transfer encrypt enable transfer encrypt set-key key, where key is the encryption key used to encrypt the file. Specify the IP address of the server by entering this command:

transfer upload serverip server-ip-address Specify the directory path of the configuration file by entering this command:

transfer upload path server-path-to-file Specify the name of the configuration file to be uploaded by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 198 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Step 7 transfer upload filename filename If you are using an FTP server, enter these commands to specify the username and password used to log into the FTP server and the port number through which the upload occurs:

transfer upload username username transfer upload password password transfer upload port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 8 Step 9 Initiate the upload process by entering this command:

transfer upload start When prompted to confirm the current settings, answer y. Information similar to the following appears:

Mode............................................. TFTP TFTP Server IP................................... 10.10.10.4 TFTP Path........................................ Config/

TFTP Filename.................................... AS_4402_4_2_55_8_Config.xml Data Type........................................ Config File Encryption....................................... Disabled

**************************************************

*** WARNING: Config File Encryption Disabled ***

**************************************************

Are you sure you want to start? (y/N) Y File transfer operation completed successfully. If the upload fails, repeat this procedure and try again. Downloading Configuration Files You can download configuration files using either the GUI or the CLI. Downloading the Configuration Files (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Commands > Download File to open the Download File to Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Configuration. If the configuration file is encrypted, select the Configuration File Encryption check box and enter the encryption key used to decrypt the file in the Encryption Key text box. Note The key that you enter here should match the one entered during the upload process. Step 4 From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 199 Transferring Files to and from a Controller TFTP FTP SFTP (available in 7.4 and later releases) Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. If you are using a TFTP server, the default values of 10 retries and 6 seconds for the Maximum Retries and Timeout text boxes should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. Enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the configuration file in the Maximum Retries text box and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the configuration file in the Timeout text box. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the configuration file. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the configuration file. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 10 Click Download to download the file to the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the download, and the controller reboots automatically. If the download fails, repeat this procedure and try again. Downloading the Configuration Files (CLI) Note The controller does not support incremental configuration downloads. The configuration file contains all mandatory commands (all interface address commands, mgmtuser with read-write permission commands, and interface port or LAG enable or disable commands) required to successfully complete the download. For example, if you download only the config time ntp server index server_address command as part of the configuration file, the download fails. Only the commands present in the configuration file are applied to the controller, and any configuration in the controller prior to the download is removed. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Specify the transfer mode used to download the configuration file by entering this command:

transfer download mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

Specify the type of file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download datatype config If the configuration file is encrypted, enter these commands:

transfer encrypt enable transfer encrypt set-key key, where key is the encryption key used to decrypt the file. Note The key that you enter here should match the one entered during the upload process. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 200 OL-28744-01 Transferring Files to and from a Controller Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Specify the IP address of the TFTP or FTP server by entering this command:

transfer download serverip server-ip-address Specify the directory path of the configuration file by entering this command:

transfer download path server-path-to-file Specify the name of the configuration file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download filename filename If you are using a TFTP server, enter these commands:

transfer download tftpMaxRetries retries transfer download tftpPktTimeout timeout Note The default values of 10 retries and a 6-second timeout should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. To do so, enter the maximum number of times that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the retries parameter and the amount of time (in seconds) that the TFTP server attempts to download the software for the timeout parameter. Step 8 If you are using an FTP server, enter these commands to specify the username and password used to log into the FTP server and the port number through which the download occurs:

transfer upload username username transfer upload password password transfer upload port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 9 Step 10 View the updated settings by entering this command:

transfer download start When prompted to confirm the current settings and start the download process, answer y. Information similar to the following appears:

Mode............................................. TFTP TFTP Server IP................................... 10.10.10.4 TFTP Path........................................ Config/

TFTP Filename.................................... AS_4402_4_2_55_8_Config.xml Data Type........................................ Config File Encryption....................................... Disabled

**************************************************

*** WARNING: Config File Encryption Disabled ***

**************************************************

Are you sure you want to start? (y/N) y File transfer operation completed successfully. If the download fails, repeat this procedure and try again. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 201 Saving Configurations Saving Configurations Controllers contain two kinds of memory: volatile RAM and NVRAM. At any time, you can save the configuration changes from active volatile RAM to nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) using one of these commands:

save configSaves the configuration from volatile RAM to NVRAM without resetting the controller. reset systemPrompts you to confirm that you want to save configuration changes before the controller reboots. logoutPrompts you to confirm that you want to save configuration changes before you log out. Editing Configuration Files When you save the controllers configuration, the controller stores it in XML format in flash memory. Controller software release 5.2 or later releases enable you to easily read and modify the configuration file by converting it to CLI format. When you upload the configuration file to a TFTP/FTP/SFTP server, the controller initiates the conversion from XML to CLI. You can then read or edit the configuration file in a CLI format on the server. When you are finished, you download the file back to the controller, where it is reconverted to an XML format and saved. Step 1 Upload the configuration file to a TFTP/FTP/SFTP server by performing one of the following:

Upload the file using the controller GUI. Upload the file using the controller CLI. Step 2 Read or edit the configuration file on the server. You can modify or delete existing CLI commands and add new CLI commands to the file. Note To edit the configuration file, you can use either Notepad or WordPad on Windows or the VI editor on Linux. Step 3 Step 4 Save your changes to the configuration file on the server. Download the configuration file to the controller by performing one of the following:

Download the file using the controller GUI. Download the file using the controller CLI. The controller converts the configuration file to an XML format, saves it to flash memory, and then reboots using the new configuration. CLI commands with known keywords and proper syntax are converted to XML while improper CLI commands are ignored and saved to flash memory. Any CLI commands that have invalid values are replaced with default values. To see any ignored commands or invalid configuration values, enter this command:

show invalid-config Note You cannot execute this command after the clear config or save config command. Step 5 If the downloaded configuration contains a large number of invalid CLI commands, you might want to upload the invalid configuration to the TFTP or FTP server for analysis. To do so, perform one of the following:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 202 OL-28744-01 Clearing the Controller Configuration Upload the invalid configuration using the controller GUI. Follow the instructions in the Uploading Configuration Files (GUI) section but choose Invalid Config from the File Type drop-down list in Step 2 and skip Step 3. Upload the invalid configuration using the controller CLI. Follow the instructions in the Uploading Configuration Files (CLI) section but enter the transfer upload datatype invalid-config command in Step 2 and skip Step 3. Step 6 The controller does not support the uploading and downloading of port configuration CLI commands. If you want to configure the controller ports, enter these commands:

config port linktrap {port | all} {enable | disable}Enables or disables the up and down link traps for a specific controller port or for all ports. config port adminmode {port | all} {enable | disable}Enables or disables the administrative mode for a specific controller port or for all ports. Step 7 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Clearing the Controller Configuration Step 1 Step 2 Clear the configuration by entering this command:

clear config Enter y at the confirmation prompt to confirm the action. Reboot the system by entering this command:

reset system Enter n to reboot without saving configuration changes. When the controller reboots, the configuration wizard starts automatically. Step 3 Follow the instructions in the Configuring the Controller-Using the Configuration Wizard section to complete the initial configuration. Erasing the Controller Configuration Step 1 Reset the configuration by entering this command:

reset system At the confirmation prompt, enter y to save configuration changes to NVRAM. The controller reboots. Step 2 When you are prompted for a username, restore the factory-default settings by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 203 Resetting the Controller recover-config The controller reboots and the configuration wizard starts automatically. Step 3 Follow the instructions in the Configuring the Controller-Using the Configuration Wizard section to complete the initial configuration. Resetting the Controller You can reset the controller and view the reboot process on the CLI console using one of the following two methods:

Turn the controller off and then turn it back on. On the CLI, enter reset system. At the confirmation prompt, enter y to save configuration changes to NVRAM. The controller reboots. When the controller reboots, the CLI console displays the following reboot information:

Initializing the system. Verifying the hardware configuration. Loading microcode into memory. Verifying the operating system software load. Initializing with its stored configurations. Displaying the login prompt. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 204 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 22 Managing User Accounts Configuring Guest User Accounts, page 205 Configuring Administrator Usernames and Passwords, page 208 Changing the Default Values for SNMP v3 Users, page 210 Configuring Guest User Accounts Information About Creating Guest Accounts The controller can provide guest user access on WLANs. The first step in creating guest user accounts is to create a lobby administrator user, also known as a lobby ambassador account. Once this account has been created, a lobby ambassador can create and manage guest user accounts on the controller. The lobby ambassador has limited configuration privileges and access only to the web pages used to manage the guest accounts. The lobby ambassador can specify the amount of time that the guest user accounts remain active. After the specified time elapses, the guest user accounts expire automatically. Restrictions for Managing User Accounts The local user database is limited to a maximum of 2048 entries, which is also the default value. This database is shared by local management users (including lobby ambassadors), local network users (including guest users), MAC filter entries, exclusion list entries, and access point authorization list entries. Together they cannot exceed the configured maximum value. Creating a Lobby Ambassador Account Creating a Lobby Ambassador Account (GUI) Step 1 Choose Management > Local Management Users to open the Local Management Users page. This page lists the names and access privileges of the local management users. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 205 Configuring Guest User Accounts Note If you want to delete any of the user accounts from the controller, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow and choose Remove. However, deleting the default administrative user prohibits both GUI and CLI access to the controller. Therefore, you must create a user with administrative privileges (ReadWrite) before you remove the default user. Click New to create a lobby ambassador account. The Local Management Users > New page appears. In the User Name text box, enter a username for the lobby ambassador account. Note Management usernames must be unique because they are stored in a single database. In the Password and Confirm Password text boxes, enter a password for the lobby ambassador account. Note Passwords are case sensitive. The settings for the management User Details parameters depends on the settings that you make in the Password Policy page. The following requirements are enforced on the password Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 The password should contain characters from at least three of the following classes: lowercase letters, uppercase letters, digits, and special characters. No character in the password can be repeated more than three times consecutively. The password should not contain a management username or the reverse letters of a username. The password should not contain words like Cisco, oscic, admin, nimda, or any variant obtained by changing the capitalization of letters by substituting 1, |, or ! or substituting 0 for o or substituting $ for s. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose LobbyAdmin from the User Access Mode drop-down list. This option enables the lobby ambassador to create guest user accounts. Note The ReadOnly option creates an account with read-only privileges, and the ReadWrite option creates an administrative account with both read and write privileges. Click Apply to commit your changes. The new lobby ambassador account appears in the list of local management users. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Creating a Lobby Ambassador Account (CLI) To create a lobby ambassador account use the following command:

config mgmtuser add lobbyadmin_username lobbyadmin_pwd lobby-admin Note Replacing lobby-admin with read-only creates an account with read-only privileges. Replacing lobby-admin with read-write creates an administrative account with both read and write privileges. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 206 OL-28744-01 Configuring Guest User Accounts Creating Guest User Accounts as a Lobby Ambassador (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Log into the controller as the lobby ambassador, using the username and password. The Lobby Ambassador Guest Management > Guest Users List page appears. Click New to create a guest user account. The Lobby Ambassador Guest Management > Guest Users List > New page appears. In the User Name text box, enter a name for the guest user. You can enter up to 24 characters. Perform one of the following:

If you want to generate an automatic password for this guest user, select the Generate Password check box. The generated password is entered automatically in the Password and Confirm Password text boxes. If you want to create a password for this guest user, leave the Generate Password check box unselected and enter a password in both the Password and Confirm Password text boxes. Note Passwords can contain up to 24 characters and are case sensitive. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 From the Lifetime drop-down lists, choose the amount of time (in days, hours, minutes, and seconds) that this guest user account is to remain active. A value of zero (0) for all four text boxes creates a permanent account. Default: 1 day Range: 5 minutes to 30 days Note The smaller of this value or the session timeout for the guest WLAN, which is the WLAN on which the guest account is created, takes precedence. For example, if a WLAN session timeout is due to expire in 30 minutes but the guest account lifetime has 10 minutes remaining, the account is deleted in 10 minutes upon guest account expiry. Similarly, if the WLAN session timeout expires before the guest account lifetime, the client experiences a recurring session timeout that requires reauthentication. You can change a guest user account with a nonzero lifetime to another lifetime value at any time while the account is active. However, to make a guest user account permanent using the controller GUI, you must delete the account and create it again. If desired, you can use the config netuser lifetime user_name 0 command to make a guest user account permanent without deleting and recreating it. Note From the WLAN SSID drop-down list, choose the SSID that will be used by the guest user. The only WLANs that are listed are those WLANs for which Layer 3 web authentication has been configured. Note We recommend that you create a specific guest WLAN to prevent any potential conflicts. If a guest account expires and it has a name conflict with an account on the RADIUS server and both are on the same WLAN, the users associated with both accounts are disassociated before the guest account is deleted. In the Description text box, enter a description of the guest user account. You can enter up to 32 characters. Click Apply to commit your changes. The new guest user account appears in the list of guest users on the Guest Users List page. From this page, you can see all of the guest user accounts, their WLAN SSID, and their lifetime. You can also edit or remove a guest user account. When you remove a guest user account, all of the clients that are using the guest WLAN and are logged in using that accounts username are deleted. Repeat this procedure to create any additional guest user accounts. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 207 Configuring Administrator Usernames and Passwords Viewing Guest User Accounts Viewing the Guest Accounts (GUI) To view guest user accounts using the controller GUI, choose Security > AAA > Local Net Users. The Local Net Users page appears. From this page, you can see all of the local net user accounts (including guest user accounts) and can edit or remove them as desired. When you remove a guest user account, all of the clients that are using the guest WLAN and are logged in using that accounts username are deleted. Viewing the Guest Accounts (CLI) To see all of the local net user accounts (including guest user accounts) using the controller CLI, enter this command:

show netuser summary Configuring Administrator Usernames and Passwords Information About Configuring Administrator Usernames and Passwords You can configure administrator usernames and passwords to prevent unauthorized users from reconfiguring the controller and viewing configuration information. This section provides instructions for initial configuration and for password recovery. Configuring Usernames and Passwords (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Management > Local Management Users. Click New. Enter the username and password, and confirm the password. Usernames and passwords are case-sensitive and can contain up to 24 ASCII characters. Usernames and passwords cannot contain spaces. Step 4 Choose the User Access Mode as one of the following:

ReadOnly ReadWrite LobbyAdmin Step 5 Click Apply. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 208 OL-28744-01 Configuring Administrator Usernames and Passwords Configuring Usernames and Passwords (CLI) Step 1 Configure a username and password by entering one of these commands:

config mgmtuser add username password read-writeCreates a username-password pair with read-write privileges. config mgmtuser add username password read-onlyCreates a username-password pair with read-only privileges. Usernames and passwords are case-sensitive and can contain up to 24 ASCII characters. Usernames and passwords cannot contain spaces. Note If you ever need to change the password for an existing username, enter the config mgmtuser password username new_password command. Step 2 List the configured users by entering this command:

show mgmtuser Restoring Passwords Before You Begin Ensure that you are accessing the controller CLI through the console port. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 After the controller boots up, enter Restore-Password at the User prompt. Note For security reasons, the text that you enter does not appear on the controller console. At the Enter User Name prompt, enter a new username. At the Enter Password prompt, enter a new password. At the Re-enter Password prompt, reenter the new password. The controller validates and stores your entries in the database. When the User prompt reappears, enter your new username. When the Password prompt appears, enter your new password. The controller logs you in with your new username and password. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 209 Changing the Default Values for SNMP v3 Users Changing the Default Values for SNMP v3 Users Information About Changing the Default Values for SNMP v3 Users The controller uses a default value of default for the username, authentication password, and privacy password for SNMP v3 users. Using these standard values presents a security risk. Therefore, Cisco strongly advises that you change these values. Note SNMP v3 is time sensitive. Ensure that you configure the correct time and time zone on your controller. Changing the SNMP v3 User Default Values (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Choose Management > SNMP > SNMP V3 Users to open the SNMP V3 Users page. If default appears in the User Name column, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired user and choose Remove to delete this SNMP v3 user. Click New to add a new SNMP v3 user. The SNMP V3 Users > New page appears. In the User Profile Name text box, enter a unique name. Do not enter default. Choose Read Only or Read Write from the Access Mode drop-down list to specify the access level for this user. The default value is Read Only. From the Authentication Protocol drop-down list, choose the desired authentication method: None, HMAC-MD5 (Hashed Message Authentication Coding-Message Digest 5), or HMAC-SHA (Hashed Message Authentication Coding-Secure Hashing Algorithm). The default value is HMAC-SHA. In the Auth Password and Confirm Auth Password text boxes, enter the shared secret key to be used for authentication. You must enter at least 12 characters that include both letters and numbers. From the Privacy Protocol drop-down list, choose the desired encryption method: None, CBC-DES (Cipher Block Chaining-Digital Encryption Standard), or CFB-AES-128 (Cipher Feedback Mode-Advanced Encryption Standard-128). The default value is CFB-AES-128. Note In order to configure CBC-DES or CFB-AES-128 encryption, you must have selected either HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA as the authentication protocol in Step 6. In the Priv Password and Confirm Priv Password text boxes, enter the shared secret key to be used for encryption. You must enter at least 12 characters that include both letters and numbers. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Reboot the controller so that the SNMP v3 user that you added takes effect. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 210 OL-28744-01 Changing the Default Values for SNMP v3 Users Changing the SNMP v3 User Default Values (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 See the current list of SNMP v3 users for this controller by entering this command:

show snmpv3user If default appears in the SNMP v3 User Name column, enter this command to delete this user:

config snmp v3user delete username The username parameter is the SNMP v3 username (in this case, default). Create a new SNMP v3 user by entering this command:

config snmp v3user create username {ro | rw} {none | hmacmd5 | hmacsha} {none | des | aescfb128} auth_key encrypt_key where username is the SNMP v3 username. ro is read-only mode and rw is read-write mode. none, hmacmd5, and hmacsha are the authentication protocol options. none, des, and aescfb128 are the privacy protocol options. auth_key is the authentication shared secret key. encrypt_key is the encryption shared secret key. Do not enter default for the username, auth_key, and encrypt_key parameters. Step 4 Step 5 Enter the save config command. Reboot the controller so that the SNMP v3 user that you added takes effect by entering reset system command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 211 Changing the Default Values for SNMP v3 Users Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 212 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 23 Managing Web Authentication Obtaining a Web Authentication Certificate, page 213 Web Authentication Process, page 215 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page, page 218 Using a Customized Web Authentication Login Page from an External Web Server, page 224 Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page, page 225 Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN, page 229 Obtaining a Web Authentication Certificate Information About Web Authentication Certificates The operating system of the controller automatically generates a fully functional web authentication certificate, so you do not need to do anything in order to use certificates with Layer 3 web authentication. However, if desired, you can prompt the operating system to generate a new web authentication certificate, or you can download an externally generated SSL certificate. Obtaining a Web Authentication Certificate (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Security > Web Auth > Certificate to open the Web Authentication Certificate page. This page shows the details of the current web authentication certificate. If you want to use a new operating system-generated web authentication certificate, follow these steps:

a) Click Regenerate Certificate. The operating system generates a new web authentication certificate, and a successfully generated web authentication certificate message appears. b) Reboot the controller to register the new certificate. If you prefer to use an externally generated web authentication certificate, follow these steps:

a) Verify that the controller can ping the TFTP server. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 213 Obtaining a Web Authentication Certificate b) Select the Download SSL Certificate check box. c) In the Server IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the TFTP server. The default values of 10 retries and 6 seconds for the Maximum Retries and Timeout text boxes should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. d) Enter the maximum number of times that each download can be attempted in the Maximum Retries text box and the amount of time (in seconds) allowed for each download in the Timeout text box. In the Certificate File Name text box, enter the name of the certificate (certname.pem). e) In the Certificate File Path text box, enter the directory path of the certificate. f) g) In the Certificate Password text box, enter the password for the certificate. h) Click Apply to commit your changes. The operating system downloads the new certificate from the TFTP server. i) Reboot the controller to register the new certificate. Obtaining a Web Authentication Certificate (CLI) Step 1 See the current web authentication certificate by entering this command:

show certificate summary Information similar to the following appears:

Web Administration Certificate................... Locally Generated Web Authentication Certificate................... Locally Generated Certificate compatibility mode:............... off Step 2 Step 3 If you want the operating system to generate a new web authentication certificate, follow these steps:

a) To generate the new certificate, enter this command:

config certificate generate webauth b) To reboot the controller to register the new certificate, enter this command:

reset system If you prefer to use an externally generated web authentication certificate, follow these steps:

Note We recommend that the Common Name (CN) of the externally generated web authentication certificate be 1.1.1.1 (or the equivalent virtual interface IP address) in order for the clients browser to match the domains of the web authentication URL and the web authentication certificate. 1 Specify the name, path, and type of certificate to be downloaded by entering these commands:

transfer download mode tftp transfer download datatype webauthcert transfer download serverip server_ip_address transfer download path server_path_to_file transfer download filename certname.pem transfer download certpassword password Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 214 OL-28744-01 Web Authentication Process transfer download tftpMaxRetries retries transfer download tftpPktTimeout timeout Note The default values of 10 retries and a 6-second timeout should work correctly without any adjustment. However, you can change these values. To do so, enter the maximum number of times that each download can be attempted for the retries parameter and the amount of time (in seconds) allowed for each download for the timeout parameter. 2 Start the download process by entering this command:

transfer download start 3 Reboot the controller to register the new certificate by entering this command:

reset system Web Authentication Process Web authentication is a Layer 3 security feature that causes the controller to not allow IP traffic (except DHCP-related packets) from a particular client until that client has correctly supplied a valid username and password. When you use web authentication to authenticate clients, you must define a username and password for each client. When the clients attempt to join the wireless LAN, their users must enter the username and password when prompted by a login page. Note If a client uses more than 20 DNS resolved addresses, the controller overwrites the 21st address in the first address space in the Mobile Station Control Block (MSCB) table, but the first address is still retained in the client. If the client again tries to use the first address, it will not be reachable because the controller does not have this address in the list of allowed addresses for the client's MSCB table. Note One-Time Passwords (OTP) are not supported on web authentication. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 215 Web Authentication Process Disabling Security Alert for Web Authentication Process When web authentication is enabled (under Layer 3 Security), users might receive a web-browser security alert the first time that they attempt to access a URL. Figure 19: Typical Web-Browser Security Alert Note When clients connect to a WebAuth SSID with preauthorization ACL configured to allow VPN users, the clients will get disconnected from the SSID every few minutes. Webauth SSIDs must not connect without authenticating on the web page. After the user clicks Yes to proceed (or if the clients browser does not display a security alert), the web authentication system redirects the client to a login page. Click View Certificate on the Security Alert page. Click Install Certificate. When the Certificate Import Wizard appears, click Next. Choose Place all certificates in the following store and click Browse. Choose Place all certificates in the following store and click Browse. Expand the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder and choose Local Computer. Click OK. Click Next > Finish. When the The import was successful message appears, click OK. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 216 Web Authentication Process Because the issuer text box is blank on the controller self-signed certificate, open Internet Explorer, choose Tools >

Internet Options > Advanced, unselect the Warn about Invalid Site Certificates check box under Security, and click OK. Step 10 Reboot the PC. On the next web authentication attempt, the login page appears. The following figure shows the default web authentication login page. Figure 20: Default Web Authentication Login Page The default login page contains a Cisco logo and Cisco-specific text. You can choose to have the web authentication system display one of the following:

The default login page A modified version of the default login page A customized login page that you configure on an external web server A customized login page that you download to the controller The Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page section provides instructions for choosing how the web authentication login page appears. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 217 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page When the user enters a valid username and password on the web authentication login page and clicks Submit, the web authentication system displays a successful login page and redirects the authenticated client to the requested URL. Figure 21: Successful Login Page The default successful login page contains a pointer to a virtual gateway address URL in the https://<IP address>/logout.html format. The IP address that you set for the controller virtual interface serves as the redirect address for the login page Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page Information About Default Web Authentication Login Page If you are using a custom web-auth bundle that is served by the internal controller web server, the page should not contain more than 5 elements (including HTML, CSS, and Images). This is because the internal controller web server implements a DoS protection mechanism that limits each client to open a maximum of 5 (five) concurrent TCP connections depending on the load. Some browsers may try to open more than 5 TCP sessions at the same time (For example Firefox 4) if the page contains more elements and this may result in the page loading slowly depending on how the browser handles the DoS protection. If you do not want users to connect to a web page using a browser that is configured with SSLv2 only, you can disable SSLv2 for web authentication by entering the config network secureweb cipher-option sslv2 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 218 OL-28744-01 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page disable command. If you enter this command, users must use a browser that is configured to use a more secure protocol such as SSLv3 or later releases. The default value is disabled. Note Cisco TAC is not responsible for creating a custom webauth bundle. If you have a complex custom web authentication module, it is recommended that you use an external web-auth config on the controller, where the full login page is hosted at an external web server. Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose Security > Web Auth > Web Login Page to open the Web Login page. From the Web Authentication Type drop-down list, choose Internal (Default). If you want to use the default web authentication login page as is, go to Step 8. If you want to modify the default login page, go to Step 4. If you want to hide the Cisco logo that appears in the top right corner of the default page, choose the Cisco Logo Hide option. Otherwise, click the Show option. If you want the user to be directed to a particular URL (such as the URL for your company) after login, enter the desired URL in the Redirect URL After Login text box. You can enter up to 254 characters. Note The controller supports web authentication redirects only to HTTP (HTTP over TCP) servers. It does not support web authentication redirects to HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) servers. If you want to create your own headline on the login page, enter the desired text in the Headline text box. You can enter up to 127 characters. The default headline is Welcome to the Cisco wireless network. If you want to create your own message on the login page, enter the desired text in the Message text box. You can enter up to 2047 characters. The default message is Cisco is pleased to provide the Wireless LAN infrastructure for your network. Please login and put your air space to work. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Preview to view the web authentication login page. If you are satisfied with the content and appearance of the login page, click Save Configuration to save your changes. Otherwise, repeat any of the previous steps as necessary to achieve your desired results. Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Specify the default web authentication type by entering this command:

config custom-web webauth_type internal If you want to use the default web authentication login page as is, go to Step 7. If you want to modify the default login page, go to Step 3. To show or hide the Cisco logo that appears in the top right corner of the default login page, enter this command:

config custom-web weblogo {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 219 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 If you want the user to be directed to a particular URL (such as the URL for your company) after login, enter this command:

config custom-web redirecturl url You can enter up to 130 characters for the URL. To change the redirect back to the default setting, enter the clear redirecturl command. Note The controller supports web authentication redirects only to HTTP (HTTP over TCP) servers. It does not support web authentication redirects to HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) servers. If you want to create your own headline on the login page, enter this command:

config custom-web webtitle title You can enter up to 130 characters. The default headline is Welcome to the Cisco wireless network. To reset the headline to the default setting, enter the clear webtitle command. If you want to create your own message on the login page, enter this command:

config custom-web webmessage message You can enter up to 130 characters. The default message is Cisco is pleased to provide the Wireless LAN infrastructure for your network. Please login and put your air space to work. To reset the message to the default setting, enter the clear webmessage command. To enable or disable the web authentication logout popup window, enter this command:

config custom-web logout-popup {enable | disable}

Enter the save config command to save your settings. Import your own logo into the web authentication login page as follows:

1 Make sure that you have a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server available for the file download. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP server:

If you are downloading through the service port, the TFTP server must be on the same subnet as the service port because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. If you are downloading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable. A third-party TFTP server cannot run on the same computer as the Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP server and the third-party TFTP server require the same communication port. 2 Ensure that the controller can contact the TFTP server by entering this command:

ping ip-address 3 Copy the logo file (in .jpg, .gif, or .png format) to the default directory on your TFTP server. The maximum file size is 30 kilobits. For an optimal fit, the logo should be approximately 180 pixels wide and 360 pixels high. 4 Specify the download mode by entering this command:

transfer download mode tftp 5 Specify the type of file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download datatype image 6 Specify the IP address of the TFTP server by entering this command:

transfer download serverip tftp-server-ip-address Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 220 OL-28744-01 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page Note Some TFTP servers require only a forward slash (/) as the TFTP server IP address, and the TFTP server automatically determines the path to the correct directory. 7 Specify the download path by entering this command:

transfer download path absolute-tftp-server-path-to-file 8 Specify the file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download filename {filename.jpg | filename.gif | filename.png}

9 View your updated settings and answer y to the prompt to confirm the current download settings and start the download by entering this command:

transfer download start 10 Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Note If you ever want to remove this logo from the web authentication login page, enter the clear webimage command. Step 10 Follow the instructions in the Verifying the Web Authentication Login Page Settings (CLI), on page 228 section to verify your settings. Example: Creating a Customized Web Authentication Login Page This section provides information on creating a customized web authentication login page, which can then be accessed from an external web server. Here is a web authentication login page template. It can be used as a model when creating your own customized page:

<html>

<head>

<meta http-equiv="Pragma" content="no-cache">

<meta HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">

<title>Web Authentication</title>

<script>

function submitAction(){

var link = document.location.href;

var searchString = "redirect=";

var equalIndex = link.indexOf(searchString);

var redirectUrl = "";

if (document.forms[0].action == "") {

var url = window.location.href;

var args = new Object();

var query = location.search.substring(1);

var pairs = query.split("&");

for(var i=0;i<pairs.length;i++){

var pos = pairs[i].indexOf('=');

if(pos == -1) continue;

var argname = pairs[i].substring(0,pos);

var value = pairs[i].substring(pos+1);

args[argname] = unescape(value);

}

document.forms[0].action = args.switch_url;

}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 221 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page if(equalIndex >= 0) {

equalIndex += searchString.length;

redirectUrl = "";

redirectUrl += link.substring(equalIndex);

}

if(redirectUrl.length > 255) redirectUrl = redirectUrl.substring(0,255);

document.forms[0].redirect_url.value = redirectUrl;

document.forms[0].buttonClicked.value = 4;

document.forms[0].submit();

}

function loadAction(){

var url = window.location.href;

var args = new Object();

var query = location.search.substring(1);

var pairs = query.split("&");

for(var i=0;i<pairs.length;i++){

var pos = pairs[i].indexOf('=');

if(pos == -1) continue;

var argname = pairs[i].substring(0,pos);

var value = pairs[i].substring(pos+1);

args[argname] = unescape(value);

//alert( "AP MAC Address is " + args.ap_mac);

}

//alert( "The Switch URL to post user credentials is " + args.switch_url);

document.forms[0].action = args.switch_url;

// This is the status code returned from webauth login action

// Any value of status code from 1 to 5 is error condition and user

// should be shown error as below or modify the message as it suits

// the customer if(args.statusCode == 1){

}

else if(args.statusCode == 2){

alert("You are already logged in. No further action is required on your part.");

alert("You are not configured to authenticate against web portal. No further action alert("The username specified cannot be used at this time. Perhaps the username is is required on your part.");

}

else if(args.statusCode == 3){

already logged into the system?");

}

else if(args.statusCode == 4){

}

else if(args.statusCode == 5){

}

else if(args.statusCode == 6){

}

alert("The User has been excluded. Please contact the administrator.");

alert("Invalid username and password. Please try again.");

alert("Invalid email address format. Please try again.");

}

</script>

</head>

<body topmargin="50" marginheight="50" onload="loadAction();">

<form method="post" action="https://209.165.200.225/login.html">

<input TYPE="hidden" NAME="buttonClicked" SIZE="16" MAXLENGTH="15" value="0">

<input TYPE="hidden" NAME="redirect_url" SIZE="255" MAXLENGTH="255" VALUE="">

<input TYPE="hidden" NAME="err_flag" SIZE="16" MAXLENGTH="15" value="0">

<div align="center">

<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">

<tr> <td>&nbsp;</td></tr>

<tr align="center"> <td colspan="2"><font size="10" color="#336699">Web Authentication</font></td></tr>

<tr align="center">

<td colspan="2"> User Name &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<input type="TEXT" name="username" SIZE="25"

MAXLENGTH="63" VALUE="">

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 222 OL-28744-01 Choosing the Default Web Authentication Login Page

</td>

</tr>

<tr align="center" >

<td colspan="2"> Password &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<input type="Password" name="password"

SIZE="25" MAXLENGTH="24">

</td>

</tr>

<tr align="center">

<td colspan="2"><input type="button" name="Submit" value="Submit" class="button"

onclick="submitAction();">

</td>

</tr>

</table>

</div>

</form>

</body>

</html>

These parameters are added to the URL when the users Internet browser is redirected to the customized login page:

ap_macThe MAC address of the access point to which the wireless user is associated. switch_urlThe URL of the controller to which the user credentials should be posted. redirectThe URL to which the user is redirected after authentication is successful. statusCodeThe status code returned from the controllers web authentication server. wlanThe WLAN SSID to which the wireless user is associated. The available status codes are as follows:

Status Code 1: You are already logged in. No further action is required on your part. Status Code 2: You are not configured to authenticate against web portal. No further action is required on your part. Status Code 3: The username specified cannot be used at this time. Perhaps the username is already logged into the system?

Status Code 4: You have been excluded. Status Code 5: The User Name and Password combination you have entered is invalid. Please try again. Note For additional information, see the External Web Authentication with Wireless LAN Controllers Configuration Example at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/

tk722/tk809/technologies_configuration_example09186a008076f974.shtml OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 223 Using a Customized Web Authentication Login Page from an External Web Server Example: Modified Default Web Authentication Login Page Example This figure shows an example of a modified default web authentication login page. Figure 22: Modified Default Web Authentication Login Page Example These CLI commands were used to create this login page:

config custom-web weblogo disable config custom-web webtitle Welcome to the AcompanyBC Wireless LAN!

config custom-web webmessage Contact the System Administrator for a Username and Password. transfer download start config custom-web redirecturl url Using a Customized Web Authentication Login Page from an External Web Server Information About Customized Web Authentication Login Page You can customize the web authentication login page to redirect to an external web server. When you enable this feature, the user is directed to your customized login page on the external web server. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 224 OL-28744-01 Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page You must configure a preauthentication access control list (ACL) on the WLAN for the external web server and then choose this ACL as the WLAN preauthentication ACL under Security Policies > Web Policy on the WLANs > Edit page. Choosing a Customized Web Authentication Login Page from an External Web Server (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Security > Web Auth > Web Login Page to open the Web Login page. From the Web Authentication Type drop-down list, choose External (Redirect to external server). In the Redirect URL after login text box, enter the URL that you want the user to be redirected after a login. For example, you may enter your company's URL here and the users will be directed to that URL after login. The maximum length is 254 characters. By default, the user is redirected to the URL that was entered in the user's browser before the login page was served. of the customized web authentication login page on your web server. You can enter up to 252 characters. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 In the External Webauth URL text box, enter the URL that is to be used for external web authentication. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Choosing a Customized Web Authentication Login Page from an External Web Server (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Specify the web authentication type by entering this command:

config custom-web webauth_type external Specify the URL of the customized web authentication login page on your web server by entering this command:

config custom-web ext-webauth-url url You can enter up to 252 characters for the URL. Specify the IP address of your web server by entering this command:

config custom-web ext-webserver {add | delete} server_IP_address Enter the save config command to save your settings. Follow the instructions in the Verifying the Web Authentication Login Page Settings (CLI), on page 228 section to verify your settings. Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page You can compress the page and image files used for displaying a web authentication login page into a.tar file for download to a controller. These files are known as the webauth bundle. The maximum allowed size of the files in their uncompressed state is 1 MB. When the .tar file is downloaded from a local TFTP server, it enters the controllers file system as an untarred file. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 225 Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page You can download a login page example from Cisco Prime Infrastructure and use it as a starting point for your customized login page. For more information, see the Cisco Prime Infrastructure documentation. Note If you load a webauth bundle with a .tar compression application that is not GNU compliant, the controller cannot extract the files in the bundle and the following error messages appear: Extracting error and TFTP transfer failed. Therefore, we recommend that you use an application that complies with GNU standards, such as PicoZip, to compress the .tar file for the webauth bundle. Note Configuration backups do not include extra files or components, such as the webauth bundle or external licenses, that you download and store on your controller, so you should manually save external backup copies of those files or components. Note If the customized webauth bundle has more than 3 separated elements, we advise you to use an external server to prevent page load issues that may be caused because of TCP rate-limiting policy on the controller. Prerequisites for Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page Name the login page login.html. The controller prepares the web authentication URL based on this name. If the server does not find this file after the webauth bundle has been untarred, the bundle is discarded, and an error message appears. Include input text boxes for both a username and password. Retain the redirect URL as a hidden input item after extracting from the original URL. Extract and set the action URL in the page from the original URL. Include scripts to decode the return status code. Make sure that all paths used in the main page (to refer to images, for example). Ensure that no filenames within the bundle are greater than 30 characters. Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Copy the .tar file containing your login page to the default directory on your server. Choose Commands > Download File to open the Download File to Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Webauth Bundle. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 226 OL-28744-01 Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page SFTP (available in the 7.4 and later releases) Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. If you are using a TFTP server, enter the maximum number of times the controller should attempt to download the .tar file in the Maximum Retries text box. The range is 1 to 254. The default is 10. If you are using a TFTP server, enter the amount of time in seconds before the controller times out while attempting to download the *.tar file in the Timeout text box. The range is 1 to 254 seconds. The default is 6 seconds. In the File Path text box, enter the path of the .tar file to be downloaded. The default value is /. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the .tar file to be downloaded. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

1 In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. 2 In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. 3 In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Click Download to download the .tar file to the controller. Choose Security > Web Auth > Web Login Page to open the Web Login page. From the Web Authentication Type drop-down list, choose Customized (Downloaded). Click Apply. Click Preview to view your customized web authentication login page. If you are satisfied with the content and appearance of the login page, click Save Configuration. Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Copy the .tar file containing your login page to the default directory on your server. Specify the download mode by entering this command:

transfer download mode {tftp | ftp | sftp Specify the type of file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download datatype webauthbundle Specify the IP address of the TFTP server by entering this command:

transfer download serverip tftp-server-ip-address. Note Some TFTP servers require only a forward slash (/) as the TFTP server IP address, and the TFTP server automatically determines the path to the correct directory. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 227 Downloading a Customized Web Authentication Login Page Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Specify the download path by entering this command:

transfer download path absolute-tftp-server-path-to-file Specify the file to be downloaded by entering this command:

transfer download filename filename.tar View your updated settings and answer y to the prompt to confirm the current download settings and start the download by entering this command:

transfer download start Specify the web authentication type by entering this command:

config custom-web webauth_type customized Step 9 Enter the save config command to save your settings. Example: Customized Web Authentication Login Page This figure shows an example of a customized web authentication login page. Figure 23: Customized Web Authentication Login Page Example Verifying the Web Authentication Login Page Settings (CLI) Verify your changes to the web authentication login page by entering this command:

show custom-web Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 228 OL-28744-01 Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN Information About Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN You can display different web authentication login, login failure, and logout pages to users per WLAN. This feature enables user-specific web authentication pages to be displayed for a variety of network users, such as guest users or employees within different departments of an organization. Different login pages are available for all web authentication types (internal, external, and customized). However, different login failure and logout pages can be specified only when you choose customized as the web authentication type. Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN to which you want to assign a web login, login failure, or logout page. Choose Security > Layer 3. Make sure that Web Policy and Authentication are selected. To override the global authentication configuration web authentication pages, select the Override Global Config check box. When the Web Auth Type drop-down list appears, choose one of the following options to define the web authentication pages for wireless guest users:

InternalDisplays the default web login page for the controller. This is the default value. CustomizedDisplays custom web login, login failure, and logout pages. If you choose this option, three separate drop-down lists appear for login, login failure, and logout page selection. You do not need to define a customized page for all three options. Choose None from the appropriate drop-down list if you do not want to display a customized page for that option. Note These optional login, login failure, and logout pages are downloaded to the controller as webauth.tar files. ExternalRedirects users to an external server for authentication. If you choose this option, you must also enter the URL of the external server in the URL text box. You can choose specific RADIUS or LDAP servers to provide external authentication on the WLANs > Edit

(Security > AAA Servers) page. Additionally, you can define the priority in which the servers provide authentication. Step 7 Step 8 If you chose External as the web authentication type in Step 6, choose AAA Servers and choose up to three RADIUS and LDAP servers using the drop-down lists. Note The RADIUS and LDAP external servers must already be configured in order to be selectable options on the WLANs > Edit (Security > AAA Servers) page. You can configure these servers on the RADIUS Authentication Servers page and LDAP Servers page. Establish the priority in which the servers are contacted to perform web authentication as follows:

Note The default order is local, RADIUS, LDAP. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 229 Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN 1 Highlight the server type (local, RADIUS, or LDAP) that you want to be contacted first in the box next to the Up and Down buttons. 2 Click Up and Down until the desired server type is at the top of the box. 3 Click the < arrow to move the server type to the priority box on the left. 4 Repeat these steps to assign priority to the other servers. Step 9 Step 10 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Determine the ID number of the WLAN to which you want to assign a web login, login failure, or logout page by entering this command:

show wlan summary If you want wireless guest users to log into a customized web login, login failure, or logout page, enter these commands to specify the filename of the web authentication page and the WLAN for which it should display:

config wlan custom-web login-page page_name wlan_idDefines a customized login page for a given WLAN. config wlan custom-web loginfailure-page page_name wlan_idDefines a customized login failure page for a given WLAN. Note To use the controllers default login failure page, enter the config wlan custom-web loginfailure-page none wlan_id command. config wlan custom-web logout-page page_name wlan_idDefines a customized logout page for a given WLAN. To use the controllers default logout page, enter the config wlan custom-web logout-page none wlan_id Note command. Step 3 Step 4 Redirect wireless guess users to an external server before accessing the web login page by entering this command to specify the URL of the external server:

config wlan custom-web ext-webauth-url ext_web_url wlan_id Define the order in which web authentication servers are contacted by entering this command:

config wlan security web-auth server-precedence wlan_id {local | ldap | radius} {local | ldap | radius} {local | ldap

| radius}

The default order of server web authentication is local, RADIUS and LDAP. Note All external servers must be preconfigured on the controller. You can configure them on the RADIUS Authentication Servers page and the LDAP Servers page. Step 5 Define which web authentication page displays for a wireless guest user by entering this command:

config wlan custom-web webauth-type {internal | customized | external} wlan_id where Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 230 OL-28744-01 Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN internal displays the default web login page for the controller. This is the default value. customized displays the custom web login page that was configured in Step 2. Note You do not need to define the web authentication type in Step 5 for the login failure and logout pages as they are always customized. external redirects users to the URL that was configured in Step 3. Step 6 Use a WLAN-specific custom web configuration rather than a global custom web configuration by entering this command:

config wlan custom-web global disable wlan_id Note If you enter the config wlan custom-web global enable wlan_id command, the custom web authentication configuration at the global level is used. Step 7 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 231 Assigning Login, Login Failure, and Logout Pages per WLAN Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 232 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 24 Configuring Wired Guest Access Information About Wired Guest Access, page 233 Prerequisites for Configuring Wired Guest Access, page 234 Restrictions for Configuring Wired Guest Access, page 234 Configuring Wired Guest Access (GUI), page 235 Configuring Wired Guest Access (CLI), page 236 Supporting IPv6 Client Guest Access, page 238 Information About Wired Guest Access Wired guest access enables guest users to connect to the guest access network from a wired Ethernet connection designated and configured for guest access. Wired guest access ports might be available in a guest office or through specific ports in a conference room. Like wireless guest user accounts, wired guest access ports are added to the network using the lobby ambassador feature. Wired guest access can be configured in a standalone configuration or in a dual-controller configuration that uses both an anchor controller and a foreign controller. This latter configuration is used to further isolate wired guest access traffic but is not required for deployment of wired guest access. Wired guest access ports initially terminate on a Layer 2 access switch or switch port configured with VLAN interfaces for wired guest access traffic. The wired guest traffic is then trunked from the access switch to a controller. This controller is configured with an interface that is mapped to a wired guest access VLAN on the access switch. Note Although wired guest access is managed by anchor and foreign anchors when two controllers are deployed, mobility is not supported for wired guest access clients. In this case, DHCP and web authentication for the client are handled by the anchor controller. Note You can specify the amount of bandwidth allocated to a wired guest user in the network by configuring a QoS role and a bandwidth contract. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 233 Prerequisites for Configuring Wired Guest Access You can create a basic peer to peer WLAN ACL and apply it to the wired guest WLAN. This will not block peer to peer traffic and the guest users can still communicate with each other. Prerequisites for Configuring Wired Guest Access To configure wired guest access on a wireless network, you must perform the following:

1 Configure a dynamic interface (VLAN) for wired guest user access 2 Create a wired LAN for guest user access 3 Configure the controller 4 Configure the anchor controller (if terminating traffic on another controller) 5 Configure security for the guest LAN 6 Verify the configuration Restrictions for Configuring Wired Guest Access Wired guest access interfaces must be tagged. Wired guest access ports must be in the same Layer 2 network as the foreign controller. Up to five wired guest access LANs can be configured on a controller. Also in a wired guest access LAN, multiple anchors are supported. Layer 3 web authentication and web passthrough are supported for wired guest access clients. Layer 2 security is not supported. Do not trunk a wired guest VLAN to multiple foreign controllers, as it might produce unpredictable results. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 234 OL-28744-01 Configuring Wired Guest Access (GUI) Configuring Wired Guest Access (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 To create a dynamic interface for wired guest user access, choose Controller > Interfaces. The Interfaces page appears. Click New to open the Interfaces > New page. Enter a name and VLAN ID for the new interface. Click Apply to commit your changes. In the Port Number text box, enter a valid port number. You can enter a number between 0 and 25 (inclusive). Select the Guest LAN check box. Click Apply to commit your changes. To create a wired LAN for guest user access, choose WLANs. On the WLANs page, choose Create New from the drop-down list and click Go. The WLANs > New page appears. From the Type drop-down list, choose Guest LAN. In the Profile Name text box, enter a name that identifies the guest LAN. Do not use any spaces. From the WLAN ID drop-down list, choose the ID number for this guest LAN. Note You can create up to five guest LANs, so the WLAN ID options are 1 through 5 (inclusive). Click Apply to commit your changes. Select the Enabled check box for the Status parameter. Web authentication (Web-Auth) is the default security policy. If you want to change this to web passthrough, choose the Security tab after completing Step 16 and Step 17. From the Ingress Interface drop-down list, choose the VLAN that you created in Step 3. This VLAN provides a path between the wired guest client and the controller by way of the Layer 2 access switch. From the Egress Interface drop-down list, choose the name of the interface. This WLAN provides a path out of the controller for wired guest client traffic. If you want to change the authentication method (for example, from web authentication to web passthrough), choose Security > Layer 3. The WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 3) page appears. From the Layer 3 Security drop-down list, choose one of the following:

NoneLayer 3 security is disabled. Web AuthenticationCauses users to be prompted for a username and password when connecting to the wireless network. This is the default value. Web PassthroughAllows users to access the network without entering a username and password. Note There should not be a Layer 3 gateway on the guest wired VLAN, as this would bypass the web authentication done through the controller. Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 If you choose the Web Passthrough option, an Email Input check box appears. Select this check box if you want users to be prompted for their e-mail address when attempting to connect to the network. To override the global authentication configuration set on the Web Login page, select the Override Global Config check box. When the Web Auth Type drop-down list appears, choose one of the following options to define the web authentication pages for wired guest users:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 235 Configuring Wired Guest Access (CLI) InternalDisplays the default web login page for the controller. This is the default value. CustomizedDisplays custom web login, login failure, and logout pages. If you choose this option, three separate drop-down lists appear for login, login failure, and logout page selection. You do not need to define a customized page for all three options. Choose None from the appropriate drop-down list if you do not want to display a customized page for that option. Note These optional login, login failure, and logout pages are downloaded to the controller as webauth.tar files. ExternalRedirects users to an external server for authentication. If you choose this option, you must also enter the URL of the external server in the URL text box. You can choose specific RADIUS or LDAP servers to provide external authentication on the WLANs > Edit

(Security > AAA Servers) page. Additionally, you can define the priority in which the servers provide authentication. Step 23 Step 24 If you chose External as the web authentication type in Step 22, choose AAA Servers and choose up to three RADIUS and LDAP servers using the drop-down lists. Note The RADIUS and LDAP external servers must already be configured in order to be selectable options on the WLANs > Edit (Security > AAA Servers) page. You can configure these servers on the RADIUS Authentication Servers page and LDAP Servers page. To establish the priority in which the servers are contacted to perform web authentication as follows:

Note The default order is local, RADIUS, LDAP. 1 Highlight the server type (local, RADIUS, or LDAP) that you want to be contacted first in the box next to the Up and Down buttons. 2 Click Up and Down until the desired server type is at the top of the box. 3 Click the < arrow to move the server type to the priority box on the left. 4 Repeat these steps to assign priority to the other servers. Step 25 Step 26 Step 27 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Repeat this process if a second (anchor) controller is being used in the network. Configuring Wired Guest Access (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 236 Create a dynamic interface (VLAN) for wired guest user access by entering this command:

config interface create interface_name vlan_id If link aggregation trunk is not configured, enter this command to map a physical port to the interface:

config interface port interface_name primary_port {secondary_port}

Enable or disable the guest LAN VLAN by entering this command:

config interface guest-lan interface_name {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring Wired Guest Access (CLI) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 This VLAN is later associated with the ingress interface created in Step 5. Create a wired LAN for wired client traffic and associate it to an interface by entering this command:

config guest-lan create guest_lan_id interface_name The guest LAN ID must be a value between 1 and 5 (inclusive). Note To delete a wired guest LAN, enter the config guest-lan delete guest_lan_id command. Configure the wired guest VLANs ingress interface, which provides a path between the wired guest client and the controller by way of the Layer 2 access switch by entering this command:

config guest-lan ingress-interface guest_lan_id interface_name Configure an egress interface to transmit wired guest traffic out of the controller by entering this command:

config guest-lan interface guest_lan_id interface_name Note If the wired guest traffic is terminating on another controller, repeat Step 4 and Step 6 for the terminating (anchor) controller and Step 1 through Step 5 for the originating (foreign) controller. Additionally, configure the config mobility group anchor add {guest-lan guest_lan_id | wlan wlan_id} IP_address command for both controllers. Configure the security policy for the wired guest LAN by entering this command:

config guest-lan security {web-auth enable guest_lan_id | web-passthrough enable guest_lan_id}

Note Web authentication is the default setting. Enable or disable a wired guest LAN by entering this command:

config guest-lan {enable | disable} guest_lan_id If you want wired guest users to log into a customized web login, login failure, or logout page, enter these commands to specify the filename of the web authentication page and the guest LAN for which it should display:

config guest-lan custom-web login-page page_name guest_lan_idDefines a web login page. config guest-lan custom-web loginfailure-page page_name guest_lan_idDefines a web login failure page. Note To use the controllers default login failure page, enter the config guest-lan custom-web loginfailure-page none guest_lan_id command. config guest-lan custom-web logout-page page_name guest_lan_idDefines a web logout page. Note To use the controllers default logout page, enter the config guest-lan custom-web logout-page none guest_lan_id command. Step 10 Step 11 If you want wired guest users to be redirected to an external server before accessing the web login page, enter this command to specify the URL of the external server:

config guest-lan custom-web ext-webauth-url ext_web_url guest_lan_id If you want to define the order in which local (controller) or external (RADIUS, LDAP) web authentication servers are contacted, enter this command:

config wlan security web-auth server-precedence wlan_id {local | ldap | radius} {local | ldap | radius} {local | ldap

| radius}

The default order of server web authentication is local, RADIUS, LDAP. Note All external servers must be preconfigured on the controller. You can configure them on the RADIUS Authentication Servers page or the LDAP Servers page. Step 12 Define the web login page for wired guest users by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 237 Supporting IPv6 Client Guest Access config guest-lan custom-web webauth-type {internal | customized | external} guest_lan_id where internal displays the default web login page for the controller. This is the default value. customized displays the custom web pages (login, login failure, or logout) that were configured in Step 9. external redirects users to the URL that was configured in Step 10. Use a guest-LAN specific custom web configuration rather than a global custom web configuration by entering this command:

config guest-lan custom-web global disable guest_lan_id Note If you enter the config guest-lan custom-web global enable guest_lan_id command, the custom web authentication configuration at the global level is used. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Note Information on the configured web authentication appears in both the show run-config and show running-config commands. Display the customized web authentication settings for a specific guest LAN by entering this command:

show custom-web {all | guest-lan guest_lan_id}

Note If internal web authentication is configured, the Web Authentication Type displays as internal rather than external

(controller level) or customized (WLAN profile level). Display a summary of the local interfaces by entering this command:

show interface summary Note The interface name of the wired guest LAN in this example is wired-guest and its VLAN ID is 236. Display detailed interface information by entering this command:

show interface detailed interface_name Display the configuration of a specific wired guest LAN by entering this command:

show guest-lan guest_lan_id Note Enter the show guest-lan summary command to see all wired guest LANs configured on the controller. Display the active wired guest LAN clients by entering this command:

show client summary guest-lan Display detailed information for a specific client by entering this command:

show client detail client_mac Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Supporting IPv6 Client Guest Access The client is in WebAuth Required state until the client is authenticated. The controller intercepts both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic in this state and redirects it to the virtual IP address of the controller. Once authenticated, the user's MAC address is moved to the run state and both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic is allowed to pass. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 238 OL-28744-01 Supporting IPv6 Client Guest Access In order to support the redirection of IPv6-only clients, the controller automatically creates an IPv6 virtual address based on the IPv4 virtual address configured on the controller. The virtual IPv6 address follows the convention of [::ffff:<virtual IPv4 address>]. For example, a virtual IP address of 192.0.2.1 would translate into [::ffff:192.0.2.1]. For an IPv6 captive portal to be displayed, the user must request an IPv6 resolvable DNS entry such as ipv6.google.com which returns a DNSv6 (AAAA) record. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 239 Supporting IPv6 Client Guest Access Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 240 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 25 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs, page 241 System Messages, page 242 Viewing System Resources, page 245 Using the CLI to Troubleshoot Problems, page 246 Configuring System and Message Logging, page 247 Viewing Access Point Event Logs, page 254 Uploading Logs and Crash Files, page 255 Uploading Core Dumps from the Controller, page 257 Uploading Packet Capture Files, page 260 Monitoring Memory Leaks, page 263 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices, page 264 Using the Debug Facility, page 274 Configuring Wireless Sniffing, page 279 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH_old, page 281 Debugging the Access Point Monitor Service, page 283 Troubleshooting OfficeExtend Access Points, page 284 Interpreting LEDs Information About Interpreting LEDs This section describes how to interpret controller LEDs and lightweight access point LEDs. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 241 System Messages Interpreting Controller LEDs See the quick start guide for your specific controller for a description of the LED patterns. See the list of controllers and the respective documentation at http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/wireless/index.html. Interpreting Lightweight Access Point LEDs See the quick start guide or hardware installation guide for your specific access point for a description of the LED patterns. See the list of access points and the respective documentation at http://www.cisco.com/en/US/

products/hw/wireless/index.html. System Messages Information About System Messages This table lists some common system messages and their descriptions. For a complete list of system messages, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller System Message Guide, Release 7.0. Table 6: System Messages and Descriptions Error Message apf_utils.c 680: Received a CIF field without the protected bit set from mobile xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Description A client is sending an association request on a security-enabled WLAN with the protected bit set to 0 (in the Capability field of the association request). As designed, the controller rejects the association request, and the client sees an association failure. dtl_arp.c 480: Got an idle-timeout message from an unknown client xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx STATION_DISASSOCIATE The controllers network processing unit (NPU) sends a timeout message to the central processing unit (CPU) indicating that a particular client has timed out or aged out. This situation typically occurs when the CPU has removed a wireless client from its internal database but has not notified the NPU. Because the client remains in the NPU database, it ages out on the network processor and notifies the CPU. The CPU finds the client that is not present in its database and then sends this message. The client may have intentionally terminated usage or may have experienced a service disruption. STATION_DEAUTHENTICATE The client may have intentionally terminated usage or this message could indicate an authentication issue. STATION_AUTHENTICATION_FAIL Check disable, key mismatch, or other configuration issues. STATION_ASSOCIATE_FAIL Check load on the Cisco radio or signal quality issues. LRAD_ASSOCIATED The associated lightweight access point is now managed by this controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 242 OL-28744-01 System Messages Error Message LRAD_DISASSOCIATED LRAD_UP LRAD_DOWN LRADIF_UP LRADIF_DOWN Description The lightweight access point may have associated to a different controller or may have become completely unreachable. The lightweight access point is operational; no action required. The lightweight access point may have a problem or is administratively disabled. The Cisco radio is UP. The Cisco radio may have a problem or is administratively disabled. LRADIF_LOAD_PROFILE_FAILED The client density may have exceeded system capacity. LRADIF_NOISE_PROFILE_FAILED The non-802.11 noise has exceeded the configured threshold. LRADIF_INTERFERENCE_PROFILE_FAILED 802.11 interference has exceeded threshold on channel; check channel assignments. LRADIF_COVERAGE_PROFILE_FAILED A possible coverage hole has been detected. Check the lightweight access point history to see if it is a common problem and add lightweight access points if necessary. LRADIF_LOAD_PROFILE_PASSED The load is now within threshold limits. LRADIF_NOISE_PROFILE_PASSED The detected noise is now less than threshold. LRADIF_INTERFERENCE_PROFILE_PASSED The detected interference is now less than threshold. LRADIF_COVERAGE_PROFILE_PASSED The number of clients receiving a poor signal are within threshold. LRADIF_CURRENT_TXPOWER_CHANGED Informational message. LRADIF_CURRENT_CHANNEL_CHANGED Informational message. LRADIF_RTS_THRESHOLD_CHANGED Informational message. LRADIF_ED_THRESHOLD_CHANGED Informational message. LRADIF_FRAGMENTATION_THRESHOLD_ CHANGED Informational message. RRM_DOT11_A_GROUPING_DONE Informational message. RRM_DOT11_B_GROUPING_DONE Informational message. ROGUE_AP_DETECTED May be a security issue. Use maps and trends to investigate. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 243 System Messages Error Message ROGUE_AP_REMOVED Description A detected rogue access point has timed out. The unit might have shut down or moved out of the coverage area. AP_MAX_ROGUE_COUNT_EXCEEDED The current number of active rogue access points has exceeded system threshold. LINK_UP LINK_DOWN LINK_FAILURE Positive confirmation message. A port may have a problem or is administratively disabled. A port may have a problem or is administratively disabled. AUTHENTICATION_FAILURE An attempted security breech has occurred. Investigate. STP_NEWROOT Informational message. STP_TOPOLOGY_CHANGE Informational message. IPSEC_ESP_AUTH_FAILURE Check WLAN IPsec configuration. IPSEC_ESP_REPLAY_FAILURE Check for an attempt to spoof an IP address. IPSEC_ESP_POLICY_FAILURE Check for a IPsec configuration mismatch between WLAN and client. IPSEC_ESP_INVALID_SPI Informational message. IPSEC_OTHER_POLICY_FAILURE Check for a IPsec configuration mismatch between WLAN and client. IPSEC_IKE_NEG_FAILURE Check for a IPsec IKE configuration mismatch between WLAN and client. IPSEC_SUITE_NEG_FAILURE Check for a IPsec IKE configuration mismatch between WLAN and client. IPSEC_INVALID_COOKIE Informational message. RADIOS_EXCEEDED The maximum number of supported Cisco radios has been exceeded. Check for a controller failure in the same Layer 2 network or add another controller. SENSED_TEMPERATURE_HIGH Check fan, air conditioning, and/or other cooling arrangements. SENSED_TEMPERATURE_LOW Check room temperature and/or other reasons for low temperature. TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_FAILURE Replace temperature sensor as soon as possible. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 244 OL-28744-01 Viewing System Resources Error Message TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_CLEAR Description The temperature sensor is operational. POE_CONTROLLER_FAILURE Check ports; a possible serious failure has been detected. MAX_ROGUE_COUNT_EXCEEDED The current number of active rogue access points has exceeded system threshold. SWITCH_UP SWITCH_DOWN The controller is responding to SNMP polls. The controller is not responding to SNMP polls; check controller and SNMP settings. RADIUS_SERVERS_FAILED Check network connectivity between RADIUS and the controller. CONFIG_SAVED The running configuration has been saved to flash; it will be active after a reboot. MULTIPLE_USERS Another user with the same username has logged in. FAN_FAILURE Monitor controller temperature to avoid overheating. POWER_SUPPLY_CHANGE Check for a power-supply malfunction. COLD_START WARM_START The controller may have been rebooted. The controller may have been rebooted. Viewing System Resources Information About Viewing System Resources You can determine the amount of system resources being used by the controller. Specifically, you can view the current controller CPU usage, system buffers, and web server buffers. The Cisco 5500 Series Controllers have multiple CPUs, so you can view individual CPU usage. For each CPU, you can see the percentage of the CPU in use and the percentage of the CPU time spent at the interrupt level (for example, 0%/3%). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 245 Using the CLI to Troubleshoot Problems Viewing System Resources (GUI) On the controller GUI, choose Management > Tech Support > System Resource Information. The System Resource Information page appears. Figure 24: System Resource Information Page Viewing System Resources (CLI) On the controller CLI, enter these commands:

show cpu Where the first number is the CPU percentage that the controller spent on the user application and the second number is the CPU percentage that the controller spent on the OS services. show tech-support Using the CLI to Troubleshoot Problems If you experience any problems with your controller, you can use the commands in this section to gather information and debug issues. show process cpuShows how various tasks in the system are using the CPU at that instant in time. This command is helpful in understanding if any single task is monopolizing the CPU and preventing other tasks from being performed. The Priority field shows two values: 1) the original priority of the task that was created by the actual function call and 2) the priority of the task divided by a range of system priorities. The CPU Use field shows the CPU usage of a particular task. The Reaper field shows three values: 1) the amount of time for which the task is scheduled in user mode operation, 2) the amount of time for which the task is scheduled in system mode operation, and 3) whether the task is being watched by the reaper task monitor (indicated by a T). If the task is being watched Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 246 OL-28744-01 Configuring System and Message Logging by the reaper task monitor, this field also shows the timeout value (in seconds) before which the task needs to alert the task monitor. Note If you want to see the total CPU usage as a percentage, enter the show cpu command. show process memoryShows the allocation and deallocation of memory from various processes in the system at that instant in time. In the example above, the following fields provide information:

The Name field shows the tasks that the CPU is to perform. The Priority field shows two values: 1) the original priority of the task that was created by the actual function call and 2) the priority of the task divided by a range of system priorities. The BytesInUse field shows the actual number of bytes used by dynamic memory allocation for a particular task. The BlocksInUse field shows the chunks of memory that are assigned to perform a particular task. The Reaper field shows three values: 1) the amount of time for which the task is scheduled in user mode operation, 2) the amount of time for which the task is scheduled in system mode operation, and 3) whether the task is being watched by the reaper task monitor (indicated by a T). If the task is being watched by the reaper task monitor, this field also shows the timeout value (in seconds) before which the task needs to alert the task monitor. show tech-supportShows an array of information related to the state of the system, including the current configuration, last crash file, CPU utilization, and memory utilization. show run-configShows the complete configuration of the controller. To exclude access point configuration settings, use the show run-config no-ap command. Note If you want to see the passwords in clear text, enter the config passwd-cleartext enable command. To execute this command, you must enter an admin password. This command is valid only for this particular session. It is not saved following a reboot. show run-config commandsShows the list of configured commands on the controller. This command shows only values configured by the user. It does not show system-configured default values. Configuring System and Message Logging Information About System and Message Logging System logging allows controllers to log their system events to up to three remote syslog servers. The controller sends a copy of each syslog message as it is logged to each syslog server configured on the controller. Being able to send the syslog messages to multiple servers ensures that the messages are not lost due to the temporary unavailability of one syslog server. Message logging allows system messages to be logged to the controller buffer or console. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 247 Configuring System and Message Logging Configuring System and Message Logging (GUI) Step 1 Choose Management > Logs > Config. The Syslog Configuration page appears. Figure 25: Syslog Configuration Page Step 2 In the Syslog Server IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server to which to send the syslog messages and click Add. You can add up to three syslog servers to the controller. The list of syslog servers that have already been added to the controller appears below this text box. Note If you want to remove a syslog server from the controller, click Remove to the right of the desired server. Step 3 To set the severity level for filtering syslog messages to the syslog servers, choose one of the following options from the Syslog Level drop-down list:

Emergencies = Severity level 0 Alerts = Severity level 1 (default value) Critical = Severity level 2 Errors = Severity level 3 Warnings = Severity level 4 Notifications = Severity level 5 Informational = Severity level 6 Debugging = Severity level 7 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 248 OL-28744-01 Configuring System and Message Logging Step 4 If you set a syslog level, only those messages whose severity is equal to or less than that level are sent to the syslog servers. For example, if you set the syslog level to Warnings (severity level 4), only those messages whose severity is between 0 and 4 are sent to the syslog servers. To set the facility for outgoing syslog messages to the syslog servers, choose one of the following options from the Syslog Facility drop-down list :

Kernel = Facility level 0 User Process = Facility level 1 Mail = Facility level 2 System Daemons = Facility level 3 Authorization = Facility level 4 Syslog = Facility level 5 (default value) Line Printer = Facility level 6 USENET = Facility level 7 Unix-to-Unix Copy = Facility level 8 Cron = Facility level 9 FTP Daemon = Facility level 11 System Use 1 = Facility level 12 System Use 2 = Facility level 13 System Use 3 = Facility level 14 System Use 4 = Facility level 15 Local Use 0 = Facility level 16 Local Use 2 = Facility level 17 Local Use 3 = Facility level 18 Local Use 4 = Facility level 19 Local Use 5 = Facility level 20 Local Use 5 = Facility level 21 Local Use 5 = Facility level 22 Local Use 5 = Facility level 23 Step 5 Step 6 Click Apply. To set the severity level for logging messages to the controller buffer and console, choose one of the following options from both the Buffered Log Level and Console Log Level drop-down lists:

Emergencies = Severity level 0 Alerts = Severity level 1 Critical = Severity level 2 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 249 Configuring System and Message Logging Errors = Severity level 3 (default value) Warnings = Severity level 4 Notifications = Severity level 5 Informational = Severity level 6 Debugging = Severity level 7 Disable This option is available only for Console Log level. Select this option to disable console logging. If you set a logging level, only those messages whose severity is equal to or less than that level are logged by the controller. For example, if you set the logging level to Warnings (severity level 4), only those messages whose severity is between 0 and 4 are logged. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Select the File Info check box if you want the message logs to include information about the source file. The default value is enabled. Select the Trace Info check box if you want the message logs to include traceback information. The default is disabled. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Viewing Message Logs (GUI) To view message logs using the controller GUI, choose Management > Logs > Message Logs. The Message Logs page appears. Figure 26: Message Logs Page Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 250 OL-28744-01 Configuring System and Message Logging Note To clear the current message logs from the controller, click Clear. Configuring System and Message Logging (CLI) Step 1 Enable system logging and set the IP address of the syslog server to which to send the syslog messages by entering this command:

config logging syslog host server_IP_address You can add up to three syslog servers to the controller. Note To remove a syslog server from the controller by entering this command: config logging syslog host server_IP_address delete Step 2 Set the severity level for filtering syslog messages to the syslog server by entering this command:

config logging syslog level severity_level where severity_level is one of the following:

emergencies = Severity level 0 alerts = Severity level 1 critical = Severity level 2 errors = Severity level 3 warnings = Severity level 4 notifications = Severity level 5 informational = Severity level 6 debugging = Severity level 7 Note Note As an alternative, you can enter a number from 0 through 7 for the severity_level parameter. If you set a syslog level, only those messages whose severity is equal to or less than that level are sent to the syslog server. For example, if you set the syslog level to Warnings (severity level 4), only those messages whose severity is between 0 and 4 are sent to the syslog server. Set the severity level for filtering syslog messages for a particular access point or for all access points by entering this command:

config ap logging syslog level severity_level {Cisco_AP | all}

where severity_level is one of the following:

Step 3 emergencies = Severity level 0 alerts = Severity level 1 critical = Severity level 2 errors = Severity level 3 warnings = Severity level 4 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 251 Configuring System and Message Logging notifications = Severity level 5 informational = Severity level 6 debugging = Severity level 7 Note If you set a syslog level, only those messages whose severity is equal to or less than that level are sent to the access point. For example, if you set the syslog level to Warnings (severity level 4), only those messages whose severity is between 0 and 4 are sent to the access point. Step 4 Set the facility for outgoing syslog messages to the syslog server by entering this command:

config logging syslog facility facility_code where facility_code is one of the following:

authorization = Authorization system. Facility level = 4. auth-private = Authorization system (private). Facility level = 10. cron = Cron/at facility. Facility level = 9. daemon = System daemons. Facility level = 3. ftp = FTP daemon. Facility level = 11. kern = Kernel. Facility level = 0. local0 = Local use. Facility level = 16. local1 = Local use. Facility level = 17. local2 = Local use. Facility level = 18. local3 = Local use. Facility level = 19. local4 = Local use. Facility level = 20. local5 = Local use. Facility level = 21. local6 = Local use. Facility level = 22. local7 = Local use. Facility level = 23. lpr = Line printer system. Facility level = 6. mail = Mail system. Facility level = 2. news = USENET news. Facility level = 7. sys12 = System use. Facility level = 12. sys13 = System use. Facility level = 13. sys14 = System use. Facility level = 14. sys15 = System use. Facility level = 15. syslog = The syslog itself. Facility level = 5. user = User process. Facility level = 1. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 252 OL-28744-01 Configuring System and Message Logging uucp = Unix-to-Unix copy system. Facility level = 8. Step 5 Set the severity level for logging messages to the controller buffer and console, enter these commands:

config logging buffered severity_level config logging console severity_level where severity_level is one of the following:

emergencies = Severity level 0 alerts = Severity level 1 critical = Severity level 2 errors = Severity level 3 warnings = Severity level 4 notifications = Severity level 5 informational = Severity level 6 debugging = Severity level 7 Note As an alternative, you can enter a number from 0 through 7 for the severity_level parameter. Note If you set a logging level, only those messages whose severity is equal to or less than that level are logged by the controller. For example, if you set the logging level to Warnings (severity level 4), only those messages whose severity is between 0 and 4 are logged. Step 6 Save debug messages to the controller buffer, the controller console, or a syslog server by entering these commands:

config logging debug buffered {enable | disable}

config logging debug console {enable | disable}

config logging debug syslog {enable | disable}

By default, the console command is enabled, and the buffered and syslog commands are disabled. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 To cause the controller to include information about the source file in the message logs or to prevent the controller from displaying this information by entering this command:

config logging fileinfo {enable | disable}

The default value is enabled. Configure the controller to include process information in the message logs or to prevent the controller from displaying this information by entering this command:

config logging procinfo {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. Configure the controller to include traceback information in the message logs or to prevent the controller from displaying this information by entering this command:

config logging traceinfo {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 253 Viewing Access Point Event Logs Step 10 Enable or disable timestamps in log messages and debug messages by entering these commands:

config service timestamps log {datetime | disable}

config service timestamps debug {datetime | disable}

where datetime = Messages are timestamped with the standard date and time. This is the default value. disable = Messages are not timestamped. Step 11 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Viewing System and Message Logs (CLI) To see the logging parameters and buffer contents, enter this command:

show logging Viewing Access Point Event Logs Information About Access Point Event Logs Access points log all system messages (with a severity level greater than or equal to notifications) to the access point event log. The event log can contain up to 1024 lines of messages, with up to 128 characters per line. When the event log becomes filled, the oldest message is removed to accommodate a new event message. The event log is saved in a file on the access point flash, which ensures that it is saved through a reboot cycle. To minimize the number of writes to the access point flash, the contents of the event log are written to the event log file during normal reload and crash scenarios only. Viewing Access Point Event Logs (CLI) Use these CLI commands to view or clear the access point event log from the controller:

To see the contents of the event log file for an access point that is joined to the controller, enter this command:

show ap eventlog Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

AP event log download has been initiated Waiting for download to complete AP event log download completed.

======================= AP Event log Contents =====================

*Sep 22 11:44:00.573: %CAPWAP-5-CHANGED: CAPWAP changed state to IMAGE

*Sep 22 11:44:01.514: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Dot11Radio0, Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 254 OL-28744-01 Uploading Logs and Crash Files changed state to down

*Sep 22 11:44:01.519: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Dot11Radio1, changed state to down

*Sep 22 11:44:53.539: *** Access point reloading. Reason: NEW IMAGE DOWNLOAD ***

*Mar 1 00:00:39.078: %CAPWAP-3-ERRORLOG: Did not get log server settings from DHCP.

*Mar 1 00:00:42.142: %CDP_PD-4-POWER_OK: Full power - NEGOTIATED inline power source

*Mar 1 00:00:42.151: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Dot11Radio1, changed state to up

*Mar 1 00:00:42.158: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Dot11Radio0, changed state to up

*Mar 1 00:00:43.143: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Dot11Radio1, changed state to up

*Mar 1 00:00:43.151: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Dot11Radio0, changed state to up

*Mar 1 00:00:48.078: %CAPWAP-3-ERRORLOG: Could Not resolve CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER

*Mar 1 00:01:42.144: %CDP_PD-4-POWER_OK: Full power - NEGOTIATED inline power source

*Mar 1 00:01:48.121: %CAPWAP-3-CLIENTERRORLOG: Set Transport Address: no more AP manager IP addresses remain

*Mar 1 00:01:48.122: %CAPWAP-5-CHANGED: CAPWAP changed state to JOIN

*Mar 1 00:01:48.122: %LINK-5-CHANGED: Interface Dot11Radio0, changed state to administratively down

*Mar 1 00:01:48.122: %LINK-5-CHANGED: Interface Dot11Radio1, changed state to administratively down To delete the existing event log and create an empty event log file for a specific access point or for all access points joined to the controller, enter this command:

clear ap-eventlog {specific Cisco_AP | all}

Uploading Logs and Crash Files Prerequisites to Upload Logs and Crash Files Follow the instructions in this section to upload logs and crash files from the controller. However, before you begin, ensure you have a TFTP or FTP server available for the file upload. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP or FTP server:

If you are uploading through the service port, the TFTP or FTP server must be on the same subnet as the service port because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. If you are uploading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP or FTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable. A third-party TFTP or FTP server cannot run on the same computer as Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP or FTP server and the third-party TFTP or FTP server require the same communication port. Uploading Logs and Crash Files (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Command > Upload File. The Upload File from Controller page appears. From the File Type drop-down list, choose one of the following:

Event Log OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 255 Uploading Logs and Crash Files Message Log Trap Log Crash File Step 3 From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available in the 7.4 and later releases) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the log or crash file. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the log or crash file. If you chose FTP as the Transfer Mode, follow these steps:

1 In the Server Login Username text box, enter the FTP server login name. 2 In the Server Login Password text box, enter the FTP server login password. 3 In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number of the FTP server. The default value for the server port is 21. Step 8 Click Upload to upload the log or crash file from the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the upload. Uploading Logs and Crash Files (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 To transfer the file from the controller to a server, enter this command:

transfer upload mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

To specify the type of file to be uploaded, enter this command:

transfer upload datatype datatype where datatype is one of the following options:

crashfileUploads the systems crash file. errorlogUploads the systems error log. panic-crash-fileUploads the kernel panic information if a kernel panic occurs. systemtraceUploads the systems trace file. traplogUploads the systems trap log. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 256 OL-28744-01 Uploading Core Dumps from the Controller watchdog-crash-fileUploads the console dump resulting from a software-watchdog-initiated reboot of the controller following a crash. The software watchdog module periodically checks the integrity of the internal software and makes sure that the system does not stay in an inconsistent or nonoperational state for a long period of time. Step 3 To specify the path to the file, enter these commands:

transfer upload serverip server_ip_address transfer upload path server_path_to_file transfer upload filename filename Step 4 If you are using an FTP server, also enter these commands:

transfer upload username username transfer upload password password transfer upload port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 5 To see the updated settings, enter this command:

transfer upload start Step 6 When prompted to confirm the current settings and start the software upload, answer y. Uploading Core Dumps from the Controller Information About Uploading Core Dumps from the Controller To help troubleshoot controller crashes, you can configure the controller to automatically upload its core dump file to an FTP server after experiencing a crash. You cannot upload the core dump file directly to an FTP or TFTP server but you can upload a crash file to an FTP or TFTP server. The controllers save the core dump file to flash memory following a crash. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 257 Uploading Core Dumps from the Controller Configuring the Controller to Automatically Upload Core Dumps to an FTP Server (GUI) Step 1 Choose Management > Tech Support > Core Dump to open the Core Dump page. Figure 27: Core Dump Page Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 To enable the controller to generate a core dump file following a crash, select the Core Dump Transfer check box. To specify the type of server to which the core dump file is uploaded, choose FTP from the Transfer Mode drop-down list. In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the FTP server. Note The controller must be able to reach the FTP server. In the File Name text box, enter the name that the controller uses to label the core dump file. In the User Name text box, enter the username for FTP login. In the Password text box, enter the password for FTP login. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring the Controller to Automatically Upload Core Dumps to an FTP Server (CLI) Step 1 To enable or disable the controller to generate a core dump file following a crash, enter this command:

config coredump {enable | disable}

Step 2 To specify the FTP server to which the core dump file is uploaded, enter this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 258 OL-28744-01 Uploading Core Dumps from the Controller config coredump ftp server_ip_address filename where server_ip_address is the IP address of the FTP server to which the controller sends its core dump file. Note The controller must be able to reach the FTP server. filename is the name that the controller uses to label the core dump file. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 To specify the username and password for FTP login, enter this command:

config coredump username ftp_username password ftp_password To save your changes, enter this command:

save config To see a summary of the controllers core dump file, enter this command:

Example:

Information similar to the following appears:

show coredump summary Information similar to the following appears:

Core Dump is enabled FTP Server IP.................................... 10.10.10.17 FTP Filename..................................... file1 FTP Username..................................... ftpuser FTP Password.................................. *********

Uploading Core Dumps from Controller to a Server (CLI) Step 1 To see information about the core dump file in flash memory, enter this command:

show coredump summary Information similar to the following appears:

Core Dump is disabled Core Dump file is saved on flash Sw Version.................................... 6.0.83.0 Time Stamp.................................... Wed Feb 4 13:23:11 2009 File Size..................................... 9081788 File Name Suffix........................... filename.gz OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 259 Uploading Packet Capture Files Step 2 To transfer the file from the controller to a server, enter these commands:

transfer upload mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

transfer upload datatype coredump transfer upload serverip server_ip_address transfer upload path server_path_to_file transfer upload filename filename Note After the file is uploaded, it ends with a .gz suffix. If desired, you can upload the same core dump file multiple times with different names to different servers. Step 3 If you are using an FTP server, also enter these commands:

transfer upload username username transfer upload password password transfer upload port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 4 To view the updated settings, enter this command:

transfer upload start Step 5 When prompted to confirm the current settings and start the software upload, answer y. Uploading Packet Capture Files Information About Uploading Packet Capture Files When a Cisco 5500 Series Controllers data plane crashes, it stores the last 50 packets that the controller received in flash memory. This information can be useful in troubleshooting the crash. When a crash occurs, the controller generates a new packet capture file (*.pcap) file, and a message similar to the following appears in the controller crash file:

Last 5 packets processed at each core are stored in

"last_received_pkts.pcap" captured file.

- Frame 36,38,43,47,49, processed at core #0.

- Frame 14,27,30,42,45, processed at core #1.

- Frame 15,18,20,32,48, processed at core #2.

- Frame 11,29,34,37,46, processed at core #3.

- Frame 7,8,12,31,35, processed at core #4.

- Frame 21,25,39,41,50, processed at core #5.

- Frame 16,17,19,22,33, processed at core #6.

- Frame 6,10,13,23,26, processed at core #7.

- Frame 9,24,28,40,44, processed at core #8.

- Frame 1,2,3,4,5, processed at core #9. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 260 OL-28744-01 Uploading Packet Capture Files You can use the controller GUI or CLI to upload the packet capture file from the controller. You can then use Wireshark or another standard packet capture tool to view and analyze the contents of the file. This figure shows a sample output of the packet capture in Wireshark. Figure 28: Sample Output of Packet Capture File in Wireshark Restrictions for Uploading Packet Capture Files Only Cisco 5500 Series Controllers generate packet capture files. This feature is not available on other controller platforms. Ensure that you have a TFTP or FTP server available for the file upload. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP or FTP server:

If you are uploading through the service port, the TFTP or FTP server must be on the same subnet as the service port because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. If you are uploading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP or FTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable. A third-party TFTP or FTP server cannot run on the same computer as Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP or FTP server and the third-party TFTP or FTP server require the same communication port. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 261 Uploading Packet Capture Files Uploading Packet Capture Files (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Commands > Upload File to open the Upload File from Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Packet Capture. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available in the 7.4 and later releases) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the packet capture file. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the packet capture file. These files have a .pcap extension. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the upload occurs. The default value is 21. Step 8 Step 9 Click Upload to upload the packet capture file from the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the upload. Use Wireshark or another standard packet capture tool to open the packet capture file and see the last 50 packets that were received by the controller. Uploading Packet Capture Files (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Log on to the controller CLI. Enter the transfer upload mode {tftp | ftp | sftp} command. Enter the transfer upload datatype packet-capture command. Enter the transfer upload serverip server-ip-address command. Enter the transfer upload path server-path-to-file command. Enter the transfer upload filename last_received_pkts.pcap command. If you are using an FTP server, enter these commands:

transfer upload username username transfer upload password password transfer upload port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 262 OL-28744-01 Monitoring Memory Leaks Step 8 Step 9 Enter the transfer upload start command to see the updated settings and then answer y when prompted to confirm the current settings and start the upload process. This example shows the upload command output:

Use Wireshark or another standard packet capture tool to open the packet capture file and see the last 50 packets that were received by the controller. Monitoring Memory Leaks This section provides instructions for troubleshooting hard-to-solve or hard-to-reproduce memory problems. Caution The commands in this section can be disruptive to your system and should be run only when you are advised to do so by the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Monitoring Memory Leaks (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 To enable or disable monitoring for memory errors and leaks, enter this command:

config memory monitor errors {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. Note Your changes are not saved across reboots. After the controller reboots, it uses the default setting for this feature. If you suspect that a memory leak has occurred, enter this command to configure the controller to perform an auto-leak analysis between two memory thresholds (in kilobytes):

config memory monitor leaks low_thresh high_thresh If the free memory is lower than the low_thresh threshold, the system crashes, generating a crash file. The default value for this parameter is 10000 kilobytes, and you cannot set it below this value. Set the high_thresh threshold to the current free memory level or higher so that the system enters auto-leak-analysis mode. After the free memory reaches a level lower than the specified high_thresh threshold, the process of tracking and freeing memory allocation begins. As a result, the debug memory events enable command shows all allocations and frees, and the show memory monitor detail command starts to detect any suspected memory leaks. The default value for this parameter is 30000 kilobytes. Step 3 To see a summary of any discovered memory issues, enter this command:

show memory monitor Information similar to the following appears:

Memory Leak Monitor Status:

low_threshold(10000), high_threshold(30000), current status(disabled)

-------------------------------------------

Memory Error Monitor Status:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 263 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices Crash-on-error flag currently set to (disabled) No memory error detected. Step 4 To see the details of any memory leaks or corruption, enter this command:

show memory monitor detail Information similar to the following appears:

Memory error detected. Details:

------------------------------------------------

- Corruption detected at pmalloc entry address:

- Corrupt entry:headerMagic(0xdeadf00d),trailer(0xabcd),poison(0xreadceef), entrysize(128),bytes(100),thread(Unknown task name, task id = (332096592)), file(pmalloc.c),line(1736),time(1027)

(0x179a7ec0) Previous 1K memory dump from error location.

------------------------------------------------

(179a7ac0): 00000000 00000000 00000000 ceeff00d readf00d 00000080 00000000 00000000

(179a7ae0): 17958b20 00000000 1175608c 00000078 00000000 readceef 179a7afc 00000001

(179a7b00): 00000003 00000006 00000001 00000004 00000001 00000009 00000009 0000020d

(179a7b20): 00000001 00000002 00000002 00000001 00000004 00000000 00000000 5d7b9aba

(179a7b40): cbddf004 192f465e 7791acc8 e5032242 5365788c a1b7cee6 00000000 00000000

(179a7b60): 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ceeff00d readf00d 00000080

(179a7b80): 00000000 00000000 17958dc0 00000000 1175608c 00000078 00000000 readceef

(179a7ba0): 179a7ba4 00000001 00000003 00000006 00000001 00000004 00000001 00003763

(179a7bc0): 00000002 00000002 00000010 00000001 00000002 00000000 0000001e 00000013

(179a7be0): 0000001a 00000089 00000000 00000000 000000d8 00000000 00000000 17222194

(179a7c00): 1722246c 1722246c 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ceeff00d

(179a7c20): readf00d 00000080 00000000 00000000 179a7b78 00000000 1175608c 00000078 Step 5 If a memory leak occurs, enter this command to enable debugging of errors or events during memory allocation:

debug memory {errors | events} {enable | disable}

Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices Information About Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices The controller supports three features designed to help troubleshoot communication problems with CCXv5 clients: diagnostic channel, client reporting, and roaming and real-time diagnostics. Restrictions for CCXv5 Client Devices Diagnostic channel, client reporting, and roaming and real-time diagnostics features are supported only on CCXv5 clients. They are not supported for use with non-CCX clients or with clients running an earlier version of CCX. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 264 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices Configuring Diagnostic Channel You can choose a diagnostic channel to troubleshoot why the client is having communication problems with a WLAN. You can test the client and access points to identify the difficulties that the client is experiencing and allow corrective measures to be taken to make the client operational on the network. You can use the controller GUI or CLI to enable the diagnostic channel, and you can use the controller CLI to run the diagnostic tests. Note We recommend that you enable the diagnostic channel feature only for nonanchored SSIDs that use the management interface. Configuring the Diagnostic Channel (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Create a new WLAN or click the ID number of an existing WLAN. Note We recommend that you create a new WLAN on which to run the diagnostic tests. Step 3 When the WLANs > Edit page appears, choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. Figure 29: WLANs > Edit (Advanced) Page Step 4 If you want to enable diagnostic channel troubleshooting on this WLAN, select the Diagnostic Channel check box. Otherwise, leave this check box unselected, which is the default value. Note You can use the CLI to initiate diagnostic tests on the client. Step 5 Step 6 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 265 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices Configuring the Diagnostic Channel (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 To enable diagnostic channel troubleshooting on a particular WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan diag-channel {enable | disable} wlan_id To verify that your change has been made, enter this command:

show wlan wlan_id Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 1 Profile Name..................................... employee1 Network Name (SSID).............................. employee Status........................................... Disabled MAC Filtering.................................... Disabled Broadcast SSID................................... Enabled AAA Policy Override.............................. Disabled Number of Active Clients......................... 0 Exclusionlist Timeout............................ 60 seconds Session Timeout.................................. Infinity Interface........................................ virtual WLAN ACL......................................... unconfigured DHCP Server...................................... Default DHCP Address Assignment Required................. Disabled Quality of Service............................... Silver (best effort) WMM.............................................. Disabled CCX - AironetIe Support.......................... Enabled CCX - Gratuitous ProbeResponse (GPR)............. Disabled CCX - Diagnostics Channel Capability............. Enabled

... Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 To send a request to the client to perform the DHCP test, enter this command:

config client ccx dhcp-test client_mac_address Note This test does not require the client to use the diagnostic channel. To send a request to the client to perform the default gateway ping test, enter this command:

config client ccx default-gw-ping client_mac_address Note This test does not require the client to use the diagnostic channel. To send a request to the client to perform the DNS server IP address ping test, enter this command:

config client ccx dns-ping client_mac_address Note This test does not require the client to use the diagnostic channel. To send a request to the client to perform the DNS name resolution test to the specified host name, enter this command:

config client ccx dns-resolve client_mac_address host_name Note This test does not require the client to use the diagnostic channel. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 266 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 To send a request to the client to perform the association test, enter this command:

config client ccx test-association client_mac_address ssid bssid {802.11a | 802.11b | 802.11g} channel To send a request to the client to perform the 802.1X test, enter this command:

config client ccx test-dot1x client_mac_address profile_id bssid {802.11a | 802.11b | 802.11g} channel To send a request to the client to perform the profile redirect test, enter this command:

config client ccx test-profile client_mac_address profile_id The profile_id should be from one of the client profiles for which client reporting is enabled. Note Users are redirected back to the parent WLAN, not to any other profile. The only profile shown is the users parent profile. Note however that parent WLAN profiles can have one child diagnostic WLAN. Step 10 Use these commands if necessary to abort or clear a test:

To send a request to the client to abort the current test, enter this command:

config client ccx test-abort client_mac_address Only one test can be pending at a time, so this command aborts the current pending test. To clear the test results on the controller, enter this command:

config client ccx clear-results client_mac_address Step 11 To send a message to the client, enter this command:

Example:

config client ccx send-message client_mac_address message_id where message_id is one of the following:

1 = The SSID is invalid. 2 = The network settings are invalid. 3 = There is a WLAN credibility mismatch. 4 = The user credentials are incorrect. 5 = Please call support. 6 = The problem is resolved. 7 = The problem has not been resolved. 8 = Please try again later. 9 = Please correct the indicated problem. 10 = Troubleshooting is refused by the network. 11 = Retrieving client reports. 12 = Retrieving client logs. 13 = Retrieval complete. 14 = Beginning association test. 15 = Beginning DHCP test. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 267 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices 16 = Beginning network connectivity test. 17 = Beginning DNS ping test. 18 = Beginning name resolution test. 19 = Beginning 802.1X authentication test. 20 = Redirecting client to a specific profile. 21 = Test complete. 22 = Test passed. 23 = Test failed. 24 = Cancel diagnostic channel operation or select a WLAN profile to resume normal operation. 25 = Log retrieval refused by the client. 26 = Client report retrieval refused by the client. 27 = Test request refused by the client. 28 = Invalid network (IP) setting. 29 = There is a known outage or problem with the network. 30 = Scheduled maintenance period. 31 = The WLAN security method is not correct. 32 = The WLAN encryption method is not correct. 33 = The WLAN authentication method is not correct. Step 12 To see the status of the last test, enter this command:

show client ccx last-test-status client_mac_address Information similar to the following appears for the default gateway ping test:

Test Type........................................ Gateway Ping Test Test Status...................................... Pending/Success/Timeout Dialog Token..................................... 15 Timeout.......................................... 15000 ms Request Time..................................... 1329 seconds since system boot To see the status of the last test response, enter this command:

show client ccx last-response-status client_mac_address Information similar to the following appears for the 802.1X authentication test:

Test Status...................................... Success Response Dialog Token............................ 87 Response Status.................................. Successful Response Test Type............................... 802.1x Authentication Test Response Time.................................... 3476 seconds since system boot To see the results from the last successful diagnostics test, enter this command:

show client ccx results client_mac_address Information similar to the following appears for the 802.1X authentication test:

Step 13 Step 14 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 268 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices dot1x Complete................................... Success EAP Method....................................... *1,Host OS Login Credentials dot1x Status.................................. 255 Step 15 To see the relevant data frames captured by the client during the previous test, enter this command:

show client ccx frame-data client_mac_address Information similar to the following appears:

LOG Frames:

Frame Number:.................................... 1 Last Frame Number:............................... 1120 Direction:....................................... 1 Timestamp:....................................... 0d 00h 50m 39s 863954us Frame Length:.................................... 197 Frame Data:

00000000: 80 00 00 00 ff ff ff ff ff ff 00 12 44 bd bd b0 ............D... 00000010: 00 12 44 bd bd b0 f0 af 43 70 00 f2 82 01 00 00 ..D.....Cp...... 00000020: 64 00 11 08 00 01 00 01 08 8c 12 98 24 b0 48 60 d...........$.H`

00000030: 6c 05 04 01 02 00 00 85 1e 00 00 89 00 0f 00 ff l............... 00000040: 03 19 00 41 50 32 33 2d 31 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 ...AP23-10...... 00000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 26 96 06 00 40 96 00 ff ff dd ......&...@..... 00000060: 18 00 50 f2 01 01 00 00 50 f2 05 01 00 00 50 f2 ..P.....P.....P. 00000070: 05 01 00 00 40 96 00 28 00 dd 06 00 40 96 01 01 ....@..(....@... 00000080: 00 dd 05 00 40 96 03 04 dd 16 00 40 96 04 00 02 ....@......@.... 00000090: 07 a4 00 00 23 a4 00 00 42 43 00 00 62 32 00 00 ....#...BC..b2.. 000000a0: dd 05 00 40 96 0b 01 dd 18 00 50 f2 02 01 01 82 ...@......P..... 000000b0: 00 03 a4 00 00 27 a4 00 00 42 43 5e 00 62 32 2f .....'...BC^.b2/

LOG Frames:

Frame Number:.................................... 2 Last Frame Number:............................... 1120 Direction:....................................... 1 Timestamp:....................................... 0d 00h 50m 39s 878289us Frame Length:.................................... 147 Frame Data:

00000000: 80 00 00 00 ff ff ff ff ff ff 00 0d ed c3 a0 22 ..............."

00000010: 00 0d ed c3 a0 22 00 bd 4d 50 a5 f7 78 08 00 00 ....."..MP..x... 00000020: 64 00 01 00 00 01 00 01 08 8c 12 98 24 b0 48 60 d...........$.H`

00000030: 6c 05 04 01 02 00 00 85 1e 00 00 84 00 0f 00 ff l............... 00000040: 03 19 00 72 6f 67 75 65 2d 74 65 73 74 31 00 00 ...rogue-test1.. 00000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 23 96 06 00 40 96 00 10 00 dd ......#...@..... 00000060: 06 00 40 96 01 01 00 dd 05 00 40 96 03 04 dd 05 ..@.......@..... 00000070: 00 40 96 0b 01 dd 18 00 50 f2 02 01 01 81 00 03 .@......P....... 00000080: a4 00 00 27 a4 00 00 42 43 5e 00 62 32 2f 00 d2 ...'...BC^.b2/.. 00000090: b4 ab 84 LOG Frames:

Frame Number:.................................... 3 Last Frame Number:............................... 1120 Direction:....................................... 1 Timestamp:....................................... 0d 00h 50m 39s 881513us Frame Length:.................................... 189 Frame Data:

00000000: 80 00 00 00 ff ff ff ff ff ff 00 12 44 bd 80 30 ............D..0 00000010: 00 12 44 bd 80 30 60 f7 46 c0 8b 4b d1 05 00 00 ..D..0`.F..K.... 00000020: 64 00 11 08 00 01 00 01 08 8c 12 98 24 b0 48 60 d...........$.H`

00000030: 6c 05 04 00 02 00 00 85 1e 00 00 89 00 0f 00 ff l............... 00000040: 03 19 00 41 50 34 30 2d 31 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 ...AP40-17...... 00000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 26 dd 18 00 50 f2 01 01 00 00 ......&...P..... 00000060: 50 f2 05 01 00 00 50 f2 05 01 00 00 40 96 00 28 P.....P.....@..(

00000070: 00 dd 06 00 40 96 01 01 00 dd 05 00 40 96 03 04 ....@.......@... .. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 269 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices 00000080: dd 16 00 40 96 04 00 05 07 a4 00 00 23 a4 00 00 ...@........#... 00000090: 42 43 00 00 62 32 00 00 dd 05 00 40 96 0b 01 dd BC..b2.....@.... 000000a0: 18 00 50 f2 02 01 01 85 00 03 a4 00 00 27 a4 00 ..P..........'.. 000000b0: 00 42 43 5e 00 62 32 2f 00 0b 9a 1d 6f

... BC^.b2/....o Configuring Client Reporting The client reporting protocol is used by the client and the access point to exchange client information. Client reports are collected automatically when the client associates. You can use the controller GUI or CLI to send a client report request to any CCXv5 client any time after the client associates. There are four types of client reports:

Client profileProvides information about the configuration of the client. Operating parametersProvides the details of the clients current operational modes. Manufacturers informationProvides data about the wireless LAN client adapter in use. Client capabilitiesProvides information about the clients capabilities. Configuring Client Reporting (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Monitor > Clients to open the Clients page. Click the MAC address of the desired client. The Clients > Detail page appears. To send a report request to the client, click Send CCXV5 Req. Note You must create a Trusted Profile using ACAU for Cisco CB21AG or equivalent software from your CCXv5 vendor. To view the parameters from the client, click Display. The Client Reporting page appears. Click the link for the desired client profile. The Profile Details page appears displaying the client profile details, including the SSID, power save mode, radio channel, data rates, and 802.11 security settings. Configuring Client Reporting (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 270 To send a request to the client to send its profiles, enter this command:

config client ccx get-profiles client_mac_address To send a request to the client to send its current operating parameters, enter this command:

config client ccx get-operating-parameters client_mac_address To send a request to the client to send the manufacturers information, enter this command:

config client ccx get-manufacturer-info client_mac_address Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 To send a request to the client to send its capability information, enter this command:

config client ccx get-client-capability client_mac_address To clear the client reporting information, enter this command:

config client ccx clear-reports client_mac_address To see the client profiles, enter this command:

show client ccx profiles client_mac_address To see the client operating parameters, enter this command:

show client ccx operating-parameters client_mac_address To see the client manufacturer information, enter this command:

show client ccx manufacturer-info client_mac_address To see the clients capability information, enter this command:

show client ccx client-capability client_mac_address Note This command displays the clients available capabilities, not current settings for the capabilities. Configuring Roaming and Real-Time Diagnostics You can use roaming and real-time logs and statistics to solve system problems. The event log enables you to identify and track the behavior of a client device. It is especially useful when attempting to diagnose difficulties that a user may be having on a WLAN. The event log provides a log of events and reports them to the access point. There are three categories of event logs:

Roaming logThis log provides a historical view of the roaming events for a given client. The client maintains a minimum of five previous roaming events including failed attempts and successful roams. Robust Security Network Association ( RSNA) logThis log provides a historical view of the authentication events for a given client. The client maintains a minimum of five previous authentication attempts including failed attempts and successful ones. SyslogThis log provides internal system information from the client. For example, it may indicate problems with 802.11 operation, system operation, and so on. The statistics report provides 802.1X and security information for the client. You can use the controller CLI to send the event log and statistics request to any CCXv5 client any time after the client associates. Configuring Roaming and Real-Time Diagnostics (CLI) Step 1 To send a log request, enter this command:

config client ccx log-request log_type client_mac_address where log_type is roam, rsna, or syslog. Step 2 To view a log response, enter this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 271 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices show client ccx log-response log_type client_mac_address where log_type is roam, rsna, or syslog. Information similar to the following appears for a log response with a log_type of roam:

Tue Jun 26 18:28:48 2007 Roaming Response LogID=133: Status=Successful Event Timestamp=0d 00h 00m 13s 322396us Source BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:c2, Target BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:c2, Transition Time=3125(ms) Tue Jun 26 18:28:48 2007 Roaming Response LogID=133: Status=Successful Transition Reason: Normal roam, poor link Transition Result: Success Event Timestamp=0d 00h 00m 16s 599006us Source BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:c2, Target BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:c2, Transition Transition Reason: Normal roam, poor link Transition Result: Success Event Timestamp=0d 00h 00m 19s 882921us Source BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:c2, Target BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:c2, Transition Tue Jun 26 18:28:48 2007 Roaming Response LogID=133: Status=Successful Transition Reason: Normal roam, poor link Transition Result: Success Event Timestamp=0d 00h 00m 08s 815477us Source BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:c2, Target BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:d2, Transition Transition Reason: First association to WLAN Transition Result: Success Event Timestamp=0d 00h 00m 26s 637084us Source BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:d2, Target BSSID=00:0b:85:81:06:c2, Transition Time=3235(ms) Time=3234(ms) Time=3281(ms) Time=3313(ms) Information similar to the following appears for a log response with a log_type of rsna:

Tue Jun 26 18:24:09 2007 RSNA Response LogID=132: Status=Successful Tue Jun 26 18:24:09 2007 RSNA Response LogID=132: Status=Successful Event Timestamp=0d 00h 00m 00s 246578us Target BSSID=00:14:1b:58:86:cd RSNA Version=1 Group Cipher Suite=00-0f-ac-02 Pairwise Cipher Suite Count = 1 Pairwise Cipher Suite 0 = 00-0f-ac-04 AKM Suite Count = 1 AKM Suite 0 = 00-0f-ac-01 RSN Capability = 0x0 RSNA Result: Success Event Timestamp=0d 00h 00m 00s 246625us Target BSSID=00:14:1b:58:86:cd RSNA Version=1 Group Cipher Suite=00-0f-ac-02 Pairwise Cipher Suite Count = 1 Pairwise Cipher Suite 0 = 00-0f-ac-04 AKM Suite Count = 1 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 272 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting CCXv5 Client Devices Tue Jun 26 18:24:09 2007 RSNA Response LogID=132: Status=Successful AKM Suite 0 = 00-0f-ac-01 RSN Capability = 0x0 RSNA Result: Success Event Timestamp=0d 00h 00m 01s 624375us Target BSSID=00:14:1b:58:86:cd RSNA Version=1 Group Cipher Suite=00-0f-ac-02 Pairwise Cipher Suite Count = 1 Pairwise Cipher Suite 0 = 00-0f-ac-04 AKM Suite Count = 1 AKM Suite 0 = 00-0f-ac-01 RSN Capability = 0x0 RSNA Result: Success Information similar to the following appears for a log response with a log_type of syslog:

Tue Jun 26 18:07:48 2007 SysLog Response LogID=131: Status=Successful Event Timestamp=0d 00h 19m 42s 278987us in the OID response'

Client SysLog = '<11> Jun 19 11:49:47 uraval3777 Mandatory elements missing Event Timestamp=0d 00h 19m 42s 278990us Client SysLog = '<11> Jun 19 11:49:50 uraval3777 Mandatory elements missing in the OID response'

Tue Jun 26 18:07:48 2007 SysLog Response LogID=131: Status=Successful Event Timestamp=0d 00h 19m 42s 278993us in the OID response'

Client SysLog = '<11> Jun 19 11:49:53 uraval3777 Mandatory elements missing Event Timestamp=0d 00h 19m 42s 278996us Client SysLog = '<11> Jun 19 11:49:56 uraval3777 Mandatory elements missing in the OID response'

Tue Jun 26 18:07:48 2007 SysLog Response LogID=131: Status=Successful Event Timestamp=0d 00h 19m 42s 279000us in the OID response'

Client SysLog = '<11> Jun 19 11:50:00 uraval3777 Mandatory elements missing Event Timestamp=0d 00h 19m 42s 279003us Client SysLog = '<11> Jun 19 11:50:03 uraval3777 Mandatory elements missing in the OID response'

Tue Jun 26 18:07:48 2007 SysLog Response LogID=131: Status=Successful Event Timestamp=0d 00h 19m 42s 279009us in the OID response'

Client SysLog = '<11> Jun 19 11:50:09 uraval3777 Mandatory elements missing Event Timestamp=0d 00h 19m 42s 279012us Client SysLog = '<11> Jun 19 11:50:12 uraval3777 Mandatory elements missing in the OID response'

To send a request for statistics, enter this command:

config client ccx stats-request measurement_duration stats_name client_mac_address where stats_name is dot11 or security. To view the statistics response, enter this command:

show client ccx stats-report client_mac_address Step 3 Step 4 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 273 Using the Debug Facility Information similar to the following appears:

Measurement duration = 1 dot11TransmittedFragmentCount

= 1 dot11MulticastTransmittedFrameCount = 2 dot11FailedCount

= 3

= 4 dot11RetryCount

= 5 dot11MultipleRetryCount

= 6 dot11FrameDuplicateCount

= 7 dot11RTSSuccessCount dot11RTSFailureCount

= 8

= 9 dot11ACKFailureCount

= 10 dot11ReceivedFragmentCount

= 11 dot11MulticastReceivedFrameCount dot11FCSErrorCount

= 12

= 13 dot11TransmittedFrameCount Using the Debug Facility Information About Using the Debug Facility The debug facility enables you to display all packets going to and from the controller CPU. You can enable it for received packets, transmitted packets, or both. By default, all packets received by the debug facility are displayed. However, you can define access control lists (ACLs) to filter packets before they are displayed. Packets not passing the ACLs are discarded without being displayed. Each ACL includes an action (permit, deny, or disable) and one or more fields that can be used to match the packet. The debug facility provides ACLs that operate at the following levels and on the following values:

Driver ACL NPU encapsulation type Port Ethernet header ACL Destination address Source address Ethernet type VLAN ID IP header ACL Source address Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 274 OL-28744-01 Using the Debug Facility Destination address Protocol Source port (if applicable) Destination port (if applicable) EoIP payload Ethernet header ACL Destination address Source address Ethernet type VLAN ID EoIP payload IP header ACL Source address Destination address Protocol Source port (if applicable) Destination port (if applicable) CAPWAP payload 802.11 header ACL Destination address Source address BSSID SNAP header type CAPWAP payload IP header ACL Source address Destination address Protocol Source port (if applicable) Destination port (if applicable) At each level, you can define multiple ACLs. The first ACL that matches the packet is the one that is selected. Configuring the Debug Facility (CLI) Step 1 To enable the debug facility, enter this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 275 Using the Debug Facility debug packet logging enable {rx | tx | all} packet_count display_size where rx displays all received packets, tx displays all transmitted packets, and all displays both transmitted and received packets. packet_count is the maximum number of packets to log. You can enter a value between 1 and 65535 packets, and the default value is 25 packets. display_size is the number of bytes to display when printing a packet. By default, the entire packet is displayed. Note To disable the debug facility, enter this command: debug packet logging disable. debug packet logging acl driver rule_index action npu_encap port where rule_index is a value between 1 and 6 (inclusive). action is permit, deny, or disable. npu_encap specifies the NPU encapsulation type, which determines how packets are filtered. The possible values include dhcp, dot11-mgmt, dot11-probe, dot1x, eoip-ping, iapp, ip, lwapp, multicast, orphan-from-sta, orphan-to-sta, rbcp, wired-guest, or any. port is the physical port for packet transmission or reception. Use these commands to configure packet-logging ACLs:

debug packet logging acl eth rule_index action dst src type vlan where rule_index is a value between 1 and 6 (inclusive). action is permit, deny, or disable. dst is the destination MAC address. src is the source MAC address. type is the two-byte type code (such as 0x800 for IP, 0x806 for ARP). This parameter also accepts a few common string values such as ip (for 0x800) or arp (for 0x806). vlan is the two-byte VLAN ID. debug packet logging acl ip rule_index action src dst proto src_port dst_port where proto is a numeric or any string recognized by getprotobyname(). The controller supports the following strings:

ip, icmp, igmp, ggp, ipencap, st, tcp, egp, pup, udp, hmp, xns-idp, rdp, iso-tp4, xtp, ddp, idpr-cmtp, rspf, vmtp, ospf, ipip, and encap. src_port is the UDP/TCP two-byte source port (for example, telnet, 23) or any. The controller accepts a numeric or any string recognized by getservbyname(). The controller supports the following strings: tcpmux, echo, discard, systat, daytime, netstat, qotd, msp, chargen, ftp-data, ftp, fsp, ssh, telnet, smtp, time, rlp, nameserver, whois, re-mail-ck, domain, mtp, bootps, bootpc, tftp, gopher, rje, finger, www, link, kerberos, Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 276 OL-28744-01 Using the Debug Facility supdup, hostnames, iso-tsap, csnet-ns, 3com-tsmux, rtelnet, pop-2, pop-3, sunrpc, auth, sftp, uucp-path, nntp, ntp, netbios-ns, netbios-dgm, netbios-ssn, imap2, snmp, snmp-trap, cmip-man, cmip-agent, xdmcp, nextstep, bgp, prospero, irc, smux, at-rtmp, at-nbp, at-echo, at-zis, qmtp, z3950, ipx, imap3, ulistserv, https, snpp, saft, npmp-local, npmp-gui, and hmmp-ind. dst_port is the UDP/TCP two-byte destination port (for example, telnet, 23) or any. The controller accepts a numeric or any string recognized by getservbyname(). The controller supports the same strings as those for the src_port. debug packet logging acl eoip-eth rule_index action dst src type vlan debug packet logging acl eoip-ip rule_index action src dst proto src_port dst_port debug packet logging acl lwapp-dot11 rule_index action dst src bssid snap_type where bssid is the Basic Service Set Identifier. snap_type is the Ethernet type. debug packet logging acl lwapp-ip rule_index action src dst proto src_port dst_port Note To remove all configured ACLs, enter this command: debug packet logging acl clear-all. Step 2 To configure the format of the debug output, enter this command:

debug packet logging format {hex2pcap | text2pcap}

The debug facility supports two output formats: hex2pcap and text2pcap. The standard format used by IOS supports the use of hex2pcap and can be decoded using an HTML front end. The text2pcap option is provided as an alternative so that a sequence of packets can be decoded from the same console log file. This figure shows an example of hex2pcap output. Figure 30: Sample Hex2pcap Output OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 277 Using the Debug Facility This figure shows an example of text2pcap output. Figure 31: Sample Text2pcap Output Step 3 Step 4 To determine why packets might not be displayed, enter this command:

debug packet error {enable | disable}

To display the status of packet debugging, enter this command:

show debug packet Information similar to the following appears:

Status........................................... disabled Number of packets to display..................... 25 Bytes/packet to display.......................... 0 Packet display format............................ text2pcap Driver ACL:

Ethernet ACL:

[1]: disabled

[2]: disabled

[3]: disabled

[4]: disabled

[5]: disabled

[6]: disabled

[1]: disabled

[2]: disabled

[3]: disabled

[4]: disabled

[5]: disabled

[6]: disabled

[1]: disabled

[2]: disabled

[3]: disabled

[4]: disabled

[5]: disabled

[6]: disabled

[1]: disabled

[2]: disabled

[3]: disabled

[4]: disabled IP ACL:

EoIP-Ethernet ACL:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 278 OL-28744-01 Configuring Wireless Sniffing EoIP-IP ACL:

[5]: disabled

[6]: disabled

[1]: disabled

[2]: disabled

[3]: disabled

[4]: disabled

[5]: disabled

[6]: disabled LWAPP-Dot11 ACL:

[1]: disabled

[2]: disabled

[3]: disabled

[4]: disabled

[5]: disabled

[6]: disabled

[1]: disabled

[2]: disabled

[3]: disabled

[4]: disabled

[5]: disabled

[6]: disabled?

LWAPP-IP ACL:

Configuring Wireless Sniffing Information About Wireless Sniffing The controller enables you to configure an access point as a network sniffer, which captures and forwards all the packets on a particular channel to a remote machine that runs packet analyzer software. These packets contain information on time stamps, signal strength, packet sizes, and so on. Sniffers allow you to monitor and record network activity and to detect problems. Prerequisites for Wireless Sniffing To perform wireless sniffing, you need the following hardware and software:

A dedicated access pointAn access point configured as a sniffer cannot simultaneously provide wireless access service on the network. To avoid disrupting coverage, use an access point that is not part of your existing wireless network. A remote monitoring deviceA computer capable of running the analyzer software. Windows XP or Linux operating systemThe controller supports sniffing on both Windows XP and Linux machines. Software and supporting files, plug-ins, or adaptersYour analyzer software may require specialized files before you can successfully enable Restrictions for Wireless Sniffing Supported third-party network analyzer software applications are as follows:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 279 Configuring Wireless Sniffing Wildpackets Omnipeek or Airopeek AirMagnet Enterprise Analyzer Wireshark The latest version of Wireshark can decode the packets by going to the Analyze mode. Select decode as, and switch UDP5555 to decode as AIROPEEK. You must disable IP-MAC address binding in order to use an access point in sniffer mode if the access point is joined to a Cisco 5500 Series Controller. To disable IP-MAC address binding, enter the config network ip-mac-binding disable command in the controller CLI. You must enable WLAN 1 in order to use an access point in sniffer mode if the access point is joined to a Cisco 5500 Series Controller. If WLAN 1 is disabled, the access point cannot send packets. Prerequisites for Wireless Sniffing Configuring Sniffing on an Access Point (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the access point that you want to configure as the sniffer. The All APs > Details for page appears. From the AP Mode drop-down list, choose Sniffer. Click Apply. Click OK when prompted that the access point will be rebooted. Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired access point and choose Configure. The 802.11a/n

(or 802.11b/g/n) Cisco APs > Configure page appears. Select the Sniff check box to enable sniffing on this access point, or leave it unselected to disable sniffing. The default value is unchecked. If you enabled sniffing in Step 8, follow these steps:

a) From the Channel drop-down list, choose the channel on which the access point sniffs for packets. b) In the Server IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the remote machine running Omnipeek, Airopeek, AirMagnet, or Wireshark. Step 10 Step 11 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring Sniffing on an Access Point (CLI) Step 1 Configure the access point as a sniffer by entering this command:

config ap mode sniffer Cisco_AP Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 280 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH_old where Cisco_AP is the access point configured as the sniffer. Step 2 Step 3 When warned that the access point will be rebooted and asked if you want to continue, enter Y. The access point reboots in sniffer mode. Enable sniffing on the access point by entering this command:

config ap sniff {802.11a | 802.11b} enable channel server_IP_address Cisco_AP where channel is the radio channel on which the access point sniffs for packets. The default values are 36 (802.11a/n) and 1 (802.11b/g/n). server_IP_address is the IP address of the remote machine running Omnipeek, Airopeek, AirMagnet, or Wireshark. Cisco_AP is the access point configured as the sniffer. Note To disable sniffing on the access point, enter the config ap sniff {802.11a | 802.11b} disable Cisco_AP command. Step 4 Step 5 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the sniffer configuration settings for an access point by entering this command:

show ap config {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH_old The controller supports the use of the Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) protocols to troubleshoot lightweight access points. Using these protocols makes debugging easier, especially when the access point is unable to connect to the controller. To avoid potential conflicts and security threats to the network, the following commands are unavailable while a Telnet or SSH session is enabled: config terminal, telnet, ssh, rsh, ping, traceroute, clear, clock, crypto, delete, fsck, lwapp, mkdir, radius, release, reload, rename, renew, rmdir, save, set, test, upgrade. Commands available during a Telnet or SSH session include debug, disable, enable, help, led, login, logout, more, no debug, show, systat, undebug and where. Note For instructions on configuring Telnet or SSH SSH sessions on the controller, see the Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions section. Information About Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH The controller supports the use of the Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) protocols to troubleshoot lightweight access points. Using these protocols makes debugging easier, especially when the access point is unable to connect to the controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 281 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH_old To avoid potential conflicts and security threats to the network, the following commands are unavailable while a Telnet or SSH session is enabled: config terminal, telnet, ssh, rsh, ping, traceroute, clear, clock, crypto, delete, fsck, lwapp, mkdir, radius, release, reload, rename, renew, rmdir, save, set, test, upgrade. Commands available during a Telnet or SSH session include debug, disable, enable, help, led, login, logout, more, no debug, show, systat, undebug and where. Note For instructions on configuring Telnet or SSH SSH sessions on the controller, see the Configuring Telnet and Secure Shell Sessions section. You can configure Telnet or SSH by using the controller CLI in software release 5.0 or later releases or using the controller GUI in software release 6.0 or later releases. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH (GUI) Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the access point for which you want to enable Telnet or SSH. Choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Select the Telnet check box to enable Telnet connectivity on this access point. The default value is unchecked. Select the SSH check box to enable SSH connectivity on this access point. The default value is unchecked. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Troubleshooting Access Points Using Telnet or SSH (CLI) Enable Telnet or SSH connectivity on an access point by entering this command:

config ap {telnet | ssh} enable Cisco_AP The default value is disabled. Note Disable Telnet or SSH connectivity on an access point by entering this command: config ap {telnet | ssh}

disable Cisco_AP Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See whether Telnet or SSH is enabled on an access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 5 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 282 OL-28744-01 Debugging the Access Point Monitor Service Cisco AP Name.................................... AP33 Country code..................................... Multiple Countries:US,AE,AR,AT,AU,BH Reg. Domain allowed by Country................... 802.11bg:-ABCENR 802.11a:-ABCEN AP Country code.................................. US - United States AP Regulatory Domain............................. 802.11bg:-A 802.11a:-A Switch Port Number .............................. 2 MAC Address...................................... 00:19:2f:11:16:7a IP Address Configuration......................... Static IP assigned IP Address....................................... 10.22.8.133 IP NetMask....................................... 255.255.248.0 Gateway IP Addr.................................. 10.22.8.1 Domain........................................... Name Server...................................... Telnet State..................................... Enabled Ssh State........................................ Enabled

... Debugging the Access Point Monitor Service Information About Debugging the Access Point Monitor Service The controller sends access point status information to the Cisco 3300 Series Mobility Services Engine (MSE) using the access point monitor service. The MSE sends a service subscription and an access point monitor service request to get the status of all access points currently known to the controller. When any change is made in the status of an access point, a notification is sent to the MSE. Debugging Access Point Monitor Service Issues (CLI) If you experience any problems with the access point monitor service, enter this command:

debug service ap-monitor {all | error | event | nmsp | packet} {enable | disable}

where all configures debugging of all access point status messages. error configures debugging of access point monitor error events. event configures debugging of access point monitor events. nmsp configures debugging of access point monitor NMSP events. packet configures debugging of access point monitor packets. enable enables the debub service ap-monitor mode. disable disables the debug service ap-monitor mode. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 283 Troubleshooting OfficeExtend Access Points Troubleshooting OfficeExtend Access Points Information About Troubleshooting OfficeExtend Access Points This section provides troubleshooting information if you experience any problems with your OfficeExtend access points. Interpreting OfficeExtend LEDs The LED patterns are different for 1130 series and 1140 series OfficeExtend access points. See the Cisco OfficeExtend Access Point Quick Start Guide for a description of the LED patterns. You can find this guide at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/wireless/index.html Positioning OfficeExtend Access Points for Optimal RF Coverage When positioning your OfficeExtend access point, consider that its RF signals are emitted in a cone shape spreading outward from the LED side of the access point. Ensure to mount the access point so that air can flow behind the metal back plate and prevent the access point from overheating. Figure 32: OfficeExtend Access Point Radiation Patterns Troubleshooting Common Problems Most of the problems experienced with OfficeExtend access points are one of the following:

The access point cannot join the controller because of network or firewall issues. Resolution: Follow the instructions in the Viewing Access Point Join Information section to see join statistics for the OfficeExtend access point, or find the access points public IP address and perform pings of different packet sizes from inside the company. The access point joins but keeps dropping off. This behavior usually occurs because of network problems or when the network address translation (NAT) or firewall ports close because of short timeouts. Resolution: Ask the teleworker for the LED status. Clients cannot associate because of NAT issues. Resolution: Ask the teleworker to perform a speed test and a ping test. Some servers do not return big packet pings. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 284 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting OfficeExtend Access Points Clients keep dropping data. This behavior usually occurs because the home router closes the port because of short timeouts. Resolution: Perform client troubleshooting in Cisco Prime Infrastructure to determine if the problem is related to the OfficeExtend access point or the client. The access point is not broadcasting the enterprise WLAN. Resolution: Ask the teleworker to check the cables, power supply, and LED status. If you still cannot identify the problem, ask the teleworker to try the following:

Connect to the home router directly and see if the PC is able to connect to an Internet website such as http://www.cisco.com/. If the PC cannot connect to the Internet, check the router or modem. If the PC can connect to the Internet, check the home router configuration to see if a firewall or MAC-based filter is enabled that is blocking the access point from reaching the Internet. Log on to the home router and check to see if the access point has obtained an IP address. If it has, the access points LED normally blinks orange. The access point cannot join the controller, and you cannot identify the problem. Resolution: A problem could exist with the home router. Ask the teleworker to check the router manual and try the following:

Assign the access point a static IP address based on the access points MAC address. Put the access point in a demilitarized zone (DMZ), which is a small network inserted as a neutral zone between a companys private network and the outside public network. It prevents outside users from getting direct access to a server that has company data. If problems still occur, contact your companys IT department for assistance. The teleworker experiences problems while configuring a personal SSID on the access point. Resolution: Clear the access point configuration and return it to factory default settings by clicking Clear Config on the access point GUI or by entering the clear ap config Cisco_AP command and then configuring a personal SSID on an OfficeExtend Access Point. If problems still occur, contact your companys IT department for assistance. The home network needs to be rebooted. Resolution: Ask the teleworker to follow these steps:

Leave all devices networked and connected, and then power down all the devices. Turn on the cable or DSL modem, and then wait for 2 minutes. (Check the LED status.) Turn on the home router, and then wait for 2 minutes. (Check the LED status.) Turn on the access point, and then wait for 5 minutes. (Check the LED status.) Turn on the client. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 285 Troubleshooting OfficeExtend Access Points Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 286 OL-28744-01 P A R T II Configuring Ports and Interfaces Overview of Ports and Interfaces, page 289 Configuring the Management Interface, page 295 Configuring the AP-Manager Interface, page 299 Configuring Virtual Interfaces, page 305 Configuring Service-Port Interfaces, page 307 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces, page 309 Configuring Ports, page 315 Information About Using Cisco 5500 Series Controller USB Console Port, page 317 Configuring Link Aggregation, page 319 Configuring Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces, page 323 Configuring VLAN Select, page 327 Configuring Interface Groups, page 331 Configuring Multicast Optimization, page 335 C H A P T E R 26 Overview of Ports and Interfaces Three concepts are key to understanding how controllers connect to a wireless network: ports, interfaces, and WLANs. Information About Ports, page 289 Information About Distribution System Ports, page 290 Information About Interfaces, page 291 Information About Dynamic AP Management, page 292 Information About WLANs, page 293 Information About Ports A port is a physical entity that is used for connections on the controller platform. Controllers have two types of ports: distribution system ports and a service port. Figure 33: Ports on the Cisco 5500 Series Wireless LAN Controllers 1 2 3 Redundant port (RJ-45) Service port (RJ-45) Console port (RJ-45) 6 7 8 SFP distribution system ports 18 Management port LEDs SFP distribution port Link and Activity LEDs OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 289 Information About Distribution System Ports 4 5 USB ports 0 and 1 (Type A) 9 Power supply (PS1 and PS2), System (SYS), and Alarm (ALM) LEDs Console port (Mini USB Type B) Note You can use only one console port

(either RJ-45 or mini USB). When you connect to one console port, the other is disabled. 10 Expansion module slot Information About Distribution System Ports A distribution system port connects the controller to a neighbor switch and serves as the data path between these two devices. Restrictions for Configuring Distribution System Ports Cisco 5508 Controllers have eight Gigabit Ethernet distribution system ports, through which the Controller can manage multiple access points. The 5508-12, 5508-25, 5508-50, 5508-100, and 5508-250 models allow a total of 12, 25, 50, 100, or 250 access points to join the controller. Cisco 5508 controllers have no restrictions on the number of access points per port. However, we recommend using link aggregation

(LAG) or configuring dynamic AP-manager interfaces on each Gigabit Ethernet port to automatically balance the load. If more than 100 access points are connected to the Cisco 5500 Series Controller, make sure that more than one Gigabit Ethernet interface is connected to the upstream switch. Note The Gigabit Ethernet ports on the Cisco 5508 Controllers accept these SX/LC/T small form-factor plug-in (SFP) modules: - 1000BASE-SX SFP modules, which provide a 1000-Mbps wired connection to a network through an 850nM (SX) fiber-optic link using an LC physical connector - 1000BASE-LX SFP modules, which provide a 1000-Mbps wired connection to a network through a 1300nM (LX/LH) fiber-optic link using an LC physical connector - 1000BASE-T SFP modules, which provide a 1000-Mbps wired connection to a network through a copper link using an RJ-45 physical connector Each distribution system port is, by default, an 802.1Q VLAN trunk port. The VLAN trunking characteristics of the port are not configurable. Note Some controllers support link aggregation (LAG), which bundles all of the controllers distribution system ports into a single 802.3ad port channel. Cisco 5500 Series Controllers support LAG, and LAG is enabled automatically on the controllers within the Cisco WiSM2. In Cisco Flex 7500 and 8500 Series Controllers:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 290 OL-28744-01 Information About Interfaces If a port is unresponsive after a soaking period of 5 seconds, all the interfaces for which the port is the primary and the active port, fail over to the backup port, if a backup is configured and is operational. Similarly, if the unresponsive port is the backup port, then all the interfaces fail over to the primary port if it is operational. After the unresponsive port is restored, there is a soaking period of 60 seconds after which if the port is still operational, then all the interfaces fall back to this port, which was the primary port. If the port was the backup port, then no change is done. Information About Service Port Cisco 5500 Series Controllers also have a 10/100/1000 copper Ethernet service port. The service port is controlled by the service-port interface and is reserved for out-of-band management of the controller and system recovery and maintenance in the event of a network failure. It is also the only port that is active when the controller is in boot mode. The service port is not capable of carrying 802.1Q tags, so it must be connected to an access port on the neighbor switch. Use of the service port is optional. Note The service port is not autosensing. You must use the correct straight-through or crossover Ethernet cable to communicate with the service port. Caution Do not configure wired clients in the same VLAN or subnet of the service port of the controller on the network. If you configure wired clients on the same subnet or VLAN as the service port, it is not possible to access the management interface of the controller. Information About Interfaces An interface is a logical entity on the controller. An interface has multiple parameters associated with it, including an IP address, default gateway (for the IP subnet), primary physical port, secondary physical port, VLAN identifier, and DHCP server. These five types of interfaces are available on the controller. Four of these are static and are configured at setup time:

Management interface (static and configured at setup time; mandatory) AP-manager interface (static and configured at setup time; mandatory) Note You are not required to configure an AP-manager interface on Cisco 5500 Series Controllers. Virtual interface (static and configured at setup time; mandatory) Service-port interface (static and configured at setup time; optional) Dynamic interface (user-defined) OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 291 Information About Dynamic AP Management Note Typically, you define the management, AP-manager, virtual, and service-port interface parameters using the Startup Wizard. However, you can display and configure interface parameters through either the GUI or CLI after the controller is running. When LAG is disabled, each interface is mapped to at least one primary port, and some interfaces (management and dynamic) can be mapped to an optional secondary (or backup) port. If the primary port for an interface fails, the interface automatically moves to the backup port. In addition, multiple interfaces can be mapped to a single controller port. Note Interfaces that are quarantined are not displayed on the Controller > Interfaces page. For example, if there are 6 interfaces and one of them is quarantined, the quarantined interface is not displayed and the details of the other 5 interfaces are displayed on the GUI. You can get the total number of interfaces that is inclusive of quarantined interfaces through the count displayed on the top-right corner of the GUI. Restrictions for Configuring Interfaces Each physical port on the wireless controller can have only one AP-manager configured with it. For the Cisco 5500 Series Controllers, the management interface with AP-management enabled cannot fail over to the backup port, which is primary for the AP-manager on the management or dynamic VLAN interface. Cisco 5500 Series Controllers do not support fragmented pings on any interface. Information About Dynamic AP Management A dynamic interface is created as a WLAN interface by default. However, any dynamic interface can be configured as an AP-manager interface, with one AP-manager interface allowed per physical port. A dynamic interface with the Dynamic AP Management option enabled is used as the tunnel source for packets from the controller to the access point and as the destination for CAPWAP packets from the access point to the controller. The dynamic interfaces for AP management must have a unique IP address and are usually configured on the same subnet as the management interface. Note If link aggregation (LAG) is enabled, there can be only one AP-manager interface. We recommend having a separate dynamic AP-manager interface per controller port. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 292 OL-28744-01 Information About WLANs Information About WLANs A WLAN associates a service set identifier (SSID) to an interface or an interface group. It is configured with security, quality of service (QoS), radio policies, and other wireless network parameters. Up to 512 WLANs can be configured per controller. Figure 34: Relationship between Ports, Interfaces, and WLANs Each controller port connection is an 802.1Q trunk and should be configured as such on the neighbor switch. On Cisco switches, the native VLAN of an 802.1Q trunk is an untagged VLAN. If you configure an interface to use the native VLAN on a neighboring Cisco switch, make sure you configure the interface on the controller to be untagged. Note A zero value for the VLAN identifier (on the Controller > Interfaces page) means that the interface is untagged. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 293 Information About WLANs The default (untagged) native VLAN on Cisco switches is VLAN 1. When controller interfaces are configured as tagged (meaning that the VLAN identifier is set to a nonzero value), the VLAN must be allowed on the 802.1Q trunk configuration on the neighbor switch and not be the native untagged VLAN. We recommend that tagged VLANs be used on the controller. You should also allow only relevant VLANs on the neighbor switchs 802.1Q trunk connections to controller ports. All other VLANs should be disallowed or pruned in the switch port trunk configuration. This practice is extremely important for optimal performance of the controller. Note We recommend that you assign one set of VLANs for WLANs and a different set of VLANs for management interfaces to ensure that controllers properly route VLAN traffic. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 294 OL-28744-01

 

 

C H A P T E R 27 Configuring the Management Interface Information About the Management Interface, page 295 Configuring the Management Interface (GUI), page 296 Configuring the Management Interface (CLI), page 297 Information About the Management Interface The management interface is the default interface for in-band management of the controller and connectivity to enterprise services such as AAA servers. It is also used for communications between the controller and access points. The management interface has the only consistently pingable in-band interface IP address on the controller. You can access the GUI of the controller by entering the management interface IP address of the controller in the address field of either Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox browser. For CAPWAP, the controller requires one management interface to control all inter-controller communications and one AP-manager interface to control all controller-to-access point communications, regardless of the number of ports. Note To prevent or block a wired or wireless client from accessing the management network on a controller

(from the wireless client dynamic interface or VLAN), the network administrator must ensure that only authorized clients gain access to the management network through proper CPU ACLs, or use a firewall between the client dynamic interface and the management network. Caution Do not map a guest WLAN to the management interface. If the EoIP tunnel breaks, the client could obtain an IP and be placed on the management subnet. Caution Do not configure wired clients in the same VLAN or subnet of the service port of the controller on the network. If you configure wired clients on the same subnet or VLAN as the service port, it is not possible to access the management interface of the controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 295 Configuring the Management Interface (GUI) Configuring the Management Interface (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Controller > Interfaces to open the Interfaces page. Click the management link. The Interfaces > Edit page appears. Set the management interface parameters:

Note The management interface uses the controllers factory-set distribution system MAC address. Quarantine and quarantine VLAN ID, if applicable Note Select the Quarantine check box if you want to configure this VLAN as unhealthy or you want to configure network access control (NAC) out-of-band integration. Doing so causes the data traffic of any client that is assigned to this VLAN to pass through the controller. NAT address (only Cisco 2500 Series Controllers and Cisco 5500 Series Controllers are configured for dynamic AP management.) Note Select the Enable NAT Address check box and enter the external NAT IP address if you want to be able to deploy your Cisco 2500 Series Controllers or Cisco 5500 Series Controller behind a router or other gateway device that is using one-to-one mapping network address translation (NAT). NAT allows a device, such as a router, to act as an agent between the Internet (public) and a local network (private). In this case, it maps the controllers intranet IP addresses to a corresponding external address. The controllers dynamic AP-manager interface must be configured with the external NAT IP address so that the controller can send the correct IP address in the Discovery Response. If a Cisco 2500 Series Controllers or Cisco 5500 Series Controller is configured with an external NAT IP address under the management interface, the APs in local mode cannot associate with the controller. The workaround is to either ensure that the management interface has a globally valid IP address or ensure that external NAT IP address is valid internally for the local APs. The NAT parameters are supported for use only with one-to-one-mapping NAT, where each private client has a direct and fixed mapping to a global address. The NAT parameters do not support one-to-many NAT, which uses source port mapping to enable a group of clients to be represented by a single IP address. Note Note VLAN identifier Note Enter 0 for an untagged VLAN or a nonzero value for a tagged VLAN. We recommend using tagged VLANs for the management interface. Fixed IP address, IP netmask, and default gateway Dynamic AP management (for Cisco 2500 Series Controllers or Cisco 5500 Series Controller only) Note For Cisco 5500 Series Controllers, the management interface acts like an AP-manager interface by default. If desired, you can disable the management interface as an AP-manager interface and create another dynamic interface as an AP manager. Physical port assignment (for all controllers except the Cisco 2500 Series Controllers or Cisco 5500 Series Controller) Primary and secondary DHCP servers Access control list (ACL) setting, if required Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 296 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Management Interface (CLI) Step 4 Step 5 Click Save Configuration. If you made any changes to the management or virtual interface, reboot the controller so that your changes take effect. Configuring the Management Interface (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Enter the show interface detailed management command to view the current management interface settings. Note The management interface uses the controllers factory-set distribution system MAC address. Enter the config wlan disable wlan-number command to disable each WLAN that uses the management interface for distribution system communication. Enter these commands to define the management interface:

config interface address management ip-addr ip-netmask gateway config interface quarantine vlan management vlan_id Note Use the config interface quarantine vlan management vlan_id command to configure a quarantine VLAN on the management interface. config interface vlan management {vlan-id | 0}

Note Enter 0 for an untagged VLAN or a nonzero value for a tagged VLAN. We recommend using tagged VLANs for the management interface. config interface ap-manager management {enable | disable} (for Cisco 5500 Series Controllers only) Note Use the config interface ap-manager management {enable | disable} command to enable or disable dynamic AP management for the management interface. For Cisco 5500 Series Controllers, the management interface acts like an AP-manager interface by default. If desired, you can disable the management interface as an AP-manager interface and create another dynamic interface as an AP manager. config interface port management physical-ds-port-number (for all controllers except the 5500 series) config interface dhcp management ip-address-of-primary-dhcp-server [ip-address-of-secondary-dhcp-server]

config interface acl management access-control-list-name Step 4 Enter these commands if you want to be able to deploy your Cisco 5500 Series Controller behind a router or other gateway device that is using one-to-one mapping network address translation (NAT):

config interface nat-address management {enable | disable}

config interface nat-address management set public_IP_address NAT allows a device, such as a router, to act as an agent between the Internet (public) and a local network (private). In this case, it maps the controllers intranet IP addresses to a corresponding external address. The controllers dynamic AP-manager interface must be configured with the external NAT IP address so that the controller can send the correct IP address in the Discovery Response. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 297 Configuring the Management Interface (CLI) Note These commands are supported for use only with one-to-one-mapping NAT, where each private client has a direct and fixed mapping to a global address. These commands do not support one-to-many NAT, which uses source port mapping to enable a group of clients to be represented by a single IP address. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Enter the save config command. Enter the show interface detailed management command to verify that your changes have been saved. If you made any changes to the management interface, enter the reset system command to reboot the controller in order for the changes to take effect. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 298 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 28 Configuring the AP-Manager Interface Information the About AP-Manager Interface, page 299 Restrictions for Configuring AP Manager Interfaces, page 299 Configuring the AP-Manager Interface (GUI), page 300 Configuring the AP Manager Interface (CLI), page 300 Configuration Example: Configuring AP-Manager on a Cisco 5500 Series Controller, page 301 Information the About AP-Manager Interface A controller has one or more AP-manager interfaces, which are used for all Layer 3 communications between the controller and lightweight access points after the access points have joined the controller. The AP-manager IP address is used as the tunnel source for CAPWAP packets from the controller to the access point and as the destination for CAPWAP packets from the access point to the controller. Note The controller does not support transmitting the jumbo frames. To avoid having the controller transmit CAPWAP packets to the AP that will necessitate fragmentation and reassembly, reduce MTU/MSS on the client side. The AP-manager interface communicates through any distribution system port by listening across the Layer 3 network for access point CAPWAP or LWAPP join messages to associate and communicate with as many lightweight access points as possible. Restrictions for Configuring AP Manager Interfaces The MAC address of the management interface and the AP-manager interface is the same as the base LAG MAC address. If only one distribution system port can be used, you should use distribution system port 1. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 299 Configuring the AP-Manager Interface (GUI) An AP-manager interface is not required to be configured. The management interface acts like an AP-manager interface by default, and the access points can join on this interface. If link aggregation (LAG) is enabled, there can be only one AP-manager interface. But when LAG is disabled, one or more AP-manager interfaces can be created, generally one per physical port. Port redundancy for the AP-manager interface is not supported. You cannot map the AP-manager interface to a backup port. Configuring the AP-Manager Interface (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Controller > Interfaces to open the Interfaces page. Click AP-Manager Interface. The Interface > Edit page appears. Set the AP-Manager Interface parameters:

Note For Cisco 5500 Series Controllers, you are not required to configure an AP-manager interface. The management interface acts like an AP-manager interface by default. Physical port assignment VLAN identifier Note Enter 0 for an untagged VLAN or a nonzero value for a tagged VLAN. We recommend using tagged VLANs for the AP-manager interface. Fixed IP address, IP netmask, and default gateway Primary and secondary DHCP servers Access control list (ACL) name, if required Step 4 Step 5 Click Save Configuration to save your changes. If you made any changes to the management or virtual interface, reboot the controller so that your changes take effect. Configuring the AP Manager Interface (CLI) Before You Begin For Cisco 5500 Series Controllers, you are not required to configure an AP-manager interface. The management interface acts like an AP-manager interface by default. Step 1 Enter the show interface summary command to view the current interfaces. Note If the system is operating in Layer 2 mode, the AP-manager interface is not listed. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 300 OL-28744-01 Configuration Example: Configuring AP-Manager on a Cisco 5500 Series Controller Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Enter the show interface detailed ap-manager command to view the current AP-manager interface settings. Enter the config wlan disable wlan-number command to disable each WLAN that uses the AP-manager interface for distribution system communication. Enter these commands to define the AP-manager interface:

config interface address ap-manager ip-addr ip-netmask gateway config interface vlan ap-manager {vlan-id | 0}

Note Enter 0 for an untagged VLAN or a nonzero value for a tagged VLAN. We recommend using tagged VLANs for the AP-manager interface. config interface port ap-manager physical-ds-port-number config interface dhcp ap-manager ip-address-of-primary-dhcp-server [ip-address-of-secondary-dhcp-server]

config interface acl ap-manager access-control-list-name Step 5 Step 6 Enter the save config command to save your changes. Enter the show interface detailed ap-manager command to verify that your changes have been saved. Configuration Example: Configuring AP-Manager on a Cisco 5500 Series Controller For a Cisco 5500 Series Controller, we recommend that you have eight dynamic AP-manager interfaces and associate them to the eight Gigabit ports of the controller when LAG is not used. If you are using the management interface, which acts like an AP-manager interface by default, you must create only seven more dynamic AP-manager interfaces and associate them to the remaining seven Gigabit ports. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 301 Configuration Example: Configuring AP-Manager on a Cisco 5500 Series Controller This figure shows a dynamic interface that is enabled as a dynamic AP-manager interface and associated to port number 2. Figure 35: Dynamic Interface Example with Dynamic AP Management Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 302 OL-28744-01 Configuration Example: Configuring AP-Manager on a Cisco 5500 Series Controller This figure shows a Cisco 5500 Series Controller with LAG disabled, the management interface used as one dynamic AP-manager interface, and seven additional dynamic AP-manager interfaces, each mapped to a different Gigabit port. Figure 36: Cisco 5500 Series Controller Interface Configuration Example OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 303 Configuration Example: Configuring AP-Manager on a Cisco 5500 Series Controller Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 304 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 29 Configuring Virtual Interfaces Information About the Virtual Interface, page 305 Configuring Virtual Interfaces (GUI), page 306 Configuring Virtual Interfaces (CLI), page 306 Information About the Virtual Interface The virtual interface is used to support mobility management, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay, and embedded Layer 3 security such as guest web authentication and VPN termination. It also maintains the DNS gateway host name used by Layer 3 security and mobility managers to verify the source of certificates when Layer 3 web authorization is enabled. Specifically, the virtual interface plays these two primary roles:

Acts as the DHCP server placeholder for wireless clients that obtain their IP address from a DHCP server. Serves as the redirect address for the web authentication login page. The virtual interface IP address is used only in communications between the controller and wireless clients. It never appears as the source or destination address of a packet that goes out a distribution system port and onto the switched network. For the system to operate correctly, the virtual interface IP address must be set (it cannot be 0.0.0.0), and no other device on the network can have the same address as the virtual interface. Therefore, the virtual interface must be configured with an unassigned and unused gateway IP address. The virtual interface IP address is not pingable and should not exist in any routing table in your network. In addition, the virtual interface cannot be mapped to a physical port. Note All controllers within a mobility group must be configured with the same virtual interface IP address. Otherwise, inter-controller roaming may appear to work, but the handoff does not complete, and the client loses connectivity for a period of time. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 305 Configuring Virtual Interfaces (GUI) Configuring Virtual Interfaces (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > Interfaces to open the Interfaces page. Click Virtual. The Interfaces > Edit page appears. Step 3 Enter the following parameters:

Any fictitious, unassigned, and unused gateway IP address DNS gateway hostname Note To ensure connectivity and web authentication, the DNS server should always point to the virtual interface. If a DNS hostname is configured for the virtual interface, then the same DNS host name must be configured on the DNS server(s) used by the client. Step 4 Step 5 Click Save Configuration. If you made any changes to the management or virtual interface, reboot the controller so that your changes take effect. Configuring Virtual Interfaces (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Enter the show interface detailed virtual command to view the current virtual interface settings. Enter the config wlan disable wlan-number command to disable each WLAN that uses the virtual interface for distribution system communication. Enter these commands to define the virtual interface:

config interface address virtual ip-address Note For ip-address, enter any fictitious, unassigned, and unused gateway IP address. config interface hostname virtual dns-host-name Step 4 Step 5 Enter the reset system command. At the confirmation prompt, enter Y to save your configuration changes to NVRAM. The controller reboots. Enter the show interface detailed virtual command to verify that your changes have been saved. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 306 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 30 Configuring Service-Port Interfaces Information About Service-Port Interfaces, page 307 Restrictions for Configuring Service-Port Interfaces, page 307 Configuring Service-Port Interfaces (GUI), page 307 Configuring Service-Port Interfaces (CLI), page 308 Information About Service-Port Interfaces The service-port interface controls communications through and is statically mapped by the system to the service port. The service port can obtain an IP address using DHCP, or it can be assigned a static IP address, but a default gateway cannot be assigned to the service-port interface. Static routes can be defined through the controller for remote network access to the service port. Restrictions for Configuring Service-Port Interfaces Only Cisco 7500 Series Controllers and Cisco 5500 Series Controllers have a physical service-port interface that is reachable from the external network. Configuring Service-Port Interfaces (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Controller > Interfaces to open the Interfaces page. Click the service-port link to open the Interfaces > Edit page. Enter the Service-Port Interface parameters:

Note The service-port interface uses the controllers factory-set service-port MAC address. DHCP protocol (enabled) DHCP protocol (disabled) and IP address and IP netmask OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 307 Configuring Service-Port Interfaces (CLI) Step 4 Step 5 Click Save Configuration to save your changes. If you made any changes to the management or virtual interface, reboot the controller so that your changes take effect. Configuring Service-Port Interfaces (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 To view the current service-port interface settings, enter this command:

show interface detailed service-port Note The service-port interface uses the controllers factory-set service-port MAC address. Enter these commands to define the service-port interface:

To configure the DHCP server, enter this command:

config interface dhcp service-port enable To disable the DHCP server, enter this command:

config interface dhcp service-port disable To configure the IP address, enter this command:

config interface address service-port ip-addr ip-netmask Step 3 The service port is used for out-of-band management of the controller. If the management workstation is in a remote subnet, you may need to add a route on the controller in order to manage the controller from that remote workstation. To do so, enter this command:

config route add network-ip-addr ip-netmask gateway Step 4 Step 5 Enter the save config command to save your changes. Enter the show interface detailed service-port command to verify that your changes have been saved. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 308 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 31 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces Information About Dynamic Interface, page 309 Pre - requisites for Configuring Dynamic Interfaces, page 310 Restrictions for Configuring Dynamic Interfaces, page 310 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (GUI), page 310 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (CLI), page 312 Information About Dynamic Interface Dynamic interfaces, also known as VLAN interfaces, are created by users and designed to be analogous to VLANs for wireless LAN clients. A controller can support up to 512 dynamic interfaces (VLANs). Each dynamic interface is individually configured and allows separate communication streams to exist on any or all of a controllers distribution system ports. Each dynamic interface controls VLANs and other communications between controllers and all other network devices, and each acts as a DHCP relay for wireless clients associated to WLANs mapped to the interface. You can assign dynamic interfaces to distribution system ports, WLANs, the Layer 2 management interface, and the Layer 3 AP-manager interface, and you can map the dynamic interface to a backup port. You can configure zero, one, or multiple dynamic interfaces on a distribution system port. However, all dynamic interfaces must be on a different VLAN or IP subnet from all other interfaces configured on the port. If the port is untagged, all dynamic interfaces must be on a different IP subnet from any other interface configured on the port. This table lists the maximum number of VLANs supported on the various controller platforms. Table 7: Maximum number of VLANs supported on Cisco Wireless Controllers Wireless Controllers Cisco Virtual Wireless Controller Maximum VLANs 512 Cisco Wireless Controller Module for ISR G2 Cisco 2500 Series Wireless Controllers 16 16 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 309 Pre - requisites for Configuring Dynamic Interfaces Wireless Controllers Cisco 5500 Series Wireless Controller Maximum VLANs 512 Cisco Catalyst 6500 Series Wireless Services Module2 (WiSM2) Cisco Flex 7500 Series Cloud Controller Cisco 8500 Series Controller 512 4,096 4,096 Pre - requisites for Configuring Dynamic Interfaces While configuring on the dynamic interface of the controller, you must ensure the following:

You must use tagged VLANs for dynamic interfaces. Restrictions for Configuring Dynamic Interfaces The following restrictions apply for configuring the dynamic interfaces on the controller:

You must not configure a dynamic interface in the same subnetwork as a server that is reachable by the controller CPU, such as a RADIUS server, as it might cause asymmetric routing issues. Wired clients cannot access management interface of the Cisco WLC 2500 series using the IP address of the AP Manager interface when Dynamic AP Management is enabled on a dynamic VLAN. For SNMP requests that come from a subnet that is configured as a dynamic interface, the controller responds but the response does not reach the device that initiated the conversation. If you are using DHCP proxy and/or a RADIUS source interface, ensure that the dynamic interface has a valid routable address. Duplicate or overlapping addresses across controller interfaces are not supported. Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > Interfaces to open the Interfaces page. Perform one of the following:

To create a new dynamic interface, click New. The Interfaces > New page appears. Go to Step 3. To modify the settings of an existing dynamic interface, click the name of the interface. The Interfaces > Edit page for that interface appears. Go to Step 5. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 310 OL-28744-01 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (GUI) To delete an existing dynamic interface, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired interface and choose Remove. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Enter an interface name and a VLAN identifier, as shown in the figure above. Click Apply to commit your changes. The Interfaces > Edit page appears. Configure the following parameters:

Guest LAN, if applicable Quarantine and quarantine VLAN ID, if applicable Note Select the Quarantine check box if you want to configure this VLAN as unhealthy or you want to configure network access control (NAC) out-of-band integration. Doing so causes the data traffic of any client that is assigned to this VLAN to pass through the controller. Physical port assignment (for all controllers except the 5500 series) NAT address (only for Cisco 5500 Series Controllers configured for dynamic AP management) Note Select the Enable NAT Address check box and enter the external NAT IP address if you want to be able to deploy your Cisco 5500 Series Controller behind a router or other gateway device that is using one-to-one mapping network address translation (NAT). NAT allows a device, such as a router, to act as an agent between the Internet (public) and a local network (private). In this case, it maps the controllers intranet IP addresses to a corresponding external address. The controllers dynamic AP-manager interface must be configured with the external NAT IP address so that the controller can send the correct IP address in the Discovery Response. The NAT parameters are supported for use only with one-to-one-mapping NAT, where each private client has a direct and fixed mapping to a global address. The NAT parameters do not support one-to-many NAT, which uses source port mapping to enable a group of clients to be represented by a single IP address. When you enable this feature, this dynamic interface is configured as an AP-manager interface (only one AP-manager interface is allowed per physical port). A dynamic interface that is marked as an AP-manager interface cannot be used as a WLAN interface. Set the APs in a VLAN that is different than the dynamic interface configured on the controller. If the APs are in the same VLAN as the dynamic interface, the APs are not registered on the controller and the LWAPP discovery rejected and Layer 3 discovery request not received on management VLAN errors are logged on the controller. VLAN identifier Fixed IP address, IP netmask, and default gateway Primary and secondary DHCP servers Access control list (ACL) name, if required Note To ensure proper operation, you must set the Port Number and Primary DHCP Server parameters. Step 6 Step 7 Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Repeat this procedure for each dynamic interface that you want to create or edit. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 311 Note Note Dynamic AP management Note Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (CLI) Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Enter the show interface summary command to view the current dynamic interfaces. View the details of a specific dynamic interface by entering this command:

show interface detailed operator_defined_interface_name. Note Interface names that contain spaces must be enclosed in double quotes. For example: config interface create

"vlan 25"

Enter the config wlan disable wlan_id command to disable each WLAN that uses the dynamic interface for distribution system communication. Enter these commands to configure dynamic interfaces:

config interface create operator_defined_interface_name {vlan_id | x}

config interface address interface ip_addr ip_netmask [gateway]

config interface vlan operator_defined_interface_name {vlan_id | o}

config interface port operator_defined_interface_name physical_ds_port_number config interface ap-manager operator_defined_interface_name {enable | disable}

Note Use the config interface ap-manager operator_defined_interface_name {enable | disable} command to enable or disable dynamic AP management. When you enable this feature, this dynamic interface is configured as an AP-manager interface (only one AP-manager interface is allowed per physical port). A dynamic interface that is marked as an AP-manager interface cannot be used as a WLAN interface. config interface dhcp operator_defined_interface_name ip_address_of_primary_dhcp_server

[ip_address_of_secondary_dhcp_server]

config interface quarantine vlan interface_name vlan_id Note Use the config interface quarantine vlan interface_name vlan_id command to configure a quarantine VLAN on any interface. config interface acl operator_defined_interface_name access_control_list_name Step 5 Enter these commands if you want to be able to deploy your Cisco 5500 Series Controller behind a router or other gateway device that is using one-to-one mapping network address translation (NAT):

config interface nat-address dynamic-interface operator_defined_interface_name {enable | disable}

config interface nat-address dynamic-interface operator_defined_interface_name set public_IP_address NAT allows a device, such as a router, to act as an agent between the Internet (public) and a local network (private). In this case, it maps the controllers intranet IP addresses to a corresponding external address. The controllers dynamic AP-manager interface must be configured with the external NAT IP address so that the controller can send the correct IP address in the Discovery Response. Note These commands are supported for use only with one-to-one-mapping NAT, whereby each private client has a direct and fixed mapping to a global address. These commands do not support one-to-many NAT, which uses source port mapping to enable a group of clients to be represented by a single IP address. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 312 OL-28744-01 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (CLI) Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Enter the config wlan enable wlan_id command to reenable each WLAN that uses the dynamic interface for distribution system communication. Enter the save config command to save your changes. Enter the show interface detailed operator_defined_interface_name command and show interface summary command to verify that your changes have been saved. Note If desired, you can enter the config interface delete operator_defined_interface_name command to delete a dynamic interface. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 313 Configuring Dynamic Interfaces (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 314 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 32 Configuring Ports Configuring Ports (GUI), page 315 Configuring Ports (GUI) The controllers ports are configured with factory-default settings designed to make the controllers ports operational without additional configuration. However, you can view the status of the controllers ports and edit their configuration parameters at any time. Step 1 Choose Controller > Ports to open the Ports page. This page shows the current configuration for each of the controllers ports. If you want to change the settings of any port, click the number for that specific port. The Port > Configure page appears. If the management and AP-manager interfaces are mapped to the same port and are members of the same VLAN, Note you must disable the WLAN before making a port-mapping change to either interface. If the management and AP-manager interfaces are assigned to different VLANs, you do not need to disable the WLAN. The number of parameters available on the Port > Configure page depends on your controller type. Note The following show the current status of the port:

Port NumberNumber of the current port. Admin StatusCurrent state of the port. Values: Enable or Disable Physical ModeConfiguration of the port physical interface. The mode varies by the controller type. Physical StatusThe data rate being used by the port. The available data rates vary based on controller type. 2500 series - 1 Gbps full duplex WiSM2 - 10 Gbps full duplex 7500 series - 10 Gbps full duplex Link StatusLink status of the port. Values: Link Up or Link Down OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 315 Configuring Ports (GUI) Link TrapWhether the port is set to send a trap when the link status changes. Values: Enable or Disable Power over Ethernet (PoE)If the connecting device is equipped to receive power through the Ethernet cable and if so, provides 48 VDC. Values: Enable or Disable Note Some older Cisco access points do not draw PoE even if it is enabled on the controller port. In such cases, contact the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC). The following is a list of the ports configurable parameters. 1 Admin StatusEnables or disables the flow of traffic through the port. Options: Enable or Disable Default: Enable. When a primary port link goes down, messages may get logged internally only and not be posted to a syslog server. It may take up to 40 seconds to restore logging to the syslog server. Note 2 Physical ModeDetermines whether the ports data rate is set automatically or specified by the user. The supported data rates vary based on the controller type. Default: Auto. 3 Link TrapCauses the port to send a trap when the ports link status changes. Options: Enable or Disable Default:

Enable. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Click Back to return to the Ports page and review your changes. Repeat this procedure for each additional port that you want to configure. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 316 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 33 Information About Using Cisco 5500 Series Controller USB Console Port The USB console port on the Cisco 5500 Series Controllers connects directly to the USB connector of a PC using a USB Type A-to-5-pin mini Type B cable. Note The 4-pin mini Type B connector is easily confused with the 5-pin mini Type B connector. They are not compatible. Only the 5-pin mini Type B connector can be used. For operation with Microsoft Windows, the Cisco Windows USB console driver must be installed on any PC connected to the console port. With this driver, you can plug and unplug the USB cable into and from the console port without affecting Windows HyperTerminal operations. Note Only one console port can be active at a time. When a cable is plugged into the USB console port, the RJ-45 port becomes inactive. Conversely, when the USB cable is removed from the USB port, the RJ-45 port becomes active. USB Console OS Compatibility, page 317 Changing the Cisco USB Systems Management Console COM Port to an Unused Port, page 318 USB Console OS Compatibility Before You Begin These operating systems are compatible with the USB console:

Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 (Cisco Windows USB console driver required) Apple Mac OS X 10.5.2 (no driver required) OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 317 Changing the Cisco USB Systems Management Console COM Port to an Unused Port Linux (no driver required) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Download the USB_Console.inf driver file as follows:

a) Click this URL to go to the Software Center: http://tools.cisco.com/support/downloads/go/Redirect.x?mdfid=278875243 b) Click Wireless LAN Controllers. c) Click Standalone Controllers. d) Click Cisco 5500 Series Wireless LAN Controllers. e) Click Cisco 5508 Wireless LAN Controller. f) Choose the USB driver file. g) Save the file to your hard drive. Connect the Type A connector to a USB port on your PC. Connect the mini Type B connector to the USB console port on the controller. When prompted for a driver, browse to the USB_Console.inf file on your PC. Follow the prompts to install the USB driver. Note Some systems might also require an additional system file. You can download the Usbser.sys file from http://

support.microsoft.com/kb/918365. Changing the Cisco USB Systems Management Console COM Port to an Unused Port Before You Begin The USB driver is mapped to COM port 6. Some terminal emulation programs do not recognize a port higher than COM 4. If necessary, you must change the Cisco USB systems management console COM port to an unused port of COM 4 or lower. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 From your Windows desktop, right-click My Computer and choose Manage. From the list on the left side, choose Device Manager. From the device list on the right side, double-click Ports (COM & LPT). Right-click Cisco USB System Management Console 0108 and choose Properties. Click the Port Settings tab and click the Advanced button. From the COM Port Number drop-down list, choose an unused COM port of 4 or lower. Click OK to save and then close the Advanced Settings dialog box. Click OK to save and then close the Communications Port Properties dialog box. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 318 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 34 Configuring Link Aggregation Information About Link Aggregation, page 319 Restrictions for Link Aggregation, page 319 Enabling Link Aggregation (GUI), page 321 Enabling Link Aggregation (CLI), page 321 Verifying Link Aggregation Settings (CLI), page 322 Configuring Neighbor Devices to Support Link Aggregation, page 322 Choosing Between Link Aggregation and Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces, page 322 Information About Link Aggregation Link aggregation (LAG) is a partial implementation of the 802.3ad port aggregation standard. It bundles all of the controllers distribution system ports into a single 802.3ad port channel, thereby reducing the number of IP addresses needed to configure the ports on your controller. When LAG is enabled, the system dynamically manages port redundancy and load balances access points transparently to the user. LAG simplifies controller configuration because you no longer need to configure primary and secondary ports for each interface. If any of the controller ports fail, traffic is automatically migrated to one of the other ports. As long as at least one controller port is functioning, the system continues to operate, access points remain connected to the network, and wireless clients continue to send and receive data. Note LAG is supported across switches. Restrictions for Link Aggregation You can bundle all eight ports on a Cisco 5508 Controller into a single link. Terminating on two different modules within a single Catalyst 6500 series switch provides redundancy and ensures that connectivity between the switch and the controller is maintained when one module fails. The controllers port 1 is connected to Gigabit interface 3/1, and the controllers port 2 is connected OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 319 Restrictions for Link Aggregation to Gigabit interface 2/1 on the Catalyst 6500 series switch. Both switch ports are assigned to the same channel group. LAG requires the EtherChannel to be configured for 'mode on' on both the controller and the Catalyst switch. Once the EtherChannel is configured as on at both ends of the link, the Catalyst switch should not be configured for either Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) or Cisco proprietary Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) but be set unconditionally to LAG. Because no channel negotiation is done between the controller and the switch, the controller does not answer to negotiation frames and the LAG is not formed if a dynamic form of LAG is set on the switch. Additionally, LACP and PAgP are not supported on the controller. If the recommended load-balancing method cannot be configured on the Catalyst switch, then configure the LAG connection as a single member link or disable LAG on the controller. Figure 37: Link Aggregation with the Catalyst 6500 Series Neighbor Switch You cannot configure the controllers ports into separate LAG groups. Only one LAG group is supported per controller. Therefore, you can connect a controller in LAG mode to only one neighbor device. When you enable LAG or make any changes to the LAG configuration, you must immediately reboot the controller. When you enable LAG, you can configure only one AP-manager interface because only one logical port is needed. LAG removes the requirement for supporting multiple AP-manager interfaces. When you enable LAG, all dynamic AP-manager interfaces and untagged interfaces are deleted, and all WLANs are disabled and mapped to the management interface. Also, the management, static AP-manager, and VLAN-tagged dynamic interfaces are moved to the LAG port. Multiple untagged interfaces to the same port are not allowed. When you enable LAG, you cannot create interfaces with a primary port other than 29. When you enable LAG, all ports participate in LAG by default. You must configure LAG for all of the connected ports in the neighbor switch. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 320 OL-28744-01 Enabling Link Aggregation (GUI) When you enable LAG, if any single link goes down, traffic migrates to the other links. When you enable LAG, only one functional physical port is needed for the controller to pass client traffic. When you enable LAG, access points remain connected to the controller until you reboot the controller, which is needed to activate the LAG mode change, and data service for users continues uninterrupted. When you enable LAG, you eliminate the need to configure primary and secondary ports for each interface. When you enable LAG, the controller sends packets out on the same port on which it received them. If a CAPWAP packet from an access point enters the controller on physical port 1, the controller removes the CAPWAP wrapper, processes the packet, and forwards it to the network on physical port 1. This may not be the case if you disable LAG. When you disable LAG, the management, static AP-manager, and dynamic interfaces are moved to port 1. When you disable LAG, you must configure primary and secondary ports for all interfaces. When you disable LAG, you must assign an AP-manager interface to each port on the controller. Otherwise, access points are unable to join. Cisco 5500 Series Controllers support a single static link aggregation bundle. LAG is typically configured using the Startup Wizard, but you can enable or disable it at any time through either the GUI or CLI. When you enable LAG on Cisco 2500 Series Controller to which the direct-connect access point is associated, the direct connect access point is disconnected since LAG enabling is still in the transition state. You must reboot the controller immediately after enabling LAG. Enabling Link Aggregation (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Controller > General to open the General page. Set the LAG Mode on Next Reboot parameter to Enabled. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Reboot the controller. Assign the WLAN to the appropriate VLAN. Enabling Link Aggregation (CLI) Step 1 Enter the config lag enable command to enable LAG. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 321 Verifying Link Aggregation Settings (CLI) Note Enter the config lag disable command if you want to disable LAG. Step 2 Step 3 Enter the save config command to save your settings. Reboot the controller. Verifying Link Aggregation Settings (CLI) To verify your LAG settings, enter this command:

show lag summary Information similar to the following appears:

LAG Enabled Configuring Neighbor Devices to Support Link Aggregation The controllers neighbor devices must also be properly configured to support LAG. Each neighbor port to which the controller is connected should be configured as follows:

interface GigabitEthernet <interface id>

switchport channel-group <id> mode on no shutdown The port channel on the neighbor switch should be configured as follows:

interface port-channel <id>

switchport switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport trunk native vlan <native vlan id>

switchport trunk allowed vlan <allowed vlans>

switchport mode trunk no shutdown Choosing Between Link Aggregation and Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces Cisco 5500 Series Controllers have no restrictions on the number of access points per port, but we recommend using LAG or multiple AP-manager interfaces on each Gigabit Ethernet port to automatically balance the load. The following factors should help you decide which method to use if your controller is set for Layer 3 operation:

With LAG, all of the controller ports need to connect to the same neighbor switch. If the neighbor switch goes down, the controller loses connectivity. With multiple AP-manager interfaces, you can connect your ports to different neighbor devices. If one of the neighbor switches goes down, the controller still has connectivity. However, using multiple AP-manager interfaces presents certain challenges when port redundancy is a concern. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 322 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 35 Configuring Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces Information About Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces, page 323 Restrictions for Configuring Multiple AP Manager Interfaces, page 323 Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (GUI), page 324 Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (CLI), page 324 Information About Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces When you create two or more AP-manager interfaces, each one is mapped to a different port. The ports should be configured in sequential order so that AP-manager interface 2 is on port 2, AP-manager interface 3 is on port 3, and AP-manager interface 4 is on port 4. Before an access point joins a controller, it sends out a discovery request. From the discovery response that it receives, the access point can tell the number of AP-manager interfaces on the controller and the number of access points on each AP-manager interface. The access point generally joins the AP-manager with the least number of access points. In this way, the access point load is dynamically distributed across the multiple AP-manager interfaces. Note Access points may not be distributed completely evenly across all of the AP-manager interfaces, but a certain level of load balancing occurs. Restrictions for Configuring Multiple AP Manager Interfaces The following restrictions apply while configuring the multiple AP manager interfaces in the controller:

You must assign an AP-manager interface to each port on the controller. Before implementing multiple AP-manager interfaces, you should consider how they would impact your controllers port redundancy. Only Cisco 5500 Series Controllers support the use of multiple AP-manager interfaces. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 323 Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (GUI) AP-manager interfaces do not need to be on the same VLAN or IP subnet, and they may or may not be on the same VLAN or IP subnet as the management interface. However, we recommend that you configure all AP-manager interfaces on the same VLAN or IP subnet. If the port of one of the AP-manager interfaces fails, the controller clears the state of the access points, and the access points must reboot to reestablish communication with the controller using the normal controller join process. The controller no longer includes the failed AP-manager interface in the CAPWAP or LWAPP discovery responses. The access points then rejoin the controller and are load balanced among the available AP-manager interfaces. Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Choose Controller > Interfaces to open the Interfaces page. Click New. The Interfaces > New page appears. Enter an AP-manager interface name and a VLAN identifier. Click Apply to commit your changes. The Interfaces > Edit page appears. Enter the appropriate interface parameters. Note Every interface supports primary and backup port with the following exceptions Dynamic interface is converted to AP manager which does not support backup of port configuration. If AP manager is enabled on management interface and when management interface moves to backup port because of primary port failure, the AP manager will be disabled. To make this interface an AP-manager interface, select the Enable Dynamic AP Management check box. Note Only one AP-manager interface is allowed per physical port. A dynamic interface that is marked as an AP-manager interface cannot be used as a WLAN interface. Click Save Configuration to save your settings. Repeat this procedure for each additional AP-manager interface that you want to create. Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (CLI) Step 1 Enter these commands to create a new interface:

config interface create operator_defined_interface_name {vlan_id | x}

config interface address operator_defined_interface_name ip_addr ip_netmask [gateway]

config interface vlan operator_defined_interface_name {vlan_id | o}

config interface port operator_defined_interface_name physical_ds_port_number Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 324 OL-28744-01 Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (CLI) config interface dhcp operator_defined_interface_name ip_address_of_primary_dhcp_server

[ip_address_of_secondary_dhcp_server]

config interface quarantine vlan interface_name vlan_id Note Use this command to configure a quarantine VLAN on any interface. config interface acl operator_defined_interface_name access_control_list_name Step 2 To make this interface an AP-manager interface, enter this command:

{config interface ap-manager operator_defined_interface_name enable | disable}

Note Only one AP-manager interface is allowed per physical port. A dynamic interface that is marked as an AP-manager interface cannot be used as a WLAN interface. Step 3 Step 4 Enter save config command to save your changes. Repeat this procedure for each additional AP-manager interface that you want to create. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 325 Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 326 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 36 Configuring VLAN Select Information About VLAN Select, page 327 Restrictions for Configuring VLAN Select, page 328 Configuring Interface Groups, page 328 Information About VLAN Select Whenever a wireless client connects to a wireless network (WLAN), the client is placed in a VLAN that is associated with the WLAN. In a large venue such as an auditorium, a stadium, or a conference where there may be numerous wireless clients, having only a single WLAN to accommodate many clients might be a challenge. The VLAN select feature enables you to use a single WLAN that can support multiple VLANs. Clients can get assigned to one of the configured VLANs. This feature enables you to map a WLAN to a single or multiple interface VLANs using interface groups. Wireless clients that associate to the WLAN get an IP address from a pool of subnets identified by the interfaces. The IP address is derived by an algorithm based on the MAC address of the wireless client. This feature also extends the current AP group architecture where AP groups can override an interface or interface group to which the WLAN is mapped to, with multiple interfaces using the interface groups. This feature also provides the solution to auto anchor restrictions where a wireless guest user on a foreign location can get an IP address from multiple subnets based on their foreign locations or foreign controllers from the same anchor controller. When a client roams from one controller to another, the foreign controller sends the VLAN information as part of the mobility announce message. Based on the VLAN information received, the anchor decides whether the tunnel should be created between the anchor controller and the foreign controller. If the same VLAN is available on the foreign controller, the client context is completely deleted from the anchor and the foreign controller becomes the new anchor controller for the client. If an interface (int-1) in a subnet is untagged in one controller (Vlan ID 0) and the interface (int-2) in the same subnet is tagged to another controller (Vlan ID 1), then with the VLAN select, client joining the first controller over this interface may not undergo an L2 roam while it moves to the second controller. Hence, for L2 roaming to happen between two controllers with VLAN select, all the interfaces in the same subnet should be either tagged or untagged. As part of the VLAN select feature, the mobility announce message carries an additional vendor payload that contains the list of VLAN interfaces in an interface group mapped to a foreign controllers WLAN. This VLAN list enables the anchor to differentiate from a local to local or local to foreign handoff. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 327 Restrictions for Configuring VLAN Select Restrictions for Configuring VLAN Select The VLAN select feature enables you to use a single WLAN that can support multiple VLANs. Configuring Interface Groups Information About Interface Groups Interface groups are logical groups of interfaces. Interface groups facilitate user configuration where the same interface group can be configured on multiple WLANs or while overriding a WLAN interface per AP group. An interface group can exclusively contain either quarantine or nonquarantine interfaces. An interface can be part of multiple interface groups. A WLAN can be associated with an interface or interface group. The interface group name and the interface name cannot be the same. This feature also enables you to associate a client to specific subnets based on the foreign controller that they are connected to. The anchor controller WLAN can be configured to maintain a mapping between foreign controller MAC and a specific interface or interface group (Foreign maps) as needed. If this mapping is not configured, clients on that foreign controller gets VLANs associated in a round robin fashion from interface group configured on WLAN. You can also configure AAA override for interface groups. This feature extends the current access point group and AAA override architecture where access point groups and AAA override can be configured to override the interface group WLAN that the interface is mapped to. This is done with multiple interfaces using interface groups. This feature enables network administrators to configure guest anchor restrictions where a wireless guest user at a foreign location can obtain an IP address from multiple subnets on the foreign location and controllers from within the same anchor controller. Restrictions for Configuring Interface Groups The priority order for configuring VLAN interface select for WLAN is:

AAA override AP group DHCP server override Interface group Creating Interface Groups (GUI) Step 1 Choose Controller > Interface Groups. The Interface Groups page appears with the list of interface groups already created. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 328 OL-28744-01 Configuring Interface Groups Note To remove an interface group, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down icon and choose Remove. Step 2 Click Add Group. The Add New Interface Group page appears. Step 3 Enter the details of the interface group:

Interface Group NameSpecify the name of the interface group. DescriptionAdd a brief description of the interface group. Step 4 Click Add. Creating Interface Groups (CLI) config interface group {create | delete} interface_group_nameCreates or deletes an interface group config interface group description interface_group_name descriptionAdds a description to the interface group Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Controller > Interface Groups. The Interface Groups page appears with a list of all interface groups. Click the name of the interface group to which you want to add interfaces. The Interface Groups > Edit page appears. Choose the interface name that you want to add to this interface group from the Interface Name drop-down list. Click Add Interface to add the interface to the Interface group. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 if you want to add multiple interfaces to this interface group. Note To remove an interface from the interface group, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down arrow and choose Remove. Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (CLI) To add interfaces to interface groups, use the config interface group interface add interface_group interface_name command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 329 Configuring Interface Groups Viewing VLANs in Interface Groups (CLI) To view a list of VLANs in the interface groups, use the show interface group detailed interface-group-name command. Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose the WLAN tab. The WLANs page appears listing the available WLANs. Click the WLAN ID of the WLAN to which you want to add the interface group. In the General tab, choose the interface group from the Interface/Interface Group (G) drop-down list. Click Apply. Note Suppose that the interface group that you add to a WLAN has RADIUS Server Overwrite interface enabled. In this case, when a client requests for authentication, the controller selects the first IP address from the interface group as the RADIUS server. Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (CLI) To add an interface group to a WLAN, enter the config wlan interface wlan_id interface_group_name command. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 330 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 37 Configuring Interface Groups Information About Interface Groups, page 331 Restrictions for Configuring Interface Groups, page 332 Creating Interface Groups (GUI), page 332 Creating Interface Groups (CLI), page 332 Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (GUI), page 333 Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (CLI), page 333 Viewing VLANs in Interface Groups (CLI), page 333 Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (GUI), page 333 Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (CLI), page 334 Information About Interface Groups Interface groups are logical groups of interfaces. Interface groups facilitate user configuration where the same interface group can be configured on multiple WLANs or while overriding a WLAN interface per AP group. An interface group can exclusively contain either quarantine or nonquarantine interfaces. An interface can be part of multiple interface groups. A WLAN can be associated with an interface or interface group. The interface group name and the interface name cannot be the same. This feature also enables you to associate a client to specific subnets based on the foreign controller that they are connected to. The anchor controller WLAN can be configured to maintain a mapping between foreign controller MAC and a specific interface or interface group (Foreign maps) as needed. If this mapping is not configured, clients on that foreign controller gets VLANs associated in a round robin fashion from interface group configured on WLAN. You can also configure AAA override for interface groups. This feature extends the current access point group and AAA override architecture where access point groups and AAA override can be configured to override the interface group WLAN that the interface is mapped to. This is done with multiple interfaces using interface groups. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 331 Restrictions for Configuring Interface Groups This feature enables network administrators to configure guest anchor restrictions where a wireless guest user at a foreign location can obtain an IP address from multiple subnets on the foreign location and controllers from within the same anchor controller. Restrictions for Configuring Interface Groups The priority order for configuring VLAN interface select for WLAN is:

AAA override AP group DHCP server override Interface group Creating Interface Groups (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > Interface Groups. The Interface Groups page appears with the list of interface groups already created. Note To remove an interface group, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down icon and choose Remove. Click Add Group. The Add New Interface Group page appears. Step 3 Enter the details of the interface group:

Interface Group NameSpecify the name of the interface group. DescriptionAdd a brief description of the interface group. Step 4 Click Add. Creating Interface Groups (CLI) config interface group {create | delete} interface_group_nameCreates or deletes an interface group config interface group description interface_group_name descriptionAdds a description to the interface group Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 332 OL-28744-01 Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (GUI) Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Controller > Interface Groups. The Interface Groups page appears with a list of all interface groups. Click the name of the interface group to which you want to add interfaces. The Interface Groups > Edit page appears. Choose the interface name that you want to add to this interface group from the Interface Name drop-down list. Click Add Interface to add the interface to the Interface group. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 if you want to add multiple interfaces to this interface group. Note To remove an interface from the interface group, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down arrow and choose Remove. Adding Interfaces to Interface Groups (CLI) To add interfaces to interface groups, use the config interface group interface add interface_group interface_name command. Viewing VLANs in Interface Groups (CLI) To view a list of VLANs in the interface groups, use the show interface group detailed interface-group-name command. Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose the WLAN tab. The WLANs page appears listing the available WLANs. Click the WLAN ID of the WLAN to which you want to add the interface group. In the General tab, choose the interface group from the Interface/Interface Group (G) drop-down list. Click Apply. Note Suppose that the interface group that you add to a WLAN has RADIUS Server Overwrite interface enabled. In this case, when a client requests for authentication, the controller selects the first IP address from the interface group as the RADIUS server. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 333 Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (CLI) Adding an Interface Group to a WLAN (CLI) To add an interface group to a WLAN, enter the config wlan interface wlan_id interface_group_name command. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 334 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 38 Configuring Multicast Optimization Information About Multicast Optimization, page 335 Configuring a Multicast VLAN (GUI), page 335 Configuring a Multicast VLAN (CLI), page 336 Information About Multicast Optimization Prior to the 7.0.116.0 release, multicast was based on the grouping of the multicast address and the VLAN as one entity, MGID. With VLAN select and VLAN pooling, there is a possibility that you might increase duplicate packets. With the VLAN select feature, every client listens to the multicast stream on a different VLAN. As a result, the controller creates different MGIDs for each multicast address and VLAN. Therefore, the upstream router sends one copy for each VLAN, which results, in the worst case, in as many copies as there are VLANs in the pool. Since the WLAN is still the same for all clients, multiple copies of the multicast packet are sent over the air. To suppress the duplication of a multicast stream on the wireless medium and between the controller and access points, you can use the multicast optimization feature. Multicast optimization enables you to create a multicast VLAN which you can use for multicast traffic. You can configure one of the VLANs of the WLAN as a multicast VLAN where multicast groups are registered. Clients are allowed to listen to a multicast stream on the multicast VLAN. The MGID is generated using mulicast VLAN and multicast IP addresses. If multiple clients on the VLAN pool of the same WLAN are listening to a single multicast IP address, a single MGID is generated. The controller makes sure that all multicast streams from the clients on this VLAN pool always go out on the multicast VLAN to ensure that the upstream router has one entry for all the VLANs of the VLAN pool. Only one multicast stream hits the VLAN pool even if the clients are on different VLANs. Therefore, the multicast packets that are sent out over the air is just one stream. Configuring a Multicast VLAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose WLANs > WLAN ID. The WLAN > Edit page appears. In the General tab, select the Multicast VLAN feature check box to enable multicast VLAN for the WLAN. The Multicast Interface drop-down list appears. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 335 Configuring a Multicast VLAN (CLI) Step 3 Step 4 Choose the VLAN from the Multicast Interface drop-down list. Click Apply. Configuring a Multicast VLAN (CLI) Use the config wlan multicast interface wlan_id enable interface_name command to configure the multicast VLAN feature. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 336 OL-28744-01 P A R T III Configuring VideoStream Configuring VideoStream, page 339 C H A P T E R 39 Configuring VideoStream Information about VideoStream, page 339 Prerequisites for VideoStream, page 339 Restrictions for Configuring VideoStream, page 339 Configuring VideoStream (GUI), page 340 Configuring VideoStream (CLI), page 343 Viewing and Debugging Media Streams, page 344 Information about VideoStream The IEEE 802.11 wireless multicast delivery mechanism does not provide a reliable way to acknowledge lost or corrupted packets. As a result, if any multicast packet is lost in the air, it is not sent again which may cause an IP multicast stream unviewable. The VideoStream feature makes the IP multicast stream delivery reliable over the air, by converting the multicast frame to a unicast frame over the air. Each VideoStream client acknowledges receiving a video IP multicast stream. Prerequisites for VideoStream Make sure that the multicast feature is enabled. We recommend configuring IP multicast on the controller with multicast-multicast mode. Check for the IP address on the client machine. The machine should have an IP address from the respective VLAN. Verify that the access points have joined the controllers. Make sure that the clients are able to associate to the configured WLAN at 802.11n speed. Restrictions for Configuring VideoStream VideoStream is supported in the 7.0.98.0 and later controller software releases. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 339 Configuring VideoStream (GUI) VideoStream is supported on the following access points: Cisco Aironet 3600, 3500, 1260, 1250, 1240, 1140, 1130, and 1040. Configuring VideoStream (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Configure the multicast feature by following these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > MediaStream > General. b) Select or unselect the Multicast Direct feature check box. The default value is disabled. Note Enabling the multicast direct feature does not automatically reset the existing client state. The wireless clients must rejoin the multicast stream after enabling the multicast direct feature on the controller. c) In the Session Message Config area, select Session announcement State check box to enable the session announcement mechanism. If the session announcement state is enabled, clients are informed each time a controller is not able to serve the multicast direct data to the client. d) In the Session announcement URL text box, enter the URL where the client can find more information when an error occurs during the multicast media stream transmission. e) In the Session announcement e-mail text box, enter the e-mail address of the person who can be contacted. In the Session announcement Phone text box, enter the phone number of the person who can be contacted. f) g) In the Session announcement Note text box, enter a reason as to why a particular client cannot be served with a multicast media. h) Click Apply. Add a media stream by following these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > Media Stream > Streams to open the Media Stream page. b) Click Add New to configure a new media stream. The Media Stream > New page appears. Note The Stream Name, Multicast Destination Start IP Address (IPv4 or IPv6), and Multicast Destination End IP Address (IPv4 or IPv6) text boxes are mandatory. You must enter information in these text boxes. c) In the Stream Name text box, enter the media stream name. The stream name can be up to 64 characters. d) In the Multicast Destination Start IP Address (IPv4 or IPv6) text box, enter the start (IPv4 or IPv6) address of e) In the Multicast Destination End IP Address (IPv4 or IPv6) text box, enter the end (IPv4 or IPv6) address of the the multicast media stream. multicast media stream. Note Ensure that the Multicast Destination Start and End IP addresses are of the same type, that is both addresses should be of either IPv4 or IPv6 type. f) In the Maximum Expected Bandwidth text box, enter the maximum expected bandwidth that you want to assign to the media stream. The values can range between 1 to 35000 kbps. Note We recommend that you use a template to add a media stream to the controller. g) From the Select from Predefined Templates drop-down list under Resource Reservation Control (RRC) Parameters, choose one of the following options to specify the details about the resource reservation control:

Very Coarse (below 300 kbps) Coarse (below 500 kbps) Ordinary (below 750 kbps) Low (below 1 Mbps) Medium (below 3 Mbps) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 340 OL-28744-01 Configuring VideoStream (GUI) High (below 5 Mbps) Note When you select a predefined template from the drop-down list, the following text boxes under the Resource Reservation Control (RRC) Parameters list their default values that are assigned with the template. Average Packet Size (100-1500 bytes)Specifies the average packet size. The value can be in the range of 100 to 1500 bytes. The default value is 1200. RRC Periodic updateEnables the RRC (Resource Reservation Control Check) Periodic update. By default, this option is enabled. RRC periodically updates the admission decision on the admitted stream according to the correct channel load. As a result, it may deny certain low priority admitted stream requests. RRC Priority (1-8)Specifies the priority bit set in the media stream. The priority can be any number between 1 and 8. The larger the value means the higher the priority is. For example, a priority of 1 is the lowest value and a value of 8 is the highest value. The default priority is 4. The low priority stream may be denied in the RRC periodic update. Traffic Profile ViolationSpecifies the action to perform in case of a violation after a re-RRC. Choose an action from the drop-down list. The possible values are as follows:

DropSpecifies that a stream is dropped on periodic revaluation. FallbackSpecifies that a stream is demoted to Best Effort class on periodic reevaluation. The default value is drop. h) Click Apply. Enable the media stream for multicast-direct by following these steps:

a) Choose WLANs > WLAN ID to open the WLANs > Edit page. b) Click the QoS tab and select Gold (Video) from the Quality of Service (QoS) drop-down list. c) Click Apply. Set the EDCA parameters to voice and video optimized (optional) by following these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > EDCA Parameters. b) From the EDCA Profile drop-down list, choose the Voice and Video Optimized option. c) Click Apply. Enable the admission control on a band for video (optional) by following these steps:

Note Keep the voice bandwidth allocation to a minimum for better performance. a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Media to open the 802.11a/n (5 GHZ) or 802.11b/g/n > Media page. b) Click the Video tab. c) Select the Admission Control (ACM) check box to enable bandwidth-based CAC for this radio band. The default value is disabled. d) Click Apply. Configure the video bandwidth by following these steps:

Note The template bandwidth that is configured for a media stream should be more than the bandwidth for the source media stream. The voice configuration is optional. Keep the voice bandwidth allocation to a minimum for better performance. Note Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 a) Disable all WMM WLANs. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 341 Configuring VideoStream (GUI) b) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Media to open the 802.11a/n (5 GHZ) or 802.11b/g/n > Media page. c) Click the Video tab. d) Select the Admission Control (ACM) check box to enable the video CAC for this radio band. The default value is disabled. e) In the Max RF Bandwidth field, enter the percentage of the maximum bandwidth allocated to clients for video applications on this radio band. Once the client reaches the value specified, the access point rejects new requests on this radio band. f) The range is 5 to 85%. g) The default value is 9%. h) Click Apply. i) Reenable all WMM WLANs and click Apply. Configure the media bandwidth by following these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Media to open the 802.11a (or 802.11b) > Media > Parameters page. b) Click the Media tab to open the Media page. c) Select the Unicast Video Redirect check box to enable Unicast Video Redirect. The default value is disabled. d) In the Maximum Media Bandwidth (0-85%) text box, enter the percentage of the maximum bandwidth to be allocated for media applications on this radio band. Once the client reaches a specified value, the access point rejects new calls on this radio band. e) The default value is 85%; valid values are from 0% to 85%. f) In the Client Minimum Phy Rate text box, enter the minimum transmission data rate to the client. If the transmission data rate is below the phy rate, either the video will not start or the client may be classified as a bad client. The bad client video can be demoted for better effort QoS or subject to denial. g) In the Maximum Retry Percent (0-100%) text box, enter the percentage of maximum retries that are allowed. The default value is 80. If it exceeds 80, either the video will not start or the client might be classified as a bad client. The bad client video can be demoted for better effort QoS or subject to denial. h) Select the Multicast Direct Enable check box to enable the Multicast Direct Enable field. The default value is enabled. i) From the Max Streams per Radio drop-down list, choose the maximum number of streams allowed per radio from the range 0 to 20. The default value is set to No-limit. If you choose No-limit, there is no limit set for the number of client subscriptions. j) From the Max Streams per Client drop-down list, choose the maximum number of streams allowed per client from the range 0 to 20. The default value is set to No-limit. If you choose No-limit, there is no limit set for the number of client subscriptions. k) Select the Best Effort QoS Admission check box to enable best-effort QoS admission. l) Click Apply. Enable a WLAN by following these steps:

a) Choose WLANS > WLAN ID. The WLANs > Edit page appears. b) Select the Status check box. c) Click Apply. Enable the 802.11 a/n or 802.11 b/g/n network by following these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network. b) Select the 802.11a or 802.11b/g Network Status check box to enable the network status. c) Click Apply. Verify that the clients are associated with the multicast groups and group IDs by following these steps:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 342 Configuring VideoStream (CLI) a) Choose Monitor > Clients. The Clients page appears. b) Check if the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n network clients have the associated access points. c) Choose Monitor > Multicast. The Multicast Groups page appears. d) Select the MGID check box for the VideoStream to the clients. e) Click MGID. The Multicast Group Detail page appears. Check the Multicast Status details. Configuring VideoStream (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Configure the multicast-direct feature on WLANs media stream by entering this command:

config wlan media-stream multicast-direct {wlan_id | all} {enable | disable}

Enable or disable the multicast feature by entering this command:

config media-stream multicast-direct {enable | disable}

Configure various message configuration parameters by entering this command:

config media-stream message {state [enable | disable] | url url | email email | phone phone _number | note note}

Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Configure various global media-stream configurations by entering this command:

config media-stream add multicast-direct stream-name media_stream_name start_IP end_IP [template {very-coarse

| coarse | ordinary | low-resolution | med-resolution | high-resolution} | detail {Max_bandwidth bandwidth | packet size packet_size | Re-evaluation re-evaluation {periodic | initial}} video video priority {drop | fallback}

The Resource Reservation Control (RRC) parameters are assigned with the predefined values based on the values assigned to the template. The following templates are used to assign RRC parameters to the media stream:

Very Coarse (below 3000 kbps) Coarse (below 500 kbps) Ordinary (below 750 kbps) Low Resolution (below 1 mbps) Medium Resolution (below 3 mbps) High Resolution (below 5 mbps) Delete a media stream by entering this command:

config media-stream delete media_stream_name Enable a specific enhanced distributed channel access (EDC) profile by entering this command:

config advanced{ 801.11a | 802.11b} edca-parameters optimized-video-voice OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 343 Viewing and Debugging Media Streams Step 8 Enable the admission control on the desired bandwidth by entering the following commands:

Enable bandwidth-based voice CAC for 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac voice acm enable Set the percentage of the maximum bandwidth allocated to clients for voice applications on the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac voice max-bandwidth bandwidth Configure the percentage of the maximum allocated bandwidth reserved for roaming voice clients on the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cac voice roam-bandwidth bandwidth Note For TSpec and SIP based CAC for video calls, only Static method is supported. Step 9 Set the maximum number of streams per radio and/or per client by entering these commands:

Set the maximum limit to the number multicast streams per radio by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} media-stream multicast-direct radio-maximum [value | no-limit]

Set the maximum number of multicast streams per client by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} media-stream multicast-direct client-maximum [value | no-limit]

Step 10 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Viewing and Debugging Media Streams See the configured media streams by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id See the details of the media stream name by entering this command:

show 802.11{a | b | h} media-stream media-stream_name See the clients for a media stream by entering this command:

show 802.11a media-stream client media-stream-name See a summary of the media stream and client information by entering this command:

show media-stream group summary See details about a particular media stream group by entering this command:

show media-stream group detail media_stream_name See details of the 802.11a or 802.11b media resource reservation configuration by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} media-stream rrc Enable debugging of the media stream history by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 344 OL-28744-01 Viewing and Debugging Media Streams debug media-stream history {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 345 Viewing and Debugging Media Streams Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 346 OL-28744-01 P A R T IV Configuring Security Solutions Cisco Unified Wireless Network Solution Security, page 349 Configuring RADIUS, page 351 Configuring TACACS+, page 373 Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries, page 383 Configuring Local Network Users on the Controller, page 385 Configuring Password Policies, page 389 Configuring LDAP, page 393 Configuring Local EAP, page 399 Configuring the System for SpectraLink NetLink Telephones, page 409 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support, page 413 Using Management Over Wireless, page 417 Using Dynamic Interfaces for Management, page 419 Configuring DHCP Option 82, page 421 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists, page 425 Configuring Management Frame Protection, page 433 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies, page 439 Configuring Identity Networking, page 443 Configuring AAA Override, page 449 Managing Rogue Devices, page 453 Classifying Rogue Access Points, page 461 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP, page 475 Configuring Cisco Intrusion Detection System, page 481 Configuring IDS Signatures, page 487 Configuring wIPS, page 497 Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy, page 507 Configuring Web Auth Proxy, page 509 Detecting Active Exploits, page 513 C H A P T E R 40 Cisco Unified Wireless Network Solution Security Security Overview, page 349 Layer 1 Solutions, page 349 Layer 2 Solutions, page 349 Layer 3 Solutions, page 350 Integrated Security Solutions, page 350 Security Overview The Cisco Unified Wireless Network (UWN) security solution bundles potentially complicated Layer 1, Layer 2, and Layer 3 802.11 Access Point security components into a simple policy manager that customizes system-wide security policies on a per-WLAN basis. The Cisco UWN security solution provides simple, unified, and systematic security management tools. One of the biggest hurdles to WLAN deployment in the enterprise is WEP encryption, which is a weak standalone encryption method. A newer problem is the availability of low-cost access points, which can be connected to the enterprise network and used to mount man-in-the-middle and denial-of-service attacks. Layer 1 Solutions The Cisco UWN security solution ensures that all clients gain access within a user-set number of attempts. If a client fails to gain access within that limit, it is automatically excluded (blocked from access) until the user-set timer expires. The operating system can also disable SSID broadcasts on a per-WLAN basis. Layer 2 Solutions If a higher level of security and encryption is required, you can also implement industry-standard security solutions such as Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2. The Cisco UWN solution WPA implementation includes AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), TKIP and Michael

(temporal key integrity protocol and message integrity code checksum) dynamic keys, or WEP (Wired OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 349 Layer 3 Solutions Equivalent Privacy) static keys. Disabling is also used to automatically block Layer 2 access after a user-set number of failed authentication attempts. Regardless of the wireless security solution selected, all Layer 2 wired communications between controllers and lightweight access points are secured by passing data through CAPWAP tunnels. Restrictions for Layer 2 Solutions Cisco Aironet client adapter version 4.2 does not authenticate if WPA/WPA2 is used with CCKM as auth key management and a 2 second latency between the controller and AP. Layer 3 Solutions The WEP problem can be further solved using industry-standard Layer 3 security solutions such as passthrough VPNs (virtual private networks). The Cisco UWN solution supports local and RADIUS MAC (media access control) filtering. This filtering is best suited to smaller client groups with a known list of 802.11 access card MAC addresses. The Cisco UWN solution supports local and RADIUS user/password authentication. This authentication is best suited to small to medium client groups. Integrated Security Solutions The integrated security solutions are as follows:

Cisco Unified Wireless Network (UWN) solution operating system security is built around a 802.1X AAA (authorization, authentication and accounting) engine, which allows users to rapidly configure and enforce a variety of security policies across the Cisco UWN solution. The controllers and lightweight access points are equipped with system-wide authentication and authorization protocols across all ports and interfaces, maximizing system security. Operating system security policies are assigned to individual WLANs, and lightweight access points simultaneously broadcast all (up to 16) configured WLANs, which can eliminate the need for additional access points, which can increase interference and degrade system throughput. Operating system security uses the RRM function to continually monitor the air space for interference and security breaches and to notify the user when they are detected. Operating system security works with industry-standard authorization, authentication, and accounting

(AAA) servers. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 350 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 41 Configuring RADIUS Information About RADIUS, page 351 Configuring RADIUS on the ACS, page 353 Configuring RADIUS (GUI), page 354 Configuring RADIUS (CLI), page 358 RADIUS Authentication Attributes Sent by the Controller, page 361 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace), page 364 RADIUS Accounting Attributes, page 371 Information About RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a client/server protocol that provides centralized security for users attempting to gain management access to a network. It serves as a backend database similar to local and TACACS+ and provides authentication and accounting services:

AuthenticationThe process of verifying users when they attempt to log into the controller. Users must enter a valid username and password in order for the controller to authenticate users to the RADIUS server. If multiple databases are configured, you can specify the sequence in which the backend database must be tired. AccountingThe process of recording user actions and changes. Whenever a user successfully executes an action, the RADIUS accounting server logs the changed attributes, the user ID of the person who made the change, the remote host where the user is logged in, the date and time when the command was executed, the authorization level of the user, and a description of the action performed and the values provided. If the RADIUS accounting server becomes unreachable, users are able to continue their sessions uninterrupted. RADIUS uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP) for its transport. It maintains a database and listens on UDP port 1812 for incoming authentication requests and UDP port 1813 for incoming accounting requests. The controller, which requires access control, acts as the client and requests AAA services from the server. The traffic between the controller and the server is encrypted by an algorithm defined in the protocol and a shared secret key configured on both devices. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 351 Information About RADIUS You can configure multiple RADIUS accounting and authentication servers. For example, you may want to have one central RADIUS authentication server but several RADIUS accounting servers in different regions. If you configure multiple servers of the same type and the first one fails or becomes unreachable, the controller automatically tries the second one, then the third one if necessary, and so on. When a management user is authenticated using a RADIUS server, only the PAP protocol is used. For web authentication users, PAP, MSCHAPv2 and MD5 security mechanisms are supported. RADIUS Server Support You can configure up to 17 RADIUS authentication and accounting servers each. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured for redundancy, the user database must be identical in all the servers for the backup to work properly. One Time Passwords (OTPs) are supported on the controller using RADIUS. In this configuration, the controller acts as a transparent passthrough device. The controller forwards all client requests to the RADIUS server without inspecting the client behavior. When using OTP, the client must establish a single connection to the controller to function properly. The controller currently does not have any intelligence or checks to correct a client that is trying to establish multiple connections. To create a read-only controller user on the RADIUS sever, you must set the service type to NAS prompt instead of Callback NAS prompt. If you set the service type to Callback NAS Prompt, the user authentication fails while setting it to NAS prompt gives the user read-only access to the controller. Also, the Callback Administrative service type gives the user the lobby ambassador privileges to the controller. Radius ACS Support You must configure RADIUS on both your CiscoSecure Access Control Server (ACS) and your controller. RADIUS is supported on CiscoSecure ACS version 3.2 and later releases. See the CiscoSecure ACS documentation for the version that you are running. Primary and Fallback RADIUS Servers The primary RADIUS server (the server with the lowest server index) is assumed to be the most preferable server for the controller. If the primary server becomes unresponsive, the controller switches to the next active backup server (the server with the next lowest server index). The controller continues to use this backup server, unless you configure the controller to fall back to the primary RADIUS server when it recovers and becomes responsive or to a more preferable server from the available backup servers. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 352 OL-28744-01 Configuring RADIUS on the ACS Configuring RADIUS on the ACS Step 1 Step 2 Choose Network Configuration on the ACS main page. Choose Add Entry under AAA Clients to add your controller to the server. The Add AAA Client page appears. Figure 38: Add AAA Client Page on CiscoSecure ACS Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 In the AAA Client Hostname text box, enter the name of your controller. In the AAA Client IP Address text box, enter the IP address of your controller. In the Shared Secret text box, enter the shared secret key to be used for authentication between the server and the controller. Note The shared secret key must be the same on both the server and the controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 353 Configuring RADIUS (GUI) Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 From the Authenticate Using drop-down list, choose RADIUS (Cisco Airespace). Click Submit + Apply to save your changes. Choose Interface Configuration on the ACS main page. Choose RADIUS (Cisco Aironet). The RADIUS (Cisco Aironet) page appears. Under User Group, select the Cisco-Aironet-Session-Timeout check box. Click Submit to save your changes. On the ACS main page, from the left navigation pane, choose System Configuration. Choose Logging. When the Logging Configuration page appears, enable all of the events that you want to be logged and save your changes. On the ACS main page, from the left navigation pane, choose Group Setup. Choose a previously created group from the Group drop-down list. Note This step assumes that you have already assigned users to groups on the ACS according to the roles to which they will be assigned. Click Edit Settings. The Group Setup page appears. Under Cisco Aironet Attributes, select the Cisco-Aironet-Session-Timeout check box and enter a session timeout value in the edit box. Specify read-only or read-write access to controllers through RADIUS authentication, by setting the Service-Type attribute (006) to Callback NAS Prompt for read-only access or to Administrative for read-write privileges. If you do not set this attribute, the authentication process completes successfully (without an authorization error on the controller), but you might be prompted to authenticate again. Note If you set the Service-Type attribute on the ACS, make sure to select the Management check box on the RADIUS Authentication Servers page of the controller GUI. Step 20 Click Submit to save your changes. Configuring RADIUS (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Security > AAA > RADIUS. Perform one of the following:

If you want to configure a RADIUS server for authentication, choose Authentication. If you want to configure a RADIUS server for accounting, choose Accounting. Note The pages used to configure authentication and accounting contain mostly the same text boxes. Therefore, these instructions walk through the configuration only once, using the Authentication pages as examples. You would follow the same steps to configure multiple services and/or multiple servers. The RADIUS Authentication (or Accounting) Servers page appears. This page lists any RADIUS servers that have already been configured. If you want to delete an existing server, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that server and choose Remove. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 354 OL-28744-01 Configuring RADIUS (GUI) If you want to make sure that the controller can reach a particular server, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that server and choose Ping. Step 3 From the Call Station ID Type drop-down list, choose the option that is sent to the RADIUS server in the Access-Request message. The following options are available:

IP Address System MAC Address AP MAC Address AP MAC Address:SSID AP Name:SSID AP Name AP Group Flex Group AP Location VLAN ID Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Note The AP Name:SSID, AP Name, AP Group, Flex Group, AP Location, and VLAN ID options are added in the 7.4 release. Enable RADIUS-to-controller key transport using AES key wrap protection by selecting the Use AES Key Wrap check box. The default value is unselected. This feature is required for FIPS customers. Click Apply. Perform one of the following:

To edit an existing RADIUS server, click the server index number for that server. The RADIUS Authentication

(or Accounting) Servers > Edit page appears. To add a RADIUS server, click New. The RADIUS Authentication (or Accounting) Servers > New page appears. If you are adding a new server, choose a number from the Server Index (Priority) drop-down list to specify the priority order of this server in relation to any other configured RADIUS servers providing the same service. If you are adding a new server, enter the IP address of the RADIUS server in the Server IP Address text box. From the Shared Secret Format drop-down list, choose ASCII or Hex to specify the format of the shared secret key to be used between the controller and the RADIUS server. The default value is ASCII. In the Shared Secret and Confirm Shared Secret text boxes, enter the shared secret key to be used for authentication between the controller and the server. Note The shared secret key must be the same on both the server and the controller. If you are configuring a new RADIUS authentication server and want to enable AES key wrap, which makes the shared secret between the controller and the RADIUS server more secure, follow these steps:

Note AES key wrap is designed for Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) customers and requires a key-wrap compliant RADIUS authentication server. a) Select the Key Wrap check box. b) From the Key Wrap Format drop-down list, choose ASCII or HEX to specify the format of the AES key wrap keys: Key Encryption Key (KEK) and Message Authentication Code Key (MACK). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 355 Configuring RADIUS (GUI) Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 c) In the Key Encryption Key (KEK) text box, enter the 16-byte KEK. d) In the Message Authentication Code Key (MACK) text box, enter the 20-byte KEK. If you are adding a new server, enter the RADIUS servers UDP port number for the interface protocols in the Port Number text box. The valid range is 1 to 65535, and the default value is 1812 for authentication and 1813 for accounting. From the Server Status text box, choose Enabled to enable this RADIUS server or choose Disabled to disable it. The default value is enabled. If you are configuring a new RADIUS authentication server, choose Enabled from the Support for RFC 3576 drop-down list to enable RFC 3576, which is an extension to the RADIUS protocol that allows dynamic changes to a user session, or choose Disabled to disable this feature. The default value is Enabled. RFC 3576 includes support for disconnecting users and changing authorizations applicable to a user session and supports disconnect and change-of-authorization

(CoA) messages. Disconnect messages cause a user session to be terminated immediately where CoA messages modify session authorization attributes such as data filters. In the Server Timeout text box, enter the number of seconds between retransmissions. The valid range is 2 to 30 seconds, and the default value is 2 seconds. Select the Key Wrap check box. Note We recommend that you increase the timeout value if you experience repeated reauthentication attempts or the controller falls back to the backup server when the primary server is active and reachable. Select the Network User check box to enable network user authentication (or accounting), or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is selected. If you enable this feature, this entry is considered the RADIUS authentication (or accounting) server for network users. If you did not configure a RADIUS server entry on the WLAN, you must enable this option for network users. If you are configuring a RADIUS authentication server, select the Management check box to enable management authentication, or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is selected. If you enable this feature, this entry is considered the RADIUS authentication server for management users, and authentication requests go to the RADIUS server. Select the IPSec check box to enable the IP security mechanism, or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is unselected. If you enabled IPsec in Step 17, follow these steps to configure additional IPsec parameters:

a) From the IPSec drop-down list, choose one of the following options as the authentication protocol to be used for IP security: HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA1. The default value is HMAC SHA1. A message authentication code (MAC) is used between two parties that share a secret key to validate information transmitted between them. HMAC (Hash MAC) is based on cryptographic hash functions. It can be used in combination with any iterated cryptographic hash function. HMAC MD5 and HMAC SHA1 are two constructs of the HMAC using the MD5 hash function and the SHA1 hash function. HMAC also uses a secret key for calculation and verification of the message authentication values. b) From the IPSec Encryption drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify the IP security encryption mechanism:

DESData Encryption Standard that is a method of data encryption using a private (secret) key. DES applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data. 3DESData Encryption Standard that applies three keys in succession. This is the default value. AES CBCAdvanced Encryption Standard that uses keys with a length of 128, 192, or 256 bits to encrypt data blocks with a length of 128, 192, or 256 bits. AES 128 CBC uses a 128-bit data path in Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) mode. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 356 OL-28744-01 Configuring RADIUS (GUI) c) From the IKE Phase 1 drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify the Internet Key Exchange

(IKE) protocol: Aggressive or Main. The default value is Aggressive. IKE Phase 1 is used to negotiate how IKE should be protected. Aggressive mode passes more information in fewer packets with the benefit of slightly faster connection establishment at the cost of transmitting the identities of the security gateways in the clear. d) In the Lifetime text box, enter a value (in seconds) to specify the timeout interval for the session. The valid range is 1800 to 57600 seconds, and the default value is 1800 seconds. e) From the IKE Diffie Hellman Group drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify the IKE Diffie Hellman group: Group 1 (768 bits), Group 2 (1024 bits), or Group 5 (1536 bits). The default value is Group 1

(768 bits). Diffie-Hellman techniques are used by two devices to generate a symmetric key through which they can publicly exchange values and generate the same symmetric key. Although all three groups provide security from conventional attacks, Group 5 is considered more secure because of its larger key size. However, computations involving Group 1 and Group 2 based keys might occur slightly faster because of their smaller prime number size. Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Repeat the previous steps if you want to configure any additional services on the same server or any additional RADIUS servers. Specify the RADIUS server fallback behavior, as follows:

a) Choose Security > AAA > RADIUS > Fallback to open the RADIUS > Fallback Parameters to open the fallback parameters page. b) From the Fallback Mode drop-down list, choose one of the following options:

OffDisables RADIUS server fallback. This is the default value. PassiveCauses the controller to revert to a server with a lower priority from the available backup servers without using extraneous probe messages. The controller ignores all inactive servers for a time period and retries later when a RADIUS message needs to be sent. ActiveCauses the controller to revert to a server with a lower priority from the available backup servers by using RADIUS probe messages to proactively determine whether a server that has been marked inactive is back online. The controller ignores all inactive servers for all active RADIUS requests. Once the primary server receives a response from the recovered ACS server, the active fallback RADIUS server no longer sends probe messages to the server requesting the active probe authentication. c) If you enabled Active fallback mode in Step b, enter the name to be sent in the inactive server probes in the Username text box. You can enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters. The default value is cisco-probe. d) If you enabled Active fallback mode in Step b, enter the probe interval value (in seconds) in the Interval in Sec text box. The interval serves as inactive time in passive mode and probe interval in active mode. The valid range is 180 to 3600 seconds, and the default value is 300 seconds. Specify the order of authentication when multiple databases are configured by choosing Security > Priority Order >

Management User. The Priority Order > Management User page appears. In the Order Used for Authentication text box, specify which servers have priority when the controller attempts to authenticate management users. Use the > and < buttons to move servers between the Not Used and Order Used for Authentication text boxes. After the desired servers appear in the Order Used for Authentication text box, use the Up and Down buttons to move the priority server to the top of the list. Step 23 Step 24 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 357 Configuring RADIUS (CLI) By default, the local database is always queried first. If the username is not found, the controller switches to the RADIUS server if configured for RADIUS or to the TACACS+ server if configured for TACACS+. The default setting is local and then RADIUS. Step 25 Step 26 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring RADIUS (CLI) Specify whether the IP address, system MAC address, AP MAC address, AP Ethernet MAC address of the originator will be sent to the RADIUS server in the Access-Request message by entering this command:

config radius callStationIdType {ipaddr | macaddr | ap-macaddr-only | ap-macaddr-ssid |

ap-group-name | ap-location | ap-name | ap-name-ssid | flex-group-name | vlan-id}

|

|

Note The default is System MAC Address. Caution Do not use callStation IdType for IPv6-only clients. Specify the delimiter to be used in the MAC addresses that are sent to the RADIUS authentication or accounting server in Access-Request messages by entering this command:

config radius {auth | acct} mac-delimiter {colon | hyphen | single-hyphen | none}

where colon sets the delimiter to a colon (the format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx). hyphen sets the delimiter to a hyphen (the format is xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx). This is the default value. single-hyphen sets the delimiter to a single hyphen (the format is xxxxxx-xxxxxx). none disables delimiters (the format is xxxxxxxxxxxx). Configure a RADIUS authentication server by entering these commands:

config radius auth add index server_ip_address port# {ascii | hex} shared_secretAdds a RADIUS authentication server. config radius auth keywrap {enable | disable}Enables AES key wrap, which makes the shared secret between the controller and the RADIUS server more secure. AES key wrap is designed for Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) customers and requires a key-wrap compliant RADIUS authentication server. config radius auth keywrap add {ascii | hex} kek mack indexConfigures the AES key wrap attributes where Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 358 OL-28744-01 Configuring RADIUS (CLI) kek specifies the 16-byte Key Encryption Key (KEK). mack specifies the 20-byte Message Authentication Code Key (MACK). index specifies the index of the RADIUS authentication server on which to configure the AES key wrap. config radius auth rfc3576 {enable | disable} indexEnables or disables RFC 3576, which is an extension to the RADIUS protocol that allows dynamic changes to a user session. RFC 3576 includes support for disconnecting users and changing authorizations applicable to a user session and supports disconnect and change-of-authorization (CoA) messages. Disconnect messages cause a user session to be terminated immediately where CoA messages modify session authorization attributes such as data filters. config radius auth retransmit-timeout index timeoutConfigures the retransmission timeout value for a RADIUS authentication server. config radius auth network index {enable | disable}Enables or disables network user authentication. If you enable this feature, this entry is considered the RADIUS authentication server for network users. If you did not configure a RADIUS server entry on the WLAN, you must enable this option for network users. config radius auth management index {enable | disable}Enables or disables management authentication. If you enable this feature, this entry is considered the RADIUS authentication server for management users, and authentication requests go to the RADIUS server. config radius auth ipsec {enable | disable} indexEnables or disables the IP security mechanism. config radius auth ipsec authentication {hmac-md5 | hmac-sha1} indexConfigures the authentication protocol to be used for IP security. config radius auth ipsec encryption {3des | aes | des | none} indexConfigures the IP security encryption mechanism. config radius auth ipsec ike dh-group {group-1 | group-2 | group-5} indexConfigures the IKE Diffie-Hellman group. config radius auth ipsec ike lifetime interval indexConfigures the timeout interval for the session. config radius auth ipsec ike phase1{aggressive | main} indexConfigures the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol. config radius auth {enable | disable} indexEnables or disables a RADIUS authentication server. config radius auth delete indexDeletes a previously added RADIUS authentication server. Configure a RADIUS accounting server by entering these commands:

config radius acct add index server_ip_address port# {ascii | hex} shared_secretAdds a RADIUS accounting server. config radius acct server-timeout index timeoutConfigures the retransmission timeout value for a RADIUS accounting server. config radius acct network index {enable | disable}Enables or disables network user accounting. If you enable this feature, this entry is considered the RADIUS accounting server for network OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 359 Configuring RADIUS (CLI) users. If you did not configure a RADIUS server entry on the WLAN, you must enable this option for network users. config radius acct ipsec {enable | disable} indexEnables or disables the IP security mechanism. config radius acct ipsec authentication {hmac-md5 | hmac-sha1} indexConfigures the authentication protocol to be used for IP security. config radius acct ipsec encryption {3des | aes | des | none} indexConfigures the IP security encryption mechanism. config radius acct ipsec ike dh-group {group-1 | group-2 | group-5} indexConfigures the IKE Diffie Hellman group. config radius acct ipsec ike lifetime interval indexConfigures the timeout interval for the session. config radius acct ipsec ike phase1{aggressive | main} indexConfigures the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol. config radius acct {enable | disable} indexEnables or disables a RADIUS accounting server. config radius acct delete indexDeletes a previously added RADIUS accounting server. Configure the RADIUS server fallback behavior by entering this command:

config radius fallback-test mode {off | passive | active}

where off disables RADIUS server fallback. passive causes the controller to revert to a server with a lower priority from the available backup servers without using extraneous probe messages. The controller simply ignores all inactive servers for a time period and retries later when a RADIUS message needs to be sent. active causes the controller to revert to a server with a lower priority from the available backup servers by using RADIUS probe messages to proactively determine whether a server that has been marked inactive is back online. The controller simply ignores all inactive servers for all active RADIUS requests. Once the primary server receives a response from the recovered ACS server, the active fallback RADIUS server no longer sends probe messages to the server requesting the active probe authentication. If you enabled Active mode in Step 5, enter these commands to configure additional fallback parameters:

config radius fallback-test username usernameSpecifies the name to be sent in the inactive server probes. You can enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the username parameter. config radius fallback-test interval intervalSpecifies the probe interval value (in seconds). Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Configure the order of authentication when multiple databases are configured by entering this command:

config aaa auth mgmt AAA_server_type AAA_server_type where AAA_server_type is local, radius, or tacacs. To see the current management authentication server order, enter the show aaa auth command. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 360 OL-28744-01 RADIUS Authentication Attributes Sent by the Controller See RADIUS statistics by entering these commands:

show radius summaryShows a summary of RADIUS servers and statistics with AP Ethernet MAC configurations. show radius auth statisticsShows the RADIUS authentication server statistics. show radius acct statisticsShows the RADIUS accounting server statistics. show radius rfc3576 statisticsShows a summary of the RADIUS RFC-3576 server. See active security associations by entering these commands:

show ike {brief | detailed} ip_or_mac_addrShows a brief or detailed summary of active IKE security associations. show ipsec {brief | detailed} ip_or_mac_addrShows a brief or detailed summary of active IPSec security associations. Clear the statistics for one or more RADIUS servers by entering this command:

clear stats radius {auth | acct} {index | all}

Make sure that the controller can reach the RADIUS server by entering this command:

ping server_ip_address RADIUS Authentication Attributes Sent by the Controller The following tables identify the RADIUS authentication attributes sent between the controller and the RADIUS server in access-request and access-accept packets. Table 8: Authentication Attributes Sent in Access-Request Packets Attribute ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 30 31 32 33 60 Description User-Name Password CHAP-Password NAS-IP-Address NAS-Port Service-Type4 Framed-MTU Called-Station-ID (MAC address) Calling-Station-ID (MAC address) NAS-Identifier Proxy-State CHAP-Challenge OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 361 RADIUS Authentication Attributes Sent by the Controller Attribute ID 61 79 243 Description NAS-Port-Type EAP-Message TPLUS-Role 4 To specify read-only or read-write access to controllers through RADIUS authentication, you must set the Service-Type attribute (6) on the RADIUS server to Callback NAS Prompt for read-only access or to Administrative for read-write privileges. Table 9: Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Cisco) Attribute ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Cisco-LEAP-Session-Key Cisco-Keywrap-Msg-Auth-Code Cisco-Keywrap-NonCE Cisco-Keywrap-Key Cisco-URL-Redirect Cisco-URL-Redirect-ACL Note These Cisco-specific attributes are not supported: Auth-Algo-Type and SSID. Table 10: Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Standard) Attribute ID Description 6 8 25 26 27 29 40 64 79 Service-Type. To specify read-only or read-write access to controllers through RADIUS authentication, you must set the Service-Type attribute

(6) on the RADIUS server to Callback NAS Prompt for read-only access or to Administrative for read-write privileges. Framed-IP-Address Class Vendor-Specific Timeout Termination-Action Acct-Status-Type Tunnel-Type EAP-Message Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 362 OL-28744-01 RADIUS Authentication Attributes Sent by the Controller 81 Tunnel-Group-ID Note Message authentication is not supported. Table 11: Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Microsoft) Attribute ID 11 16 17 25 26 Description MS-CHAP-Challenge MS-MPPE-Send-Key MS-MPPE-Receive-Key MS-MSCHAP2-Response MS-MSCHAP2-Success Table 12: Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) Attribute ID 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 Description VAP-ID DSCP 8021P-Type VLAN-Interface-Name ACL-Name Data-Bandwidth-Average-Contract Real-Time-Bandwidth-Average-Contract Data-Bandwidth-Burst-Contract Real-Time-Bandwidth-Burst-Contract Guest-Role-Name Data-Bandwidth-Average-Contract-US Real-Time-Bandwidth-Average-Contract-US Data-Bandwidth-Burst-Contract-US Real-Time-Bandwidth-Burst-Contract-US OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 363 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) This section lists the RADIUS authentication Airespace attributes currently supported on the Cisco WLC. VAP ID This attribute indicates the WLAN ID of the WLAN to which the client should belong. When the WLAN-ID attribute is present in the RADIUS Access Accept, the system applies the WLAN-ID (SSID) to the client station after it authenticates. The WLAN ID is sent by the Cisco WLC in all instances of authentication except IPsec. In case of web authentication, if the Cisco WLC receives a WLAN-ID attribute in the authentication response from the AAA server, and it does not match the ID of the WLAN, authentication is rejected. Other types of security methods do not do this. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

Type Vendor-Id (cont.)

|

| Vendor type WLAN ID (VALUE) Vendor-Id

| Length 3 Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 1 Vendor length 4 Value ID of the WLAN to which the client should belong. QoS-Level This attribute indicates the QoS level to be applied to the mobile client's traffic within the switching fabric, as well as over the air. This example shows a summary of the QoS-Level Attribute format. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

Type Vendor-Id (cont.)

|

| Vendor type Vendor-Id QoS Level

| Length 3 Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 2 Vendor length 4 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 364 OL-28744-01 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) Value Three octets:

3 Bronze (Background) 0 Silver (Best Effort) 1 Gold (Video) 2 Platinum (Voice) Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) DSCP is a packet header code that can be used to provide differentiated services based on the QoS levels. This attribute defines the DSCP value to be applied to a client. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the DSCP value overrides the DSCP value specified in the WLAN profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 2 Type Vendor-Id (cont.) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor type | Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

DSCP (VALUE) Vendor-Id

| Length 3 Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 3 Vendor length 4 Value DSCP value to be applied for the client. 802.1p Tag Type 802.1p VLAN tag received from the client, defining the access priority. This tag maps to the QoS Level for client-to-network packets. This attribute defines the 802.1p priority to be applied to the client. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the 802.1p value overrides the default specified in the WLAN profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 2 Type Vendor-Id (cont.) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor type | Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

802.1p (VALUE) Vendor-Id

| Length 3 Type 26 for Vendor-Specific OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 365 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 4 Vendor length 3 Value 802.1p priority to be applied to a client. VLAN Interface Name This attribute indicates the VLAN interface a client is to be associated to. A summary of the Interface-Name Attribute format is shown below. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id Type Vendor-Id (cont.) Interface Name... 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor type | Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length >7 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 5 Vendor length >0 Value A string that includes the name of the interface the client is to be assigned to. Note This attribute only works when MAC filtering is enabled or if 802.1X or WPA is used as the security policy. ACL-Name This attribute indicates the ACL name to be applied to the client. A summary of the ACL-Name Attribute format is shown below. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Type Vendor-Id (cont.) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length >7

|

| Vendor type ACL Name... Vendor-Id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 366 OL-28744-01 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 6 Vendor length >0 Value A string that includes the name of the ACL to use for the client Data Bandwidth Average Contract This attribute is a rate limiting value. It indicates the Data Bandwidth Average Contract that will be applied for a client for non-realtime traffic such as TCP. This value is specific for downstream direction from wired to wireless. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the Data Bandwidth Average Contract value overrides the Average Data Rate value present in the WLAN or QoS Profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id

|

| Vendor type Data Bandwidth Average Contract... Type Vendor-Id (cont.) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 7 Vendor length 4 Value A value in kbps Real Time Bandwidth Average Contract This attribute is a rate limiting value. It indicates the Data Bandwidth Average Contract that will be applied to a client for realtime traffic such as UDP. This value is specific for downstream direction from wired to wireless. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the Real Time Bandwidth Average Contract value overrides the Average Real-Time Rate value present in the WLAN or QoS Profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id

|

| Vendor type Type Vendor-Id (cont.) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Real Time Bandwidth Average Contract... OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 367 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) Vendor type 8 Vendor length 4 Value A value in kbps Data Bandwidth Burst Contract This attribute is a rate limiting value. It indicates the Data Bandwidth Burst Contract that will be applied to a client for non-realtime traffic such as TCP. This value is specific to downstream direction from wired to wireless. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the Data Bandwidth Burst Contract value overrides the Burst Data Rate value present in the WLAN or QoS Profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id

|

| Vendor type Data Bandwidth Burst Contract... Type Vendor-Id (cont.) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 9 Vendor length 4 Value A value in kbps Real Time Bandwidth Burst Contract This attribute is a rate limiting value. It indicates the Data Bandwidth Burst Contract that will be applied to a client for realtime traffic such as UDP. This value is specific to downstream direction from wired to wireless. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the Real Time Bandwidth Burst Contract value overrides the Burst Real-Time Rate value present in the WLAN or QoS Profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id Type Vendor-Id (cont.)

|

| Vendor type Real Time Bandwidth Burst Contract... 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 10 Vendor length 4 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 368 OL-28744-01 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) Value A value in kbps Guest Role Name This attribute provides the bandwidth contract values to be applied for an authenticating user. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the bandwidth contract values defined for the Guest Role overrides the bandwidth contract values (based on QOS value) specified for the WLAN. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id GuestRoleName ...

|

| Vendor type Type Vendor-Id (cont.) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 11 Vendor length Variable based on the Guest Role Name length Value A string of alphanumeric characters Data Bandwidth Average Contract Upstream This attribute is a rate limiting value. It indicates the Data Bandwidth Average Contract that will be applied to a client for non-realtime traffic such as TCP. This value is specific to upstream direction from wireless to wired. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the Data Bandwidth Average Contract value overrides the Average Data Rate value present in the WLAN or QoS Profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id

|

| Vendor type Type Vendor-Id (cont.) Data Bandwidth Average Contract Upstream... 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 13 Vendor length 4 Value A value in kbps OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 369 Authentication Attributes Honored in Access-Accept Packets (Airespace) Real Time Bandwidth Average Contract Upstream This attribute is a rate limiting value. It indicates the Data Bandwidth Average Contract that will be applied to a client for realtime traffic such as UDP. This value is specific to upstream direction from wireless to wired. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the Real Time Bandwidth Average Contract value overrides the Average Real-Time Rate value present in the WLAN or QoS Profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id

|

| Vendor type Type Vendor-Id (cont.) Real Time Bandwidth Average Contract Upstream... 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 14 Vendor length 4 Value A value in kbps Data Bandwidth Burst Contract Upstream This attribute is a rate limiting value. It indicates the Data Bandwidth Burst Contract that will be applied to a client for non-realtime traffic such as TCP. This value is specific to upstream direction from wireless to wired. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the Data Bandwidth Burst Contract value overrides the Burst Data Rate value present in the WLAN or QoS Profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id

|

| Vendor type Type Vendor-Id (cont.) Data Bandwidth Burst Contract Upstream... 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 15 Vendor length 4 Value A value in kbps Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 370 OL-28744-01 RADIUS Accounting Attributes Real Time Bandwidth Burst Contract Upstream This attribute is a rate limiting value. It indicates the Data Bandwidth Burst Contract that will be applied to a client for realtime traffic such as UDP. This value is specific to upstream direction from wireless to wired. When present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the Real Time Bandwidth Burst Contract value overrides the Burst Real-Time Rate value present in the WLAN or QoS Profile. The fields are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id

|

| Vendor type Type Vendor-Id (cont.) Real Time Bandwidth Burst Contract Upstream... 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 16 Vendor length 4 Value A value in kbps RADIUS Accounting Attributes This table identifies the RADIUS accounting attributes for accounting requests sent from a controller to the RADIUS server. Table 13: Accounting Attributes for Accounting Requests Attribute ID 1 4 5 8 25 30 31 32 40 41 42 Description User-Name NAS-IP-Address NAS-Port Framed-IP-Address Class Called-Station-ID (MAC address) Calling-Station-ID (MAC address) NAS-Identifier Accounting-Status-Type Accounting-Delay-Time (Stop and interim messages only) Accounting-Input-Octets (Stop and interim messages only) OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 371 RADIUS Accounting Attributes Attribute ID 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 52 53 55 64 65 81 Description Accounting-Output-Octets (Stop and interim messages only) Accounting-Session-ID Accounting-Authentic Accounting-Session-Time (Stop and interim messages only) Accounting-Input-Packets (Stop and interim messages only) Accounting-Output-Packets (Stop and interim messages only) Accounting-Terminate-Cause (Stop messages only) Accounting-Input-Gigawords Accounting-Output-Gigawords Event-Timestamp Tunnel-Type Tunnel-Medium-Type Tunnel-Group-ID This table lists the different values for the Accounting-Status-Type attribute (40). Table 14: Accounting-Status-Type Attribute Values Attribute ID Description 1 2 3 7 8 9-14 15 Start Stop Interim-Update Accounting-On Accounting-Off Reserved for Tunneling Accounting Reserved for Failed Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 372 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 42 Configuring TACACS+

Information About TACACS+, page 373 Configuring TACACS+ on the ACS, page 376 Configuring TACACS+ (GUI), page 378 Configuring TACACS+ (CLI), page 379 Viewing the TACACS+ Administration Server Logs, page 380 Information About TACACS+

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+) is a client/server protocol that provides centralized security for users attempting to gain management access to a controller. It serves as a backend database similar to local and RADIUS. However, local and RADIUS provide only authentication support and limited authorization support while TACACS+ provides three services:

AuthenticationThe process of verifying users when they attempt to log into the controller. Users must enter a valid username and password in order for the controller to authenticate users to the TACACS+ server. The authentication and authorization services are tied to one another. For example, if authentication is performed using the local or RADIUS database, then authorization would use the permissions associated with the user in the local or RADIUS database (which are read-only, read-write, and lobby-admin) and not use TACACS+. Similarly, when authentication is performed using TACACS+, authorization is tied to TACACS+. Note When multiple databases are configured, you can use the controller GUI or CLI to specify the sequence in which the backend databases should be tried. AuthorizationThe process of determining the actions that users are allowed to take on the controller based on their level of access. For TACACS+, authorization is based on privilege (or role) rather than specific actions. The available roles correspond to the seven menu options on the controller GUI: MONITOR, WLAN, CONTROLLER, WIRELESS, SECURITY, MANAGEMENT, and COMMANDS. An additional role, LOBBY, is available for users who require only lobby ambassador privileges. The roles to which users are assigned are OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 373 Information About TACACS+

configured on the TACACS+ server. Users can be authorized for one or more roles. The minimum authorization is MONITOR only, and the maximum is ALL, which authorizes the user to execute the functionality associated with all seven menu options. For example, a user who is assigned the role of SECURITY can make changes to any items appearing on the Security menu (or designated as security commands in the case of the CLI). If users are not authorized for a particular role (such as WLAN), they can still access that menu option in read-only mode (or the associated CLI show commands). If the TACACS+ authorization server becomes unreachable or unable to authorize, users are unable to log into the controller. Note If users attempt to make changes on a controller GUI page that are not permitted for their assigned role, a message appears indicating that they do not have sufficient privilege. If users enter a controller CLI command that is not permitted for their assigned role, a message may appear indicating that the command was successfully executed although it was not. In this case, the following additional message appears to inform users that they lack sufficient privileges to successfully execute the command: Insufficient Privilege! Cannot execute command!

AccountingThe process of recording user actions and changes. Whenever a user successfully executes an action, the TACACS+ accounting server logs the changed attributes, the user ID of the person who made the change, the remote host where the user is logged in, the date and time when the command was executed, the authorization level of the user, and a description of the action performed and the values provided. If the TACACS+ accounting server becomes unreachable, users are able to continue their sessions uninterrupted. TACACS+ uses Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) for its transport, unlike RADIUS which uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP). It maintains a database and listens on TCP port 49 for incoming requests. The controller, which requires access control, acts as the client and requests AAA services from the server. The traffic between the controller and the server is encrypted by an algorithm defined in the protocol and a shared secret key configured on both devices. You can configure up to three TACACS+ authentication, authorization, and accounting servers each. For example, you may want to have one central TACACS+ authentication server but several TACACS+

authorization servers in different regions. If you configure multiple servers of the same type and the first one fails or becomes unreachable, the controller automatically tries the second one and then the third one if necessary. Note If multiple TACACS+ servers are configured for redundancy, the user database must be identical in all the servers for the backup to work properly. The following are some guidelines about TACACS+:

You must configure TACACS+ on both your CiscoSecure Access Control Server (ACS) and your controller. You can configure the controller through either the GUI or the CLI. TACACS+ is supported on CiscoSecure ACS version 3.2 and later releases. See the CiscoSecure ACS documentation for the version that you are running. One Time Passwords (OTPs) are supported on the controller using TACACS. In this configuration, the controller acts as a transparent passthrough device. The controller forwards all client requests to the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 374 OL-28744-01 Information About TACACS+

TACACS server without inspecting the client behavior. When using OTP, the client must establish a single connection to the controller to function properly. The controller currently does not have any intelligence or checks to correct a client that is trying to establish multiple connections. We recommend that you increase the retransmit timeout value for TACACS+ authentication, authorization, and accounting servers if you experience repeated reauthentication attempts or the controller falls back to the backup server when the primary server is active and reachable. The default retransmit timeout value is 2 seconds and you can increase the retransmit timeout value to a maximum of 30 seconds. TACACS+ VSA The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) draft standard specifies a method for communicating vendor-specific attributes (VSAs) between the network access server and the TACACS+ server. The IETF uses attribute 26. VSAs allow vendors to support their own extended attributes that are not suitable for general use. The Cisco TACACS+ implementation supports one vendor-specific option using the format recommended in the IETF specification. The Cisco vendor ID is 9, and the supported option is vendor type 1, which is named cisco-av-pair. The value is a string with the following format:

protocol : attribute separator value *

The protocol is a Cisco attribute for a particular type of authorization, the separator is = (equal sign) for mandatory attributes, and * (asterisk) indicates optional attributes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 375 Configuring TACACS+ on the ACS Configuring TACACS+ on the ACS Step 1 Step 2 Choose Network Configuration on the ACS main page. Choose Add Entry under AAA Clients to add your controller to the server. The Add AAA Client page appears. Figure 39: Add AAA Client Page on CiscoSecure ACS Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 In the AAA Client Hostname text box, enter the name of your controller. In the AAA Client IP Address text box, enter the IP address of your controller. In the Shared Secret text box, enter the shared secret key to be used for authentication between the server and the controller. Note The shared secret key must be the same on both the server and the controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 376 OL-28744-01 Configuring TACACS+ on the ACS Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 From the Authenticate Using drop-down list, choose TACACS+ (Cisco IOS). Click Submit + Apply to save your changes. On the ACS main page, in the left navigation pane, choose Interface Configuration. Choose TACACS+ (Cisco IOS). The TACACS+ (Cisco) page appears. Under TACACS+ Services, select the Shell (exec) check box. Under New Services, select the first check box and enter ciscowlc in the Service text box and common in the Protocol text box. Under Advanced Configuration Options, select the Advanced TACACS+ Features check box. Click Submit to save your changes. On the ACS main page, in the left navigation pane, choose System Configuration. Choose Logging. When the Logging Configuration page appears, enable all of the events that you want to be logged and save your changes. On the ACS main page, in the left navigation pane, choose Group Setup. From the Group drop-down list, choose a previously created group. Note This step assumes that you have already assigned users to groups on the ACS according to the roles to which they will be assigned. Click Edit Settings. The Group Setup page appears. Under TACACS+ Settings, select the ciscowlc common check box. Select the Custom Attributes check box. In the text box below Custom Attributes, specify the roles that you want to assign to this group. The available roles are MONITOR, WLAN, CONTROLLER, WIRELESS, SECURITY, MANAGEMENT, COMMANDS, ALL, and LOBBY. The first seven correspond to the menu options on the controller GUI and allow access to those particular controller features. If a user is not entitled for a particular task, the user is still allowed to access that task in read-only mode. You can enter one or multiple roles, depending on the group's needs. Use ALL to specify all seven roles or LOBBY to specify the lobby ambassador role. Enter the roles using this format:

rolex=ROLE For example, to specify the WLAN, CONTROLLER, and SECURITY roles for a particular user group, you would enter the following text:

role1=WLAN role2=CONTROLLER role3=SECURITY?

To give a user group access to all seven roles, you would enter the following text:

role1=ALL?

Note Note Make sure to enter the roles using the format shown above. The roles must be in all uppercase letters, and there can be no spaces within the text. You should not combine the MONITOR role or the LOBBY role with any other roles. If you specify one of these two roles in the Custom Attributes text box, users will have MONITOR or LOBBY privileges only, even if additional roles are specified. Step 23 Click Submit to save your changes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 377 Configuring TACACS+ (GUI) Configuring TACACS+ (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Security > AAA > TACACS+. Perform one of the following:

If you want to configure a TACACS+ server for authentication, choose Authentication. If you want to configure a TACACS+ server for authorization, choose Authorization. If you want to configure a TACACS+ server for accounting, choose Accounting. Note Note The pages used to configure authentication, authorization, and accounting all contain the same text boxes. Therefore, these instructions walk through the configuration only once, using the Authentication pages as examples. You would follow the same steps to configure multiple services and/or multiple servers. For basic management authentication via TACACS+ to succeed, it is required to configure authentication and authorization servers on the WLC. Accounting configuration is optional. The TACACS+ (Authentication, Authorization, or Accounting) Servers page appears. This page lists any TACACS+

servers that have already been configured. If you want to delete an existing server, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that server and choose Remove. If you want to make sure that the controller can reach a particular server, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that server and choose Ping. Step 3 Perform one of the following:

To edit an existing TACACS+ server, click the server index number for that server. The TACACS+ (Authentication, Authorization, or Accounting) Servers > Edit page appears. To add a TACACS+ server, click New. The TACACS+ (Authentication, Authorization, or Accounting) Servers

> New page appears. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 If you are adding a new server, choose a number from the Server Index (Priority) drop-down list to specify the priority order of this server in relation to any other configured TACACS+ servers providing the same service. You can configure up to three servers. If the controller cannot reach the first server, it tries the second one in the list and then the third if necessary. If you are adding a new server, enter the IP address of the TACACS+ server in the Server IP Address text box. From the Shared Secret Format drop-down list, choose ASCII or Hex to specify the format of the shared secret key to be used between the controller and the TACACS+ server. The default value is ASCII. In the Shared Secret and Confirm Shared Secret text boxes, enter the shared secret key to be used for authentication between the controller and the server. Note The shared secret key must be the same on both the server and the controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 378 OL-28744-01 Configuring TACACS+ (CLI) Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 If you are adding a new server, enter the TACACS+ servers TCP port number for the interface protocols in the Port Number text box. The valid range is 1 to 65535, and the default value is 49. In the Server Status text box, choose Enabled to enable this TACACS+ server or choose Disabled to disable it. The default value is Enabled. In the Server Timeout text box, enter the number of seconds between retransmissions. The valid range is 5 to 30 seconds, and the default value is 5 seconds. Note We recommend that you increase the timeout value if you experience repeated reauthentication attempts or the controller falls back to the backup server when the primary server is active and reachable. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Repeat the previous steps if you want to configure any additional services on the same server or any additional TACACS+

servers. Specify the order of authentication when multiple databases are configured by choosing Security > Priority Order >

Management User. The Priority Order > Management User page appears. In the Order Used for Authentication text box, specify which servers have priority when the controller attempts to authenticate management users. Use the > and < buttons to move servers between the Not Used and Order Used for Authentication text boxes. After the desired servers appear in the Order Used for Authentication text box, use the Up and Down buttons to move the priority server to the top of the list. By default, the local database is always queried first. If the username is not found, the controller switches to the RADIUS server if configured for RADIUS or to the TACACS+ server if configured for TACACS+. The default setting is local and then RADIUS. Step 16 Step 17 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring TACACS+ (CLI) Configure a TACACS+ authentication server by entering these commands:

config tacacs auth add index server_ip_address port# {ascii | hex} shared_secretAdds a TACACS+ authentication server. config tacacs auth delete indexDeletes a previously added TACACS+ authentication server. config tacacs auth (enable | disable} indexEnables or disables a TACACS+ authentication server. config tacacs auth server-timeout index timeoutConfigures the retransmission timeout value for a TACACS+ authentication server. Configure a TACACS+ authorization server by entering these commands:

config tacacs athr add index server_ip_address port# {ascii | hex} shared_secretAdds a TACACS+ authorization server. config tacacs athr delete indexDeletes a previously added TACACS+ authorization server. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 379 Viewing the TACACS+ Administration Server Logs config tacacs athr (enable | disable} indexEnables or disables a TACACS+ authorization server. config tacacs athr server-timeout index timeoutConfigures the retransmission timeout value for a TACACS+ authorization server. Configure a TACACS+ accounting server by entering these commands:

config tacacs acct add index server_ip_address port# {ascii | hex} shared_secretAdds a TACACS+ accounting server. config tacacs acct delete indexDeletes a previously added TACACS+ accounting server. config tacacs acct (enable | disable} indexEnables or disables a TACACS+ accounting server. config tacacs acct server-timeout index timeoutConfigures the retransmission timeout value for a TACACS+ accounting server. See TACACS+ statistics by entering these commands:

show tacacs summaryShows a summary of TACACS+ servers and statistics. show tacacs auth statsShows the TACACS+ authentication server statistics. show tacacs athr statsShows the TACACS+ authorization server statistics. show tacacs acct statsShows the TACACS+ accounting server statistics. Clear the statistics for one or more TACACS+ servers by entering this command:

clear stats tacacs [auth | athr | acct] {index | all}

Configure the order of authentication when multiple databases are configured by entering this command. The default setting is local and then radius. config aaa auth mgmt [radius | tacacs]

See the current management authentication server order by entering the show aaa auth command. Make sure the controller can reach the TACACS+ server by entering this command:

ping server_ip_address Enable or disable TACACS+ debugging by entering this command:

debug aaa tacacs {enable | disable}

Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Viewing the TACACS+ Administration Server Logs Step 1 Step 2 On the ACS main page, in the left navigation pane, choose Reports and Activity. Under Reports, choose TACACS+ Administration. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 380 OL-28744-01 Viewing the TACACS+ Administration Server Logs Click the .csv file corresponding to the date of the logs you want to view. The TACACS+ Administration .csv page appears. Figure 40: TACACS+ Administration .csv Page on CiscoSecure ACS This page displays the following information:

Date and time the action was taken Name and assigned role of the user who took the action Group to which the user belongs Specific action that the user took Privilege level of the user who executed the action IP address of the controller IP address of the laptop or workstation from which the action was executed Sometimes a single action (or command) is logged multiple times, once for each parameter in the command. For example, if you enter the snmp community ipaddr ip_address subnet_mask community_name command, the IP address may be logged on one line while the subnet mask and community name are logged as E. On another line, the subnet mask OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 381 Viewing the TACACS+ Administration Server Logs maybe logged while the IP address and community name are logged as E. See the first and third lines in the example in this figure. Figure 41: TACACS+ Administration .csv Page on CiscoSecure ACS Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 382 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 43 Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries Information About Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries, page 383 Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries (GUI), page 383 Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries (CLI), page 384 Information About Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries You can configure the controller to specify the maximum number of local database entries used for storing user authentication information. The database entries include local management users (including lobby ambassadors), local network users (including guest users), MAC filter entries, exclusion list entries, and access point authorization list entries. Together they cannot exceed the configured maximum value. Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Security > AAA > General to open the General page. In the Maximum Local Database Entries text box, enter a value for the maximum number of entries that can be added to the local database the next time the controller reboots. The currently configured value appears in parentheses to the right of the text box. The valid range is 512 to 2048, and the default setting is 2048. The Number of Entries, Already Used text box shows the number of entries currently in the database. Step 3 Step 4 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your settings. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 383 Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries (CLI) Configuring Maximum Local Database Entries (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Specify the maximum number of entries that can be added to the local database the next time the controller reboots by entering this command:

config database size max_entries Save your changes by entering this command:

save config View the maximum number of database entries and the current database contents by entering this command:

show database summary Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 384 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 44 Configuring Local Network Users on the Controller Information About Local Network Users on Controller, page 385 Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (GUI), page 385 Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (CLI), page 386 Information About Local Network Users on Controller You can add local network users to the local user database on the controller. The local user database stores the credentials (username and password) of all the local network users. These credentials are then used to authenticate the users. For example, local EAP may use the local user database as its backend database to retrieve user credentials. Note The controller passes client information to the RADIUS authentication server first. If the client information does not match a RADIUS database entry, the RADIUS authentication server replies with an authentication failure message. If the RADIUS authentication server does not reply, then the local user database is queried. Clients located in this database are granted access to network services if the RADIUS authentication fails or does not exist. Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (GUI) Step 1 Choose Security > AAA > Local Net Users to open the Local Net Users page. Note If you want to delete an existing user, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that user and choose Remove. Step 2 Perform one of the following:

To edit an existing local network user, click the username for that user. The Local Net Users > Edit page appears. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 385 Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (CLI) To add a local network user, click New. The Local Net Users > New page appears. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 If you are adding a new user, enter a username for the local user in the User Name text box. You can enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters. Note Local network usernames must be unique because they are all stored in the same database. In the Password and Confirm Password text boxes, enter a password for the local user. You can enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters. If you are adding a new user, select the Guest User check box if you want to limit the amount of time that the user has access to the local network. The default setting is unselected. If you are adding a new user and you selected the Guest User check box, enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the guest user account is to remain active in the Lifetime text box. The valid range is 60 to 2,592,000 seconds (30 days) inclusive, and the default setting is 86,400 seconds. If you are adding a new user, you selected the Guest User check box, and you want to assign a QoS role to this guest user, select the Guest User Role check box. The default setting is unselected. Note If you do not assign a QoS role to a guest user, the bandwidth contracts for this user are defined in the QoS profile for the WLAN. If you are adding a new user and you selected the Guest User Role check box, choose the QoS role that you want to assign to this guest user from the Role drop-down list. From the WLAN Profile drop-down list, choose the name of the WLAN that is to be accessed by the local user. If you choose Any WLAN, which is the default setting, the user can access any of the configured WLANs. In the Description text box, enter a descriptive title for the local user (such as User 1). Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (CLI) Configure a local network user by entering these commands:

config netuser add username password wlan wlan_id userType permanent description descriptionAdds a permanent user to the local user database on the controller. config netuser add username password {wlan | guestlan} {wlan_id | guest_lan_id} userType guestlifetime seconds description descriptionAdds a guest user on a WLAN or wired guest LAN to the local user database on the controller. Note Instead of adding a permanent user or a guest user to the local user database from the controller, you can choose to create an entry on the RADIUS server for the user and enable RADIUS authentication for the WLAN on which web authentication is performed. config netuser delete usernameDeletes a user from the local user database on the controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 386 OL-28744-01 Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (CLI) Note Local network usernames must be unique because they are all stored in the same database. See information related to the local network users configured on the controller by entering these commands:

show netuser detail usernameShows the configuration of a particular user in the local user database. show netuser summaryLists all the users in the local user database. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 387 Configuring Local Network Users for the Controller (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 388 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 45 Configuring Password Policies Information About Password Policies, page 389 Configuring Password Policies (GUI), page 390 Configuring Password Policies (CLI), page 390 Information About Password Policies The password policies allows you to enforce strong password checks on newly created passwords for additional management users of controller and access point. The following are the requirements enforced on the new password:

When the controller is upgraded from old version, all the old passwords are maintained as it is, even though the passwords are weak. After the system upgrade, if strong password checks are enabled, the same is enforced from that time and the strength of previously added passwords will not be checked or altered. Depending on the settings done in the Password Policy page, the local management and access point user configuration is affected. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 389 Configuring Password Policies (GUI) Configuring Password Policies (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose Security > AAA > Password Policies to open the Password Policies page. Select the Password must contain characters from at least 3 different classes check box if you want your password to contain characters from at least three of the following classes: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and special characters. Select the No character can be repeated more than 3 times consecutively check box if you do not want character in the new password to repeat more than three times consecutively. Select the Password cannot be the default words like cisco, admin check box if you do not want the password to contain words such as Cisco, ocsic, admin, nimda, or any variant obtained by changing the capitalization of letters or by substituting 1, |, or! or substituting 0 for o or substituting $ for s. Select the Password cannot contain username or reverse of username check box if you do not want the password to contain a username or the reverse letters of a username. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Password Policies (CLI) Enable or disable strong password check for AP and WLC by entering this command:

config switchconfig strong-pwd {case-check | consecutive-check | default-check | username-check

| all-checks} {enable | disable}

where case-checkChecks the occurrence of same character thrice consecutively consecutive-checkChecks the default values or its variants are being used. default-checkChecks either username or its reverse is being used. all-checksEnables/disables all the strong password checks. See the configured options for strong password check by entering this command:

show switchconfig Information similar to the following appears:

802.3x Flow Control Mode......................... Disabled FIPS prerequisite features....................... Disabled secret obfuscation............................... Enabled Strong Password Check Features:

case-check ...........Enabled consecutive-check ....Enabled default-check .......Enabled username-check ......Enabled Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 390 OL-28744-01 Configuring Password Policies (CLI) OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 391 Configuring Password Policies (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 392 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 46 Configuring LDAP Information About LDAP, page 393 Configuring LDAP (GUI), page 394 Configuring LDAP (CLI), page 396 Information About LDAP An LDAP backend database allows the controller to query an LDAP server for the credentials (username and password) of a particular user. These credentials are then used to authenticate the user. For example, local EAP may use an LDAP server as its backend database to retrieve user credentials. Fallback LDAP Servers The LDAP servers are configured on a WLAN for authentication. You require at least two LDAP servers to configure them for fallback behavior. A maximum of three LDAP servers can be configured for the fallback behavior per WLAN. The servers are listed in the priority order for authentication. If the first LDAP server becomes irresponsive, then the controller switches to the next LDAP server. If the second LDAP server becomes irresponsive, then the controller switches again to the third LDAP server. Note The LDAP backend database supports these local EAP methods: EAP-TLS, EAP-FAST/GTC, and PEAPv1/GTC. LEAP, EAP-FAST/MSCHAPv2, and PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2 are also supported but only if the LDAP server is set up to return a clear-text password. Note Cisco wireless LAN controllers support Local EAP authentication against external LDAP databases such as Microsoft Active Directory and Novells eDirectory. For more information about configuring the controller for Local EAP authentication against Novells eDirectory, see the Configure Unified Wireless Network for Authentication Against Novell's eDirectory Database whitepaper at http://www.cisco.com/

en/US/products/ps6366/products_white_paper09186a0080b4cd24.shtml. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 393 Configuring LDAP (GUI) Configuring LDAP (GUI) Step 1 Choose Security > AAA > LDAP to open the LDAP Servers page. If you want to delete an existing LDAP server, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that server and choose Remove. If you want to make sure that the controller can reach a particular server, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that server and choose Ping. Step 2 Perform one of the following:

To edit an existing LDAP server, click the index number for that server. The LDAP Servers > Edit page appears. To add an LDAP server, click New. The LDAP Servers > New page appears. If you are adding a new server, choose a number from the Server Index (Priority) drop-down list to specify the priority order of this server in relation to any other configured LDAP servers. You can configure up to 17 servers. If the controller cannot reach the first server, it tries the second one in the list and so on. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 If you are adding a new server, enter the IP address of the LDAP server in the Server IP Address text box. If you are adding a new server, enter the LDAP servers TCP port number in the Port Number text box. The valid range is 1 to 65535, and the default value is 389. From the Server Mode drop-down list, choose None. Select the Enable Server Status check box to enable this LDAP server or unselect it to disable it. The default value is disabled. From the Simple Bind drop-down list, choose Anonymous or Authenticated to specify the local authentication bind method for the LDAP server. The Anonymous method allows anonymous access to the LDAP server. The Authenticated method requires that a username and password be entered to secure access. The default value is Anonymous. If you chose Authenticated in the previous step, follow these steps:

a) In the Bind Username text box, enter a username to be used for local authentication to the LDAP server. The username can contain up to 80 characters. Note If the username starts with cn= (in lowercase letters), the controller assumes that the username includes the entire LDAP database path and does not append the user base DN. This designation allows the authenticated bind user to be outside the user base DN. b) In the Bind Username text box, enter a username to be used for local authentication to the LDAP server. The username can contain up to 80 characters. In the User Base DN text box, enter the distinguished name (DN) of the subtree in the LDAP server that contains a list of all the users. For example, ou=organizational unit, .ou=next organizational unit, and o=corporation.com. If the tree containing users is the base DN, type. o=corporation.com or Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 394 OL-28744-01 Configuring LDAP (GUI) Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 dc=corporation,dc=com In the User Attribute text box, enter the name of the attribute in the user record that contains the username. You can obtain this attribute from your directory server. In the User Object Type text box, enter the value of the LDAP objectType attribute that identifies the record as a user. Often, user records have several values for the objectType attribute, some of which are unique to the user and some of which are shared with other object types. In the Server Timeout text box, enter the number of seconds between retransmissions. The valid range is 2 to 30 seconds, and the default value is 2 seconds. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Specify LDAP as the priority backend database server for local EAP authentication as follows:

a) Choose Security > Local EAP > Authentication Priority to open the Priority Order > Local-Auth page. b) Highlight LOCAL and click < to move it to the left User Credentials box. c) Highlight LDAP and click > to move it to the right User Credentials box. The database that appears at the top of the right User Credentials box is used when retrieving user credentials. Note If both LDAP and LOCAL appear in the right User Credentials box with LDAP on the top and LOCAL on the bottom, local EAP attempts to authenticate clients using the LDAP backend database and fails over to the local user database if the LDAP servers are not reachable. If the user is not found, the authentication attempt is rejected. If LOCAL is on the top, local EAP attempts to authenticate using only the local user database. It does not fail over to the LDAP backend database. d) Click Apply to commit your changes. e) Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

(Optional) Assign specific LDAP servers to a WLAN as follows:

a) Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. b) Click the ID number of the desired WLAN. c) When the WLANs > Edit page appears, choose the Security > AAA Servers tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security

> AAA Servers) page. d) From the LDAP Servers drop-down lists, choose the LDAP server(s) that you want to use with this WLAN. You can choose up to three LDAP servers, which are tried in priority order. Note These LDAP servers apply only to WLANs with web authentication enabled. They are not used by local EAP. e) Click Apply to commit your changes. f) Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Specify the LDAP server fallback behavior, as follows:

a) Choose WLAN > AAA Server to open the Fallback Parameters page. b) From the LDAP Servers drop-down list, choose the LDAP server in the order of priority when the controller attempts to authenticate management users. The order of authentication is from server. c) Choose Security > AAA > LDAP to view the list of global LDAP servers configured for the controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 395 Configuring LDAP (CLI) Configuring LDAP (CLI) Configure an LDAP server by entering these commands:

config ldap add index server_ip_address port# user_base user_attr user_type Adds an LDAP server. config ldap delete indexDeletes a previously added LDAP server. config ldap {enable | disable} indexEnables or disables an LDAP server. config ldap simple-bind {anonymous index | authenticated index username username password password}Specifies the local authentication bind method for the LDAP server. The anonymous method allows anonymous access to the LDAP server whereas the authenticated method requires that a username and password be entered to secure access. The default value is anonymous. The username can contain up to 80 characters. If the username starts with cn= (in lowercase letters), the controller assumes that the username includes the entire LDAP database path and does not append the user base DN. This designation allows the authenticated bind user to be outside the user base DN. config ldap retransmit-timeout index timeoutConfigures the number of seconds between retransmissions for an LDAP server. Specify LDAP as the priority backend database server by entering this command:

config local-auth user-credentials ldap If you enter the config local-auth user-credentials ldap local command, local EAP attempts to authenticate clients using the LDAP backend database and fails over to the local user database if the LDAP servers are not reachable. If the user is not found, the authentication attempt is rejected. If you enter the config local-auth user-credentials local ldap command, local EAP attempts to authenticate using only the local user database. It does not fail over to the LDAP backend database.

(Optional) Assign specific LDAP servers to a WLAN by entering these commands:

config wlan ldap add wlan_id server_indexLinks a configured LDAP server to a WLAN. The LDAP servers specified in this command apply only to WLANs with web authentication enabled. They are not used by local EAP. config wlan ldap delete wlan_id {all | index}Deletes a specific or all configured LDAP server(s) from a WLAN. View information pertaining to configured LDAP servers by entering these commands:

show ldap summaryShows a summary of the configured LDAP servers. 2.3.1.4 10.10.20.22 Port Enabled Idx Server Address

--- --------------- ---- -------

389 No 1 Yes 2 389 show ldap indexShows detailed LDAP server information. Information like the following appears:

Server Index..................................... 2 Address.......................................... 10.10.20.22 Port............................................. 389 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 396 OL-28744-01 Configuring LDAP (CLI) Enabled.......................................... Yes User DN.......................................... ou=active,ou=employees,ou=people, o=cisco.com User Attribute................................... uid User Type........................................ Person Retransmit Timeout............................... 2 seconds Bind Method ..................................... Authenticated Bind Username................................. user1 show ldap statisticsShows LDAP server statistics. Request statistics:

Server Index..................................... 1 Server statistics:

Initialized OK................................. 0 Initialization failed.......................... 0 Initialization retries......................... 0 Closed OK...................................... 0 Received....................................... 0 Sent........................................... 0 OK............................................. 0 Success........................................ 0 Authentication failed.......................... 0 Server not found............................... 0 No received attributes......................... 0 No passed username............................. 0 Not connected to server........................ 0 Internal error................................. 0 Retries........................................ 0 Server Index..................................... 2

.. show wlan wlan_idShows the LDAP servers that are applied to a WLAN. Make sure the controller can reach the LDAP server by entering this command:

ping server_ip_address Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Enable or disable debugging for LDAP by entering this command:

debug aaa ldap {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 397 Configuring LDAP (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 398 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 47 Configuring Local EAP Information About Local EAP, page 399 Restrictions for Local EAP, page 400 Configuring Local EAP (GUI), page 401 Configuring Local EAP (CLI), page 404 Information About Local EAP Local EAP is an authentication method that allows users and wireless clients to be authenticated locally. It is designed for use in remote offices that want to maintain connectivity to wireless clients when the backend system becomes disrupted or the external authentication server goes down. When you enable local EAP, the controller serves as the authentication server and the local user database, which removes dependence on an external authentication server. Local EAP retrieves user credentials from the local user database or the LDAP backend database to authenticate users. Local EAP supports LEAP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, P EAPv0/MSCHAPv2, and PEAPv1/GTC authentication between the controller and wireless clients. Note The LDAP backend database supports these local EAP methods: EAP-TLS, EAP-FAST/GTC, and PEAPv1/GTC. LEAP, EAP-FAST/MSCHAPv2, and PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2 are also supported but only if the LDAP server is set up to return a clear-text password. Note Cisco wireless LAN controllers support Local EAP authentication against external LDAP databases such as Microsoft Active Directory and Novells eDirectory. For more information about configuring the controller for Local EAP authentication against Novells eDirectory, see the Configure Unified Wireless Network for Authentication Against Novell's eDirectory Database whitepaper at http://www.cisco.com/

en/US/products/ps6366/products_white_paper09186a0080b4cd24.shtml. If any RADIUS servers are configured on the controller, the controller tries to authenticate the wireless clients using the RADIUS servers first. Local EAP is attempted only if no RADIUS servers are found, either because the RADIUS servers timed out or no RADIUS servers were configured. If four RADIUS servers are configured, the controller attempts to authenticate the client with the first RADIUS server, then the second RADIUS server, and then local EAP. If the client attempts to then reauthenticate manually, the controller tries the third OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 399 Restrictions for Local EAP RADIUS server, then the fourth RADIUS server, and then local EAP. If you never want the controller to try to authenticate clients using an external RADIUS server, enter these CLI commands in this order:

config wlan disable wlan_id config wlan radius_server auth disable wlan_id config wlan enable wlan_id Figure 42: Local EAP Example Restrictions for Local EAP Local EAP profiles are not supported on Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend access points. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 400 OL-28744-01 Configuring Local EAP (GUI) Configuring Local EAP (GUI) Before You Begin Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Note EAP-TLS, P EAPv0/MSCHAPv2, and PEAPv1/GTC use certificates for authentication, and EAP-FAST uses either certificates or PACs. The controller is shipped with Cisco-installed device and Certificate Authority (CA) certificates. However, if you want to use your own vendor-specific certificates, they must be imported on the controller. If you are configuring local EAP to use one of the EAP types listed in the note above, make sure that the appropriate certificates and PACs (if you will use manual PAC provisioning) have been imported on the controller. If you want the controller to retrieve user credentials from the local user database, make sure that you have properly configured the local network users on the controller. If you want the controller to retrieve user credentials from an LDAP backend database, make sure that you have properly configured an LDAP server on the controller. Specify the order in which user credentials are retrieved from the backend database servers as follows:

a) Choose Security > Local EAP > Authentication Priority to open the Priority Order > Local-Auth page. b) Determine the priority order in which user credentials are to be retrieved from the local and/or LDAP databases. For example, you may want the LDAP database to be given priority over the local user database, or you may not want the LDAP database to be considered at all. c) When you have decided on a priority order, highlight the desired database. Then use the left and right arrows and the Up and Down buttons to move the desired database to the top of the right User Credentials box. Note If both LDAP and LOCAL appear in the right User Credentials box with LDAP on the top and LOCAL on the bottom, local EAP attempts to authenticate clients using the LDAP backend database and fails over to the local user database if the LDAP servers are not reachable. If the user is not found, the authentication attempt is rejected. If LOCAL is on the top, local EAP attempts to authenticate using only the local user database. It does not fail over to the LDAP backend database. d) Click Apply to commit your changes. Specify values for the local EAP timers as follows:

a) Choose Security > Local EAP > General to open the General page. b) In the Local Auth Active Timeout text box, enter the amount of time (in seconds) in which the controller attempts to authenticate wireless clients using local EAP after any pair of configured RADIUS servers fails. The valid range is 1 to 3600 seconds, and the default setting is 100 seconds. c) In the Identity Request Timeout text box, enter the amount of time (in seconds) in which the controller attempts to send an EAP identity request to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 120 seconds, and the default setting is 30 seconds. d) In the Identity Request Max Retries text box, enter the maximum number of times that the controller attempts to retransmit the EAP identity request to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 20 retries, and the default setting is 20 retries. e) In the Dynamic WEP Key Index text box, enter the key index used for dynamic wired equivalent privacy (WEP). The default value is 0, which corresponds to a key index of 1; the valid values are 0 to 3 (key index of 1 to 4). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 401 Configuring Local EAP (GUI) f) In the Request Timeout text box, enter the amount of time (in seconds) in which the controller attempts to send an EAP request to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 120 seconds, and the default setting is 30 seconds. g) In the Request Max Retries text box, enter the maximum number of times that the controller attempts to retransmit the EAP request to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 120 retries, and the default setting is 20 retries. i) h) From the Max-Login Ignore Identity Response drop-down list, choose Enable to limit the number of devices that can be connected to the controller with the same username. You can log in up to eight times from different devices

(PDA, laptop, IP phone, and so on) on the same controller. The default value is enabled. In the EAPOL-Key Timeout text box, enter the amount of time (in seconds) in which the controller attempts to send an EAP key over the LAN to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 5 seconds, and the default setting is 1 second. Note If the controller and access point are separated by a WAN link, the default timeout of 1 second may not be sufficient. j) In the EAPOL-Key Max Retries text box, enter the maximum number of times that the controller attempts to send an EAP key over the LAN to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 0 to 4 retries, and the default setting is 2 retries. k) Click Apply to commit your changes. Create a local EAP profile, which specifies the EAP authentication types that are supported on the wireless clients as follows:

a) Choose Security > Local EAP > Profiles to open the Local EAP Profiles page. This page lists any local EAP profiles that have already been configured and specifies their EAP types. You can create up to 16 local EAP profiles. Note If you want to delete an existing profile, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that profile and choose Remove. Step 6 b) Click New to open the Local EAP Profiles > New page. c) In the Profile Name text box, enter a name for your new profile and then click Apply. Note You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. Make sure not to include spaces. d) When the Local EAP Profiles page reappears, click the name of your new profile. The Local EAP Profiles > Edit page appears. e) Select the LEAP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, and/or PEAP check boxes to specify the EAP type that can be used for local authentication. Note You can specify more than one EAP type per profile. However, if you choose multiple EAP types that use certificates (such as EAP-FAST with certificates, EAP-TLS, PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2, and PEAPv1/GTC), all of the EAP types must use the same certificate (from either Cisco or another vendor). If you select the PEAP check box, both PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2 or PEAPv1/GTC are enabled on the controller. Note f) If you chose EAP-FAST and want the device certificate on the controller to be used for authentication, select the Local Certificate Required check box. If you want to use EAP-FAST with PACs instead of certificates, leave this check box unselected, which is the default setting. Note This option applies only to EAP-FAST because device certificates are not used with LEAP and are mandatory for EAP-TLS and PEAP. g) If you chose EAP-FAST and want the wireless clients to send their device certificates to the controller in order to authenticate, select the Client Certificate Required check box. If you want to use EAP-FAST with PACs instead of certificates, leave this check box unselected, which is the default setting. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 402 OL-28744-01 Configuring Local EAP (GUI) Note This option applies only to EAP-FAST because client certificates are not used with LEAP or PEAP and are mandatory for EAP-TLS. i) h) If you chose EAP-FAST with certificates, EAP-TLS, or PEAP, choose which certificates will be sent to the client, the ones from Cisco or the ones from another Vendor, from the Certificate Issuer drop-down list. The default setting is Cisco. If you chose EAP-FAST with certificates or EAP-TLS and want the incoming certificate from the client to be validated against the CA certificates on the controller, select the Check against CA certificates check box. The default setting is enabled. If you chose EAP-FAST with certificates or EAP-TLS and want the common name (CN) in the incoming certificate to be validated against the CA certificates CN on the controller, select the Verify Certificate CN Identity check box. The default setting is disabled. j) k) If you chose EAP-FAST with certificates or EAP-TLS and want the controller to verify that the incoming device certificate is still valid and has not expired, select the Check Certificate Date Validity check box. The default setting is enabled. Note Certificate date validity is checked against the current UTC (GMT) time that is configured on the controller. Timezone offset will be ignored. Step 7 Step 8 l) Click Apply to commit your changes. If you created an EAP-FAST profile, follow these steps to configure the EAP-FAST parameters:

a) Choose Security > Local EAP > EAP-FAST Parameters to open the EAP-FAST Method Parameters page. b) In the Server Key and Confirm Server Key text boxes, enter the key (in hexadecimal characters) used to encrypt and decrypt PACs. c) In the Time to Live for the PAC text box, enter the number of days for the PAC to remain viable. The valid range is 1 to 1000 days, and the default setting is 10 days. d) In the Authority ID text box, enter the authority identifier of the local EAP-FAST server in hexadecimal characters. You can enter up to 32 hexadecimal characters, but you must enter an even number of characters. e) In the Authority ID Information text box, enter the authority identifier of the local EAP-FAST server in text format. f) If you want to enable anonymous provisioning, select the Anonymous Provision check box. This feature allows PACs to be sent automatically to clients that do not have one during PAC provisioning. If you disable this feature, PACS must be manually provisioned. The default setting is enabled. Note If the local and/or client certificates are required and you want to force all EAP-FAST clients to use certificates, unselect the Anonymous Provision check box. g) Click Apply to commit your changes. Enable local EAP on a WLAN as follows:

a) Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. b) Click the ID number of the desired WLAN. c) When the WLANs > Edit page appears, choose the Security > AAA Servers tabs to open the WLANs > Edit

(Security > AAA Servers) page. d) Select the Local EAP Authentication check box to enable local EAP for this WLAN. e) From the EAP Profile Name drop-down list, choose the EAP profile that you want to use for this WLAN. f) If desired, choose the LDAP server that you want to use with local EAP on this WLAN from the LDAP Servers drop-down lists. g) Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Step 9 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 403 Configuring Local EAP (CLI) Configuring Local EAP (CLI) Before You Begin Note EAP-TLS, P EAPv0/MSCHAPv2, and PEAPv1/GTC use certificates for authentication, and EAP-FAST uses either certificates or PACbs. The controller is shipped with Cisco-installed device and Certificate Authority (CA) certificates. However, if you want to use your own vendor-specific certificates, they must be imported on the controller. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 If you are configuring local EAP to use one of the EAP types listed in the note above, make sure that the appropriate certificates and PACs (if you will use manual PAC provisioning) have been imported on the controller. If you want the controller to retrieve user credentials from the local user database, make sure that you have properly configured the local network users on the controller. If you want the controller to retrieve user credentials from an LDAP backend database, make sure that you have properly configured an LDAP server on the controller. Specify the order in which user credentials are retrieved from the local and/or LDAP databases by entering this command:

config local-auth user-credentials {local | ldap}

Note If you enter the config local-auth user-credentials ldap local command, local EAP attempts to authenticate clients using the LDAP backend database and fails over to the local user database if the LDAP servers are not reachable. If the user is not found, the authentication attempt is rejected. If you enter the config local-auth user-credentials local ldap command, local EAP attempts to authenticate using only the local user database. It does not fail over to the LDAP backend database. Step 5 Specify values for the local EAP timers by entering these commands:

config local-auth active-timeout timeoutSpecifies the amount of time (in seconds) in which the controller attempts to authenticate wireless clients using local EAP after any pair of configured RADIUS servers fails. The valid range is 1 to 3600 seconds, and the default setting is 100 seconds. config advanced eap identity-request-timeout timeoutSpecifies the amount of time (in seconds) in which the controller attempts to send an EAP identity request to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 120 seconds, and the default setting is 30 seconds. config advanced eap identity-request-retries retriesSpecifies the maximum number of times that the controller attempts to retransmit the EAP identity request to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 20 retries, and the default setting is 20 retries. config advanced eap key-index indexSpecifies the key index used for dynamic wired equivalent privacy (WEP). The default value is 0, which corresponds to a key index of 1; the valid values are 0 to 3 (key index of 1 to 4). config advanced eap request-timeout timeoutSpecifies the amount of time (in seconds) in which the controller attempts to send an EAP request to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 120 seconds, and the default setting is 30 seconds. config advanced eap request-retries retriesSpecifies the maximum number of times that the controller attempts to retransmit the EAP request to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 120 retries, and the default setting is 20 retries. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 404 OL-28744-01 Configuring Local EAP (CLI) config advanced eap eapol-key-timeout timeoutSpecifies the amount of time (in seconds) in which the controller attempts to send an EAP key over the LAN to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 1 to 5 seconds, and the default setting is 1 second. Note If the controller and access point are separated by a WAN link, the default timeout of 1 second may not be sufficient. config advanced eap eapol-key-retries retriesSpecifies the maximum number of times that the controller attempts to send an EAP key over the LAN to wireless clients using local EAP. The valid range is 0 to 4 retries, and the default setting is 2 retries. config advanced eap max-login-ignore-identity-response {enable | disable}When enabled, this command limits the number of devices that can be connected to the controller with the same username. You can log in up to eight times from different devices (PDA, laptop, IP phone, and so on) on the same controller. The default value is enabled. Step 6 Step 7 Create a local EAP profile by entering this command:

config local-auth eap-profile add profile_name Do not include spaces within the profile Note name. To delete a local EAP profile, enter the config local-auth eap-profile delete profile_name command. Note Add an EAP method to a local EAP profile by entering this command:

config local-auth eap-profile method add method profile_name The supported methods are leap, fast, tls, and peap. Note If you choose peap, both P EAPv0/MSCHAPv2 or PEAPv1/GTC are enabled on the controller. Note Note You can specify more than one EAP type per profile. However, if you create a profile with multiple EAP types that use certificates (such as EAP-FAST with certificates, EAP-TLS, PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2, and PEAPv1/GTC), all of the EAP types must use the same certificate (from either Cisco or another vendor). To delete an EAP method from a local EAP profile, enter the config local-auth eap-profile method delete method profile_name command:

Step 8 Configure EAP-FAST parameters if you created an EAP-FAST profile by entering this command:

config local-auth method fast ?

where ? is one of the following:

anon-prov {enable | disable}Configures the controller to allow anonymous provisioning, which allows PACs to be sent automatically to clients that do not have one during PAC provisioning. authority-id auth_idSpecifies the authority identifier of the local EAP-FAST server. pac-ttl daysSpecifies the number of days for the PAC to remain viable. server-key keySpecifies the server key used to encrypt and decrypt PACs. Step 9 Configure certificate parameters per profile by entering these commands:

config local-auth eap-profile method fast local-cert {enable | disable} profile_name Specifies whether the device certificate on the controller is required for authentication. Note This command applies only to EAP-FAST because device certificates are not used with LEAP and are mandatory for EAP-TLS and PEAP. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 405 Configuring Local EAP (CLI) config local-auth eap-profile method fast client-cert {enable | disable} profile_name Specifies whether wireless clients are required to send their device certificates to the controller in order to authenticate. Note This command applies only to EAP-FAST because client certificates are not used with LEAP or PEAP and are mandatory for EAP-TLS. config local-auth eap-profile cert-issuer {cisco | vendor} profile_nameIf you specified EAP-FAST with certificates, EAP-TLS, or PEAP, specifies whether the certificates that will be sent to the client are from Cisco or another vendor. config local-auth eap-profile cert-verify ca-issuer {enable | disable} profile_nameIf you chose EAP-FAST with certificates or EAP-TLS, specifies whether the incoming certificate from the client is to be validated against the CA certificates on the controller. config local-auth eap-profile cert-verify cn-verify {enable | disable} profile_nameIf you chose EAP-FAST with certificates or EAP-TLS, specifies whether the common name (CN) in the incoming certificate is to be validated against the CA certificates CN on the controller. config local-auth eap-profile cert-verify date-valid {enable | disable} profile_nameIf you chose EAP-FAST with certificates or EAP-TLS, specifies whether the controller is to verify that the incoming device certificate is still valid and has not expired. Step 10 Enable local EAP and attach an EAP profile to a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan local-auth enable profile_name wlan_id Note To disable local EAP for a WLAN, enter the config wlan local-auth disable wlan_id command. Step 11 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Step 12 View information pertaining to local EAP by entering these commands:

show local-auth configShows the local EAP configuration on the controller. User credentials database search order:

Primary ..................................... Local DB Timer:

Active timeout .............................. 300 Configured EAP profiles:

Name ........................................ fast-cert Certificate issuer ........................ vendor Peer verification options:

Check against CA certificates ........... Enabled Verify certificate CN identity .......... Disabled Check certificate date validity ......... Enabled Local certificate required .............. Yes Client certificate required ............. Yes Enabled methods ........................... fast Configured on WLANs ....................... 1 EAP-FAST configuration:

Name ........................................ tls Certificate issuer ........................ vendor Peer verification options:

Check against CA certificates ........... Enabled Verify certificate CN identity .......... Disabled Check certificate date validity ......... Enabled Local certificate required .............. No Client certificate required ............. No EAP-FAST configuration:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 406 OL-28744-01 Configuring Local EAP (CLI) Enabled methods ........................... tls Configured on WLANs ....................... 2 EAP Method configuration:

EAP-FAST:

Server key ................................ <hidden>

TTL for the PAC ........................... 10 Anonymous provision allowed ............... Yes Accept client on auth prov ................ No Authority ID .............................. 436973636f0000000000000000000000 Authority Information ..................... Cisco A-ID show local-auth statisticsShows the local EAP statistics. show local-auth certificatesShows the certificates available for local EAP. show local-auth user-credentialsShows the priority order that the controller uses when retrieving user credentials from the local and/or LDAP databases. show advanced eapShows the timer values for local EAP. EAP-Identity-Request Timeout (seconds)........... 1 EAP-Identity-Request Max Retries................. 20 EAP Key-Index for Dynamic WEP.................... 0 EAP Max-Login Ignore Identity Response........... enable EAP-Request Timeout (seconds).................... 20 EAP-Request Max Retries.......................... 20 EAPOL-Key Timeout (seconds)...................... 1 EAPOL-Key Max Retries......................... 2 show ap stats wlan Cisco_APShows the EAP timeout and failure counters for a specific access point for each WLAN. show client detail client_macShows the EAP timeout and failure counters for a specific associated client. These statistics are useful in troubleshooting client association issues. .. Client Statistics:

Number of Bytes Received................... 10 Number of Bytes Sent....................... 10 Number of Packets Received................. 2 Number of Packets Sent..................... 2 Number of EAP Id Request Msg Timeouts...... 0 Number of EAP Id Request Msg Failures...... 0 Number of EAP Request Msg Timeouts......... 2 Number of EAP Request Msg Failures......... 1 Number of EAP Key Msg Timeouts............. 0 Number of EAP Key Msg Failures............. 0 Number of Policy Errors.................... 0 Radio Signal Strength Indicator............ Unavailable Signal to Noise Ratio...................... Unavailable show wlan wlan_idShows the status of local EAP on a particular WLAN. Step 13

(Optional) Troubleshoot local EAP sessions by entering these commands:

debug aaa local-auth eap method {all | errors | events | packets | sm} {enable | disable} Enables or disables debugging of local EAP methods. debug aaa local-auth eap framework {all | errors | events | packets | sm} {enable | disable} Enables or disables debugging of the local EAP framework. Note In these two debug commands, sm is the state machine. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 407 Configuring Local EAP (CLI) clear stats local-authClears the local EAP counters. clear stats ap wlan Cisco_APClears the EAP timeout and failure counters for a specific access point for each WLAN. WLAN 1 EAP Id Request Msg Timeouts................... 0 EAP Id Request Msg Timeouts Failures.......... 0 EAP Request Msg Timeouts...................... 2 EAP Request Msg Timeouts Failures............. 1 EAP Key Msg Timeouts.......................... 0 EAP Key Msg Timeouts Failures................. 0 EAP Id Request Msg Timeouts................... 1 EAP Id Request Msg Timeouts Failures.......... 0 EAP Request Msg Timeouts...................... 0 EAP Request Msg Timeouts Failures............. 0 EAP Key Msg Timeouts.......................... 3 2 EAP Key Msg Timeouts Failures.............. 1 WLAN Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 408 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 48 Configuring the System for SpectraLink NetLink Telephones Information About SpectraLink NetLink Telephones, page 409 Configuring SpectraLink NetLink Phones, page 409 Information About SpectraLink NetLink Telephones For the best integration with the Cisco UWN solution, SpectraLink NetLink Telephones require an extra operating system configuration step: enable long preambles. The radio preamble (sometimes called a header) is a section of data at the head of a packet that contains information that wireless devices need when sending and receiving packets. Short preambles improve throughput performance, so they are enabled by default. However, some wireless devices, such as SpectraLink NetLink phones, require long preambles. Configuring SpectraLink NetLink Phones Enabling Long Preambles (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Wireless > 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the 802.11b/g Global Parameters page. If the Short Preamble check box is selected, continue with this procedure. However, if the Short Preamble check box is unselected (which means that long preambles are enabled), the controller is already optimized for SpectraLink NetLink phones and you do not need to continue this procedure. Unselect the Short Preamble check box to enable long preambles. Click Apply to update the controller configuration. Note If you do not already have an active CLI session to the controller, we recommend that you start a CLI session to reboot the controller and watch the reboot process. A CLI session is also useful because the GUI loses its connection when the controller reboots. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 409 Configuring SpectraLink NetLink Phones Step 5 Choose Commands > Reboot > Reboot > Save and Reboot to reboot the controller. Click OK in response to this prompt:

Configuration will be saved and the controller will be rebooted. Click ok to confirm. The controller reboots. Step 6 Step 7 Log back onto the controller GUI to verify that the controller is properly configured. Choose Wireless > 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the 802.11b/g Global Parameters page. If the Short Preamble check box is unselected, the controller is optimized for SpectraLink NetLink phones. Enabling Long Preambles (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Log on to the controller CLI. Enter the show 802.11b command and select the Short preamble mandatory parameter. If the parameter indicates that short preambles are enabled, continue with this procedure. This example shows that short preambles are enabled:

Short Preamble mandatory....................... Enabled However, if the parameter shows that short preambles are disabled (which means that long preambles are enabled), the controller is already optimized for SpectraLink NetLink phones and you do not need to continue this procedure. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Disable the 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config 802.11b disable network You cannot enable long preambles on the 802.11a network. Enable long preambles by entering this command:

config 802.11b preamble long Reenable the 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config 802.11b enable network Enter the reset system command to reboot the controller. Enter y when the prompt to save the system changes is displayed. The controller reboots. Verify that the controller is properly configured by logging back into the CLI and entering the show 802.11b command to view these parameters:

802.11b Network................................ Enabled Short Preamble mandatory....................... Disabled These parameters show that the 802.11b/g network is enabled and that short preambles are disabled. Configuring Enhanced Distributed Channel Access (CLI) To configure 802.11 enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA) parameters to support SpectraLink phones, use the following CLI commands:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 410 OL-28744-01 Configuring SpectraLink NetLink Phones config advanced edca-parameter {custom-voice | optimized-video-voice | optimized-voice | svp-voice |

wmm-default}

where custom-voice enables custom voice EDCA parameters optimized-video-voice enables combined video-voice-optimized parameters optimized-voice enables non-SpectraLink voice-optimized parameters svp-voice enables SpectraLink voice priority (SVP) parameters wmm-default enables wireless multimedia (WMM) default parameters Note To propagate this command to all access points connected to the controller, make sure to disable and then reenable the 802.11b/g network after entering this command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 411 Configuring SpectraLink NetLink Phones Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 412 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 49 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support Information About RADIUS NAC Support, page 413 Restrictions for RADIUS NAC Support, page 414 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support (GUI), page 415 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support (CLI), page 416 Information About RADIUS NAC Support The Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) is a next-generation, context-based access control solution that provides the functions of Cisco Secure Access Control System (ACS) and Cisco Network Admission Control

(NAC) in one integrated platform. ISE has been introduced in the 7.0.116.0 release of the Cisco Unified Wireless Network. ISE can be used to provide advanced security for your deployed network. It is an authentication server that you can configure on your controller. When a client associates to the controller on a RADIUS NACenabled WLAN, the controller forwards the request to the ISE server. The ISE server validates the user in the database and on successful authentication, the URL and pre-AUTH ACL are sent to the client. The client then moves to the Posture Required state and is redirected to the URL returned by the ISE server. Note The client moves to the Central Web Authentication state, if the URL returned by the ISE server has the keyword 'cwa'. The NAC agent in the client triggers the posture validation process. On successful posture validation by the ISE server, the client is moved to the run state. Note Flex local switching with Radius NAC support is added in Release 7.2.110.0. It is not supported in 7.0 Releases and 7.2 Releases. Downgrading 7.2.110.0 and later releases to either 7.2 or 7.0 releases will require you to reconfigure the WLAN for Radius NAC feature to work. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 413 Restrictions for RADIUS NAC Support Device Registration Device registration enables you to authenticate and provision new devices on the WLAN with RADIUS NAC enabled. When the device is registered on the WLAN, it can use the network based on the configured ACL. Central Web Authentication In the case of Central Web Authentication (CWA), the web-authentication occurs on the ISE server. The web portal in the ISE server provides a login page to the client. Once the credentials are verified on the ISE server, the client is provisioned. The client remains in the POSTURE_REQD state until a CoA is reached. The credentials and ACLs are received from the ISE server. Local Web Authentication Local web authentication is not supported for RADIUS NAC. This table describes the possible combinations in a typical ISE deployment with Device Registration, CWA and LWA enabled:

Table 15: ISE Network Authentication Flow WLAN Configuration RADIUS NAC Enabled L2 None L3 None MAC Filtering Enabled CWA Yes No N/A Yes LWA No PSK, Static WEP, CKIP Internal/External No Device Registration Yes No N/A Yes Restrictions for RADIUS NAC Support A RADIUS NAC-enabled WLAN supports Open Authentication and MAC filtering. Radius NAC functionality does not work if the configured accounting server is different from authentication (ISE) server. You should configure the same server as the authentication and accounting server in case ISE functionalities are used. If ISE is used only for ACS functionality, the accounting server can be flexible. When clients move from one WLAN to another, the controller retains the clients audit session ID if it returns to the WLAN before the idle timeout occurs. As a result, when clients join the controller before the idle timeout session expires, they are immediately moved to RUN state. The clients are validated if they reassociate with the controller after the session timeout. Suppose you have two WLANs, where WLAN 1 is configured on a controller (WLC1) and WLAN2 is configured on another controller (WLC2) and both are RADIUS NAC enabled. The client first connects to WLC1 and moves to the RUN state after posture validation. Assume that the client now moved to WLC2. If the client connects back to WLC1 before the PMK expires for this client in WLC1, the posture Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 414 OL-28744-01 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support (GUI) validation is skipped for the client. The client directly moves to RUN state by passing posture validation as the controller retains the old audit session ID for the client that is already known to ISE. When deploying RADIUS NAC in your wireless network, do not configure a primary and secondary ISE server. Instead, we recommend that you configure HA between the two ISE servers. Having a primary and secondary ISE setup will require a posture validation to happen before the clients move to RUN state. If HA is configured, the client is automatically moved to RUN state in the fallback ISE server. The controller software configured with RADIUS NAC does not support a change of authorization

(CoA) on the service port. Do not swap AAA server indexes in a live network because clients might get disconnected and have to reconnect to the RADIUS server, which might result in log messages to be appended to the ISE server logs. You must enable AAA override on the WLAN to use RADIUS NAC. WPA and WPA2 or dot1X must be enabled on the WLAN. During slow roaming, the client goes through posture validation. Guest tunneling mobility is supported for ISE NACenabled WLANs. VLAN select is not supported Workgroup bridges are not supported. The AP Group over NAC is not supported over RADIUS NAC. FlexConnect local switching is not supported. With RADIUS NAC enabled, the RADIUS server overwrite interface is not supported. Any DHCP communication between client and server. We parse the DHCP profiling only once. This is sent to the ISE server only once. If the AAA url-redirect-acl and url-redirect attributes are expected from the AAA server, the AAA override feature must be enabled on the controller. Configuring RADIUS NAC Support (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose the WLANs tab. Click the WLAN ID of the WLAN for which you want to enable ISE. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Click the Advanced tab. From the NAC State drop-down list, choose Radius NAC:

SNMP NACUses SNMP NAC for the WLAN. Radius NACUses Radius NAC for the WLAN. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 415 Configuring RADIUS NAC Support (CLI) Note AAA override is automatically enabled when you use RADIUS NAC on a WLAN. Step 5 Click Apply. Configuring RADIUS NAC Support (CLI) Enter the following command:

config wlan nac radius { enable | disable} wlan_id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 416 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 50 Using Management Over Wireless Information About Management over Wireless, page 417 Enabling Management over Wireless (GUI), page 417 Enabling Management over Wireless (CLI), page 417 Information About Management over Wireless The management over wireless feature allows you to monitor and configure local controllers using a wireless client. This feature is supported for all management tasks except uploads to and downloads from (transfers to and from) the controller. Enabling Management over Wireless (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Management > Mgmt Via Wireless to open the Management Via Wireless page. Select the Enable Controller Management to be accessible from Wireless Clients check box to enable management over wireless for the WLAN or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is unselected. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Enabling Management over Wireless (CLI) Step 1 Verify whether the management over wireless interface is enabled or disabled by entering this command:

show network summary OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 417 Enabling Management over Wireless (CLI) If disabled: Enable management over wireless by entering this command:config network mgmt-via-wireless enable Otherwise, use a wireless client to associate with an access point connected to the controller that you want to manage. Step 2 Log into the CLI to verify that you can manage the WLAN using a wireless client by entering this command:

telnet controller-ip-address command Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 418 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 51 Using Dynamic Interfaces for Management Information About Using Dynamic Interfaces for Management, page 419 Configuring Management using Dynamic Interfaces (CLI), page 420 Information About Using Dynamic Interfaces for Management You can access the controller with one of its dynamic interface IP addresses. While wired computers can have only CLI access with the dynamic interface of the WLC, wireless clients have both CLI and GUI access with the dynamic interface. A device, when the management using dynamic interfaces is disabled, can open an SSH connection, if the protocol is enabled. However, you are not prompted to log on. Additionally, the management address remains accessible from a dynamic interface VLAN, unless a CPU ACL is in place. When management using dynamic interface is enabled along with CPU ACL, the CPU ACL has more priority. The following are some examples of management access and management access using dynamic interfaces, here the management VLAN IP address of the Cisco WLC is 209.165. 201.1 and dynamic VLAN IP address of the Cisco WLC is 209.165. 202.129:

Source wired client from Cisco WLC's dynamic interface VLAN accesses the management interface VLAN and tries for management access. This is an example of management access. Source wired client from Cisco WLC's management interface VLAN accesses the dynamic interface VLAN and tries for management access. This is an example of management using dynamic interface. Source wired client from Cisco WLC's dynamic interface VLAN accesses the dynamic interface VLAN tries and tries for management access. This is an example of management using dynamic interface. Source wired client from Layer 3 VLAN interface accesses the dynamic interface or the management interface and tries for management access. This is an example of management using dynamic interface. Here, management is not the management interface but the configuration access. If the Cisco WLC configuration is accessed from any other IP address on the Cisco WLC other than the management IP, it is management using dynamic interface. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 419 Configuring Management using Dynamic Interfaces (CLI) Configuring Management using Dynamic Interfaces (CLI) Enable or disable management using dynamic interfaces by entering this command:

config network mgmt-via-dynamic-interface {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 420 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 52 Configuring DHCP Option 82 Information About DHCP Option 82, page 421 Restrictions for DHCP Option 82, page 422 Configuring DHCP Option 82 (GUI), page 422 Configuring DHCP Option 82 (CLI), page 422 Information About DHCP Option 82 DHCP option 82 provides additional security when DHCP is used to allocate network addresses. It enables the controller to act as a DHCP relay agent to prevent DHCP client requests from untrusted sources. You can configure the controller to add option 82 information to DHCP requests from clients before forwarding the requests to the DHCP server. Figure 43: DHCP Option 82 The access point forwards all DHCP requests from a client to the controller. The controller adds the DHCP option 82 payload and forwards the request to the DHCP server. The payload can contain the MAC address or the MAC address and SSID of the access point, depending on how you configure this option. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 421 Restrictions for DHCP Option 82 Note Any DHCP packets that already include a relay agent option are dropped at the controller. For DHCP option 82 to operate correctly, DHCP proxy must be enabled. Restrictions for DHCP Option 82 DHCP option 82 is not supported for use with auto-anchor mobility. Configuring DHCP Option 82 (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Controller > Advanced > DHCP to open the DHCP Parameters page. Select the Enable DHCP Proxy check box to enable DHCP proxy. Choose a DHCP Option 82 Remote ID field format from the drop-down list to specify the format of the DHCP option 82 payload. For more information about the options available, see the Controller Online Help. Enter the DHCP Timeout. The timeout value is globally applicable. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration . What to Do Next On the controller CLI, you can enable DHCP option 82 on the dynamic interface to which the WLAN is associated by entering this command:

config interface dhcp dynamic-interface interface-name option-82 enable Configuring DHCP Option 82 (CLI) Configure the format of the DHCP option 82 payload by entering one of these commands:

config dhcp opt-82 remote-id ap_macAdds the MAC address of the access point to the DHCP option 82 payload. config dhcp opt-82 remote-id ap_mac:ssidAdds the MAC address and SSID of the access point to the DHCP option 82 payload. config dhcp opt-82 remote-id ap-ethmacAdds the Ethernet MAC address of the access point to the DHCP option 82 payload. config dhcp opt-82 remote-id apname:ssidAdds the AP name and SSID of the access point to the DHCP option 82 payload. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 422 OL-28744-01 Configuring DHCP Option 82 (CLI) config dhcp opt-82 remote-id ap-group-nameAdds the AP group name to the DHCP option 82 payload. config dhcp opt-82 remote-id flex-group-nameAdds the FlexConnect group name to the DHCP option 82 payload. config dhcp opt-82 remote-id ap-locationAdds the AP location to the DHCP option 82 payload. config dhcp opt-82 remote-id apmac-vlan-idAdds the MAC address of the access point and the VLAN ID to the DHCP option 82 payload. config dhcp opt-82 remote-id apname-vlan-idAdds the AP name and its VLAN ID to the DHCP option 82 payload. config dhcp opt-82 remote-id ap-ethmac-ssidAdds the Ethernet MAC address of the access point and the SSID to the DHCP option 82 payload. Enable DHCP Option 82 on the dynamic interface to which the WLAN is associated by entering this command:

config interface dhcp dynamic-interface interface-name option-82 enable See the status of DHCP option 82 on the dynamic interface by entering the show interface detailed dynamic-interface-namecommand. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 423 Configuring DHCP Option 82 (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 424 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 53 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists Information About Access Control Lists, page 425 Restrictions for Access Control Lists, page 425 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (GUI), page 426 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (CLI), page 430 Information About Access Control Lists An Access Control List (ACL) is a set of rules used to limit access to a particular interface (for example, if you want to restrict a wireless client from pinging the management interface of the controller). After ACLs are configured on the controller, they can be applied to the management interface, the AP-manager interface, any of the dynamic interfaces, or a WLAN to control data traffic to and from wireless clients or to the controller central processing unit (CPU) to control all traffic destined for the CPU. You may also want to create a preauthentication ACL for web authentication. Such an ACL could be used to allow certain types of traffic before authentication is complete. Both IPv4 and IPv6 ACL are supported. IPv6 ACLs support the same options as IPv4 ACLs including source, destination, source and destination ports. Note You can enable only IPv4 traffic in your network by blocking IPv6 traffic. That is, you can configure an IPv6 ACL to deny all IPv6 traffic and apply it on specific or all WLANs. Restrictions for Access Control Lists You can define up to 64 ACLs, each with up to 64 rules (or filters) for both IPv4 and IPv6. Each rule has parameters that affect its action. When a packet matches all of the parameters for a rule, the action set for that rule is applied to the packet. When you apply CPU ACLs on a Cisco 5500 Series Controller or a Cisco WiSM2, you must permit traffic towards the virtual interface IP address for web authentication. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 425 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (GUI) All ACLs have an implicit deny all rule as the last rule. If a packet does not match any of the rules, it is dropped by the controller. If you are using an external web server with a Cisco 5500 Series Controller or a controller network module, you must configure a preauthentication ACL on the WLAN for the external web server. If you apply an ACL to an interface or a WLAN, wireless throughput is degraded when downloading from a 1-GBps file server. To improve throughput, remove the ACL from the interface or WLAN, move the ACL to a neighboring wired device with a policy rate-limiting restriction, or connect the file server using 100 Mbps rather than 1 Gbps. Multicast traffic received from wired networks that is destined to wireless clients is not processed by WLC ACLs. Multicast traffic initiated from wireless clients, destined to wired networks or other wireless clients on the same controller, is processed by WLC ACLs. ACLs are configured on the controller directly or configured through templates. The ACL name must be unique. You can configure ACL per client (AAA overridden ACL) or on either an interface or a WLAN. The AAA overridden ACL has the highest priority. However, each interface, WLAN, or per client ACL configuration that you apply can override one another. If peer-to-peer blocking is enabled, traffic is blocked between peers even if the ACL allows traffic between them. Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (GUI) Configuring Access Control Lists Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Choose Security > Access Control Lists > Access Control Lists to open the Access Control Lists page. If you want to see if packets are hitting any of the ACLs configured on your controller, select the Enable Counters check box and click Apply. Otherwise, leave the check box unselected, which is the default value. This feature is useful when troubleshooting your system. Note If you want to clear the counters for an ACL, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that ACL and choose Clear Counters. Add a new ACL by clicking New. The Access Control Lists > New page appears. In the Access Control List Name text box, enter a name for the new ACL. You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Choose the ACL type. There are two types of ACL supported, IPv4 and IPv6. Click Apply. When the Access Control Lists page reappears, click the name of the new ACL. When the Access Control Lists > Edit page appears, click Add New Rule. The Access Control Lists > Rules > New page appears. Configure a rule for this ACL as follows:

a) The controller supports up to 64 rules for each ACL. These rules are listed in order from 1 to 64. In the Sequence text box, enter a value (between 1 and 64) to determine the order of this rule in relation to any other rules defined for this ACL. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 426 OL-28744-01 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (GUI) Note If rules 1 through 4 are already defined and you add rule 29, it is added as rule 5. If you add or change a sequence number for a rule, the sequence numbers for other rules adjust to maintain a continuous sequence. For instance, if you change a rules sequence number from 7 to 5, the rules with sequence numbers 5 and 6 are automatically reassigned as 6 and 7, respectively. b) From the Source drop-down list, choose one of these options to specify the source of the packets to which this ACL applies:

AnyAny source (this is the default value). IP AddressA specific source. If you choose this option, enter the IP address and netmask of the source in the text boxes. If you are configuring IPv6 ACL, enter the IPv6 address and prefix length of the destination in the text boxes. c) From the Destination drop-down list, choose one of these options to specify the destination of the packets to which this ACL applies:

AnyAny destination (this is the default value). IP AddressA specific destination. If you choose this option, enter the IP address and netmask of the destination in the text boxes. If you are configuring IPv6 ACL, enter the IPv6 address and prefix length of the destination in the text boxes. d) From the Protocol drop-down list, choose the protocol ID of the IP packets to be used for this ACL. These are the protocol options:

AnyAny protocol (this is the default value) TCPTransmission Control Protocol UDPUser Datagram Protocol ICMP/ICMPv6Internet Control Message Protocol Note ICMPv6 is only available for IPv6 ACL. ESPIP Encapsulating Security Payload AHAuthentication Header GREGeneric Routing Encapsulation IP in IPInternet Protocol (IP) in IP (permits or denies IP-in-IP packets) Eth Over IPEthernet-over-Internet Protocol OSPFOpen Shortest Path First OtherAny other Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) protocol Note If you choose Other, enter the number of the desired protocol in the Protocol text box. You can find the list of available protocols in the INAI website. The controller can permit or deny only IP packets in an ACL. Other types of packets (such as ARP packets) cannot be specified. e) If you chose TCP or UDP in the previous step, two additional parameters appear: Source Port and Destination Port. These parameters enable you to choose a specific source port and destination port or port ranges. The port options OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 427 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (GUI) are used by applications that send and receive data to and from the networking stack. Some ports are designated for certain applications such as Telnet, SSH, HTTP, and so on. Note Source and Destination ports based on the ACL type. f) From the DSCP drop-down list, choose one of these options to specify the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value of this ACL. DSCP is an IP header text box that can be used to define the quality of service across the Internet. AnyAny DSCP (this is the default value) SpecificA specific DSCP from 0 to 63, which you enter in the DSCP edit box g) From the Direction drop-down list, choose one of these options to specify the direction of the traffic to which this ACL applies:

AnyAny direction (this is the default value) InboundFrom the client OutboundTo the client Note If you are planning to apply this ACL to the controller CPU, the packet direction does not have any significance, it is always Any. h) From the Action drop-down list, choose Deny to cause this ACL to block packets or Permit to cause this ACL to allow packets. The default value is Deny. i) Click Apply to commit your changes. The Access Control Lists > Edit page reappears, showing the rules for this ACL. The Deny Counters fields shows the number of times that packets have matched the explicit deny ACL rule. The Number of Hits field shows the number of times that packets have matched an ACL rule. You must enable ACL counters on the Access Control Lists page to enable these fields. Note If you want to edit a rule, click the sequence number of the desired rule to open the Access Control Lists >

Rules > Edit page. If you want to delete a rule, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired rule and choose Remove. j) Repeat this procedure to add any additional rules for this ACL. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Repeat this procedure to add any additional ACLs. Step 9 Step 10 Applying an Access Control List to an Interface Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 428 Choose Controller > Interfaces. Click the name of the desired interface. The Interfaces > Edit page for that interface appears. Choose the desired ACL from the ACL Name drop-down list and click Apply. The default is None. Note Only IPv4 ACL are supported as interface ACL. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (GUI) Applying an Access Control List to the Controller CPU Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Security > Access Control Lists > CPU Access Control Lists to open the CPU Access Control Lists page. Select the Enable CPU ACL check box to enable a designated ACL to control the traffic to the controller CPU or unselect the check box to disable the CPU ACL feature and remove any ACL that had been applied to the CPU. The default value is unselected. From the ACL Name drop-down list, choose the ACL that will control the traffic to the controller CPU. None is the default value when the CPU ACL feature is disabled. If you choose None while the CPU ACL Enable check box is selected, an error message appears indicating that you must choose an ACL. Note This parameter is available only if you have selected the CPU ACL Enable check box. When CPU ACL is enabled, it is applicable to both wireless and wired traffic. Only IPv4 ACL are supported as CPU ACL. Note Step 4 Step 5 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Applying an Access Control List to a WLAN Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the desired WLAN to open the WLANs > Edit page. Choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. From the Override Interface ACL drop-down list, choose the IPv4 or IPv6 ACL that you want to apply to this WLAN. The ACL that you choose overrides any ACL that is configured for the interface. None is the default value. Note To support centralized access control through AAA server such as ISE or ACS, IPv6 ACL must be configured on the controller and the WLAN must be configured with AAA override enabled feature. Step 5 Step 6 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 429 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (CLI) Applying a Preauthentication Access Control List to a WLAN Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the desired WLAN to open the WLANs > Edit page. Choose the Security and Layer 3 tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 3) page. Select the Web Policy check box. From the Preauthentication ACL drop-down list, choose the desired ACL and click Apply. None is the default value. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (CLI) Configuring Access Control Lists Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 430 See all of the ACLs that are configured on the controller by entering this command:

show [ipv6] acl summary See detailed information for a particular ACL by entering this command:

show [ipv6] acl detailed acl_name The Counter text box increments each time a packet matches an ACL rule, and the DenyCounter text box increments each time a packet does not match any of the rules. Note If a traffic/request is allowed from the controller by a permit rule, then the response to the traffic/request in the opposite direction also is allowed and cannot be blocked by a deny rule in the ACL. Enable or disable ACL counters for your controller by entering this command:

config acl counter {start | stop}

Note If you want to clear the current counters for an ACL, enter the clear acl counters acl_name command. Add a new ACL by entering this command:

config [ipv6] acl create acl_name. You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the acl_name parameter. Note When you try to create an interface name with space, the controller CLI does not create an interface. For example, if you want to create an interface name int 3, the CLI will not create this since there is a space between int and 3. If you want to use int 3 as the interface name, you need to enclose within single quotes like int 3. Add a rule for an ACL by entering this command:

config [ipv6] acl rule add acl_name rule_index Configure an ACL rule by entering config [ipv6] acl rule command:

Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (CLI) Note To delete an ACL, enter the config [ipv6] acl delete acl_name command. To delete an ACL rule, enter the config [ipv6] acl rule delete acl_name rule_index command. Applying Access Control Lists Step 1 Perform any of the following:

To apply an ACL to the data path, enter this command:

config acl apply acl_name To apply an ACL to the controller CPU to restrict the type of traffic (wired, wireless, or both) reaching the CPU, enter this command:

config acl cpu acl_name {wired | wireless | both}

Note To see the ACL that is applied to the controller CPU, enter the show acl cpu command. To remove the ACL that is applied to the controller CPU, enter the config acl cpu none command. For 2504 and 4400 series WLC, the CPU ACL cannot be used to control the CAPWAP traffic. Use the access-list on the network to control CAPWAP traffic. Note To apply an ACL to a WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan acl wlan_id acl_name Note To see the ACL that is applied to a WLAN, enter the show wlan wlan_id command. To remove the ACL that is applied to a WLAN, enter the config wlan acl wlan_id none command. To apply a preauthentication ACL to a WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan security web-auth acl wlan_id acl_name Step 2 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 431 Configuring and Applying Access Control Lists (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 432 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 54 Configuring Management Frame Protection Information About Management Frame Protection, page 433 Restrictions for Management Frame Protection, page 435 Configuring Management Frame Protection (GUI), page 435 Viewing the Management Frame Protection Settings (GUI), page 435 Configuring Management Frame Protection (CLI), page 436 Viewing the Management Frame Protection Settings (CLI), page 436 Debugging Management Frame Protection Issues (CLI), page 436 Information About Management Frame Protection Management frame protection (MFP) provides security for the otherwise unprotected and unencrypted 802.11 management messages passed between access points and clients. MFP provides both infrastructure and client support. Infrastructure MFPProtects management frames by detecting adversaries that are invoking denial-of-service attacks, flooding the network with associations and probes, interjecting as rogue access points, and affecting network performance by attacking the QoS and radio measurement frames. Infrastructure MFP is a global setting that provides a quick and effective means to detect and report phishing incidents. Specifically, infrastructure MFP protects 802.11 session management functions by adding message integrity check information elements (MIC IEs) to the management frames emitted by access points

(and not those emitted by clients), which are then validated by other access points in the network. Infrastructure MFP is passive. It can detect and report intrusions but has no means to stop them. Client MFPShields authenticated clients from spoofed frames, preventing many of the common attacks against wireless LANs from becoming effective. Most attacks, such as deauthentication attacks, revert to simply degrading performance by contending with valid clients. Specifically, client MFP encrypts management frames are sent between access points and CCXv5 clients so that both the access points and clients can take preventative action by dropping spoofed class 3 management frames (that is, management frames passed between an access point and a client that is authenticated and associated). Client MFP leverages the security mechanisms defined by IEEE 802.11i OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 433 Information About Management Frame Protection to protect the following types of class 3 unicast management frames: disassociation, deauthentication, and QoS (WMM) action. Client MFP protects a client-access point session from the most common type of denial-of-service attack. It protects class 3 management frames by using the same encryption method used for the sessions data frames. If a frame received by the access point or client fails decryption, it is dropped, and the event is reported to the controller. To use client MFP, clients must support CCXv5 MFP and must negotiate WPA2 using either TKIP or AES-CCMP. EAP or PSK may be used to obtain the PMK. CCKM and controller mobility management are used to distribute session keys between access points for Layer 2 and Layer 3 fast roaming. Note To prevent attacks using broadcast frames, access points supporting CCXv5 will not emit any broadcast class 3 management frames (such as disassociation, deauthentication, or action). CCXv5 clients and access points must discard broadcast class 3 management frames. Client MFP supplements infrastructure MFP rather than replaces it because infrastructure MFP continues to detect and report invalid unicast frames sent to clients that are not client-MFP capable as well as invalid class 1 and 2 management frames. Infrastructure MFP is applied only to management frames that are not protected by client MFP. Infrastructure MFP consists of three main components:

Management frame protectionThe access point protects the management frames it transmits by adding a MIC IE to each frame. Any attempt to copy, alter, or replay the frame invalidates the MIC, causing any receiving access point configured to detect MFP frames to report the discrepancy. MFP is supported for use with Cisco Aironet lightweight access points. Management frame validationIn infrastructure MFP, the access point validates every management frame that it receives from other access points in the network. It ensures that the MIC IE is present (when the originator is configured to transmit MFP frames) and matches the content of the management frame. If it receives any frame that does not contain a valid MIC IE from a BSSID belonging to an access point that is configured to transmit MFP frames, it reports the discrepancy to the network management system. In order for the timestamps to operate properly, all controllers must be Network Time Protocol (NTP) synchronized. Event reportingThe access point notifies the controller when it detects an anomaly, and the controller aggregates the received anomaly events and can report the results through SNMP traps to the network management system. Note Client MFP uses the same event reporting mechanisms as infrastructure MFP. Infrastructure MFP is enabled by default and can be disabled globally. When you upgrade from a previous software release, infrastructure MFP is disabled globally if access point authentication is enabled because the two features are mutually exclusive. Once infrastructure MFP is enabled globally, signature generation (adding MICs to outbound frames) can be disabled for selected WLANs, and validation can be disabled for selected access points. Client MFP is enabled by default on WLANs that are configured for WPA2. It can be disabled, or it can be made mandatory (in which case, only clients that negotiate MFP are allowed to associate) on selected WLANs. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 434 OL-28744-01 Restrictions for Management Frame Protection Restrictions for Management Frame Protection Lightweight access points support infrastructure MFP in local and monitor modes and in FlexConnect mode when the access point is connected to a controller. They support client MFP in local, FlexConnect, and bridge modes. OEAP 600 Series Access points do not support MFP. Client MFP is supported for use only with CCXv5 clients using WPA2 with TKIP or AES-CCMP. Non-CCXv5 clients may associate to a WLAN if client MFP is disabled or optional. Error reports generated on a FlexConnect access point in standalone mode cannot be forwarded to the controller and are dropped. Configuring Management Frame Protection (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Security> Wireless Protection Policies > AP Authentication/MFP to open the AP Authentication Policy page. Enable infrastructure MFP globally for the controller by choosing Management Frame Protection from the Protection Type drop-down list. Click Apply to commit your changes. Note If more than one controller is included in the mobility group, you must configure a Network Time Protocol

(NTP) server on all controllers in the mobility group that are configured for infrastructure MFP. Configure client MFP for a particular WLAN after infrastructure MFP has been enabled globally for the controller as follows:

a) Choose WLANs. b) Click the profile name of the desired WLAN. The WLANs > Edit page appears. c) Choose Advanced. The WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page appears. d) Choose Disabled, Optional, or Required from the MFP Client Protection drop-down list. The default value is Optional. If you choose Required, clients are allowed to associate only if MFP is negotiated (that is, if WPA2 is configured on the controller and the client supports CCXv5 MFP and is also configured for WPA2). Note For Cisco OEAP 600, MFP is not supported. It should either be Disabled or Optional. e) Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your settings. Step 5 Viewing the Management Frame Protection Settings (GUI) To see the controllers current global MFP settings, choose Security > Wireless Protection Policies >

Management Frame Protection. The Management Frame Protection Settings page appears. On this page, you can see the following MFP settings:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 435 Configuring Management Frame Protection (CLI) The Management Frame Protection field shows if infrastructure MFP is enabled globally for the controller. The Controller Time Source Valid field indicates whether the controller time is set locally (by manually entering the time) or through an external source (such as the NTP server). If the time is set by an external source, the value of this field is True. If the time is set locally, the value is False. The time source is used for validating the timestamp on management frames between access points of different controllers within a mobility group. The Client Protection field shows if client MFP is enabled for individual WLANs and whether it is optional or required. Configuring Management Frame Protection (CLI) Enable or disable infrastructure MFP globally for the controller by entering this command:

config wps mfp infrastructure {enable | disable}

Enable or disable client MFP on a specific WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan mfp client {enable | disable} wlan_id [required ]

If you enable client MFP and use the optional required parameter, clients are allowed to associate only if MFP is negotiated. Viewing the Management Frame Protection Settings (CLI) See the controllers current MFP settings by entering this command:

show wps mfp summary See the current MFP configuration for a particular WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id See whether client MFP is enabled for a specific client by entering this command:

show client detail client_mac See MFP statistics for the controller by entering this command:

show wps mfp statistics Note This report contains no data unless an active attack is in progress. Examples of various error types are shown for illustration only. This table is cleared every 5 minutes when the data is forwarded to any network management stations. Debugging Management Frame Protection Issues (CLI) Use this command if you experience any problems with MFP:

debug wps mfp ? {enable | disable}

where ? is one of the following:

clientConfigures debugging for client MFP messages. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 436 OL-28744-01 Debugging Management Frame Protection Issues (CLI) capwapConfigures debugging for MFP messages between the controller and access points. detailConfigures detailed debugging for MFP messages. reportConfigures debugging for MFP reporting. mmConfigures debugging for MFP mobility (inter-controller) messages. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 437 Debugging Management Frame Protection Issues (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 438 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 55 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (GUI), page 439 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (CLI), page 440 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Security > Wireless Protection Policies > Client Exclusion Policies to open the Client Exclusion Policies page. Select any of these check boxes if you want the controller to exclude clients for the condition specified. The default value for each exclusion policy is enabled. Excessive 802.11 Association FailuresClients are excluded on the sixth 802.11 association attempt, after five consecutive failures. Excessive 802.11 Authentication FailuresClients are excluded on the sixth 802.11 authentication attempt, after five consecutive failures. Excessive 802.1X Authentication FailuresClients are excluded on the fourth 802.1X authentication attempt, after three consecutive failures. IP Theft or IP ReuseClients are excluded if the IP address is already assigned to another device. Excessive Web Authentication FailuresClients are excluded on the fourth web authentication attempt, after three consecutive failures. Step 3 Step 4 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 439 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (CLI) Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Enable or disable the controller to exclude clients on the sixth 802.11 association attempt, after five consecutive failures by entering this command:

config wps client-exclusion 802.11-assoc {enable | disable}

Enable or disable the controller to exclude clients on the sixth 802.11 authentication attempt, after five consecutive failures by entering this command:

config wps client-exclusion 802.11-auth {enable | disable}

Enable or disable the controller to exclude clients on the fourth 802.1X authentication attempt, after three consecutive failures by entering this command:

config wps client-exclusion 802.1x-auth {enable | disable}

Enable or disable the controller to exclude clients if the IP address is already assigned to another device by entering this command:

config wps client-exclusion ip-theft {enable | disable}

Enable or disable the controller to exclude clients on the fourth web authentication attempt, after three consecutive failures by entering this command:

config wps client-exclusion web-auth {enable | disable}

Enable or disable the controller to exclude clients for all of the above reasons by entering this command:

config wps client-exclusion all {enable | disable}

Use the following command to add or delete client exclusion entries. config exclusionlist {add MAC [description] | delete MAC | description MAC [description]}

Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See a list of clients that have been dynamically excluded, by entering this command:

show exclusionlist Information similar to the following appears:

Dynamically Disabled Clients

----------------------------

MAC Address

-----------

Exclusion Reason

----------------

Time Remaining (in secs)

------------------------

802.1X Failure 00:40:96:b4:82:55 See the client exclusion policy configuration settings by entering this command:

show wps summary Information similar to the following appears:

51 Auto-Immune Auto-Immune.................................... Disabled Client Exclusion Policy Excessive 802.11-association failures.......... Enabled Excessive 802.11-authentication failures....... Enabled Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 440 OL-28744-01 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (CLI) Excessive 802.1x-authentication................ Enabled IP-theft....................................... Enabled Excessive Web authentication failure........... Enabled Signature Policy Signature Processing........................ Enabled OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 441 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 442 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 56 Configuring Identity Networking Information About Identity Networking, page 443 RADIUS Attributes Used in Identity Networking, page 444 Information About Identity Networking In most wireless LAN systems, each WLAN has a static policy that applies to all clients associated with an SSID. Although powerful, this method has limitations because it requires clients to associate with different SSIDs to inherit different QoS and security policies. However, the Cisco Wireless LAN solution supports identity networking, which allows the network to advertise a single SSID but allows specific users to inherit different QoS or security policies based on their user profiles. The specific policies that you can control using identity networking are as follows:

ACLWhen the ACL attribute is present in the RADIUS Access Accept, the system applies the ACL name to the client station after it authenticates, which overrides any ACLs that are assigned to the interface. VLANWhen a VLAN Interface-name or VLAN tag is present in a RADIUS Access Accept, the system places the client on a specific interface. Note The VLAN feature only supports MAC filtering, 802.1X, and WPA. The VLAN feature does not support web authentication or IPsec. Tunnel Attributes. Note When any of the other RADIUS attributes (QoS-Level, ACL-Name, Interface-Name, or VLAN-Tag), which are described later in this section, are returned, the Tunnel Attributes must also be returned. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 443 RADIUS Attributes Used in Identity Networking The operating systems local MAC filter database has been extended to include the interface name, allowing local MAC filters to specify to which interface the client should be assigned. A separate RADIUS server can also be used, but the RADIUS server must be defined using the Security menus. RADIUS Attributes Used in Identity Networking QoS-Level This section explains the RADIUS attributes used in identity networking. This attribute indicates the QoS level to be applied to the mobile client's traffic within the switching fabric, as well as over the air. This example shows a summary of the QoS-Level Attribute format. The text boxes are transmitted from left to right. 1 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

Type Vendor-Id (cont.)

|

| Vendor type Vendor-Id QoS Level

| Length 3 Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length 10 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 2 Vendor length 4 Value Three octets:

3 Bronze (Background) 0 Silver (Best Effort) 1 Gold (Video) 2 Platinum (Voice) ACL-Name This attribute indicates the ACL name to be applied to the client. A summary of the ACL-Name Attribute format is shown below. The text boxes are transmitted from left to right. 1 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type Vendor-Id (cont.)

|

| Vendor type ACL Name... Vendor-Id

| Length 3 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 444 OL-28744-01 RADIUS Attributes Used in Identity Networking Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length >7 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 6 Vendor length >0 Value A string that includes the name of the ACL to use for the client Interface Name This attribute indicates the VLAN Interface a client is to be associated to. A summary of the Interface-Name Attribute format is shown below. The text boxes are transmitted from left to right. 1 3 2

| Length Vendor-Id Type Vendor-Id (cont.) Interface Name... 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

| Vendor type | Vendor length |

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-

Type 26 for Vendor-Specific Length >7 Vendor-Id 14179 Vendor type 5 Vendor length >0 Value A string that includes the name of the interface the client is to be assigned to. Note This Attribute only works when MAC filtering is enabled or if 802.1X or WPA is used as the security policy. VLAN Tag This attribute indicates the group ID for a particular tunneled session and is also known as the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID attribute. This attribute might be included in the Access-Request packet if the tunnel initiator can predetermine the group resulting from a particular connection and should be included in the Access-Accept packet if this tunnel session is to be treated as belonging to a particular private group. Private groups may be used to associate a tunneled session with a particular group of users. For example, it may be used to facilitate routing of unregistered IP addresses through a particular interface. It should be included in Accounting-Request packets which contain Acct-Status-Type attributes with values of either Start or Stop and which pertain to a tunneled session. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 445 RADIUS Attributes Used in Identity Networking A summary of the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID Attribute format is shown below. The text boxes are transmitted from left to right. 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

|

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

String... Length Type Tag 2 3

|

|

|

Type 81 for Tunnel-Private-Group-ID. Length >= 3 Tag The Tag text box is one octet in length and is intended to provide a means of grouping attributes in the same packet which refer to the same tunnel. If the value of the Tag text box is greater than 0x00 and less than or equal to 0x1F, it should be interpreted as indicating which tunnel (of several alternatives) this attribute pertains. If the Tag text box is greater than 0x1F, it should be interpreted as the first byte of the following String text box. String This text box must be present. The group is represented by the String text box. There is no restriction on the format of group IDs. Note When any of the other RADIUS attributes (QoS-Level, ACL-Name, Interface-Name, or VLAN-Tag) are returned, the Tunnel Attributes must also be returned. Tunnel Attributes RFC 2868 defines RADIUS tunnel attributes used for authentication and authorization, and RFC2867 defines tunnel attributes used for accounting. Where the IEEE 802.1X authenticator supports tunneling, a compulsory tunnel may be set up for the Supplicant as a result of the authentication. In particular, it may be desirable to allow a port to be placed into a particular VLAN, defined in IEEE 8021Q, based on the result of the authentication. This configuration can be used, for example, to allow a wireless host to remain on the same VLAN as it moves within a campus network. The RADIUS server typically indicates the desired VLAN by including tunnel attributes within the Access-Accept. However, the IEEE 802.1X authenticator may also provide a hint as to the VLAN to be assigned to the Supplicant by including Tunnel attributes within the AccessRequest. For use in VLAN assignment, the following tunnel attributes are used:

Tunnel-Type=VLAN (13) Tunnel-Medium-Type=802 Tunnel-Private-Group-ID=VLANID The VLAN ID is 12 bits, with a value between 1 and 4094, inclusive. Because the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID is of type String as defined in RFC 2868, for use with IEEE 802.1X, the VLANID integer value is encoded as a string. When Tunnel attributes are sent, it is necessary to fill in the Tag text box. As noted in RFC 2868, section 3.1:

The Tag text box is one octet in length and is intended to provide a means of grouping attributes in the same packet that refer to the same tunnel. Valid values for this text box are 0x01 through 0x1F, inclusive. If the Tag text box is unused, it must be zero (0x00). Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 446 OL-28744-01 RADIUS Attributes Used in Identity Networking For use with Tunnel-Client-Endpoint, Tunnel-Server-Endpoint, Tunnel-Private-Group-ID, Tunnel-Assignment-ID, Tunnel-Client-Auth-ID or Tunnel-Server-Auth-ID attributes (but not Tunnel-Type, Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Password, or Tunnel-Preference), a tag text box of greater than 0x1F is interpreted as the first octet of the following text box. Unless alternative tunnel types are provided, (e.g. for IEEE 802.1X authenticators that may support tunneling but not VLANs), it is only necessary for tunnel attributes to specify a single tunnel. As a result, where it is only desired to specify the VLANID, the tag text box should be set to zero (0x00) in all tunnel attributes. Where alternative tunnel types are to be provided, tag values between 0x01 and 0x1F should be chosen. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 447 RADIUS Attributes Used in Identity Networking Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 448 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 57 Configuring AAA Override Information About AAA Override, page 449 Restrictions for AAA Override, page 449 Updating the RADIUS Server Dictionary File for Proper QoS Values, page 450 Configuring AAA Override (GUI), page 451 Configuring AAA Override (CLI), page 451 Information About AAA Override The AAA Override option of a WLAN enables you to configure the WLAN for identity networking. It enables you to apply VLAN tagging, Quality of Service (QoS), and Access Control Lists (ACLs) to individual clients based on the returned RADIUS attributes from the AAA server. AAA Override for IPv6 ACLs In order to support centralized access control through a centralized AAA server such as the Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) or ACS, the IPv6 ACL can be provisioned on a per-client basis using AAA Override attributes. In order to use this feature, the IPv6 ACL must be configured on the controller and the WLAN must be configured with the AAA Override feature enabled. The actual named AAA attribute for an IPv6 ACL is Airespace-IPv6-ACL-Name, which is similar to the Airespace-ACL-Name attribute that is used for provisioning an IPv4-based ACL. The AAA attribute returned contents should be a string equal to the name of the IPv6 ACL as configured on the controller. Restrictions for AAA Override If a client moves to a new interface due to the AAA override and then you apply an ACL to that interface, the ACL does not take effect until the client reauthenticates. To work around this issue, apply the ACL and then enable the WLAN so that all clients connect to the ACL that is already configured on the interface, or disable and then reenable the WLAN after you apply the interface so that the clients can reauthenticate. If the ACL returned from the AAA server does not exist on the controller or if the ACL is configured with an incorrect name, then the clients are not allowed to be authenticated. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 449 Updating the RADIUS Server Dictionary File for Proper QoS Values With FlexConnect local switching, Multicast is forwarded only for the VLAN that the SSID is mapped to and not to any overridden VLANs. When the interface group is mapped to a WLAN and clients connect to the WLAN, the client does not get the IP address in a round robin fashion. The AAA override with interface group is supported. Most of the configuration for allowing AAA override is done at the RADIUS server, where you should configure the Access Control Server (ACS) with the override properties you would like it to return to the controller (for example, Interface-Name, QoS-Level, and VLAN-Tag). On the controller, enable the Allow AAA Override configuration parameter using the GUI or CLI. Enabling this parameter allows the controller to accept the attributes returned by the RADIUS server. The controller then applies these attributes to its clients. Updating the RADIUS Server Dictionary File for Proper QoS Values If you are using a Steel-Belted RADIUS (SBR), FreeRadius, or similar RADIUS server, clients may not obtain the correct QoS values after the AAA override feature is enabled. For these servers, which allow you to edit the dictionary file, you need to update the file to reflect the proper QoS values: Silver is 0, Gold is 1, Platinum is 2, and Bronze is 3. To update the RADIUS server dictionary file, follow these steps:

Note This issue does not apply to the Cisco Secure Access Control Server (ACS). To update the RADIUS server dictionary file, follow these steps:

1 Stop the SBR service (or other RADIUS service). 2 Save the following text to theRadius_Install_Directory\Service folder asciscowlan.dct:

################################################################################

# CiscoWLAN.dct- Cisco Wireless Lan Controllers

#

# (See README.DCT for more details on the format of this file)

################################################################################

# Dictionary - Cisco WLAN Controllers

#

# Start with the standard Radius specification attributes

#

@radius.dct

#

# Standard attributes supported by Airespace

#

# Define additional vendor specific attributes (VSAs)

#

MACRO Airespace-VSA(t,s) 26 [vid=14179 type1=%t% len1=+2 data=%s%]

ATTRIBUTE WLAN-Id Aire-QoS-Level ATTRIBUTE VALUE Aire-QoS-Level Bronze VALUE Aire-QoS-Level Silver VALUE Aire-QoS-Level Gold VALUE Aire-QoS-Level Platinum ATTRIBUTE ATTRIBUTE ATTRIBUTE ATTRIBUTE Airespace-VSA(3, integer) Airespace-VSA(4, integer) Airespace-VSA(5, string) Airespace-VSA(6, string) Airespace-VSA(1, integer) Airespace-VSA(2, integer) DSCP 802.1P-Tag Interface-Name ACL-Name cr r 3 0 1 2 r r r r Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 450 OL-28744-01 Configuring AAA Override (GUI)

# This should be last.

################################################################################

# CiscoWLAN.dct - Cisco WLC dictionary

##############################################################################

3 Open the dictiona.dcm file (in the same directory) and add the line @ciscowlan.dct. 4 Save and close the dictiona.dcm file. 5 Open the vendor.ini file (in the same directory) and add the following text:

vendor-product dictionary ignore-ports port-number-usage help-id

= Cisco WLAN Controller

= ciscowlan

= no

= per-port-type

=

6 Save and close the vendor.ini file. 7 Start the SBR service (or other RADIUS service). 8 Launch the SBR Administrator (or other RADIUS Administrator). 9 Add a RADIUS client (if not already added). Choose Cisco WLAN Controller from the Make/Model drop-down list. Configuring AAA Override (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN that you want to configure. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Choose the Advanced tab. Select the Allow AAA Override check box to enable AAA override or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is disabled. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring AAA Override (CLI) Configure override of user policy through AAA on a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan aaa-override {enable | disable} wlan-id For wlan-id, enter a value between 1 and 16. Configure debugging of 802.1X AAA interactions by entering this command:

debug dot1x aaa {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 451 Configuring AAA Override (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 452 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 58 Managing Rogue Devices Information About Rogue Devices, page 453 Configuring Rogue Detection (GUI), page 456 Configuring Rogue Detection (CLI), page 457 Information About Rogue Devices Rogue access points can disrupt wireless LAN operations by hijacking legitimate clients and using plain-text or other denial-of-service or man-in-the-middle attacks. That is, a hacker can use a rogue access point to capture sensitive information, such as usernames and passwords. The hacker can then transmit a series of Clear to Send (CTS) frames. This action mimics an access point, informing a particular client to transmit, and instructing all the other clients to wait, which results in legitimate clients being unable to access network resources. Wireless LAN service providers have a strong interest in banning rogue access points from the air space. Because rogue access points are inexpensive and readily available, employees sometimes plug unauthorized rogue access points into existing LANs and build ad hoc wireless networks without their IT department's knowledge or consent. These rogue access points can be a serious breach of network security because they can be plugged into a network port behind the corporate firewall. Because employees generally do not enable any security settings on the rogue access point, it is easy for unauthorized users to use the access point to intercept network traffic and hijack client sessions. Even more alarming, wireless users frequently publish unsecure access point locations, increasing the odds of having enterprise security breached. The following are some guidelines to manage rogue devices:

The containment frames are sent immediately after the authorization and associations are detected. The enhanced containment algorithm provides more effective containment of ad hoc clients. In a dense RF environment, where maximum rogue access points are suspected, the chances of detecting rogue access points by a local mode access point and FlexConnect mode access point in channel 157 or channel 161 are less when compared to other channels. To mitigate this problem, we recommend that you use dedicated monitor mode access points. The local and FlexConnect mode access points are designed to serve associated clients. These access points spend relatively less time performing off-channel scanning: about 50 milliseconds on each channel. If you want to perform high rogue detection, a monitor mode access point must be used. Alternatively, you can reduce the scan intervals from 180 seconds to a lesser value, for example, 120 or 60 seconds, OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 453 Information About Rogue Devices ensuring that the radio goes off-channel more frequently, which improves the chances of rogue detection. However, the access point will still spend about 50 milliseconds on each channel. Rogue detection is disabled by default for OfficeExtend access points because these access points, which are deployed in a home environment, are likely to detect a large number of rogue devices. Client card implementations might mitigate the effectiveness of ad hoc containment. It is possible to classify and report rogue access points through the use of rogue states and user-defined classification rules that enable rogues to automatically move between states. Each controller limits the number of rogue containments to three per radio (or six per radio for access points in the monitor mode). Rogue Location Discovery Protocol (RLDP) detects rogue access points that are configured for open authentication. RLDP detects rogue access points that use a broadcast Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID), that is, the access point broadcasts its Service Set Identifier in beacons. RLDP detects only those rogue access points that are on the same network. If an access list in the network prevents the sending of RLDP traffic from the rogue access point to the controller, RLDP does not work. RLDP does not work on 5-GHz dynamic frequency selection (DFS) channels. However, RLDP works when the managed access point is in the monitor mode on a DFS channel. If RLDP is enabled on mesh APs, and the APs perform RLDP tasks, the mesh APs are dissociated from the controller. The workaround is to disable RLDP on mesh APs. If RLDP is enabled on nonmonitor APs, client connectivity outages occur when RLDP is in process. If the rogue is manually contained, the rogue entry is retained even after the rogue expires. If the rogue is contained by any other means, such as auto, rule, and AwIPS preventions, the rogue entry is deleted when it expires. The controller will request to AAA server for rogue client validation only once. As a result, if rogue client validation fails on the first attempt then the rogue client will not be detected as a threat any more. To avoid this, add the valid client entries in the authentication server before enabling Validate Rogue Clients Against AAA. In the 7.4 and earlier releases, if a rogue that was already classified by a rule was not reclassified. In the 7.5 release, this behavior is enhanced to allow reclassification of rogues based on the priority of the rogue rule. The priority is determined by using the rogue report that is received by the controller. Detecting Rogue Devices The controller continuously monitors all the nearby access points and automatically discovers and collects information on rogue access points and clients. When the controller discovers a rogue access point, it uses the Rogue Location Discovery Protocol (RLDP) and the rogue detector mode access point is connected to determine if the rogue is attached to your network. Controller initiates RLDP on rogue devices that have open authenticated and configured. If RLDP uses Flexconnect or local mode access points, then clients are disconnected for that moment. After the RLDP cycle, the clients are reconnected to the access points. As and when rogue access points are seen (auto-configuration), the RLDP process is initiated. You can configure the controller to use RLDP on all the access points or only on the access points configured for the monitor (listen-only) mode. The latter option facilitates automated rogue access point detection in a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 454 OL-28744-01 Information About Rogue Devices crowded radio frequency (RF) space, allowing monitoring without creating unnecessary interference and without affecting the regular data access point functionality. If you configure the controller to use RLDP on all the access points, the controller always chooses the monitor access point for RLDP operation if a monitor access point and a local (data) access point are both nearby. If RLDP determines that the rogue is on your network, you can choose to contain the detected rogue either manually or automatically. RLDP detects on wire presence of the rogue access points that are configured with open authentication only once, which is the default retry configuration. Retries can be configured using the config rogue ap rldp retries command. You can initiate or trigger RLDP from controller in three ways:

1 Enter the RLDP initiation command manually from the controller CLI. The equivalent GUI option for initiating RLDP is not supported. config rogue ap rldp initiate mac-address 2 Schedule RLDP from the controller CLI. The equivalent GUI option for scheduling RLDP is not supported. config rogue ap rldp schedule 3 Auto RLDP. You can configure auto RLDP on controller either from controller CLI or GUI but keep in mind the following guidelines:

The auto RLDP option can be configured only when the rogue detection security level is set to custom. Either auto RLDP or schedule of RLDP can be enabled at a time. A rogue access point is moved to a contained state either automatically or manually. The controller selects the best available access point for containment and pushes the information to the access point. The access point stores the list of containments per radio. For auto containment, you can configure the controller to use only the monitor mode access point. The containment operation occurs in the following two ways:

The container access point goes through the list of containments periodically and sends unicast containment frames. For rogue access point containment, the frames are sent only if a rogue client is associated. Whenever a contained rogue activity is detected, containment frames are transmitted. Individual rogue containment involves sending a sequence of unicast disassociation and deauthentication frames. Cisco Prime Infrastructure Interaction and Rogue Detection Cisco Prime Infrastructure supports rule-based classification and uses the classification rules configured on the controller. The controller sends traps to Cisco Prime Infrastructure after the following events:

If an unknown access point moves to the Friendly state for the first time, the controller sends a trap to Cisco Prime Infrastructure only if the rogue state is Alert. It does not send a trap if the rogue state is Internal or External. If a rogue entry is removed after the timeout expires, the controller sends a trap to Cisco Prime Infrastructure for rogue access points categorized as Malicious (Alert, Threat) or Unclassified (Alert). The controller does not remove rogue entries with the following rogue states: Contained, Contained Pending, Internal, and External. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 455 Configuring Rogue Detection (GUI) Configuring Rogue Detection (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Make sure that rogue detection is enabled on the corresponding access points. Rogue detection is enabled by default for all access points joined to the controller (except for OfficeExtend access points). However, you can enable or disable rogue detection for individual access points by selecting or unselecting the Rogue Detection check box on the All APs

> Details for (Advanced) page. Choose Security > Wireless Protection Policies > Rogue Policies > General. The Rogue Policies page is displayed. Step 3 Choose one of the following options from the Rogue Location Discovery Protocol drop-down list:

DisableDisables RLDP on all the access points. This is the default value. All APsEnables RLDP on all the access points. Monitor Mode APsEnables RLDP only on the access points in the monitor mode. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 In the Expiration Timeout for Rogue AP and Rogue Client Entries text box, enter the number of seconds after which the rogue access point and client entries expire and are removed from the list. The valid range is 240 to 3600 seconds, and the default value is 1200 seconds. Note If a rogue access point or client entry times out, it is removed from the controller only if its rogue state is Alert or Threat for any classification type. To use the AAA server or local database to validate if rogue clients are valid clients, select the Validate Rogue Clients Against AAA check box. By default, the check box is unselected. If necessary, select the Detect and Report Ad-Hoc Networks check box to enable ad hoc rogue detection and reporting. By default, the check box is selected. In the Rogue Detection Report Interval text box, enter the time interval, in seconds, at which APs should send the rogue detection report to the controller. The valid range is 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. In the Rogue Detection Minimum RSSI text box, enter the minimum Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value that a rogue entry should have for APs to detect the rogue and for a rogue entry to be created in the controller. The valid range is 128 dBm to 0 dBm, and the default value is 0 dBm. Note This feature is applicable to all the AP modes. There can be many rogues with very weak RSSI values that do not provide any valuable information in rogue analysis. Therefore, you can use this option to filter rogues by specifying the minimum RSSI value at which APs should detect rogues. In the Rogue Detection Transient Interval text box, enter the time interval at which a rogue should be scanned for by the AP after the first time the rogue is scanned. After the rogue is scanned for consistently, updates are sent periodically to the controller. Thus, the APs filter the transient rogues, which are active for a very short period and are then silent. The valid range is between 120 seconds to 1800 seconds, and the default value is 0. The rogue detection transient interval is applicable to the monitor mode APs only. This feature has the following advantages:

Rogue reports from APs to the controller are shorter. Transient rogue entries are avoided in the controller. Unnecessary memory allocation for transient rogues are avoided. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 456 OL-28744-01 Configuring Rogue Detection (CLI) Step 10 If you want the controller to automatically contain certain rogue devices, enable the following parameters. By default, these parameters are in disabled state. Caution When you select any of the Auto Contain parameters and click Apply, the following message is displayed:

Using this feature may have legal consequences. Do you want to continue?

The 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz frequencies in the Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) band are open to the public and can be used without a license. As such, containing devices on another partys network could have legal consequences. Auto Containment LevelSet the auto containment level. By default, the auto containment level is set to 1. Auto Containment only for Monitor mode APsConfigure the monitor mode access points for auto-containment. Rogue on WireConfigure the auto containment of rogues that are detected on the wired network. Using Our SSIDConfigure the auto containment of rogues that are advertising your networks SSID. If you leave this parameter unselected, the controller only generates an alarm when such a rogue is detected. Valid Client on Rogue APConfigure the auto containment of a rogue access point to which trusted clients are associated. If you leave this parameter unselected, the controller only generates an alarm when such a rogue is detected. AdHoc Rogue APConfigure the auto containment of ad hoc networks detected by the controller. If you leave this parameter unselected, the controller only generates an alarm when such a network is detected. Step 11 Step 12 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring Rogue Detection (CLI) Step 1 Ensure that rogue detection is enabled on the desired access points. Rogue detection is enabled by default for all the access points that are associated with the controller. You can enable or disable rogue detection for individual access points by entering this command:

config rogue detection {enable | disable} cisco-ap command. Note To see the current rogue detection configuration for a specific access point, enter the show ap config general Cisco_AP command. Rogue detection is disabled by default for OfficeExtend access points because these access points, which are deployed in a home environment, are likely to detect a large number of rogue devices. Note Step 2 Enable, disable, or initiate RLDP by entering these commands:

config rogue ap rldp enable alarm-onlyEnables RLDP on all the access points. config rogue ap rldp enable alarm-only monitor_ap_onlyEnables RLDP only on the access points in the monitor mode. config rogue ap rldp initiate rogue_mac_addressInitiates RLDP on a specific rogue access point. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 457 Configuring Rogue Detection (CLI) Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 config rogue ap rldp disableDisables RLDP on all the access points. config rogue ap rldp retriesSpecifies the number of times RLDP to be tried per rogue access point. The range is from 1 to 5 and default is 1. Specify the number of seconds after which the rogue access point and client entries expire and are removed from the list by entering this command:

config rogue ap timeout seconds The valid range for the seconds parameter is 240 to 3600 seconds (inclusive). The default value is 1200 seconds. Note If a rogue access point or client entry times out, it is removed from the controller only if its rogue state is Alert or Threat for a classification type. Enable or disable ad hoc rogue detection and reporting by entering this command:

config rogue adhoc {enable | disable}

Enable or disable the AAA server or local database to validate if rogue clients are valid clients by entering this command:

config rogue client aaa {enable | disable}

Specify the time interval, in seconds, at which APs should send the rogue detection report to the controller by entering this command:

config rogue detection monitor-ap report-interval time in sec The valid range for the time in sec parameter is 10 seconds to 300 seconds. The default value is 10 seconds. Note This feature is applicable only to the monitor mode APs. Specify the minimum RSSI value that rogues should have for APs to detect them and for the rogue entries to be created in the controller by entering this command:

config rogue detection min-rssi rssi in dBm The valid range for the rssi in dBm parameter is 128 dBm to 0 dBm. The default value is 0 dBm. Note This feature is applicable to all the AP modes. There can be many rogues with very weak RSSI values that do not provide any valuable information in rogue analysis. Therefore, you can use this option to filter rogues by specifying the minimum RSSI value at which APs should detect rogues. Specify the time interval at which rogues have to be consistently scanned for by APs after the first time the rogues are scanned for by entering this command:

config rogue detection monitor-ap transient-rogue-interval time in sec The valid range for the time in sec parameter is 120 seconds to 1800 seconds. The default value is 0. Note This feature is applicable only to the monitor mode APs. Using the transient interval values, you can control the time interval at which APs should scan for rogues. APs can also filter rogues based on their transient interval values. This feature has the following advantages:

Rogue reports from APs to the controller are shorter. Transient rogue entries are avoided in the controller. Unnecessary memory allocation for transient rogues are avoided. Step 9 If you want the controller to automatically contain certain rogue devices, enter these commands. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 458 OL-28744-01 Configuring Rogue Detection (CLI) Caution When you enter any of these commands, the following message is displayed: Using this feature may have legal consequences. Do you want to continue? The 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz frequencies in the Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) band are open to the public and can be used without a license. As such, containing devices on another partys network could have legal consequences. config rogue ap rldp enable auto-containAutomatically contains the rogues that are detected on the wired network. config rogue ap ssid auto-containAutomatically contains the rogues that are advertising your networks SSID. If you want the controller to only generate an alarm when such a rogue is detected, enter the config rogue Note ap ssid alarm command. config rogue ap valid-client auto-containAutomatically contains a rogue access point to which trusted clients are associated. Note If you want the controller to only generate an alarm when such a rogue is detected, enter the config rogue ap valid-client alarm command. config rogue adhoc auto-containAutomatically contains ad hoc networks detected by the controller. Note If you want the controller to only generate an alarm when such a network is detected, enter the config rogue adhoc alert command. config rogue auto-contain level level monitor_mode_ap_onlySets the auto containment level for the monitor mode access points. The default value is 1. Step 10 Configure ad hoc rogue classification by entering these commands:

config rogue adhoc classify friendly state {internal | external} mac-addr config rogue adhoc classify malicious state {alert | contain} mac-addr config rogue adhoc classify unclassified state {alert | contain} mac-addr The following is a brief description of the parameters:

internalTrusts a foreign ad hoc rogue. externalAcknowledges the presence of an ad hoc rogue. alertGenerates a trap when an ad hoc rogue is detected. containStarts containing a rogue ad hoc. Step 11 Configure RLDP scheduling by entering this command:

config rogue ap rldp schedule { add | delete | disable | enable }

addEnables you to schedule RLDP on a particular day of the week. You must enter the day of the week (for example, mon, tue, wed, and so on) on which you want to schedule RLDP and the start time and end time in HH:MM:SS format. For example: config rogue ap rldp schedule add mon 22:00:00 23:00:00. deleteEnables you to delete the RLDP schedule. You must enter the number of days. disable Configure to disable RLDP scheduling. enable Configure to enable RLDP scheduling. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 459 Configuring Rogue Detection (CLI) Note When you configure RLDP scheduling, it is assumed that the scheduling will occur in the future, that is, after the configuration is saved. Step 12 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 460 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 59 Classifying Rogue Access Points Information About Classifying Rogue Access Points, page 461 Restrictions for Classifying Rogue Access Points, page 463 Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (GUI), page 464 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (GUI), page 466 Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (CLI), page 469 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (CLI), page 471 Information About Classifying Rogue Access Points The controller software enables you to create rules that can organize and display rogue access points as Friendly, Malicious, Custom, or Unclassified. For the Custom type, you must specify a severity score and a classification name. Note Manual classification and classification that is the result of auto-containment or rogue-on-wire overrides the rogue rule. If you have manually changed the class and/or the state of a rogue AP, then to apply rogue rules to the AP, you must change it to unclassified and alert condition. By default, none of the classification rules are enabled. Therefore, all unknown access points are categorized as Unclassified. When you create a rule, configure conditions for it, and enable the rule, the unclassified access points are reclassified. Whenever you change a rule, it is applied to all access points (friendly, malicious, custom, and unclassified) in the Alert state only. You can configure up to 64 rogue classification rules per controller. You can also apply rogue rules to ad hoc rogues except for client count condition. The number of rogue clients that can be stored in the database table of a rogue access point is 256. If a rogue AP or an ad hoc rogue is classified because of an RSSI rogue rule condition, the RSSI value that caused the trigger is displayed on the controller GUI/CLI. The controller includes the classified RSSI, the classified AP MAC address, and rule name in the trap. A new trap is generated for every new classification or change of state due to rogue rule but is rate limited to every half hour for every rogue AP or ad hoc rogue. However, if there is a change of state in containment by rogue rule, the trap is sent immediately. The classified OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 461 Information About Classifying Rogue Access Points by, classified at, and classified by rule name are valid for the non-default classification types, which are Friendly, Malicious, and Custom classifications. For the unclassified types, these fields are not displayed. Note For the RSSI condition of rogue rule, reclassification occurs only if the RSSI change is more than 2 dBm of the configured RSSI value. When the controller receives a rogue report from one of its managed access points, it responds as follows:

1 The controller verifies that the unknown access point is in the friendly MAC address list. If it is, the controller classifies the access point as Friendly. 2 If the unknown access point is not in the friendly MAC address list, the controller starts applying rogue classification rules. 3 If the rogue is already classified as Malicious, Alert or Friendly, Internal or External, the controller does not reclassify it automatically. If the rogue is classified differently, the controller reclassifies it automatically only if the rogue is in the Alert state. 4 The controller applies the first rule based on priority. If the rogue access point matches the criteria specified by the rule, the controller classifies the rogue according to the classification type configured for the rule. 5 If the rogue access point does not match any of the configured rules, the controller classifies the rogue as Unclassified. 6 The controller repeats the previous steps for all rogue access points. 7 If RLDP determines that the rogue access point is on the network, the controller marks the rogue state as Threat and classifies it as Malicious automatically, even if no rules are configured. You can then manually contain the rogue (unless you have configured RLDP to automatically contain the rogue), which would change the rogue state to Contained. If the rogue access point is not on the network, the controller marks the rogue state as Alert, and you can manually contain the rogue. 8 If desired, you can manually move the access point to a different classification type and rogue state. Table 16: Classification Mapping Rule-Based Classification Type Friendly Rogue States InternalIf the unknown access point is inside the network and poses no threat to WLAN security, you would manually configure it as Friendly, Internal. An example is the access points in your lab network. ExternalIf the unknown access point is outside the network and poses no threat to WLAN security, you would manually configure it as Friendly, External. An example is an access point that belongs to a neighboring coffee shop. AlertThe unknown access point is moved to Alert if it is not in the neighbor list or in the user-configured friendly MAC list. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 462 OL-28744-01 Restrictions for Classifying Rogue Access Points Rule-Based Classification Type Malicious Custom Unclassified Rogue States AlertThe unknown access point is moved to Alert if it is not in the neighbor list or in the user-configured friendly MAC list. ContainedThe unknown access point is contained. AlertThe unknown access point is moved to Alert if it is not in the neighbor list or in the user-configured friendly MAC list. ContainedThe unknown access point is contained. PendingOn first detection, the unknown access point is put in the Pending state for 3 minutes. During this time, the managed access points determine if the unknown access point is a neighbor access point. AlertThe unknown access point is moved to Alert if it is not in the neighbor list or in the user-configured friendly MAC list. ContainedThe unknown access point is contained. Contained PendingThe unknown access point is marked Contained, but the action is delayed due to unavailable resources. The classification and state of the rogue access points are configured as follows:

From Known to Friendly, Internal From Acknowledged to Friendly, External From Contained to Malicious, Contained If the rogue state is Contained, you have to uncontain the rogue access point before you can change the classification type. If you want to move a rogue access point from Malicious to Unclassified, you must delete the access point and allow the controller to reclassify it. Restrictions for Classifying Rogue Access Points There are some rogue rules. They are:

Classifying Custom type rogues is tied to rogue rules. Therefore, it is not possible to manually classify a rogue as Custom. Custom class change can occur only using rogue rules. There are traps that are sent for containment by rule and for every 30 minutes for rogue classification change. For custom classification, the first trap does not contain the severity score because the trap has existed before the custom classification. The severity score is obtained from the subsequent trap that is generated after 30 minutes if the rogue is classified. Rogue rules are applied on every incoming new rogue report in the controller in the order of their priority. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 463 Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (GUI) Once a rogue satisfies a higher priority rule and classified, it does not move down the priority list for the same report. Previously classified rogue gets re-classified on every new rogue report with the following restrictions:

Rogues which are classified as friendly by rule and whose state is set to ALERT, go through re-classification on receiving the new rogue report. If a rogue is classified as friendly by the administrator manually, then the state is INTERNAL and it does not get re-classified on successive rogue reports. If rogue is classified as malicious, irrespective of the state it does not get re-classified on subsequent rogue reports. Transition of the rogue's state from friendly to malicious is possible by multiple rogue rules if some attribute is missing in new rogue report. Transition of the rogue's state from malicious to any other classification is not possible by any rogue rule. Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Security > Wireless Protection Policies > Rogue Policies > Rogue Rules to open the Rogue Rules page. Any rules that have already been created are listed in priority order. The name, type, and status of each rule is provided. If you ever want to delete a rule, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that rule and click Remove. Note Create a new rule as follows:

a) Click Add Rule. An Add Rule section appears at the top of the page. b) In the Rule Name text box, enter a name for the new rule. Ensure that the name does not contain any spaces. c) From the Rule Type drop-down list, choose from the following options to classify rogue access points matching this rule as friendly or malicious:

Friendly Malicious Custom d) Configure the notification when the rule is matched from the Notify drop-down list to All, Global, Local, or None. e) Configure the state of the rogue AP when the rule is matched from the State drop-down list. f) If you choose the Rule Type as Custom, enter the Severity Score and the Classification Name. g) Click Add to add this rule to the list of existing rules, or click Cancel to discard this new rule. Edit a rule as follows:

a) Click the name of the rule that you want to edit. The Rogue Rule > Edit page appears. b) From the Type drop-down list, choose from the following options to classify rogue access points matching this rule:

Friendly Malicious Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 464 OL-28744-01 Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (GUI) Custom c) Configure the notification when the rule is matched from the Notify drop-down list to All, Global, Local, or None. d) Configure the state of the rogue AP when the rule is matched from the State drop-down list. e) From the Match Operation text box, choose one of the following:

Match AllIf this rule is enabled, a detected rogue access point must meet all of the conditions specified by the rule in order for the rule to be matched and the rogue to adopt the classification type of the rule. Match AnyIf this rule is enabled, a detected rogue access point must meet any of the conditions specified by the rule in order for the rule to be matched and the rogue to adopt the classification type of the rule. This is the default value. f) To enable this rule, select the Enable Rule check box. The default value is unselected. g) If you choose the Rule Type as Custom, enter the Severity Score and the Classification Name. h) From the Add Condition drop-down list, choose one or more of the following conditions that the rogue access point must meet and click Add Condition. SSIDRequires that the rogue access point have a specific user-configured SSID. If you choose this option, enter the SSID in the User Configured SSID text box, and click Add SSID. Note To delete an SSID, highlight the SSID and click Remove. RSSIRequires that the rogue access point have a minimum received signal strength indication (RSSI) value. For example, if the rogue access point has an RSSI that is greater than the configured value, then the access point could be classified as malicious. If you choose this option, enter the minimum RSSI value in the Minimum RSSI text box. The valid range is 95 to 50 dBm (inclusive), and the default value is 0 dBm. DurationRequires that the rogue access point be detected for a minimum period of time. If you choose this option, enter a value for the minimum detection period in the Time Duration text box. The valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds (inclusive), and the default value is 0 seconds. Client CountRequires that a minimum number of clients be associated to the rogue access point. For example, if the number of clients associated to the rogue access point is greater than or equal to the configured value, then the access point could be classified as malicious. If you choose this option, enter the minimum number of clients to be associated to the rogue access point in the Minimum Number of Rogue Clients text box. The valid range is 1 to 10 (inclusive), and the default value is 0. No EncryptionRequires that the rogue access points advertised WLAN does not have encryption enabled. If a rogue access point has encryption disabled, it is likely that more clients will try to associate to it. No further configuration is required for this option. Note Cisco Prime Infrastructure refers to this option as Open Authentication. Managed SSIDRequires that the rogue access points managed SSID (the SSID configured for the WLAN) be known to the controller. No further configuration is required for this option. Note The SSID and Managed SSID conditions cannot be used with the Match All operation because these two SSID lists are mutually exclusive. If you define a rule with Match All and have these two conditions configured, the rogue access points are never classified as friendly or malicious because one of the conditions can never be met. You can add up to six conditions per rule. When you add a condition, it appears under the Conditions section. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 465 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (GUI) Note If you ever want to delete a condition from this rule, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that condition and click Remove. Step 4 Step 5 i) Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. If you want to change the order in which rogue classification rules are applied, follow these steps:

1 Click Back to return to the Rogue Rules page. 2 Click Change Priority to access the Rogue Rules > Priority page. The rogue rules are listed in priority order in the Change Rules Priority text box. 3 Highlight the rule for which you want to change the priority, and click Up to raise its priority in the list or Down to lower its priority in the list. 4 Continue to move the rules up or down until the rules are in the desired order. 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Classify any rogue access points as friendly and add them to the friendly MAC address list as follows:

Choose Security > Wireless Protection Policies > Rogue Policies > Friendly Rogue to open the Friendly Rogue

> Create page. In the MAC Address text box, enter the MAC address of the friendly rogue access point. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. This access point is added to the controllers list of friendly access points and should now appear on the Friendly Rogue APs page. Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (GUI) Before You Begin Caution When you choose to contain a rogue device, the following warning appears: There may be legal issues following this containment. Are you sure you want to continue? The 2.4- and 5-GHz frequencies in the Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) band are open to the public and can be used without a license. As such, containing devices on another partys network could have legal consequences. Step 1 Step 2 Choose Monitor > Rogues. Choose the following options to view the different types of rogue access points detected by the controller:

Friendly APs Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 466 OL-28744-01 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (GUI) Malicious APs Unclassified APs Custom APs The respective rogue APs pages provide the following information: the MAC address and SSID of the rogue access point, channel number, the number of radios that detected the rogue access point, the number of clients connected to the rogue access point, and the current status of the rogue access point. Note To remove acknowledged rogues from the database, change the rogue state to Alert. If the rogue is no longer present, the rogue data is deleted from the database in 20 minutes. If you ever want to delete a rogue access point from one of these pages, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow and click Remove. To delete multiple rogue access points, select the check box corresponding to the row you want to delete and click Remove. Note Step 3 Get more details about a rogue access point by clicking the MAC address of the access point. The Rogue AP Detail page appears. This page provides the following information: the MAC address of the rogue device, the type of rogue device (such as an access point), whether the rogue device is on the wired network, the dates and times when the rogue device was first and last reported, and the current status of the device. The Class Type text box shows the current classification for this rogue access point:

FriendlyAn unknown access point that matches the user-defined friendly rules or an existing known and acknowledged rogue access point. Friendly access points cannot be contained. MaliciousAn unknown access point that matches the user-defined malicious rules or is moved manually by the user from the Friendly or Unclassified classification type. Note Once an access point is classified as Malicious, you cannot apply rules to it in the future, and it cannot be moved to another classification type. If you want to move a malicious access point to the Unclassified classification type, you must delete the access point and allow the controller to reclassify it. UnclassifiedAn unknown access point that does not match the user-defined friendly or malicious rules. An unclassified access point can be contained. It can also be moved to the Friendly or Malicious classification type automatically in accordance with user-defined rules or manually by the user. CustomA user-defined classification type that is tied to rogue rules. It is not possible to manually classify a rogue as Custom. Custom class change can occur only using rogue rules. Step 4 Step 5 If you want to change the classification of this device, choose a different classification from the Class Type drop-down list. Note A rogue access point cannot be moved to another class if its current state is Contain. From the Update Status drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify how the controller should respond to this rogue access point:

InternalThe controller trusts this rogue access point. This option is available if the Class Type is set to Friendly. ExternalThe controller acknowledges the presence of this rogue access point. This option is available if the Class Type is set to Friendly. ContainThe controller contains the offending device so that its signals no longer interfere with authorized clients. This option is available if the Class Type is set to Malicious or Unclassified. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 467 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (GUI) AlertThe controller forwards an immediate alert to the system administrator for further action. This option is available if the Class Type is set to Malicious or Unclassified. The bottom of the page provides information on both the access points that detected this rogue access point and any clients that are associated to it. To see more details for any of the clients, click Edit to open the Rogue Client Detail page. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. View any rogue clients that are connected to the controller by choosing Rogue Clients. The Rogue Clients page appears. This page shows the following information: the MAC address of the rogue client, the MAC address of the access point to which the rogue client is associated, the SSID of the rogue client, the number of radios that detected the rogue client, the date and time when the rogue client was last reported, and the current status of the rogue client. Obtain more details about a rogue client by clicking the MAC address of the client. The Rogue Client Detail page appears. This page provides the following information: the MAC address of the rogue client, the MAC address of the rogue access point to which this client is associated, the SSID and IP address of the rogue client, the dates and times when the rogue client was first and last reported, and the current status of the rogue client. From the Update Status drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify how the controller should respond to this rogue client:

ContainThe controller contains the offending device so that its signals no longer interfere with authorized clients. AlertThe controller forwards an immediate alert to the system administrator for further action. The bottom of the page provides information on the access points that detected this rogue client. Click Apply. If desired, you can test the controllers connection to this client by clicking Ping. Click Save Configuration. See any ad-hoc rogues detected by the controller by choosing Adhoc Rogues. The Adhoc Rogues page appears. This page shows the following information: the MAC address, BSSID, and SSID of the ad-hoc rogue, the number of radios that detected the ad-hoc rogue, and the current status of the ad-hoc rogue. Obtain more details about an ad-hoc rogue by clicking the MAC address of the rogue. The Adhoc Rogue Detail page appears. This page provides the following information: the MAC address and BSSID of the ad-hoc rogue, the dates and times when the rogue was first and last reported, and the current status of the rogue. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 From the Update Status drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify how the controller should respond to this ad-hoc rogue:

ContainThe controller contains the offending device so that its signals no longer interfere with authorized clients. AlertThe controller forwards an immediate alert to the system administrator for further action. InternalThe controller trusts this rogue access point. ExternalThe controller acknowledges the presence of this rogue access point. Step 17 From the Maximum number of APs to contain the rogue drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify the maximum number of access points used to contain this ad-hoc rogue: 1, 2, 3, or 4. The bottom of the page provides information on the access points that detected this ad-hoc rogue. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 468 OL-28744-01 Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (CLI) 1Specifies targeted rogue access point will be contained by one access point. This is the lowest containment level. 2Specifies targeted rogue access point will be contained by two access points. 3Specifies targeted rogue access point will be contained by three access points. 4Specifies targeted rogue access point will be contained by four access points. This is the highest containment level. Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. View any access points that have been configured to be ignored by choosing Rogue AP Ignore-List. The Rogue AP Ignore-List page appears. This page shows the MAC addresses of any access points that are configured to be ignored. The rogue-ignore list contains a list of any autonomous access points that have been manually added to Cisco Prime Infrastructure maps by the users. The controller regards these autonomous access points as rogues even though the Prime Infrastructure is managing them. The rogue-ignore list allows the controller to ignore these access points. The list is updated as follows:

When the controller receives a rogue report, it checks to see if the unknown access point is in the rogue-ignore access point list. If the unknown access point is in the rogue-ignore list, the controller ignores this access point and continues to process other rogue access points. If the unknown access point is not in the rogue-ignore list, the controller sends a trap to the Prime Infrastructure. If the Prime Infrastructure finds this access point in its autonomous access point list, the Prime Infrastructure sends a command to the controller to add this access point to the rogue-ignore list. This access point is then ignored in future rogue reports. If a user removes an autonomous access point from the Prime Infrastructure, the Prime Infrastructure sends a command to the controller to remove this access point from the rogue-ignore list. Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (CLI) Step 1 Create a rule by entering this command:

config rogue rule add ap priority priority classify {friendly | malicious} rule-name If you later want to change the priority of this rule and shift others in the list accordingly, enter the config rogue rule priority priority rule-name command. If you later want to change the classification of this rule, enter the config rogue rule classify {friendly | malicious}

rule-name command. If you ever want to delete all of the rogue classification rules or a specific rule, enter the {config rogue rule delete {all

| rule-name} command. Step 2 Create a rule by entering these commands:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 469 Configuring Rogue Classification Rules (CLI) Configure a rule for friendly rogues by entering this command:

config rogue rule add ap priority priority classify friendly notify {all | global | local | none} state {alert |

internal | external} rule-name Configure a rule for malicious rogues by entering this command:

config rogue rule add ap priority priority classify malicious notify {all | global | local | none} state {alert |

contain} rule-name Configure a rule for custom rogues by entering this command:

config rogue rule add ap priority priority classify custom severity-score classification-name notify {all | global

| local | none} state {alert | contain} rule-name If you later want to change the priority of this rule and shift others in the list accordingly, enter the config rogue rule priority priority rule-name command. If you later want to change the classification of this rule, enter the config rogue rule classify {friendly | malicious |

custom severity-score classification-name} rule-name command. If you ever want to delete all of the rogue classification rules or a specific rule, enter the {config rogue rule delete {all

| rule-name} command. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Configure the state on the rogue AP upon rule match by entering this command:

config rogue rule state {alert | contain | internal | external} rule-name Configure the notification upon rule match by entering this command:

config rogue rule notify {all | global | local | none} rule-name Disable all rules or a specific rule by entering this command:

config rogue rule disable {all | rule_name}

Note A rule must be disabled before you can modify its attributes. Add conditions to a rule that the rogue access point must meet by entering this command:

config rogue rule condition ap set condition_type condition_value rule_name The following condition types are available:

ssidRequires that the rogue access point have a specific SSID. You should add SSIDs that are not managed by the controller. If you choose this option, enter the SSID for the condition_value parameter. The SSID is added to the user-configured SSID list. Note If you ever want to delete all of the SSIDs or a specific SSID from the user-configured SSID list, enter the config rogue rule condition ap delete ssid {all | ssid} rule_name command. rssiRequires that the rogue access point have a minimum RSSI value. For example, if the rogue access point has an RSSI that is greater than the configured value, then the access point could be classified as malicious. If you choose this option, enter the minimum RSSI value for the condition_value parameter. The valid range is 95 to 50 dBm (inclusive), and the default value is 0 dBm. durationRequires that the rogue access point be detected for a minimum period of time. If you choose this option, enter a value for the minimum detection period for the condition_value parameter. The valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds (inclusive), and the default value is 0 seconds. client-countRequires that a minimum number of clients be associated to the rogue access point. For example, if the number of clients associated to the rogue access point is greater than or equal to the configured value, then the access point could be classified as malicious. If you choose this option, enter the minimum number of clients Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 470 OL-28744-01 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (CLI) to be associated to the rogue access point for the condition_value parameter. The valid range is 1 to 10 (inclusive), and the default value is 0. managed-ssidRequires that the rogue access points SSID be known to the controller. A condition_value parameter is not required for this option. Note You can add up to six conditions per rule. If you ever want to delete all of the conditions or a specific condition from a rule, enter the config rogue rule condition ap delete all condition_type condition_value rule_name command. Specify whether a detected rogue access point must meet all or any of the conditions specified by the rule in order for the rule to be matched and the rogue access point to adopt the classification type of the rule by entering this command:

config rogue rule match {all | any} rule_name Enable all rules or a specific rule by entering this command:

config rogue rule enable {all | rule_name}

Note For your changes to become effective, you must enable the rule. Add a new friendly access point entry to the friendly MAC address list or delete an existing friendly access point entry from the list by entering this command:

config rogue ap friendly {add | delete} ap_mac_address Save your changes by entering this command:

save config View the rogue classification rules that are configured on the controller by entering this command:

show rogue rule summary View detailed information for a specific rogue classification rule by entering this command:

show rogue rule detailed rule_name Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (CLI) View a list of all rogue access points detected by the controller by entering this command:

show rogue ap summary See a list of the friendly rogue access points detected by the controller by entering this command:

show rogue ap friendly summary See a list of the malicious rogue access points detected by the controller by entering this command:

show rogue ap malicious summary See a list of the unclassified rogue access points detected by the controller by entering this command:

show rogue ap unclassified summary See detailed information for a specific rogue access point by entering this command:

show rogue ap detailed ap_mac_address See the rogue report (which shows the number of rogue devices detected on different channel widths) for a specific 802.11a/n radio by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 471 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (CLI) show ap auto-rf 802.11a Cisco_AP See a list of all rogue clients that are associated to a rogue access point by entering this command:

show rogue ap clients ap_mac_address See a list of all rogue clients detected by the controller by entering this command:

show rogue client summary See detailed information for a specific rogue client by entering this command:

show rogue client detailed client_mac_address See a list of all ad-hoc rogues detected by the controller by entering this command:

show rogue adhoc summary See detailed information for a specific ad-hoc rogue by entering this command:

show rogue adhoc detailed rogue_mac_address See a summary of ad hoc rogues based on their classification by entering this command:

show rogue adhoc {friendly | malicious | unclassified} summary See a list of rogue access points that are configured to be ignore by entering this command:

show rogue ignore-list Note See the Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (GUI) section for more information on the rogue-ignore access point list. Classify a rogue access point as friendly by entering this command:

config rogue ap classify friendly state {internal | external} ap_mac_address where internal means that the controller trusts this rogue access point. external means that the controller acknowledges the presence of this rogue access point. Note A rogue access point cannot be moved to the Friendly class if its current state is Contain. Mark a rogue access point as malicious by entering this command:

config rogue ap classify malicious state {alert | contain} ap_mac_address where alert means that the controller forwards an immediate alert to the system administrator for further action. contain means that the controller contains the offending device so that its signals no longer interfere with authorized clients. Note A rogue access point cannot be moved to the Malicious class if its current state is Contain. Mark a rogue access point as unclassified by entering this command:

config rogue ap classify unclassified state {alert | contain} ap_mac_address Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 472 OL-28744-01 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (CLI) Note A rogue access point cannot be moved to the Unclassified class if its current state is Contain. alert means that the controller forwards an immediate alert to the system administrator for further action. contain means that the controller contains the offending device so that its signals no longer interfere with authorized clients. Choose the maximum number of access points used to contain the ad-hoc rogue by entering this command:

config rogue ap classify unclassified state contain rogue_ap_mac_address 1, 2, 3, or 4 1Specifies targeted rogue access point will be contained by one access point. This is the lowest containment level. 2Specifies targeted rogue access point will be contained by two access points. 3Specifies targeted rogue access point will be contained by three access points. 4Specifies targeted rogue access point will be contained by four access points. This is the highest containment level. Specify how the controller should respond to a rogue client by entering one of these commands:

config rogue client alert client_mac_addressThe controller forwards an immediate alert to the system administrator for further action. config rogue client contain client_mac_addressThe controller contains the offending device so that its signals no longer interfere with authorized clients. Specify how the controller should respond to an ad-hoc rogue by entering one these commands:

config rogue adhoc alert rogue_mac_addressThe controller forwards an immediate alert to the system administrator for further action. config rogue adhoc contain rogue_mac_addressThe controller contains the offending device so that its signals no longer interfere with authorized clients. config rogue adhoc external rogue_mac_addressThe controller acknowledges the presence of this ad-hoc rogue. Configure the classification of ad hoc rogues by entering any one of these commands:

Friendly stateconfig rogue adhoc classify friendly state {internal | external} mac-addr Malicious stateconfig rogue adhoc classify malicious state {alert | contain} mac-addr Unclassified stateconfig rogue adhoc classify unclassified state {alert | contain} mac-addr View a summary of custom rogue AP information by entering this command:

show rogue ap custom summary See custom ad hoc rogue information by entering this command:

show rogue adhoc custom summary Delete the rogue APs by entering this command:

config rogue ap delete {class | all | mac-addr}

Delete the rogue clients by entering this command:

config rogue client delete {state | all | mac-addr}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 473 Viewing and Classifying Rogue Devices (CLI) Delete the ad hoc rogues by entering this command:

config rogue adhoc delete {class | all | mac-addr}

Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 474 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 60 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP Information About Cisco TrustSec SXP, page 475 Restrictions for Cisco TrustSec SXP, page 476 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (GUI), page 477 Creating a New SXP Connection (GUI), page 477 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (CLI), page 478 Information About Cisco TrustSec SXP Cisco TrustSec enables organizations to secure their networks and services through identity-based access control to anyone, anywhere, anytime. The solution also offers data integrity and confidentiality services, policy-based governance, and centralized monitoring, troubleshooting, and reporting services. TrustSec can be combined with personalized, professional service offerings to simplify solution deployment and management, and is a foundational security component to Cisco Borderless Networks. The Cisco TrustSec security architecture builds secure networks by establishing domains of trusted network devices. Each device in the domain is authenticated by its peers. Communication on the links between devices in the domain is secured with a combination of encryption, message integrity check, and data-path replay protection mechanisms. Cisco TrustSec uses the device and user credentials acquired during authentication for classifying the packets by security groups (SGs) as they enter the network. This packet classification is maintained by tagging packets on ingress to the Cisco TrustSec network so that they can be correctly identified to apply security and other policy criteria along the data path. The tag, called the security group tag (SGT), allows the network to enforce the access control policy by enabling the endpoint device to act upon the SGT to filter traffic. One of the components of Cisco TrustSec architecture is the security group-based access control. In the security group-based access control component, access policies in the Cisco TrustSec domain are topology-independent, based on the roles (as indicated by security group number) of source and destination devices rather than on network addresses. Individual packets are tagged with the security group number of the source. Cisco devices use the SGT Exchange Protocol (SXP) to propagate SGTs across network devices that do not have hardware support for Cisco TrustSec. SXP is the software solution to avoid CTS hardware upgrade on all switches. WLC will be supporting SXP as part of TrustSec Architecture. The SXP sends SGT information to the CTS-enabled switches so that appropriate role-based access control lists (RBACLs) can be activated depending on the role information represented by the SGT. By default, the controller always works in the OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 475 Restrictions for Cisco TrustSec SXP Speaker mode. To implement the SXP on a network, only the egress distribution switch needs to be CTS-enabled, and all the other switches can be non-CTS-capable switches. The SXP runs between any access layer and distribution switch or between two distribution switches. The SXP uses TCP as the transport layer. CTS authentication is performed for any host (client) joining the network on the access layer switch similar to an access switch with CTS-enabled hardware. The access layer switch is not CTS hardware enabled. Therefore, data traffic is not encrypted or cryptographically authenticated when it passes through the access layer switch. The SXP is used to pass the IP address of the authenticated device, that is a wireless client, and the corresponding SGT up to the distribution switch. If the distribution switch is CTS hardware enabled, the switch inserts the SGT into the packet on behalf of the access layer switch. If the distribution switch is not CTS hardware enabled, the SXP on the distribution switch passes the IP-SGT mapping to all the distribution switches that have CTS hardware. On the egress side, the enforcement of the RBACL occurs at the egress L3 interface on the distribution switch. The following are some guidelines for Cisco TrustSec SXP:

SXP is supported on the following security policies only:

WPA2-dot1x WPA-dot1x 802.1x (Dynamic WEP) MAC Filtering using RADIUS servers Web authentication using RADIUS servers for user authentication SXP is supported for both IPv4 and IPv6 clients. Controller always operates in the Speaker mode. For more information about Cisco TrustSec, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/netsol/ns1051/index.html. Restrictions for Cisco TrustSec SXP SXP is not supported on FlexConnect access points. SXP is supported only in centrally switched networks that have central authentication. By default, SXP is supported for APs that work in local mode only. The configuration of the default password should be consistent for both controller and the switch. Fault tolerance is not supported because fault tolerance requires local switching on APs. Static IP-SGT mapping for local authentication of users is not supported. IP-SGT mapping requires authentication with external ACS servers. In auto-anchor mobility mode the controller does not update client IP-SGT information through mobility messages. The connected switches of both the controllers must have an SXP connection established between them for IP-SGT mapping updates. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 476 OL-28744-01 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (GUI) Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (GUI) Step 1 Choose Security > TrustSec SXP to open the SXP Configuration page. This page lists the following SXP configuration details:

Total SXP ConnectionsNumber of SXP connections that are configured. SXP StateStatus of SXP connections as either disabled or enabled. SXP ModeSXP mode of the controller. The controller is always set to Speaker mode for SXP connections. Default PasswordPassword for MD5 authentication of SXP messages. We recommend that the password contain a minimum of 6 characters. Default Source IPIP address of the management interface. SXP uses the default source IP address for all new TCP connections. Retry PeriodSXP retry timer. The default value is 120 seconds (2 minutes). The valid range is 0 to 64000 seconds. The SXP retry period determines how often the controller retries for an SXP connection. When an SXP connection is not successfully set up, the controller makes a new attempt to set up the connection after the SXP retry period timer expires. Setting the SXP retry period to 0 seconds disables the timer and retries are not attempted. This page also displays the following information about SXP connections:

Peer IP AddressThe IP address of the peer, that is the IP address of the next hop switch to which the controller is connected. There is no effect on the existing TCP connections when you configure a new peer connection. Source IP AddressThe IP address of the source, that is the management IP address of the controller. Connection StatusStatus of the SXP connection. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 From the SXP State drop-down list, choose Enabled to enable Cisco TrustSec SXP. Enter the default password that should be used to make an SXP connection. We recommend that the password contain a minimum of 6 characters. In the Retry Period box, enter the time in seconds that determines how often the Cisco TrustSec software retries for an SXP connection. Click Apply. Creating a New SXP Connection (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose SECURITY > TrustSec SXP and click New to open the SXP Connection > New page. In the Peer IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the next hop switch to which the controller is connected. Click Apply. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 477 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (CLI) Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (CLI) Enable or disable the SXP on the controller by entering this command:

config cts sxp {enable | disable}

Configure the default password for MD5 Authentication of SXP messages by entering this command:

config cts sxp default password password Configure the IP address of the next hop switch with which the controller is connected by entering this command:

config cts sxp connection peer ip-address Configure the interval between connection attempts by entering this command:

config cts sxp retry period time-in-seconds Remove an SXP connection by entering this command:

config cts sxp connection delete ip-address See a summary of SXP configuration by entering this command:

show cts sxp summary Information similar to the following appears:

SXP State........................................ Enable SXP Mode......................................... Speaker Default Password................................. ****

Default Source IP................................ 209.165.200.224 Connection retry open period .................... 120 See the list of SXP connections that are configured by entering this command:

show cts sxp connections Information similar to the following appears:

Total num of SXP Connections..................... 1 SXP State........................................ Enable Connection Status Peer IP

---------------

-----------------

209.165.200.229 Establish connection between the controller and a Cisco Nexus 7000 Series switch by following either of these steps:

Source IP

---------------

209.165.200.224 On Enter the following commands:

1 config cts sxp version sxp version 1 or 2 1 2 config cts sxp disable 3 config cts sxp enable Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 478 OL-28744-01 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (CLI) If SXP version 2 is used on the controller and version 1 is used on the Cisco Nexus 7000 Series switch, an amount of retry period is required to establish the connection. We recommend that you initially have less interval between connection attempts. The default is 120 seconds. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 479 Configuring Cisco TrustSec SXP (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 480 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 61 Configuring Cisco Intrusion Detection System Information About Cisco Intrusion Detection System, page 481 Additional Information, page 482 Configuring IDS Sensors (GUI), page 482 Viewing Shunned Clients (GUI), page 483 Configuring IDS Sensors (CLI), page 483 Viewing Shunned Clients (CLI), page 484 Information About Cisco Intrusion Detection System The Cisco Intrusion Detection System/Intrusion Prevention System (CIDS/CIPS) instructs controllers to block certain clients from accessing the wireless network when attacks involving these clients are detected at Layer 3 through Layer 7. This system offers significant network protection by helping to detect, classify, and stop threats including worms, spyware/adware, network viruses, and application abuse. Two methods are available to detect potential attacks:

IDS sensors IDS signatures You can configure IDS sensors to detect various types of IP-level attacks in your network. When the sensors identify an attack, they can alert the controller to shun the offending client. When you add a new IDS sensor, you register the controller with that IDS sensor so that the controller can query the sensor to get the list of shunned clients. Shunned Clients When an IDS sensor detects a suspicious client, it alerts the controller to shun this client. The shun entry is distributed to all controllers within the same mobility group. If the client to be shunned is currently joined to a controller in this mobility group, the anchor controller adds this client to the dynamic exclusion list, and the foreign controller removes the client. The next time that the client tries to connect to a controller, the anchor controller rejects the handoff and informs the foreign controller that the client is being excluded. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 481 Additional Information Additional Information The Cisco wireless intrusion prevention system (wIPS) is also supported on the controller through Cisco Prime Infrastructure. See the Configuring wIPS section for more information. Configuring IDS Sensors (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Security > Advanced > CIDs > Sensors to open the CIDS Sensors List page. Note If you want to delete an existing sensor, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that sensor and choose Remove. Click New to add a new IDS sensor to the list. The CIDS Sensor Add page appears. From the Index drop-down list, choose a number (between 1 and 5) to determine the sequence in which the controller consults the IDS sensors. For example, if you choose 1, the controller consults this IDS sensor first. The controller supports up to five IDS sensors. In the Server Address text box, enter the IP address of your IDS server. In the Port text box, enter the number of the HTTPS port through which the controller has to communicate with the IDS sensor. We recommend that you set this parameter to 443 because the sensor uses this value to communicate by default. The default value is 443 and the range is 1 to 65535. Step 6 In the Username text box, enter the name that the controller uses to authenticate to the IDS sensor. Example:

Note This username must be configured on the IDS sensor and have at least a read-only privilege. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 In the Password and Confirm Password text boxes, enter the password that the controller uses to authenticate to the IDS sensor. In the Query Interval text box, enter the time (in seconds) for how often the controller should query the IDS server for IDS events. The default is 60 seconds and the range is 10 to 3600 seconds. Select the State check box to register the controller with this IDS sensor or unselected this check box to disable registration. The default value is disabled. Enter a 40-hexadecimal-character security key in the Fingerprint text box. This key is used to verify the validity of the sensor and is used to prevent security attacks. Note Make sure you include colons that appear between every two bytes within the key. For example, enter AA:BB:CC:DD. Step 11 Step 12 Click Apply. Your new IDS sensor appears in the list of sensors on the CIDS Sensors List page. Click Save Configuration. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 482 OL-28744-01 Viewing Shunned Clients (GUI) Viewing Shunned Clients (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Security > Advanced > CIDS > Shunned Clients to open the CIDS Shun List page. This page shows the IP address and MAC address of each shunned client, the length of time that the clients data packets should be blocked by the controller as requested by the IDS sensor, and the IP address of the IDS sensor that discovered the client. Click Re-sync to purge and reset the list as desired. Note The controller does not take any action on shun entries when the corresponding timers have expired. The shun entry timers are maintained only for the display purpose. The shun entries are cleaned up whenever the controller polls the IPS server. If the CIDS IPS server is not reachable, the shun entries are not removed even if they are timed out on the controller. The shun entries are cleaned up only when the CIDS IPS server is operational again and the controller polls the CIDS IPS server. Configuring IDS Sensors (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Add an IDS sensor by entering this command:

config wps cids-sensor add index ids_ip_address username password. The index parameter determines the sequence in which the controller consults the IDS sensors. The controller supports up to five IDS sensors. Enter a number (between 1 and 5) to determine the priority of this sensor. For example, if you enter 1, the controller consults this IDS sensor first. Note The username must be configured on the IDS sensor and have at least a read-only privilege.

(Optional) Specify the number of the HTTPS port through which the controller is to communicate with the IDS sensor by entering this command:

config wps cids-sensor port index port For the port-number parameter, you can enter a value between 1 and 65535. The default value is 443. This step is optional because we recommend that you use the default value of 443. The sensor uses this value to communicate by default. Specify how often the controller should query the IDS server for IDS events by entering this command:

config wps cids-sensor interval index interval For the interval parameter, you can enter a value between 10 and 3600 seconds. The default value is 60 seconds. Enter a 40-hexadecimal-character security key used to verify the validity of the sensor by entering this command:

config wps cids-sensor fingerprint index sha1 fingerprint You can get the value of the fingerprint by entering show tls fingerprint on the sensors console. Note Make sure to include the colons that appear between every two bytes within the key (for example, AA:BB:CC:DD). Enable or disable this controllers registration with an IDS sensor by entering this command:

config wps cids-sensor {enable | disable} index Enable or disable protection from DoS attacks by entering this command:

The default value is disabled. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 483 Viewing Shunned Clients (CLI) Note A potential attacker can use specially crafted packets to mislead the IDS into treating a legitimate client as an attacker. It causes the controller to wrongly disconnect this legitimate client and launches a DoS attack. The auto-immune feature, when enabled, is designed to protect against such attacks. However, conversations using Cisco 792x phones might be interrupted intermittently when the auto-immune feature is enabled. If you experience frequent disruptions when using 792x phones, you might want to disable this feature. Step 7 Step 8 Save your settings by entering this command:

save config See the IDS sensor configuration by entering one of these commands:

show wps cids-sensor summary show wps cids-sensor detail index Step 9 Step 10 The second command provides more information than the first. See the auto-immune configuration setting by entering this command:

show wps summary Information similar to the following appears:

Auto-Immune Auto-Immune.................................... Disabled Client Exclusion Policy Excessive 802.11-association failures.......... Enabled Excessive 802.11-authentication failures....... Enabled Excessive 802.1x-authentication................ Enabled IP-theft....................................... Enabled Excessive Web authentication failure........... Enabled Signature Policy Signature Processing........................... Enabled Step 11 Obtain debug information regarding IDS sensor configuration by entering this command:

debug wps cids enable Note If you ever want to delete or change the configuration of a sensor, you must first disable it by entering the config wps cids-sensor disable index command. To delete the sensor, enter the config wps cids-sensor delete index command. Viewing Shunned Clients (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 View the list of clients to be shunned by entering this command:

show wps shun-list Force the controller to synchronize with other controllers in the mobility group for the shun list by entering this command:

config wps shun-list re-sync Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 484 OL-28744-01 Viewing Shunned Clients (CLI) Note The controller does not take any action on shun entries when the corresponding timers have expired. The shun entry timers are maintained only for the display purpose. The shun entries are cleaned up whenever the controller polls the IPS server. If the CIDS IPS server is not reachable, the shun entries are not removed even if they are timed out on the controller. The shun entries are cleaned up only when the CIDS IPS server is operational again and the controller polls the CIDS IPS server. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 485 Viewing Shunned Clients (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 486 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 62 Configuring IDS Signatures Information About IDS Signatures, page 487 Configuring IDS Signatures (GUI), page 489 Viewing IDS Signature Events (GUI), page 492 Configuring IDS Signatures (CLI), page 493 Viewing IDS Signature Events (CLI), page 494 Information About IDS Signatures You can configure IDS signatures, or bit-pattern matching rules used to identify various types of attacks in incoming 802.11 packets, on the controller. When the signatures are enabled, the access points joined to the controller perform signature analysis on the received 802.11 data or management frames and report any discrepancies to the controller. If an attack is detected, appropriate mitigation is initiated. Cisco supports 17 standard signatures. These signatures are divided into six main groups. The first four groups contain management signatures, and the last two groups contain data signatures. Broadcast deauthentication frame signaturesDuring a broadcast deauthentication frame attack, a hacker sends an 802.11 deauthentication frame to the broadcast MAC destination address of another client. This attack causes the destination client to disassociate from the access point and lose its connection. If this action is repeated, the client experiences a denial of service. When the broadcast deauthentication frame signature (precedence 1) is used to detect such an attack, the access point listens for clients transmitting broadcast deauthentication frames that match the characteristics of the signature. If the access point detects such an attack, it alerts the controller. Depending on how your system is configured, the offending device is contained so that its signals no longer interfere with authorized clients, or the controller forwards an immediate alert to the system administrator for further action, or both. NULL probe response signaturesDuring a NULL probe response attack, a hacker sends a NULL probe response to a wireless client adapter. As a result, the client adapter locks up. When a NULL probe response signature is used to detect such an attack, the access point identifies the wireless client and alerts the controller. The NULL probe response signatures are as follows:

NULL probe resp 1 (precedence 2) NULL probe resp 2 (precedence 3) OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 487 Information About IDS Signatures Note Controller does not log historical NULL Probe IDS events within the Signature Events Summary output. Management frame flood signaturesDuring a management frame flood attack, a hacker floods an access point with 802.11 management frames. The result is a denial of service to all clients associated or attempting to associate to the access point. This attack can be implemented with different types of management frames: association requests, authentication requests, reassociation requests, probe requests, disassociation requests, deauthentication requests, and reserved management subtypes. When a management frame flood signature is used to detect such an attack, the access point identifies management frames matching the entire characteristic of the signature. If the frequency of these frames is greater than the value of the frequency set in the signature, an access point that hears these frames triggers an alarm. The controller generates a trap and forwards it to Cisco Prime Infrastructure. The management frame flood signatures are as follows:

Assoc flood (precedence 4) Auth flood (precedence 5) Reassoc flood (precedence 6) Broadcast probe flood (precedence 7) Disassoc flood (precedence 8) Deauth flood (precedence 9) Reserved mgmt 7 (precedence 10) Reserved mgmt F (precedence 11) The reserved management frame signatures 7 and F are reserved for future use. Wellenreiter signatureWellenreiter is a wireless LAN scanning and discovery utility that can reveal access point and client information. When the Wellenreiter signature (precedence 17) is used to detect such an attack, the access point identifies the offending device and alerts the controller. EAPOL flood signatureDuring an EAPOL flood attack, a hacker floods the air with EAPOL frames that contain 802.1X authentication requests. As a result, the 802.1X authentication server cannot respond to all of the requests and fails to send successful authentication responses to valid clients. The result is a denial of service to all affected clients. When the EAPOL flood signature (precedence 12) is used to detect such an attack, the access point waits until the maximum number of allowed EAPOL packets is exceeded. It then alerts the controller and proceeds with the appropriate mitigation. NetStumbler signaturesNetStumbler is a wireless LAN scanning utility that reports access point broadcast information (such as operating channel, RSSI information, adapter manufacturer name, SSID, WEP status, and the latitude and longitude of the device running NetStumbler when a GPS is attached). If NetStumbler succeeds in authenticating and associating to an access point, it sends a data frame with the following strings, depending on the NetStumbler version:

Version 3.2.0 String Flurble gronk bloopit, bnip Frundletrune Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 488 OL-28744-01 Configuring IDS Signatures (GUI) Version 3.2.3 3.3.0 String All your 802.11b are belong to us Sends white spaces When a NetStumbler signature is used to detect such an attack, the access point identifies the offending device and alerts the controller. The NetStumbler signatures are as follows:

NetStumbler 3.2.0 (precedence 13) NetStumbler 3.2.3 (precedence 14) NetStumbler 3.3.0 (precedence 15) NetStumbler generic (precedence 16) A standard signature file exists on the controller by default. You can upload this signature file from the controller, or you can create a custom signature file and download it to the controller or modify the standard signature file to create a custom signature. Configuring IDS Signatures (GUI) Uploading or Downloading IDS Signatures Step 1 Step 2 If desired, create your own custom signature file. Make sure that you have a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server available. Follow these guidelines when setting up a TFTP server:

If you are downloading through the service port, the TFTP server must be on the same subnet as the service port because the service port is not routable, or you must create static routes on the controller. If you are downloading through the distribution system network port, the TFTP server can be on the same or a different subnet because the distribution system port is routable. A third-party TFTP server cannot run on the same computer as the Cisco Prime Infrastructure because the Prime Infrastructure built-in TFTP server and the third-party TFTP server require the same communication port. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 If you are downloading a custom signature file (*.sig), copy it to the default directory on your TFTP server. Choose Commands to open the Download File to Controller page. Perform one of the following:

If you want to download a custom signature file to the controller, choose Signature File from the File Type drop-down list on the Download File to Controller page. If you want to upload a standard signature file from the controller, choose Upload File and then Signature File from the File Type drop-down list on the Upload File from Controller page. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 489 Configuring IDS Signatures (GUI) Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose TFTP or FTP. In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the TFTP or FTP server. If you are downloading the signature file using a TFTP server, enter the maximum number of times that the controller should attempt to download the signature file in the Maximum retries text box. The range is 1 to 254 and the default value is 10. If you are downloading the signature file using a TFTP server, enter the amount of time in seconds before the controller times out while attempting to download the signature file in the Timeout text box. The range is 1 to 254 seconds and the default is 6 seconds. In the File Path text box, enter the path of the signature file to be downloaded or uploaded. The default value is /. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the signature file to be downloaded or uploaded. Note When uploading signatures, the controller uses the filename that you specify as a base name and then adds _std.sig and _custom.sig to it in order to upload both standard and custom signature files to the TFTP server. For example, if you upload a signature file called ids1, the controller automatically generates and uploads both ids1_std.sig and ids1_custom.sig to the TFTP server. If desired, you can then modify ids1_custom.sig on the TFTP server (making sure to set Revision = custom) and download it by itself. If you are using an FTP server, follow these steps:

1 In the Server Login Username text box, enter the username to log into the FTP server. 2 In the Server Login Password text box, enter the password to log into the FTP server. 3 In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number on the FTP server through which the download occurs. The default value is 21. Step 13 Choose Download to download the signature file to the controller or Upload to upload the signature file from the controller. Enabling or Disabling IDS Signatures Step 1 Choose Security > Wireless Protection Policies > Standard Signatures or Custom Signatures to open the Standard Signatures page or the Custom Signatures page. The Standard Signatures page shows the list of Cisco-supplied signatures that are currently on the controller. The Custom Signatures page shows the list of customer-supplied signatures that are currently on the controller. This page shows the following information for each signature:

The order, or precedence, in which the controller performs the signature checks. The name of the signature, which specifies the type of attack that the signature is trying to detect. The frame type on which the signature is looking for a security attack. The possible frame types are data and management. The action that the controller is directed to take when the signature detects an attack. The possible actions are None and Report. The state of the signature, which indicates whether the signature is enabled to detect security attacks. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 490 OL-28744-01 Configuring IDS Signatures (GUI) A description of the type of attack that the signature is trying to detect. Step 2 Perform one of the following:

If you want to allow all signatures (both standard and custom) whose individual states are set to Enabled to remain enabled, select the Enable Check for All Standard and Custom Signatures check box at the top of either the Standard Signatures page or the Custom Signatures page. The default value is enabled (or selected). When the signatures are enabled, the access points joined to the controller perform signature analysis on the received 802.11 data or management frames and report any discrepancies to the controller. If you want to disable all signatures (both standard and custom) on the controller, unselect the Enable Check for All Standard and Custom Signatures check box. If you unselected this check box, all signatures are disabled, even the ones whose individual states are set to Enabled. Step 3 Step 4 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click the precedence number of the desired signature to enable or disable an individual signature. The Standard Signature

(or Custom Signature) > Detail page appears. This page shows much of the same information as the Standard Signatures and Custom Signatures pages but provides these additional details:

The tracking method used by the access points to perform signature analysis and report the results to the controller. The possible values are as follows:

Per SignatureSignature analysis and pattern matching are tracked and reported on a per-signature and per-channel basis. Per MACSignature analysis and pattern matching are tracked and reported separately for individual client MAC addresses on a per-channel basis. Per Signature and MACSignature analysis and pattern matching are tracked and reported on a per-signature and per-channel basis as well as on a per-MAC-address and per-channel basis. The pattern that is being used to detect a security attack OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 491 Viewing IDS Signature Events (GUI) Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 In the Measurement Interval text box, enter the number of seconds that must elapse before the signature frequency threshold is reached within the configured interval. The range is 1 to 3600 seconds, and the default value varies per signature. In the Signature Frequency text box, enter the number of matching packets per interval that must be identified at the individual access point level before an attack is detected. The range is 1 to 32,000 packets per interval, and the default value varies per signature. In the Signature MAC Frequency text box, enter the number of matching packets per interval that must be identified per client per access point before an attack is detected. The range is 1 to 32,000 packets per interval, and the default value varies per signature. In the Quiet Time text box, enter the length of time (in seconds) after which no attacks have been detected at the individual access point level and the alarm can stop. The range is 60 to 32,000 seconds, and the default value varies per signature. Select the State check box to enable this signature to detect security attacks or unselect it to disable this signature. The default value is enabled (or selected). Click Apply to commit your changes. The Standard Signatures or Custom Signatures page reflects the signatures updated state. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Viewing IDS Signature Events (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Security > Wireless Protection Policies > Signature Events Summary to open the Signature Events Summary page. Click the Signature Type for the signature to see more information on the attacks detected by a particular signature. The Signature Events Detail page appears. This page shows the following information:

The MAC addresses of the clients identified as attackers The method used by the access point to track the attacks The number of matching packets per second that were identified before an attack was detected. The number of access points on the channel on which the attack was detected The day and time when the access point detected the attack Step 3 Click the Detail link for that attack to see more information for a particular attack. The Signature Events Track Detail page appears. The MAC address of the access point that detected the attack The name of the access point that detected the attack The type of radio (802.11a or 802.11b/g) used by the access point to detect the attack The radio channel on which the attack was detected Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 492 OL-28744-01 Configuring IDS Signatures (CLI) The day and time when the access point reported the attack Configuring IDS Signatures (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 If desired, create your own custom signature file. Make sure that you have a TFTP server available. Copy the custom signature file (*.sig) to the default directory on your TFTP server. Specify the download or upload mode by entering the transfer {download | upload} mode tftp command. Specify the type of file to be downloaded or uploaded by entering the transfer {download | upload} datatype signature command. Specify the IP address of the TFTP server by entering the transfer {download | upload} serverip tftp-server-ip-address command. Note Some TFTP servers require only a forward slash (/) as the TFTP server IP address, and the TFTP server automatically determines the path to the correct directory. Specify the download or upload path by entering the transfer {download | upload} path absolute-tftp-server-path-to-file command. Specify the file to be downloaded or uploaded by entering the transfer {download | upload} filename filename.sig command. Note When uploading signatures, the controller uses the filename you specify as a base name and then adds _std.sig and _custom.sig to it in order to upload both standard and custom signature files to the TFTP server. For example, if you upload a signature file called ids1, the controller automatically generates and uploads both ids1_std.sig and ids1_custom.sig to the TFTP server. If desired, you can then modify ids1_custom.sig on the TFTP server (making sure to set Revision = custom) and download it by itself. Enter the transfer {download | upload} start command and answer y to the prompt to confirm the current settings and start the download or upload. Specify the number of seconds that must elapse before the signature frequency threshold is reached within the configured interval by entering this command:

config wps signature interval signature_id interval where signature_id is a number used to uniquely identify a signature. The range is 1 to 3600 seconds, and the default value varies per signature. Specify the number of matching packets per interval that must be identified at the individual access point level before an attack is detected by entering this command:

config wps signature frequencysignature_id frequency The range is 1 to 32,000 packets per interval, and the default value varies per signature. Specify the number of matching packets per interval that must be identified per client per access point before an attack is detected by entering this command:

config wps signature mac-frequency signature_id mac_frequency OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 493 Viewing IDS Signature Events (CLI) Step 13 The range is 1 to 32,000 packets per interval, and the default value varies per signature. Specify the length of time (in seconds) after which no attacks have been detected at the individual access point level and the alarm can stop by entering by entering this command:

config wps signature quiet-time signature_id quiet_time The range is 60 to 32,000 seconds, and the default value varies per signature. Step 14 Perform one of the following:

To enable or disable an individual IDS signature, enter this command:

config wps signature {standard| custom} state signature_id {enable | disable}

To enable or disable IDS signature processing, which enables or disables the processing of all IDS signatures, enter this command:

config wps signature {enable | disable}

Note If IDS signature processing is disabled, all signatures are disabled, regardless of the state configured for individual signatures. Step 15 Step 16 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config If desired, you can reset a specific signature or all signatures to default values. To do so, enter this command:

config wps signature reset {signature_id | all}

Note You can reset signatures to default values only through the controller CLI. Viewing IDS Signature Events (CLI) See whether IDS signature processing is enabled or disabled on the controller by entering this command:

show wps summary Note If IDS signature processing is disabled, all signatures are disabled, regardless of the state configured for individual signatures. See individual summaries of all of the standard and custom signatures installed on the controller by entering this command:

show wps signature summary See the number of attacks detected by the enabled signatures by entering this command:

show wps signature events summary See more information on the attacks detected by a particular standard or custom signature by entering this command:

show wps signature events {standard | custom} precedence# summary Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 494 OL-28744-01 Viewing IDS Signature Events (CLI) See information on attacks that are tracked by access points on a per-signature and per-channel basis by entering this command:

show wps signature events {standard | custom} precedence# detailed per-signature source_mac See information on attacks that are tracked by access points on an individual-client basis (by MAC address) by entering this command:

show wps signature events {standard | custom} precedence# detailed per-mac source_mac OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 495 Viewing IDS Signature Events (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 496 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 63 Configuring wIPS Information About wIPS, page 497 Restrictions for wIPS, page 503 Configuring wIPS on an Access Point (GUI), page 503 Configuring wIPS on an Access Point (CLI), page 504 Viewing wIPS Information (CLI), page 505 Information About wIPS The Cisco Adaptive wireless Intrusion Prevention System (wIPS) is an advanced approach to wireless threat detection and performance management. It combines network traffic analysis, network device and topology information, signature-based techniques, and anomaly detection to deliver highly accurate and complete wireless threat prevention. With a fully infrastructure-integrated solution, you can continually monitor wireless traffic on both the wired and wireless networks and use that network intelligence to analyze attacks from many sources to more accurately pinpoint and proactively prevent attacks rather than waiting until damage or exposure has occurred. The Cisco Adaptive wIPS is enabled by the Cisco 3300 Series Mobility Services Engine (MSE), which centralizes the processing of intelligence collected by the continuous monitoring of Cisco Aironet access points. With Cisco Adaptive wIPS functionalities and Cisco Prime Infrastructure integration into the MSE, the wIPS service can configure, monitor, and report wIPS policies and alarms. Note If your wIPS deployment consists of a controller, access point, and MSE, you must set all the three entities to the UTC time zone. The Cisco Adaptive wIPS is not configured on the controller. Instead, the Prime Infrastructure forwards the profile configuration to the wIPS service, which forwards the profile to the controller. The profile is stored in flash memory on the controller and sent to access points when they join the controller. When an access point disassociates and joins another controller, it receives the wIPS profile from the new controller. Local mode or FlexConnect mode access points with a subset of wIPS capabilities is referred to as Enhanced Local Mode access point or ELM AP. You can configure an access point to work in wIPS mode if the access point is in any of the following modes:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 497 Information About wIPS Monitor Local FlexConnect The regular local mode or FlexConnect mode access point is extended with a subset of Wireless Intrusion Prevention System (wIPS) capabilities. This feature enables you to deploy your access points to provide protection without needing a separate overlay network. wIPS ELM has limited capability of detecting off-channel alarms. The access point periodically goes off-channel, and monitors the non-serving channels for a short duration, and triggers alarms if any attack is detected on the channel. But the off-channel alarm detection is best effort and it takes longer time to detect attacks and trigger alarms, which might cause the ELM AP intermittently detect an alarm and clear it because it is not visible. Access points in any of the above modes can periodically send alarms based on the policy profile to the wIPS service through the controller. The wIPS service stores and processes the alarms and generates SNMP traps. The Prime Infrastructure configures its IP address as a trap destination to receive SNMP traps from the MSE. This table lists all the SNMP trap controls and their respective traps. When a trap control is enabled, all the traps of the trap control are also enabled. Note The controller uses only SNMPv2 for SNMP trap transmission. Table 17: SNMP Trap Controls and their respective Traps Tab Name General Trap Control Link (Port) Up/Down Trap linkUp, linkDown Spanning Tree Config Save newRoot, topologyChange, stpInstanceNewRootTrap, stpInstanceTopologyChangeTrap bsnDot11EssCreated, bsnDot11EssDeleted, bsnConfigSaved, ciscoLwappScheduledResetNotif, ciscoLwappClearResetNotif, ciscoLwappResetFailedNotif, ciscoLwappSysInvalidXmlConfig AP AP Register bsnAPDisassociated, bsnAPAssociated Ap Interface Up/Down bsnAPIfUp, bsnAPIfDown Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 498 OL-28744-01 Information About wIPS Tab Name Client Traps Trap Control 802.11 Association Trap bsnDot11StationAssociate 802.11 Disassociation bsnDot11StationDisassociate 802.11 Deauthentication bsnDot11StationDeauthenticate 802.11 Failed Authentication bsnDot11StationAuthenticateFail 802.11 Failed Association bsnDot11StationAssociateFail Exclusion NAC Alert Security Traps User Authentication RADIUS Servers Not Responding bsnDot11StationBlacklisted cldcClientWlanProfileName, cldcClientIPAddress, cldcApMacAddress, cldcClientQuarantineVLAN, cldcClientAccessVLAN bsnTooManyUnsuccessLoginAttempts, cLWAGuestUserLoggedIn, cLWAGuestUserLoggedOut bsnRADIUSServerNotResponding, ciscoLwappAAARadiusReqTimedOut WEP Decrypt Error bsnWepKeyDecryptError Rogue AP bsnAdhocRogueAutoContained, bsnRogueApAutoContained, bsnTrustedApHasInvalidEncryption, bsnMaxRogueCountExceeded, bsnMaxRogueCountClear, bsnApMaxRogueCountExceeded, bsnApMaxRogueCountClear, bsnTrustedApHasInvalidRadioPolicy, bsnTrustedApHasInvalidSsid, bsnTrustedApIsMissing SNMP Authentication agentSnmpAuthenticationTrapFlag Auto RF Profile Traps Multiple Users Load Profile Noise Profile Interference Profile Coverage Profile multipleUsersTrap bsnAPLoadProfileFailed bsnAPNoiseProfileFailed bsnAPInterferenceProfileFailed bsnAPCoverageProfileFailed OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 499 Information About wIPS Tab Name Auto RF Update Traps Trap Control Channel Update Tx Power Update Trap bsnAPCurrentChannelChanged bsnAPCurrentTxPowerChanged Mesh Traps Child Excluded Parent ciscoLwappMeshChildExcludedParent Parent Change Authfailure Mesh Child Moved ciscoLwappMeshParentChange ciscoLwappMeshAuthorizationFailure ciscoLwappMeshChildMoved Excessive Parent Change ciscoLwappMeshExcessiveParentChange Excessive Children Poor SNR ciscoLwappMeshExcessiveChildren ciscoLwappMeshAbateSNR, ciscoLwappMeshOnsetSNR Console Login ciscoLwappMeshConsoleLogin Excessive Association ciscoLwappMeshExcessiveAssociation Default Bridge Group Name ciscoLwappMeshDefaultBridgeGroupName The following are the trap description for the traps mentioned in the SNMP Trap Controls and their respective Traps table:

General Traps SNMP AuthenticationThe SNMPv2 entity has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated. Note When a user who is configured in SNMP V3 mode tries to access the controller with an incorrect password, the authentication fails and a failure message is displayed. However, no trap logs are generated for the authentication failure. Link (Port) Up/DownLink changes status from up or down. Link (Port) Up/DownLink changes status from up or down. Multiple UsersTwo users log on with the same ID. Rogue APWhenever a rogue access point is detected, this trap is sent with its MAC address;

when a rogue access point that was detected earlier no longer exists, this trap is sent. Config SaveNotification sent when the controller configuration is modified. Cisco AP Traps Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 500 OL-28744-01 Information About wIPS AP RegisterNotification sent when an access point associates or disassociates with the controller. AP Interface Up/DownNotification sent when an access point interface (802.11X) status goes up or down. Client Related Traps 802.11 AssociationAssociate notification that is sent when the client sends an association frame. 802.11 DisassociationDisassociate notification that is sent when the client sends a disassociation frame. 802.11 DeauthenticationDeauthenticate notification that is sent when the client sends a deauthentication frame. 802.11 Failed AuthenticationAuthenticate failure notification that is sent when the client sends an authentication frame with a status code other than successful. 802.11 Failed AssociationAssociate failure notification that is sent when the client sends an association frame with a status code other than successful. ExclusionAssociate failure notification that is sent when a client is Exclusion Listed (blacklisted). AuthenticationAuthentication notification that is sent when a client is successfully authenticated. Max Clients Limit ReachedNotification that is sent when the maximum number of clients, defined in the Threshold field, have associated with the controller. NAC AlertAlert that is sent when a client joins an SNMP NAC-enabled WLAN. This notification is generated when a client on NAC-enabled SSIDs complete Layer2 authentication to inform about the client's presence to the NAC appliance. cldcClientWlanProfileName represents the profile name of the WLAN that the 802.11 wireless client is connected to. cldcClientIPAddress represents the unique IP address of the client. cldcApMacAddress represents the MAC address of the AP to which the client is associated. cldcClientQuarantineVLAN represents the quarantine VLAN for the client. cldcClientAccessVLAN represents the access VLAN for the client. Association with StatsAssociate notification that is sent with data statistics when a client associates with the controller or roams. The data statistics include transmitted and received bytes and packets. Disassociation with StatsDisassociate notification that is sent with data statistics when a client disassociates from the controller. The data statistics include transmitted and received bytes and packets, SSID, and session ID. Security Traps User Auth FailureThis trap is to inform that a client RADIUS Authentication failure has occurred. RADIUS Server No ResponseThis trap is to indicate that no RADIUS server(s) are responding to authentication requests sent by the RADIUS client. WEP Decrypt ErrorNotification sent when the controller detects a WEP decrypting error. Rouge APWhenever a rogue access point is detected, this trap is sent with its MAC address;

when a rogue access point that was detected earlier no longer exists, this trap is sent. SNMP AuthenticationThe SNMPv2 entity has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 501 Information About wIPS Note When a user who is configured in SNMP V3 mode tries to access the controller with an incorrect password, the authentication fails and a failure message is displayed. However, no trap logs are generated for the authentication failure. Multiple UsersTwo users log on with the same ID. SNMP Authentication Load ProfileNotification sent when the Load Profile state changes between PASS and FAIL. Noise ProfileNotification sent when the Noise Profile state changes between PASS and FAIL. Interference ProfileNotification sent when the Interference Profile state changes between PASS and FAIL. Coverage ProfileNotification sent when the Coverage Profile state changes between PASS and FAIL. Auto RF Profile Traps Load ProfileNotification sent when the Load Profile state changes between PASS and FAIL. Noise ProfileNotification sent when the Noise Profile state changes between PASS and FAIL. Interference ProfileNotification sent when the Interference Profile state changes between PASS and FAIL. Coverage ProfileNotification sent when the Coverage Profile state changes between PASS and FAIL. Auto RF Update Traps Channel UpdateNotification sent when the access point dynamic channel algorithm is updated. Tx Power UpdateNotification sent when the access point dynamic transmit power algorithm is updated. Mesh Traps Child Excluded ParentNotification send when a defined number of failed association to the controller occurs through a parent mesh node. Notification sent when a child mesh node exceeds the threshold limit of the number of discovery response timeouts. The child mesh node does not try to associate an excluded parent mesh node for the interval defined. The child mesh node remembers the excluded parent MAC address when it joins the network, it informs the controller. Parent ChangeNotification is sent by the agent when a child mesh node changes its parent. The child mesh node remembers its previous parent and it informs the controller about the change of its parent when it rejoins the network. Child MovedNotification sent when a parent mesh node loses connection with its child mesh node. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 502 OL-28744-01 Restrictions for wIPS Excessive Parent ChangeNotification sent when the child mesh node changes its parent frequently. Each mesh node keeps a count of the number of parent changes in a fixed time. If it exceeds the defined threshold then child mesh node informs the controller. Excessive ChildrenNotification sent when the child count exceeds for a RAP and MAP. Poor SNRNotification sent when the child mesh node detects a lower SNR on a backhaul link. For the other trap, a notification is sent to clear a notification when the child mesh node detects an SNR on a backhaul link that is higher then the object defined by 'clMeshSNRThresholdAbate'. Console LoginNotification is sent by the agent when login on MAP console is successful or failure after three attempts. Default Bridge Group NameNotification sent when MAP mesh node joins parent using 'default'

bridge group name. Note The remaining traps do not have trap controls. These traps are not generated too frequently and do not require any trap control. Any other trap that is generated by the controller cannot be turned off. Note In all of the above cases, the controller functions solely as a forwarding device. Note To download the MIBs, click here. Restrictions for wIPS wIPS ELM is not supported on 1130 and 1240 access points. Configuring wIPS on an Access Point (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs > access point name. Set the AP Mode parameter. To configure an access point for wIPS, you must choose one of the following modes from the AP Mode drop-down list:

Local FlexConnect OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 503 Configuring wIPS on an Access Point (CLI) Monitor Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Set the AP Sub Mode to wIPS by choosing wIPS from the AP Sub Mode drop-down list. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring wIPS on an Access Point (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Configure an access point for monitor mode by entering this command:

config ap mode {monitor | local | flexconnect} Cisco_AP Note To configure an access point for wIPS, the access point must be in monitor, local, or flexconnect modes. Enter Y when you see the message that the access point will be rebooted if you want to continue. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Disable the access point radio by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable Cisco_AP Configure the wIPS submode on the access point by entering this command:

config ap mode ap_mode submode wips Cisco_AP Note To disable wIPS on the access point, enter the config ap mode ap_mode submode none Cisco_AP command. Enable wIPS optimized channel scanning for the access point by entering this command:

config ap monitor-mode wips-optimized Cisco_AP The access point scans each channel for 250 milliseconds. It derives the list of channels to be scanned from the monitor configuration. You can choose one of these options:

AllAll channels supported by the access points radio CountryOnly the channels supported by the access points country of operation DCAOnly the channel set used by the dynamic channel assignment (DCA) algorithm, which by default includes all of the nonoverlapping channels allowed in the access points country of operation The 802.11a or 802.11b Monitor Channels text box in the output of the show advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} monitor command shows the monitor configuration channel set:

Default 802.11b AP monitoring 802.11b Monitor Mode........................... enable 802.11b Monitor Channels....................... Country channels 802.11b AP Coverage Interval................... 180 seconds 802.11b AP Load Interval....................... 60 seconds 802.11b AP Noise Interval...................... 180 seconds Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 504 OL-28744-01 Viewing wIPS Information (CLI) 802.11b AP Signal Strength Interval............ 60 seconds Step 7 Step 8 Reenable the access point radio by entering this command:

config { 802.11a | 802.11b} enable Cisco_AP Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Viewing wIPS Information (CLI) Note You can also view the access point submode from the controller GUI. To do so, choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs > the access point name > the Advanced tab. The AP Sub Mode text box shows wIPS if the access point in is monitor mode and the wIPS submode is configured on the access point or None if the access point is not in monitor mode or the access point is in monitor mode but the wIPS submode is not configured. See the wIPS submode on the access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP See the wIPS optimized channel scanning configuration on the access point by entering this command:

show ap monitor-mode summary See the wIPS configuration forwarded by Cisco Prime Infrastructure to the controller by entering this command:

show wps wips summary See the current state of wIPS operation on the controller by entering this command:

show wps wips statistics Clear the wIPS statistics on the controller by entering this command:

clear stats wps wips OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 505 Viewing wIPS Information (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 506 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 64 Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy Information About the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy, page 507 Restrictions for the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy, page 507 Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (GUI), page 507 Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (CLI), page 508 Monitoring and Troubleshooting the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (CLI), page 508 Information About the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy Devices that are Wi-Fi Direct capable can connect directly to each other quickly and conveniently to do tasks such as printing, synchronization, and sharing of data. Wi-Fi Direct devices may associate with multiple peer-to-peer (P2P) devices and with infrastructure wireless LANs (WLANs) concurrently. You can use the controller to configure the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy, on a per WLAN basis, where you can allow or disallow association of Wi-Fi devices with infrastructure WLANs, or disable Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy altogether for WLANs. Restrictions for the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy is applicable to WLANs that have APs in local mode only. Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the WLAN ID of the WLAN for which you want to configure the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Click the Advanced tab. From the Wi-Fi Direct Clients Policy drop-down list, choose one of the following options:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 507 Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (CLI) DisabledIgnores the Wi-Fi Direct status of clients thereby allowing Wi-Fi Direct clients to associate AllowAllows Wi-Fi Direct clients to associate with the WLAN Not-AllowDisallows the Wi-Fi Direct clients from associating with the WLAN Step 5 Click Apply. Configuring the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (CLI) Step 1 Configure the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy on WLANs by entering this command:

config wlan wifidirect {allow | disable | not-allow} wlan-id The syntax of the command is as follows:

allowAllows Wi-Fi Direct clients to associate with the WLAN disableDisables the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy for the WLAN and deauthenticates all Wi-Fi Direct clients not-allowDisallows the Wi-Fi Direct clients from associating with the WLAN wlan-idWLAN identifier Step 2 Save your configuration by entering this command:

save config Monitoring and Troubleshooting the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy (CLI) Monitor and troubleshoot the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy by entering theses commands:

show wlan wifidirect wlan-idDisplays status of the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy on the WLAN. show client wifiDirect-statsDisplays the total number of clients associated and the number of clients rejected if the Wi-Fi Direct Client Policy is enabled. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 508 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 65 Configuring Web Auth Proxy Information About the Web Authentication Proxy, page 509 Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (GUI), page 510 Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (CLI), page 510 Information About the Web Authentication Proxy This feature enables clients that have manual web proxy enabled in the browser to facilitate authentication with the controller. If the user's browser is configured with manual proxy settings with a configured port number as 8080 or 3128 and if the client requests any URL, the controller responds with a web page prompting the user to change the Internet proxy settings to automatically detect the proxy settings so that the browsers manual proxy settings information does not get lost. After enabling this settings, the user can get access to the network through the web authentication policy. This functionality is given for port 8080 and 3128 because these are the most commonly used ports for the web proxy server. Note The web authentication proxy redirect ports are not blocked through CPU ACL. If a CPU ACL is configured to block the port 8080, 3128, and one random port as part of web authentication proxy configuration, those ports are not blocked because the webauth rules take higher precedence than the CPU ACL rules unless the client is in the webauth_req state. A web browser has the following three types of Internet settings that you can configure:

Auto detect System Proxy Manual In a manual proxy server configuration, the browser uses the IP address of a proxy server and a port. If this configuration is enabled on the browser, the wireless client communicates with the IP address of the destination proxy server on the configured port. In a web authentication scenario, the controller does not listen to such proxy ports and the client is not able to establish a TCP connection with the controller. The user is unable to get any login page to authentication and get access to the network. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 509 Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (GUI) When a wireless client enters a web-authenticated WLAN, the client tries to access a URL. If a manual proxy configuration is configured on the client's browser, all the web traffic going out from the client will be destined to the proxy IP and port configured on the browser. A TCP connection is established between the client and the proxy server IP address that the controller proxies for. The client processes the DHCP response and obtains a JavaScript file from the controller. The script disables all proxy configurations on the client for that session. Note For external clients, the controller sends the login page as is (with or without JavaScipt). Any requests that bypass the proxy configuration. The controller can then perform web-redirection, login, and authentication. When the client goes out of the network, and then back into its own network, a DHCP refresh occurs and the client continues to use the old proxy configuration configured on the browser. If the external DHCP server is used with webauth proxy, then DHCP option 252 must be configured on the DHCP server for that scope. The value of option 252 will have the format http://<virtual ip>/proxy.js. No extra configuration is needed for internal DHCP servers. Note When you configure FIPS mode with secure web authentication, we recommend that you use Mozilla Firefox as your browser. Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Controller > General From the WebAuth Proxy Redirection Mode drop-down list, choose Enabled or Disabled. In the WebAuth Proxy Redirection Port text box, enter the port number of the web auth proxy. This text box consists of the port numbers on which the controller listens to for web authentication proxy redirection. By default, the three ports 80, 8080, and 3128 are assumed. If you configured the web authentication redirection port to any port other than these values, you must specify that value. Step 4 Click Apply. Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (CLI) Enable web authentication proxy redirection by entering this command:

config network web-auth proxy-redirect {enable | disable}

Configure the secure web (https) authentication for clients by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 510 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (CLI) config network web-auth secureweb {enable | disable}

The default secure web (https) authentication for clients is enabled. Note If you configure to disallow secure web (https) authentication for clients using the config network web-auth secureweb disable command, then you must reboot the Cisco WLC to implement the change. Set the web authentication port number by entering this command:

config network web-auth port port-number This parameter specifies the port numbers on which the controller listens to for web authentication proxy redirection. By default, the three ports 80, 8080, and 3128 are assumed. If you configured the web authentication redirection port to any port other than these values, you must specify that value. See the current status of the web authentication proxy configuration by entering one of the following commands:

show network summary show running-config OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 511 Configuring the Web Authentication Proxy (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 512 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 66 Detecting Active Exploits Detecting Active Exploits, page 513 Detecting Active Exploits The controller supports three active exploit alarms that serve as notifications of potential threats. They are enabled by default and therefore require no configuration on the controller. ASLEAP detectionThe controller raises a trap event if an attacker launches a LEAP crack tool. The trap message is visible in the controllers trap log. Fake access point detectionThe controller tweaks the fake access point detection logic to avoid false access point alarms in high-density access point environments. Honeypot access point detectionThe controller raises a trap event if a rogue access point is using managed SSIDs (WLANs configured on the controller). The trap message is visible in the controllers trap log. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 513 Detecting Active Exploits Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 514 OL-28744-01 P A R T V Working with WLANs Overview, page 517 Configuring WLANs, page 521 Setting the Client Count per WLAN, page 529 Configuring DHCP, page 533 Configuring DHCP Scopes, page 537 Configuring MAC Filtering for WLANs, page 541 Configuring Local MAC Filters, page 543 Configuring Timeouts, page 545 Configuring the DTIM Period, page 549 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking, page 551 Configuring Layer2 Security, page 555 Configuring a WLAN for Both Static and Dynamic WEP, page 567 Configuring Sticky Key Caching, page 571 Configuring CKIP, page 575 Configuring Layer 3 Security, page 579 Configuring Captive Bypassing, page 583 Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication, page 585 Assigning QoS Profiles, page 587 Configuring QoS Enhanced BSS, page 591 Configuring Media Session Snooping and Reporting, page 595 Configuring Key Telephone System-Based CAC, page 601 Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients, page 605 Configuring Seamless IPv6 Mobility, page 607 Configuring Cisco Client Extensions, page 613 Configuring Remote LANs, page 617 Configuring AP Groups, page 621 Configuring RF Profiles, page 629 Configuring Web Redirect with 8021.X Authentication, page 637 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration, page 643 Configuring Passive Clients, page 649 Configuring Client Profiling, page 653 Configuring Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support, page 657 Configuring Mobile Concierge, page 661 Configuring Assisted Roaming, page 673 C H A P T E R 67 Overview Information About WLANs, page 517 Information About WLANs This feature enables you to control up to 512 WLANs for lightweight access points. Each WLAN has a separate WLAN ID, a separate profile name, and a WLAN SSID. All controllers publish up to 16 WLANs to each connected access point, but you can create up to the maximum number of WLANs supported and then selectively publish these WLANs (using access point groups) to different access points to better manage your wireless network. You can configure WLANs with different SSIDs or with the same SSID. An SSID identifies the specific wireless network that you want the controller to access. Prerequisites for WLANs You can associate up to 16 WLANs with each access point group and assign specific access points to each group. Each access point advertises only the enabled WLANs that belong to its access point group. The access point (AP) does not advertise disabled WLANs in its access point group or WLANs that belong to another group. We recommend that you assign one set of VLANs for WLANs and a different set of VLANs for management interfaces to ensure that controllers properly route VLAN traffic. The controller uses different attributes to differentiate between WLANs with the same Service Set Identifier (SSID). WLANs with the same SSID and same Layer 2 policy cannot be created if the WLAN ID is lower than 17. Two WLANs with IDs that are greater than 17 and that have the same SSID and same Layer 2 policy is allowed if WLANs are added in different AP groups. Note This requirement ensures that clients never detect the SSID present on the same access point radio. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 517 Information About WLANs Restrictions for WLANs Peer-to-peer blocking does not apply to multicast traffic. The WLAN name and SSID can have up to 32 characters. Spaces are not allowed in the WLAN profile name and SSID. You cannot map a WLAN to VLAN0, and you cannot map VLANs 1002 to 1006. Dual stack clients with a static-IPv4 address is not supported. When creating a WLAN with the same SSID, you must create a unique profile name for each WLAN. All OfficeExtend access points should be in the same access point group, and that group should contain no more than 15 WLANs. A controller with OfficeExtend access points in an access point group publishes only up to 15 WLANs to each connected OfficeExtend access point because it reserves one WLAN for the personal SSID. The Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller does not support the 802.1X security variants on a centrally switched WLAN. For example, the following configurations are not allowed on a centrally switched WLAN:

WPA1/WPA2 with 802.1X AKM WPA1/WPA2 with CCKM Dynamic-WEP Conditional webauth Splash WEB page redirect If you want to configure your WLAN in any of the above combinations, the WLAN must be configured to use local switching. If you configured your WLAN with EAP Passthrough and if you downgrade to an earlier controller version, you might encounter XML validation errors during the downgrade process. This problem is because EAP Passthrough is not supported in earlier releases. The configuration will default to the default security settings (WPA2/802.1X). Note The OEAP 600 Series access point supports a maximum of two WLANs and one remote LAN. If you have configured more than two WLANs and one remote LAN, you can assign the 600 Series access point to an AP group. The support for two WLANs and one remote LAN still applies to the AP Group If the 600 Series OEAP is in the default group, the WLAN or remote LAN IDs must be lower than 8. Profile name of WLAN can be of max 31 characters for a locally switched WLAN. For central switched WLAN, the profile name can be of 32 characters. When multiple WLANs with the same SSID get assigned to the same AP radio, you must have a unique Layer 2 security policy so that clients can safely select between them. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 518 OL-28744-01 Information About WLANs Caution Some clients might not be able to connect to WLANs properly if they detect the same SSID with multiple security policies. Use this feature with care. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 519 Information About WLANs Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 520 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 68 Configuring WLANs Prerequisites for WLANs, page 521 Restrictions for WLANs, page 522 Information About WLANs, page 523 Creating and Removing WLANs (GUI), page 523 Enabling and Disabling WLANs (GUI), page 524 Creating and Deleting WLANs (CLI), page 524 Enabling and Disabling WLANs (CLI), page 525 Viewing WLANs (CLI), page 525 Searching WLANs (GUI), page 526 Assigning WLANs to Interfaces, page 526 Configuring Network Access Identifier (CLI), page 526 Prerequisites for WLANs You can associate up to 16 WLANs with each access point group and assign specific access points to each group. Each access point advertises only the enabled WLANs that belong to its access point group. The access point (AP) does not advertise disabled WLANs in its access point group or WLANs that belong to another group. We recommend that you assign one set of VLANs for WLANs and a different set of VLANs for management interfaces to ensure that controllers properly route VLAN traffic. The controller uses different attributes to differentiate between WLANs with the same Service Set Identifier (SSID). WLANs with the same SSID and same Layer 2 policy cannot be created if the WLAN ID is lower than 17. Two WLANs with IDs that are greater than 17 and that have the same SSID and same Layer 2 policy is allowed if WLANs are added in different AP groups. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 521 Restrictions for WLANs Note This requirement ensures that clients never detect the SSID present on the same access point radio. Restrictions for WLANs Peer-to-peer blocking does not apply to multicast traffic. The WLAN name and SSID can have up to 32 characters. Spaces are not allowed in the WLAN profile name and SSID. You cannot map a WLAN to VLAN0, and you cannot map VLANs 1002 to 1006. Dual stack clients with a static-IPv4 address is not supported. When creating a WLAN with the same SSID, you must create a unique profile name for each WLAN. All OfficeExtend access points should be in the same access point group, and that group should contain no more than 15 WLANs. A controller with OfficeExtend access points in an access point group publishes only up to 15 WLANs to each connected OfficeExtend access point because it reserves one WLAN for the personal SSID. The Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller does not support the 802.1X security variants on a centrally switched WLAN. For example, the following configurations are not allowed on a centrally switched WLAN:

WPA1/WPA2 with 802.1X AKM WPA1/WPA2 with CCKM Dynamic-WEP Conditional webauth Splash WEB page redirect If you want to configure your WLAN in any of the above combinations, the WLAN must be configured to use local switching. If you configured your WLAN with EAP Passthrough and if you downgrade to an earlier controller version, you might encounter XML validation errors during the downgrade process. This problem is because EAP Passthrough is not supported in earlier releases. The configuration will default to the default security settings (WPA2/802.1X). Note The OEAP 600 Series access point supports a maximum of two WLANs and one remote LAN. If you have configured more than two WLANs and one remote LAN, you can assign the 600 Series access point to an AP group. The support for two WLANs and one remote LAN still applies to the AP Group If the 600 Series OEAP is in the default group, the WLAN or remote LAN IDs must be lower than 8. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 522 OL-28744-01 Information About WLANs Profile name of WLAN can be of max 31 characters for a locally switched WLAN. For central switched WLAN, the profile name can be of 32 characters. When multiple WLANs with the same SSID get assigned to the same AP radio, you must have a unique Layer 2 security policy so that clients can safely select between them. Caution Some clients might not be able to connect to WLANs properly if they detect the same SSID with multiple security policies. Use this feature with care. Information About WLANs This feature enables you to control up to 512 WLANs for lightweight access points. Each WLAN has a separate WLAN ID, a separate profile name, and a WLAN SSID. All controllers publish up to 16 WLANs to each connected access point, but you can create up to the maximum number of WLANs supported and then selectively publish these WLANs (using access point groups) to different access points to better manage your wireless network. You can configure WLANs with different SSIDs or with the same SSID. An SSID identifies the specific wireless network that you want the controller to access. Creating and Removing WLANs (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. This page lists all of the WLANs currently configured on the controller. For each WLAN, you can see its WLAN ID, profile name, type, SSID, status, and security policies. The total number of WLANs appears in the upper right-hand corner of the page. If the list of WLANs spans multiple pages, you can access these pages by clicking the page number links. Note If you want to delete a WLAN, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that WLAN and choose Remove, or select the check box to the left of the WLAN, choose Remove Selected from the drop-down list, and click Go. A message appears asking you to confirm your decision. If you proceed, the WLAN is removed from any access point group to which it is assigned and from the access points radio. Create a new WLAN by choosing Create New from the drop-down list and clicking Go. The WLANs > New page appears. Note When you upgrade to controller software release 5.2 or later releases, the controller creates the default-group access point group and automatically populates it with the first 16 WLANs (WLANs with IDs 1 through 16, or fewer if 16 WLANs are not configured). This default group cannot be modified (you cannot add WLANs to it nor delete WLANs from it). It is dynamically updated whenever the first 16 WLANs are added or deleted. If an access point does not belong to an access point group, it is assigned to the default group and uses the WLANs in that group. If an access point joins the controller with an undefined access point group name, the access point keeps its group name but uses the WLANs in the default-group access point group. Step 3 From the Type drop-down list, choose WLAN to create a WLAN. Note If you want to create a guest LAN for wired guest users, choose Guest LAN. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 523 Enabling and Disabling WLANs (GUI) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 In the Profile Name text box, enter up to 32 characters for the profile name to be assigned to this WLAN. The profile name must be unique. In the WLAN SSID text box, enter up to 32 characters for the SSID to be assigned to this WLAN. From the WLAN ID drop-down list, choose the ID number for this WLAN. Note If the Cisco OEAP 600 is in the default group, the WLAN/Remote LAN IDs need to be set as lower than ID 8. Click Apply to commit your changes. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Note You can also open the WLANs > Edit page from the WLANs page by clicking the ID number of the WLAN that you want to edit. Use the parameters on the General, Security, QoS, and Advanced tabs to configure this WLAN. See the sections in the rest of this chapter for instructions on configuring specific features for WLANs. On the General tab, select the Status check box to enable this WLAN. Be sure to leave it unselected until you have finished making configuration changes to the WLAN. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Enabling and Disabling WLANs (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. This page lists all of the WLANs currently configured on the controller. Enable or disable WLANs from the WLANs page by selecting the check boxes to the left of the WLANs that you want to enable or disable, choosing Enable Selected or Disable Selected from the drop-down list, and clicking Go. Click Apply. Creating and Deleting WLANs (CLI) Create a new WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan create wlan_id {profile_name | foreign_ap} ssid Note If you do not specify an ssid, the profile_name parameter is used for both the profile name and the SSID. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 524 OL-28744-01 Enabling and Disabling WLANs (CLI) Note When WLAN 1 is created in the configuration wizard, it is created in enabled mode. Disable it until you have finished configuring it. When you create a new WLAN using the config wlan create command, it is created in disabled mode. Leave it disabled until you have finished configuring it. Delete a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan delete {wlan_id | foreign_ap}

Note An error message appears if you try to delete a WLAN that is assigned to an access point group. If you proceed, the WLAN is removed from the access point group and from the access points radio. Enabling and Disabling WLANs (CLI) Enable a WLAN (for example, after you have finished making configuration changes to the WLAN) by entering this command:

config wlan enable {wlan_id | foreign_ap | all}

Note If the command fails, an error message appears (for example, Request failed for wlan 10 - Static WEP key size does not match 802.1X WEP key size). Disable a WLAN (for example, before making any modifications to a WLAN) by entering this command:

config wlan disable {wlan_id | foreign_ap | all}

where wlan_id is a WLAN ID between 1 and 512. foreign_ap is a third-party access point. all is all WLANs. Note If the management and AP-manager interfaces are mapped to the same port and are members of the same VLAN, you must disable the WLAN before making a port-mapping change to either interface. If the management and AP-manager interfaces are assigned to different VLANs, you do not need to disable the WLAN. Viewing WLANs (CLI) View the list of existing WLANs and to see whether they are enabled or disabled by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 525 Searching WLANs (GUI) show wlan summary Searching WLANs (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 On the WLANs page, click Change Filter. The Search WLANs dialog box appears. Perform one of the following:

To search for WLANs based on profile name, select the Profile Name check box and enter the desired profile name in the edit box. To search for WLANs based on SSID, select the SSID check box and enter the desired SSID in the edit box. To search for WLANs based on their status, select the Status check box and choose Enabled or Disabled from the drop-down list. Step 3 Click Find. Only the WLANs that match your search criteria appear on the WLANs page, and the Current Filter field at the top of the page specifies the search criteria used to generate the list (for example, None, Profile Name:user1, SSID:test1, Status: disabled). Note To clear any configured search criteria and display the entire list of WLANs, click Clear Filter. Assigning WLANs to Interfaces Use these commands to assign a WLAN to an interface:

Assign a WLAN to an interface by entering this command:

config wlan interface {wlan_id | foreignAp} interface_id Use the interface_id option to assign the WLAN to a specific interface. Use the foreignAp option to use a third-party access point. Verify the interface assignment status by entering the show wlan summary command. Configuring Network Access Identifier (CLI) You can configure a network access server identifier (NAS-ID) on each WLAN profile, VLAN interface, or AP group. The NAS-ID is sent to the RADIUS server by the controller through an authentication request to classify users to different groups so that the RADIUS server can send a customized authentication response. If you configure a NAS-ID for an AP group, this NAS-ID overrides the NAS-ID that is configured for a WLAN profile or the VLAN interface. If you configure a NAS-ID for a WLAN profile, this NAS-ID overrides the NAS-ID that is configured for the VLAN interface. Configure a NAS-ID for a WLAN profile by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 526 OL-28744-01 Configuring Network Access Identifier (CLI) config wlan nasid {nas-id-string | none} wlan-id Configure a NAS-ID for a VLAN interface by entering this command:

config interface nasid {nas-id-string | none} interface-name Configure a NAS-ID for an AP group by entering this command:

config wlan apgroup nasid {nas-id-string | none} apgroup-name When the controller communicates with the RADIUS server, the NAS-ID attribute is replaced with the configured NAS-ID in an AP group, a WLAN, or a VLAN interface. The NAS-ID that is configured on the controller for an AP group, a WLAN, or a VLAN interface is used for authentication. The configuration of NAS-ID is not propagated across controllers. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 527 Configuring Network Access Identifier (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 528 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 69 Setting the Client Count per WLAN Restrictions for Setting Client Count for WLANs, page 529 Information About Setting the Client Count per WLAN, page 530 Configuring the Client Count per WLAN (GUI), page 530 Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients per WLAN (CLI), page 530 Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients for each AP Radio per WLAN (GUI), page 531 Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients for each AP Radio per WLAN (CLI), page 531 Restrictions for Setting Client Count for WLANs The maximum number of clients for each WLAN feature is not supported when you use FlexConnect local authentication. The maximum number of clients for each WLAN feature is supported only for access points that are in connected mode. When a WLAN has reached the limit on the maximum number of clients connected to it or an AP radio and a new client tries to join the WLAN, the client cannot connect to the WLAN until an existing client gets disconnected. Roaming clients are considered as new clients. The new client can connect to a WLAN, which has reached the maximum limit on the number of connected clients, only when an existing client gets disconnected. Note For more information about the number of clients that are supported, see the product data sheet of your controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 529 Information About Setting the Client Count per WLAN Information About Setting the Client Count per WLAN You can set a limit to the number of clients that can connect to a WLAN, which is useful in scenarios where you have a limited number of clients that can connect to a controller. For example, consider a scenario where the controller can serve up to 256 clients on a WLAN and these clients can be shared between enterprise users

(employees) and guest users. You can set a limit on the number of guest clients that can access a given WLAN. The number of clients that you can configure for each WLAN depends on the platform that you are using. Configuring the Client Count per WLAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to limit the number of clients. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Click the Advanced tab. In the Maximum Allowed Clients text box, enter the maximum number of clients that are to be allowed. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients per WLAN (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Determine the WLAN ID for which you want to configure the maximum clients by entering this command:

show wlan summary Get the WLAN ID from the list. Configure the maximum number of clients for each WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan max-associated-clients max-clients wlan-id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 530 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients for each AP Radio per WLAN (GUI) Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients for each AP Radio per WLAN

(GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to limit the number of clients. The WLANs > Edit page appears. In the Advanced tab, enter the maximum allowed clients for each access point radio in the Maximum Allowed Clients Per AP Radio text box. You can configure up to 200 clients. Click Apply. Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients for each AP Radio per WLAN

(CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Determine the WLAN ID for which you want to configure the maximum clients for each radio by entering this command:

show wlan summary Obtain the WLAN ID from the list. Configure the maximum number of clients for each WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan max-radio-clients client_count You can configure up to 200 clients. Step 3 See the configured maximum associated clients by entering the show 802.11a command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 531 Configuring the Maximum Number of Clients for each AP Radio per WLAN (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 532 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 70 Configuring DHCP Restrictions for Configuring DHCP for WLANs, page 533 Information About the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, page 533 Configuring DHCP (GUI), page 535 Configuring DHCP (CLI), page 536 Debugging DHCP (CLI), page 536 Restrictions for Configuring DHCP for WLANs The controller internal DHCP server does not support Cisco Aironet 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. Internal DHCP servers are not supported in Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controllers. As a workaround, you can use External DHCP servers. For WLANs with local switching and central DHCP feature enabled, clients with static IP addresses are not allowed. Enabling central DHCP will internally enable DHCP required option. Information About the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol You can configure WLANs to use the same or different Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) servers or no DHCP server. Two types of DHCP servers are available: internal and external. Internal DHCP Servers The controllers contain an internal DHCP server. This server is typically used in branch offices that do not already have a DHCP server. The wireless network generally contains a maximum of 10 access points or fewer, with the access points on the same IP subnet as the controller. The internal server provides DHCP addresses to wireless clients, direct-connect access points, and DHCP requests that are relayed from access points. Only lightweight access points are supported. When you want to use the internal DHCP server, you must set the management interface IP address of the controller as the DHCP server IP address. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 533 Information About the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP option 43 is not supported on the internal server. Therefore, the access point must use an alternative method to locate the management interface IP address of the controller, such as local subnet broadcast, Domain Name System (DNS), or priming. An internal DHCP server pool only serves the wireless clients of that controller, not clients of other controllers. Also, an internal DHCP server can serve only wireless clients, not wired clients. When clients use the internal DHCP server of the controller, IP addresses are not preserved across reboots. As a result, multiple clients can be assigned with the same IP address. To resolve any IP address conflicts, clients must release their existing IP address and request a new one. Wired guest clients are always on a Layer 2 network connected to a local or foreign controller. Note DHCPv6 is not supported in the internal DHCP servers. External DHCP Servers The operating system is designed to appear as a DHCP Relay to the network and as a DHCP server to clients with industry-standard external DHCP servers that support DHCP Relay, which means that each controller appears as a DHCP Relay agent to the DHCP server and as a DHCP server at the virtual IP address to wireless clients. Because the controller captures the client IP address that is obtained from a DHCP server, it maintains the same IP address for that client during intra controller, inter controller, and inter-subnet client roaming. Note External DHCP servers can support DHCPv6. DHCP Assignments You can configure DHCP on a per-interface or per-WLAN basis. We recommend that you use the primary DHCP server address that is assigned to a particular interface. You can assign DHCP servers for individual interfaces. You can configure the management interface, AP-manager interface, and dynamic interface for a primary and secondary DHCP server, and you can configure the service-port interface to enable or disable DHCP servers. You can also define a DHCP server on a WLAN. In this case, the server overrides the DHCP server address on the interface assigned to the WLAN. Security Considerations For enhanced security, we recommend that you require all clients to obtain their IP addresses from a DHCP server. To enforce this requirement, you can configure all WLANs with a DHCP Addr. Assignment Required setting, which disallows client static IP addresses. If DHCP Addr. Assignment Required is selected, clients must obtain an IP address via DHCP. Any client with a static IP address is not allowed on the network. The controller monitors DHCP traffic because it acts as a DHCP proxy for the clients. Note WLANs that support management over wireless must allow management (device-servicing) clients to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 534 OL-28744-01 Configuring DHCP (GUI) If slightly less security is tolerable, you can create WLANs with DHCP Addr. Assignment Required disabled. Clients then have the option of using a static IP address or obtaining an IP address from a designated DHCP server. Note DHCP Addr. Assignment Required is not supported for wired guest LANs. You can create separate WLANs with DHCP Addr. Assignment Required configured as disabled. This is applicable only if DHCP proxy is enabled for the controller. You must not define the primary/secondary configuration DHCP server you should disable the DHCP proxy. These WLANs drop all DHCP requests and force clients to use a static IP address. These WLANs do not support management over wireless connections. Configuring DHCP (GUI) To configure a primary DHCP server for a management, AP-manager, or dynamic interface, see the Configuring Ports and Interfaces chapter. When you want to use the internal DHCP server, you must set the management interface IP address of the controller as the DHCP server IP address. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to assign an interface. The WLANs > Edit (General) page appears. On the General tab, unselect the Status check box and click Apply to disable the WLAN. Reclick the ID number of the WLAN. On the General tab, choose the interface for which you configured a primary DHCP server to be used with this WLAN from the Interface drop-down list. Choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. If you want to define a DHCP server on the WLAN that will override the DHCP server address on the interface assigned to the WLAN, select the DHCP Server Override check box and enter the IP address of the desired DHCP server in the DHCP Server IP Addr text box. The default value for the check box is disabled. Note The preferred method for configuring DHCP is to use the primary DHCP address assigned to a particular interface instead of the DHCP server override. DHCP Server override is applicable only for the default group. If a WLAN has the DHCP server override option enabled and the controller has DHCP proxy enabled, any interface mapped to the WLAN must have a DHCP server IP address or the WLAN must be configured with a DHCP server IP address. Note Note Step 8 If you want to require all clients to obtain their IP addresses from a DHCP server, select the DHCP Addr. Assignment Required check box. When this feature is enabled, any client with a static IP address is not allowed on the network. The default value is disabled. Note DHCP Addr. Assignment Required is not supported for wired guest LANs. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 535 Configuring DHCP (CLI) Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Click Apply. On the General tab, select the Status check box and click Apply to reenable the WLAN. Click Save Configuration. Configuring DHCP (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Disable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan disable wlan-id Specify the interface for which you configured a primary DHCP server to be used with this WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan interface wlan-id interface_name If you want to define a DHCP server on the WLAN that will override the DHCP server address on the interface assigned to the WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan dhcp_server wlan-id dhcp_server_ip_address Note The preferred method for configuring DHCP is to use the primary DHCP address assigned to a particular interface instead of the DHCP server override. If you enable the override, you can use the show wlan command to verify that the DHCP server has been assigned to the WLAN. If a WLAN has the DHCP server override option enabled and the controller has DHCP proxy enabled, any interface mapped to the WLAN must have a DHCP server IP address or the WLAN must be configured with a DHCP server IP address. Note Step 4 Reenable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan-id Debugging DHCP (CLI) Use these commands to debug DHCP:

debug dhcp packet {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of DHCP packets. debug dhcp message {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of DHCP error messages. debug dhcp service-port {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of DHCP packets on the service port. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 536 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 71 Configuring DHCP Scopes Restrictions for Configuring DHCP Scopes, page 537 Information About DHCP Scopes, page 537 Configuring DHCP Scopes (GUI), page 537 Configuring DHCP Scopes (CLI), page 538 Restrictions for Configuring DHCP Scopes You can configure up to 16 DHCP scopes. Information About DHCP Scopes Controllers have built-in DHCP relay agents. However, when you desire network segments that do not have a separate DHCP server, the controllers can have built-in DHCP scopes that assign IP addresses and subnet masks to wireless clients. Typically, one controller can have one or more DHCP scopes that each provide a range of IP addresses. DHCP scopes are needed for internal DHCP to work. Once DHCP is defined on the controller, you can then point the primary DHCP server IP address on the management, AP-manager, and dynamic interfaces to the controllers management interface. Configuring DHCP Scopes (GUI) Step 1 Choose Controller > Internal DHCP Server > DHCP Scope to open the DHCP Scopes page. This page lists any DHCP scopes that have already been configured. Note If you ever want to delete an existing DHCP scope, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that scope and choose Remove. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 537 Configuring DHCP Scopes (CLI) Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Click New to add a new DHCP scope. The DHCP Scope > New page appears. In the Scope Name text box, enter a name for the new DHCP scope. Click Apply. When the DHCP Scopes page reappears, click the name of the new scope. The DHCP Scope > Edit page appears. In the Pool Start Address text box, enter the starting IP address in the range assigned to the clients. Note This pool must be unique for each DHCP scope and must not include the static IP addresses of routers or other servers. In the Pool End Address text box, enter the ending IP address in the range assigned to the clients. Note This pool must be unique for each DHCP scope and must not include the static IP addresses of routers or other servers. In the Network text box, enter the network served by this DHCP scope. This IP address is used by the management interface with Netmask applied, as configured on the Interfaces page. In the Netmask text box, enter the subnet mask assigned to all wireless clients. In the Lease Time text box, enter the amount of time (from 0 to 65536 seconds) that an IP address is granted to a client. In the Default Routers text box, enter the IP address of the optional router connecting the controllers. Each router must include a DHCP forwarding agent, which allows a single controller to serve the clients of multiple controllers. In the DNS Domain Name text box, enter the optional domain name system (DNS) domain name of this DHCP scope for use with one or more DNS servers. In the DNS Servers text box, enter the IP address of the optional DNS server. Each DNS server must be able to update a clients DNS entry to match the IP address assigned by this DHCP scope. In the Netbios Name Servers text box, enter the IP address of the optional Microsoft Network Basic Input Output System

(NetBIOS) name server, such as the Internet Naming Service (WINS) server. From the Status drop-down list, choose Enabled to enable this DHCP scope or choose Disabled to disable it. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Choose DHCP Allocated Leases to see the remaining lease time for wireless clients. The DHCP Allocated Lease page appears, showing the MAC address, IP address, and remaining lease time for the wireless clients. Configuring DHCP Scopes (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Create a new DHCP scope by entering this command:

config dhcp create-scope scope Note If you ever want to delete a DHCP scope, enter this command: config dhcp delete-scope scope. Specify the starting and ending IP address in the range assigned to the clients by entering this command:

config dhcp address-pool scope start end Note This pool must be unique for each DHCP scope and must not include the static IP addresses of routers or other servers. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 538 OL-28744-01 Configuring DHCP Scopes (CLI) Specify the network served by this DHCP scope (the IP address used by the management interface with the Netmask applied) and the subnet mask assigned to all wireless clients by entering this command:

config dhcp network scope network netmask Specify the amount of time (from 0 to 65536 seconds) that an IP address is granted to a client by entering this command:

config dhcp lease scope lease_duration Specify the IP address of the optional router connecting the controllers by entering this command:

config dhcp default-router scope router_1 [router_2] [router_3]

Each router must include a DHCP forwarding agent, which allows a single controller to serve the clients of multiple controllers. Specify the optional domain name system (DNS) domain name of this DHCP scope for use with one or more DNS servers by entering this command:

config dhcp domain scope domain Specify the IP address of the optional DNS server(s) by entering this command:

config dhcp dns-servers scope dns1 [dns2] [dns3]

Each DNS server must be able to update a clients DNS entry to match the IP address assigned by this DHCP scope Specify the IP address of the optional Microsoft Network Basic Input Output System (NetBIOS) name server, such as the Internet Naming Service (WINS) server by entering this command:

config dhcp netbios-name-server scope wins1 [wins2] [wins3]

Enable or disable this DHCP scope by entering this command:

config dhcp {enable | disable} scope Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the list of configured DHCP scopes by entering this command:

show dhcp summary Information similar to the following appears:

No No Enabled Address Range 0.0.0.0 -> 0.0.0.0 Scope Name Scope 1 Scope 2 Display the DHCP information for a particular scope by entering this command:

show dhcp scope Information similar to the following appears:

0.0.0.0 -> 0.0.0.0 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Enabled....................................... No Lease Time.................................... 0 Pool Start.................................... 0.0.0.0 Pool End...................................... 0.0.0.0 Network....................................... 0.0.0.0 Netmask....................................... 0.0.0.0 Default Routers............................... 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 DNS Domain.................................... DNS........................................... 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Netbios Name Servers.......................... 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 539 Configuring DHCP Scopes (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 540 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 72 Configuring MAC Filtering for WLANs Restrictions for MAC Filtering, page 541 Information About MAC Filtering of WLANs, page 541 Enabling MAC Filtering, page 541 Restrictions for MAC Filtering MAC filtering cannot be configured for Guest LANs. Information About MAC Filtering of WLANs When you use MAC filtering for client or administrator authorization, you need to enable it at the WLAN level first. If you plan to use local MAC address filtering for any WLAN, use the commands in this section to configure MAC filtering for a WLAN. Enabling MAC Filtering Use these commands to enable MAC filtering on a WLAN:

Enable MAC filtering by entering the config wlan mac-filtering enable wlan_id command. Verify that you have MAC filtering enabled for the WLAN by entering the show wlan command. When you enable MAC filtering, only the MAC addresses that you add to the WLAN are allowed to join the WLAN. MAC addresses that have not been added are not allowed to join the WLAN. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 541 Enabling MAC Filtering Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 542 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 73 Configuring Local MAC Filters Prerequisites for Configuring Local MAC Filters, page 543 Information About Local MAC Filters, page 543 Configuring Local MAC Filters (CLI), page 543 Prerequisites for Configuring Local MAC Filters You must have AAA enabled on the WLAN to override the interface name. Information About Local MAC Filters Controllers have built-in MAC filtering capability, similar to that provided by a RADIUS authorization server. Configuring Local MAC Filters (CLI) Create a MAC filter entry on the controller by entering the config macfilter add mac_addr wlan_id

[interface_name] [description] [IP_addr] command. The following parameters are optional:

mac_addrMAC address of the client. wlan_idWLAN id on which the client is associating. interface_nameThe name of the interface. This interface name is used to override the interface configured to the WLAN. descriptionA brief description of the interface in double quotes (for example, Interface1). IP_addrThe IP address which is used for a passive client with the MAC address specified by the mac addr value above. Assign an IP address to an existing MAC filter entry, if one was not assigned in the config macfilter add command by entering the config macfilter ip-address mac_addr IP_addr command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 543 Configuring Local MAC Filters (CLI) Verify that MAC addresses are assigned to the WLAN by entering the show macfilter command. Note If MAC filtering is configured, the controller tries to authenticate the wireless clients using the RADIUS servers first. Local MAC filtering is attempted only if no RADIUS servers are found, either because the RADIUS servers timed out or no RADIUS servers were configured. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 544 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 74 Configuring Timeouts Configuring a Timeout for Disabled Clients, page 545 Configuring Session Timeout, page 545 Configuring the User Idle Timeout, page 547 Configuring a Timeout for Disabled Clients Information About Configuring a Timeout for Disabled Clients You can configure a timeout for disabled clients. Clients who fail to authenticate three times when attempting to associate are automatically disabled from further association attempts. After the timeout period expires, the client is allowed to retry authentication until it associates or fails authentication and is excluded again. Use these commands to configure a timeout for disabled clients. Configuring Timeout for Disabled Clients (CLI) Configure the timeout for disabled clients by entering the config wlan exclusionlist wlan_id timeout command. The valid timeout range is 1 to 2147483647 seconds. A value of 0 permanently disables the client. Verify the current timeout by entering the show wlan command. Configuring Session Timeout Information About Session Timeouts You can configure a WLAN with a session timeout. The session timeout is the maximum time for a client session to remain active before requiring reauthorization. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 545 Configuring Session Timeout Configuring a Session Timeout (GUI) Configurable session timeout range is:

300-86400 for 802.1x. 0-65535 for all other security types. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Note If you configure session timeout as 0, it means disabling session-timeout, in case of open system, and 86400 seconds for all other system types. Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to assign a session timeout. When the WLANs > Edit page appears, choose the Advanced tab. The WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page appears. Select the Enable Session Timeout check box to configure a session timeout for this WLAN. Not selecting the checkbox is equal to setting it to 0, which is the maximum value for a session timeout for each session type. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring a Session Timeout (CLI) Configure a session timeout for wireless clients on a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan session-timeout wlan_id timeout The default value is 1800 seconds for the following Layer 2 security types: 802.1X, Static WEP+802.1X, WPA+WPA2 with 802.1X, CCKM, or 802.1X+CCKM authentication key management and 0 seconds for all other Layer 2 security types (Open WLAN/CKIP/Static WEP). A value of 0 is equivalent to no timeout. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the current session timeout value for a WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 9 Profile Name..................................... test12 Network Name (SSID)........................... test12

... Number of Active Clients......................... 0 Exclusionlist Timeout............................ 60 seconds Session Timeout............................... 1800 seconds Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 546 OL-28744-01 Configuring the User Idle Timeout

... Configuring the User Idle Timeout Information About the User Idle Timeout Per WLAN This is an enhancement to the present implementation of the user idle timeout feature, which is applicable to all WLAN profiles on the controller. With this enhancement, you can configure a user idle timeout for an individual WLAN profile. This user idle timeout is applicable to all the clients that belong to this WLAN profile. You can also configure a threshold triggered timeout where if a client has not sent a threshold quota of data within the specified user idle timeout, the client is considered to be inactive and is deauthenticated. If the data sent by the client is more than the threshold quota specified within the user idle timeout, the client is considered to be active and the controller refreshes for another timeout period. If the threshold quota is exhausted within the timeout period, the timeout period is refreshed. Suppose the user idle timeout is specified as 120 seconds and the user idle threshold is specified as 10 megabytes. After a period of 120 seconds, if the client has not sent 10 megabytes of data, the client is considered to be inactive and is deauthenticated. If the client has exhausted 10 megabytes within 120 seconds, the timeout period is refreshed. Configuring Per-WLAN User Idle Timeout (CLI) Configure user idle timeout for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan usertimeout timeout-in-seconds wlan-id Configure user idle threshold for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan user-idle-threshold value-in-bytes wlan-id OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 547 Configuring the User Idle Timeout Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 548 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 75 Configuring the DTIM Period Information About DTIM Period, page 549 Configuring the DTIM Period (GUI), page 550 Configuring the DTIM Period (CLI), page 550 Information About DTIM Period In the 802.11 networks, lightweight access points broadcast a beacon at regular intervals, which coincides with the Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM). After the access point broadcasts the beacon, it transmits any buffered broadcast and multicast frames based on the value set for the DTIM period. This feature allows power-saving clients to wake up at the appropriate time if they are expecting broadcast or multicast data. Typically, the DTIM value is set to 1 (to transmit broadcast and multicast frames after every beacon) or 2 (to transmit after every other beacon). For instance, if the beacon period of the 802.11 network is 100 ms and the DTIM value is set to 1, the access point transmits buffered broadcast and multicast frames 10 times per second. If the beacon period is 100 ms and the DTIM value is set to 2, the access point transmits buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5 times per second. Either of these settings are suitable for applications, including Voice Over IP (VoIP), that expect frequent broadcast and multicast frames. However, the DTIM value can be set as high as 255 (to transmit broadcast and multicast frames after every 255th beacon) if all 802.11 clients have power save enabled. Because the clients have to listen only when the DTIM period is reached, they can be set to listen for broadcasts and multicasts less frequently which results in a longer battery life. For example, if the beacon period is 100 ms and you set the DTIM value to 100, the access point transmits buffered broadcast and multicast frames once every 10 seconds. This rate allows the power-saving clients to sleep longer before they have to wake up and listen for broadcasts and multicasts, which results in a longer battery life. Note A beacon period, which is specified in milliseconds on the controller, is converted internally by the software to 802.11 Time Units (TUs), where 1 TU = 1.024 milliseconds. On Ciscos 802.11n access points, this value is rounded to the nearest multiple of 17 TUs. For example, a configured beacon period of 100 ms results in an actual beacon period of 104 ms. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 549 Configuring the DTIM Period (GUI) Many applications cannot tolerate a long time between broadcast and multicast messages, which results in poor protocol and application performance. We recommend that you set a low DTIM value for 802.11 networks that support such clients. You can configure the DTIM period for the 802.11 radio networks on specific WLANs. For example, you might want to set different DTIM values for voice and data WLANs. Configuring the DTIM Period (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure the DTIM period. Unselect the Status check box to disable the WLAN. Click Apply. Choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. Under DTIM Period, enter a value between 1 and 255 (inclusive) in the 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n text boxes. The default value is 1 (transmit broadcast and multicast frames after every beacon). Click Apply. Choose the General tab to open the WLANs > Edit (General) page. Select the Status check box to reenable the WLAN. Click Save Configuration. Configuring the DTIM Period (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 550 Disable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan disable wlan_id Configure the DTIM period for a 802.11 radio network on a specific WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan dtim {802.11a | 802.11b} dtim wlan_id where dtim is a value between 1 and 255 (inclusive). The default value is 1 (transmit broadcast and multicast frames after every beacon). Reenable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan_id Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Verify the DTIM period by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 76 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking Restrictions for Peer-to-Peer Blocking, page 551 Information About Peer-to-Peer Blocking, page 551 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (GUI), page 552 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (CLI), page 552 Restrictions for Peer-to-Peer Blocking In controller software releases prior to 4.2, the controller forwards Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) requests upstream (just like all other traffic). In controller software release 4.2 or later releases, ARP requests are directed according to the behavior set for peer-to-peer blocking. Peer-to-peer blocking does not apply to multicast traffic. If you upgrade to controller software release 4.2 or later releases from a previous release that supports global peer-to-peer blocking, each WLAN is configured with the peer-to-peer blocking action of forwarding traffic to the upstream VLAN. In FlexConnect, solution peer-to-peer blocking configuration cannot be applied only to a particular FlexConnect AP or a subset of APs. It is applied to all FlexConnect APs that broadcast the SSID. Unified solution for central switching clients supports peer-to-peer upstream-forward. However, this is not supported in the FlexConnect solution. This is treated as peer-to-peer drop and client packets are dropped. Unified solution for central switching clients supports peer-to-peer blocking for clients associated with different APs. However, this solution targets only clients connected to the same AP. FlexConnect ACLs can be used as a workaround for this limitation. Information About Peer-to-Peer Blocking Peer-to-peer blocking is applied to individual WLANs, and each client inherits the peer-to-peer blocking setting of the WLAN to which it is associated. Peer-to-Peer enables you to have more control over how traffic is directed. For example, you can choose to have traffic bridged locally within the controller, dropped by the controller, or forwarded to the upstream VLAN. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 551 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (GUI) Peer-to-peer blocking is supported for clients that are associated with the local switching WLAN. Per WLAN, peer-to-peer configuration is pushed by the controller to FlexConnect AP. In controller software releases prior to 4.2, peer-to-peer blocking is applied globally to all clients on all WLANs and causes traffic between two clients on the same VLAN to be transferred to the upstream VLAN rather than being bridged by the controller. This behavior usually results in traffic being dropped at the upstream switch because switches do not forward packets out the same port on which they are received. Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure peer-to-peer blocking. Choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. Choose one of the following options from the P2P Blocking drop-down list:

DisabledDisables peer-to-peer blocking and bridges traffic locally within the controller whenever possible. This is the default value. Note Traffic is never bridged across VLANs in the controller. DropCauses the controller to discard the packets. Forward-UpStreamCauses the packets to be forwarded on the upstream VLAN. The device above the controller decides what action to take regarding the packets. Note To enable peer-to-peer blocking on a WLAN configured for FlexConnect local switching, select Drop from the P2P Blocking drop-down list and select the FlexConnect Local Switching check box. Step 5 Step 6 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 552 Configure a WLAN for peer-to-peer blocking by entering this command:

config wlan peer-blocking {disable | drop | forward-upstream} wlan_id Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the status of peer-to-peer blocking for a WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (CLI) Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 1 Profile Name..................................... test Network Name (SSID).............................. test Status........................................... Enabled

... .. .. Peer-to-Peer Blocking Action..................... Disabled Radio Policy..................................... All Local EAP Authentication...................... Disabled OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 553 Configuring Peer-to-Peer Blocking (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 554 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 77 Configuring Layer2 Security Prerequisites for Layer 2 Security, page 555 Configuring Static WEP Keys (CLI), page 556 Configuring Dynamic 802.1X Keys and Authorization (CLI), page 556 Configuring 802.11r BSS Fast Transition, page 557 Configuring MAC Authentication Failover to 802.1X Authentication, page 562 Configuring 802.11w, page 563 Prerequisites for Layer 2 Security WLANs with the same SSID must have unique Layer 2 security policies so that clients can make a WLAN selection based on information advertised in beacon and probe responses. The available Layer 2 security policies are as follows:

None (open WLAN) Static WEP or 802.1X Note Because static WEP and 802.1X are both advertised by the same bit in beacon and probe responses, they cannot be differentiated by clients. Therefore, they cannot both be used by multiple WLANs with the same SSID. CKIP WPA/WPA2 Note Although WPA and WPA2 cannot be used by multiple WLANs with the same SSID, you can configure two WLANs with the same SSID with WPA/TKIP with PSK and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA )/Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) with 802.1X, or with WPA/TKIP with 802.1X or WPA/AES with 802.1X. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 555 Configuring Static WEP Keys (CLI) Configuring Static WEP Keys (CLI) Controllers can control static WEP keys across access points. Use these commands to configure static WEP for WLANs:

Disable the 802.1X encryption by entering this command:

config wlan security 802.1X disable wlan_id Configure 40/64-bit or 104/128-bit WEP keys by entering this command:

config wlan security static-wep-key encryption wlan_id {40 | 104} {hex | ascii} key key_index Use the 40 or 104 option to specify 40/64-bit or 104/128-bit encryption. The default setting is 104/128. Use the hex or ascii option to specify the character format for the WEP key. Enter 10 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, or A-F) or five printable ASCII characters for 40-bit/64-bit WEP keys or enter 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters for 104-bit/128-bit keys. Enter a key index (sometimes called a key slot). The default value is 0, which corresponds to a key index of 1; the valid values are 0 to 3 (key index of 1 to 4). Configuring Dynamic 802.1X Keys and Authorization (CLI) Controllers can control 802.1X dynamic WEP keys using Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) across access points and support 802.1X dynamic key settings for WLANs. Note To use LEAP with lightweight access points and wireless clients, make sure to choose Cisco-Aironet as the RADIUS server type when configuring the CiscoSecure Access Control Server (ACS). Check the security settings of each WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id The default security setting for new WLANs is 802.1X with dynamic keys enabled. To maintain robust Layer 2 security, leave 802.1X configured on your WLANs. Disable or enable the 802.1X authentication by entering this command:

config wlan security 802.1X {enable | disable} wlan_id After you enable 802.1X authentication, the controller sends EAP authentication packets between the wireless client and the authentication server. This command allows all EAP-type packets to be sent to and from the controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 556 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11r BSS Fast Transition Note The controller performs both web authentication and 802.1X authentication in the same WLAN. The clients are initially authenticated with 802.1X. After a successful authentication, the client must provide the web authentication credentials. After a successful web authentication, the client is moved to the run state. Change the 802.1X encryption level for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security 802.1X encryption wlan_id [0 | 40 | 104]

Use the 0 option to specify no 802.1X encryption. Use the 40 option to specify 40/64-bit encryption. Use the 104 option to specify 104/128-bit encryption. (This is the default encryption setting.) Configuring 802.11r BSS Fast Transition Restrictions for 802.11r Fast Transition This feature is not supported on Mesh access points. For the access points in FlexConnect mode:

802.11r Fast Transition is supported only in central and locally switched WLANs. This feature is not supported for the WLANs enabled for local authentication. This feature is not supported on Linux-based APs such as Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Points. 802.11r client association is not supported on access points in standalone mode. 802.11r fast roaming is not supported on access points in standalone mode. 802.11r fast roaming between local authentication and central authentication WLAN is not supported. 802.11r fast roaming is not supported if the client uses Over-the-DS preauthentication in standalone mode. EAP LEAP method is not supported. WAN link latency prevents association time to a maximum of 2 seconds. The service from standalone AP to client is only supported until the session timer expires. TSpec is not supported for 802.11r fast roaming. Therefore, RIC IE handling is not supported. If WAN link latency exists, fast roaming is also delayed. Voice or data maximum latency should be verified. The controller handles 802.11r Fast Transition authentication request during roaming for both Over-the-Air and Over-the-DS methods. This feature is supported only on open and WPA2 configured WLANs. Legacy clients cannot associate with a WLAN that has 802.11r enabled if the driver of the supplicant that is responsible for parsing the Robust Security Network Information Exchange (RSN IE) is old and OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 557 Configuring 802.11r BSS Fast Transition not aware of the additional AKM suites in the IE. Due to this limitation, clients cannot send association requests to WLANs. These clients, however, can still associate with non-802.11r WLANs. Clients that are 802.11r capable can associate as 802.11i clients on WLANs that have both 802.11i and 802.11r Authentication Key Management Suites enabled. The workaround is to enable or upgrade the driver of the legacy clients to work with the new 802.11r AKMs, after which the legacy clients can successfully associate with 802.11r enabled WLANs. Another workaround is to have two SSIDs with the same name but with different security settings (FT and non-FT). Fast Transition resource request protocol is not supported because clients do not support this protocol. Also, the resource request protocol is an optional protocol. To avoid any Denial of Service (DoS) attack, each controller allows a maximum of three Fast Transition handshakes with different APs. Information About 802.11r Fast Transition 802.11r, which is the IEEE standard for fast roaming, introduces a new concept of roaming where the initial handshake with the new AP is done even before the client roams to the target AP, which is called Fast Transition

(FT). The initial handshake allows the client and APs to do the Pairwise Transient Key (PTK) calculation in advance. These PTK keys are applied to the client and AP after the client does the reassociation request or response exchange with new target AP. 802.11r provides two methods of roaming:

Over-the-Air Over-the-DS (Distribution System) The FT key hierarchy is designed to allow clients to make fast BSS transitions between APs without requiring reauthentication at every AP. WLAN configuration contains a new Authenticated Key Management (AKM) type called FT (Fast Transition). How a Client Roams For a client to move from its current AP to a target AP using the FT protocols, the message exchanges are performed using one of the following two methods:

Over-the-AirThe client communicates directly with the target AP using IEEE 802.11 authentication with the FT authentication algorithm. Over-the-DSThe client communicates with the target AP through the current AP. The communication between the client and the target AP is carried in FT action frames between the client and the current AP and is then sent through the controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 558 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11r BSS Fast Transition This figure shows the sequence of message exchanges that occur when Over the Air client roaming is configured. Figure 44: Message Exchanges when Over the Air client roaming is configured OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 559 Configuring 802.11r BSS Fast Transition This figure shows the sequence of message exchanges that occur when Over the DS client roaming is configured. Figure 45: Message Exchanges when Over the DS client roaming is configured Configuring 802.11r Fast Transition (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the WLAN ID to open the WLANs > Edit page. Choose the Security > Layer 2 tab. From the Layer 2 Security drop-down list, choose WPA+WPA2. The Authentication Key Management parameters for Fast Transition appear. Select or unselect the Fast Transition check box to enable or disable Fast Transition on the WLAN. Select or unselect the Over the DS check box to enable or disable Fast Transition over a distributed system. This option is available only if you enable Fast Transition. In the Reassociation Timeout box, enter the number of seconds after which the reassociation attempt of a client to an AP should time out. The valid range is 1 to 100 seconds. This option is available only if you enable Fast Transition. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 560 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11r BSS Fast Transition Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Under Authentication Key Management, choose between FT 802.1X or FT PSK. Select or unselect the corresponding check boxes to enable or disable the keys. If you select the FT PSK check box, then, from the PSK Format drop-down list, choose ASCII or Hex and enter the key value. From the WPA gtk-randomize State drop-down list, choose Enable or Disable to configure the WPA group temporal key (GTK) randomize state. Click Apply to save your settings. Configuring 802.11r Fast Transition (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 To enable or disable 802.11r fast transition parameters, use the config wlan security ft {enable | disable} wlan-id command. By default, the fast transition is disabled. To enable or disable 802.11r fast transition parameters over a distributed system, use the config wlan security ft over-the-ds {enable | disable} wlan-id command. By default, the fast transition over a distributed system is disabled. To enable or disable the authentication key management for fast transition using preshared keys (PSK), use the config wlan security wpa akm ft-psk {enable | disable} wlan-id command. By default, the authentication key management using PSK is disabled. To enable or disable the authentication key management for fast transition using 802.1X, use the config wlan security wpa akm ft-802.1X {enable | disable} wlan-id command. By default, the authentication key management using 802.1X is disabled. To enable or disable 802.11r fast transition reassociation timeout, use the config wlan security ft reassociation-timeouttimeout-in-seconds wlan-id command. The valid range is 1 to 100 seconds. The default value of reassociation timeout is 20 seconds. To enable or disable the authentication key management for fast transition over a distributed system, use the config wlan security wpa akm ft over-the-ds {enable | disable} wlan-id command. By default, the authentication key management for fast transition over a distributed system is enabled. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 To view the fast transition configuration on a client, use the show client detailed client-mac command. To view the fast transition configuration on a WLAN, use the show wlan wlan-id command. To enable or disable debugging of fast transition events, use the debug ft events {enable | disable} command. To enable or disable debugging of key generation for fast transition, use the debug ft keys {enable | disable} command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 561 Configuring MAC Authentication Failover to 802.1X Authentication Troubleshooting 802.11r BSS Fast Transition Symptom Non-802.11r legacy clients are no longer connecting. When configuring WLAN, the FT setup options are not shown. 802.11r clients appear to reauthenticate when they do a Layer 2 roam to a new controller. Resolution Check if the WLAN has FT enabled. If so, non-FT WLAN will need to be created. Check if WPA2 is being used (802.1x / PSK). FT is supported only on WPA2 and OPEN SSIDs. Check if the reassociation timeout has been lowered from the default of 20 by navigating to WLANs >

WLAN Name > Security > Layer 2 on the controller GUI. Configuring MAC Authentication Failover to 802.1X Authentication You can configure the controller to start 802.1X authentication when MAC authentication with static WEP for the client fails. If the RADIUS server rejects an access request from a client instead of deauthenticating the client, the controller can force the client to undergo an 802.1X authentication. If the client fails the 802.1X authentication too, then the client is deauthenticated. If MAC authentication is successful and the client requests for an 802.1X authentication, the client has to pass the 802.1X authentication to be allowed to send data traffic. If the client does not choose an 802.1X authentication, the client is declared to be authenticated if the client passes the MAC authentication. Configuring MAC Authentication Failover to 802.1x Authentication (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose WLANs > WLAN ID to open the WLANs > Edit page. In the Security tab, click the Layer 2 tab. Select the MAC Filtering check box. Select the Mac Auth or Dot1x check box. Configuring MAC Authentication Failover to 802.1X Authentication (CLI) To configure MAC authentication failover to 802.1X authentication, enter this command:

config wlan security 802.1X on-macfilter-failure {enable | disable} wlan-id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 562 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11w Configuring 802.11w Restrictions for 802.11w Cisco's legacy Management Frame Protection is not related to the 802.11w standard that is implemented in the 7.4 release. The 802.11w standard is supported on all 802.11n capable APs except those that are configured for FlexConnect operation. The 802.11w standard is supported on the following Cisco Wireless LAN Controller model series: 2500, 5500, 8500, and WiSM2. The 802.11w standard is not supported on the following Cisco Wireless LAN Controller models: Flex 7500 and Virtual Wireless LAN Controller. When 802.11w is set to optional and the keys are set, the AKM suite still shows 802.11w as disabled;

this is a Wi-Fi limitation. 802.11w cannot be applied on an open WLAN, WEP-encrypted WLAN, or a TKIP-encrypted WLAN. The WLAN on which 802.11w is configured must have either WPA2-PSK or WPA2-802.1x security configured. Information About 802.11w Wi-Fi is a broadcast medium that enables any device to eavesdrop and participate either as a legitimate or rogue device. Control and management frames such as authentication/deauthentication, association/disassociation, beacons, and probes are used by wireless clients to select an AP and to initiate a session for network services. Unlike data traffic which can be encrypted to provide a level of confidentiality, these frames must be heard and understood by all clients and therefore must be transmitted as open or unencrypted. While these frames cannot be encrypted, they must be protected from forgery to protect the wireless medium from attacks. For example, an attacker could spoof management frames from an AP to tear down a session between a client and AP. The 802.11w standard for Management Frame Protection is implemented in the 7.4 release. The 802.11w protocol applies only to a set of robust management frames that are protected by the Management Frame Protection (PMF) service. These include Disassociation, Deauthentication, and Robust Action frames. Management frames that are considered as robust action and therefore protected are the following:

Spectrum Management QoS DLS Block Ack Radio Measurement Fast BSS Transition OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 563 Configuring 802.11w SA Query Protected Dual of Public Action Vendor-specific Protected When 802.11w is implemented in the wireless medium, the following occur:

Client protection is added by the AP adding cryptographic protection (by including the MIC information element) to deauthentication and disassociation frames preventing them from being spoofed in a DOS attack. Infrastructure protection is added by adding a Security Association (SA) teardown protection mechanism consisting of an Association Comeback Time and an SA-Query procedure preventing spoofed association request from disconnecting an already connected client. Configuring 802.11w (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose WLANs > WLAN ID to open the WLANs > Edit page. In the Security tab, choose the Layer 2 security tab. From the Layer 2 Security drop-down list, choose WPA+WPA2. The 802.11w IGTK Key is derived using the 4-way handshake, which means that it can only be used on WLANs that are configured for WPA2 security at Layer 2. Note WPA2 is mandatory and encryption type must be AES. TKIP is not valid. Step 4 Choose the PMF state from the drop-down list The following options are available:

DisabledDisables 802.11w MFP protection on a WLAN OptionalTo be used if the client supports 802.11w. RequiredEnsures that the clients that do not support 802.11w cannot associate with the WLAN. Step 5 Step 6 If you choose the PMF state as either Optional or Required, do the following:

a) In the Comeback Timer box, enter the association comeback interval in milliseconds. It is the time within which the access point reassociates with the client after a valid security association. b) In the SA Query Timeout box, enter the maximum time before an Security Association (SA) query times out. In the Authentication Key Management section, follow these steps:

a) Select or unselect the PMF 802.1X check box to configure the 802.1X authentication for the protection of management frames. b) Select or unselect the PMF PSK check box to configure the preshared keys for PMF. Choose the PSK format as either ASCII or Hexadecimal and enter the PSK. Step 7 Step 8 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 564 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11w Configuring 802.11w (CLI) Configure the 802.1X authentication for PMF by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa akm pmf 802.1x {enable | disable} wlan-id Configure the preshared key support for PMF by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa akm pmf psk {enable | disable} wlan-id If not done, configure a preshared key for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa akm psk set-key {ascii | hex} psk wlan-id Configure protected management frames by entering this command:

config wlan security pmf {disable | optional | required} wlan-id Configure the association comeback time settings by entering this command:

config wlan security pmf association-comeback timeout-in-seconds wlan-id Configure the SA query retry timeout settings by entering this command:

config wlan security pmf saquery-retrytimeout timeout-in-milliseconds wlan-id See the 802.11w configuration status for a WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan-id Configure the debugging of PMF by entering this command:

debug pmf events {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 565 Configuring 802.11w Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 566 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 78 Configuring a WLAN for Both Static and Dynamic WEP Restrictions for Configuring Static and Dynamic WEP, page 567 Information About WLAN for Both Static and Dynamic WEP, page 567 Configuring WPA1 +WPA2, page 569 Restrictions for Configuring Static and Dynamic WEP The OEAP 600 series does not support fast roaming for clients. Dual mode voice clients will experience reduced call quality when they roam between the two spectrums on OEAP602 access point. We recommend that you configure voice devices to only connect on one band, either 2.4 GHz or 5.0 GHz. The controller software supports CCX versions 1 through 5. CCX support is enabled automatically for every WLAN on the controller and cannot be disabled. The controller stores the CCX version of the client in its client database and uses it to limit client functionality. Clients must support CCXv4 or v5 in order to use CCKM. For more information about CCX, see the Configuring Cisco Client Extensions section. In a unified architecture where multiple VLAN clients are supported for a WGB, you also need to configure encryption cipher suite and WEP keys globally, when the WEP encryption is enabled on the WGB. Otherwise, multicast traffic for wired VLAN clients fail. Information About WLAN for Both Static and Dynamic WEP You can configure up to four WLANs to support static WEP keys, and you can also configure dynamic WEP on any of these static-WEP WLANs. Follow these guidelines when configuring a WLAN for both static and dynamic WEP:

The static WEP key and the dynamic WEP key must be the same length. When you configure both static and dynamic WEP as the Layer 2 security policy, no other security policies can be specified. That is, you cannot configure web authentication. However, when you configure either static or dynamic WEP as the Layer 2 security policy, you can configure web authentication. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 567 Information About WLAN for Both Static and Dynamic WEP WPA1 and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA or WPA1) and WPA2 are standards-based security solutions from the Wi-Fi Alliance that provide data protection and access control for wireless LAN systems. WPA1 is compatible with the IEEE 802.11i standard but was implemented prior to the standards ratification; WPA2 is the Wi-Fi Alliance's implementation of the ratified IEEE 802.11i standard. By default, WPA1 uses Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) and message integrity check (MIC) for data protection while WPA2 uses the stronger Advanced Encryption Standard encryption algorithm using Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code Protocol (AES-CCMP). Both WPA1 and WPA2 use 802.1X for authenticated key management by default. However, these options are also available:

802.1XThe standard for wireless LAN security, as defined by IEEE, is called 802.1X for 802.11, or simply 802.1X. An access point that supports 802.1X acts as the interface between a wireless client and an authentication server, such as a RADIUS server, to which the access point communicates over the wired network. If 802.1X is selected, only 802.1X clients are supported. PSKWhen you choose PSK (also known as WPA preshared key or WPA passphrase), you need to configure a preshared key (or a passphrase). This key is used as the pairwise master key (PMK) between the clients and the authentication server. CCKMCisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM) uses a fast rekeying technique that enables clients to roam from one access point to another without going through the controller, typically in under 150 milliseconds (ms). CCKM reduces the time required by the client to mutually authenticate with the new access point and derive a new session key during reassociation. CCKM fast secure roaming ensures that there is no perceptible delay in time-sensitive applications such as wireless Voice over IP (VoIP), enterprise resource planning (ERP), or Citrix-based solutions. CCKM is a CCXv4-compliant feature. If CCKM is selected, only CCKM clients are supported. When CCKM is enabled, the behavior of access points differs from the controller's for fast roaming in the following ways:

If an association request sent by a client has CCKM enabled in a Robust Secure Network Information Element (RSN IE) but CCKM IE is not encoded and only PMKID is encoded in RSN IE, then the controller does not do a full authentication. Instead, the controller validates the PMKID and does a four-way handshake. If an association request sent by a client has CCKM enabled in RSN IE but CCKM IE is not encoded and only PMKID is encoded in RSN IE, then AP does a full authentication. The access point does not use PMKID sent with the association request when CCKM is enabled in RSN IE. 802.1X+CCKMDuring normal operation, 802.1X-enabled clients mutually authenticate with a new access point by performing a complete 802.1X authentication, including communication with the main RADIUS server. However, when you configure your WLAN for 802.1X and CCKM fast secure roaming, CCKM-enabled clients securely roam from one access point to another without the need to reauthenticate to the RADIUS server. 802.1X+CCKM is considered optional CCKM because both CCKM and non-CCKM clients are supported when this option is selected. On a single WLAN, you can allow WPA1, WPA2, and 802.1X/PSK/CCKM/802.1X+CCKM clients to join. All of the access points on such a WLAN advertise WPA1, WPA2, and 802.1X/PSK/CCKM/ 802.1X+CCKM information elements in their beacons and probe responses. When you enable WPA1 and/or WPA2, you can also enable one or two ciphers, or cryptographic algorithms, designed to protect data traffic. Specifically, you can enable AES and/or TKIP data encryption for WPA1 and/or WPA2. TKIP is the default value for WPA1, and AES is the default value for WPA2. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 568 OL-28744-01 Configuring WPA1 +WPA2 Configuring WPA1 +WPA2 Configuring WPA1+WPA2 (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the desired WLAN to open the WLANs > Edit page. Choose the Security and Layer 2 tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 2) page. Choose WPA+WPA2 from the Layer 2 Security drop-down list. Under WPA+WPA2 Parameters, select the WPA Policy check box to enable WPA1, select the WPA2 Policy check box to enable WPA2, or select both check boxes to enable both WPA1 and WPA2. Note The default value is disabled for both WPA1 and WPA2. If you leave both WPA1 and WPA2 disabled, the access points advertise in their beacons and probe responses information elements only for the authentication key management method that you choose in Step 7. Select the AES check box to enable AES data encryption or the TKIP check box to enable TKIP data encryption for WPA1, WPA2, or both. The default values are TKIP for WPA1 and AES for WPA2. Choose one of the following key management methods from the Auth Key Mgmt drop-down list: 802.1X, CCKM, PSK, or 802.1X+CCKM. Note Cisco OEAP 600 does not support CCKM. You must choose either 802.1X or PSK. For Cisco OEAP 600, the TKIP and AES security encryption settings must be identical for WPA and WPA2. Note If you chose PSK in Step 7, choose ASCII or HEX from the PSK Format drop-down list and then enter a preshared key in the blank text box. WPA preshared keys must contain 8 to 63 ASCII text characters or 64 hexadecimal characters. Note The PSK parameter is a set-only parameter. The value set for the PSK key is not visible to the user for security reasons. For example, if you selected HEX as the key format when setting the PSK key, and later when you view the parameters of this WLAN, the value shown is the default value. The default is ASCII. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring WPA1+WPA2 (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Disable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan disable wlan_id Enable or disable WPA for the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa {enable | disable} wlan_id Enable or disable WPA1 for the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa wpa1 {enable | disable} wlan_id Step 4 Enable or disable WPA2 for the WLAN by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 569 Configuring WPA1 +WPA2 config wlan security wpa wpa2 {enable | disable} wlan_id Step 5 Enable or disable AES or TKIP data encryption for WPA1 or WPA2 by entering one of these commands:

config wlan security wpa wpa1 ciphers {aes | tkip} {enable | disable} wlan_id config wlan security wpa wpa2 ciphers {aes | tkip} {enable | disable} wlan_id Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 The default values are TKIP for WPA1 and AES for WPA2. When you have VLAN configuration on WGB, you need to configure the encryption cipher mode and keys for a particular VLAN, for example, encryption vlan 80 mode ciphers tkip. Then, you need configure the encryption cipher mode globally on the multicast interface by entering the following command: encryption mode ciphers tkip. Enable or disable 802.1X, PSK, or CCKM authenticated key management by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa akm {802.1X | psk | cckm} {enable | disable} wlan_id The default value is 802.1X. If you enabled PSK in Step 6, enter this command to specify a preshared key:

config wlan security wpa akm psk set-key {ascii | hex} psk-key wlan_id WPA preshared keys must contain 8 to 63 ASCII text characters or 64 hexadecimal characters. Enable or disable authentication key management suite for fast transition by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa akm ft {802.1X | psk} {enable | disable} wlan_id Note You can now choose between the PSK and the fast transition PSK as the AKM suite. Enable or disable randomization of group temporal keys (GTK) between AP and clients by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa gtk-random {enable | disable} wlan_id If you enabled WPA2 with 802.1X authenticated key management or WPA1 or WPA2 with CCKM authenticated key management, the PMK cache lifetime timer is used to trigger reauthentication with the client when necessary. The timer is based on the timeout value received from the AAA server or the WLAN session timeout setting. To see the amount of time remaining before the timer expires, enter this command:

show pmk-cache all If you enabled WPA2 with 802.1X authenticated key management, the controller supports both opportunistic PMKID caching and sticky (or non-opportunistic) PMKID caching. In sticky PMKID caching (SKC), the client stores multiple PMKIDs, a different PMKID for every AP it associates with. Opportunistic PMKID caching (OKC) stores only one PMKID per client. By default, the controller supports OKC. Step 11 Step 12 Enable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan_id Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 570 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 79 Configuring Sticky Key Caching Information About Sticky Key Caching, page 571 Restrictions for Sticky Key Caching, page 571 Configuring Sticky Key Caching (CLI), page 572 Information About Sticky Key Caching The controller supports sticky key caching (SKC). With sticky key caching, the client receives and stores a different PMKID for every AP it associates with. The APs also maintain a database of the PMKID issued to the client. In SKC, the client stores each Pairwise Master Key ID (PMKID) against a Pairwise Master Key Security Association (PMKSA). When a client finds an AP for which it has the PMKSA, it sends the PMKID in the association request to the AP. If the PMKSA is alive in the AP, the AP provides support for fast roaming. In SKC, full authentication is done on each new AP to which the client associates and the client must keep the PMKSA associated with all APs. For SKC, PMKSA is a per AP cache that the client stores and PMKSA is precalculated based on the BSSID of the new AP. Restrictions for Sticky Key Caching The controller supports SKC for up to eight APs per client. If a client roams to more than 8 APs per session, the old APs are removed to store the newly cached entries when the client roams. We recommend that you do not use SKC for large scale deployments. SKC works only on WPA2-enabled WLANs. SKC does not work across controllers in a mobility group. SKC works only on local mode APs. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 571 Configuring Sticky Key Caching (CLI) Configuring Sticky Key Caching (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Disable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan disable wlan_id Enable sticky key caching by entering this command:

config wlan security wpa wpa2 cache sticky enable wlan_id By default, SKC is disabled and opportunistic key caching (OKC) is enabled. Note SKC works only on WPA2 enabled WLANs. You can check if SKC is enabled by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 2 Profile Name..................................... new Network Name (SSID).............................. new Status........................................... Disabled MAC Filtering.................................... Disabled Security 802.11 Authentication:........................ Open System Static WEP Keys............................... Disabled 802.1X........................................ Disabled Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA/WPA2)............. Enabled WPA (SSN IE)............................... Disabled WPA2 (RSN IE).............................. Enabled TKIP Cipher............................. Disabled AES Cipher.............................. Enabled Auth Key Management 802.1x.................................. Disabled PSK..................................... Enabled CCKM.................................... Disabled FT(802.11r)............................. Disabled FT-PSK(802.11r)......................... Disabled SKC Cache Support......................... Enabled FT Reassociation Timeout................... 20 FT Over-The-Air mode....................... Enabled FT Over-The-Ds mode........................ Enabled CCKM tsf Tolerance............................... 1000 Wi-Fi Direct policy configured................ Disabled EAP-Passthrough............................... Disabled Step 3 Step 4 Enable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan_id Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 572 OL-28744-01 Configuring Sticky Key Caching (CLI) OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 573 Configuring Sticky Key Caching (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 574 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 80 Configuring CKIP Information About CKIP, page 575 Configuring CKIP (GUI), page 576 Configuring CKIP (CLI), page 576 Information About CKIP Cisco Key Integrity Protocol (CKIP) is a Cisco-proprietary security protocol for encrypting 802.11 media. CKIP improves 802.11 security in infrastructure mode using key permutation, a message integrity check

(MIC), and a message sequence number. Software release 4.0 or later releases support CKIP with a static key. For this feature to operate correctly, you must enable Aironet information elements (IEs) for the WLAN. A lightweight access point advertises support for CKIP in beacon and probe response packets by adding an Aironet IE and setting one or both of the CKIP negotiation bits (key permutation and multi-modular hash message integrity check [MMH MIC]). Key permutation is a data encryption technique that uses the basic encryption key and the current initialization vector (IV) to create a new key. MMH MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets by using a hash function to compute message integrity code. The CKIP settings specified in a WLAN are mandatory for any client attempting to associate. If the WLAN is configured for both CKIP key permutation and MMH MIC, the client must support both. If the WLAN is configured for only one of these features, the client must support only the CKIP feature. CKIP requires that 5-byte and 13-byte encryption keys be expanded to 16-byte keys. The algorithm to perform key expansion occurs at the access point. The key is appended to itself repeatedly until the length reaches 16 bytes. All lightweight access points support CKIP. Note CKIP is supported for use only with static WEP. It is not supported for use with dynamic WEP. Therefore, a wireless client that is configured to use CKIP with dynamic WEP is unable to associate to a WLAN that is configured for CKIP. We recommend that you use either dynamic WEP without CKIP (which is less secure) or WPA/WPA2 with TKIP or AES (which are more secure). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 575 Configuring CKIP (GUI) Configuring CKIP (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the desired WLAN to open the WLANs > Edit page. Choose the Advanced tab. Select the Aironet IE check box to enable Aironet IEs for this WLAN and click Apply. Choose the General tab. Unselect the Status check box, if selected, to disable this WLAN and click Apply. Choose the Security and Layer 2 tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 2) page. Choose CKIP from the Layer 2 Security drop-down list. Under CKIP Parameters, choose the length of the CKIP encryption key from the Key Size drop-down list.The range is Not Set, 40 bits, or 104 bits and the default is Not Set. Choose the number to be assigned to this key from the Key Index drop-down list. You can configure up to four keys. From the Key Format drop-down list, choose ASCII or HEX and then enter an encryption key in the Encryption Key text box. 40-bit keys must contain 5 ASCII text characters or 10 hexadecimal characters. 104-bit keys must contain 13 ASCII text characters or 26 hexadecimal characters. Select the MMH Mode check box to enable MMH MIC data protection for this WLAN. The default value is disabled

(or unselected). Select the Key Permutation check box to enable this form of CKIP data protection. The default value is disabled (or unselected). Click Apply to commit your changes. Choose the General tab. Select the Status check box to enable this WLAN. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring CKIP (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 576 Disable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan disable wlan_id Enable Aironet IEs for this WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan ccx aironet-ie enable wlan_id Enable or disable CKIP for the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security ckip {enable | disable} wlan_id Specify a CKIP encryption key for the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security ckip akm psk set-key wlan_id {40 | 104} {hex | ascii} key key_index Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring CKIP (CLI) Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Enable or disable CKIP MMH MIC for the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security ckip mmh-mic {enable | disable} wlan_id Enable or disable CKIP key permutation for the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security ckip kp {enable | disable} wlan_id Enable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan_id Save your settings by entering this command:

save config OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 577 Configuring CKIP (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 578 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 81 Configuring Layer 3 Security Configuring Layer 3 Security Using VPN Passthrough, page 579 Configuring Layer 3 Security Using Web Authentication, page 580 Configuring Layer 3 Security Using VPN Passthrough Restrictions for Layer 3 Security Using VPN Passthrough Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol (L2TP) and IPsec are not supported on controllers. Layer 3 security settings are not supported when you disable the client IP address on a WLAN. The VPN Passthrough option is not available on Cisco 5500 Series Controllers. However, you can replicate this functionality on the controller by creating an open WLAN using an ACL. Information About VPN Passthrough The controller supports VPN passthrough or the passing through of packets that originate from VPN clients. An example of VPN passthrough is your laptop trying to connect to the VPN server at your corporate office. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 579 Configuring Layer 3 Security Using Web Authentication Configuring VPN Passthrough Configuring VPN Passthrough (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure VPN passthrough. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Choose the Security and Layer 3 tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 3) page. From the Layer 3 Security drop-down list, choose VPN Pass-Through. In the VPN Gateway Address text box, enter the IP address of the gateway router that is terminating the VPN tunnels initiated by the client and passed through the controller. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your settings. Configuring VPN Passthrough (CLI) Use these commands to configure VPN passthrough:

config wlan security passthru {enable | disable} wlan_id gateway For gateway, enter the IP address of the router that is terminating the VPN tunnel. Verify that the passthrough is enabled by entering this command:

show wlan Configuring Layer 3 Security Using Web Authentication Prerequisites for Configuring Web Authentication on a WLAN To initiate HTTP/HTTPS web authentication redirection, always use only HTTP URL and not HTTPS URL. If the CPU ACLs are configured to block HTTP / HTTPS traffic, after the successful web login authentication, there could be a failure in the redirection page. Before enabling web authentication, make sure that all proxy servers are configured for ports other than port 53. When you enable web authentication for a WLAN, a message appears indicating that the controller forwards DNS traffic to and from wireless clients prior to authentication. We recommend that you have a firewall or intrusion detection system (IDS) behind your guest VLAN to regulate DNS traffic and to prevent and detect any DNS tunneling attacks. If the web authentication is enabled on the WLAN and you also have the CPU ACL rules, the client-based web authentication rules take higher precedence as long as the client is unauthenticated (in the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 580 OL-28744-01 Configuring Layer 3 Security Using Web Authentication webAuth_Reqd state). Once the client goes to the RUN state, the CPU ACL rules get applied. Therefore, if the CPU ACL rules are enabled in the controller, an allow rule for the virtual interface IP is required

(in any direction) with the following conditions:

When the CPU ACL does not have an allow ACL rule for both directions. When an allow ALL rule exists, but also a DENY rule for port 443 or 80 of higher precedence. The allow rule for the virtual IP should be for TCP protocol and port 80 (if secureweb is disabled) or port 443 (if secureweb is enabled). This process is required to allow clients access to the virtual interface IP address, post successful authentication when the CPU ACL rules are in place. Restrictions for Configuring Web Authentication on a WLAN Web authentication is supported only with these Layer 2 security policies: open authentication, open authentication+WEP, and WPA-PSK. With the 7.4 release, web authentication is supported for use with 802.1X. Special charecters are not supported in the username field for web-authentication. When clients connect to a WebAuth SSID and a preauthorization ACL configured to allow VPN users, the clients will get disconnected from the SSID every few minutes. Webauth SSIDs must not connect without authenticating on the web page. You can select the following identity stores to authenticate web-auth user, under WLANs > Security

> AAA servers > Authentication priority order for web-auth user section:

Local RADIUS LDAP If multiple identity stores are selected, then the controller checks each identity store in the list, in the order specified, from top to bottom, until authentication for the user succeeds. The authentication fails, if the controller reaches the end of the list and user remains un-authenticated in any of the identity stores. Information About Web Authentication WLANs can use web authentication only if VPN passthrough is not enabled on the controller. Web authentication is simple to set up and use and can be used with SSL to improve the overall security of the WLAN. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 581 Configuring Layer 3 Security Using Web Authentication Configuring Web Authentication Configuring Web Authentication (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 1 Step 2 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure web authentication. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Choose the Security and Layer 3 tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 3) page. Select the Web Policy check box. Make sure that the Authentication option is selected. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your settings. Configuring Web Authentication (CLI) Enable or disable web authentication on a particular WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security web-auth {enable | disable} wlan_id Release the guest user IP address when the web authentication policy timer expires and prevent the guest user from acquiring an IP address for 3 minutes by entering this command:

config wlan webauth-exclude wlan_id {enable | disable}

The default value is disabled. This command is applicable when you configure the internal DHCP scope on the controller. By default, when the web authentication timer expires for a guest user, the user can immediately reassociate to the same IP address before another guest user can acquire it. If there are many guest users or limited IP addresses in the DHCP pool, some guest users might not be able to acquire an IP address. When you enable this feature on the guest WLAN, the guest users IP address is released when the web authentication policy timer expires and the guest user is excluded from acquiring an IP address for 3 minutes. The IP address is available for another guest user to use. After 3 minutes, the excluded guest user can reassociate and acquire an IP address, if available. Step 3 See the status of web authentication by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 582 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 82 Configuring Captive Bypassing Information About Captive Bypassing, page 583 Configuring Captive Bypassing (CLI), page 584 Information About Captive Bypassing WISPr is a draft protocol that enables users to roam between different wireless service providers. Some devices

(For example, Apple iOS devices) have a mechanism using which they can determine if the device is connected to Internet, based on an HTTP WISPr request made to a designated URL. This mechanism is used for the device to automatically open a web browser when a direct connection to the internet is not possible. This enables the user to provide his credentials to access the internet. The actual authentication is done in the background every time the device connects to a new SSID. This HTTP request triggers a web authentication interception in the controller as any other page requests are performed by a wireless client. This interception leads to a web authentication process, which will be completed normally. If the web authentication is being used with any of the controller splash page features (URL provided by a configured RADIUS server), the splash page may never be displayed because the WISPr requests are made at very short intervals, and as soon as one of the queries is able to reach the designated server, any web redirection or splash page display process that is performed in the background is aborted, and the device processes the page request, thus breaking the splash page functionality. For example, Apple introduced an iOS feature to facilitate network access when captive portals are present. This feature detects the presence of a captive portal by sending a web request on connecting to a wireless network. This request is directed to http://www.apple.com/library/test/success.html for Apple IOS version 6 and older, and to several possible target URLs for Apple IOS version 7 and later. If a response is received, then the Internet access is assumed to be available and no further interaction is required. If no response is received, then the Internet access is assumed to be blocked by the captive portal and Apples Captive Network Assistant (CNA) auto-launches the pseudo-browser to request portal login in a controlled window. The CNA may break when redirecting to an ISE captive portal. The controller prevents this pseudo-browser from popping up. You can now configure the controller to bypass WISPr detection process, so the web authentication interception is only done when a user requests a web page leading to splash page load in user context, without the WISPr detection being performed in the background. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 583 Configuring Captive Bypassing (CLI) Configuring Captive Bypassing (CLI) Use these commands to configure captive bypassing:

config network web-auth captive-bypass {enable | disable}Enables or disables the controller to support bypass of captive portals at the network level. show network summaryDisplays the status for the WISPr protocol detection feature. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 584 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 83 Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication Information About Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication, page 585 Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication (GUI), page 585 Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication (CLI), page 586 Information About Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication You can configure a fallback policy mechanism that combines Layer 2 and Layer 3 security. In a scenario where you have both MAC filtering and web authentication implemented, when a client tries to connect to a WLAN using the MAC filter (RADIUS server), if the client fails the authentication, you can configure the authentication to fall back to web authentication. When a client passes the MAC filter authentication, the web authentication is skipped and the client is connected to the WLAN. With this feature, you can avoid disassociations based on only a MAC filter authentication failure. Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication

(GUI) Note Before configuring a fallback policy, you must have MAC filtering enabled. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure the fallback policy for web authentication. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Choose the Security and Layer 3 tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 3) page. From the Layer 3 Security drop-down list, choose None. Select the Web Policy check box. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 585 Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication (CLI) Note The controller forwards DNS traffic to and from wireless clients prior to authentication. The following options are displayed:

Authentication Passthrough Conditional Web Redirect Splash Page Web Redirect On MAC Filter Failure Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Click On MAC Filter Failure. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your settings. Configuring a Fallback Policy with MAC Filtering and Web Authentication

(CLI) Note Before configuring a fallback policy, you must have MAC filtering enabled. To know more about how to enable MAC filtering, see the Information About MAC Filtering of WLANs, on page 541 section. Step 1 Step 2 Enable or disable web authentication on a particular WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan security web-auth on-macfilter-failure wlan-id See the web authentication status by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id FT Over-The-Ds mode.............................. Enabled CKIP ......................................... Disabled IP Security................................... Disabled IP Security Passthru.......................... Disabled Web Based Authentication...................... Enabled-On-MACFilter-Failure ACL............................................. Unconfigured Web Authentication server precedence:

1............................................... local 2............................................... radius 3............................................... ldap Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 586 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 84 Assigning QoS Profiles Information About QoS Profiles, page 587 Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (GUI), page 588 Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (CLI), page 589 Information About QoS Profiles Cisco UWN solution WLANs support four levels of QoS: Platinum/Voice, Gold/Video, Silver/Best Effort

(default), and Bronze/Background. You can configure the voice traffic WLAN to use Platinum QoS, assign the low-bandwidth WLAN to use Bronze QoS, and assign all other traffic between the remaining QoS levels. The WLAN QoS level defines a specific 802.11e user priority (UP) for over-the-air traffic. This UP is used to derive the over-the-wire priorities for non-WMM traffic, and it also acts as the ceiling when managing WMM traffic with various levels of priorities. The wireless rate limits can be defined on both upstream and downstream traffic. Rate limits can be defined per SSID and/or specified as a maximum rate limit for all clients. These rate limits can be individually configured. The access point uses this QoS-profile-specific UP in accordance with the values in the following table to derive the IP DSCP value that is visible on the wired LAN. Table 18: Access Point QoS Translation Values AVVID Traffic Type AVVID IP DSCP QoS Profile AVVID 802.1p Network control Inter-network control

(CAPWAP control, 802.11 management) 56 (CS7) 48 (CS6) Platinum Platinum Voice 46 (EF) Platinum Interactive video 34 (AF41) Gold 7 6 5 4 IEEE 802.11e UP 7 7 6 5 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 587 Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (GUI) AVVID Traffic Type AVVID IP DSCP QoS Profile AVVID 802.1p Mission critical Transactional Bulk data Best effort Scavenger 26 (AF31) 18 (AF21) 10 (AF11) 0 (BE) 2 Gold Silver Bronze Silver Bronze 3 2 1 0 0 IEEE 802.11e UP 4 3 2 0 1 Note The IEEE 802.11e UP value for DSCP values that are not mentioned in the table is calculated by considering 3 MSB bits of DSCP. For example, the IEEE 802.11e UP value for DSCP 32 (100 000 in binary), would be the decimal equivalent of the MSB (100) which is 4. The 802.11e UP value of DSCP 32 is 4. Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (GUI) Before You Begin If you have not already done so, configure one or more QoS profiles using the instructions in the Configuring QoS Profiles (GUI) section. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN to which you want to assign a QoS profile. When the WLANs > Edit page appears, choose the QoS tab. From the Quality of Service (QoS) drop-down list, choose one of the following:

Platinum (voice) Gold (video) Silver (best effort) Bronze (background) Note Silver (best effort) is the default value. Step 5 To define the data rates on a per-user basis, do the following:

a) Define the average data rate for TCP traffic per user by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Data Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 588 OL-28744-01 Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (CLI) b) Define the peak data rate for TCP traffic per user by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Data Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note The burst data rate should be greater than or equal to the average data rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic to and from the wireless client. Ensure that you configure the average data rate before you configure the burst data rate. c) Define the average real-time rate for UDP traffic per user by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Real-Time Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note Average Data Rate is used to measure TCP traffic while Average Real-time rate is used for UDP traffic. They are measured in kbps for all the entries. The values for Average Data Rate and Average Real-time rate can be different because they are applied to different upper layer protocols such as TCP and UDP. These different values for the rates do not impact the bandwidth. d) Define the peak real-time rate for UDP traffic per user by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Real-Time Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note The burst real-time rate should be greater than or equal to the average real-time rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic to and from the wireless client. Step 6 To define the data rates on a per-SSID basis, do the following:

a) Define the average data rate TCP traffic per SSID by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Data Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. b) Define the peak data rate for TCP traffic per SSID by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Data Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note The burst data rate should be greater than or equal to the average data rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic in the WLANs. c) Define the average real-time rate for UDP traffic per SSID by entering the rate in Kbps in the Average Real-Time Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. d) Define the peak real-time rate for UDP traffic per SSID by entering the rate in Kbps in the Burst Real-Time Rate text boxes. A value of 0 indicates that the value specified in the selected QoS profile will take effect. Note The burst real-time rate should be greater than or equal to the average real-time rate. Otherwise, the QoS policy may block traffic in the WLANs. Step 7 Step 8 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (CLI) If you have not already done so, configure one or more QoS profiles using the instructions in the Configuring QoS Profiles (CLI) section. Step 1 Assign a QoS profile to a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan qos wlan_id {bronze | silver | gold | platinum}

Silver is the default value. Step 2 To override QoS profile rate limit parameters, enter this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 589 Assigning a QoS Profile to a WLAN (CLI) config wlan override-rate-limit wlan-id {average-data-rate | average-realtime-rate | burst-data-rate |

burst-realtime-rate} {per-ssid | per-client} {downstream | upstream} rate Step 3 Step 4 Enter the save config command. Verify that you have properly assigned the QoS profile to the WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 1 Profile Name..................................... test Network Name (SSID).............................. test Status........................................... Enabled MAC Filtering.................................... Disabled Broadcast SSID................................... Enabled AAA Policy Override.............................. Disabled Number of Active Clients......................... 0 Exclusionlist.................................... Disabled Session Timeout.................................. 0 Interface........................................ management WLAN ACL......................................... unconfigured DHCP Server...................................... 1.100.163.24 DHCP Address Assignment Required................. Disabled Quality of Service............................... Silver (best effort) WMM.............................................. Disabled

... Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 590 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 85 Configuring QoS Enhanced BSS Prerequisites for Using QoS Enhanced BSS on Cisco 7921 and 7920 Wireless IP Phones, page 591 Restrictions for QoS Enhanced BSS, page 592 Information About QoS Enhanced BSS, page 592 Configuring QBSS (GUI), page 593 Configuring QBSS (CLI), page 593 Prerequisites for Using QoS Enhanced BSS on Cisco 7921 and 7920 Wireless IP Phones Follow these guidelines to use Cisco 7921 and 7920 Wireless IP Phones with controllers:

Aggressive load balancing must be disabled for each controller. Otherwise, the initial roam attempt by the phone may fail, causing a disruption in the audio path. The Dynamic Transmit Power Control (DTPC) information element (IE) must be enabled using the config 802.11b dtpc enable command. The DTPC IE is a beacon and probe information element that allows the access point to broadcast information on its transmit power. The 7921 or 7920 phone uses this information to automatically adjust its transmit power to the same level as the access point to which it is associated. In this manner, both devices are transmitting at the same level. Both the 7921 and 7920 phones and the controllers support Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM) fast roaming. When configuring WEP, there is a difference in nomenclature for the controller and the 7921 or 7920 phone. Configure the controller for 104 bits when using 128-bit WEP for the 7921 or 7920. For standalone 7921 phones, load-based CAC must be enabled, and the WMM Policy must be set to Required on the WLAN. The controller supports traffic classification (TCLAS) coming from 7921 phones using firmware version 1.1.1. This feature ensures proper classification of voice streams to the 7921 phones. When using a 7921 phone with the 802.11a radio of a 1242 series access point, set the 24-Mbps data rate to Supported and choose a lower Mandatory data rate (such as 12 Mbps). Otherwise, the phone might experience poor voice quality. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 591 Restrictions for QoS Enhanced BSS Restrictions for QoS Enhanced BSS The OEAP 600 Series access points do not support CAC. QBSS is disabled by default. 7920 phones are non-WMM phones with limited CAC functionality. The phones look at the channel utilization of the access point to which they are associated and compare that to a threshold that is beaconed by the access point. If the channel utilization is less than the threshold, the 7920 places a call. In contrast, 7921 phones are full-fledged WMM phones that use traffic specifications (TSPECs) to gain access to the voice queue before placing a phone call. The 7921 phones work well with load-based CAC, which uses the percentage of the channel set aside for voice and tries to limit the calls accordingly. Because 7921 phones support WMM and 7920 phones do not, capacity and voice quality problems can arise if you do not properly configure both phones when they are used in a mixed environment. To enable both 7921 and 7920 phones to co-exist on the same network, make sure that load-based CAC and 7920 AP CAC are both enabled on the controller and the WMM Policy is set to Allowed. These settings become particularly important if you have many more 7920 users than 7921 users. We recommend that aggressive load balancing always be turned off either through the controller GUI or CLI in any wireless network that is supporting voice, regardless of vendor. When aggressive load balancing is turned on, voice clients can hear an audible artifact when roaming, if the handset is refused at its first reassociation attempt. Information About QoS Enhanced BSS The QoS Enhanced Basis Service Set (QBSS) information element (IE) enables the access points to communicate their channel usage to wireless devices. Because access points with high channel usage might not be able to handle real-time traffic effectively, the 7921 or 7920 phone uses the QBSS value to determine if they should associate to another access point. You can enable QBSS in these two modes:

Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) mode, which supports devices that meet the 802.11E QBSS standard (such as Cisco 7921 IP Phones) 7920 support mode, which supports Cisco 7920 IP Phones on your 802.11b/g network The 7920 support mode has two options:

Support for 7920 phones that require call admission control (CAC) to be configured on and advertised by the client device (these are typically older 7920 phones) Support for 7920 phones that require CAC to be configured on and advertised by the access point

(these are typically newer 7920 phones) When access point-controlled CAC is enabled, the access point sends out a Cisco proprietary CAC Information Element (IE) and does not send out the standard QBSS IE. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 592 OL-28744-01 Configuring QBSS (GUI) Configuring QBSS (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure WMM mode. When the WLANs > Edit page appears, choose the QoS tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Qos) page. From the WMM Policy drop-down list, choose one of the following options, depending on whether you want to enable WMM mode for 7921 phones and other devices that meet the WMM standard:

DisabledDisables WMM on the WLAN. This is the default value. AllowedAllows client devices to use WMM on the WLAN. RequiredRequires client devices to use WMM. Devices that do not support WMM cannot join the WLAN. Select the 7920 AP CAC check box if you want to enable 7920 support mode for phones that require access point-controlled CAC. The default value is unselected. Select the 7920 Client CAC check box if you want to enable 7920 support mode for phones that require client-controlled CAC. The default value is unselected. Note You cannot enable both WMM mode and client-controlled CAC mode on the same WLAN. Step 7 Step 8 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring QBSS (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Determine the ID number of the WLAN to which you want to add QBSS support by entering this command:

show wlan summary Disable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan disable wlan_id Configure WMM mode for 7921 phones and other devices that meet the WMM standard by entering this command:

config wlan wmm {disabled | allowed | required} wlan_id where disabled disables WMM mode on the WLAN. allowed allows client devices to use WMM on the WLAN. required requires client devices to use WMM. Devices that do not support WMM cannot join the WLAN. Step 4 Enable or disable 7920 support mode for phones that require client-controlled CAC by entering this command:

config wlan 7920-support client-cac-limit {enable | disable} wlan_id OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 593 Configuring QBSS (CLI) Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Note You cannot enable both WMM mode and client-controlled CAC mode on the same WLAN. Enable or disable 7920 support mode for phones that require access point-controlled CAC by entering this command:

config wlan 7920-support ap-cac-limit {enable | disable} wlan_id Reenable the WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan enable wlan_id Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Verify that the WLAN is enabled and the Dot11-Phone Mode (7920) text box is configured for compact mode by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 594 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 86 Configuring Media Session Snooping and Reporting Restrictions for Media Session Snooping and Reporting, page 595 Information About Media Session Snooping and Reporting, page 595 Configuring Media Session Snooping (GUI), page 596 Configuring Media Session Snooping (CLI), page 596 Restrictions for Media Session Snooping and Reporting Controller software release 6.0 or later releases support Voice over IP (VoIP) Media Session Aware (MSA) snooping and reporting. Information About Media Session Snooping and Reporting This feature enables access points to detect the establishment, termination, and failure of Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) voice calls and then report them to the controller and Cisco Prime Infrastructure. You can enable or disable Voice over IP (VoIP) snooping and reporting for each WLAN. When you enable VoIP Media Session Aware (MSA) snooping, the access point radios that advertise this WLAN look for SIP voice packets that comply with SIP RFC 3261. They do not look for non-RFC 3261-compliant SIP voice packets or Skinny Call Control Protocol (SCCP) voice packets. Any SIP packets destined to or originating from port number 5060 (the standard SIP signaling port) are considered for further inspection. The access points track when Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) and non-WMM clients are establishing a call, are already on an active call, or are in the process of ending a call. Upstream packet classification for both client types occurs at the access point. Downstream packet classification occurs at the controller for WMM clients and at the access point for non-WMM clients. The access points notify the controller and Cisco Prime Infrastructure of any major call events, such as call establishment, termination, and failure. The controller provides detailed information for VoIP MSA calls. For failed calls, the controller generates a trap log with a timestamp and the reason for failure (in the GUI) and an error code (in the CLI) to aid in troubleshooting. For successful calls, the controller shows the number and duration of calls for usage tracking purposes. Cisco Prime Infrastructure displays failed VoIP call information in the Events page. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 595 Configuring Media Session Snooping (GUI) Configuring Media Session Snooping (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure media session snooping. On the WLANs > Edit page, click the Advanced tab. Under Voice, select the Media Session Snooping check box to enable media session snooping or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is unselected. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. See the VoIP statistics for your access point radios as follows:

a) Choose Monitor > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. b) Scroll to the right and click the Detail link for the access point for which you want to view VoIP statistics. The Radio

> Statistics page appears. The VoIP Stats section shows the cumulative number and length of voice calls for this access point radio. Entries are added automatically when voice calls are successfully placed and deleted when the access point disassociates from the controller. Step 8 Choose Management > SNMP > Trap Logs to see the traps generated for failed calls. The Trap Logs page appears. For example, log 0 in the figure shows that a call failed. The log provides the date and time of the call, a description of the failure, and the reason why the failure occurred. Configuring Media Session Snooping (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Enable or disable VoIP snooping for a particular WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan call-snoop {enable | disable} wlan_id Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the status of media session snooping on a particular WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 1 Profile Name..................................... wpa2-psk Network Name (SSID).............................. wpa2-psk Status........................................... Enabled

... FlexConnect Local Switching........................ Disabled Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 596 OL-28744-01 Configuring Media Session Snooping (CLI) FlexConnect Learn IP Address....................... Enabled Infrastructure MFP protection.............. Enabled (Global Infrastructure MFP Disabled) Client MFP.................................... Optional Tkip MIC Countermeasure Hold-down Timer....... 60 Call Snooping.................................. Enabled Step 4 See the call information for an MSA client when media session snooping is enabled and the call is active by entering this command:

show call-control client callInfo client_MAC_address Information similar to the following appears:

Uplink IP/port...................................... 192.11.1.71 / 23870 Downlonk IP/port.................................... 192.12.1.47 / 2070 UP.................................................. 6 Calling Party....................................... sip:1054 Called Party........................................ sip:1000 Call ID............................................. 58635b00-850161b7-14853-1501a8 Number of calls for given client is.............. 1 Step 5 See the metrics for successful calls or the traps generated for failed calls by entering this command:

show call-control ap {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP {metrics | traps}

Information similar to the following appears when you enter show call-control ap {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP metrics:

Total Call Duration in Seconds................... 120 Number of Calls.................................. 10 Information similar to the following appears when you enter show call-control ap {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP traps:

Number of traps sent in one min.................. 2 Last SIP error code.............................. 404 Last sent trap timestamp...................... Jun 20 10:05:06 To aid in troubleshooting, the output of this command shows an error code for any failed calls. This table explains the possible error codes for failed calls. Table 19: Error Codes for Failed VoIP Calls Error Code 1 Integer unknown Description Unknown error. 400 401 402 403 badRequest unauthorized The request could not be understood because of malformed syntax. The request requires user authentication. paymentRequired Reserved for future use. forbidden The server understood the request but refuses to fulfill it. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 597 Configuring Media Session Snooping (CLI) Error Code 404 Integer notFound methodNotallowed notAcceptabl Description The server has information that the user does not exist at the domain specified in the Request-URI. The method specified in the Request-Line is understood but not allowed for the address identified by the Request-URI. The resource identified by the request is only capable of generating response entities with content characteristics that are not acceptable according to the Accept header text box sent in the request. proxyAuthenticationRequired The client must first authenticate with the proxy. requestTimeout The server could not produce a response within a suitable amount of time, if it could not determine the location of the user in time. conflict gone lengthRequired requestEntityTooLarge requestURITooLarge unsupportedMediaType badExtension The request could not be completed due to a conflict with the current state of the resource. The requested resource is no longer available at the server, and no forwarding address is known. The server is refusing to process a request because the request entity-body is larger than the server is willing or able to process. The server is refusing to process a request because the request entity-body is larger than the server is willing or able to process. The server is refusing to service the request because the Request-URI is longer than the server is willing to interpret. The server is refusing to service the request because the message body of the request is in a format not supported by the server for the requested method. The server did not understand the protocol extension specified in a Proxy-Require or Require header text box. temporarilyNotAvailable The callees end system was contacted successfully, but the callee is currently unavailable. callLegDoesNotExist The UAS received a request that does not match any existing dialog or transaction. loopDetected tooManyHops The server has detected a loop. The server received a request that contains a Max-Forwards header text box with the value zero. 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 413 414 415 420 480 481 482 483 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 598 OL-28744-01 Configuring Media Session Snooping (CLI) Description The server received a request with a Request-URI that was incomplete. The Request-URI was ambiguous. The callees end system was contacted successfully, but the callee is currently not willing or able to take additional calls at this end system. The server encountered an unexpected condition that prevented it from fulfilling the request. The server does not support the functionality required to fulfill the request. The server, while acting as a gateway or proxy, received an invalid response from the downstream server it accessed in attempting to fulfill the request. The server is temporarily unable to process the request because of a temporary overloading or maintenance of the server. The server did not receive a timely response from an external server it accessed in attempting to process the request. The server does not support or refuses to support the SIP protocol version that was used in the request. The callees end system was contacted successfully, but the callee is busy or does not want to take the call at this time. The callees machine was contacted successfully, but the user does not want to or cannot participate. Error Code 484 Integer addressIncomplete ambiguous busy internalServerError notImplemented badGateway serviceUnavailable serverTimeout versionNotSupported busyEverywhere decline 485 486 500 501 502 503 504 505 600 603 604 606 doesNotExistAnywhere The server has information that the user indicated in the Request-URI does not exist anywhere. notAcceptable The users agent was contacted successfully, but some aspects of the session description (such as the requested media, bandwidth, or addressing style) were not acceptable. Note If you experience any problems with media session snooping, enter the debug call-control {all | event} {enable

| disable} command to debug all media session snooping messages or events. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 599 Configuring Media Session Snooping (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 600 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 87 Configuring Key Telephone System-Based CAC Restrictions for Key Telephone System-Based CAC, page 601 Information About Key Telephone System-Based CAC, page 601 Configuring KTS-based CAC (GUI), page 602 Configuring KTS-based CAC (CLI), page 602 Restrictions for Key Telephone System-Based CAC The controller ignores the SSID Capability Check Request message from the clients. Preferred call is not supported for KTS CAC clients. Reason code 17 is not supported in intercontroller roaming scenarios. To make the KTS-based CAC feature functional, ensure that you do the following:

Enable WMM on the WLAN Enable ACM at the radio level Enable processing of TSPEC inactivity timeout at the radio level Information About Key Telephone System-Based CAC Key Telephone System-based CAC is a protocol that is used in NEC MH240 wireless IP telephones. You can configure the controller to support CAC on KTS-based SIP clients, to process bandwidth request message from such clients, to allocate the required bandwidth on the AP radio, and to handle other messages that are part of the protocol. When a call is initiated, the KTS-based CAC client sends a Bandwidth Request message to which the controller responds with a Bandwidth Confirm message indicating whether the bandwidth is allocated or not. The call is allowed only if the bandwidth is available. If the client roams from one AP to another, the client sends another Bandwidth Request message to the controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 601 Configuring KTS-based CAC (GUI) Bandwidth allocation depends on the median time calculated using the data rate from the Bandwidth Request message and the packetization interval. For KTS-based CAC clients, the G.711 codec with 20 milliseconds as the packetization interval is used to compute the medium time. The controller releases the bandwidth after it receives the bandwidth release message from the client. When the client roams to another AP, the controller releases the bandwidth on the previous AP and allocates bandwidth on the new AP, in both intracontroller and intercontroller roaming scenarios. The controller releases the bandwidth if the client is dissociated or if there is inactivity for 120 seconds. The controller does not inform the client when the bandwidth is released for the client due to inactivity or dissociation of the client. Configuring KTS-based CAC (GUI) Before You Begin To enable KTS-based CAC for a WLAN, ensure that you do the following:

Set the QoS profile for the WLAN to Platinum. Set the WLAN in disabled state. Set the FlexConnect Local Switching in disabled state for the WLAN (On the WLANs > Edit page, click the Advanced tab and unselect the FlexConnect Local Switching check box). Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure the KTS-based CAC policy. On the WLANs > Edit page, click the Advanced tab. Under Voice, select or unselect the KTS based CAC Policy check box to enable or disable KTS-based CAC for the WLAN. Click Apply to commit your changes. Configuring KTS-based CAC (CLI) Before You Begin To enable KTS-based CAC for a WLAN, ensure that you do the following:

Configure the QoS profile for the WLAN to Platinum by entering the following command:

config wlan qos wlan-id platinum Disable the WLAN by entering the following command:

config wlan disable wlan-id Disable FlexConnect Local Switching for the WLAN by entering the following command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 602 OL-28744-01 Configuring KTS-based CAC (CLI) config wlan flexconnect local-switching wlan-id disable Step 1 Step 2 To enable KTS-based CAC for a WLAN, enter the following command:

config wlan kts-cac enable wlan-id To enable the functioning of the KTS-based CAC feature, ensure you do the following:

a) Enable WMM on the WLAN by entering the following command:

config wlan wmm allow wlan-id b) Enable ACM at the radio level by entering the following command:

config 802.11a cac voice acm enable c) Enable the processing of the TSPEC inactivity timeout at the radio level by entering the following command:

config 802.11a cac voice tspec-inactivity-timeout enable Related Commands To see whether the client supports KTS-based CAC, enter the following command:

show client detail client-mac-address Information similar to the following appears:

Client MAC Address............................... 00:60:b9:0d:ef:26 Client Username ................................. N/A AP MAC Address................................... 58:bc:27:93:79:90 QoS Level........................................ Platinum 802.1P Priority Tag.............................. disabled KTS CAC Capability............................... Yes WMM Support...................................... Enabled Power Save....................................... ON To troubleshoot issues with KTS-based CAC, enter the following command:

debug cac kts enable To troubleshoot other issues related to CAC, enter the following commands:

debug cac event enable debug call-control all enable OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 603 Configuring KTS-based CAC (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 604 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 88 Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients Restrictions for Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients, page 605 Information About Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients, page 605 Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients (GUI), page 606 Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients (CLI), page 606 Restrictions for Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients The ongoing data session might be affected due to disassociation and then reassociation. This feature is supported for TSPEC-based calls and non-TSPEC SIP-based calls only when you enable the admission control. This feature is not recommended for use on Cisco 792x phones. Information About Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients You can allow voice clients to get anchored on the best suited and nearest available controller, which is useful when intercontroller roaming occurs. By using this feature, you can avoid the use of tunnels to carry traffic between the foreign controller and the anchor controller and remove unnecessary traffic from the network. The ongoing call during roaming is not affected and can continue without any problem. The traffic passes through proper tunnels that are established between the foreign controller and the anchor controller. Disassociation occurs only after the call ends, and then the client then gets reassociated to a new controller. Note You can reanchor roaming of voice clients for each WLAN. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 605 Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients (GUI) Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN for which you want to configure reanchoring of roaming voice clients. When the WLANs > Edit page appears, choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. In the Voice area select the Re-anchor Roamed Clients check box. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Reanchoring of Roaming Voice Clients (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Enable or disable reanchoring of roaming voice clients for a particular WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan roamed-voice-client re-anchor {enable | disable} wlan id Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the status of reanchoring roaming voice client on a particular WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 1 Profile Name..................................... wpa2-psk Network Name (SSID).............................. wpa2-psk Status........................................... Enabled

... Call Snooping.................................... Enabled Roamed Call Re-Anchor Policy..................... Enabled Band Select...................................... Disabled Load Balancing................................... Disabled Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 606 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 89 Configuring Seamless IPv6 Mobility Prerequisites for Configuring IPv6 Mobility, page 607 Restrictions for Configuring IPv6 Mobility, page 607 Information About IPv6 Mobility, page 608 Configuring IPv6 Globally, page 608 Configuring RA Gaurd for IPv6 Clients, page 609 Configuring RA Throttling for IPv6 Clients, page 609 Configuring IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Caching, page 611 Prerequisites for Configuring IPv6 Mobility Up to eight client addresses can be tracked per client. To allow stateful DHCPv6 IP addressing to operate properly, you must have a switch or router that supports the DHCP for IPv6 feature that is configured to act like a DHCPv6 server, or you need a dedicated server such as a Windows 2008 server with a built-in DHCPv6 server. To support the seamless IPv6 Mobility, you might need to configure the following:

Configuring RA Guard for IPv6 Clients Configuring RA Throttling for IPv6 Clients Configuring IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Caching Restrictions for Configuring IPv6 Mobility Clients must support IPv6 with either static stateless auto configuration (such as Windows XP clients) or stateful DHCPv6 IP addressing (such as Windows Vista clients). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 607 Information About IPv6 Mobility Note Currently, DHCPv6 is supported for use only with Windows Vista clients. For these clients, you must manually renew the DHCPv6 IP address after the client changes VLANs. Note The Dynamic VLAN function for IPv6 is not supported. Roaming of IPv6 clients that are associated with a WLAN that is mapped to an untagged interface to another WLAN that is mapped to a tagged interface is not supported. Information About IPv6 Mobility Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) is the next-generation network layer Internet protocol intended to replace version 4 (IPv4) in the TCP/IP suite of protocols. This new version increases the Internet global address space to accommodate users and applications that require unique global IP addresses. IPv6 incorporates 128-bit source and destination addresses, which provide significantly more addresses than the 32-bit IPv4 addresses. To support IPv6 clients across controllers, ICMPv6 messages must be dealt with specially to ensure the IPv6 client remains on the same Layer 3 network. The controllers keep track of IPv6 clients by intercepting the ICMPv6 messages to provide seamless mobility and protect the network from network attacks. The ICMPv6 packets are converted from multicast to unicast and delivered individually per client. This process allows more control. Specific clients can receive specific Neighbor Discovery and Router Advertisement packets, which ensures correct IPv6 addressing and avoids unnecessary multicast traffic. The configuration for IPv6 mobility is the same as IPv4 mobility and requires no separate software on the client side to achieve seamless roaming. The controllers must be part of the same mobility group. Both IPv4 and IPv6 client mobility are enabled by default. Configuring IPv6 Globally Configuring IPv6 Globally (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Controller > General. From the Global IPv6 Config drop-down list, choose Enabled or Disabled. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring IPv6 Globally (CLI) Use this command to configure IPv6 globally:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 608 OL-28744-01 Configuring RA Gaurd for IPv6 Clients Enable or disable IPv6 globally by entering this command:

config ipv6 {enable | disable}

Configuring RA Gaurd for IPv6 Clients Information About RA Guard IPv6 clients configure IPv6 addresses and populate their router tables based on IPv6 Router Advertisement

(RA) packets. The RA Guard feature is similar to the RA guard feature of wired networks. RA Guard increases the security of the IPv6 network by dropping the unwanted or rogue RA packets that come from wireless clients. If this feature is not configured, malicious IPv6 clients could announce themselves as the router for the network, which would take higher precedence over legitimate IPv6 routers. RA Guard occurs at the controller. You can configure the controller to drop RA messages at the access point or at the controller. By default, RA Guard is configured at the access point and also enabled in the controller. All IPv6 RA messages are dropped, which protects other wireless clients and upstream wired network from malicious IPv6 clients. Configuring RA Guard (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Controller > IPv6 > RA Guard to open the IPv6 RA Guard page. By default the IPv6 RA Guard on AP is enabled. From the drop-down list, choose Disable to disable RA Guard. The controller also displays the clients that have been identified as sending RA packets. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring RA Guard (CLI) Use this command to configure RA Guard:

config ipv6 ra-guard ap {enable | disable}

Configuring RA Throttling for IPv6 Clients Information about RA Throttling RA throttling allows the controller to enforce limits to RA packets headed toward the wireless network. By enabling RA throttling, routers that send many RA packets can be trimmed to a minimum frequency that will still maintain an IPv6 client connectivity. If a client sends an RS packet, then an RA is sent back to the client. This is allowed through the controller and unicasted to the client. This process ensures that the new clients or roaming clients are not affected by the RA throttling. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 609 Configuring RA Throttling for IPv6 Clients Configuring RA Throttling (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > IPv6 > RA Throttle Policy page. By default the IPv6 RA Throttle Policy is disabled. Unselect the check box to disable RA throttle policy. Configure the following parameters:

Throttle periodThe period of time for throttling. RA throttling takes place only after the Max Through limit is reached for the VLAN or the Allow At-Most value is reached for a particular router. The range is from 10 seconds to 86400 seconds. The default is 600 seconds. Max ThroughThe maximum number of RA packets on a VLAN that can be sent before throttling takes place. The No Limit option allows an unlimited number of RA packets through with no throttling. The range is from 0 to 256 RA packets. The default is 10 RA packets. Interval OptionThis option allows the controller to act differently based on the RFC 3775 value set in IPv6 RA packets. Passthrough Allows any RA messages with the RFC 3775 interval option to go through without throttling. IgnoreCauses the RA throttle to treat packets with the interval option as a regular RA and subject to throttling if in effect. ThrottleCauses the RA packets with the interval option to always be subject to rate limiting. Allow At-leastThe minimum number of RA packets per router that can be sent as multicast before throttling takes place. The range is from 0 to 32 RA packets. Allow At-mostThe maximum number of RA packets per router that can be sent as multicast before throttling takes place. The No Limit option allows an unlimited number of RA packets through the router. The range is from 0 to 256 RA packets. Note When RA throttling occurs, only the first IPv6 capable router is allowed through. For networks that have multiple IPv6 prefixes being served by different routers, you should disable RA throttling. Step 3 Step 4 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring the RA Throttle Policy (CLI) Use this command to configure the RA throttle policy:

config ipv6 neigbhor-binding ra-throttle {allow at-least at-least-value | enable | disable | interval-option

{ ignore | passthrough | throttle} | max-through {max-through-value | no-limit}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 610 OL-28744-01 Configuring IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Caching Configuring IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Caching Information About IPv6 Neighbor Discovery IPv6 Neighbor Discovery is a set of messages and processes that determine relationships between neighboring nodes. Neighbor Discovery replaces ARP, ICMP Router Discovery, and ICMP Redirect used in IPv4. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery inspection analyzes neighbor discovery messages in order to build a trusted binding table database, and IPv6 neighbor discovery packets that do not comply are dropped. The neighbor binding table in the controller track each IPv6 address and its associated MAC address. Clients are expired from the table according to Neighbor Binding timers. Configuring Neighbor Binding (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > IPv6 > Neighbor Binding page. Configure the following:

DownLifetimeSpecifies how long IPv6 cache entries are kept if the interface goes down. The range is from 0 to 86400 seconds. ReachableLifetimeSpecifies how long IPv6 addresses are active. The range is from 0 to 86400 seconds. StaleLifetimeSpecifies how long to keep IPv6 addresses in the cache. The range is from 0 to 86400 seconds. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Enable or disable the Unknown Address Multicast NS Forwarding. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring Neighbor Binding (CLI) Configure the neighbor binding parameters by entering this command:

config ipv6 neighbor-binding timers {down-lifetime | reachable-lifetime | stale-lifetime} {enable |

disable}

Configure the Unknown Address Multicast NS Forwarding by entering this command:

config ipv6 ns-mcast-fwd {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 611 Configuring IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Caching Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 612 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 90 Configuring Cisco Client Extensions Prerequisites for Configuring Cisco Client Extensions, page 613 Restrictions for Configuring Cisco Client Extensions, page 613 Information About Cisco Client Extensions, page 614 Configuring CCX Aironet IEs (GUI), page 614 Viewing a Clients CCX Version (GUI), page 614 Configuring CCX Aironet IEs (CLI), page 614 Viewing a Clients CCX Version (CLI), page 615 Prerequisites for Configuring Cisco Client Extensions The software supports CCX versions 1 through 5, which enables controllers and their access points to communicate wirelessly with third-party client devices that support CCX. CCX support is enabled automatically for every WLAN on the controller and cannot be disabled. However, you can configure Aironet information elements (IEs). If Aironet IE support is enabled, the access point sends an Aironet IE 0x85 (which contains the access point name, load, number of associated clients, and so on) in the beacon and probe responses of this WLAN, and the controller sends Aironet IEs 0x85 and 0x95 (which contains the management IP address of the controller and the IP address of the access point) in the reassociation response if it receives Aironet IE 0x85 in the reassociation request. Restrictions for Configuring Cisco Client Extensions CCX is not supported on Cisco OEAP 600 access points and all elements related to CCX are not supported. Cisco OEAP 600 do not support Cisco Aeronet IEs. With the 7.2 release, a new version of CCX, which is called CCX Lite, is available. For more information about CCX Lite, see http://www.cisco.com/web/partners/pr46/pr147/program_additional_information_ new_release_features.html OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 613 Information About Cisco Client Extensions Information About Cisco Client Extensions The Cisco Client Extensions (CCX) software is licensed to manufacturers and vendors of third-party client devices. The CCX code resident on these clients enables them to communicate wirelessly with Cisco access points and to support Cisco features that other client devices do not, including those features that are related to increased security, enhanced performance, fast roaming, and power management. Configuring CCX Aironet IEs (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the desired WLAN to open the WLANs > Edit page. Choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced tab) page. Select the Aironet IE check box if you want to enable support for Aironet IEs for this WLAN. Otherwise, unselect this check box. The default value is enabled (or selected). Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Viewing a Clients CCX Version (GUI) A client device sends its CCX version in association request packets to the access point. The controller then stores the clients CCX version in its database and uses it to limit the features for this client. For example, if a client supports CCX version 2, the controller does not allow the client to use CCX version 4 features. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Monitor > Clients to open the Clients page. Click the MAC address of the desired client device to open the Clients > Detail page. The CCX Version text box shows the CCX version supported by this client device. Not Supported appears if the client does not support CCX. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Repeat this procedure to view the CCX version supported by any other client devices. Configuring CCX Aironet IEs (CLI) Use this command to configure CCX Aironet IEs:

config wlan ccx aironet-ie {enable | disable} wlan_id The default value is enabled. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 614 OL-28744-01 Viewing a Clients CCX Version (CLI) Viewing a Clients CCX Version (CLI) See the CCX version supported by a particular client device using the controller CLI by entering this command:

show client detail client_mac OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 615 Viewing a Clients CCX Version (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 616 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 91 Configuring Remote LANs Prerequisites for Configuring Remote LANs, page 617 Restrictions for Configuring Remote LANs, page 617 Information About Remote LANs, page 617 Configuring a Remote LAN (GUI), page 618 Configuring a Remote LAN (CLI), page 618 Prerequisites for Configuring Remote LANs You must remove all remote LANs from a controller's configuration before moving to a release that does not support the remote LAN functionality. The remote LAN changes to a WLAN in earlier releases, which could cause an undesirable or unsecured WLAN being broadcast on the wireless network. Remote LAN is only supported in release 7.0.116.0 and later. Remote LAN can be applied on a dedicated LAN port on an OEAP 600 series access point. Restrictions for Configuring Remote LANs Only four clients can connect to an OEAP 600 series access point through a remote LAN port. This number does not affect the fifteen WLAN limit imposed for the controller WLANs. The remote LAN client limit supports connecting a switch or hub to the remote LAN port for multiple devices or connecting directly to a Cisco IP phone that is connected to that port. Only the first four devices can connect until one of the devices is idle for more than one minute. It is not possible to configure 802.1X on remote LANs through the controller GUI; configuration only through CLI is supported. Information About Remote LANs This section describes how to configure remote LANs. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 617 Configuring a Remote LAN (GUI) Configuring a Remote LAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. This page lists all of the WLANs and remote LANs currently configured on the controller. For each WLAN, you can see its WLAN/remote LAN ID, profile name, type, SSID, status, and security policies. The total number of WLANs/Remote LANs appears in the upper right-hand corner of the page. If the list of WLANs/Remote LANs spans multiple pages, you can access these pages by clicking the page number links. Note If you want to delete a Remote LAN, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that WLAN and choose Remove, or select the check box to the left of the row, choose Remove Selected from the drop-down list, and click Go. A message appears asking you to confirm your decision. If you proceed, the remote LAN is removed from any access point group to which it is assigned and from the access points radio. Create a new Remote-LAN by choosing Create New from the drop-down list and clicking Go. The WLANs > New page appears. From the Type drop-down list, choose Remote LAN to create a remote LAN. In the Profile Name text box, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the profile name to be assigned to this Remote WLAN. The profile name must be unique. From the WLAN ID drop-down list, choose the ID number for this WLAN. Click Apply to commit your changes. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Note You can also open the WLANs > Edit page from the WLANs page by clicking the ID number of the WLAN that you want to edit. Use the parameters on the General, Security, and Advanced tabs to configure this remote LAN. See the sections in the rest of this chapter for instructions on configuring specific features. On the General tab, select the Status check box to enable this remote LAN. Be sure to leave it unselected until you have finished making configuration changes to the remote LAN. Note You can also enable or disable remote LANs from the WLANs page by selecting the check boxes to the left of the IDs that you want to enable or disable, choosing Enable Selected or Disable Selected from the drop-down list, and clicking Go. Step 9 Step 10 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring a Remote LAN (CLI) See the current configuration of the remote LAN by entering this command:

show remote-lan remote-lan-id Enable or disable remote LAN by entering this command:

config remote-lan {enable | disable} remote-lan-id Enable or disable 802.1X authentication for remote LAN by entering this command:

config remote-lan security 802.1X {enable | disable} remote-lan-id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 618 OL-28744-01 Configuring a Remote LAN (CLI) Note The encryption on a remote LAN is always none. Enable or disable local EAP with the controller as an authentication server, by entering this command:

config remote-lan local-auth enable profile-name remote-lan-id If you are using an external AAA authentication server, use the following command:

config remote-lan radius_server auth {add | delete} remote-lan-id server id config remote-lan radius_server auth {enable | disable} remote-lan-id OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 619 Configuring a Remote LAN (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 620 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 92 Configuring AP Groups Prerequisites for Configuring AP Groups, page 621 Restrictions for Configuring Access Point Groups, page 622 Information About Access Point Groups, page 622 Configuring Access Point Groups, page 624 Creating Access Point Groups (GUI), page 624 Creating Access Point Groups (CLI), page 626 Viewing Access Point Groups (CLI), page 626 Prerequisites for Configuring AP Groups The following are the prerequisites for creating access point groups on a controller:

The required access control list (ACL) must be defined on the router that serves the VLAN or subnet. Multicast traffic is supported with access point group VLANs. However, if the client roams from one access point to another, the client might stop receiving multicast traffic, unless IGMP snooping is enabled. AP Groups Supported on Controller Platforms This table lists the AP groups supported on various controller platforms:

Controller Platform Cisco 2500 Series Wireless Controller AP Groups Supported 50 Cisco 5500 Series Wireless Controller Cisco Virtual Wireless Controller Cisco 7500 Series Wireless Controller Cisco 8500 Series Wireless Controller 500 200 6000 6000 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 621 Restrictions for Configuring Access Point Groups Controller Platform Cisco Wireless Services Module 2 AP Groups Supported 1000 Restrictions for Configuring Access Point Groups Suppose that the interface mapping for a WLAN in the AP group table is the same as the WLAN interface. If the WLAN interface is changed, the interface mapping for the WLAN in the AP group table also changes to the new WLAN interface. Suppose that the interface mapping for a WLAN in the AP group table is different from the one defined for the WLAN. If the WLAN interface is changed, then the interface mapping for the WLAN in the AP group table does not change to the new WLAN interface. If you clear the configuration on the controller, all of the access point groups disappear except for the default access point group default-group, which is created automatically. The default access point group can have up to 16 WLANs associated with it. The WLAN IDs for the default access point group must be less than or equal to 16. If a WLAN with an ID greater than 16 is created in the default access point group, the WLAN SSID will not be broadcasted. All WLAN IDs in the default access point group must have an ID that is less than or equal to 16. WLANs with IDs greater than 16 can be assigned to custom access point groups. The OEAP 600 Series access point supports a maximum of two WLANs and one remote LAN. If you have configured more than two WLANs and one remote LAN, you can assign the 600 Series access point to an AP group. The support for two WLANs and one remote LAN still applies to the AP group If the 600 Series OEAP is in the default group, the WLAN/remote LAN ids must be lower than 8. All OfficeExtend access points should be in the same access point group, and that group should contain no more than 15 WLANs. A controller with OfficeExtend access points in an access point group publishes only up to 15 WLANs to each connected OfficeExtend access point because it reserves one WLAN for the personal SSID. Note A controller with OfficeExtend access points in an access point group publishes up to 15 WLANs to each connected OfficeExtend access point because it reserves one WLAN for the personal SSID. Information About Access Point Groups After you create up to 512 WLANs on the controller, you can selectively publish them (using access point groups) to different access points to better manage your wireless network. In a typical deployment, all users on a WLAN are mapped to a single interface on the controller. Therefore, all users that are associated with that WLAN are on the same subnet or VLAN. However, you can choose to distribute the load among several interfaces or to a group of users based on specific criteria such as individual departments (such as Marketing) by creating access point groups. Additionally, these access point groups can be configured in separate VLANs to simplify network administration. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 622 OL-28744-01 Information About Access Point Groups In the figure, three configured dynamic interfaces are mapped to three different VLANs (VLAN 61, VLAN 62, and VLAN 63). Three access point groups are defined, and each is a member of a different VLAN, but all are members of the same SSID. A client within the wireless SSID is assigned an IP address from the VLAN subnet on which its access point is a member. For example, any user that associates with an access point that is a member of access point group VLAN 61 is assigned an IP address from that subnet. In the figure, the controller internally treats roaming between access points as a Layer 3 roaming event. In this way, WLAN clients maintain their original IP addresses. After all access points have joined the controller, you can create access point groups and assign up to 16 WLANs to each group. Each access point advertises only the enabled WLANs that belong to its access point group. The access point does not advertise disabled WLANs in its access point group or WLANs that belong to another group. Figure 46: Access Point Groups OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 623 Configuring Access Point Groups Configuring Access Point Groups Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Configure the appropriate dynamic interfaces and map them to the desired VLANs. For example, to implement the network described in the Information About Access Point Groups section, create dynamic interfaces for VLANs 61, 62, and 63 on the controller. See the Configuring Dynamic Interfaces section for information about how to configure dynamic interfaces. Create the access point groups. See the Creating Access Point Groups section. Create a RF profile. See the Creating an RF Profile section. Assign access points to the appropriate access point groups. See the Creating Access Point Groups section. Apply the RF profile on the AP groups. See the Applying RF Profile to AP Groups section. Creating Access Point Groups (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs > Advanced > AP Groups to open the AP Groups page. This page lists all the access point groups currently created on the controller. By default, all access points belong to the default access point group default-group, unless you assign them to other access point groups. Note The controller creates a default access point group and automatically populates it with the first 16 WLANs

(WLANs with IDs 1 through 16, or fewer if 16 WLANs are not configured). This default group cannot be modified (you cannot add WLANs to it nor delete WLANs from it). It is dynamically updated whenever the first 16 WLANs are added or deleted. If an access point does not belong to an access point group, it is assigned to the default group and uses the WLANs in that group. If an access point joins the controller with an undefined access point group name, the access point keeps its group name but uses the WLANs in the default-group access point group. Click Add Group to create a new access point group. The Add New AP Group section appears at the top of the page. In the AP Group Name text box, enter the groups name. In the Description text box, enter the groups description. In the NAS-ID text box, enter the network access server identifier for the AP group. Click Add. The newly created access point group appears in the list of access point groups on the AP Groups page. Note If you ever want to delete this group, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the group and choose Remove. An error message appears if you try to delete an access point group that is used by at least one access point. Before deleting an access point group in controller software release 6.0 or later releases, move all access points in the group to another group. The access points are not moved to the default-group access point group as in previous releases. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 624 OL-28744-01 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Creating Access Point Groups (GUI) Click the name of the group to edit this new group. The AP Groups > Edit (General) page appears. Change the description of this access point group by entering the new text in the AP Group Description text box and click Apply. Choose the WLANs tab to open the AP Groups > Edit (WLANs) page. This page lists the WLANs that are currently assigned to this access point group. Click Add New to assign a WLAN to this access point group. The Add New section appears at the top of the page. From the WLAN SSID drop-down list, choose the SSID of the WLAN. From the Interface Name drop-down list, choose the interface to which you want to map the access point group. Choose the quarantine VLAN if you plan to enable network admission control (NAC) out-of-band support. Note The interface name in the default-group access point group matches the WLAN interface. Select the NAC State check box to enable NAC out-of-band support for this access point group. To disable NAC out-of-band support, leave the check box unselected, which is the default value. Click Add to add this WLAN to the access point group. This WLAN appears in the list of WLANs that are assigned to this access point group. Note If you ever want to remove this WLAN from the access point group, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the WLAN and choose Remove. Repeat Step 9 through Step 13 to add any additional WLANs to this access point group. Choose the APs tab to assign access points to this access point group. The AP Groups > Edit (APs) page lists the access points that are currently assigned to this group as well as any access points that are available to be added to the group. If an access point is not currently assigned to a group, its group name appears as default-group. Select the check box to the left of the access point name and click Add APs to add an access point to this access point group. The access point now appears in the list of access points currently in this access point group. Note To select all of the available access points at once, select the AP Name check box. All of the access points are then selected. If you ever want to remove an access point from the group, select the check box to the left of the access point name and click Remove APs. To select all of the access points at once, select the AP Name check box. All of the access points are then removed from this group. If you ever want to change the access point group to which an access point belongs, choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs > ap_name > Advanced tab, choose the name of another access point group from the AP Group Name drop-down list, and click Apply. Note Note In the 802.11u tab, do the following:

a) Choose a HotSpot group that groups similar HotSpot venues. b) Choose a venue type that is based on the HotSpot venue group that you choose. c) To add a new venue, click Add New Venue and enter the language name that is used at the venue and the venue name that is associated with the basic service set (BSS). This name is used in cases where the SSID does not provide enough information about the venue. d) Select the operating class(es) for the AP group. e) Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Step 19 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 625 Creating Access Point Groups (CLI) Creating Access Point Groups (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Create an access point group by entering this command:

config wlan apgroup add group_name Note To delete an access point group, enter the config wlan apgroup delete group_name command. An error message appears if you try to delete an access point group that is used by at least one access point. Before deleting an access point group in controller software release 6.0 or later releases, move all access points in the group to another group. The access points are not moved to the default-group access point group as in previous releases. To see the access points in a group, enter the show wlan apgroups command. To move the access points to another group, enter the config ap group-name group_name Cisco_AP command. Add a description to an access point group by entering this command:

config wlan apgroup description group_name description Assign a WLAN to an access point group by entering this command:

config wlan apgroup interface-mapping add group_name wlan_id interface_name Note To remove a WLAN from an access point group, enter the config wlan apgroup interface-mapping delete group_name wlan_id command. Enable or disable NAC out-of-band support for this access point group by entering this command:

config wlan apgroup nac {enable | disable}group_name wlan_id Configure a WLAN radio policy on the access point group by entering this command:

config wlan apgroup wlan-radio-policy apgroup_name wlan_id {802.11a-only | 802.11bg | 802.11g-only | all}

Assign an access point to an access point group by entering this command:

config ap group-name group_name Cisco_AP Note To remove an access point from an access point group, reenter this command and assign the access point to another group. To configure HotSpot for the AP group, enter this command:

config wlan apgroup hotspot {venue | operating-class}

Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Viewing Access Point Groups (CLI) To view information about or to troubleshoot access point groups, use these commands:

See a list of all access point groups on the controller by entering this command:

show wlan apgroups See the BSSIDs for each WLAN assigned to an access point group by entering this command:

show ap wlan {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP See the number of WLANs enabled for an access point group by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 626 OL-28744-01 Viewing Access Point Groups (CLI) show ap config {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP Enable or disable debugging of access point groups by entering this command:

debug group {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 627 Viewing Access Point Groups (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 628 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 93 Configuring RF Profiles Prerequisites for Configuring RF Profiles, page 629 Restrictions for Configuring RF Profiles, page 629 Information About RF Profiles, page 630 Configuring an RF Profile (GUI), page 632 Configuring an RF Profile (CLI), page 633 Applying an RF Profile to AP Groups (GUI), page 634 Applying RF Profiles to AP Groups (CLI), page 635 Prerequisites for Configuring RF Profiles Once you create an AP group and apply RF profiles or modify an existing AP group, the new settings are in effect and the following rules become effective:

The same RF profile must be applied and present on every controller of the AP group or the action will fail for that controller. You can assign the same RF profile to more than one AP group. Restrictions for Configuring RF Profiles Once you create an AP group and apply RF profiles or modify an existing AP group, the new settings are in effect and the following rules become effective:

AP that has a custom power setting applied for AP power is not in global mode configuration, an RF profile has no effect on this AP. For RF profiling to work, all APs must have their channel and power managed by RRM. Within the AP group, changing the assignment of an RF profile on either band causes the AP to reboot. Once you assign an RF profile to an AP group, you cannot make changes to that RF profile. You must change the AP group RF profile settings to none in order to change the RF profile and then OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 629 Information About RF Profiles add it back to the AP group. You can also work around this restriction by disabling the network that will be affected by the changes that you will be making either for 802.11a or 802.11b. You cannot delete an AP group that has APs assigned to it. You cannot delete an RF profile that is applied to an AP group. If you enable Out of Box, save the configuration, and then reboot the CIsco WLC, the status of Out of Box is changed to disabled. This behavior is observed in Cisco WiSM2, Cisco 5500 Series WLC, and Cisco 2500 Series WLC. The workaround is to enable Out of Box again after you reboot the Cisco WLC. Information About RF Profiles RF Profiles allows you to tune groups of APs that share a common coverage zone together and selectively change how RRM will operates the APs within that coverage zone. For example, a university might deploy a high density of APs in an area where a high number of users will congregate or meet. This situation requires that you manipulate both data rates and power to address the cell density while managing the co-channel interference. In adjacent areas, normal coverage is provided and such manipulation would result in a loss of coverage. Using RF profiles and AP groups allows you to optimize the RF settings for AP groups that operate in different environments or coverage zones. RF profiles are created for the 802.11 radios. RF profiles are applied to all APs that belong to an AP group, where all APs in that group will have the same profile settings. The RF profile gives you the control over the data rates and power (TPC) values. Note The application of an RF profile does not change the APs status in RRM. It is still in global configuration mode controlled by RRM. To address high-density complex RF topologies, the following configurations are available:

High Density ConfigurationsThe following configurations are available to fine tune RF environments in a dense wireless network:

Client limit per WLAN or radioMaximum number of clients that can communicate with the AP in a high-density environment. Client trap thresholdThreshold value of the number of clients that associate with an access point, after which an SNMP trap is sent to the controller and Cisco Prime Infrastructure. Stadium Vision ConfigurationsYou can configure the following parameter:

Multicast data ratesConfigurable data rate for multicast traffic based on the RF condition of an AP. Out-of-Box AP ConfigurationsTo create an Out of Box AP group that consists of newly installed access points that belong to the default AP group. When you enable this feature:

Newly installed access points that are part of the default AP group will be part of the Out-of-Box AP group and their radios will be switched off. This eliminates any RF instability caused by the new access points. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 630 OL-28744-01 Information About RF Profiles All access points that do not have a group name become part of the Out of Box AP group. Special RF profiles are created per 802.11 band. These RF profiles have default settings for all the existing RF parameters and additional new configurations. Note When you disable this feature after you enable it, only subscription of new APs to the Out of Box AP group stops. All APs that are subscribed to the Out of Box AP Group remain in this AP group. The network administrators can move such APs to the default group or a custom AP group upon network convergence. Band Select Configurations Band Select addresses client distribution between the 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz bands by first understanding the client capabilities to verify whether a client can associate on both 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz spectrum. Enabling band select on a WLAN forces the AP to do probe suppression on the 2.4-GHz band that ultimately moves dual band clients to 5-GHz spectrum. You can configure the following band select parameters per AP Group:

Probe responseProbe responses to clients that you can enable or disable. Probe Cycle CountProbe cycle count for the RF profile. The cycle count sets the number of suppression cycles for a new client. Cycle ThresholdTime threshold for a new scanning RF Profile band select cycle period. This setting determines the time threshold during which new probe requests from a client come in a new scanning cycle. Suppression ExpireExpiration time for pruning previously known 802.11b/g clients. After this time elapses, clients become new and are subject to probe response suppression. Dual Band ExpireExpiration time for pruning previously known dual-band clients. After this time elapses, clients become new and are subject to probe response suppression. Client RSSIMinimum RSSI for a client to respond to a probe. Load Balancing ConfigurationsLoad balancing maintains fair distribution of clients across APs. You can configure the following parameters:

WindowLoad balancing sets client association limits by enforcing a client window size. For example, if the window size is defined as 3, assuming fair client distribution across the floor area, then an AP should have no more than 3 clients associated with it than the group average. DenialThe denial count sets the maximum number of association denials during load balancing. Coverage Hole Mitigation ConfigurationsYou can configure the following parameters:

Data RSSIMinimum receive signal strength indication (RSSI) value for data packets received by the access point. The value that you enter is used to identify coverage holes (or areas of poor coverage) within your network. Voice RSSIMinimum receive signal strength indication (RSSI) value for voice packets received by the access point. Coverage ExceptionMinimum number of clients on an access point with an RSSI value at or below the data or voice RSSI threshold to trigger a coverage hole exception. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 631 Configuring an RF Profile (GUI) Coverage LevelPercentage of clients on an access point that are experiencing a low signal level but cannot roam to another access point. If an access point has more number of such clients than the configured coverage level it triggers a coverage hole event. Configuring an RF Profile (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose Wireless > RF Profiles to open the RF profiles page. To configure the out-of-box status for all RF profiles, select or unselect the Enable Out Of Box check box. Click New. Enter the RF Profile Name and choose the radio band. Click Apply to configure the customizations of power and data rate parameters. In the General tab, enter the description for the RF profile in the Description text box. In the 802.11 tab, configure the data rates to be applied to the APs of this profile. In the RRM tab, do the following:

a) In the TPC area, configure the Maximum and Minimum Power Level Assignment, that is the maximum and minimum power that the APs in this RF profile are allowed to use. b) In the TPC area, configure a custom TPC power threshold for either Version1 or Version 2 of TPC. Note Only one version of TPC can be operable for RRM on a given controller Version 1 and Version 2 are not interoperable within the same RF profile. If you select a threshold value for TPCv2 and it is not in the chosen TPC algorithm for the RF profile, this value will be ignored. c) In the Coverage Hole Detection area, configure the voice and data RSSI. d) In the Coverage Exception text box, enter the number for clients. e) In the Coverage Level text box, enter the percentage. In the High Density tab, do the following:

a) In the High Density Parameters area, enter the maximum number of clients to be allowed per AP radio and the client trap threshold value. b) In the Multicast Parameters area, choose the data rates from the Multicast Data Rates drop-down list. In the Client Distribution tab, do the following:

a) In the Load Balancing area, enter the client window size and the denial count. The window size becomes part of the algorithm that determines whether an access point is too heavily loaded to accept more client associations:

load-balancing window + client associations on AP with the lightest load = load-balancing threshold In the group of access points accessible to a client device, each access point has a different number of client associations. The access point with the lowest number of clients has the lightest load. The client window size plus the number of clients on the access point with the lightest load forms the threshold. Access points with more client associations than this threshold is considered busy, and clients can associate only to access points with client counts lower than the threshold. The denial count sets the maximum number of association denials during load balancing. b) In the Band Select area, select or unselect the Probe Response check box. Note The Band Select configurations are available only for the 802.11b/g RF profiles. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 632 OL-28744-01 Configuring an RF Profile (CLI) c) In the Cycle Count text box, enter a value that sets the number of suppression cycles for a new client. The default count is 2. d) In the Cycle Threshold text box, enter a time period in milliseconds that determines the time threshold during which new probe requests from a client from a new scanning cycle. The default cycle threshold is 200 milliseconds. e) In the Suppression Expire text box, enter a time period after which the 802.11 b/g clients become new and are subject to probe response suppression. In the Dual Band Expire text box, enter a time period after which the dual band clients become new and are subject to probe response suppression. f) g) In the Client RSSI text box, enter the minimum RSSI for a client to respond to a probe. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Step 11 Step 12 Configuring an RF Profile (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 To configure the out-of-box status for all RF profiles, enter this command:

config rf-profile out-of-box {enable | disable}

To create or delete an RF profile, enter this command:

config rf-profile {create {802.11a | 802.11b} | delete} profile-name To specify a description for the RF profile, enter this command:

config rf-profile description text profile-name To configure the data rates to be applied to the APs of this profile, enter this command:

config rf-profile data-rates {802.11a | 802.11b} {disabled | mandatory | supported} rate profile-name To configure the maximum and minimum power level assignment, that is the maximum and minimum power that the APs in this RF profile are allowed to use, enter this command:

config rf-profile {tx-power-max | tx-power-min} power-value profile-name To configure a custom TPC power threshold for either Version1 or Version 2 of TPC, enter this command:

config rf-profile {tx-power-control-thresh-v1 | tx-power-control-thresh-v2} power-threshold profile-name To configure the coverage hole detection parameters:

a) To configure the coverage data, enter this command:

config rf-profile coverage data value-in-dBm profile-name b) To configure the minimum client coverage exception level, enter this command:

config rf-profile coverage exception clients profile-name c) To configure the coverage exception level percentage, enter this command:

config rf-profile coverage level percentage-value profile-name d) To configure the coverage of voice, enter this command:

config rf-profile coverage voice value-in-dBm profile-name OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 633 Applying an RF Profile to AP Groups (GUI) Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 To configure the maximum number of clients to be allowed per AP radio, enter this command:

config rf-profile max-clients num-of-clients profile-name To configure the client trap threshold value, enter this command:

config rf-profile client-trap-threshold threshold-value profile-name To configure multicast, enter this command:

config rf-profile multicast data-rate rate profile-name To configure load balancing, enter this command:

config rf-profile load-balancing {window num-of-clients | denial value} profile-name To configure band select:

a) To configure the band select cycle count, enter this command:

config rf-profile band-select cycle-count max-num-of-cycles profile-name b) To configure the cycle threshold, enter this command:

config rf-profile band-select cycle-threshold time-in-milliseconds profile-name c) To configure the expiry of the band select, enter this command:

config rf-profile band-select expire {dual-band | suppression} time-in-seconds profile-name d) To configure the probe response, enter this command:

config rf-profile band-select probe-response {enable | disable} profile-name e) To configure the minimum RSSI for a client to respond to a probe, enter this command:

config rf-profile band-select client-rssi value-in-dBm profile-name Step 13 Configure the 802.11n only mode for an access point group base by entering this command:

config rf-profile 11n-client-only {enable | disable} rf-profile-name In the 802.11n only mode, the access point broadcasts support for 802.11n speeds. Only 802.11n clients are allowed to associate with the access point Applying an RF Profile to AP Groups (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 634 Choose WLANs > Advanced > AP Groups to open the AP Groups page. Click the AP Group Name to open the AP Group > Edit page. Click the RF Profile tab to configure the RF profile details. You can choose an RF profile for each band (802.11a/802.11b) or you can choose just one or none to apply to this group. Note Until you choose the APs and add them to the new group, no configurations are applied. You can save the new configuration as is, but no profiles are applied. Once you choose the APs to move the AP group, the process of moving the APs into the new group reboots the APs and the configurations for the RF profiles are applied to the APs in that AP group. Click the APs tab and choose the APs to add to the AP group. Click Add APs to add the selected APs to the AP group. A warning message displays that the AP group will reboot the APs will rejoin the controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Applying RF Profiles to AP Groups (CLI) Note APs cannot belong to two AP groups at once. Step 6 Click Apply. The APs are added to the AP Group. Applying RF Profiles to AP Groups (CLI) What to Do Next Use this command to apply RF profiles to AP groups:

config wlan apgroup profile-mapping {add | delete} ap-group-name rf-profile-name OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 635 Applying RF Profiles to AP Groups (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 636 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 94 Configuring Web Redirect with 8021.X Authentication Information About Web Redirect with 802.1X Authentication, page 637 Configuring the RADIUS Server (GUI), page 638 Configuring Web Redirect, page 639 Disabling Accounting Servers per WLAN (GUI), page 640 Disabling Coverage Hole Detection per WLAN, page 640 Information About Web Redirect with 802.1X Authentication You can configure a WLAN to redirect a user to a particular web page after 802.1X authentication has completed successfully. You can configure the web redirect to give the user partial or full access to the network. Conditional Web Redirect If you enable conditional web redirect, the user can be conditionally redirected to a particular web page after 802.1X authentication has completed successfully. You can specify the redirect page and the conditions under which the redirect occurs on your RADIUS server. Conditions might include the users password reaching expiration or the user needing to pay his or her bill for continued usage. If the RADIUS server returns the Cisco AV-pair url-redirect, then the user is redirected to the specified URL upon opening a browser. If the server also returns the Cisco AV-pair url-redirect-acl, the specified access control list (ACL) is installed as a preauthentication ACL for this client. The client is not considered fully authorized at this point and can only pass traffic allowed by the preauthentication ACL. After the client completes a particular operation at the specified URL (for example, changing a password or paying a bill), the client must reauthenticate. When the RADIUS server does not return a url-redirect, the client is considered fully authorized and allowed to pass traffic. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 637 Configuring the RADIUS Server (GUI) Note The conditional web redirect feature is available only for WLANs that are configured for 802.1X or WPA+WPA2 Layer 2 security. After you configure the RADIUS server, you can then configure the conditional web redirect on the controller using either the controller GUI or CLI. Splash Page Web Redirect If you enable splash page web redirect, the user is redirected to a particular web page after 802.1X authentication has completed successfully. After the redirect, the user has full access to the network. You can specify the redirect page on your RADIUS server. If the RADIUS server returns the Cisco AV-pair url-redirect, then the user is redirected to the specified URL upon opening a browser. The client is considered fully authorized at this point and is allowed to pass traffic, even if the RADIUS server does not return a url-redirect. Note The splash page web redirect feature is available only for WLANs that are configured for 802.1X or WPA+WPA2 Layer 2 security with 802.1x key management. Preshared key management is not supported with any Layer 2 security method. Suppose there are backend applications running on the wireless clients and they use HTTP or HTTPS port for their communication. If the applications start communicating before the actual web page is opened, the redirect functionality does not work with web passthrough. After you configure the RADIUS server, you can then configure the splash page web redirect on the controller using either the controller GUI or CLI. Configuring the RADIUS Server (GUI) Note These instructions are specific to the CiscoSecure ACS; however, they should be similar to those for other RADIUS servers. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 From the CiscoSecure ACS main menu, choose Group Setup. Click Edit Settings. From the Jump To drop-down list, choose RADIUS (Cisco IOS/PIX 6.0). Select the [009\001] cisco-av-pair check box. Enter the following Cisco AV-pairs in the [009\001] cisco-av-pair edit box to specify the URL to which the user is redirected and, if configuring conditional web redirect, the conditions under which the redirect takes place, respectively:

url-redirect=http://url url-redirect-acl=acl_name Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 638 OL-28744-01

 

 

Configuring Web Redirect Configuring Web Redirect Configuring Web Redirect (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the desired WLAN. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Choose the Security and Layer 2 tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 2) page. From the Layer 2 Security drop-down list, choose 802.1X or WPA+WPA2. Set any additional parameters for 802.1X or WPA+WPA2. Choose the Layer 3 tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 3) page. From the Layer 3 Security drop-down list, choose None. Check the Web Policy check box. Choose one of the following options to enable conditional or splash page web redirect: Conditional Web Redirect or Splash Page Web Redirect. The default value is disabled for both parameters. If the user is to be redirected to a site external to the controller, choose the ACL that was configured on your RADIUS server from the Preauthentication ACL drop-down list. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Web Redirect (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Enable or disable conditional web redirect by entering this command:

config wlan security cond-web-redir {enable | disable} wlan_id Enable or disable splash page web redirect by entering this command:

config wlan security splash-page-web-redir {enable | disable} wlan_id Save your settings by entering this command:

save config See the status of the web redirect features for a particular WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan_id Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 1 Profile Name..................................... test Network Name (SSID).............................. test

... Web Based Authentication......................... Disabled OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 639 Disabling Accounting Servers per WLAN (GUI) Web-Passthrough.................................. Disabled Conditional Web Redirect......................... Disabled Splash-Page Web Redirect......................... Enabled

... Disabling Accounting Servers per WLAN (GUI) Note Disabling accounting servers disables all accounting operations and prevents the controller from falling back to the default RADIUS server for the WLAN. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN to be modified. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Choose the Security and AAA Servers tabs to open the WLANs > Edit (Security > AAA Servers) page. Unselect the Enabled check box for the Accounting Servers. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Disabling Coverage Hole Detection per WLAN Note Coverage hole detection is enabled globally on the controller. Note You can disable coverage hole detection on a per-WLAN basis. When you disable coverage hole detection on a WLAN, a coverage hole alert is still sent to the controller, but no other processing is done to mitigate the coverage hole. This feature is useful for guest WLANs where guests are connected to your network for short periods of time and are likely to be highly mobile. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 640 OL-28744-01 Disabling Coverage Hole Detection per WLAN Disabling Coverage Hole Detection on a WLAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the profile name of the WLAN to be modified. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Choose the Advanced tab to display the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. Unselect the Coverage Hole Detection Enabled check box. Note OEAP 600 Series Access Points do not support coverage hole detection. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Disabling Coverage Hole Detection on a WLAN (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Disable coverage hole detection on a by entering this command:

config wlan chd wlan-id disable Note OEAP 600 Series Access Points do not support Coverage Hole detection. Save your settings by entering this command:

save config See the coverage hole detection status for a particular WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan wlan-id Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 2 Profile Name..................................... wlan2 Network Name (SSID).............................. 2

. CHD per WLAN.................................. Disabled OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 641 Disabling Coverage Hole Detection per WLAN Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 642 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 95 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration Prerequisites for NAC Out Of Band, page 643 Restrictions for NAC Out of Band, page 644 Information About NAC Out-of-Band Integration, page 645 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (GUI), page 645 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (CLI), page 647 Prerequisites for NAC Out Of Band CCA software release 4.5 or later releases is required for NAC out-of-band integration. Because the NAC appliance supports static VLAN mapping, you must configure a unique quarantine VLAN for each interface that is configured on the controller. For example, you might configure a quarantine VLAN of 110 on controller 1 and a quarantine VLAN of 120 on controller 2. However, if two WLANs or guest LANs use the same distribution system interface, they must use the same quarantine VLAN if they have one NAC appliance deployed in the network. The NAC appliance supports unique quarantine-to-access VLAN mapping. For a posture reassessment that is based on a session expiry, you must configure the session timeout on both the NAC appliance and the WLAN, making sure that the session expiry on the WLAN is greater than that on the NAC appliance. When a session timeout is configured on an open WLAN, the timing out of clients in the Quarantine state is determined by the timer on the NAC appliance. After the session timeout expires for WLANs that use web authentication, clients deauthenticate from the controller and must perform posture validation again. All Layer 2 and Layer 3 authentication occurs in the quarantine VLAN. To use external web authentication, you must configure the NAC appliance to allow HTTP traffic to and from external web servers and to allow the redirect URL in the quarantine VLAN. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 643 Restrictions for NAC Out of Band Note See the Cisco NAC appliance configuration guides for configuration instructions: http:/

/www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6128/products_installation_and_configuration_ guides_list.html. If you want to enable NAC on an access point group VLAN, you must first enable NAC on the WLAN. Then you can enable or disable NAC on the access point group VLAN. If you ever decide to disable NAC on the WLAN, be sure to disable it on the access point group VLAN as well. The NAC appliance supports up to 3500 users, and the controller supports up to 5000 users. Multiple NAC appliances might need to be deployed. If you want to enable NAC on an access point group VLAN, you must first enable NAC on the WLAN. Then you can enable or disable NAC on the access point group VLAN. If you ever decide to disable NAC on the WLAN, be sure to disable it on the access point group VLAN as well. The NAC appliance supports up to 3500 users, and the controller supports up to 5000 users. Multiple NAC appliances might need to be deployed. In controller software releases prior to 5.1, the controller integrates with the NAC appliance only in in-band mode, where the NAC appliance must remain in the data path. For in-band mode, a NAC appliance is required at each authentication location (such as at each branch or for each controller), and all traffic must traverse the NAC enforcement point. In controller software release 5.1 or later releases, the controller can integrate with the NAC appliance in out-of-band mode, where the NAC appliance remains in the data path only until clients have been analyzed and cleaned. Out-of-band mode reduces the traffic load on the NAC appliance and enables centralized NAC processing. NAC out-of-band integration is supported only on WLANs configured for FlexConnect central switching. It is not supported for use on WLANs configured for FlexConnect local switching. Restrictions for NAC Out of Band Network Admission Control (NAC) is supported on 10 percent of the total number of wireless clients supported on the controller. NAC out-of-band integration is not supported for use with the WLAN AAA override feature. In controller software releases prior to 5.1, the controller integrates with the NAC appliance only in in-band mode, where the NAC appliance must remain in the data path. For in-band mode, a NAC appliance is required at each authentication location (such as at each branch or for each controller), and all traffic must traverse the NAC enforcement point. In controller software release 5.1 or later releases, the controller can integrate with the NAC appliance in out-of-band mode, where the NAC appliance remains in the data path only until clients have been analyzed and cleaned. Out-of-band mode reduces the traffic load on the NAC appliance and enables centralized NAC processing. NAC out-of-band integration is supported only on WLANs configured for FlexConnect central switching. It is not supported for use on WLANs configured for FlexConnect local switching. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 644 OL-28744-01 Information About NAC Out-of-Band Integration Information About NAC Out-of-Band Integration The Cisco NAC Appliance, also known as Cisco Clean Access (CCA), is a network admission control (NAC) product that enables network administrators to authenticate, authorize, evaluate, and remediate wired, wireless, and remote users and their machines prior to allowing users onto the network. NAC identifies whether machines are compliant with security policies and repairs vulnerabilities before permitting access to the network. The NAC appliance is available in two modes: in-band and out-of-band. Customers can deploy both modes if desired, each geared toward certain types of access (in-band for supporting wireless users and out-of-band for supporting wired users, for example). To implement the NAC out-of-band feature on the controller, you must enable NAC support on the WLAN or guest LAN and then map this WLAN or guest LAN to an interface that is configured with a quarantine VLAN (untrusted VLAN) and an access VLAN (trusted VLAN). When a client associates and completes Layer 2 authentication, the client obtains an IP address from the access VLAN subnet, but the client state is Quarantine. While deploying the NAC out-of-band feature, be sure that the quarantine VLAN is allowed only between the Layer 2 switch on which the controller is connected and the NAC appliance and that the NAC appliance is configured with a unique quarantine-to-access VLAN mapping. Client traffic passes into the quarantine VLAN, which is trunked to the NAC appliance. After posture validation is completed, the client is prompted to take remedial action. After cleaning is completed, the NAC appliance updates the controller to change the client state from Quarantine to Access. The link between the controller and the switch is configured as a trunk, enabling the quarantine VLAN (110) and the access VLAN (10). On the Layer 2 switch, the quarantine traffic is trunked to the NAC appliance while the access VLAN traffic goes directly to the Layer 3 switch. Traffic that reaches the quarantine VLAN on the NAC appliance is mapped to the access VLAN based on a static mapping configuration. Figure 47: Example of NAC Out-of-Band Integration Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (GUI) Step 1 Configure the quarantine VLAN for a dynamic interface as follows:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 645 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (GUI) a) Choose Controller > Interfaces to open the Interfaces page. b) Click New to create a new dynamic interface. c) In the Interface Name text box, enter a name for this interface, such as quarantine. d) In the VLAN ID text box, enter a nonzero value for the access VLAN ID, such as 10. e) Click Apply to commit your changes. The Interfaces > Edit page appears. f) Select the Quarantine check box and enter a nonzero value for the quarantine VLAN ID, such as 110. Note We recommend that you configure unique quarantine VLANs throughout your network. If multiple controllers are configured in the same mobility group and access interfaces on all controllers are in the same subnet, it is mandatory to have the same quarantine VLAN if there is only one NAC appliance in the network. If multiple controllers are configured in the same mobility group and access interfaces on all controllers are in different subnets, it is mandatory to have different quarantine VLANs if there is only one NAC appliance in the network. g) Configure any remaining text boxes for this interface, such as the IP address, netmask, and default gateway. h) Click Apply to save your changes. Configure NAC out-of-band support on a WLAN or guest LAN as follows:

a) Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. b) Click the ID number of the desired WLAN or guest LAN. The WLANs > Edit page appears. c) Choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. d) Configure NAC out-of-band support for this WLAN or guest LAN by selecting the NAC State check box. To disable NAC out-of-band support, leave the check box unselected, which is the default value. e) Click Apply to commit your changes. Configure NAC out-of-band support for a specific access point group as follows:

a) Choose WLANs > Advanced > AP Groups to open the AP Groups page. b) Click the name of the desired access point group. c) Choose the WLANs tab to open the AP Groups > Edit (WLANs) page. d) Click Add New to assign a WLAN to this access point group. The Add New section appears at the top of the page. e) From the WLAN SSID drop-down list, choose the SSID of the WLAN. f) From the Interface Name drop-down list, choose the interface to which you want to map the access point group. Choose the quarantine VLAN if you plan to enable NAC out-of-band support. g) To enable NAC out-of-band support for this access point group, select the NAC State check box. To disable NAC out-of-band support, leave the check box unselected, which is the default value. h) Click Add to add this WLAN to the access point group. This WLAN appears in the list of WLANs assigned to this access point group. Note If you ever want to remove this WLAN from the access point group, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the WLAN and choose Remove. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. See the current state of the client (Quarantine or Access) as follows:

a) Choose Monitor > Clients to open the Clients page. b) Click the MAC address of the desired client to open the Clients > Detail page. The NAC state appears under the Security Information section. Note The client state appears as Invalid if the client is probing, has not yet associated to a WLAN, or cannot complete Layer 2 authentication. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 646 OL-28744-01 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (CLI) Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Configure the quarantine VLAN for a dynamic interface by entering this command:

config interface quarantine vlan interface_name vlan_id Note To disable the quarantine VLAN on an interface, enter 0 for the VLAN ID. You must configure a unique quarantine VLAN for each interface on the controller. Enable or disable NAC out-of-band support for a WLAN or guest LAN by entering this command:

config {wlan | guest-lan} nac {enable | disable} {wlan_id | guest_lan_id}

Enable or disable NAC out-of-band support for a specific access point group by entering this command:

config wlan apgroup nac {enable | disable} group_name wlan_id Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the configuration of a WLAN or guest LAN, including the NAC state by entering this command:

show {wlan wlan_ id | guest-lan guest_lan_id}

Information similar to the following appears:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 1 Profile Name..................................... wlan Network Name (SSID).............................. wlan Status........................................... Disabled MAC Filtering.................................... Disabled Broadcast SSID................................... Enabled AAA Policy Override.............................. Disabled Network Admission Control NAC-State...................................... Enabled Quarantine VLAN............................. 110

... Step 6 See the current state of the client (either Quarantine or Access) by entering this command:

show client detailed client_mac Information similar to the following appears:

Clients NAC state.................................. QUARANTINE Note The client state appears as Invalid if the client is probing, has not yet associated to a WLAN, or cannot complete Layer 2 authentication. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 647 Configuring NAC Out-of-Band Integration (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 648 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 96 Configuring Passive Clients Restrictions for Passive Clients, page 649 Information About Passive Clients, page 649 Configuring Passive Clients (GUI), page 650 Configuring Passive Clients (CLI), page 651 Restrictions for Passive Clients The passive client feature is not supported with the AP groups and FlexConnect centrally switched WLANs. Information About Passive Clients Passive clients are wireless devices, such as scales and printers that are configured with a static IP address. These clients do not transmit any IP information such as IP address, subnet mask, and gateway information when they associate with an access point. As a result, when passive clients are used, the controller never knows the IP address unless they use the DHCP. Wireless LAN controllers currently act as a proxy for ARP requests. Upon receiving an ARP request, the controller responds with an ARP response instead of passing the request directly to the client. This scenario has two advantages:

The upstream device that sends out the ARP request to the client will not know where the client is located. Power for battery-operated devices such as mobile phones and printers is preserved because they do not have to respond to every ARP requests. Since the wireless controller does not have any IP related information about passive clients, it cannot respond to any ARP requests. The current behavior does not allow the transfer of ARP requests to passive clients. Any application that tries to access a passive client will fail. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 649 Configuring Passive Clients (GUI) The passive client feature enables the ARP requests and responses to be exchanged between wired and wireless clients. This feature when enabled, allows the controller to pass ARP requests from wired to wireless clients until the desired wireless client gets to the RUN state. Configuring Passive Clients (GUI) Before You Begin To configure passive clients, you must enable multicast-multicast or multicast-unicast mode. Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > General to open the General page. Choose one of the following options from the AP Multicast Mode drop-down list:

UnicastConfigures the controller to use the unicast method to send multicast packets. This is the default value. MulticastConfigures the controller to use the multicast method to send multicast packets to a CAPWAP multicast group. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 From the AP Multicast Mode drop-down list, chooseMulticast. The Multicast Group Address text box is displayed. In the Multicast Group Address text box, enter the IP address of the multicast group. Click Apply. Enable global multicast mode as follows:

a) Choose Controller > Multicast. b) Select the Enable Global Multicast Mode check box. Enabling the Multicast-Multicast Mode (GUI) Before You Begin To configure passive clients, you must enable multicast-multicast or multicast-unicast mode. Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > General to open the General page. Choose one of the following options from the AP Multicast Mode drop-down list:

UnicastConfigures the controller to use the unicast method to send multicast packets. This is the default value. MulticastConfigures the controller to use the multicast method to send multicast packets to a CAPWAP multicast group. Step 3 From the AP Multicast Mode drop-down list, choose Multicast. The Multicast Group Address text box is displayed. It is not possible to configure the AP multicast mode for Cisco Flex 7500 Series controllers because only unicast Note is supported. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 650 OL-28744-01 Configuring Passive Clients (CLI) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 In the Multicast Group Address text box, enter the IP address of the multicast group. Click Apply. Enable global multicast mode as follows:

a) Choose Controller > Multicast. b) Select the Enable Global Multicast Mode check box. Enabling the Global Multicast Mode on Controllers (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Controller > Multicast to open the Multicast page. Note The Enable IGMP Snooping text box is highlighted only when you enable the Enable Global Multicast mode. The IGMP Timeout (seconds) text box is highlighted only when you enable the Enable IGMP Snooping text box. Select the Enable Global Multicast Mode check box to enable the multicast mode. This step configures the controller to use the multicast method to send multicast packets to a CAPWAP multicast group. Note It is not possible to configure Global Multicast Mode for Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controllers. Select the Enable IGMP Snooping check box to enable the IGMP snooping. The default value is disabled. In the IGMP Timeout text box to set the IGMP timeout, enter a value between 30 and 7200 seconds. Click Apply to commit your changes. Enabling the Passive Client Feature on the Controller (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose WLANs > WLANs > WLAN ID to open the WLANs > Edit page. By default, the General tab is displayed. Choose the Advanced tab. Select the Passive Client check box to enable the passive client feature. Click Apply to commit your changes. Configuring Passive Clients (CLI) Step 1 Enable multicasting on the controller by entering this command:

config network multicast global enable OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 651 Configuring Passive Clients (CLI) Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 The default value is disabled. Configure the controller to use multicast to send multicast to an access point by entering this command:

config network multicast mode multicast multicast_group_IP_address Configure passive client on a wireless LAN by entering this command:

config wlan passive-client {enable | disable} wlan_id Configure a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Display the passive client information on a particular WLAN by entering this command:

show wlan 2 Verify if the passive client is associated correctly with the AP and if the passive client has moved into the DHCP required state at the controller by entering this command:

debug client mac_address Display the detailed information for a client by entering this command:

show client detail mac_address Check if the client moves into the run state, when a wired client tries to contact the client by entering this command:

debug client mac_address Configure and check if the ARP request is forwarded from the wired side to the wireless side by entering this command:

debug arp all enable Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 652 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 97 Configuring Client Profiling Prerequisites for Configuring Client Profiling, page 653 Restrictions for Configuring Client Profiling, page 653 Information About Client Profiling, page 654 Configuring Client Profiling (GUI), page 654 Configuring Client Profiling (CLI), page 654 Prerequisites for Configuring Client Profiling By default, client profiling will be disabled on all WLANs. Client profiling is supported on access points that are in Local mode and FlexConnect mode. Both DHCP Proxy and DHCP Bridging mode on the controller are supported. Accounting Server configuration on the WLAN must be pointing at an ISE running 1.1 MnR or later releases. Cisco ACS does not support client profiling. The type of DHCP server used does not affect client profiling. If the DHCP_REQUEST packet contains a string that is found in the Profiled Devices list of the ISE, then the client will be profiled automatically. The client is identified based on the MAC address sent in the Accounting request packet. Only a MAC address should be sent as calling station ID in accounting packets when profiling is enabled. To enable client profiling, you must enable the DHCP required flag and disable the local authentication flag. Restrictions for Configuring Client Profiling Profiling is not supported for clients in the following scenarios:

Clients associating with FlexConnect mode APs in Standalone mode. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 653 Information About Client Profiling Clients associating with FlexConnect mode APs when local authentication is done with local switching is enabled. With profiling enabled for local switching FlexConnect mode APs, only VLAN override is supported as an AAA override attribute. While the controller parses the DHCP profiling information every time the client sends a request, the profiling information is sent to ISE only once. Information About Client Profiling When a client tries to associate with a WLAN, it is possible to determine the client type from the information received in the process. The controller acts as the collector of the information and sends the ISE with the required data in an optimal form. Configuring Client Profiling (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the WLAN ID. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Click the Advanced tab. In the Client Profiling area, do the following:

a) To profile clients based on DHCP, select the DHCP Profiling check box. b) To profile clients based on HTTP, select the HTTP Profiling check box. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring Client Profiling (CLI) Enable or disable client profiling for a WLAN based on DHCP by entering this command:

config wlan profiling radius dhcp {enable | disable} wlan-id Enable or disable client profiling in RADIUS mode for a WLAN based on HTTP, DHCP, or both by entering this command:

config wlan profiling radius {dhcp | http | all} {enable | disable} wlan-id Note Use the all parameter to configure client profiling based on both DHCP and HTTP. To see the status of client profiling on a WLAN, enter the following command:

show wlan wlan-id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 654 OL-28744-01 Configuring Client Profiling (CLI) To enable or disable debugging of client profiling, enter the following command:

debug profiling {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 655 Configuring Client Profiling (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 656 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 98 Configuring Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support Prerequisites for Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support, page 657 Restrictions for Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support, page 657 Information About Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support, page 657 Configuring Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI), page 658 Monitoring the Status of Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI), page 658 Prerequisites for Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support You must implement appropriate rule filtering on the new identity for the authentication server (RADIUS) because the controller sources traffic only from the selected interface. Restrictions for Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support callStationID is always in the APMAC:SSID format to comply with 802.1X over RADIUS RFC. This is also a legacy behavior. Web-auth can use different formats available in the config radius callStationIDType command. If AP groups or AAA override are used, the source interface remains the WLAN interface, and not what is specified on the new AP group or RADIUS profile configuration. Information About Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support By default, the controller sources all RADIUS traffic from the IP address on its management interface, which means that even if a WLAN has specific RADIUS servers configured instead of the global list, the identity used is the management interface IP address. If you want to filter WLANs, you can use the callStationID that is set by RFC 3580 to be in the APMAC:SSID format. You can also extend the filtering on the authentication server to be on a per-WLAN source interface by using the NAS-IP-Address attribute. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 657 Configuring Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI) When you enable the per-WLAN RADIUS source support, the controller sources all RADIUS traffic for a particular WLAN by using the dynamic interface that is configured. Also, RADIUS attributes are modified accordingly to match the identity. This feature virtualizes the controller on the per-WLAN RADIUS traffic, where each WLAN can have a separate layer 3 identity. This feature is useful in deployments that integrate with ACS Network Access Restrictions and Network Access Profiles. You can combine per-WLAN RADIUS source support with the normal RADIUS traffic source and some WLANs that use the management interface and others using the per-WLAN dynamic interface as the address source. Configuring Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Enter the config wlan disable wlan-id command to disable the WLAN. Enter the following command to enable or disable the per-WLAN RADIUS source support:

config wlan radius_server overwrite-interface {enable | disable} wlan-id Note When enabled, the controller uses the interface specified on the WLAN configuration as identity and source for all RADIUS related traffic on that WLAN. When disabled, the controller uses the management interface as the identity in the NAS-IP-Address attribute. If the RADIUS server is on a directly connected dynamic interface, the RADIUS traffic will be sourced from that interface. Otherwise, the management IP address is used. In all cases, the NAS-IP-Address attribute remains the management interface, unless the feature is enabled. Enter the config wlan enable wlan-id command to enable the WLAN. Note You can filter requests on the RADIUS server side using CiscoSecure ACS. You can filter (accept or reject) a request depending on the NAS-IP-Address attribute through a Network Access Restrictions rule. The filtering to be used is the CLI/DNIS filtering. Monitoring the Status of Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI) To see if the feature is enabled or disabled, enter the following command:

show wlan wlan-id Example The following example shows that the per-WLAN RADIUS source support is enabled on WLAN 1. show wlan 1 Information similar to the following is displayed:

WLAN Identifier.................................. 4 Profile Name..................................... example Network Name (SSID).............................. example Status........................................... Enabled MAC Filtering.................................... Disabled Broadcast SSID................................... Enabled AAA Policy Override.............................. Disabled Network Admission Control

... Radius Servers Authentication................................ Global Servers Accounting.................................... Global Servers Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 658 OL-28744-01 Monitoring the Status of Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI) Overwrite Sending Interface................... Enabled Local EAP Authentication......................... Disabled OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 659 Monitoring the Status of Per-WLAN RADIUS Source Support (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 660 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 99 Configuring Mobile Concierge Information About Mobile Concierge, page 661 Configuring 802.11u Mobility Services Advertisement Protocol, page 663 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot, page 664 Information About Mobile Concierge Mobile Concierge is a solution that enables 802.1X capable clients to interwork with external networks. The Mobile Concierge feature provides service availability information to clients and can help them to associate available networks. The services offered by the network can be broadly classified into two protocols:

802.11u MSAP 802.11u HotSpot 2.0 Configuring Mobile Concierge (802.11u) Configuring Mobile Concierge (802.11u) (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose WLAN to open the WLANs page. Hover your mouse over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired WLAN on which you want to configure the 802.11u parameters and select 802.11u. The 802.11u page appears. Select the 802.11u Status check box to enable 802.11u on the WLAN. In the 802.11u General Parameters area, do the following:

a) Select the Internet Access check box to enable this WLAN to provide Internet services. b) From the Network Type drop-down list, choose the network type that best describes the 802.11u you want to configure on this WLAN. c) From the Network Auth Type drop-down list, choose the authentication type that you want to configure for the 802.11u parameters on this network. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 661 Information About Mobile Concierge d) In the HESSID box, enter the homogenous extended service set identifier (HESSID) value. The HESSID is a 6-octet MAC address that identifies the homogeneous ESS. e) If the IP address is in the IPv4 format, then from the IPv4 Type drop-down list, choose the IPv4 address type. f) From the IPv6 Type drop-down list, choose whether you want to make the IPv6 address type available or not. In the OUI List area, do the following:

a) In the OUI text box, enter the Organizationally Unique Identifier, which can be a hexadecimal number represented in 3 or 5 bytes (6 or 10 characters). For example, AABBDF. b) Select the Is Beacon check box to enable the OUI beacon responses. Note You can have a maximum of 3 OUIs with this field enabled. c) From the OUI Index drop-down list, choose a value from 1 to 32. The default is 1. d) Click Add to add the OUI entry to the WLAN. To remove this entry, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down image and choose Remove. In the Domain List area, do the following:

a) In the Domain Name box, enter the domain name that is operating in the WLAN. b) From the Domain Index drop-down list, choose an index for the domain name from 1 to 32. The default is 1. c) Click Add to add the domain entry to the WLAN. To remove this entry, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down image and choose Remove. In the Realm List area, do the following:

a) In the Realm text box, enter the realm name that you can assign to the WLAN. b) From the Realm Index drop-down list, choose an index for the realm from 1 to 32. The default is 1. c) Click Add to add the domain entry to this WLAN. To remove this entry, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down image and choose Remove. In the Cellular Network Information List area, do the following:

a) In the Country Code text box, enter the 3-character mobile country code. b) From the CellularIndex drop-down list, choose a value between 1 and 32. The default is 1. c) In the Network Code text box, enter the character network code. The network code can be 2 or 3 characters. d) Click Add to add the cellular network information to the WLAN. To remove this entry, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down image and select Remove. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Click Apply. Configuring Mobile Concierge (802.11u) (CLI) To enable or disable 802.11u on a WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u {enable | disable} wlan-id To add or delete information about a third generation partnership project's cellular network, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u 3gpp-info {add index mobile-country-code network-code wlan-id | delete index wlan-id}

To configure the domain name for the entity operating in the 802.11u network, enter this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 662 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11u Mobility Services Advertisement Protocol config wlan hotspot dot11u domain {{{add | modify} wlan-id domain-index domain-name} | {delete wlan-id domain-index}}

To configure a homogenous extended service set identifier (HESSID) value for a WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u hessid hessid wlan-id The HESSID is a 6-octet MAC address that identifies the homogeneous ESS. To configure the IP address availability type for the IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses on the WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u ipaddr-type ipv4-type ipv6-type wlan-id To configure the network authentication type, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u auth-type network-auth wlan-id To configure the Roaming Consortium OI list, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u roam-oi {{{add | modify} wlan-id oi-index oi is-beacon} | {delete wlan-id oi-index}}

To configure the 802.11u network type and internet access, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u network-type wlan-id network-type internet-access To configure the realm for the WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u nai-realm {{{add | modify} realm-name wlan-id realm-index realm-name

| {delete realm-name wlan-id realm-index}}

To configure the authentication method for the realm, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u nai-realm {add | modify} auth-method wlan-id realm-index eap-index auth-index auth-method auth-parameter To delete the authentication method for the realm, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u nai-realm delete auth-method wlan-id realm-index eap-index auth-index To configure the extensible authentication protocol (EAP) method for the realm, enter this command:

config wlan hotpspot dot11u nai-realm {add | modify} eap-method wlan-id realm-index eap-index eap-method To delete the EAP method for the realm, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot dot11u nai-realm delete eap-method wlan-id realm-index eap-index Configuring 802.11u Mobility Services Advertisement Protocol Information About 802.11u MSAP MSAP (Mobility Services Advertisement Protocol) is designed to be used primarily by mobile devices that are configured with a set of policies for establishing network services. These services are available for devices that offer higher-layer services, or network services that are enabled through service providers. Service advertisements use MSAP to provide services to mobile devices prior to association to a Wi-Fi access network. This information is conveyed in a service advertisement. A single-mode or dual-mode mobile device queries the network for service advertisements before association. The device's network discovery and the selection function may use the service advertisements in its decision to join the network. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 663 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Configuring 802.11u MSAP (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose WLAN to open the WLANs page. Hover your mouse over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired WLAN on which you want to configure the MSAP parameters and select Service Advertisements. The Service Advertisement page appears. Enable the service advertisements. Enter the server index for this WLAN. The server index field uniquely identifies an MSAP server instance serving a venue that is reachable through the BSSID. Click Apply. Configuring MSAP (CLI) To enable or disable MSAP on a WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot msap {enable | disable} wlan-id To assign a server ID, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot msap server-id server-id wlan-id Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Information About 802.11u HotSpot This feature, which enables IEEE 802.11 devices to interwork with external networks, is typically found in hotspots or other public networks irrespective of whether the service is subscription based or free. The interworking service aids network discovery and selection, enabling information transfer from external networks. It provides information to the stations about the networks prior to association. Interworking not only helps users within the home, enterprise, and public access, but also assists manufacturers and operators to provide common components and services for IEEE 802.11 customers. These services are configured on a per WLAN basis on the controller. Configuring 802.11u HotSpot (GUI) Choose WLAN to open the WLANs page. Hover your mouse over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired WLAN on which you want to configure the HotSpot parameters and choose HotSpot. The WLAN > HotSpot 2.0 page appears. On the WLAN > HotSpot 2.0 page, enable HotSpot2. To set the WAN link parameters, do the following:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 664 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Step 5 Step 6 a) From the WAN Link Status drop-down list, choose the status. The default is the Not Configured status. b) From the WAN Symmetric Link Status drop-down list, choose the status as either Different or Same. c) Enter the WAN Downlink and Uplink speeds. The maximum value is 4,294,967,295 kbps. In the Operator Name List area, do the following:

a) In the Operator Name text box, enter the name of the 802.11 operator. b) From the Operator index drop-down list, choose an index value between 1 and 32 for the operator. c) In the Language Code text box, enter an ISO-14962-1997 encoded string defining the language. This string is a three-character language code. d) Click Add to add the operator details. The operator details are displayed in a tabular form. To remove an operator, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down arrow and choose Remove. In the Port Config List area, do the following:

a) From the IP Protocol drop-down list, choose the IP protocol that you want to enable. b) From the Port No drop-down list, choose the port number that is enabled on the WLAN. c) From the Status drop-down list, choose the status of the port. d) From the Index drop-down list, choose an index value for the port configuration. e) Click Add to add the port configuration parameters. To remove a port configuration list, hover your mouse pointer over the blue drop-down arrow and choose Remove. Step 7 Click Apply. Configuring HotSpot 2.0 (CLI) To enable or disable HotSpot2 on a WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot hs2 {enable | disable}

To configure the operator name on a WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot hs2 operator-name {add | modify} wlan-id index operator-name lang-code The following options are available:

wlan-idThe WLAN ID on which you want to configure the operator-name. indexThe operator index of the operator. The range is 1 to 32. operator-nameThe name of the 802.11an operator. lang-codeThe language used. An ISO-14962-1997 encoded string defining the language. This string is a three character language code. Enter the first three letters of the language in English

(For example: eng for English). Tip Press the tab key after entering a keyword or argument to get a list of valid values for the command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 665 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot To delete the operator name, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot hs2 operator-name delete wlan-id index To configure the port configuration parameters, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot hs2 port-config {add | modify} wlan-id index ip-protocol port-number To delete a port configuration, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot hs2 port-config delete wlan-id index To configure the WAN metrics, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot hs2 wan-metrics wlan-id link-status symet-link downlink-speed uplink-speed The values are as follows:

link-status The link status. The valid range is 1 to 3. symet-linkThe symmetric link status. For example, you can configure the uplink and downlink to have different speeds or same speeds. downlink-speedThe downlink speed. The maximum value is 4,194,304 kbps. uplink-speedThe uplink speed. The maximum value is 4,194,304 kbps. To clear all HotSpot configurations, enter this command:

config wlan hotspot clear-all wlan-id To configure the Access Network Query Protocol (ANQP) 4-way messaging, enter this command:

config advanced hotspot anqp-4way {enable | disable | threshold value}

To configure the ANQP comeback delay value in terms of TUs, enter this command:

config advanced hotpsot cmbk-delay value To configure the gratuitous ARP (GARP) forwarding to wireless networks, enter this command:

config advanced hotpsot garp {enable | disable}

To limit the number of GAS request action frames to be sent to the controller by an AP in a given interval, enter this command:

config advanced hotspot gas-limit {enable num-of-GAS-required interval | disable}

Configuring Access Points for HotSpot2 (GUI) When HotSpot2 is configured, the access points that are part of the network must be configured to support HotSpot2. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Click Wireless > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the AP Name link to configure the HotSpot parameters on the desired access point. The AP Details page appears. Under the General Tab, configure the following parameters:

Venue GroupThe venue category that this access point belongs to. The following options are available:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 666 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Unspecified Assembly Business Educational Factory and Industrial Institutional Mercantile Residential Storage Utility and Misc Vehicular Outdoor Venue TypeDepending on the venue category selected above, the venue type drop-down list displays options for the venue type. Venue NameVenue name that you can provide to the access point. This name is associated with the BSS. This is used in cases where the SSID does not provide enough information about the venue. LanguageThe language used. An ISO-14962-1997 encoded string defining the language. This is a three character language code. Enter the first three letters of the language in English (For example, eng for English). Step 4 Click Apply. Configuring Access Points for HotSpot2 (CLI) config ap venue add venue-name venue-group venue-type lang-code ap-nameAdds the venue details to the access point indicating support for HotSpot2. The values are as follows:

venue-nameName of the venue where this access point is located. venue-groupCategory of the venue. See the following table. venue-typeType of the venue. Depending on the venue-group chosen, select the venue type. See the following table. lang-codeThe language used. An ISO-14962-1997 encoded string defining the language. This is a three character language code. Enter the first three letters of the language in English (For example: eng for English) ap-nameAccess point name. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 667 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Tip Press the tab key after entering a keyword or argument to get a list of valid values for the command. config ap venue delete ap-nameDeletes the venue related information from the access point. Table 20: Venue Group Mapping Venue Group Name UNSPECIFIED ASSEMBLY Value 0 1 Venue Type for Group 0UNSPECIFIED ASSEMBLY 1ARENA 2STADIUM 3PASSENGER TERMINAL (E.G., AIRPORT, BUS, FERRY, TRAIN STATION) 4AMPHITHEATER 5AMUSEMENT PARK 6PLACE OF WORSHIP 7CONVENTION CENTER 8LIBRARY 9MUSEUM 10RESTAURANT 11THEATER 12BAR 13COFFEE SHOP 14ZOO OR AQUARIUM 15EMERGENCY COORDINATION CENTER Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 668 OL-28744-01 Venue Group Name BUSINESS Value 2 EDUCATIONAL FACTORY-INDUSTRIAL INSTITUTIONAL 3 4 5 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Venue Type for Group 0UNSPECIFIED BUSINESS 1DOCTOR OR DENTIST OFFICE 2BANK 3FIRE STATION 4POLICE STATION 6POST OFFICE 7PROFESSIONAL OFFICE 8RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT FACILITY 9ATTORNEY OFFICE 0UNSPECIFIED EDUCATIONAL 1SCHOOL, PRIMARY 2SCHOOL, SECONDARY 3UNIVERSITY OR COLLEGE 0UNSPECIFIED FACTORY AND INDUSTRIAL 1FACTORY 0UNSPECIFIED INSTITUTIONAL 1HOSPITAL 2LONG-TERM CARE FACILITY (E.G., NURSING HOME, HOSPICE, ETC.) 3ALCOHOL AND DRUG RE-HABILITATION CENTER 4GROUP HOME 5PRISON OR JAIL OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 669 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Venue Group Name MERCANTILE Value 6 RESIDENTIAL 7 STORAGE UTILITY-MISC VEHICULAR 8 9 10 Venue Type for Group 0UNSPECIFIED MERCANTILE 1RETAIL STORE 2GROCERY MARKET 3AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE STATION 4SHOPPING MALL 5GAS STATION 0UNSPECIFIED RESIDENTIAL 1PRIVATE RESIDENCE 2HOTEL OR MOTEL 3DORMITORY 4BOARDING HOUSE UNSPECIFIED STORAGE 0UNSPECIFIED UTILITY AND MISCELLANEOUS 0UNSPECIFIED VEHICULAR 1AUTOMOBILE OR TRUCK 2AIRPLANE 3BUS 4FERRY 5SHIP OR BOAT 6TRAIN 7MOTOR BIKE Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 670 OL-28744-01 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Venue Group Name OUTDOOR Value 11 Venue Type for Group 0UNSPECIFIED OUTDOOR 1MUNI-MESH NETWORK 2CITY PARK 3REST AREA 4TRAFFIC CONTROL 5BUS STOP 6KIOSK OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 671 Configuring 802.11u HotSpot Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 672 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 100 Configuring Assisted Roaming Restrictions for Assisted Roaming, page 673 Information About Assisted Roaming, page 673 Configuring Assisted Roaming (CLI), page 674 Restrictions for Assisted Roaming This feature must be implemented only if you are using one controller. The assisted roaming feature is not supported across multiple controllers. This feature is supported only on 802.11n capable indoor access points. For a single band configuration, a maximum of 6 neighbors are visible in a neighbor list. For dual band configuration, a maximum of 12 neighbors are visible. You can configure assisted roaming only using the controller CLI. Configuration using the controller GUI is not supported. Information About Assisted Roaming The 802.11k standard allows clients to request neighbor reports containing information about known neighbor access points that are candidates for a service set transition. The use of the 802.11k neighbor list can limit the need for active and passive scanning. The assisted roaming feature is based on an intelligent and client optimized neighbor list. Unlike the Cisco Client Extension (CCX) neighbor list, the 802.11k neighbor list is generated dynamically on-demand and is not maintained on the controller. The 802.11k neighbor list is based on the location of the clients without requiring the mobility services engine (MSE). Two clients on the same controller but different APs can have different neighbor lists delivered depending on their individual relationship with the surrounding APs. By default, the neighbor list contains only neighbors in the same band with which the client is associated. However, a switch exists that allows 802.11k to return neighbors in both bands. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 673 Configuring Assisted Roaming (CLI) Clients send requests for neighbor lists only after associating with the APs that advertize the RRM (Radio Resource Management) capability information element (IE) in the beacon. The neighbor list includes information about BSSID, channel, and operation details of the neighboring radios. Assembling and Optimizing the Neighbor List When the controller receives a request for an 802.11k neighbor list, the following occurs:

1 The controller searches the RRM neighbor table for a list of neighbors on the same band as the AP with which the client is currently associated with. 2 The controller checks the neighbors according to the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) between the APs, the current location of the present AP, the floor information of the neighboring AP from Cisco Prime Infrastructure, and roaming history information on the controller to reduce the list of neighbors to six per band. The list is optimized for APs on the same floor. Assisted Roaming for Non-802.11k Clients It is also possible to optimize roaming for non-802.11k clients. You can generate a prediction neighbor list for each client without the client requiring to send an 802.11k neighbor list request. When this is enabled on a WLAN, after each successful client association/reassociation, the same neighbor list optimization is applied on the non-802.11k client to generate the neighbor list and store the list in the mobile station software data structure. Clients at different locations have different lists because the client probes are seen with different RSSI values by different neighbors. Because clients usually probe before any association or reassociation, this list is constructed with the most updated probe data and predicts the next AP that the client is likely to roam to. We discourage clients from roaming to those less desirable neighbors by denying association if the association request to an AP does not match the entries on the stored prediction neighbor list. Similar to aggressive load balancing, there is a switch to turn on the assisted roaming feature both on a per-WLAN basis and globally. The following options are available:

Denial countMaximum number of times a client is refused association. Prediction thresholdMinimum number of entries required in the prediction list for the assisted roaming feature to be activated. Because both load balancing and assisted roaming are designed to influence the AP that a client associates with, it is not possible to enable both the options at the same time on a WLAN. Configuring Assisted Roaming (CLI) Configure an 802.11k neighbor list for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan assisted-roaming neighbor-list {enable | disable} wlan-id Configure neighbor floor label bias by entering this command:

config assisted-roaming floor-bias dBm Configure a dual-band 802.11k neighbor list for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan assisted-roaming dual-list {enable | disable} wlan-id Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 674 OL-28744-01 Configuring Assisted Roaming (CLI) Note Default is the band which the client is using to associate. Configure assisted roaming prediction list feature for a WLAN by entering this command:

config wlan assisted-roaming prediction {enable | disable} wlan-id Note A warning message is displayed and load-balancing is disabled for the WLAN if load-balancing is already enabled for the WLAN. Configure the minimum number of predicted APs required for the prediction list feature to be activated by entering this command:

config assisted-roaming prediction-minimum count Note If the number of the AP in the prediction assigned to the client is less than the number that you specify, the assisted roaming feature will not apply on this roam. Configure the maximum number of times a client can be denied association if the association request is sent to an AP does not match any AP on the prediction list by entering this command:

config assisted-roaming denial-maximum count Debug a client for assisted roaming by entering this command:

debug mac addr client-mac-addr Configure debugging of all of the 802.11k events by entering this command:

debug 11k all {enable | disable}

Configure debugging of neighbor details by entering this command:

debug 11k detail {enable | disable}

Configure debugging of 802.11k errors by entering this command:

debug 11k errors {enable | disable}

See if the neighbor requests are being received by entering this command:

debug 11k events {enable | disable}

Configure debugging of the roaming history of clients by entering this command:

debug 11k history {enable | disable}

Configure debugging of 802.11k optimizations by entering this command:

debug 11k optimization {enable | disable}

Get details of client roaming parameters that are to be imported for offline simulation use by entering this command:

debug 11k simulation {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 675 Configuring Assisted Roaming (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 676 OL-28744-01 P A R T VI Controlling Lightweight Access Points Using Access Point Communication Protocols, page 679 Searching for Access Points, page 687 Searching for Access Point Radios, page 695 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points, page 697 Configuring Authentication for Access Points, page 701 Configuring Embedded Access Points, page 705 Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode, page 707 Configuring Packet Capture, page 729 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points, page 733 Using Cisco Workgroup Bridges, page 751 Using Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges, page 757 Configuring Backup Controllers, page 759 Configuring High Availability, page 765 Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points, page 773 Configuring AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count, page 777 Configuring Country Codes, page 781 Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points, page 785 Configuring Probe Request Forwarding, page 787 Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points, page 789 Performing a Link Test, page 791 Configuring Link Latency, page 795 Configuring the TCP MSS, page 799 Configuring Power Over Ethernet, page 801 Viewing Clients, page 807 Configuring LED States for Access Points, page 809 Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios, page 813 C H A P T E R 101 Using Access Point Communication Protocols Information About Access Point Communication Protocols, page 679 Restrictions for Access Point Communication Protocols, page 680 Configuring Data Encryption, page 680 Viewing CAPWAP Maximum Transmission Unit Information, page 683 Debugging CAPWAP, page 683 Controller Discovery Process, page 684 Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller, page 685 Information About Access Point Communication Protocols Cisco lightweight access points use the IETF standard Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol (CAPWAP) to communicate with the controller and other lightweight access points on the network. CAPWAP, which is based on LWAPP, is a standard, interoperable protocol that enables a controller to manage a collection of wireless access points. CAPWAP is implemented in controller for these reasons:

To provide an upgrade path from Cisco products that use LWAPP to next-generation Cisco products that use CAPWAP To manage RFID readers and similar devices To enable controllers to interoperate with third-party access points in the future LWAPP-enabled access points can discover and join a CAPWAP controller, and conversion to a CAPWAP controller is seamless. For example, the controller discovery process and the firmware downloading process when using CAPWAP are the same as when using LWAPP. The one exception is for Layer 2 deployments, which are not supported by CAPWAP. You can deploy CAPWAP controllers and LWAPP controllers on the same network. The CAPWAP-enabled software allows access points to join either a controller running CAPWAP or LWAPP. The only exceptions are that the Cisco Aironet 1040, 1140, 1260, 3500, and 3600 Series Access Points, which support only CAPWAP and join only controllers that run CAPWAP. For example, an 1130 series access point can join a controller running either CAPWAP or LWAPP where an1140 series access point can join only a controller that runs CAPWAP. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 679 Restrictions for Access Point Communication Protocols The following are some guidelines that you must follow for access point communication protocols:

If your firewall is currently configured to allow traffic only from access points using LWAPP, you must change the rules of the firewall to allow traffic from access points using CAPWAP. Ensure that the CAPWAP UDP ports 5246 and 5247 (similar to the LWAPP UDP ports 12222 and 12223) are enabled and are not blocked by an intermediate device that could prevent an access point from joining the controller. If access control lists (ACLs) are in the control path between the controller and its access points, you need to open new protocol ports to prevent access points from being stranded. Restrictions for Access Point Communication Protocols On virtual controller platforms, per-client downstream rate limiting is not supported in FlexConnect central switching. Rate-limiting is applicable to all traffic destined to the CPU from either direction (wireless or wired). We recommend that you always run the controller with the default config advanced rate enable command in effect to rate limit traffic to the controller and protect against denial-of-service (DoS) attacks. You can use the config advanced rate disable command to stop rate-limiting of Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo responses for testing purposes. However, we recommend that you reapply the config advanced rate enable command after testing is complete. Ensure that the controllers are configured with the correct date and time. If the date and time configured on the controller precedes the creation and installation date of certificates on the access points, the access point fails to join the controller. Configuring Data Encryption Cisco 5500 Series Controllers enable you to encrypt CAPWAP control packets (and optionally, CAPWAP data packets) that are sent between the access point and the controller using Datagram Transport Layer Security

(DTLS). DTLS is a standards-track Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) protocol based on TLS. CAPWAP control packets are management packets exchanged between a controller and an access point while CAPWAP data packets encapsulate forwarded wireless frames. CAPWAP control and data packets are sent over separate UDP ports: 5246 (control) and 5247 (data). If an access point does not support DTLS data encryption, DTLS is enabled only for the control plane, and a DTLS session for the data plane is not established. Guidelines for Data Encryption Cisco 1130 and 1240 series access points support DTLS data encryption with software-based encryption. Cisco 1040, 1140, 1250, 1260, 1530, 1550, 1600, 2600, 3500, and 3600 series access points support DTLS data encryption with hardware-based encryption Cisco Aironet 1552 and 1522 outdoor access points support data DTLS. DTLS data encryption is not supported on Cisco Aironet 700 Series Access Points. DTLS data encryption is enabled automatically for OfficeExtend access points but disabled by default for all other access points. Most access points are deployed in a secure network within a company Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 680 OL-28744-01 Configuring Data Encryption building, so data encryption is not necessary. In contrast, the traffic between an OfficeExtend access point and the controller travels through an unsecure public network, so data encryption is more important for these access points. When data encryption is enabled, traffic is encrypted at the access point before it is sent to the controller and at the controller before it is sent to the client. Encryption limits throughput at both the controller and the access point, and maximum throughput is desired for most enterprise networks. In a Cisco unified local wireless network environment, do not enable DTLS on the Cisco 1130 and 1240 access points, as it may result in severe throughput degradation and may render the APs unusable. See the OfficeExtend Access Points section for more information on OfficeExtend access points. You can use the controller to enable or disable DTLS data encryption for a specific access point or for all access points. The availability of data DTLS is as follows:

The Cisco 5500 Series Controller will be available with two licenses options: One that allows data DTLS without any license requirements and another image that requires a license to use data DTLS. See the Upgrading or Downgrading DTLS Images for Cisco 5500 Series Controllers section. The images for the DTLS and licensed DTLS images are as follows:

Licensed DTLSAS_5500_LDPE_x_x_x_x.aes Non licensed DTLSAS_5500_x_x_x_x.aes Cisco 2500, Cisco WiSM2By default, these platforms do not contain DTLS. To turn on data DTLS, you must install a license. These platforms have a single image with data DTLS turned off. To use data DTLS you must have a license. If your controller does not have a data DTLS license and if the access point associated with the controller has DTLS enabled, the data path will be unencrypted. Non-Russian customers using Cisco 5508 Series Controller do not need data DTLS license. However all customers using WISM2 and Cisco 2500 Series Controllers must enable data DTLS. Upgrading or Downgrading DTLS Images for Cisco 5500 Series Controllers Step 1 The upgrade operation fails on the first attempt with a warning indicating that the upgrade to a licensed DTLS image is irreversible. Note Do not reboot the controller after Step 1. Step 2 On a subsequent attempt, the license is applied and the image is successfully updated. Guidelines When Upgrading to or from a DTLS Image You cannot install a regular image (nonlicensed data DTLS) once a licensed data DTLS image is installed. You can upgrade from one licensed DTLS image to another licensed DTLS image. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 681 Configuring Data Encryption You can upgrade from a regular image (DTLS) to a licensed DTLS image in a two step process. You can use the show sysinfo command to verify the LDPE image, before and after the image upgrade. Configuring Data Encryption (GUI) Ensure that the base license is installed on the Cisco 5500 Series Controller. Once the license is installed, you can enable data encryption for the access points. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the access point for which you want to enable data encryption. Choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Select the Data Encryption check box to enable data encryption for this access point or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is unselected. Note Changing the data encryption mode requires the access points to rejoin the controller. Step 5 Step 6 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring Data Encryption (CLI) Note In images without a DTLS license, the config or show commands are not available. To enable DTLS data encryption for access points on the controller using the controller CLI, follow these steps:

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Enable or disable data encryption for all access points or a specific access point by entering this command:

config ap link-encryption {enable | disable} {all | Cisco_AP}

The default value is disabled. Note Changing the data encryption mode requires the access points to rejoin the controller. When prompted to confirm that you want to disconnect the access point(s) and attached client(s), enter Y. Enter the save config command to save your configuration. See the encryption state of all access points or a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap link-encryption {all | Cisco_AP}

This command also shows authentication errors, which tracks the number of integrity check failures, and replay errors, which tracks the number of times that the access point receives the same packet. Step 5 See a summary of all active DTLS connections by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 682 OL-28744-01 Viewing CAPWAP Maximum Transmission Unit Information show dtls connections Note If you experience any problems with DTLS data encryption, enter the debug dtls {all | event | trace | packet}

{enable | disable} command to debug all DTLS messages, events, traces, or packets. Viewing CAPWAP Maximum Transmission Unit Information See the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the CAPWAP path on the controller by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP The MTU specifies the maximum size of any packet (in bytes) in a transmission. Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 9 Cisco AP Name.................................... Maria-1250 Country code..................................... US - United States Regulatory Domain allowed by Country............. 802.11bg:-A AP Country code.................................. US - United States AP Regulatory Domain............................. 802.11bg:-A Switch Port Number .............................. 1 MAC Address...................................... 00:1f:ca:bd:bc:7c IP Address Configuration......................... DHCP IP Address....................................... 1.100.163.193 IP NetMask....................................... 255.255.255.0 CAPWAP Path MTU.................................. 1485 802.11a:-A 802.11a:-A Debugging CAPWAP Use these commands to obtain CAPWAP debug information:

debug capwap events {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of CAPWAP events. debug capwap errors {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of CAPWAP errors. debug capwap detail {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of CAPWAP details. debug capwap info {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of CAPWAP information. debug capwap packet {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of CAPWAP packets. debug capwap payload {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of CAPWAP payloads. debug capwap hexdump {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of the CAPWAP hexadecimal dump. debug capwap dtls-keepalive {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of CAPWAP DTLS data keepalive packets. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 683 Controller Discovery Process Controller Discovery Process In a CAPWAP environment, a lightweight access point discovers a controller by using CAPWAP discovery mechanisms and then sends the controller a CAPWAP join request. The controller sends the access point a CAPWAP join response allowing the access point to join the controller. When the access point joins the controller, the controller manages its configuration, firmware, control transactions, and data transactions. The following are some guidelines for the controller discovery process:

Upgrade and downgrade paths from LWAPP to CAPWAP or from CAPWAP to LWAPP are supported. An access point with an LWAPP image starts the discovery process in LWAPP. If it finds an LWAPP controller, it starts the LWAPP discovery process to join the controller. If it does not find a LWAPP controller, it starts the discovery in CAPWAP. If the number of times that the discovery process starts with one discovery type (CAPWAP or LWAPP) exceeds the maximum discovery count and the access point does not receive a discovery response, the discovery type changes to the other type. For example, if the access point does not discover the controller in LWAPP, it starts the discovery process in CAPWAP. If an access point is in the UP state and its IP address changes, the access point tears down the existing CAPWAP tunnel and rejoins the controller. To configure the IP addresses that the controller sends in its CAPWAP discovery responses, use the config network ap-discovery nat-ip-only {enable | disable} command. Access points must be discovered by a controller before they can become an active part of the network. The lightweight access points support the following controller discovery processes:

Layer 3 CAPWAP or LWAPP discoveryThis feature can be enabled on different subnets from the access point and uses IP addresses and UDP packets rather the MAC addresses used by Layer 2 discovery. Locally stored controller IP address discoveryIf the access point was previously associated to a controller, the IP addresses of the primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers are stored in the access points nonvolatile memory. This process of storing controller IP addresses on an access point for later deployment is called priming the access point. DHCP server discoveryThis feature uses DHCP option 43 to provide controller IP addresses to the access points. Cisco switches support a DHCP server option that is typically used for this capability. For more information about DHCP option 43, see the Using DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 section. DNS discoveryThe access point can discover controllers through your domain name server

(DNS). You must configure your DNS to return controller IP addresses in response to CISCO-LWAPP-CONTROLLER.localdomain or CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER.localdomain, where localdomain is the access point domain name. When an access point receives an IP address and DNS information from a DHCP server, it contacts the DNS to resolve CISCO-LWAPP-CONTROLLER.localdomain or CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER.localdomain. When the DNS sends a list of controller IP addresses, the access point sends discovery requests to the controllers. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 684 OL-28744-01 Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller Restrictions for Controller Discovery Process During the discovery process, the 1040, 1140, 1260, 3500, and 3600 series access points will only query for Cisco CAPWAP Controllers. It will not query for LWAPP controllers. If you want these access points to query for both LWAPP and CAPWAP controllers then you need to update the DNS. Ensure that the controller is set to the current time. If the controller is set to a time that has already occurred, the access point might not join the controller because its certificate may not be valid for that time. Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller When replacing a controller, ensure that access points join the new controller. Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Configure the new controller as a master controller as follows:

a) Choose Controller > Advanced > Master Controller Mode to open the Master Controller Configuration page. b) Select the Master Controller Mode check box. c) Click Apply to commit your changes. d) Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

(Optional) Flush the ARP and MAC address tables within the network infrastructure. Restart the access points. Once all the access points have joined the new controller, configure the controller not to be a master controller by unselecting the Master Controller Mode check box on the Master Controller Configuration page. Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller (CLI) Configure the new controller as a master controller by entering this command:

config network master-base enable

(Optional) Flush the ARP and MAC address tables within the network infrastructure. Restart the access points. Configure the controller not to be a master controller after all the access points have joined the new controller by entering this command:

config network master-base disable OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 685 Verifying that Access Points Join the Controller Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 686 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 102 Searching for Access Points Information About Searching for Access Points, page 687 Searching the AP Filter (GUI), page 687 Monitoring the Interface Details, page 690 Searching for Access Point Radios, page 692 Information About Searching for Access Points You can search for specific access points in the list of access points on the All APs page. To do so, you create a filter to display only access points that meet certain criteria (such as MAC address, status, access point mode, and certificate type). This feature is especially useful if your list of access points spans multiple pages, preventing you from viewing them all at once. Searching the AP Filter (GUI) Step 1 Choose Monitor > Access Point Summary> All APs > Details to open the All APs page. This page lists all of the access points joined to the controller. For each access point, you can see its name, MAC address, uptime, status, operating mode, certificates, OfficeExtend access point status, and access point submode. The total number of access points appears in the upper right-hand corner of the page. If the list of access points spans multiple pages, you can access these pages by clicking the page number links. Each page shows up to 20 access points. Step 2 Step 3 Click Change Filter to open the Search AP dialog box. Select one or more of the following check boxes to specify the criteria used when displaying access points:

MAC AddressThe MAC address of an access point. Note When you enable the MAC Address filter, the other filters are disabled automatically. When you enable any of the other filters, the MAC Address filter is disabled automatically. AP NameEnter the name of an access point. AP ModelEnter the model name of an access point. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 687 Searching the AP Filter (GUI) Operating StatusSelect one or more of the following check boxes to specify the operating status of the access points:

UPThe access point is up and running. DOWNThe access point is not operational. REGThe access point is registered to the controller. DEREGThe access point is not registered to the controller. DOWNLOADThe controller is downloading its software image to the access point. Port NumberEnter the controller port number to which the access point is connected. Admin StatusChoose Enabled or Disabled to specify whether the access points are enabled or disabled on the controller. AP ModeSelect one or more of the following options to specify the operating mode of the access points:

LocalThe default option. Note The 600 OEAP series access point uses only local mode. When an access point in local mode connects to a Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller, it does not serve clients. The access point details are available in the controller. To enable an access point to serve clients or perform monitoring-related tasks when connected to the Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller, the access point mode must be in FlexConnect or monitor mode. Use the following command to automatically convert access points to a FlexConnect mode or monitor mode on joining the controller:

config ap autoconvert {flexconnect | monitor | disable}

All access points that connect to the controller will either be converted to FlexConnect mode or monitor mode depending on the configuration provided. FlexConnectThis mode is used for 1040, 1130, 1140, 1240, 1250, 1260, 1600, 2600, 3500, 3600, and 800 access points. REAPThis mode is the remote edge lightweight access point. MonitorThis mode is the monitor-only mode. Rogue DetectorThis mode monitors the rogue APs on wire. It does not transmit or receive frames over the air or contain rogue APs. Note Information about rogues that are detected is not shared between controllers. Therefore, we recommend that every controller has its own connected rogue detector AP when rogue detector APs are used. SnifferThe access point starts sniffing the air on a given channel. It captures and forwards all the packets from the clients on that channel to a remote machine that runs Airopeek or Wireshark (packet analyzers for IEEE 802.11 wireless LANs). It includes information on the time stamp, signal strength, packet size, and so on. Note The Bridge option is displayed only if the AP is bridge capable. If the AP mode is set to Bridge and the AP is not REAP capable, an error appears. Note BridgeThis mode sets the AP mode to Bridge if you are connecting a Root AP. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 688 OL-28744-01 Searching the AP Filter (GUI) SE-ConnectThis mode allows you to connect to spectrum expert and it allows the access point to perform spectrum intelligence. Note The AP3500 and the AP3600 support the spectrum intelligence and AP1260 does not support the spectrum intelligence. When an access point is configured in SE-Connect mode, the access point reboots and rejoins the controller. Access points that are configured in this mode do not serve the client. Note Certificate TypeSelect one or more of the following check boxes to specify the types of certificates installed on the access points:

MICManufactured-installed certificate SSCSelf-signed certificate LSCLocal significant certificate Note See the Authorizing Access Points section for more information about these certificate types. Primary S/W VersionSelect this check box to enter the primary software version number Backup S/W VersionSelect this check box to enter the secondary software version number. Step 4 Click Apply. Only the access points that match your search criteria appear on the All APs page, and the Current Filter parameter at the top of the page specifies the filter used to generate the list (for example, MAC Address:00:1d:e5:54:0e:e6, AP Name:pmsk-ap, Operational Status: UP, Status: Enabled, and so on). Note If you want to remove the filters and display the entire access point list, click Clear Filter. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 689 Monitoring the Interface Details Monitoring the Interface Details Step 1 Step 2 Choose Monitor > Summary > All APs. The All APs > Details page appears. Click the Interfaces tab. Figure 48: Interfaces Tab Step 3 Step 4 Click on the available Interface name. The Interface Details page appears. The Interface Details page displays the following parameter details. Table 21: Interfaces Parameters Details Button AP Name Link Speed RX Bytes Description Name of the access point. Speed of the interference in Mbps. Total number of bytes in the error-free packets received on the interface. RX Unicast Packets Total number of unicast packets received on the interface. RX Non-Unicast Packets Total number of nonunicast or multicast packets received on the interface. Input CRC Input Errors Total number of CRC error in packets while receiving on the interface. Sum of all errors in the packets while receiving on the interface. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 690 OL-28744-01 Monitoring the Interface Details Button Input Overrun Description Number of times the receiver hardware was incapable of handling received data to a hardware buffer because the input rate exceeded the receivers capability to handle that data. Input Resource Total number of resource errors in packets received on the interface. Runts Throttle Number of packets that are discarded because they are similar to the mediums minimum packet size. Total number of times the interface advised a sending NIC that it was overwhelmed by packets being sent and to slow the pace of delivery. Output Collision Total number of packet retransmitted due to an Ethernet collision. Output Resource Resource errors in packets transmitted on the interface. Output Errors Errors that prevented the final transmission of packets out of the interface. Operational Status Operational state of the physical ethernet interface on the AP. Duplex TX Bytes Interfaces duplex mode. Number of bytes in the error-free packets transmitted on the interface. TX Unicast Packets Total number of unicast packets transmitted on the interface. TX Non-Unicast Packets Total number of nonunicast or multicast packets transmitted on the interface. Input Aborts Input Frames Input Drops Total number of packets aborted while receiving on the interface. Total number of packets received incorrectly that has a CRC error and a noninteger number of octets on the interface. Total number of packets dropped while receiving on the interface because the queue was full. Unknown Protocol Total number of packets discarded on the interface due to an unknown protocol. Giants Number of packets that are discarded because they exceeded the mediums maximum packet size. Interface Resets Number of times that an interface has been completely reset. Output No Buffer Total number of packets discarded because there was no buffer space. Output Underrun Number of times the transmitter has been running faster than the router can handle. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 691 Searching for Access Point Radios Button Output Total Drops Description Total number of packets dropped while transmitting from the interface because the queue was full. Searching for Access Point Radios Information About Searching for Access Point Radios You can search for specific access point radios in the list of radios on the 802.11a/n Radios page or the 802.11b/g/n Radios page. You can access these pages from the Monitor tab on the menu bar when viewing access point radios or from the Wireless tab on the menu bar when configuring access point radios. To search for specific access point radios, you create a filter to display only radios that meet certain criteria (such as radio MAC address, access point name, or CleanAir status). This feature is especially useful if your list of access point radios spans multiple pages, which prevents you from viewing them all at once. Searching for Access Point Radios (GUI) Step 1 Perform either of the following:

Choose Monitor > Access Points Summary > 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) > Radios > Details to open the 802.11a/n

(or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. These pages show all of the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n access point radios that are joined to the controller and their current settings. The total number of access point radios appears in the upper right-hand corner of the page. If the list of radios spans multiple pages, you can access these pages by clicking the page number links. Each page shows up to 25 access point radios. Note In a Cisco Unified Wireless Network environment, the 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radios should not be differentiated based on their Base Radio MAC addresses, as they may have the same addresses. Instead, the radios should be differentiated based on their physical addresses. Step 2 Step 3 Click Change Filter to open the Search AP dialog box. Select one of the following check boxes to specify the criteria used when displaying access point radios:

MAC AddressBase radio MAC address of an access point radio. AP NameAccess point name. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 692 OL-28744-01 Searching for Access Point Radios Note When you enable the MAC address filter, the other filters are disabled automatically. When you enable any of the other filters, the MAC address filter is disabled automatically. CleanAir StatusSelect one or more of the following check boxes to specify the operating status of the access points:

UPThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio is currently operational. DOWNThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio is currently not operational because an error has occurred. The most likely reason for the error is that the access point radio is disabled. ERRORThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio has crashed, making CleanAir monitoring nonoperational for this radio. We recommend rebooting the access point or disabling CleanAir functionality on the radio. N/AThe access point radio is not capable of supporting CleanAir functionality. Currently, only Cisco Aironet 3500 series access point radios can be configured for Cisco CleanAir. Step 4 Click Find to commit your changes. Only the access point radios that match your search criteria appear on the 802.11a/n Radios page or the 802.11b/g/n Radios page, and the Current Filter parameter at the top of the page specifies the filter used to generate the list (for example, MAC Address:00:1e:f7:75:0a:a0 or AP Name:pmsk-ap). Note If you want to remove the filter and display the entire access point radio list, click Clear Filter. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 693 Searching for Access Point Radios Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 694 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 103 Searching for Access Point Radios Information About Searching for Access Point Radios, page 695 Searching for Access Point Radios (GUI), page 695 Information About Searching for Access Point Radios You can search for specific access point radios in the list of radios on the 802.11a/n Radios page or the 802.11b/g/n Radios page. You can access these pages from the Monitor tab on the menu bar when viewing access point radios or from the Wireless tab on the menu bar when configuring access point radios. To search for specific access point radios, you create a filter to display only radios that meet certain criteria (such as radio MAC address, access point name, or CleanAir status). This feature is especially useful if your list of access point radios spans multiple pages, which prevents you from viewing them all at once. Searching for Access Point Radios (GUI) Step 1 Perform either of the following:

Choose Monitor > Access Points Summary > 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) > Radios > Details to open the 802.11a/n

(or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. These pages show all of the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n access point radios that are joined to the controller and their current settings. The total number of access point radios appears in the upper right-hand corner of the page. If the list of radios spans multiple pages, you can access these pages by clicking the page number links. Each page shows up to 25 access point radios. Note In a Cisco Unified Wireless Network environment, the 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radios should not be differentiated based on their Base Radio MAC addresses, as they may have the same addresses. Instead, the radios should be differentiated based on their physical addresses. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 695 Searching for Access Point Radios (GUI) Step 2 Step 3 Click Change Filter to open the Search AP dialog box. Select one of the following check boxes to specify the criteria used when displaying access point radios:

MAC AddressBase radio MAC address of an access point radio. AP NameAccess point name. Note When you enable the MAC address filter, the other filters are disabled automatically. When you enable any of the other filters, the MAC address filter is disabled automatically. CleanAir StatusSelect one or more of the following check boxes to specify the operating status of the access points:

UPThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio is currently operational. DOWNThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio is currently not operational because an error has occurred. The most likely reason for the error is that the access point radio is disabled. ERRORThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio has crashed, making CleanAir monitoring nonoperational for this radio. We recommend rebooting the access point or disabling CleanAir functionality on the radio. N/AThe access point radio is not capable of supporting CleanAir functionality. Currently, only Cisco Aironet 3500 series access point radios can be configured for Cisco CleanAir. Step 4 Click Find to commit your changes. Only the access point radios that match your search criteria appear on the 802.11a/n Radios page or the 802.11b/g/n Radios page, and the Current Filter parameter at the top of the page specifies the filter used to generate the list (for example, MAC Address:00:1e:f7:75:0a:a0 or AP Name:pmsk-ap). Note If you want to remove the filter and display the entire access point radio list, click Clear Filter. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 696 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 104 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points Information About Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points, page 697 Restrictions for Global Credentials for Access Points, page 698 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points (GUI), page 698 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points (CLI), page 699 Information About Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points Cisco IOS access points are shipped from the factory with Cisco as the default enable password. This password allows users to log onto the nonprivileged mode and enter show and debug commands, which poses a security threat. The default enable password must be changed to prevent unauthorized access and to enable users to enter configuration commands from the access points console port. The following are some guidelines to configure global credentials for access points:

You can set a global username, password, and enable password that all access points that are currently joined to the controller and any that join in the future inherit as they join the controller. If desired, you can override the global credentials and assign a unique username, password, and enable password for a specific access point. After an access point joins the controller, the access point enables console port security, and you are prompted for your username and password whenever you log into the access points console port. When you log on, you are in nonprivileged mode, and you must enter the enable password in order to use the privileged mode. The global credentials that you configure on the controller are retained across controller and access point reboots. They are overwritten only if the access point joins a new controller that is configured with a global username and password. If the new controller is not configured with global credentials, the access point retains the global username and password configured for the first controller. You must keep track of the credentials used by the access points. Otherwise, you might not be able to log onto the console port of the access point. If you need to return the access points to the default Cisco/Cisco username and password, you must clear the controllers configuration and the access points configuration to return them to factory-default settings. To clear the controllers configuration, choose Commands > Reset to Factory Default > Reset on the controller GUI, or enter the clear config command on the controller CLI. To clear the access points configuration, choose Wireless > Access OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 697 Restrictions for Global Credentials for Access Points Points > All APs, click the AP name and click Clear All Config on the controller GUI, or enter the clear ap config Cisco_AP command on the controller CLI. To clear the access point's configuration except its static IP address, choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs, click the AP name and click Clear Config Except Static IP, or enter the clear ap config ap-name keep-ip-config command on the controller CLI. After the access point rejoins a controller, it adopts the default Cisco/Cisco username and password. Note Suppose you configure an indoor Cisco AP to go into the mesh mode. If you want to reset the Cisco AP to the local mode, use the test mesh mode local command. To reset the AP hardware, choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs, click the AP name and click Reset AP Now. Restrictions for Global Credentials for Access Points The controller software features are supported on all access points that have been converted to lightweight mode except the 1100 series. VxWorks access points are not supported. Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. In the Username text box, enter the username that is to be inherited by all access points that join the controller. In the Password text box, enter the password that is to be inherited by all access points that join the controller. You can set a global username, password, and enable password that all access points inherit as they join the controller including access points that are currently joined to the controller and any that join in the future. You can override the global credentials and assign a unique username, password, and enable password for a specific access point. The following are requirements enforced on the password:

The password should contain characters from at least three of the following classes: lowercase letters, uppercase letters, digits, and special characters. No character in the password can be repeated more than three times consecutively. The password should not contain the management username or the reverse of the username. The password should not contain words like Cisco, oscic, admin, nimda or any variant obtained by changing the capitalization of letters by substituting 1, |, or ! or substituting 0 for o or substituting $ for s. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 698 OL-28744-01 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points (CLI) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 In the Enable Password text box, enter the enable password that is to be inherited by all access points that join the controller. Click Apply to send the global username, password, and enable password to all access points that are currently joined to the controller or that join the controller in the future. Click Save Configuration to save your changes.

(Optional) Override the global credentials for a specific access point and assign a unique username, password, and enable password to this access point as follows:

a) Choose Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. b) Click the name of the access point for which you want to override the global credentials. c) Choose the Credentials tab. The All APs > Details for (Credentials) page appears. d) Select the Over-ride Global Credentials check box to prevent this access point from inheriting the global username, password, and enable password from the controller. The default value is unselected. e) In the Username, Password, and Enable Password text boxes, enter the unique username, password, and enable password that you want to assign to this access point. Note The information that you enter is retained across controller and access point reboots and if the access point joins a new controller. f) Click Apply to commit your changes. g) Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Note If you want to force this access point to use the controllers global credentials, unselect the Over-ride Global Credentials check box. Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Configure the global username, password, and enable password for all access points currently joined to the controller as well as any access points that join the controller in the future by entering this command:

config ap mgmtuser add username user password password enablesecret enable_password all

(Optional) Override the global credentials for a specific access point and assign a unique username, password, and enable password to this access point by entering this command:

config ap mgmtuser add username user password password enablesecret enable_password Cisco_AP The credentials that you enter in this command are retained across controller and access point reboots and if the access point joins a new controller. Note If you want to force this access point to use the controllers global credentials, enter the config ap mgmtuser delete Cisco_AP command. The following message appears after you execute this command: AP reverted to global username configuration. Enter the save config command to save your changes. Verify that global credentials are configured for all access points that join the controller by entering this command:

show ap summary Note To view summary of specific access point you can specify the access point name. You can also use wildcard searches when filtering for access points. If global credentials are not configured, the Global AP User Name text box shows Not Configured. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 699 Configuring Global Credentials for Access Points (CLI) Step 5 See the global credentials configuration for a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP Note The name of the access point is case sensitive. If this access point is configured for global credentials, the AP User Mode text boxes shows Automatic. If the global credentials have been overwritten for this access point, the AP User Mode text box shows Customized. Note Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 700 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 105 Configuring Authentication for Access Points Information About Configuring Authentication for Access Points, page 701 Prerequisites for Configuring Authentication for Access Points, page 701 Restrictions for Authenticating Access Points, page 702 Configuring Authentication for Access Points (GUI), page 702 Configuring Authentication for Access Points (CLI), page 703 Configuring the Switch for Authentication, page 704 Information About Configuring Authentication for Access Points You can configure 802.1X authentication between a lightweight access point and a Cisco switch. The access point acts as an 802.1X supplicant and is authenticated by the switch using EAP-FAST with anonymous PAC provisioning. You can configure global authentication settings that all access points that are currently associated with the controller and any that associate in the future. You can also override the global authentication settings and assign unique authentication settings for a specific access point. Prerequisites for Configuring Authentication for Access Points Step 1 If the access point is new, do the following:

a) Boot the access point with the installed recovery image. b) If you choose not to follow this suggested flow and instead enable 802.1X authentication on the switch port connected to the access point prior to the access point joining the controller, enter this command:

lwapp ap dot1x username username password password Note If you choose to follow this suggested flow and enable 802.1X authentication on the switch port after the access point has joined the controller and received the configured 802.1X credentials, you do not need to enter this command. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 701 Restrictions for Authenticating Access Points Note This command is available only for access points that are running the 5.1, 5.2, 6.0, or 7.0 recovery image. Connect the access point to the switch port. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Install the 5.1, 5.2, 6.0, or 7.0 image on the controller and reboot the controller. Allow all access points to join the controller. Configure authentication on the controller. See the Configuring Authentication for Access Points (GUI) section or the Configuring Authentication for Access Points (CLI) section for information about configuring authentication on the controller. Configure the switch to allow authentication. See the Configuring the Switch for Authentication section for information about configuring the switch for authentication. Restrictions for Authenticating Access Points The OEAP 600 Series access points do not support LEAP. Configuring Authentication for Access Points (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. Under 802.1x Supplicant Credentials, select the 802.1x Authentication check box. In the Username text box, enter the username that is to be inherited by all access points that join the controller. In the Password and Confirm Password text boxes, enter the password that is to be inherited by all access points that join the controller. Note You must enter a strong password in these text boxes. Strong passwords have the following characteristics:

They are at least eight characters long They contain a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and symbols They are not a word in any language Click Apply to send the global authentication username and password to all access points that are currently joined to the controller and to any that join the controller in the future. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. If desired, you can choose to override the global authentication settings and assign a unique username and password to a specific access point as follows:

a) Choose Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. b) Click the name of the access point for which you want to override the authentication settings. c) Click the Credentials tab to open the All APs > Details for (Credentials) page. d) Under 802.1x Supplicant Credentials, select the Over-ride Global Credentials check box to prevent this access point from inheriting the global authentication username and password from the controller. The default value is unselected. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 702 OL-28744-01 Configuring Authentication for Access Points (CLI) e) In the Username, Password, and Confirm Password text boxes, enter the unique username and password that you want to assign to this access point. Note The information that you enter is retained across controller and access point reboots and whenever the access point joins a new controller. f) Click Apply to commit your changes. g) Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Note If you want to force this access point to use the controllers global authentication settings, unselect the Over-ride Global Credentials check box. Configuring Authentication for Access Points (CLI) Step 1 Configure the global authentication username and password for all access points currently joined to the controller as well as any access points that join the controller in the future by entering this command:

config ap 802.1Xuser add username ap-username password ap-password all Note You must enter a strong password for the ap-password parameter. Strong passwords have the following characteristics:

They are at least eight characters long. They contain a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and symbols. They are not a word in any language. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

(Optional) Override the global authentication settings and assign a unique username and password to a specific access point. To do so, enter this command:

config ap 802.1Xuser add username ap-username password ap-password Cisco_AP Note You must enter a strong password for the ap-password parameter. See the note in Step 1 for the characteristics of strong passwords. The authentication settings that you enter in this command are retained across controller and access point reboots and whenever the access point joins a new controller. Note If you want to force this access point to use the controllers global authentication settings, enter the config ap 802.1Xuser delete Cisco_AP command. The following message appears after you execute this command: AP reverted to global username configuration. Enter the save config command to save your changes.

(Optional) Disable 802.1X authentication for all access points or for a specific access point by entering this command:

config ap 802.1Xuser disable {all | Cisco_AP}

Note You can disable 802.1X authentication for a specific access point only if global 802.1X authentication is not enabled. If global 802.1X authentication is enabled, you can disable 802.1X for all access points only. Step 5 See the authentication settings for all access points that join the controller by entering this command:

show ap summary OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 703 Configuring the Switch for Authentication Information similar to the following appears:

Number of APs.................................... 1 Global AP User Name.............................. globalap Global AP Dot1x User Name........................ globalDot1x Step 6 See the authentication settings for a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP Note Note The name of the access point is case sensitive. If this access point is configured for global authentication, the AP Dot1x User Mode text boxes shows Automatic. If the global authentication settings have been overwritten for this access point, the AP Dot1x User Mode text box shows Customized. Configuring the Switch for Authentication To enable 802.1X authentication on a switch port, on the switch CLI, enter these commands:

Switch# configure terminal Switch(config)# dot1x system-auth-control Switch(config)# aaa new-model Switch(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default group radius Switch(config)# radius-server host ip_addr auth-port port acct-port port key key Switch(config)# interface fastethernet2/1 Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access Switch(config-if)# dot1x pae authenticator Switch(config-if)# dot1x port-control auto Switch(config-if)# end Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 704 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 106 Configuring Embedded Access Points Information About Embedded Access Points, page 705 Information About Embedded Access Points Controller software release 7.0.116.0 or later releases support the embedded access points: AP801 and AP802, which are the integrated access points on the Cisco 880 Series Integrated Services Routers (ISRs). This access points use a Cisco IOS software image that is separate from the router Cisco IOS software image. The access points can operate as autonomous access points configured and managed locally, or they can operate as centrally managed access points that utilize the CAPWAP or LWAPP protocol. The AP801 and AP802 access points are preloaded with both an autonomous Cisco IOS release and a recovery image for the unified mode. The following are some guidelines for embedded access points:

Before you use an AP801 or AP802 Series Lightweight Access Point with controller software release 7.0.116.0 or later releases, you must upgrade the software in the Next Generation Cisco 880 Series Integrated Services Routers (ISRs) to Cisco IOS 151-4.M or later. Note In Release 7.4, all AP modes except bridging (required for mesh) are supported for both AP801 and AP802. In Release 7.5 and later, all AP modes are supported on AP802;

however, bridging is not supported on AP801. When you want to use the AP801 or AP802 with a controller, you must enable the recovery image for the unified mode on the access point by entering the service-module wlan-ap 0 bootimage unified command on the router in privileged EXEC mode. If the service-module wlan-ap 0 bootimage unified command does not work, make sure that the software license is still eligible. After enabling the recovery image, enter the service-module wlan-ap 0 reload command on the router to shut down and reboot the access point. After the access point reboots, it discovers the controller, downloads the full CAPWAP or LWAPP software release from the controller, and acts as a lightweight access point. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 705 Information About Embedded Access Points Note To use the CLI commands mentioned above, the router must be running Cisco IOS Release 12.4(20)T or later releases. To support CAPWAP or LWAPP, the router must be activated with at least the Cisco Advanced IP Services IOS license-grade image. A license is required to upgrade to this Cisco IOS image on the router. For licensing information, see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/routers/access/sw_activation/SA_on_ ISR.html After the AP801 or AP802 boots up with the recovery image for the unified mode, it requires an IP address to communicate with the controller and to download its unified image and configuration from the controller. The router can provide DHCP server functionality, the DHCP pool to reach the controller, and setup option 43 for the controller IP address in the DHCP pool configuration. Use the following configuration to perform this task:

ip dhcp pool pool_name network ip_address subnet_mask dns-server ip_address default-router ip_address option 43 hex controller_ip_address_in_hex Example:

ip dhcp pool embedded-ap-pool network 60.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 dns-server 171.70.168.183 default-router 60.0.0.1 option 43 hex f104.0a0a.0a0f

*/

/* single WLC IP address(10.10.10.15) in hex format The AP801 and AP802 802.11n radio supports lower power levels than the 802.11n radio in the Cisco Aironet 1250 series access points. The AP801 and AP802 access points store the radio power levels and passes them to the controller when the access point joins the controller. The controller uses the supplied values to limit the users configuration. The AP801 and AP802 access points can be used in FlexConnect mode. For more information about the AP801, see the documentation for the Cisco 800 Series ISRs at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps380/tsd_products_support_series_home.html For more information about the AP802, see the documentation for the Next generation Cisco 880 Series ISRs at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/routers/access/800/860-880-890/software/configuration/guide/

SCG_880_series.pdf Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 706 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 107 Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode Information About Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode, page 707 Restrictions for Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode, page 708 Reverting from Lightweight Mode to Autonomous Mode, page 708 Authorizing Access Points, page 709 Configuring VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points, page 715 Using DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60, page 716 Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process, page 717 Sending Debug Commands to Access Points Converted to Lightweight Mode, page 721 Understanding How Converted Access Points Send Crash Information to the Controller, page 721 Understanding How Converted Access Points Send Radio Core Dumps to the Controller, page 721 Uploading Memory Core Dumps from Converted Access Points, page 723 Viewing the AP Crash Log Information, page 724 Displaying MAC Addresses for Converted Access Points, page 725 Disabling the Reset Button on Access Points Converted to Lightweight Mode, page 725 Configuring a Static IP Address on a Lightweight Access Point, page 726 Supporting Oversized Access Point Images, page 727 Information About Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode You can use an upgrade conversion tool to convert autonomous Cisco Aironet 1100, 1130AG, 1200, 1240AG, 1260, and 1300 Series Access Points to lightweight mode. When you upgrade one of these access points to lightweight mode, the access point communicates with a controller and receives a configuration and software image from the controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 707 Restrictions for Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode See the Upgrading Autonomous Cisco Aironet Access Points to Lightweight Mode document for instructions to upgrade an autonomous access point to lightweight mode:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/wireless/access_point/conversion/lwapp/upgrade/guide/lwapnote.html The following are some guidelines for converting autonomous APs to lightweight mode APs:

All Cisco lightweight access points support 16 BSSIDs per radio and a total of 16 wireless LANs per access point. When a converted access point associates with a controller, only wireless LANs with IDs 1 through 16 are pushed to the access point. Access points converted to lightweight mode must get an IP address and discover the controller using DHCP, DNS, or IP subnet broadcast. The 1130AG and 1240AG access points support FlexConnect mode. Restrictions for Converting Autonomous Access Points to Lightweight Mode Access points converted to lightweight mode do not support Wireless Domain Services (WDS). Converted access points communicate only with Cisco wireless LAN controllers and cannot communicate with WDS devices. However, the controller provides functionality that is equivalent to WDS when the access point associates to it. After you convert an access point to lightweight mode, the console port provides read-only access to the unit. Reverting from Lightweight Mode to Autonomous Mode After you use the upgrade tool to convert an autonomous access point to lightweight mode, you can convert the access point from a lightweight unit back to an autonomous unit by loading a Cisco IOS release that supports autonomous mode (Cisco IOS Release 12.3(7)JA or earlier releases). If the access point is associated to a controller, you can use the controller to load the Cisco IOS release. If the access point is not associated to a controller, you can load the Cisco IOS release using TFTP. In either method, the access point must be able to access a TFTP server that contains the Cisco IOS release to be loaded. Reverting to a Previous Release (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Log on to the CLI on the controller to which the access point is associated. Revert from lightweight mode, by entering this command:

config ap tftp-downgrade tftp-server-ip-address filename access-point-name Step 3 Wait until the access point reboots and reconfigure the access point using the CLI or GUI. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 708 OL-28744-01 Authorizing Access Points Reverting to a Previous Release Using the MODE Button and a TFTP Server Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Configure the PC on which your TFTP server software runs with a static IP address in the range of 10.0.0.2 to 10.0.0.30. Make sure that the PC contains the access point image file (such as c1200-k9w7-tar.123-7.JA.tar for a 1200 series access point) in the TFTP server folder and that the TFTP server is activated. Rename the access point image file in the TFTP server folder to c1200-k9w7-tar.default for a 1200 series access point. Connect the PC to the access point using a Category 5 (CAT5) Ethernet cable. Disconnect power from the access point. Press and hold the MODE button while you reconnect power to the access point. Note The MODE button on the access point must be enabled. Follow the steps in the Disabling the Reset Button on Access Points Converted to Lightweight Mode to select the status of the access point MODE button. Hold the MODE button until the status LED turns red (approximately 20 to 30 seconds), and release the MODE button. Wait until the access point reboots as indicated by all LEDs turning green followed by the Status LED blinking green. After the access point reboots, reconfigure the access point using the GUI or the CLI. Authorizing Access Points In controller software releases prior to 5.2, the controller may either use self-signed certificates (SSCs) to authenticate access points or send the authorization information to a RADIUS server (if access points have manufactured-installed certificates [MICs]). In controller software release 5.2 or later releases, you can configure the controller to use a local significant certificate (LSC). Authorizing Access Points Using SSCs The Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points protocol (CAPWAP) secures the control communication between the access point and controller by a secure key distribution requiring X.509 certificates on both the access point and controller. CAPWAP relies on provisioning of the X.509 certificates. Cisco Aironet access points shipped before July 18, 2005 do not have a MIC, so these access points create an SSC when upgraded to operate in lightweight mode. Controllers are programmed to accept local SSCs for authentication of specific access points and do not forward those authentication requests to a RADIUS server. This behavior is acceptable and secure. Authorizing Access Points for Virtual Controllers Using SSC Virtual controllers use SSC certificates instead of Manufacturing Installed Certificates (MIC) used by physical controllers. You can configure the controller to allow an AP to validate the SSC of the virtual controller. When an AP validates the SSC, the AP checks if the hash key of the virtual controller matches the hash key stored in its flash. If a match is found, the AP associates with the controller. If a match is not found, the validation fails and the AP disconnects from the controller and restarts the discovery process. By default, hash validation is enabled. An AP must have the virtual controller hash key in its flash before associating with the virtual controller. If you disable hash validation of the SSC, the AP bypasses the hash validation and directly moves to the Run state. APs can associate with a physical controller, download the hash keys and then associate OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 709 Authorizing Access Points with a virtual controller. If the AP is associated with a physical controller and hash validation is disabled, the AP associates with any virtual controller without hash validation. The hash key of the virtual controller can be configured for a mobility group member. This hash key gets pushed to the APs, so that the APs can validate the hash key of the controller. Configuring SSC (GUI) Choose Security > Certificate > SSC to open the Self Significant Certificates (SSC) page. The SSC device certification details are displayed. Select the Enable SSC Hash Validation check box to enable the validation of the hash key. Click Apply to commit your changes. Configuring SSC (CLI) To configure hash validation of SSC, enter this command:

config certificate ssc hash validation {enable | disable}

To see the hash key details, enter this command:

show certificate ssc Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Authorizing Access Points Using MICs You can configure controllers to use RADIUS servers to authorize access points using MICs. The controller uses an access points MAC address as both the username and password when sending the information to a RADIUS server. For example, if the MAC address of the access point is 000b85229a70, both the username and password used by the controller to authorize the access point are 000b85229a70. Note The lack of a strong password by the use of the access points MAC address should not be an issue because the controller uses MIC to authenticate the access point prior to authorizing the access point through the RADIUS server. Using MIC provides strong authentication. Note If you use the MAC address as the username and password for access point authentication on a RADIUS AAA server, do not use the same AAA server for client authentication. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 710 OL-28744-01 Authorizing Access Points Authorizing Access Points Using LSCs You can use an LSC if you want your own public key infrastructure (PKI) to provide better security, to have control of your certificate authority (CA), and to define policies, restrictions, and usages on the generated certificates. The LSC CA certificate is installed on access points and controllers. You need to provision the device certificate on the access point. The access point gets a signed X.509 certificate by sending a certRequest to the controller. The controller acts as a CA proxy and receives the certRequest signed by the CA for the access point. Note When the CA server is in manual mode and if there is an AP entry in the LSC SCEP table that is pending enrollment, the controller waits for the CA server to send a pending response. If there is no response from the CA server, the controller retries a total of three times to get a response, after which the fallback mode comes into effect where the AP provisioning times out and the AP reboots and comes up with MIC. Note LSC on controller does not take password challenge. Therefore, for LSC to work, you must disable password challenge on the CA server. Also, you cannot use Microsoft Windows Server 2008 as a CA server because it is not possible to disable password challenge on it. Configuring Locally Significant Certificates (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose Security > Certificate > LSC to open the Local Significant Certificates (LSC) - General page. Select the Enable LSC on Controller check box to enable the LSC on the system. In the CA Server URL text box, enter the URL to the CA server. You can enter either a domain name or an IP address. In the Params text boxes, enter the parameters for the device certificate. The key size is a value from 384 to 2048 (in bits), and the default value is 2048. Click Apply to commit your changes. To add the CA certificate into the controllers CA certificate database, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the certificate type and choose Add. Choose the AP Provisioning tab to open the Local Significant Certificates (LSC) - AP Provisioning page. Select the Enable check box and click Update to provision the LSC on the access point. When a message appears indicating that the access points will be rebooted, click OK. In the Number of Attempts to LSC text box, enter the number of times that the access point attempts to join the controller using an LSC before the access point reverts to the default certificate (MIC or SSC). The range is 0 to 255 (inclusive), and the default value is 3. Note If you set the number of retries to a nonzero value and the access point fails to join the controller using an LSC after the configured number of retries, the access point reverts to the default certificate. If you set the number of retries to 0 and the access point fails to join the controller using an LSC, the access point does not attempt to join the controller using the default certificate. If you are configuring LSC for the first time, we recommend that you configure a nonzero value. Note OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 711 Authorizing Access Points Step 11 Enter the access point MAC address in the AP Ethernet MAC Addresses text box and click Add to add access points to the provision list. Note To remove an access point from the provision list, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the access point and choose Remove. If you configure an access point provision list, only the access points in the provision list are provisioned when you enable AP provisioning. If you do not configure an access point provision list, all access points with a MIC or SSC certificate that join the controller are LSC provisioned. Note Step 12 Step 13 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Locally Significant Certificates (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 712 Enable LSC on the system by entering this command:

config certificate lsc {enable | disable}

Configure the URL to the CA server by entering this command:

config certificate lsc ca-server http://url:port/path where url can be either a domain name or IP address. Note You can configure only one CA server. To configure a different CA server, delete the configured CA server using the config certificate lsc ca-server delete command, and then configure a different CA server. Add the LSC CA certificate into the controllers CA certificate database by entering this command:

config certificate lsc ca-cert {add | delete}

Configure the parameters for the device certificate by entering this command:

config certificate lsc subject-params country state city orgn dept e-mail Note The common name (CN) is generated automatically on the access point using the current MIC/SSC format Cxxxx-MacAddr, where xxxx is the product number. Configure a key size by entering this command:

config certificate lsc other-params keysize The keysize is a value from 384 to 2048 (in bits), and the default value is 2048. Add access points to the provision list by entering this command:

config certificate lsc ap-provision auth-list add AP_mac_addr Note Note To remove access points from the provision list, enter the config certificate lsc ap-provision auth-list delete AP_mac_addr command. If you configure an access point provision list, only the access points in the provision list are provisioned when you enable AP provisioning (in Step 8). If you do not configure an access point provision list, all access points with a MIC or SSC certificate that join the controller are LSC provisioned. Configure the number of times that the access point attempts to join the controller using an LSC before the access point reverts to the default certificate (MIC or SSC) by entering this command:

config certificate lsc ap-provision revert-cert retries where retries is a value from 0 to 255, and the default value is 3. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Authorizing Access Points Note Note If you set the number of retries to a nonzero value and the access point fails to join the controller using an LSC after the configured number of retries, the access point reverts to the default certificate. If you set the number of retries to 0 and the access point fails to join the controller using an LSC, the access point does not attempt to join the controller using the default certificate. If you are configuring LSC for the first time, we recommend that you configure a nonzero value. Step 8 Step 9 Provision the LSC on the access point by entering this command:

config certificate lsc ap-provision {enable | disable}

See the LSC summary by entering this command:

show certificate lsc summary Information similar to the following appears:

LSC Enabled.......................................... Yes LSC CA-Server........................................ http://10.0.0.1:8080/caserver LSC AP-Provisioning.................................. Yes Provision-List................................... Not Configured LSC Revert Count in AP reboots................... 3 LSC Params:

Country.......................................... 4 State............................................ ca City............................................. ss Orgn............................................. org Dept............................................. dep Email............................................ dep@co.com KeySize.......................................... 390 LSC Certs:

CA Cert.......................................... Not Configured RA Cert....................................... Not Configured Step 10 See details about the access points that are provisioned using LSC by entering this command:

show certificate lsc ap-provision Information similar to the following appears:

LSC AP-Provisioning........................... Yes Provision-List................................ Present Idx Mac Address

--- ------------

1 00:18:74:c7:c0:90 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 713 Authorizing Access Points Authorizing Access Points (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Security > AAA > AP Policies to open the AP Policies page. If you want the access point to accept self-signed certificates (SSCs), manufactured-installed certificates (MICs), or local significant certificates (LSCs), select the appropriate check box. If you want the access points to be authorized using a AAA RADIUS server, select the Authorize MIC APs against auth-list or AAA check box. If you want the access points to be authorized using an LSC, select the Authorize LSC APs against auth-list check box. Click Apply to commit your changes. Follow these steps to add an access point to the controllers authorization list:

a) Click Add to access the Add AP to Authorization List area. b) In the MAC Address text box, enter the MAC address of the access point. c) From the Certificate Type drop-down list, choose MIC, SSC, or LSC. d) Click Add. The access point appears in the access point authorization list. Note Note To remove an access point from the authorization list, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the access point and choose Remove. To search for a specific access point in the authorization list, enter the MAC address of the access point in the Search by MAC text box and click Search. Authorizing Access Points (CLI) Configure an access point authorization policy by entering this command:

config auth-list ap-policy {authorize-ap {enable | disable} | authorize-lsc-ap {enable | disable}}

Configure an access point to accept manufactured-installed certificates (MICs), self-signed certificates

(SSCs), or local significant certificates (LSCs) by entering this command:

config auth-list ap-policy {mic | ssc | lsc {enable | disable}}

Configure the user name to be used in access point authorization requests. config auth-list ap-policy {authorize-ap username {ap_name | ap_mac | both}}

Add an access point to the authorization list by entering this command:

config auth-list add {mic | ssc | lsc} ap_mac [ap_key]

where ap_key is an optional key hash value equal to 20 bytes or 40 digits. Note To delete an access point from the authorization list, enter this command: config auth-list delete ap_mac. See the access point authorization list by entering this command:

show auth-list Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 714 OL-28744-01 Configuring VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points Configuring VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points Information About VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points You can configure VLAN tagging on the Ethernet interface either directly on the AP console or through the controller. The configuration is saved in the flash memory and all CAPWAP frames use the VLAN tag as configured, along with all the locally switched traffic, which is not mapped to a VLAN. This feature is not supported on mesh access points that are in bridge mode. Configuring VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the AP name from the list of AP names to open the Details page for the AP. Click the Advanced tab. In the VLAN Tagging area, select the VLAN Tagging check box. In the Trunk VLAN ID text box, enter an ID. If the access point is unable to route traffic through the specified trunk VLAN after about 10 minutes, the access point performs a recovery procedure by rebooting and sending CAPWAP frames in untagged mode to try and reassociate with the controller. The controller sends a trap to a trap server such as the Cisco Prime Infrastructure, which indicates the failure of the trunk VLAN. If the access point is unable to route traffic through the specified trunk VLAN, it untags the packets and reassociates with the controller. The controller sends a trap to a trap server such as the Cisco Prime Infrastructure, which indicates the failure of the trunk VLAN. If the trunk VLAN ID is 0, the access point untags the CAPWAP frames. The VLAN Tag status is displayed showing whether the AP tags or untags the CAPWAP frames. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Click Apply. You are prompted with a warning message saying that the configuration will result in a reboot of the access point. Click OK to continue. Click Save Configuration. What to Do Next After the configuration, the switch or other equipment connected to the Ethernet interface of the AP must also be configured to support tagged Ethernet frames. Configuring VLAN Tagging for CAPWAP Frames from Access Points (CLI) Step 1 Configure VLAN tagging for CAPWAP frames from access points by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 715 Using DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 config ap ethernet tag {disable | id vlan-id} {ap-name | all}

Step 2 You can see VLAN tagging information for an AP or all APs by entering this command:

show ap ethernet tag {summary | ap-name}

Using DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 Cisco Aironet access points use the type-length-value (TLV) format for DHCP option 43. DHCP servers must be programmed to return the option based on the access points DHCP Vendor Class Identifier (VCI) string

(DHCP option 60). This table lists the VCI strings for Cisco access points capable of operating in lightweight mode. Table 22: VCI Strings For Lightweight Access Points VCI String Cisco AP c1040 Cisco AP c1130 Cisco AP c1140 Cisco AP c1240 Cisco AP c1250 Cisco AP c1260 Cisco AP c1520 Cisco AP c1550 Cisco AP c3600 Cisco AP c3500 Cisco AP801 Cisco AP802 Access Point Cisco Aironet 1040 Series Cisco Aironet 1130 Series Cisco Aironet 1140 Series Cisco Aironet 1240 Series Cisco Aironet 1250 Series Cisco Aironet 1260 Series Cisco Aironet 1520 Series Cisco Aironet 1550 Series Cisco Aironet 3600 Series Cisco Aironet 3500 Series Cisco AP801 Embedded Access Point Cisco AP802 Embedded Access Point The format of the TLV block is as follows:

Type: 0xf1 (decimal 241) Length: Number of controller IP addresses * 4 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 716 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process Value: List of the IP addresses of controller management interfaces See the product documentation for your DHCP server for instructions on configuring DHCP option 43. The Upgrading Autonomous Cisco Aironet Access Points to Lightweight Mode document contains example steps for configuring option 43 on a DHCP server. If the access point is ordered with the Service Provider Option - AIR-OPT60-DHCP selected, the VCI string for that access point will be different than those listed above. The VCI string will have the ServiceProvider. For example, a 1260 with this option will return this VCI string: "Cisco AP c1260-ServiceProvider". Note The controller IP address that you obtain from the DHCP server should be a unicast IP address. Do not configure the controller IP address as a multicast address when configuring DHCP Option 43. Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process Access points can fail to join a controller for many reasons such as a RADIUS authorization is pending, self-signed certificates are not enabled on the controller, the access point and controllers regulatory domains do not match, and so on. Controller software release 5.2 or later releases enable you to configure the access points to send all CAPWAP-related errors to a syslog server. You do not need to enable any debug commands on the controller because all of the CAPWAP error messages can be viewed from the syslog server itself. The state of the access point is not maintained on the controller until it receives a CAPWAP join request from the access point, so it can be difficult to determine why the CAPWAP discovery request from a certain access point was rejected. In order to troubleshoot such joining issues without enabling CAPWAP debug commands on the controller, the controller collects information for all access points that send a discovery message to this controller and maintains information for any access points that have successfully joined this controller. The controller collects all join-related information for each access point that sends a CAPWAP discovery request to the controller. Collection begins with the first discovery message received from the access point and ends with the last configuration payload sent from the controller to the access point. You can view join-related information for the following numbers of access points:

When the controller is maintaining join-related information for the maximum number of access points, it does not collect information for any more access points. If any of these conditions are met and the access point has not yet joined a controller, you can also configure a DHCP server to return a syslog server IP address to the access point using option 7 on the server. The access point then starts sending all syslog messages to this IP address. You can also configure the syslog server IP address through the access point CLI, provided the access point is currently not connected to the controller by entering the lwapp ap log-server syslog_server_IP_address command. When the access point joins a controller for the first time, the controller pushes the global syslog server IP address (the default is 255.255.255.255) to the access point. After that, the access point sends all syslog messages to this IP address, until it is overridden by one of the following scenarios:

The access point is still connected to the same controller, and the global syslog server IP address configuration on the controller has been changed using the config ap syslog host global OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 717 Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process syslog_server_IP_address command. In this case, the controller pushes the new global syslog server IP address to the access point. The access point is still connected to the same controller, and a specific syslog server IP address has been configured for the access point on the controller using the config ap syslog host specific Cisco_AP syslog_server_IP_address command. In this case, the controller pushes the new specific syslog server IP address to the access point. The access point gets disconnected from the controller, and the syslog server IP address has been configured from the access point CLI using the lwapp ap log-server syslog_server_IP_address command. This command works only if the access point is not connected to any controller. The access point gets disconnected from the controller and joins another controller. In this case, the new controller pushes its global syslog server IP address to the access point. Whenever a new syslog server IP address overrides the existing syslog server IP address, the old address is erased from persistent storage, and the new address is stored in its place. The access point also starts sending all syslog messages to the new IP address, provided the access point can reach the syslog server IP address. You can configure the syslog server for access points using the controller GUI and view the access point join information using the controller GUI or CLI. Configuring the Syslog Server for Access Points (CLI) Step 1 Perform one of the following:

To configure a global syslog server for all access points that join this controller, enter this command:

config ap syslog host global syslog_server_IP_address Note By default, the global syslog server IP address for all access points is 255.255.255.255. Make sure that the access points can reach the subnet on which the syslog server resides before configuring the syslog server on the controller. If the access points cannot reach this subnet, the access points are unable to send out syslog messages. To configure a syslog server for a specific access point, enter this command:

config ap syslog host specific Cisco_AP syslog_server_IP_address Note By default, the syslog server IP address for each access point is 0.0.0.0, which indicates that the access point is not yet set. When the default value is used, the global access point syslog server IP address is pushed to the access point. Step 2 Step 3 Enter the save config command to save your changes. See the global syslog server settings for all access points that join the controller by entering this command:

show ap config global Information similar to the following appears:

AP global system logging host.................... 255.255.255.255 Step 4 See the syslog server settings for a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 718 OL-28744-01 Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process Viewing Access Point Join Information Join statistics for an access point that sends a CAPWAP discovery request to the controller at least once are maintained on the controller even if the access point is rebooted or disconnected. These statistics are removed only when the controller is rebooted or when you choose to clear the statistics. Viewing Access Point Join Information (GUI) Step 1 Choose Monitor > Statistics > AP Join to open the AP Join Stats page. This page lists all of the access points that are joined to the controller or that have tried to join. It shows the radio MAC address, access point name, current join status, Ethernet MAC address, IP address, and last join time for each access point. The total number of access points appears in the upper right-hand corner of the page. If the list of access points spans multiple pages, you can view these pages by clicking the page number links. Each page shows the join statistics for up to 25 access points. Note If you want to remove an access point from the list, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that access point and click Remove. If you want to clear the statistics for all access points and start over, click Clear Stats on All APs. Note Step 2 If you want to search for specific access points in the list of access points on the AP Join Stats page, follow these steps to create a filter to display only access points that meet certain criteria (such as MAC address or access point name). Note This feature is especially useful if your list of access points spans multiple pages, preventing you from viewing them all at once. a) Click Change Filter to open the Search AP dialog box. b) Select one of the following check boxes to specify the criteria used when displaying access points:

MAC AddressEnter the base radio MAC address of an access point. AP NameEnter the name of an access point. Note When you enable one of these filters, the other filter is disabled automatically. c) Click Find to commit your changes. Only the access points that match your search criteria appear on the AP Join Stats page, and the Current Filter parameter at the top of the page specifies the filter used to generate the list (for example, MAC Address:00:1e:f7:75:0a:a0 or AP Name:pmsk-ap). Note If you want to remove the filter and display the entire access point list, click Clear Filter. Step 3 To see detailed join statistics for a specific access point, click the radio MAC address of the access point. The AP Join Stats Detail page appears. This page provides information from the controllers perspective on each phase of the join process and shows any errors that have occurred. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 719 Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process Viewing Access Point Join Information (CLI) Use these CLI commands to see access point join information:

See the MAC addresses of all the access points that are joined to the controller or that have tried to join by entering this command:

show ap join stats summary all See the last join error detail for a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap join stats summary ap_mac where ap_mac is the MAC address of the 802.11 radio interface. Note To obtain the MAC address of the 802.11 radio interface, enter the show interfaces Dot11Radio 0 command on the access point. Information similar to the following appears:

Is the AP currently connected to controller................ Yes Time at which the AP joined this controller last time...... Aug 21 12:50:36.061 Type of error that occurred last........................... AP got or has been disconnected Reason for error that occurred last........................ The AP has been reset by the controller Time at which the last join error occurred.............. Aug 21 12:50:34.374 See all join-related statistics collected for a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap join stats detailed ap_mac Information similar to the following appears:

Discovery phase statistics

- Discovery requests received.............................. 2

- Successful discovery responses sent...................... 2

- Unsuccessful discovery request processing................ 0

- Reason for last unsuccessful discovery attempt........... Not applicable

- Time at last successful discovery attempt................ Aug 21 12:50:23.335

- Time at last unsuccessful discovery attempt.............. Not applicable Join phase statistics

- Join requests received................................... 1

- Successful join responses sent........................... 1

- Unsuccessful join request processing..................... 1

- Reason for last unsuccessful join attempt................ RADIUS authorization is pending for the AP

- Time at last successful join attempt..................... Aug 21 12:50:34.481

- Time at last unsuccessful join attempt................... Aug 21 12:50:34.374 Configuration phase statistics

- Configuration requests received.......................... 1

- Successful configuration responses sent.................. 1

- Unsuccessful configuration request processing............ 0

- Reason for last unsuccessful configuration attempt....... Not applicable

- Time at last successful configuration attempt............ Aug 21 12:50:34.374

- Time at last unsuccessful configuration attempt.......... Not applicable Last AP message decryption failure details

- Reason for last message decryption failure............... Not applicable Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 720 OL-28744-01 Sending Debug Commands to Access Points Converted to Lightweight Mode Last AP disconnect details

- Reason for last AP connection failure.................... The AP has been reset by the controller Last join error summary

- Type of error that occurred last......................... AP got or has been disconnected

- Reason for error that occurred last...................... The AP has been reset by the controller

- Time at which the last join error occurred............... Aug 21 12:50:34.374 Clear the join statistics for all access points or for a specific access point by entering this command:

clear ap join stats {all | ap_mac}

Sending Debug Commands to Access Points Converted to Lightweight Mode You can enable the controller to send debug commands to an access point converted to lightweight mode by entering this command:

debug ap {enable | disable | command cmd} Cisco_AP When this feature is enabled, the controller sends debug commands to the converted access point as character strings. You can send any debug command supported by Cisco Aironet access points that run Cisco IOS software in lightweight mode. Understanding How Converted Access Points Send Crash Information to the Controller When a converted access point unexpectedly reboots, the access point stores a crash file on its local flash memory at the time of the crash. After the unit reboots, it sends the reason for the reboot to the controller. If the unit rebooted because of a crash, the controller pulls up the crash file using existing CAPWAP messages and stores it in the controller flash memory. The crash info copy is removed from the access point flash memory when the controller pulls it from the access point. Understanding How Converted Access Points Send Radio Core Dumps to the Controller When a radio module in a converted access point generates a core dump, the access point stores the core dump file of the radio on its local flash memory at the time of the radio crash. It sends a notification message to the controller indicating which radio generated a core dump file. The controller sends a trap that alerts you so that you can retrieve the radio core file from the access point. The retrieved core file is stored in the controller flash and can be uploaded through TFTP or FTP to an external server for analysis. The core file is removed from the access point flash memory when the controller pulls it from the access point. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 721 Understanding How Converted Access Points Send Radio Core Dumps to the Controller Retrieving Radio Core Dumps (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Transfer the radio core dump file from the access point to the controller by entering this command:

config ap crash-file get-radio-core-dump slot Cisco_AP For the slot parameter, enter the slot ID of the radio that crashed. Verify that the file was downloaded to the controller by entering this command:

show ap crash-file Uploading Radio Core Dumps (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Commands > Upload File to open the Upload File from Controller page. From the File Type drop-down list, choose Radio Core Dump. From the Transfer Mode drop-down list, choose from the following options:

TFTP FTP SFTP (available in the 7.4 and later releases) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the server. In the File Path text box, enter the directory path of the file. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the radio core dump file. Note The filename that you enter should match the filename generated on the controller. You can determine the filename on the controller by entering the show ap crash-file command. If you chose FTP as the Transfer Mode, follow these steps:

a) In the Server Login Username text box, enter the FTP server login name. b) In the Server Login Password text box, enter the FTP server login password. c) In the Server Port Number text box, enter the port number of the FTP server. The default value for the server port is 21. Step 8 Click Upload to upload the radio core dump file from the controller. A message appears indicating the status of the upload. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 722 OL-28744-01 Uploading Memory Core Dumps from Converted Access Points Uploading Radio Core Dumps (CLI) Step 1 Transfer the file from the controller to a server by entering these commands:

transfer upload mode {tftp | ftp | sftp}

transfer upload datatype radio-core-dump transfer upload serverip server_ip_address transfer upload path server_path_to_file transfer upload filename filename Note Note The filename that you enter should match the filename generated on the controller. You can determine the filename on the controller by entering the show ap crash-file command. Ensure that the filename and server_path_to_file do not contain these special characters: \, :, *, ?, ", <, >, and |. You can use only / (forward slash) as the path separator. If you use the disallowed special characters in the filename, then the special characters are replaced with _ (underscores); and if you use the disallowed special characters in the server_path_to_file, then the path is set to the root path. Step 2 If you are using an FTP server, also enter these commands:

transfer upload username username transfer upload password password transfer upload port port Note The default value for the port parameter is 21. Step 3 View the updated settings by entering this command:

transfer upload start Step 4 When prompted to confirm the current settings and start the software upload, answer y. Uploading Memory Core Dumps from Converted Access Points By default, access points converted to lightweight mode do not send memory core dumps to the controller. This section provides instructions to upload access point core dumps using the controller GUI or CLI. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 723 Viewing the AP Crash Log Information Uploading Access Point Core Dumps (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs > access point name > and choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs

> Details for (Advanced) page. Select the AP Core Dump check box to upload a core dump of the access point. In the TFTP Server IP text box, enter the IP address of the TFTP server. In the File Name text box, enter a name of the access point core dump file (such as dump.log). Select the File Compression check box to compress the access point core dump file. When you enable this option, the file is saved with a .gz extension (such as dump.log.gz). This file can be opened with WinZip. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Uploading Access Point Core Dumps (CLI) Step 1 Upload a core dump of the access point by entering this command on the controller:

config ap core-dump enable tftp_server_ip_address filename {compress | uncompress} {ap_name | all}

where tftp_server_ip_address is the IP address of the TFTP server to which the access point sends core dump files. Note The access point must be able to reach the TFTP server. filename is the name that the access points uses to label the core file. compress configures the access point to send compressed core files whereas uncompress configures the access point to send uncompressed core files. Note When you choose compress, the file is saved with a .gz extension (for example, dump.log.gz). This file can be opened with WinZip. ap_name is the name of a specific access point for which core dumps are uploaded and all is all access points converted to lightweight mode. Step 2 Enter the save config command to save your changes. Viewing the AP Crash Log Information Whenever the controller reboots or upgrades, the AP crash log information gets deleted from the controller. We recommend that you make a backup of AP crash log information before rebooting or upgrading the controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 724 OL-28744-01 Displaying MAC Addresses for Converted Access Points Viewing the AP Crash Log information (GUI) Choose Management > Tech Support > AP Crash Log to open the AP Crash Logs page. Viewing the AP Crash Log information (CLI) Step 1 Verify that the crash file was downloaded to the controller by entering this command:

show ap crash-file Information similar to the following appears:

Local Core Files:

lrad_AP1130.rdump0 (156) The number in parentheses indicates the size of the file. The size should be greater than zero if a core dump file is available. Step 2 See the contents of the AP crash log file by entering this command:

show ap crash-file Cisoc_AP Displaying MAC Addresses for Converted Access Points There are some differences in the way that controllers display the MAC addresses of converted access points on information pages in the controller GUI:

On the AP Summary page, the controller lists the Ethernet MAC addresses of converted access points. On the AP Detail page, the controller lists the BSS MAC addresses and Ethernet MAC addresses of converted access points. On the Radio Summary page, the controller lists converted access points by radio MAC address. Disabling the Reset Button on Access Points Converted to Lightweight Mode You can disable the reset button on access points converted to lightweight mode. The reset button is labeled MODE on the outside of the access point. Use this command to disable or enable the reset button on one or all converted access points associated to a controller:

config ap rst-button {enable | disable} {ap-name}

The reset button on converted access points is enabled by default. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 725 Configuring a Static IP Address on a Lightweight Access Point Configuring a Static IP Address on a Lightweight Access Point If you want to specify an IP address for an access point rather than having one assigned automatically by a DHCP server, you can use the controller GUI or CLI to configure a static IP address for the access point. Static IP addresses are generally used only for deployments with a limited number of users. An access point cannot discover the controller using domain name system (DNS) resolution if a static IP address is configured for the access point, unless you specify a DNS server and the domain to which the access point belongs. Previously, these parameters could be configured only using the CLI, but controller software release 6.0 or later releases expand this functionality to the GUI. Note If you configure an access point to use a static IP address that is not on the same subnet on which the access points previous DHCP address was, the access point falls back to a DHCP address after the access point reboots. If the access point falls back to a DHCP address, enter the show ap config general Cisco_AP CLI command to show that the access point is using a fallback IP address. However, the GUI shows both the static IP address and the DHCP address, but it does not identify the DHCP address as a fallback address. Configuring a Static IP Address (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the access point for which you want to configure a static IP address. The All APs > Details for (General) page appears. Under IP Config, select the Static IP check box if you want to assign a static IP address to this access point. The default value is unselected. Enter the static IP address, netmask, and default gateway in the corresponding text boxes. Click Apply to commit your changes. The access point reboots and rejoins the controller, and the static IP address that you specified in Step 4 is sent to the access point. After the static IP address has been sent to the access point, you can configure the DNS server IP address and domain name as follows:

a) In the DNS IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the DNS server. b) In the Domain Name text box, enter the name of the domain to which the access point belongs. c) Click Apply to commit your changes. d) Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring a Static IP Address (CLI) Step 1 Configure a static IP address on the access point by entering this command:

config ap static-ip enable Cisco_AP ip_address mask gateway Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 726 OL-28744-01 Supporting Oversized Access Point Images Note To disable static IP for the access point, enter the config ap static-ip disable Cisco_AP command. Enter the save config command to save your changes. The access point reboots and rejoins the controller, and the static IP address that you specified in Step 1 is pushed to the access point. After the static IP address has been sent to the access point, you can configure the DNS server IP address and domain name as follows:

a) To specify a DNS server so that a specific access point or all access points can discover the controller using DNS Step 2 Step 3 resolution, enter this command:

config ap static-ip add nameserver {Cisco_AP | all} ip_address Note To delete a DNS server for a specific access point or all access points, enter the config ap static-ip delete nameserver {Cisco_AP | all} command. b) To specify the domain to which a specific access point or all access points belong, enter this command:

config ap static-ip add domain {Cisco_AP | all} domain_name Note To delete a domain for a specific access point or all access points, enter this command: config ap static-ip delete domain {Cisco_AP | all}. Step 4 c) Enter the save config command to save your changes. See the IP address configuration for the access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 4 Cisco AP Name................................. AP6

... IP Address Configuration......................... Static IP assigned IP Address....................................... 10.10.10.118 IP NetMask....................................... 255.255.255.0 Gateway IP Addr............................... 10.10.10.1 Domain........................................... Domain1 Name Server................................... 10.10.10.205

... Supporting Oversized Access Point Images Controller software release 5.0 or later releases allow you to upgrade to an oversized access point image by automatically deleting the recovery image to create sufficient space. The recovery image provides a backup image that can be used if an access point power-cycles during an image upgrade. The best way to avoid the need for access point recovery is to prevent an access point from power-cycling during a system upgrade. If a power-cycle occurs during an upgrade to an oversized access point image, you can recover the access point using the TFTP recovery procedure. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 727 Supporting Oversized Access Point Images Recovering the Access PointUsing the TFTP Recovery Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Download the required recovery image from Cisco.com (c1100-rcvk9w8-mx, c1200-rcvk9w8-mx, or c1310-rcvk9w8-mx) and install it in the root directory of your TFTP server. Connect the TFTP server to the same subnet as the target access point and power-cycle the access point. The access point boots from the TFTP image and then joins the controller to download the oversized access point image and complete the upgrade procedure. After the access point has been recovered, you may remove the TFTP server. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 728 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 108 Configuring Packet Capture Information About Packet Capture, page 729 Restrictions for Packet Capture, page 730 Configuring Packet Capture (CLI), page 730 Information About Packet Capture To resolve issues such as voice and security on wireless networks, you might need to dump packets from the AP for analysis while the AP continues to operate normally. The packets can be dumped on to an FTP server. This process of dumping packets for analysis is called Packet Capture. Use the controller to start or stop packet capture for clients. You can choose the type of packets that need to be captured using the controller CLI from the following types:

Management Packets Control Packets Data Packets Dot1X ARP IAPP All IP UDP with matching port number DHCP TCP with matching port number Multicast frames Broadcast frames The packets are captured and dumped in the order of arrival or transmit of packets except for beacons and probe responses. The packet capture contains information such as channel, RSSI, data rate, SNR, and timestamp. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 729 Restrictions for Packet Capture Each packet is appended with additional information from the AP. You can choose to dump either just packet headers or full packets. The following are some guidelines for packet capture:

If FTP transfer time is slower than the packet rate, some of the packets do not appear in the capture file. If the buffer does not contain any packets, a known dummy packet is dumped to keep the connection alive. A file is created on the FTP server for each AP based on unique AP and controller name and timestamp. Ensure that the FTP server is reachable by the AP. If the FTP transfer fails or FTP connection is lost during packet capture, the AP stops capturing packets, notifies with an error message and SNMP trap, and a new FTP connection is established. Restrictions for Packet Capture Packet capture can be enabled for only one client. This feature is not supported in intercontroller roaming scenarios. If you know the AP or the controller to which the client is going to roam, you can configure the packet capture for the client in the new controller or AP using the CLI. Not all packets in the air are captured, but only those that reach the radio driver. By default, a packet capture process is stopped after 10 minutes. You can, however, configure the packet capture to stop at any time between 1 to 60 minutes. Configuring Packet Capture (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 730 Configure FTP parameters for packet capture by entering this command:

config ap packet-dump ftp serverip ip-address path path username user_ID password password Start or stop packet capture by entering this command:

config ap packet-dump {start client-mac-address ap-name | stop}

Configure the buffer size for packet capture by entering this command:

config ap packet-dump buffer-size size-in-kb Configure the time for packet capture by entering this command:

config ap packet-dump capture-time time-in-minutes The valid range is between 1 to 60 minutes. Configure the types of packets to be captured by entering this command:

config ap packet-dump classifier {arp | broadcast | control | data | dot1x | iapp | ip | management | multicast | {tcp port port-number} | {udp port port-number}} {enable | disable}

Configure the packet length after truncation by entering this command:

config ap packet-dump truncate length-in-bytes Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring Packet Capture (CLI) Step 7 Step 8 Know the status of packet capture by entering this command:

show ap packet-dump status Configure debugging of packet capture by entering this command:

debug ap packet-dump {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 731 Configuring Packet Capture (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 732 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 109 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points Information About OfficeExtend Access Points, page 733 OEAP 600 Series Access Points, page 734 Implementing Security, page 742 Licensing for an OfficeExtend Access Point, page 743 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points, page 743 Configuring a Personal SSID on an OfficeExtend Access Point, page 747 Viewing OfficeExtend Access Point Statistics, page 749 Information About OfficeExtend Access Points A Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend access point (Cisco OEAP) provides secure communications from a controller to an access point at a remote location, seamlessly extending the corporate WLAN over the Internet to an employees residence. The users experience at the home office is exactly the same as it would be at the corporate office. Datagram Transport Layer Security (DTLS) encryption between the access point and the controller ensures that all communications have the highest level of security. Note DTLS is permanently enabled on the Cisco OEAP. You cannot disable DTLS on this access point. The following figure shows a typical OfficeExtend access point setup. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 733 OEAP 600 Series Access Points Figure 49: Typical OfficeExtend Access Point Setup Note Cisco OEAPs are designed to work behind a router or other gateway device that is using network address translation (NAT). NAT allows a device, such as a router, to act as an agent between the Internet (public) and a personal network (private), enabling an entire group of computers to be represented by a single IP address. There is no limit to the number of Cisco OEAPs that you can deploy behind a NAT device. Roaming is not supported for the Cisco 600 OEAP model. Currently, Cisco 1040, 1130, 1140, 2602I, 3502I, and 3600 series access points that are associated with a controller can be configured to operate as Cisco OEAPs. OEAP 600 Series Access Points This section details the requirements for configuring a Cisco wireless LAN controller for use with the Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. The 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point supports split mode operation, and it requires configuration through the WLAN controller in local mode. This section describes the configurations necessary for proper connection and supported feature sets. Note The CAPWAP UDP 5246 and 5247 ports must be open on the firewall between the WLAN controller and the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. Note Multicast is not supported on Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Points. OEAP in Local Mode The 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point connects to the controller in local mode. You cannot alter these settings. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 734 OL-28744-01 OEAP 600 Series Access Points Note Monitor mode, flexconnect mode, sniffer mode, rogue detector, bridge, and SE-Connect are not supported on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point and are not configurable. Figure 50: OEAP Mode Supported WLAN Settings for 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point The 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point supports a maximum of three WLANs and one remote LAN. If your network deployment has more than three WLANs, you must place the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point in an AP group. If the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Points are added to an AP group, the same limit of three WLANs and one remote LAN still applies for the configuration of the AP group. If the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point is in the default group, which means that it is not in a defined AP group, the WLAN/remote LAN IDs must be set lower than ID 8. If additional WLANs or remote LANs are created with the intent of changing the WLANs or remote LAN being used by the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point, you must disable the current WLANs or remote LAN that you are removing before enabling the new WLANs or remote LAN on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. If there are more than one remote LANs enabled for an AP group, disable all remote LANs and then enable only one of them. If more than three WLANs are enabled for an AP group, disable all WLANs and then enable only three of them. WLAN Security Settings for the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point When configuring the security settings in the WLAN (see the following figure), note that there are specific elements that are not supported on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. CCX is not supported on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point, and elements related to CCX are not supported. For Layer 2 Security, the following options are supported for the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 735 OEAP 600 Series Access Points None WPA+WPA2 Static WEP 802.1X (only for remote LANs) Figure 51: WLAN Layer 2 Security Settings In the Security tab (see the following figure), do not select CCKM in WPA+WPA2 settings. Select only 802.1X or PSK. Figure 52: WLAN Security Settings - Auth Key Management Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 736 OL-28744-01 OEAP 600 Series Access Points Security encryption settings must be identical for WPA and WPA2 for TKIP and AES. The following are examples of incompatible settings for TKIP and AES. Figure 53: Incompatible WPA and WPA2 Security Encryption Settings for OEAP 600 Series Figure 54: Incompatible WPA and WPA2 Security Encryption Settings for OEAP 600 Series OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 737 OEAP 600 Series Access Points The following are examples of compatible settings:

Figure 55: Compatible Security Settings for OEAP Series Figure 56: Compatible Security Settings for OEAP Series QoS settings are supported (see the following figure), but CAC is not supported and should not be enabled. Note Do not enable Coverage Hole Detection. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 738 OL-28744-01 OEAP 600 Series Access Points Note Aironet IE should not be enabled. This option is not supported. Figure 57: QoS Settings for OEAP 600 MFP is also not supported and should be disabled or set to optional. Figure 58: MFP Settings for OEAP Series Access Points Client Load Balancing and Client Band Select are not supported. Authentication Settings For authentication on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point, LEAP is not supported. This configuration must be addressed on the clients and RADIUS servers to migrate them to EAP-Fast, EAP-TTLS, EAP-TLS, or PEAP. If Local EAP is being utilized on the controller, the settings would also have to be modified not to use LEAP. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 739 OEAP 600 Series Access Points Supported User Count on 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point Only 15 users are allowed to connect on the WLANs provided on the Cisco 600 Series OEAP at any one time, a sixteenth user cannot authenticate until one of the first clients is deauthenticated or timeout on the controller occurs. This number is cumulative across the controller WLANs on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. For example, if two controller WLANs are configured and there are 15 users on one of the WLANs, no other users can join the other WLAN on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point at that time. This limit does not apply to the local private WLANs that the end user configures on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point for personal use. Clients connected on these private WLANs or on the wired ports do not affect these limits. Note This limit does not apply to other AP models that operate in the OfficeExtend mode. Remote LAN Settings Only four clients can connect through a remote LAN port on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. This number does not affect the fifteen user limit imposed for the Controller WLANs. The remote LAN client limit supports connecting a switch or hub to the remote LAN port for multiple devices or connecting directly to a Cisco IP phone that is connected to that port. Only the first four devices can connect until one of the devices is idle for more than one minute. Remote LAN is configured in the same way that a WLAN or Guest LAN is configured on the controller:

Figure 59: Remote LAN Settings for OEAP 600 Series AP Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 740 OL-28744-01 OEAP 600 Series Access Points Security settings can be left open, set for MAC filtering, or set for Web Authentication. The default is to use MAC filtering. Additionally, you can specify 802.1X Layer 2 security settings. Figure 60: Layer 2 Security Settings for OEAP 600 Series APs in Remote LANs Figure 61: Layer 3 Security Settings for OEAP 600 Series APs in Remote LANs Channel Management and Settings The radios for the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point are controlled through the Local GUI on the access point and not through the Wireless LAN Controller. Attempting to control the spectrum channel or power, or to disable the radios through the controller does not have effect on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. RRM is not supported on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point. The 600 series scans and chooses channels for 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz during startup as long as the default settings on the local GUI are left as default in both spectrums. Figure 62: Channel Selection for OEAP 600 Series APs OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 741 Implementing Security The channel bandwidth for 5.0 GHz is also configured on the 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Point Local GUI, for 20-MHz or 40-MHz wide channels. Setting the channel width to 40 MHz for 2.4 GHz is not supported and fixed at 20 MHz. Figure 63: Channel Width for OEAP 600 APs Additional Caveats The Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Points (OEAPs) are designed for single AP deployments, therefore client roaming between Cisco 600 Series OEAPs is not supported. Disabling the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n on the controller may not disable these spectrums on the Cisco 600 Series OEAP because local SSID may be still working. Your firewall must be configured to allow traffic from access points using CAPWAP. Make sure that UDP ports 5246 and 5247 are enabled and are not blocked by an intermediate device that could prevent an access point from joining the controller. APs such as 3500, 3600, 1260, 2600, and 1040 that are converted to OEAP mode and mapped to locally switched WLAN forward the DHCP request to the local subnet on the AP connected switch. To avoid this condition, you must disable local switching and local authentication. For Cisco 600 Series OEAP to associate with Cisco Virtual Wireless LAN Controller, follow these steps:

1 Configure the OEAP to associate with a physical controller that is using 7.5 or a later release and download the corresponding AP image. 2 Configure the OEAP so that the OEAP does not associate with the physical controller again; for example, you can implement an ACL in the network to block CAPWAP between the OEAP and the physical controller. 3 Configure the OEAP to associate with the Cisco Virtual Wireless LAN Controller. Implementing Security Note Configuring LSC is not a requirement but is an option. The OfficeExtend 600 access points do not support LSC. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 742 OL-28744-01 Licensing for an OfficeExtend Access Point 1 Use local significant certificates (LSCs) to authorize your OfficeExtend access points, by following the instructions in Authorizing Access Points Using LSCs. 2 Implement AAA server validation using the access points MAC address, name, or both as the username in authorization requests, by entering this command:

config auth-list ap-policy authorize-ap username {ap_mac | Cisco_AP | both}

Using the access point name for validation can ensure that only the OfficeExtend access points of valid employees can associate with the controller. To implement this security policy, ensure that you name each OfficeExtend access point with an employee ID or employee number. When an employee is terminated, run a script to remove this user from the AAA server database, which prevents that employees OfficeExtend access point from joining the network. 3 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Note CCX is not supported on the 600 OEAP. Elements related to CCX are not supported. Also, only 802.1X or PSK is supported. TKIP and AES security encryption settings must be identical for WPA and WPA2. Licensing for an OfficeExtend Access Point To use OfficeExtend access points, a base license must be installed and in use on the controller. After the license is installed, you can enable the OfficeExtend mode on the following AP models:

1130 1240 1040 1140 1250 1260 1600 2600 3500 (integrated antenna) series 3600 (integrated antenna) series Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points After the 1130 series, 1140 series, 1040 series, 3500 (integrated antenna) series, or 3600 (integrated antenna) series access point has joined the controller, you can configure it as an OfficeExtend access point. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 743 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points (GUI) Choose Wireless to open the All APs page. Click the name of the desired access point to open the All APs > Details page. Enable FlexConnect on the access point as follows:

a) In the General tab, choose FlexConnect from the AP Mode drop-down list to enable FlexConnect for this access point. Configure one or more controllers for the access point as follows:

a) Click the High Availability tab. b) Enter the name and IP address of the primary controller for this access point in the Primary Controller Name and Management IP Address text boxes. Note You must enter both the name and IP address of the controller. Otherwise, the access point cannot join this controller. c) If desired, enter the name and IP address of a secondary or tertiary controller (or both) in the corresponding Controller Name and Management IP Address text boxes. d) Click Apply. The access point reboots and then rejoins the controller. Note The names and IP addresses must be unique for the primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers. Enable OfficeExtend access point settings as follows:

a) Click the FlexConnect tab. b) Select the Enable OfficeExtend AP check box to enable the OfficeExtend mode for this access point. The default value is selected. Unselecting this check box disables OfficeExtend mode for this access point. It does not undo all of the configuration settings on the access point. If you want to clear the access points configuration and return it to the factory-default settings, enter clear ap config Cisco_AP on the controller CLI. If you want to clear only the access points personal SSID, click Reset Personal SSID. Note Rogue detection is disabled automatically when you enable the OfficeExtend mode for an access point. However, you can enable or disable rogue detection for a specific access point by selecting the Rogue Detection check box on the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Rogue detection is disabled by default for OfficeExtend access points because these access points, which are deployed in a home environment, are likely to detect a large number of rogue devices. DTLS data encryption is enabled automatically when you enable the OfficeExtend mode for an access point. However, you can enable or disable DTLS data encryption for a specific access point by selecting the Data Encryption check box on the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Telnet and SSH access are disabled automatically when you enable the OfficeExtend mode for an access point. However, you can enable or disable Telnet or SSH access for a specific access point by selecting the Telnet or SSH check box on the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Link latency is enabled automatically when you enable the OfficeExtend mode for an access point. However, you can enable or disable link latency for a specific access point by selecting the Enable Link Latency check box on the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Note Note Note c) Select the Enable Least Latency Controller Join check box if you want the access point to choose the controller with the least latency when joining. Otherwise, leave this check box unselected, which is the default value. When you enable this feature, the access point calculates the time between the discovery request and discovery response and joins the Cisco 5500 Series Controller that responds first. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 744 OL-28744-01 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points d) Click Apply. The OfficeExtend AP text box on the All APs page shows which access points are configured as OfficeExtend access points. Step 6 Configure a specific username and password for the OfficeExtend access point so that the user at home can log into the GUI of the OfficeExtend access point:

a) Click the Credentials tab. b) Select the Over-ride Global Credentials check box to prevent this access point from inheriting the global username, password, and enable password from the controller. The default value is unselected. c) In the Username, Password, and Enable Password text boxes, enter the unique username, password, and enable password that you want to assign to this access point. Note The information that you enter is retained across controller and access point reboots and if the access point joins a new controller. d) Click Apply. Note If you want to force this access point to use the controllers global credentials, unselect the Over-ride Global Credentials check box. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Configure access to local GUI, LAN ports, and local SSID of the OfficeExtend access points:

a) Choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. b) Under OEAP Config Parameters, select or unselect the Disable Local Access check box to enable or disable local access of the OfficeExtend access points. Note By default, the Disable Local Access check box is unselected and therefore the Ethernet ports and personal SSIDs are enabled. This configuration does not affect remote LAN. The port is enabled only when you configure a remote LAN. Click Save Configuration. If your controller supports only OfficeExtend access points, see the Configuring RRM section for instructions on setting the recommended values for the DCA interval, channel scan duration, and neighbor packet frequency. Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points (CLI) Enable FlexConnect on the access point by entering this command:

config ap mode flexconnect Cisco_AP Configure one or more controllers for the access point by entering one or all of these commands:

config ap primary-base controller_name Cisco_AP controller_ip_address config ap secondary-base controller_name Cisco_AP controller_ip_address config ap tertiary-base controller_name Cisco_AP controller_ip_address Note You must enter both the name and IP address of the controller. Otherwise, the access point cannot join this controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 745 Configuring OfficeExtend Access Points Note The names and IP addresses must be unique for the primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers. Enable the OfficeExtend mode for this access point by entering this command:

config flexconnect office-extend {enable | disable} Cisco_AP The default value is enabled. The disable parameter disables OfficeExtend mode for this access point. It does not undo all of the configuration settings on the access point. If you want to clear the access points configuration and return it to the factory-default settings, enter this command:

clear ap config cisco-ap If you want to clear only the access points personal SSID, enter this command:

config flexconnect office-extend clear-personalssid-config Cisco_AP. Note Rogue detection is disabled automatically when you enable the OfficeExtend mode for an access point. However, you can enable or disable rogue detection for a specific access point or for all access points using the config rogue detection {enable | disable} {Cisco_AP | all} command. Rogue detection is disabled by default for OfficeExtend access points because these access points, which are deployed in a home environment, are likely to detect a large number of rogue devices. Note DTLS data encryption is enabled automatically when you enable the OfficeExtend mode for an access point. However, you can enable or disable DTLS data encryption for a specific access point or for all access points using the config ap link-encryption {enable | disable} {Cisco_AP | all} command. Note Telnet and SSH access are disabled automatically when you enable the OfficeExtend mode for an access point. However, you can enable or disable Telnet or SSH access for a specific access point using the config ap {telnet | ssh} {enable | disable} Cisco_AP command. Note Link latency is enabled automatically when you enable the OfficeExtend mode for an access point. However, you can enable or disable link latency for a specific access point or for all access points currently associated to the controller using the config ap link-latency {enable | disable} {Cisco_AP | all} command. Enable the access point to choose the controller with the least latency when joining by entering this command:

config flexconnect join min-latency {enable | disable} Cisco_AP The default value is disabled. When you enable this feature, the access point calculates the time between the discovery request and discovery response and joins the Cisco 5500 Series Controller that responds first. Configure a specific username and password that users at home can enter to log into the GUI of the OfficeExtend access point by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 746 OL-28744-01 Configuring a Personal SSID on an OfficeExtend Access Point config ap mgmtuser add username user password password enablesecret enable_password Cisco_AP The credentials that you enter in this command are retained across controller and access point reboots and if the access point joins a new controller. Note If you want to force this access point to use the controllers global credentials, enter the config ap mgmtuser delete Cisco_AP command. The following message appears after you execute this command: AP reverted to global username configuration. To configure access to the local network for the Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend access points, enter the following command:

config network oeap-600 local-network {enable | disable}

When disabled, the local SSIDs, local ports are inoperative; and the console is not accessible. When reset, the default restores local access. This configuration does not affect the remote LAN configuration if configured on the access points. Configure the Dual R-LAN Ports feature, which allows the Ethernet port 3 of Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend access points to operate as a remote LAN by entering this command:

config network oeap-600 dual-rlan-ports {enable | disable}

This configuration is global to the controller and is stored by the AP and the NVRAM variable. When this variable is set, the behavior of the remote LAN is changed. This feature supports different remote LANs per remote LAN port. The remote LAN mapping is different depending on whether the default group or AP Groups is used:

Default GroupIf you are using the default group, a single remote LAN with an even numbered remote LAN ID is mapped to port 4. For example, a remote LAN with remote LAN ID 2 is mapped to port 4 (on the Cisco 600 OEAP). The remote LAN with an odd numbered remote LAN ID is mapped to port 3 (on the Cisco 600 OEAP). For example, a remote LAN with remote LAN ID 1 is mapped to port 3 (on the Cisco 600 OEAP). AP GroupsIf you are using an AP group, the mapping to the OEAP-600 ports is determined by the order of the AP groups. To use an AP group, you must first delete all remote LANs and WLANs from the AP group leaving it empty. Then, add the two remote LANs to the AP group adding the port 3 AP remote LAN first, and the port 4 remote group second, followed by any WLANs. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Note If your controller supports only OfficeExtend access points, see the Configuring Radio Resource Management section for instructions on setting the recommended value for the DCA interval. Configuring a Personal SSID on an OfficeExtend Access Point Step 1 Find the IP address of your OfficeExtend access point by doing one of the following:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 747 Configuring a Personal SSID on an OfficeExtend Access Point Log on to your home router and look for the IP address of your OfficeExtend access point. Ask your companys IT professional for the IP address of your OfficeExtend access point. Use an application such as Network Magic to detect devices on your network and their IP addresses. Step 2 With the OfficeExtend access point connected to your home router, enter the IP address of the OfficeExtend access point in the Address text box of your Internet browser and click Go. Note Make sure that you are not connected to your companys network using a virtual private network (VPN) connection. Step 3 Step 4 When prompted, enter the username and password to log into the access point. On the OfficeExtend Access Point Welcome page, click Enter. The OfficeExtend Access Point Home page appears. Figure 64: OfficeExtend Access Point Home Page This page shows the access point name, IP address, MAC address, software version, status, channel, transmit power, and client traffic. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 748 OL-28744-01 Viewing OfficeExtend Access Point Statistics Step 5 Choose Configuration to open the Configuration page. Figure 65: OfficeExtend Access Point Configuration Page Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Select the Personal SSID check box to enable this wireless connection. The default value is disabled. In the SSID text box, enter the personal SSID that you want to assign to this access point. This SSID is locally switched. A controller with an OfficeExtend access point publishes only up to 15 WLANs to each connected access point Note because it reserves one WLAN for the personal SSID. From the Security drop-down list, choose Open, WPA2/PSK (AES), or 104 bit WEP to set the security type to be used by this access point. Note If you choose WPA2/PSK (AES), make sure that the client is configured for WPA2/PSK and AES encryption. If you chose WPA2/PSK (AES) in Step 8, enter an 8- to 38-character WPA2 passphrase in the Secret text box. If you chose 104 bit WEP, enter a 13-character ASCII key in the Key text box. Click Apply. Note If you want to use the OfficeExtend access point for another application, you can clear this configuration and return the access point to the factory-default settings by clicking Clear Config. You can also clear the access points configuration from the controller CLI by entering the clear ap config Cisco_AP command. Viewing OfficeExtend Access Point Statistics Use these commands to view information about the OfficeExtend access points on your network:

See a list of all OfficeExtend access points by entering this command:

show flexconnect office-extend summary OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 749 Viewing OfficeExtend Access Point Statistics See the link delay for OfficeExtend access points by entering this command:

show flexconnect office-extend latency See the encryption state of all access points or a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap link-encryption {all | Cisco_AP}

This command also shows authentication errors, which track the number of integrity check failures, and replay errors, which track the number of times that the access point receives the same packet. See the data plane status for all access points or a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap data-plane {all | Cisco_AP}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 750 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 110 Using Cisco Workgroup Bridges Information About Cisco Workgroup Bridges, page 751 Restrictions for Cisco Workgroup Bridges, page 753 WGB Configuration Example, page 754 Viewing the Status of Workgroup Bridges (GUI), page 755 Viewing the Status of Workgroup Bridges (CLI), page 755 Debugging WGB Issues (CLI), page 756 Information About Cisco Workgroup Bridges A workgroup bridge (WGB) is a mode that can be configured on an autonomous IOS access point to provide wireless connectivity to a lightweight access point on behalf of clients that are connected by Ethernet to the WGB access point. A WGB connects a wired network over a single wireless segment by learning the MAC addresses of its wired clients on the Ethernet interface and reporting them to the lightweight access point using Internet Access Point Protocol (IAPP) messaging. The WGB provides wireless access connectivity to wired clients by establishing a single wireless connection to the lightweight access point. The lightweight access point treats the WGB as a wireless client. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 751 Information About Cisco Workgroup Bridges A Cisco IOS AP as a WGB using the Cisco IOS 15.2 or later releases support Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) with the controller. Figure 66: WGB Example Note If the lightweight access point fails, the WGB attempts to associate to another access point. The following are some guidelines for Cisco Workgroup Bridges:

The WGB can be any autonomous access point that supports the workgroup bridge mode and is running Cisco IOS Release 12.4(3g)JA or later releases (on 32-MB access points) or Cisco IOS Release 12.3(8)JEB or later releases (on 16-MB access points). These access points include the AP1120, AP1121, AP1130, AP1231, AP1240, and AP1310. Cisco IOS releases prior to 12.4(3g)JA and 12.3(8)JEB are not supported. Note If your access point has two radios, you can configure only one for workgroup bridge mode. This radio is used to connect to the lightweight access point. We recommend that you disable the second radio. Enable the workgroup bridge mode on the WGB as follows:

On the WGB access point GUI, choose Workgroup Bridge for the role in radio network on the Settings > Network Interfaces page. On the WGB access point CLI, enter the station-role workgroup-bridge command. Note See the sample WGB access point configuration in the WGB Configuration Example section. The following features are supported for use with a WGB:

Guest N+1 redundancy Local EAP Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 752 OL-28744-01 Restrictions for Cisco Workgroup Bridges Open, WEP 40, WEP 128, CKIP, WPA+TKIP, WPA2+AES, LEAP, EAP-FAST, and EAP-TLS authentication modes Wired clients connected to the WGB are not authenticated for security. Instead, the WGB is authenticated against the access point to which it associates. Therefore, we recommend that you physically secure the wired side of the WGB. Wired clients connected to a WGB inherit the WGBs QoS and AAA override attributes. To enable the WGB to communicate with the lightweight access point, create a WLAN and make sure that Aironet IE is enabled. If you have to apply ACL to WGB during run time, do not modify the ACL configuration for interface in the controller during run time. If you need to modify any ACLs, then you must diable all WLANs that are in the controller or disable both the 802.11a and 80.11b networks. Also, ensure that there are no clients associated and mapped to that interface and then you can modify the ACL settings. Restrictions for Cisco Workgroup Bridges The WGB can associate only with lightweight access points. Only WGBs in client mode (which is the default value) are supported. Those WGBs in infrastructure mode are not supported. Perform one of the following to enable client mode on the WGB:

On the WGB access point GUI, choose Disabled for the Reliable Multicast to WGB parameter. On the WGB access point CLI, enter the no infrastructure client command. Note VLANs are not supported for use with WGBs. Note See the sample WGB access point configuration in the WGB Configuration Example section. The following features are not supported for use with a WGB:

Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM) Idle timeout Web authentication Note If a WGB associates to a web-authentication WLAN, the WGB is added to the exclusion list, and all of the WGB wired clients are deleted. The WGB supports a maximum of 20 wired clients. If you have more than 20 wired clients, use a bridge or another device. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 753 WGB Configuration Example The DirectStream feature from the controller does not work for clients behind workgroup bridges and the stream is denied. With Layer 3 roaming, if you plug a wired client into the WGB network after the WGB has roamed to another controller (for example, to a foreign controller), the wired clients IP address displays only on the anchor controller, not on the foreign controller. If a wired client does not send traffic for an extended period of time, the WGB removes the client from its bridge table, even if traffic is continuously being sent to the wired client. As a result, the traffic flow to the wired client fails. To avoid the traffic loss, prevent the wired client from being removed from the bridge table by configuring the aging-out timer on the WGB to a large value using the following Cisco IOS commands on the WGB:

configure terminal bridge bridge-group-number aging-time seconds exit end where bridge-group-number is a value between 1 and 255, and seconds is a value between 10 and 1,000,000 seconds. We recommend configuring the seconds parameter to a value greater than the wired clients idle period. When you delete a WGB record from the controller, all of the WGB wired clients records are also deleted. These features are not supported for wired clients connected to a WGB:

MAC filtering Link tests Idle timeout The broadcast forwarding toward wired WGB clients works only on the native VLAN. If additional VLANs are configured, only the native VLAN forwards broadcast traffic. Wired clients behind a WGB cannot connect to a DMZ/Anchor controller. To enable wired clients behind a WGB to connect to an anchor controller in a DMZ, you must enable VLANs in the WGB using the config wgb vlan enable command. The dot11 arp-cache global configuration command that you can enter on the access point that is in WGB mode is not supported. WGB Configuration Example The following is an example of the configuration of a WGB access point using static WEP with a 40-bit WEP key:

ap# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. ap(config)# dot11 ssid WGB_with_static_WEP ap(config-ssid)# authentication open ap(config-ssid)# guest-mode ap(config-ssid)# exit ap(config)# interface dot11Radio 0 ap(config)# station-role workgroup-bridge ap(config-if)# encry mode wep 40 ap(config-if)# encry key 1 size 40 0 1234567890 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 754 OL-28744-01 Viewing the Status of Workgroup Bridges (GUI) ap(config-if)# ssid WGB_with_static_WEP ap(config-if)# end Verify that the WGB is associated to an access point by entering this command on the WGB:

show dot11 association Information similar to the following appears:

ap# show dot11 associations 802.11 Client Stations on Dot11Radio0:

SSID [FCVTESTING] :

MAC Address Device IP address 000b.8581.6aee 10.11.12.1 WGB-client ap#

Name map1 Parent

-

State Assoc Viewing the Status of Workgroup Bridges (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose Monitor > Clients to open the Clients page. The WGB text box on the right side of the page indicates whether any of the clients on your network are workgroup bridges. Click the MAC address of the desired client. The Clients > Detail page appears. The Client Type text box under Client Properties shows WGB if this client is a workgroup bridge, and the Number of Wired Client(s) text box shows the number of wired clients that are connected to this WGB. See the details of any wired clients that are connected to a particular WGB as follows:

a) Click Back on the Clients > Detail page to return to the Clients page. b) Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired WGB and choose Show Wired Clients. The WGB Wired Clients page appears. Note If you want to disable or remove a particular client, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired client and choose Remove or Disable, respectively. c) Click the MAC address of the desired client to see more details for this particular client. The Clients > Detail page appears. The Client Type text box under Client Properties shows WGB Client, and the rest of the text boxes on this page provide additional information for this client. Viewing the Status of Workgroup Bridges (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 OL-28744-01 See any WGBs on your network by entering this command:

show wgb summary See the details of any wired clients that are connected to a particular WGB by entering this command:

show wgb detail wgb_mac_address Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 755 Debugging WGB Issues (CLI) Debugging WGB Issues (CLI) Before You Begin Enable debugging for IAPP messages, errors, and packets by entering these commands:

debug iapp all enableEnables debugging for IAPP messages. debug iapp error enableEnables debugging for IAPP error events. debug iapp packet enableEnables debugging for IAPP packets. Debug an roaming issue by entering this command:

debug mobility handoff enable Debug an IP assignment issue when DHCP is used by entering these commands:

debug dhcp message enable debug dhcp packet enable Debug an IP assignment issue when static IP is used by entering these commands:

debug dot11 mobile enable debug dot11 state enable Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 756 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 111 Using Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges Information About Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges, page 757 Restrictions for Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges, page 758 Information About Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges When a Cisco workgroup bridge (WGB) is used, the WGB informs the access points of all the clients that it is associated with. The controller is aware of the clients associated with the access point. When non-Cisco WGBs are used, the controller has no information about the IP address of the clients on the wired segment behind the WGB. Without this information, the controller drops the following types of messages:

ARP REQ from the distribution system for the WGB client ARP RPLY from the WGB client DHCP REQ from the WGB client DHCP RPLY for the WGB client The following are some guidelines for Non-Cisco workgroup bridges:

The controller can accommodate non-Cisco WGBs so that the controller can forward ARP, DHCP, and data traffic to and from the wired clients behind workgroup bridges by enabling the passive client feature. To configure your controller to work with non-Cisco WGBs, you must enable the passive client feature so that all traffic from the wired clients is routed through the WGB to the access point. All traffic from the wired clients is routed through the work group bridge to the access point. When a WGB wired client leaves a multicast group, the downstream multicast traffic to other WGB wired clients is interrupted briefly. If you have clients that use PC virtualization software like VMware, you must enable this feature. Note We have tested multiple third-party devices for compatibility but cannot ensure that all non-Cisco devices work. Support for any interaction or configuration details on the third-party device should be discussed with the device manufacturer. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 757 Restrictions for Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges You must enable the passive client functionality for all non-Cisco workgroup bridges. You might need to use the following commands to configure DHCP on clients:

Disable DHCP proxy by using the config dhcp proxy disable command. Enable DHCP boot broadcast by using the tconfig dhcp proxy disable bootp-broadcast enable command. Restrictions for Non-Cisco Workgroup Bridges Only Layer 2 roaming is supported for WGB devices. Layer 3 security (web authentication) is not support for WGB clients. Visibility of wired hosts behind a WGB on a controller is not supported because the non-Cisco WGB device performs MAC hiding. Cisco WGB supports IAPP. ARP poisoning detection does not work on a WLAN when the flag is enabled. VLAN select is not supported for WGB clients. Some third-party WGBs need to operate in non-DHCP relay mode. If problems occur with the DHCP assignment on devices behind the non-Cisco WGB, use the config dhcp proxy disable and config dhcp proxy disable bootp-broadcast disable commands. The default state is DHCP proxy enabled. The best combination depends on the third-party characteristics and configuration. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 758 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 112 Configuring Backup Controllers Information About Configuring Backup Controllers, page 759 Restrictions for Configuring Backup Controllers, page 760 Configuring Backup Controllers (GUI), page 760 Configuring Backup Controllers (CLI), page 761 Information About Configuring Backup Controllers A single controller at a centralized location can act as a backup for access points when they lose connectivity with the primary controller in the local region. Centralized and regional controllers do not need to be in the same mobility group. You can specify a primary, secondary, and tertiary controller for specific access points in your network. Using the controller GUI or CLI, you can specify the IP addresses of the backup controllers, which allows the access points to fail over to controllers outside of the mobility group. The following are some guidelines for configuring backup controllers:

You can configure primary and secondary backup controllers (which are used if primary, secondary, or tertiary controllers are not specified or are not responsive) for all access points connected to the controller as well as various timers, including heartbeat timers and discovery request timers. To reduce the controller failure detection time, you can configure the fast heartbeat interval (between the controller and the access point) with a smaller timeout value. When the fast heartbeat timer expires (at every heartbeat interval), the access point determines if any data packets have been received from the controller within the last interval. If no packets have been received, the access point sends a fast echo request to the controller. The access point maintains a list of backup controllers and periodically sends primary discovery requests to each entry on the list. When the access point receives a new discovery response from a controller, the backup controller list is updated. Any controller that fails to respond to two consecutive primary discovery requests is removed from the list. If the access points local controller fails, it chooses an available controller from the backup controller list in this order: primary, secondary, tertiary, primary backup, and secondary backup. The access point waits for a discovery response from the first available controller in the backup list and joins the controller if it receives a response within the time configured for the primary discovery request timer. If the time limit is reached, the access point assumes that the controller cannot be joined and waits for a discovery response from the next available controller in the list. When an access point's primary controller comes back online, the access point disassociates from the backup controller and reconnects to its primary controller. The access point falls back only to its primary OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 759 Restrictions for Configuring Backup Controllers controller and not to any available secondary controller for which it is configured. For example, if an access point is configured with primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers, it fails over to the tertiary controller when the primary and secondary controllers become unresponsive. If the secondary controller comes back online while the primary controller is down, the access point does not fall back to the secondary controller and stays connected to the tertiary controller. The access point waits until the primary controller comes back online to fall back from the tertiary controller to the primary controller. If the tertiary controller fails and the primary controller is still down, the access point then falls back to the available secondary controller. Restrictions for Configuring Backup Controllers You can configure the fast heartbeat timer only for access points in local and FlexConnect modes. Configuring Backup Controllers (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 760 Choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. From the Local Mode AP Fast Heartbeat Timer State drop-down list, choose Enable to enable the fast heartbeat timer for access points in local mode or choose Disable to disable this timer. The default value is Disable. If you chose Enable in Step 2, enter the Local Mode AP Fast Heartbeat Timeout text box to configure the fast heartbeat timer for access points in local mode. Specifying a small heartbeat interval reduces the amount of time it takes to detect a controller failure. The range for the AP Fast Heartbeat Timeout value for Cisco Flex 7500 Controllers is 1015 (inclusive) and is 110

(inclusive) for other controllers. The default value for the heartbeat timeout for Cisco Flex 7500 Controllers is 10. The default value for other controllers is 1 second. From the FlexConnect Mode AP Fast Heartbeat Timer State drop-down list, choose Enable to enable the fast heartbeat timer for FlexConnect access points or choose Disable to disable this timer. The default value is Disable. If you enable FlexConnect fast heartbeat, enter the FlexConnect Mode AP Fast Heartbeat Timeout value in the FlexConnect Mode AP Fast Heartbeat Timeout text box. Specifying a small heartbeat interval reduces the amount of time it takes to detect a controller failure. The range for the FlexConnect Mode AP Fast Heartbeat Timeout value for Cisco Flex 7500 Controllers is 1015 (inclusive) and is 110 for other controllers. The default value for the heartbeat timeout for Cisco Flex 7500 Controllers is 10. The default value for other controllers is 1 second. In the AP Primary Discovery Timeout text box, a value between 30 and 3600 seconds (inclusive) to configure the access point primary discovery request timer. The default value is 120 seconds. If you want to specify a primary backup controller for all access points, enter the IP address of the primary backup controller in the Back-up Primary Controller IP Address text box and the name of the controller in the Back-up Primary Controller Name text box. Note The default value for the IP address is 0.0.0.0, which disables the primary backup controller. If you want to specify a secondary backup controller for all access points, enter the IP address of the secondary backup controller in the Back-up Secondary Controller IP Address text box and the name of the controller in the Back-up Secondary Controller Name text box. Note The default value for the IP address is 0.0.0.0, which disables the secondary backup controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring Backup Controllers (CLI) Step 9 Step 10 Click Apply to commit your changes. Configure primary, secondary, and tertiary backup controllers for a specific access point as follows:

a) Choose Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. b) Click the name of the access point for which you want to configure primary, secondary, and tertiary backup controllers. c) Choose the High Availability tab to open the All APs > Details for (High Availability) page. d) If desired, enter the name and IP address of the primary controller for this access point in the Primary Controller text boxes. Note Entering an IP address for the backup controller is optional in this step and the next two steps. If the backup controller is outside the mobility group to which the access point is connected (the primary controller), then you need to provide the IP address of the primary, secondary, or tertiary controller, respectively. The controller name and IP address must belong to the same primary, secondary, or tertiary controller. Otherwise, the access point cannot join the backup controller. e) If desired, enter the name and IP address of the secondary controller for this access point in the Secondary Controller text boxes. If desired, enter the name and IP address of the tertiary controller for this access point in the Tertiary Controller text boxes. f) g) Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Step 11 Configuring Backup Controllers (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Configure a primary controller for a specific access point by entering this command:

config ap primary-base controller_name Cisco_AP [controller_ip_address]

Note The controller_ip_address parameter in this command and the next two commands is optional. If the backup controller is outside the mobility group to which the access point is connected (the primary controller), then you need to provide the IP address of the primary, secondary, or tertiary controller, respectively. In each command, the controller_name and controller_ip_address must belong to the same primary, secondary, or tertiary controller. Otherwise, the access point cannot join the backup controller. Configure a secondary controller for a specific access point by entering this command:

config ap secondary-base controller_name Cisco_AP [controller_ip_address]

Configure a tertiary controller for a specific access point by entering this command:

config ap tertiary-base controller_name Cisco_AP [controller_ip_address]

Configure a primary backup controller for all access points by entering this command:

config advanced backup-controller primary backup_controller_name backup_controller_ip_address Configure a secondary backup controller for all access points by entering this command:

config advanced backup-controller secondary backup_controller_name backup_controller_ip_address To delete a primary or secondary backup controller entry, enter 0.0.0.0 for the controller IP address. Note Enable or disable the fast heartbeat timer for local or FlexConnect access points by entering this command:

config advanced timers ap-fast-heartbeat {local | flexconnect | all} {enable | disable} interval OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 761 Configuring Backup Controllers (CLI) where all is both local and FlexConnect access points, and interval is a value between 1 and 10 seconds (inclusive). Specifying a small heartbeat interval reduces the amount of time that it takes to detect a controller failure. The default value is disabled.Configure the access point heartbeat timer by entering this command:

config advanced timers ap-heartbeat-timeout interval where interval is a value between 1 and 30 seconds (inclusive). This value should be at least three times larger than the fast heartbeat timer. The default value is 30 seconds. Caution Do not enable the fast heartbeat timer with the high latency link. If you have to enable the fast heartbeat timer, the timer value must be greater than the latency. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Configure the access point primary discovery request timer by entering this command:

config advanced timers ap-primary-discovery-timeout interval where interval is a value between 30 and 3600 seconds. The default value is 120 seconds. Configure the access point discovery timer by entering this command:

config advanced timers ap-discovery-timeout interval where interval is a value between 1 and 10 seconds (inclusive). The default value is 10 seconds. Configure the 802.11 authentication response timer by entering this command:

config advanced timers auth-timeout interval where interval is a value between 10 and 600 seconds (inclusive). The default value is 10 seconds. Step 10 Step 11 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See an access points configuration by entering these commands:

show ap config general Cisco_AP show advanced backup-controller show advanced timers Information similar to the following appears for the show ap config general Cisco_AP command:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 1 Cisco AP Name.................................... AP5 Country code..................................... US - United States Regulatory Domain allowed by Country............. 802.11bg:-AB AP Country code.................................. US - United States AP Regulatory Domain............................. 802.11bg:-A Switch Port Number .............................. 1 MAC Address...................................... 00:13:80:60:48:3e IP Address Configuration......................... DHCP IP Address....................................... 1.100.163.133

... Primary Cisco Switch Name........................ 1-5508 Primary Cisco Switch IP Address.................. 2.2.2.2 Secondary Cisco Switch Name...................... 1-4404 Secondary Cisco Switch IP Address................ 2.2.2.2 Tertiary Cisco Switch Name....................... 2-4404 Tertiary Cisco Switch IP Address................. 1.1.1.4 802.11a:-AB 802.11a:-N Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 762 OL-28744-01 Configuring Backup Controllers (CLI)

... Information similar to the following appears for the show advanced backup-controller command:

AP primary Backup Controller .................... controller1 10.10.10.10 AP secondary Backup Controller ............... 0.0.0.0 Information similar to the following appears for the show advanced timers command:

Authentication Response Timeout (seconds)........ 10 Rogue Entry Timeout (seconds).................... 1300 AP Heart Beat Timeout (seconds).................. 30 AP Discovery Timeout (seconds)................... 10 AP Local mode Fast Heartbeat (seconds)........... 10 (enable) AP flexconnect mode Fast Heartbeat (seconds)........... disable AP Primary Discovery Timeout (seconds)........... 120 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 763 Configuring Backup Controllers (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 764 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 113 Configuring High Availability Information About High Availability, page 765 Restrictions for High Availability, page 767 Configuring High Availability (GUI), page 769 Configuring High Availability (CLI), page 770 Information About High Availability High availability (HA) in controllers allows you to reduce the downtime of the wireless networks that occurs due to the failover of controllers. A 1:1 (Active:Standby-Hot) stateful switchover of access points (AP SSO) is supported. In an HA architecture, one controller is configured as the primary controller and another controller as the secondary controller. After you enable HA, the primary and secondary controllers are rebooted. During the boot process, the role of the primary controller is negotiated as active and the role of the secondary controller as standby-hot. After a switchover, the secondary controller becomes the active controller and the primary controller becomes the standby-hot controller. After subsequent switchovers, the roles are interchanged between the primary and the secondary controllers. The reason for switchovers are either because of manual trigger or a controller or network failure. During an AP SSO, all the AP sessions statefully switch over and all the clients are deauthenticated and reassociated with the new active controller except for the locally switched clients in the FlexConnect mode. The standby-hot controller continuously monitors the health of the active controller through a direct wired connection over a dedicated redundancy port. Both the controllers share the same configurations, including the IP address of the management interface. Before you enable HA, ensure that both the controllers are physically connected through the redundant port using an Ethernet cable. Also, ensure that the uplink is connected to an infrastructure switch and that the gateway is reachable from both the controllers. In HA architecture, the redundancy port and redundant management interfaces have been newly introduced. The following are some guidelines for high availability:

We recommend that you do not pair two controllers of different hardware models. If they are paired, then a higher controller model becomes the active controller and the other controller goes into maintenance mode. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 765 Information About High Availability We recommend that you do not pair two controllers on different controller software releases. If they are paired, then the controller with the lower redundancy management address becomes the active controller and the other controller goes into maintenance mode. All download file types, such as Image, Config, Web-Authentication bundle, and Signature files, are downloaded on the active controller first and then pushed to the standby-hot controller. Certificates should be downloaded separately on each controller before they are paired. You can upload file types such as Config, Event Logs, Crash files, and so on, from the standby-hot controller using the GUI or CLI of the active controller. You can also specify a suffix to the filename to identify the uploaded file. To perform a peer upload, use the service port. In a management network, you can also use the redundancy management interface (RMI) that is mapped to the redundancy port or RMI VLAN, or both, that is the same as the management VLAN. If the controllers cannot reach each other through the redundant port or the RMI, the primary controller becomes active and the standby-hot controller goes into the maintenance mode. Note To achieve HA between two Cisco WiSM2 platforms, the controllers should be deployed on a single chassis or on multiple chassis using a virtual switching system (VSS) and extending a redundancy VLAN between the multiple chassis. Note A redundancy VLAN should be a nonroutable VLAN in which a Layer 3 interface should not be created for the VLAN and the interface should be allowed on the trunk port to extend an HA setup between multiple chassis. Redundancy VLAN should be created like any other data VLAN on Cisco IOS-based switching software. A redundancy VLAN is connected to the redundant port on Cisco WiSM2 through the backplane. It is not necessary to configure the IP address for the redundancy VLAN because the IP address is automatically generated. Also, ensure that the redundancy VLAN is not the same as the management VLAN. When HA is enabled, ensure that you do not use the backed-up image. If this image is used, the HA feature might not work as expected:

The service port and route information that is configured is lost after you enable SSO. You must configure the service port and route information again after you enable SSO. You can configure the service port and route information for the standby-hot controller using the peer-service-port and peer-route commands. For Cisco WiSM2, service port reconfigurations are required after you enable redundancy. Otherwise, Cisco WiSM2 might not be able to communicate with the supervisor. We recommend that you enable DHCP on the service port before you enable redundancy. We recommend that you do not use the reset command on the standby-hot controller directly. If you use this, unsaved configurations will be lost. We recommend that you enable link aggregation (LAG) configuration on the controllers before you enable the port channel in the infrastructure switches. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 766 OL-28744-01 Restrictions for High Availability All configurations that require reboot of the active controller results in the reboot of the standby-hot controller. The Ignore AP list is not synchronized from the active controller to the standby-hot controller. The list is relearned through SNMP messages from the Cisco Prime Infrastructure, after the standby-hot controller becomes active. In Release 7.3.x, AP SSO is supported but client SSO is not supported, which means that after an HA setup that uses Release 7.3.x encounters a switchover, all the clients associated with the Cisco WLC are deauthenticated and are forced to reassociate. You must manually configure the mobility MAC address on the then active controller post switchover, when a peer controller has a controller software release that is prior to Release 7.2. Redundancy Management Interface The active and standby-hot controllers use the Redundancy Management Interface to check the health of the peer controller and the default gateway of the management interface through the network infrastructure. The Redundancy Management Interface is also used to send notifications from the active controller to the standby-hot controller if a failure or manual reset occurs. The standby-hot controller uses the Redundancy Management Interface to communicate to the syslog, NTP server, FTP, and TFTP server. It is mandatory to configure the IP addresses of the Redundancy Management Interface and the Management Interface in the same subnet on both the primary and secondary controllers. Redundancy Port The redundancy port is used for configuration, operational data synchronization, and role negotiation between the primary and secondary controllers. The redundancy port checks for peer reachability by sending UDP keepalive messages every 100 milliseconds

(default frequency) from the standby-hot controller to the active controller. If a failure of the active controller occurs, the redundancy port is used to notify the standby-hot controller. If an NTP server is not configured, the redundancy port performs a time synchronization from the active controller to the standby-hot controller. In Cisco WiSM2, the redundancy VLAN must be configured on the Cisco Catalyst 6000 supervisor engine because there is no physical redundancy port is available on Cisco WiSM2. The redundancy port and the redundancy VLAN in Cisco WiSM2 are assigned an automatically generated IP address in which the last two octets are obtained from the last two octets of the Redundancy Management Interface. The first two octets are always 169.254. For example, if the IP address of the Redundancy Management Interface is 209.165.200.225, the IP address of the redundancy port is 169.254.200.225. Restrictions for High Availability When you configure the controller for HA SSO, the Cisco 600 Series OfficeExtend Access Points are not supported. In an HA environment using FlexConnect locally switched clients, the client information might not show the username. To get details about the client, you must use the MAC address of the client. This restriction does not apply to FlexConnect centrally switched clients or central (local) mode clients. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 767 Restrictions for High Availability It is not possible to access the Cisco WiSM2 GUI through the service interface when you have enabled HA. The workaround is to create a service port interface again after HA is established. In an HA environment, an upgrade from an LDPE image to a non-LDPE image is not supported. It is not possible to pair two primary controllers or two secondary controllers. Standby controllers are unavailable on the APs connected switch port An HA-SKU controller with an evaluation license cannot become a standby controller. However, an HA-SKU controller with zero license can become a standby controller. The following scenario is not supported: The primary controller has the management address and the redundancy management address in the same VLAN, and the secondary controller has the management address in the same VLAN as the primary one, and the redundancy management address in a different VLAN. The following is a list of some software upgrade scenarios:

A software upgrade on the active controller ensures the upgrade of the standby-hot controller. An in-service upgrade is not supported. Therefore, you should plan your network downtime before you upgrade the controllers in an HA environment. Rebooting the active controller after a software upgrade also reboots the standby-hot controller. If both active and standby-hot controllers have different software releases in the backup, and if you enter the config boot backup command in the active controller, both the controllers reboot with their respective backup images breaking the HA pair due to a software mismatch. A schedule reset applies to both the controllers in an HA environment. The peer controller reboots a minute before the scheduled time expires on the active controller. You can reboot the standby-hot controller from the active controller by entering the reset peer-system command if the scheduled reset is not planned. If you reset only the standby-hot controller with this command, any unsaved configurations on the standby-hot controller is lost. Therefore, ensure that you save the configurations on the active controller before you reset the standby-hot controller. A preimage download is reinitiated if an SSO is triggered at the time of the image transfer. Only debug and show commands are allowed on the standby-hot controller. It is not possible to access the standby-hot controller through the controller GUI, Cisco Prime Infrastructure, or Telnet. You can access the standby-hot controller only on its console. To enable or disable LAG, you must disable HA. Note If LAG is disabled and both primary and backup ports are connected to the management interface and if the primary port becomes nonoperational, a switchover might occur because the default gateway is not reachable and backup port failover might exceed 12 seconds. When a failover occurs and the standby controller becomes the new active controller, it takes approximately 15 to 20 minutes to synchronize the database (AP, client, and multicast) between the two controllers. If another failover occurs during this time, the HA structures would not yet be synchronized. Therefore, the APs and clients would have to get reassociated and reauthenticated respectively. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 768 OL-28744-01 Configuring High Availability (GUI) Pairwise Master Key (PMK) cache synchronization is not supported on FlexConnect local-authenticated clients. You cannot change the NAT address configuration of the management interface when the controllers are in redundancy mode. To enable NAT address configuration on the management interface, you must remove the redundancy configuration first, make the required changes on the primary controller, and then reenable the redundancy configuration on the same controller. Configuring High Availability (GUI) Before You Begin Ensure that the management interfaces of both controllers are in the same subnet. You can verify this on the GUI of both the controllers by choosing Controllers > Interfaces and viewing the IP addresses of the management interface. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 On the GUI of both controllers, choose Controller > Redundancy > Global Configuration. The Global Configuration page is displayed. Enter the addresses of both the controllers in the Redundant Management IP and the Peer Redundant Management IP text boxes. Ensure that the Redundant Management Interface IP address of one controller is the same as the Redundancy Management Interface IP address of the peer controller. From the Redundant Unit drop-down list, choose one of the controllers as primary and the other as secondary. On the GUI of both the controllers, set the SSO to Enabled state. After you enable an SSO, the service port peer IP address and the service port netmask appear on the configuration page. Note that the service port peer IP address and the netmask can be pushed to the peer only if the HA peer is available and operational. When you enable HA, you do not have to configure the service port peer IP address and the service port netmask parameters. You must configure the parameters only when the HA peer is available and operational. After you enable SSO, both the controllers are rebooted. During the reboot process, the controllers negotiate the redundancy role through the redundant port based on the configuration. The primary controller becomes the active controller and the secondary controller becomes the standby controller. Step 5

(Optional) When the HA pair becomes available and operational, you can configure the peer service port IP address and the netmask when the service port is configured as static. If you enable DHCP on the service port, you do not have to configure these parameters on the Global Configuration page:

Service Port Peer IPIP address of the service port of the peer controller. Service Port Peer NetmaskNetmask of the service port of the peer controller. Mobility MAC AddressA common MAC address for the active and standby controllers that is used in the mobility protocol. If an HA pair has to be added as a mobility member for a mobility group, the mobility MAC address (instead of the system MAC address of the active or standby controller) should be used. Normally, the mobility MAC address is chosen as the MAC address of the active controller and you do not have to manually configure this. Keep Alive TimerThe timer that controls how often the standby controller sends heartbeat keepalive messages to the active controller. The valid range is between 100 to 400 milliseconds, in multiples of 50. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 769 Configuring High Availability (CLI) Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Peer Search TimerThe timer that controls how often the active controller sends peer search messages to the standby controller. The valid range is between 60 to 180 seconds. After you enable the HA and pair the controllers, there is only one unified GUI to manage the HA pair through the management port. GUI access through the service port is not feasible for both the active and standby controllers. The standby controller can be managed only through the console or the service port. Only Telnet and SSH sessions are allowed through the service port of the active and standby controllers. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. View the redundancy status of the HA pair by choosing Monitor > Redundancy > Summary. The Redundancy Summary page is displayed. Follow these steps to configure the peer network route:

a) Choose Controller > Redundancy > Peer Network Route. The Network Routes Peer page is displayed. This page provides a summary of the existing service port network routes of the peer controller to network or element management systems on a different subnet. You can view the IP address, IP netmask, or gateway IP address. b) To create a new peer network route, click New. c) Enter the IP address, IP netmask, and the Gateway IP address of the route. d) Click Apply. Configuring High Availability (CLI) Before You Begin Ensure that the management interfaces of both controllers are in the same subnet. Configure a local redundancy IP address and a peer redundancy management IP address by entering this command:

config interface address redundancy-management ip-addr1 peer-redundancy-management ip-addr2 Configure the role of a controller by entering this command:

config redundancy unit {primary | secondary}

Configure redundancy by entering this command:

config redundancy mode {sso {ap | client} | disable}

You can choose between an AP SSO and a client SSO. Configure the route configurations of the standby controller by entering this command:

config redundancy peer-route {add network-ip-addr ip-mask | delete network-ip-addr}

This command can be run only if the HA peer controller is available and operational. Configure a mobility MAC address by entering this command:

config redundancy mobilitymac mac-addr This command can be run only when SSO is disabled. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 770 OL-28744-01 Configuring High Availability (CLI) Configure the IP address and netmask of the peer service port of the standby controller by entering this command:

config redundancy interface address peer-service-port ip-address netmask This command can be run only if the HA peer controller is available and operational. Initiate a manual switchover by entering this command:

config redundancy force-switchover Run this command only when you require a manual switchover. Configure the redundancy timers by entering this command:

config redundancy timer {keep-alive-timer time-in-milliseconds | peer-search-timer time-in-seconds}

View the status of redundancy by entering this command:

show redundancy summary View information about the Redundancy Management Interface by entering this command:

show interface detailed redundancy-management View information about the redundancy port by entering this command:

show interface detailed redundancy-port Reboot a peer controller by entering this command:

reset peer-system Start the upload of file types, such as Config, Event Logs, Crash files, and so on from the standby-hot controller by entering this command on the active controller:

transfer upload peer-start Debug the commands for the Redundancy Manager by entering this command:

debug rmgr {packet | events | errors | detail}

Debug the commands for the Redundancy Sync Manager by entering this command:

debug rsnyncmgr {packet | events | errors | detail}

Debug the commands for the Redundancy Facilitator by entering this command:

debug rfrac {packet | events | errors | detail}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 771 Configuring High Availability (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 772 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 114 Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points Information About Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points, page 773 Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points (GUI), page 774 Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points (CLI), page 774 Viewing Failover Priority Settings (CLI), page 774 Information About Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points Each controller has a defined number of communication ports for access points. When multiple controllers with unused access point ports are deployed on the same network and one controller fails, the dropped access points automatically poll for unused controller ports and associate with them. The following are some guidelines for configuring failover priority for access points:

You can configure your wireless network so that the backup controller recognizes a join request from a higher-priority access point and if necessary disassociates a lower-priority access point as a means to provide an available port. Failover priority is not in effect during the regular operation of your wireless network. It takes effect only if there are more association requests after a controller failure than there are available backup controller ports. To configure this feature, you must enable failover priority on your network and assign priorities to the individual access points. By default, all access points are set to priority level 1, which is the lowest priority level. Therefore, you need to assign a priority level only to those access points that warrant a higher priority. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 773 Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points (GUI) Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. From the Global AP Failover Priority drop-down list, choose Enable to enable access point failover priority or choose Disable to disable this feature and turn off any access point priority assignments. The default value is Disable. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the access point for which you want to configure failover priority. Choose the High Availability tab. The All APs > Details for (High Availability) page appears. From the AP Failover Priority drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify the priority of the access point:

LowAssigns the access point to the level 1 priority, which is the lowest priority level. This is the default value. MediumAssigns the access point to the level 2 priority. HighAssigns the access point to the level 3 priority. CriticalAssigns the access point to the level 4 priority, which is the highest priority level. Step 9 Step 10 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Failover Priority for Access Points (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Enable or disable access point failover priority by entering this command:

config network ap-priority {enable | disable}

Specify the priority of an access point by entering this command:

config ap priority {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} Cisco_AP where 1 is the lowest priority level and 4 is the highest priority level. The default value is 1. Step 3 Enter the save config command to save your changes. Viewing Failover Priority Settings (CLI) Confirm whether access point failover priority is enabled on your network by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 774 OL-28744-01 Viewing Failover Priority Settings (CLI) show network summary Information similar to the following appears:

RF-Network Name............................. mrf Web Mode.................................... Enable Secure Web Mode............................. Enable Secure Web Mode Cipher-Option High.......... Disable Secure Shell (ssh).......................... Enable Telnet...................................... Enable Ethernet Multicast Mode..................... Disable Ethernet Broadcast Mode..................... Disable IGMP snooping............................... Disabled IGMP timeout................................ 60 seconds User Idle Timeout........................... 300 seconds ARP Idle Timeout............................ 300 seconds Cisco AP Default Master..................... Disable AP Join Priority......................... Enabled

... See the failover priority for each access point by entering this command:

show ap summary Information similar to the following appears:

Number of APs.................................... 2 Global AP User Name.............................. user Global AP Dot1x User Name........................ Not Configured AP Name Slots AP Model Port Country Priority

------- ----- ------------------ ----------------- --------- ---- ------- -------

ap:1252 2 ap:1121 1 AIR-LAP1252AG-A-K9 00:1b:d5:13:39:74 hallway 6 1 AIR-LAP1121G-A-K9 00:1b:d5:a9:ad:08 reception 1 Ethernet MAC Location US US 1 3 To see the summary of a specific access point, you can specify the access point name. You can also use wildcard searches when filtering for access points. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 775 Viewing Failover Priority Settings (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 776 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 115 Configuring AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count Information About Configuring the AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count, page 777 Restrictions for Access Point Retransmission Interval and Retry Count, page 777 Configuring the AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (GUI), page 778 Configuring the Access Point Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (CLI), page 778 Information About Configuring the AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count The controller and the APs exchange packets using the CAPWAP reliable transport protocol. For each request, a response is defined. This response is used to acknowledge the receipt of the request message. Response messages are not explicitly acknowledged; therefore, if a response message is not received, the original request message is retransmitted after the retransmit interval. If the request is not acknowledged after a maximum number of retransmissions, the session is closed and the APs reassociate with another controller. Restrictions for Access Point Retransmission Interval and Retry Count You can configure the retransmission intervals and retry count both at a global as well as a specific access point level. A global configuration applies these configuration parameters to all the access points. That is, the retransmission interval and the retry count are uniform for all access points. Alternatively, when you configure the retransmission level and retry count at a specific access point level, the values are applied to that particular access point. The access point specific configuration has a higher precedence than the global configuration. Retransmission intervals and the retry count do not apply for mesh access points. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 777 Configuring the AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (GUI) Configuring the AP Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (GUI) You can configure the retransmission interval and retry count for all APs globally or a specific AP. Step 1 To configure the controller to set the retransmission interval and retry count globally using the controller GUI, follow these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration. b) Choose one of the following options under the AP Transmit Config Parameters section:

AP Retransmit CountEnter the number of times you want the access point to retransmit the request to the controller. This parameter can take values between 3 and 8. AP Retransmit IntervalEnter the time duration between the retransmission of requests. This parameter can take values between 2 and 5. Step 2 c) Click Apply. To configure the controller to set the retransmission interval and retry count for a specific access point, follow these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs. b) Click on the AP Name link for the access point on which you want to set the values. The All APs > Details page appears. c) Click the Advanced Tab to open the advanced parameters page. d) Choose one of the following parameters under the AP Transmit Config Parameters section:

AP Retransmit CountEnter the number of times that you want the access point to retransmit the request to the controller. This parameter can take values between 3 and 8. AP Retransmit IntervalEnter the time duration between the retransmission of requests. This parameter can take values between 2 and 5. e) Click Apply. Configuring the Access Point Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (CLI) You can configure the retransmission interval and retry count for all access points globally or a specific access point. Configure the retransmission interval and retry count for all access points globally by entering the this command:

config ap retransmit {interval | count} seconds all The valid range for the interval parameter is between 3 and 8. The valid range for the count parameter is between 2 and 5. Configure the retransmission interval and retry count for a specific access point, by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 778 OL-28744-01 Configuring the Access Point Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (CLI) config ap retransmit {interval | count} seconds Cisco_AP The valid range for the interval parameter is between 3 and 8. The valid range for the count parameter is between 2 and 5. See the status of the configured retransmit parameters on all or specific APs by entering this command:

show ap retransmit all Note Because retransmit and retry values cannot be set for access points in mesh mode, these values are displayed as N/A (not applicable). See the status of the configured retransmit parameters on a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap retransmit Cisco_AP OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 779 Configuring the Access Point Retransmission Interval and Retry Count (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 780 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 116 Configuring Country Codes Information About Configuring Country Codes, page 781 Restrictions for Configuring Country Codes, page 782 Configuring Country Codes (GUI), page 782 Configuring Country Codes (CLI), page 783 Information About Configuring Country Codes Controllers and access points are designed for use in many countries with varying regulatory requirements. The radios within the access points are assigned to a specific regulatory domain at the factory (such as -E for Europe), but the country code enables you to specify a particular country of operation (such as FR for France or ES for Spain). Configuring a country code ensures that each radios broadcast frequency bands, interfaces, channels, and transmit power levels are compliant with country-specific regulations. The following are some guidelines for configuring country codes:

Generally, you configure one country code per controller, the one matching the physical location of the controller and its access points. However, you can configure up to 20 country codes per controller. This multiple-country support enables you to manage access points in various countries from a single controller. Although the controller supports different access points in different regulatory domains (countries), it requires all radios in a single access point to be configured for the same regulatory domain. For example, you should not configure a Cisco 1231 access points 802.11b/g radio for the US (-A) regulatory domain and its 802.11a radio for the Great Britain (-E) regulatory domain. Otherwise, the controller allows only one of the access points radios to turn on, depending on which regulatory domain you selected for the access point on the controller. Therefore, make sure that the same country code is configured for both of the access points radios. For a complete list of country codes supported per product, see http://tools.cisco.com/cse/prdapp/jsp/

externalsearch.do?action=externalsearch&page=EXTERNAL_SEARCH or http://www.cisco.com/en/US/prod/collateral/wireless/ps5679/ps5861/product_data_ sheet0900aecd80537b6a_ps6087_Products_Data_Sheet.html When the multiple-country feature is being used, all controllers that are going to join the same RF group must be configured with the same set of countries, configured in the same order. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 781 Restrictions for Configuring Country Codes When multiple countries are configured and the RRM auto-RF feature is enabled, the RRM assigns the channels that are derived by performing a union of the allowed channels per the AP country code. The APs are assigned channels by the RRM based on their PID country code. APs are only allowed to use legal frequencies that match their PID country code. Ensure that your AP's country code is legal in the country that it is deployed. The country list configured on the RF group leader determines what channels the members would operate on. This list is independent of what countries have been configured on the RF group members. Information About Japanese Country Codes Country codes define the channels that can be used legally in each country. These country codes are available for Japan:

JPAllows only -J radios to join the controller J2Allows only -P radios to join the controller J3Uses the -U frequencies but allows -U, -P and -Q (other than 1550/1600/2600/3600) radios to join the controller J4Allows 2.4G JPQU and 5G PQU to join the controller. Note The 1550, 1600, 2600, and 3600 APs require J4. See the Channels and Maximum Power Settings for Cisco Aironet Lightweight Access Points document for the list of channels and power levels supported by access points in the Japanese regulatory domains. Restrictions for Configuring Country Codes The access point can only operate on the channels for the countries that they are designed for. Note If an access point was already set to a higher legal power level or is configured manually, the power level is limited only by the particular country to which that access point is assigned. Configuring Country Codes (GUI) Step 1 Disable the 802.11 networks as follows:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n > Network. b) Unselect the 802.11a Network Status check box. c) Click Apply. d) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n > Network. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 782 OL-28744-01 Configuring Country Codes (CLI) Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 e) Unselect the 802.11b/g Network Status check box. f) Click Apply. Choose Wireless > Country to open the Country page. Select the check box for each country where your access points are installed. If you selected more than one check box, a message appears indicating that RRM channels and power levels are limited to common channels and power levels. Click OK to continue or Cancel to cancel the operation. Click Apply. If you selected multiple country codes in Step 3, each access point is assigned to a country. See the default country chosen for each access point and choose a different country if necessary as follows:

Note If you remove a country code from the configuration, any access points currently assigned to the deleted country reboot and when they rejoin the controller, they get re-assigned to one of the remaining countries if possible. a) Perform one of the following:

Leave the 802.11 networks disabled. Reenable the 802.11 networks and then disable only the access points for which you are configuring a country code. To disable an access point, choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs, click the link of the desired access point, choose Disable from the Status drop-down list, and click Apply. b) Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. c) Click the link for the desired access point. d) Choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. The default country for this access point appears in the Country Code drop-down list. e) If the access point is installed in a country other than the one shown, choose the correct country from the drop-down list. The box contains only those country codes that are compatible with the regulatory domain of at least one of the access points radios. f) Click Apply. g) Repeat these steps to assign all access points joined to the controller to a specific country. h) Reenable any access points that you disabled in Step a. Reenable the 802.11 networks if you did not enable them in Step 6. Click Save Configuration. Step 7 Step 8 Configuring Country Codes (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 See a list of all available country codes by entering this command:

show country supported Disable the 802.11 networks by entering these commands:

config 802.11a disable network config 802.11b disable network Step 3 Configure the country codes for the countries where your access points are installed by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 783 Configuring Country Codes (CLI) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 config country code1[,code2,code3,...]

If you are entering more than one country code, separate each by a comma (for example, config country US,CA,MX). Enter Y when prompted to confirm your decision. Verify your country code configuration by entering this command:

show country See the list of available channels for the country codes configured on your controller by entering this command:

show country channels Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the countries to which your access points have been assigned by entering this command:

To see a summary of specific access point you can specify the access point name. You can also use wildcard searches when filtering for access points. show ap summary Step 9 If you entered multiple country codes in Step 3, follow these steps to assign each access point to a specific country:

a) Perform one of the following:

Leave the 802.11 networks disabled. Reenable the 802.11 networks and then disable only the access points for which you are configuring a country code. To Reenable the networks, enter this command:

config 802.11{a | b} enable network To disable an access point, enter this command:

config ap disable ap_name b) To assign an access point to a specific country, enter this command:

config ap country code {ap_name | all}

Make sure that the country code you choose is compatible with the regulatory domain of at least one of the access points radios. Note If you enabled the networks and disabled some access points and then run the config ap country code all command, the specified country code is configured on only the disabled access points. All other access points are ignored. c) To reenable any access points that you disabled in Step a, enter this command:

config ap enable ap_name If you did not reenable the 802.11 networks in Step 9, enter these commands to reenable them now:

config 802.11{a | b} enable network Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Step 10 Step 11 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 784 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 117 Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points Information About Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points, page 785 Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points (GUI), page 785 Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points (CLI), page 786 Information About Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points To optimize the monitoring and location calculation of RFID tags, you can enable tracking optimization on up to four channels within the 2.4-GHz band of an 802.11b/g access point radio. This feature allows you to scan only the channels on which tags are usually programmed to operate (such as channels 1, 6, and 11). You can use the controller GUI or CLI to configure the access point for monitor mode and to then enable tracking optimization on the access point radio. Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the access point for which you want to configure monitor mode. The All APs > Details for page appears. From the AP Mode drop-down list, choose Monitor. Click Apply. Click OK when warned that the access point will be rebooted. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11b/g/n to open the 802.11b/g/n Radios page. Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired access point and choose Configure. The 802.11b/g/n Cisco APs > Configure page appears. Disable the access point radio by choosing Disable from the Admin Status drop-down list and click Apply. Enable tracking optimization on the radio by choosing Enable from the Enable Tracking Optimization drop-down list. From the four Channel drop-down lists, choose the channels on which you want to monitor RFID tags. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 785 Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points (CLI) Note You must configure at least one channel on which the tags will be monitored. Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. To reenable the access point radio, choose Enable from the Admin Status drop-down list and click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Optimizing RFID Tracking on Access Points (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Configure an access point for monitor mode by entering this command:

config ap mode monitor Cisco_AP When warned that the access point will be rebooted and asked if you want to continue, enter Y. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Disable the access point radio by entering this command:

config 802.11b disable Cisco_AP Configure the access point to scan only the DCA channels supported by its country of operation by entering this command:

config ap monitor-mode tracking-opt Cisco_AP Note To specify the exact channels to be scanned, enter the config ap monitor-mode tracking-opt Cisco_AP command in Step 6. To disable tracking optimization for this access point, enter the config ap monitor-mode no-optimization Cisco_AP command. Note After you have entered the command in Step 5, you can enter this command to choose up to four specific 802.11b channels to be scanned by the access point:

config ap monitor-mode 802.11b fast-channel Cisco_AP channel1 channel2 channel3 channel4 Note In the United States, you can assign any value between 1 and 11 (inclusive) to the channel variable. Other countries support additional channels. You must assign at least one channel. Reenable the access point radio by entering this command:

config 802.11b enable Cisco_AP Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See a summary of all access points in monitor mode by entering this command:

show ap monitor-mode summary Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 786 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 118 Configuring Probe Request Forwarding Information About Configuring Probe Request Forwarding, page 787 Configuring Probe Request Forwarding (CLI), page 787 Information About Configuring Probe Request Forwarding Probe requests are 802.11 management frames sent by clients to request information about the capabilities of SSIDs. By default, access points forward acknowledged probe requests to the controller for processing. Acknowledged probe requests are probe requests for SSIDs that are supported by the access point. If desired, you can configure access points to forward both acknowledged and unacknowledged probe requests to the controller. The controller can use the information from unacknowledged probe requests to improve the location accuracy. Configuring Probe Request Forwarding (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Enable or disable the filtering of probe requests forwarded from an access point to the controller by entering this command:

config advanced probe filter {enable | disable}

If you enable probe filtering, the default filter setting, the access point forwards only acknowledged probe requests to the controller. If you disable probe filtering, the access point forwards both acknowledged and unacknowledged probe requests to the controller. Limit the number of probe requests sent to the controller per client per access point radio in a given interval by entering this command:

config advanced probe limit num_probes interval where num_probes is the number of probe requests (from 1 to 100) forwarded to the controller per client per access point radio in a given interval. interval is the probe limit interval (from 100 to 10000 milliseconds). The default value for num_probes is 2 probe requests, and the default value for interval is 500 milliseconds. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 787 Configuring Probe Request Forwarding (CLI) Step 3 Step 4 Enter the save config command to save your changes. See the probe request forwarding configuration by entering this command:

show advanced probe Information similar to the following appears:

Probe request filtering.......................... Enabled Probes fwd to controller per client per radio.... 2 Probe request rate-limiting interval.......... 500 msec Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 788 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 119 Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points Information About Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points, page 789 Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points (GUI), page 789 Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points (CLI), page 790 Information About Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points The Unique Device Identifier (UDI) standard uniquely identifies products across all Cisco hardware product families, enabling customers to identify and track Cisco products throughout their business and network operations and to automate their asset management systems. The standard is consistent across all electronic, physical, and standard business communications. The UDI consists of five data elements:

The orderable product identifier (PID) The version of the product identifier (VID) The serial number (SN) The entity name The product description The UDI is burned into the EEPROM of controllers and lightweight access points at the factory. It can be retrieved through either the GUI or the CLI. Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points (GUI) Step 1 Choose Controller > Inventory to open the Inventory page. This page shows the five data elements of the controller UDI. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 789 Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points (CLI) Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the desired access point. Choose the Inventory tab to open the All APs > Details for (Inventory) page. This page shows the inventory information for the access point. Retrieving the Unique Device Identifier on Controllers and Access Points (CLI) Use these commands to retrieve the UDI on controllers and access points using the controller CLI:

show inventoryShows the UDI string of the controller. Information similar to the following appears:

NAME: "Chassis"

PID: WS-C3750G-24PS-W24, VID: V01, SN: FLS0952H00F show inventory ap ap_idShows the UDI string of the access point specified.

, DESCR: "Cisco Wireless Controller"

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 790 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 120 Performing a Link Test Information About Performing a Link Test, page 791 Performing a Link Test (GUI), page 792 Performing a Link Test (CLI), page 792 Information About Performing a Link Test A link test is used to determine the quality of the radio link between two devices. Two types of link-test packets are transmitted during a link test: request and response. Any radio receiving a link-test request packet fills in the appropriate text boxes and echoes the packet back to the sender with the response type set. The radio link quality in the client-to-access point direction can differ from that in the access point-to-client direction due to the asymmetrical distribution of the transmit power and receive sensitivity on both sides. Two types of link tests can be performed: a ping test and a CCX link test. With the ping link test, the controller can test link quality only in the client-to-access point direction. The RF parameters of the ping reply packets received by the access point are polled by the controller to determine the client-to-access point link quality. With the CCX link test, the controller can also test the link quality in the access point-to-client direction. The controller issues link-test requests to the client, and the client records the RF parameters (received signal strength indicator [RSSI], signal-to-noise ratio [SNR], and so on). of the received request packet in the response packet. Both the link-test requestor and responder roles are implemented on the access point and controller. Not only can the access point or controller initiate a link test to a CCX v4 or v5 client, but a CCX v4 or v5 client can initiate a link test to the access point or controller. The controller shows these link-quality metrics for CCX link tests in both directions (out access point to client; in client to access point):

Signal strength in the form of RSSI (minimum, maximum, and average) Signal quality in the form of SNR (minimum, maximum, and average) Total number of packets that are retried Maximum retry count for a single packet Number of lost packets Data rate of a successfully transmitted packet OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 791 Performing a Link Test (GUI) The controller shows this metric regardless of direction:

Link test request/reply round-trip time (minimum, maximum, and average) The controller software supports CCX versions 1 through 5. CCX support is enabled automatically for every WLAN on the controller and cannot be disabled. The controller stores the CCX version of the client in its client database and uses it to limit the features for this client. If a client does not support CCXv4 or v5, the controller performs a ping link test on the client. If a client supports CCXv4 or v5, the controller performs a CCX link test on the client. If a client times out during a CCX link test, the controller switches to the ping link test automatically. Note Follow the instructions in this section to perform a link test using either the GUI or the CLI. Performing a Link Test (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Monitor > Clients to open the Clients page. Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired client and choose LinkTest. A link test page appears. Note You can also access this page by clicking the MAC address of the desired client and then clicking the Link Test button on the top of the Clients > Detail page. This page shows the results of the CCX link test. Note If the client and/or controller does not support CCX v4 or later releases, the controller performs a ping link test on the client instead, and a much more limited link test page appears. The Link Test results of CCX clients when it fails will default to ping test results if the client is reachable. Note Step 3 Click OK to exit the link test page. Performing a Link Test (CLI) Use these commands to run a link test using the controller CLI:

Run a link test by entering this command:

linktest ap_mac When CCX v4 or later releases is enabled on both the controller and the client being tested, information similar to the following appears:

CCX Link Test to 00:0d:88:c5:8a:d1. Link Test Packets Sent...................................... 20 Link Test Packets Received................................. 10 Link Test Packets Lost (Total/AP to Client/Client to AP).... 10/5/5 Link Test Packets round trip time (min/max/average)......... 5ms/20ms/15ms RSSI at AP (min/max/average)................................ -60dBm/-50dBm/-55dBm RSSI at Client (min/max/average)............................ -50dBm/-40dBm/-45dBm Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 792 OL-28744-01 Performing a Link Test (CLI) SNR at AP (min/max/average)................................. 40dB/30dB/35dB SNR at Client (min/max/average)............................. 40dB/30dB/35dB Transmit Retries at AP (Total/Maximum)...................... 5/3 Transmit Retries at Client (Total/Maximum).................. 4/2 Transmit rate: 1M Packet Count:

0 Transmit rate: 1M Packet Count:

0 9M 11M 12M 18M 0 0 9M 11M 12M 18M 0 0 36M 48M 54M 108M 0 36M 48M 54M 108M 0 5.5M 0 5.5M 0 24M 0 24M 0 2M 0 2M 0 6M 0 6M 0 18 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 8 When CCX v4 or later releases is not enabled on either the controller or the client being tested, fewer details appear:

Ping Link Test to 00:0d:88:c5:8a:d1. Link Test Packets Sent.......................... 20 Link Test Packets Received...................... 20 Local Signal Strength........................... -49dBm Local Signal to Noise Ratio..................... 39dB Adjust the link-test parameters that are applicable to both the CCX link test and the ping test by entering these commands from configuration mode:

linktest frame-size size_of_link-test_frames linktest num-of-frame number_of_link-test_request_frames_per_test OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 793 Performing a Link Test (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 794 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 121 Configuring Link Latency Information About Configuring Link Latency, page 795 Restrictions for Link Latency, page 796 Configuring Link Latency (GUI), page 796 Configuring Link Latency (CLI), page 796 Information About Configuring Link Latency You can configure link latency on the controller to measure the link between an access point and the controller. This feature can be used with all access points joined to the controller but is especially useful for FlexConnect and OfficeExtend access points, for which the link could be a slow or unreliable WAN connection. The following are some guidelines for link latency:

Link latency monitors the round-trip time of the CAPWAP heartbeat packets (echo request and response) from the access point to the controller and back. This time can vary due to the network link speed and controller processing loads. The access point timestamps the outgoing echo requests to the controller and the echo responses received from the controller. The access point sends this delta time to the controller as the system round-trip time. The access point sends heartbeat packets to the controller at a default interval of 30 seconds. Note Link latency calculates the CAPWAP response time between the access point and the controller. It does not measure network latency or ping responses. The controller displays the current round-trip time as well as a running minimum and maximum round-trip time. The minimum and maximum times continue to run as long as the controller is up or can be cleared and allowed to restart. You can configure link latency for a specific access point using the controller GUI or CLI or for all access points joined to the controller using the CLI. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 795 Restrictions for Link Latency Restrictions for Link Latency Link latency is supported for use only with FlexConnect access points in connected mode. FlexConnect access points in standalone mode are not supported. Configuring Link Latency (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. Click the name of the access point for which you want to configure link latency. Choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Select the Enable Link Latency check box to enable link latency for this access point or unselect it to prevent the access point from sending the round-trip time to the controller after every echo response is received. The default value is unselected. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. When the All APs page reappears, click the name of the access point again. When the All APs > Details for page reappears, choose the Advanced tab again. The link latency and data latency results appear below the Enable Link Latency check box:

CurrentThe current round-trip time (in milliseconds) of CAPWAP heartbeat packets or data packets from the access point to the controller and back. MinimumSince link latency has been enabled or reset, the minimum round-trip time (in milliseconds) of CAPWAP heartbeat packets or data packets from the access point to the controller and back. MaximumSince link latency has been enabled or reset, the maximum round-trip time (in milliseconds) of CAPWAP heartbeat packets or data packets from the access point to the controller and back. Step 9 Step 10 To clear the current, minimum, and maximum link latency and data latency statistics on the controller for this access point, click Reset Link Latency. After the page refreshes and the All APs > Details for page reappears, choose the Advanced tab. The updated statistics appear in the Minimum and Maximum text boxes. Configuring Link Latency (CLI) Step 1 Enable or disable link latency for a specific access point or for all access points currently associated to the controller by entering this command:

config ap link-latency {enable | disable} {Cisco_AP | all}

The default value is disabled. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 796 OL-28744-01 Configuring Link Latency (CLI) Note The config ap link-latency {enable | disable} all command enables or disables link latency only for access points that are currently joined to the controller. It does not apply to access points that join in the future. Step 2 See the link latency results for a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 1 Cisco AP Name.................................... AP1

... AP Link Latency.................................. Enabled Current Delay................................... 1 ms Maximum Delay................................... 1 ms Minimum Delay................................... 1 ms Last updated (based on AP Up Time)........... 0 days, 05 h 03 m 25 s The output of this command contains the following link latency results:

Current DelayThe current round-trip time (in milliseconds) of CAPWAP heartbeat packets from the access point to the controller and back. Maximum DelaySince link latency has been enabled or reset, the maximum round-trip time (in milliseconds) of CAPWAP heartbeat packets from the access point to the controller and back. Minimum DelaySince link latency has been enabled or reset, the minimum round-trip time (in milliseconds) of CAPWAP heartbeat packets from the access point to the controller and back. Clear the current, minimum, and maximum link latency statistics on the controller for a specific access point by entering this command:

config ap link-latency reset Cisco_AP See the results of the reset by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP Step 3 Step 4 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 797 Configuring Link Latency (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 798 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 122 Configuring the TCP MSS Information About Configuring the TCP MSS, page 799 Configuring TCP MSS (GUI), page 799 Configuring TCP MSS (CLI), page 800 Information About Configuring the TCP MSS If the clients maximum segment size (MSS) in a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) three-way handshake is greater than the maximum transmission unit can handle, the client might experience reduced throughput and the fragmentation of packets. To avoid this problem in controller software release 6.0 or later releases, you can specify the MSS for all access points that are joined to the controller or for a specific access point. When you enable this feature, the access point selects the MSS for TCP packets to and from wireless clients in its data path. If the MSS of these packets is greater than the value that you configured or greater than the default value for the CAPWAP tunnel, the access point changes the MSS to the new configured value. TCP MSS is supported only on APs that are in local mode. Configuring TCP MSS (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose WIRELESS > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. Under TCP MSS, select the Global TCP Adjust MSS check box and set the MSS for all access points that are associated with the controller. The valid range is between 536 and 1363 bytes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 799 Configuring TCP MSS (CLI) Configuring TCP MSS (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Enable or disable the TCP MSS on a particular access point or on all access points by entering this command:

config ap tcp-mss-adjust {enable | disable} {Cisco_AP | all} size where the size parameter is a value between 536 and 1363 bytes. The default value varies for different clients. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the current TCP MSS setting for a particular access point or all access points by entering this command:

show ap tcp-mss-adjust {Cisco_AP | all}

Information similar to the following appears:

AP Name

------------------

AP-1140 AP-1240 AP-1130 TCP State MSS Size

--------

-------

enabled disabled disabled 536

-

-

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 800 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 123 Configuring Power Over Ethernet Information About Configuring Power over Ethernet, page 801 Configuring Power over Ethernet (GUI), page 803 Configuring Power over Ethernet (CLI), page 804 Information About Configuring Power over Ethernet When an access point that has been converted to lightweight mode (such as an AP1131 or AP1242) or a 1250 series access point is powered by a power injector that is connected to a Cisco pre-Intelligent Power Management (pre-IPM) switch, you need to configure Power over Ethernet (PoE), also known as inline power. The dual-radio 1250 series access points can operate in four different modes when powered using PoE:

20.0 W (Full Power)This mode is equivalent to using a power injector or an AC/DC adapter. 16.8 WBoth transmitters are used but at reduced power. Legacy data rates are not affected, but the M0 to M15 data rates are reduced in the 2.4-GHz band. Throughput should be minimally impacted because all data rates are still enabled. The range is affected because of the lower transmit power. All receivers remain enabled. 15.4 WOnly a single transmitter is enabled. Legacy data rates and M0 to M7 rates are minimally affected. M8 to M15 rates are disabled because they require both transmitters. Throughput is better than that received with legacy access points but less than the 20 and 16.8 W power modes. 11.0 W (Low Power)The access point runs, but both radios are disabled. The following are some guidelines for Power over Ethernet:

When a dual-radio 1250 series access point is powered using 15.4-W PoE, it cannot operate at full functionality, which requires 20 W. The access point can operate with dual radios on 15.4-W PoE, but performance is reduced in terms of throughput and range. If full functionality is required on 15.4 W, you can remove one of the radios from the 1250 series access point chassis or disable it in controller software release 6.0 or later releases so that the other radio can operate in full 802.11n mode. After the access point radio is administratively disabled, the access point must be rebooted for the change to take effect. The access point must also be rebooted after you reenable the radio to put it into reduced throughput mode. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 801 Information About Configuring Power over Ethernet These modes provide the flexibility of running the 1250 series access points with the available wired infrastructure to obtain the desired level of performance. With enhanced PoE switches (such as the Cisco Catalyst 3750-E Series Switches), the 1250 series access points can provide maximum features and functionality with a minimum total cost of ownership. Alternatively, if you decide to power the access point with the existing PoE (802.3af) switches, the access point chooses the appropriate mode of operation based on whether it has one radio or two. Note For more information on the Cisco PoE switches, see this URL: http://www.cisco.com/

en/US/prod/switches/epoe.html The table below shows the maximum transmit power settings for 1250 series access points using PoE. Table 23: Maximum Transmit Power Settings for 1250 Series Access Points Using PoE Radio Band Data Rates Number of Transmitters Cyclic Shift Diversity (CSD) 2.4 GHz 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n MCS 0-7 802.11n MCS 8-15 5 GHz 802.11a 802.11n MCS 0-7 802.11n MCS 8-15 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 Disabled Enabled

(default) Disabled Enabled

(default) Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)5 802.3af Mode (15.4 W) ePoE Power Optimized Mode (16.8 W) ePoE Mode

(20 W) 20 17 17 Disabled Disabled 20 17 20 17 17 14 (11 per Tx) 17 20 (17 per Tx) 14 (11 per Tx) 20 (17 per Tx) 17 17 17 17 Disabled Disabled 17 20 (17 per Tx) 17 20 (17 per Tx) 20 (17 per Tx) 20 (17 per Tx) 5 Maximum transmit power varies by channel and according to individual country regulations. See the product documentation for specific details. When powered with a non-Cisco standard PoE switch, the 1250 series access point operates under 15.4 Watts. Even if the non-Cisco switch or midspan device is capable of providing higher power, the access point does not operate in enhanced PoE mode. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 802 OL-28744-01 Configuring Power over Ethernet (GUI) Configuring Power over Ethernet (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs and then the name of the desired access point. Choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. The PoE Status text box shows the power level at which the access point is operating: High (20 W), Medium (16.8 W), or Medium (15.4 W). This text box is not configurable. The controller auto-detects the access points power source and displays the power level here. Note This text box applies only to 1250 series access points that are powered using PoE. There are two other ways to determine if the access point is operating at a lower power level. First, the Due to low PoE, radio is transmitting at degraded power message appears under the Tx Power Level Assignment section on the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Cisco APs > Configure page. Second, the PoE Status: degraded operation message appears in the controllers trap log on the Trap Logs page. Step 3 Perform one of the following:

Select the Pre-standard 802.3af switches check box if the access point is being powered by a high-power 802.3af Cisco switch. This switch provides more than the traditional 6 Watts of power but do not support the intelligent power management (IPM) feature. Unselect the Pre-standard 802.3af switches check box if power is being provided by a power injector. This is the default value. Step 4 Step 5 Select the Power Injector State check box if the attached switch does not support IPM and a power injector is being used. If the attached switch supports IPM, you do not need to select this check box. If you selected the Power Injector State check box in the previous step, the Power Injector Selection and Injector Switch MAC Address parameters appear. The Power Injector Selection parameter enables you to protect your switch port from an accidental overload if the power injector is inadvertently bypassed. Choose one of these options from the drop-down list to specify the desired level of protection:

InstalledThis option examines and remembers the MAC address of the currently connected switch port and assumes that a power injector is connected. Choose this option if your network contains older Cisco 6-Watt switches and you want to avoid possible overloads by forcing a double-check of any relocated access points. If you want to configure the switch MAC address, enter the MAC address in the Injector Switch MAC Address text box. If you want the access point to find the switch MAC address, leave the Injector Switch MAC Address text box blank. Note Each time an access point is relocated, the MAC address of the new switch port fails to match the remembered MAC address, and the access point remains in low-power mode. You must then physically verify the existence of a power injector and reselect this option to cause the new MAC address to be remembered. OverrideThis option allows the access point to operate in high-power mode without first verifying a matching MAC address. You can use this option if your network does not contain any older Cisco 6-W switches that could be overloaded if connected directly to a 12-W access point. The advantage of this option is that if you relocate the access point, it continues to operate in high-power mode without any further configuration. The disadvantage of this option is that if the access point is connected directly to a 6-W switch, an overload occurs. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 803 Configuring Power over Ethernet (CLI) Step 6 Step 7 Click Apply. If you have a dual-radio 1250 series access point and want to disable one of its radios in order to enable the other radio to receive full power, follow these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. b) Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the radio that you want to disable and choose Configure. c) On the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Cisco APs > Configure page, choose Disable from the Admin Status drop-down list. d) Click Apply. e) Manually reset the access point in order for the change to take effect. Click Save Configuration. Step 8 Configuring Power over Ethernet (CLI) Use these commands to configure and See PoE settings using the controller CLI:

If your network contains any older Cisco 6-W switches that could be accidentally overloaded if connected directly to a 12-W access point, enter this command:

config ap power injector enable {Cisco_AP | all} installed The access point remembers that a power injector is connected to this particular switch port. If you relocate the access point, you must reissue this command after the presence of a new power injector is verified. Note Ensure CDP is enabled before entering this command. Otherwise, this command will fail. See the Configuring the Cisco Discovery Protocol section for information about enabling CDP. Remove the safety checks and allow the access point to be connected to any switch port by entering this command:

config ap power injector enable {Cisco_AP | all} override You can use this command if your network does not contain any older Cisco 6-W switches that could be overloaded if connected directly to a 12-W access point. The access point assumes that a power injector is always connected. If you relocate the access point, it continues to assume that a power injector is present. If you know the MAC address of the connected switch port and do not want to automatically detect it using the installed option, enter this command:

config ap power injector enable {Cisco_AP | all} switch_port_mac_address If you have a dual-radio 1250 series access point and want to disable one of its radios in order to enable the other radio to receive full power, enter this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable Cisco_AP Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 804 OL-28744-01 Configuring Power over Ethernet (CLI) Note You must manually reset the access point in order for the change to take effect. See the PoE settings for a specific access point by entering this command:

show ap config general Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 1 Cisco AP Name.................................... AP1

... PoE Pre-Standard Switch.......................... Enabled PoE Power Injector MAC Addr...................... Disabled Power Type/Mode.................................. PoE/Low Power (degraded mode)

... The Power Type/Mode text box shows degraded mode if the access point is not operating at full power. See the controllers trap log by entering this command:

show traplog If the access point is not operating at full power, the trap contains PoE Status: degraded operation. You can power an access point by a Cisco prestandard 15-W switch with Power over Ethernet (PoE) by entering this command:

config ap power pre-standard {enable | disable} {all | Cisco_AP}

A Cisco prestandard 15-W switch does not support intelligent power management (IPM) but does have sufficient power for a standard access point. The following Cisco prestandard 15-W switches are available:

WS-C3550, WS-C3560, WS-C3750 C1880 2600, 2610, 2611, 2621, 2650, 2651 2610XM, 2611XM, 2621XM, 2650XM, 2651XM, 2691 2811, 2821, 2851 3631-telco, 3620, 3640, 3660 3725, 3745 3825, 3845 The enable version of this command is required for full functionality when the access point is powered by a Cisco prestandard 15-W switch. It is safe to use if the access point is powered by either an IPM switch or a power injector or if the access point is not using one of the 15-W switches listed above. You might need this command if your radio operational status is "Down" when you expect it to be "Up."

Enter the show msglog command to look for this error message, which indicates a PoE problem:

Apr 13 09:08:24.986 spam_lrad.c:2262 LWAPP-3-MSGTAG041: AP 00:14:f1:af:f3:40 is unable to verify sufficient in-line power. Radio slot 0 disabled. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 805 Configuring Power over Ethernet (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 806 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 124 Viewing Clients Viewing Clients (GUI), page 807 Viewing Clients (CLI), page 808 Viewing Clients (GUI) Step 1 Choose Monitor > Clients to open the Clients page. This page lists all of the clients that are associated to the controllers access points. It provides the following information for each client:

The MAC address of the client The name of the access point to which the client is associated The name of the WLAN used by the client The type of client (802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, or 802.11n) Note If the 802.11n client associates to an 802.11a radio that has 802.11n enabled, then the client type shows as 802.11a/n. If the 802.11n client associates to an 802.11b/g radio with 802.11n enabled, then the client type shows as 802.11b/n. The status of the client connection The authorization status of the client The port number of the access point to which the client is associated An indication of whether the client is a WGB Note If you want to remove or disable a client, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that client and choose Remove or Disable, respectively. If you want to test the connection between the client and the access point, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that client and choose Link Test. Step 2 Create a filter to display only clients that meet certain criteria (such as the MAC address, status, or radio type) as follows:

a) Click Change Filter to open the Search Clients dialog box. b) Select one or more of the following check boxes to specify the criteria used when displaying clients:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 807 Viewing Clients (CLI) MAC AddressEnter a client MAC address. Note When you enable the MAC address filter, the other filters are disabled automatically. When you enable any of the other filters, the MAC address filter is disabled automatically. AP NameEnter the name of an access point. WLAN ProfileChoose one of the available WLAN profiles from the drop-down list. StatusSelect the Associated, Authenticated, Excluded, and/or Idle check boxes. Radio TypeChoose 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11an, 802.11bn or Mobile. WGBEnter the WGB clients associated to the controllers access points. c) Click Apply. The Current Filter parameter at the top of the Clients page shows the filters that are currently applied. Note If you want to remove the filters and display the entire client list, click Clear Filter. Step 3 Click the MAC address of the client to view detailed information for a specific client. The Clients > Detail page appears. This page shows the following information:

The general properties of the client The security settings of the client The QoS properties of the client Client statistics The properties of the access point to which the client is associated Viewing Clients (CLI) Use these commands to view client information:

See the clients associated to a specific access point by entering this command:

show client ap {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP See a summary of the clients associated to the controllers access points by entering this command:

show client summary See detailed information for a specific client by entering this command:

show client detail client_mac Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 808 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 125 Configuring LED States for Access Points Configuring LED States, page 809 Configuring Flashing LEDs, page 810 Configuring LED States Information About Configuring LED States for Access Points In a wireless LAN network where there are a large number of access points, it is difficult to locate a specific access point associated with the controller. You can configure the controller to set the LED state of an access point so that it blinks and the access point can be located. This configuration can be done in the wireless network on a global as well as per-AP level. The LED state configuration at the global level takes precedence over the AP level. Configuring the LED State for Access Points in a Network Globally (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Wireless > Access Points > Global Configuration to open the Global Configuration page. Select the LED state check box. Choose Enable from the drop-down list adjacent to this check box. Click Apply. Configuring the LED State for Access Point in a Network Globally (CLI) Set the LED state for all access points associated with a controller by entering this command:

config ap led-state {enable | disable} all OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 809 Configuring Flashing LEDs Configuring LED State on a Specific Access Point (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs and then the name of the desired access point. Choose the Advanced tab to open the All APs > Details for (Advanced) page. Select the LED state check box. Choose Enable from the drop-down list adjacent to this text box. Click Apply. Configuring LED State on a Specific Access Point (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Determine the ID of the access point for which you want to configure the LED state by entering this command:

show ap summary Configure the LED state by entering the following command:

config ap led-state {enable | disable} Cisco_AP Configuring Flashing LEDs Information About Configuring Flashing LEDs Controller software enables you to flash the LEDs on an access point in order to locate it. All Cisco IOS lightweight access points support this feature. Configuring Flashing LEDs (CLI) Use these commands to configure LED flashing from the privileged EXEC mode of the controller:

1 Configure the LED flash for an AP by entering this command:

config ap led-state flash {seconds | indefinite | disable} {Cisco_AP}

The valid LED flash duration for the AP is 1 to 3600 seconds. You can also configure the LED to flash indefinitely or to stop flashing the LED. 2 Disable LED flash for an AP after enabling it by entering this command:

config ap led-state flash disable Cisco_AP The command disables LED flashing immediately. For example, if you run the previous command (with the seconds parameter set to 60 seconds) and then disable LED flashing after only 20 seconds, the access points LEDs stop flashing immediately. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 810 OL-28744-01 Configuring Flashing LEDs 3 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config 4 Check the status of LED flash for the AP by entering this command:

show ap led-flash Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

(Cisco Controller)> show ap led-flash AP1040_46:b9 Led Flash........................................ Enabled for 450 secs, 425 secs left Note The output of these commands is sent only to the controller console, regardless of whether the commands were entered on the console or in a TELNET/SSH CLI session. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 811 Configuring Flashing LEDs Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 812 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 126 Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios (GUI), page 813 Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios (CLI), page 814 Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > Dual-Band Radios to open the Dual-Band Radios page. Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow of the AP and click Configure. Configure the Admin Status. Configure CleanAir Admin Status as one of the following:

Enable Disable 5 GHz Only 2.4 GHz Only Step 5 Step 6 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. What to Do Next You can monitor the access points with dual-band radios by navigating to Monitor > Access Points > Radios

> Dual-Band Radios. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 813 Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios (CLI) Configuring Access Points with Dual-Band Radios (CLI) Configure an access point with dual-band radios by entering this command:

config 802.11-abgn {enable | disable} ap-name Configure the CleanAir features for an access point with dual-band radios by entering this command:

config 802.11-abgn cleanair {enable | disable} ap-name band 2.4-or-5-GHz Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 814 OL-28744-01 P A R T VII Configuring Radio Resource Management Configuring RRM, page 817 Configuring RRM Neighbor Discovery Packets, page 837 Configuring RF Groups, page 839 Overriding RRM, page 847 Configuring CCX Radio Management Features, page 855 C H A P T E R 127 Configuring RRM Information About Radio Resource Management, page 817 Restrictions for Configuring RRM, page 822 Configuring the RF Group Mode (GUI), page 822 Configuring the RF Group Mode (CLI), page 823 Configuring Transmit Power Control (GUI), page 823 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer, page 825 Configuring RRM (CLI), page 831 Viewing RRM Settings (CLI), page 835 Debug RRM Issues (CLI), page 836 Information About Radio Resource Management The Radio Resource Management (RRM) software embedded in the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller acts as a built-in RF engineer to consistently provide real-time RF management of your wireless network. RRM enables Cisco WLCs to continually monitor their associated lightweight access points for the following information:

Traffic loadThe total bandwidth used for transmitting and receiving traffic. It enables wireless LAN managers to track and plan network growth ahead of client demand. InterferenceThe amount of traffic coming from other 802.11 sources. NoiseThe amount of non-802.11 traffic that is interfering with the currently assigned channel. CoverageThe received signal strength (RSSI) and signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for all connected clients. OtherThe number of nearby access points. Using this information, RRM can periodically reconfigure the 802.11 RF network for best efficiency. To do this, RRM performs these functions:

Radio resource monitoring OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 817 Information About Radio Resource Management Transmit power control Dynamic channel assignment Coverage hole detection and correction Radio Resource Monitoring RRM automatically detects and configures new Cisco WLCs and lightweight access points as they are added to the network. It then automatically adjusts associated and nearby lightweight access points to optimize coverage and capacity. Lightweight access points can simultaneously scan all valid 802.11a/b/g channels for the country of operation as well as for channels available in other locations. The access points go off-channel for a period not greater than 60 ms to monitor these channels for noise and interference. Packets collected during this time are analyzed to detect rogue access points, rogue clients, ad-hoc clients, and interfering access points. Note In the presence of voice traffic (in the last 100 ms), the access points defer off-channel measurements. Each access point spends only 0.2 percent of its time off-channel. This activity is distributed across all access points so that adjacent access points are not scanning at the same time, which could adversely affect wireless LAN performance. Note When there are numerous rogue access points in the network, the chance of detecting rogues on channels 157 or 161 by a FlexConnect or local mode access point is small. In such cases, the monitor mode AP can be used for rogue detection. Transmit Power Control The Cisco WLC dynamically controls access point transmit power based on real-time wireless LAN conditions. You can choose between two versions of transmit power control: TPCv1 and TPCv2. With TPCv1, typically, power can be kept low to gain extra capacity and reduce interference. With TPCv2, transmit power is dynamically adjusted with the goal of minimum interference. TPCv2 is suitable for dense networks. In this mode, there could be higher roaming delays and coverage hole incidents. The Transmit Power Control (TPC) algorithm both increases and decreases an access points power in response to changes in the RF environment. In most instances, TPC seeks to lower an access point's power to reduce interference, but in the case of a sudden change in the RF coveragefor example, if an access point fails or becomes disabledTPC can also increase power on surrounding access points. This feature is different from coverage hole detection, which is primarily concerned with clients. TPC provides enough RF power to achieve desired coverage levels while avoiding channel interference between access points. This table shows the power level mapping. Power Level 1 2 2.4 GHz 23 dBm (200 mW) CCK Only 20 dBm (100 mW) 5 GHz 20 dBm (100 mW) 17 dBm (50 mW) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 818 OL-28744-01 Information About Radio Resource Management Power Level 3 4 5 6 7 8 2.4 GHz 17 dBm (50 mW) 14 dBm (25 mW) 11 dBm (12.5 mW) 8 dBm (6.25 mW) 5 dBm (3.13 mW) 2 dBm (1.56 mW) 1 dBm (0.78 mW) 5 GHz 14 dBm (25 mW) 11 dBm (12.5 mW) 8 dBm (6.25 mW) 5 dBm (3.13 mW) 2 dBm (1.56 mW) 1 dBm (0.78 mW) Overriding the TPC Algorithm with Minimum and Maximum Transmit Power Settings The TPC algorithm balances RF power in many diverse RF environments. However, it is possible that automatic power control will not be able to resolve some scenarios in which an adequate RF design was not possible to implement due to architectural restrictions or site restrictionsfor example, when all access points must be mounted in a central hallway, placing the access points close together, but requiring coverage out to the edge of the building. In these scenarios, you can configure maximum and minimum transmit power limits to override TPC recommendations. The maximum and minimum TPC power settings apply to all access points through RF profiles in a RF network. To set the Maximum Power Level Assignment and Minimum Power Level Assignment, enter the maximum and minimum transmit power used by RRM in the text boxes in the Tx Power Control page. The range for these parameters is -10 to 30 dBm. The minimum value cannot be greater than the maximum value; the maximum value cannot be less than the minimum value. If you configure a maximum transmit power, RRM does not allow any access point attached to the controller to exceed this transmit power level (whether the power is set by RRM TPC or by coverage hole detection). For example, if you configure a maximum transmit power of 11 dBm, then no access point would transmit above 11 dBm, unless the access point is configured manually. Dynamic Channel Assignment Two adjacent access points on the same channel can cause either signal contention or signal collision. In a collision, data is not received by the access point. This functionality can become a problem, for example, when someone reading e-mail in a caf affects the performance of the access point in a neighboring business. Even though these are completely separate networks, someone sending traffic to the caf on channel 1 can disrupt communication in an enterprise using the same channel. Controllers can dynamically allocate access point channel assignments to avoid conflict and to increase capacity and performance. Channels are reused to avoid wasting scarce RF resources. In other words, channel 1 is allocated to a different access point far from the caf, which is more effective than not using channel 1 altogether. The controllers Dynamic Channel Assignment (DCA) capabilities are also useful in minimizing adjacent channel interference between access points. For example, two overlapping channels in the 802.11b/g band, such as 1 and 2, cannot both simultaneously use 11/54 Mbps. By effectively reassigning channels, the controller keeps adjacent channels separated. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 819 Information About Radio Resource Management Note We recommend that you use only non-overlapping channels (1, 6, 11, and so on). The controller examines a variety of real-time RF characteristics to efficiently handle channel assignments as follows:

Access point received energyThe received signal strength measured between each access point and its nearby neighboring access points. Channels are optimized for the highest network capacity. NoiseNoise can limit signal quality at the client and access point. An increase in noise reduces the effective cell size and degrades user experience. By optimizing channels to avoid noise sources, the controller can optimize coverage while maintaining system capacity. If a channel is unusable due to excessive noise, that channel can be avoided. 802.11 InterferenceInterference is any 802.11 traffic that is not part of your wireless LAN, including rogue access points and neighboring wireless networks. Lightweight access points constantly scan all channels looking for sources of interference. If the amount of 802.11 interference exceeds a predefined configurable threshold (the default is 10 percent), the access point sends an alert to the controller. Using the RRM algorithms, the controller may then dynamically rearrange channel assignments to increase system performance in the presence of the interference. Such an adjustment could result in adjacent lightweight access points being on the same channel, but this setup is preferable to having the access points remain on a channel that is unusable due to an interfering foreign access point. In addition, if other wireless networks are present, the controller shifts the usage of channels to complement the other networks. For example, if one network is on channel 6, an adjacent wireless LAN is assigned to channel 1 or 11. This arrangement increases the capacity of the network by limiting the sharing of frequencies. If a channel has virtually no capacity remaining, the controller may choose to avoid this channel. In very dense deployments in which all nonoverlapping channels are occupied, the controller does its best, but you must consider RF density when setting expectations. Load and utilizationWhen utilization monitoring is enabled, capacity calculations can consider that some access points are deployed in ways that carry more traffic than other access points (for example, a lobby versus an engineering area). The controller can then assign channels to improve the access point with the worst performance reported. The load is taken into account when changing the channel structure to minimize the impact on clients currently in the wireless LAN. This metric keeps track of every access points transmitted and received packet counts to determine how busy the access points are. New clients avoid an overloaded access point and associate to a new access point. This parameter is disabled by default. The controller combines this RF characteristic information with RRM algorithms to make system-wide decisions. Conflicting demands are resolved using soft-decision metrics that guarantee the best choice for minimizing network interference. The end result is optimal channel configuration in a three-dimensional space, where access points on the floor above and below play a major factor in an overall wireless LAN configuration. Note Radios using 40-MHz channels in the 2.4-GHz band or or 80MHz channels are not supported by DCA. The RRM startup mode is invoked in the following conditions:

In a single-controller environment, the RRM startup mode is invoked after the controller is rebooted. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 820 OL-28744-01 Information About Radio Resource Management In a multiple-controller environment, the RRM startup mode is invoked after an RF Group leader is elected. You can trigger RRM startup mode from CLI. RRM startup mode runs for 100 minutes (10 iterations at 10-minute intervals). The duration of the RRM startup mode is independent of the DCA interval, sensitivity, and network size. The startup mode consists of 10 DCA runs with high sensitivity (making channel changes easy and sensitive to the environment) to converge to a steady state channel plan. After the startup mode is finished, DCA continues to run at the specified interval and sensitivity. Coverage Hole Detection and Correction The RRM coverage hole detection algorithm can detect areas of radio coverage in a wireless LAN that are below the level needed for robust radio performance. This feature can alert you to the need for an additional

(or relocated) lightweight access point. If clients on a lightweight access point are detected at threshold levels (RSSI, failed client count, percentage of failed packets, and number of failed packets) lower than those specified in the RRM configuration, the access point sends a coverage hole alert to the controller. The alert indicates the existence of an area where clients are continually experiencing poor signal coverage, without having a viable access point to which to roam. The controller discriminates between coverage holes that can and cannot be corrected. For coverage holes that can be corrected, the controller mitigates the coverage hole by increasing the transmit power level for that specific access point. The controller does not mitigate coverage holes caused by clients that are unable to increase their transmit power or are statically set to a power level because increasing their downstream transmit power might increase interference in the network. Benefits of RRM RRM produces a network with optimal capacity, performance, and reliability. It frees you from having to continually monitor the network for noise and interference problems, which can be transient and difficult to troubleshoot. RRM ensures that clients enjoy a seamless, trouble-free connection throughout the Cisco unified wireless network. RRM uses separate monitoring and control for each deployed network: 802.11a and 802.11b/g. The RRM algorithms run separately for each radio type (802.11a and 802.11b/g). RRM uses both measurements and algorithms. RRM measurements can be adjusted using monitor intervals, but they cannot be disabled. RRM algorithms are enabled automatically but can be disabled by statically configuring channel and power assignment. The RRM algorithms run at a specified updated interval, which is 600 seconds by default. Information About Configuring RRM The controllers preconfigured RRM settings are optimized for most deployments. However, you can modify the controllers RRM configuration parameters at any time through either the GUI or the CLI. You can configure these parameters on controllers that are part of an RF group or on controllers that are not part of an RF group. The RRM parameters should be set to the same values on every controller in an RF group. The RF group leader can change as a result of controller reboots or depending on which radios hear each other. If the RRM parameters are not identical for all RF group members, varying results can occur when the group leader changes. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 821 Restrictions for Configuring RRM Using the controller GUI, you can configure the following RRM parameters: RF group mode, transmit power control, dynamic channel assignment, coverage hole detection, profile thresholds, monitoring channels, and monitor intervals. Restrictions for Configuring RRM The OEAP 600 series access points do not support RRM. The radios for the 600 series OEAP access points are controlled through the local GUI of the 600 series access points and not through the Cisco WLC. Attempting to control the spectrum channel or power, or disabling the radios through the Cisco WLC will fail to have any effect on the 600 series OEAP. Configuring the RF Group Mode (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > RRM > RF Grouping to open the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) RRM > RF Grouping page. From the Group Mode drop-down list, select the mode you want to configure for this Cisco WLC. You can configure RF grouping in the following modes:

autoSets the RF group selection to automatic update mode. leaderSets the RF group selection to static mode, and sets this Cisco WLC as the group leader. offSets the RF group selection off. Every Cisco WLC optimizes its own access point parameters. Note A configured static leader cannot become a member of another Cisco WLC until its mode is set to auto. A Cisco WLC with a lower priority cannot assume the role of a group leader if a Cisco WLC with a higher priority is available. Here priority is related to the processing power of the Cisco WLC. We recommend that Cisco WLCs participate in automatic RF grouping. You can override RRM settings without disabling automatic RF group participation. Note Note Step 3 Step 4 Click Apply to save the configuration and click Restart to restart RRM RF Grouping algorithm. If you configured RF Grouping mode for this Cisco WLC as a static leader, you can add group members from the RF Group Members section as follows:

1 In the Cisco WLC Name text box, enter the Cisco WLC that you want to add as a member to this group. 2 In the IP Address text box, enter the IP address of the Cisco WLC. 3 Click Add Member to add the member to this group. Note If the member has not joined the static leader, the reason of the failure is shown in parentheses. Step 5 Step 6 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 822 OL-28744-01 Configuring the RF Group Mode (CLI) Configuring the RF Group Mode (CLI) Step 1 Configure the RF Grouping mode by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} group-mode {auto | leader| off | restart}

autoSets the RF group selection to automatic update mode. leaderSets the RF group selection to static mode, and sets this Cisco WLC as the group leader. offSets the RF group selection off. Every Cisco WLC optimizes its own access point parameters. restartRestarts the RF group selection. Note A configured static leader cannot become a member of another Cisco WLC until its mode is set to auto. A Cisco WLC with a lower priority cannot assume the role of a group leader if a Cisco WLC with higher priority is available. Here priority is related to the processing power of the Cisco WLC. Note Step 2 Add or remove a Cisco WLC as a static member of the RF group (if the mode is set to leader) by entering the these commands:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} group-member add controller_name controller_ip_address config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} group-member remove controller_name controller_ip_address Step 3 See RF grouping status by entering this command:

show advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} group Configuring Transmit Power Control (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > RRM > TPC to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) > RRM > Tx Power Control (TPC) page. Choose the Transmit Power Control version from the following options:

Interference Optimal Mode (TPCv2)For scenarios where voice calls are extensively used. Transmit power is dynamically adjusted with the goal of minimum interference. It is suitable for dense networks. In this mode, there could be higher roaming delays and coverage hole incidents. Note We recommend that you use TCPv2 only in cases where RF issues cannot be resolved by using TCPv1. Please evaluate and test the use of TPCv2 with the assistance of Cisco Services. Coverage Optimal Mode (TPCv1)(Default) Offers strong signal coverage and stability. In this mode, power can be kept low to gain extra capacity and reduce interference. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 823 Configuring Transmit Power Control (GUI) Step 3 Choose one of the following options from the Power Level Assignment Method drop-down list to specify the Cisco WLCs dynamic power assignment mode:

AutomaticCauses the Cisco WLC to periodically evaluate and, if necessary, update the transmit power for all joined access points. This is the default value. On DemandCauses the Cisco WLC to periodically evaluate the transmit power for all joined access points. However, the Cisco WLC updates the power, if necessary, only when you click Invoke Power Update Now. The Cisco WLC does not evaluate and update the transmit power immediately after you click Invoke Note Power Update Now. It waits for the next 600-second interval. This value is not configurable. FixedPrevents the Cisco WLC from evaluating and, if necessary, updating the transmit power for joined access points. The power level is set to the fixed value chosen from the drop-down list. Note The transmit power level is assigned an integer value instead of a value in mW or dBm. The integer corresponds to a power level that varies depending on the regulatory domain, channel, and antennas in which the access points are deployed. For optimal performance, we recommend that you use the Automatic setting. Note Step 4 Step 5 Enter the maximum and minimum power level assignment values in the Maximum Power Level Assignment and Minimum Power Level Assignment text boxes. The range for the Maximum Power Level Assignment is 10 to 30 dBm. The range for the Minimum Power Level Assignment is 10 to 30 dBm. In the Power Threshold text box, enter the cutoff signal level used by RRM when determining whether to reduce an access points power. The default value for this parameter is 70 dBm for TPCv1 and 67 dBm for TPCv2, but can be changed when access points are transmitting at higher (or lower) than desired power levels. The range for this parameter is 80 to 50 dBm. Increasing this value (between 65 and 50 dBm) causes the access points to operate at a higher transmit power. Decreasing the value has the opposite effect. In applications with a dense population of access points, it may be useful to decrease the threshold to 80 or 75 dBm to reduce the number of BSSIDs (access points) and beacons seen by the wireless clients. Some wireless clients might have difficulty processing a large number of BSSIDs or a high beacon rate and might exhibit problematic behavior with the default threshold. This page also shows the following nonconfigurable transmit power level parameter settings:

Power Neighbor CountThe minimum number of neighbors an access point must have for the transmit power control algorithm to run. Power Assignment LeaderThe MAC address of the RF group leader, which is responsible for power level assignment. Last Power Level AssignmentThe last time RRM evaluated the current transmit power level assignments. Step 6 Step 7 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 824 OL-28744-01 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer Information About Off-Channel Scanning Defer In deployments with certain power-save clients, you sometimes need to defer the Radio Resource Management's

(RRM) normal off-channel scanning to avoid missing critical information from low-volume clients (for example, medical devices that use power-save mode and periodically send telemetry information). This feature improves the way that Quality of Service (QoS) interacts with the RRM scan defer feature. You can use a client's Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) UP marking to configure the access point to defer off-channel scanning for a configurable period of time if it receives a packet marked UP. Off-Channel Scanning Defer is essential to the operation of RRM, which gathers information about alternate channel choices such as noise and interference. Additionally, Off-Channel Scanning Defer is responsible for rogue detection. Devices that need to defer Off-Channel Scanning Defer should use the same WLAN as often as possible. If there are many of these devices (and the possibility exists that Off-Channel Defer scanning could be completely disabled by the use of this feature), you should implement an alternative to local AP Off-Channel Scanning Defer, such as monitoring access points, or other access points in the same location that do not have this WLAN assigned. You can assign a QoS policy (bronze, silver, gold, and platinum) to a WLAN to affect how packets are marked on the downlink connection from the access point regardless of how they were received on the uplink from the client. UP=1,2 is the lowest priority, and UP=0,3 is the next higher priority. The marking results of each QoS policy are as follows:

Bronze marks all downlink traffic to UP= 1. Silver marks all downlink traffic to UP= 0. Gold marks all downlink traffic to UP=4. Platinum marks all downlink traffic to UP=6. Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer for WLANs Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer for a WLAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN to which you want to configure off-channel scanning Defer. Choose the Advanced tab from the WLANs > Edit page. From the Off Channel Scanning Defer section, set the Scan Defer Priority by clicking on the priority argument. Set the time in milliseconds in the Scan Defer Time text box. Valid values are 100 through 60000. The default value is 100 milliseconds. Step 6 Click Apply to save your configuration. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 825 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer Configuring Off Channel Scanning Defer for a WLAN (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Assign a defer-priority for the channel scan by entering this command:

config wlan channel-scan defer-priority priority [enable | disable] WLAN-id The valid range for the priority argument is 0 to 7. The priority is 0 to 7 (this value should be set to 6 on the client and on the WLAN). Use this command to configure the amount of time that scanning will be deferred following an UP packet in the queue. Assign the channel scan defer time (in milliseconds) by entering this command:

config wlan channel-scan defer-time msec WLAN-id The time value is in miliseconds (ms) and the valid range is 100 (default) to 60000 (60 seconds). This setting should match the requirements of the equipment on your wireless LAN. You can also configure this feature on the Cisco WLC GUI by selecting WLANs, and either edit an existing WLAN or create a new one. Configuring Dynamic Channel Assignment (GUI) You can specify the channels that the dynamic channel assignment (DCA) algorithm considers when selecting the channels to be used for RRM scanning by using the Cisco WLC GUI. Note This functionality is helpful when you know that the clients do not support certain channels because they are legacy devices or they have certain regulatory restrictions. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Disable the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n network as follows:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the Global Parameters page. b) Unselect the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box. c) Click Apply. Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > RRM > DCA to open the Dynamic Channel Assignment (DCA) page. Choose one of the following options from the Channel Assignment Method drop-down list to specify the Cisco WLCs DCA mode:

AutomaticCauses the Cisco WLC to periodically evaluate and, if necessary, update the channel assignment for all joined access points. This is the default value. FreezeCauses the Cisco WLC to evaluate and update the channel assignment for all joined access points, if necessary, but only when you click Invoke Channel Update Once. Note The Cisco WLC does not evaluate and update the channel assignment immediately after you click Invoke Channel Update Once. It waits for the next interval to elapse. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 826 OL-28744-01 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer OFFTurns off DCA and sets all access point radios to the first channel of the band, which is the default value. If you choose this option, you must manually assign channels on all radios. Note For optimal performance, we recommend that you use the Automatic setting. See the Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment (GUI), on page 852 section for instructions on how to disable the Cisco WLCs dynamic channel and power settings. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 From the Interval drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify how often the DCA algorithm is allowed to run: 10 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours. The default value is 10 minutes. Note If your Cisco WLC supports only OfficeExtend access points, we recommend that you set the DCA interval to 6 hours for optimal performance. For deployments with a combination of OfficeExtend access points and local access points, the range of 10 minutes to 24 hours can be used. From the AnchorTime drop-down list, choose a number to specify the time of day when the DCA algorithm is to start. The options are numbers between 0 and 23 (inclusive) representing the hour of the day from 12:00 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. Select the Avoid Foreign AP Interference check box to cause the Cisco WLCs RRM algorithms to consider 802.11 traffic from foreign access points (those not included in your wireless network) when assigning channels to lightweight access points, or unselect it to disable this feature. For example, RRM may adjust the channel assignment to have access points avoid channels close to foreign access points. The default value is selected. Select the Avoid Cisco AP Load check box to cause the Cisco WLCs RRM algorithms to consider 802.11 traffic from Cisco lightweight access points in your wireless network when assigning channels, or unselect it to disable this feature. For example, RRM can assign better reuse patterns to access points that carry a heavier traffic load. The default value is unselected. Select the Avoid Non-802.11a (802.11b) Noise check box to cause the Cisco WLCs RRM algorithms to consider noise

(non-802.11 traffic) in the channel when assigning channels to lightweight access points, or unselect it to disable this feature. For example, RRM may have access points avoid channels with significant interference from nonaccess point sources, such as microwave ovens. The default value is selected. Select the Avoid Persistent Non-WiFi Interference check box to enable the Cisco WLC to ignore persistent non-WiFi interference. From the DCA Channel Sensitivity drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify how sensitive the DCA algorithm is to environmental changes such as signal, load, noise, and interference when determining whether to change channels:

LowThe DCA algorithm is not particularly sensitive to environmental changes. MediumThe DCA algorithm is moderately sensitive to environmental changes. HighThe DCA algorithm is highly sensitive to environmental changes. The default value is Medium. The DCA sensitivity thresholds vary by radio band, as noted in the table below. Table 24: DCA Sensitivity Thresholds Option High Medium Low 2.4-GHz DCA Sensitivity Threshold 5 dB 5-GHz DCA Sensitivity Threshold 5 dB 10 dB 20 dB 15 dB 20 dB OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 827 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer Step 11 For 802.11a/n networks only, choose one of the following channel width options to specify the channel bandwidth supported for all 802.11n radios in the 5-GHz band:

20 MHzThe 20-MHz channel bandwidth (default) 40 MHzThe 40-MHz channel bandwidth Note If you choose 40 MHz, be sure to choose at least two adjacent channels from the DCA Channel List in Step 13 (for example, a primary channel of 36 and an extension channel of 40). If you choose only one channel, that channel is not used for 40-MHz channel width. If you choose 40 MHz, you can also configure the primary and extension channels used by individual access points. To override the globally configured DCA channel width setting, you can statically configure an access points radio for 20- or 40-MHz mode on the 802.11a/n Cisco APs > Configure page. if you then change the static RF channel assignment method to WLC Controlled on the access point radio, the global DCA configuration overrides the channel width configuration that the access point was previously using. It can take up to 30 minutes (depending on how often DCA is configured to run) for the change to take effect. If you choose 40 MHz on the A radio, you cannot pair channels 116, 140, and 165 with any other channels. Note Note Note Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 This page also shows the following nonconfigurable channel parameter settings:

Channel Assignment LeaderThe MAC address of the RF group leader, which is responsible for channel assignment. Last Auto Channel AssignmentThe last time RRM evaluated the current channel assignments. Select the Avoid check for non-DFS channel to enable the Cisco WLC to avoid checks for non-DFS channels. DCA configuration requires at least one non-DFS channel in the list. In the EU countries, outdoor deployments do not support non-DFS channels. Customers based in EU or regions with similar regulations must enable this option or at least have one non-DFS channel in the DCA list even if the channel is not supported by the APs. Note This parameter is applicable only for deployments having outdoor access points such as 1522 and 1524. In the DCA Channel List area, the DCA Channels text box shows the channels that are currently selected. To choose a channel, select its check box in the Select column. To exclude a channel, unselect its check box. The ranges are as follows: 802.11a36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 132, 136, 140, 149, 153, 157, 161, 165, 190, 196 802.11b/g1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 The defaults are as follows: 802.11a36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 132, 136, 140, 149, 153, 157, 161 802.11b/g1, 6, 11 Note These extended UNII-2 channels in the 802.11a band do not appear in the channel list: 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 132, 136, and 140. If you have Cisco Aironet 1520 series mesh access points in the -E regulatory domain, you must include these channels in the DCA channel list before you start operation. If you are upgrading from a previous release, verify that these channels are included in the DCA channel list. To include these channels in the channel list, select the Extended UNII-2 Channels check box. If you are using Cisco Aironet 1520 series mesh access points in your network, you need to set the 4.9-GHz channels in the 802.11a band on which they are to operate. The 4.9-GHz band is for public safety client access traffic only. To choose a 4.9-GHz channel, select its check box in the Select column. To exclude a channel, unselect its check box. The ranges are as follows: 802.11a1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26 The defaults are as follows: 802.11a20, 26 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 828 OL-28744-01 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Click Apply. Reenable the 802.11 networks as follows:

1 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the Global Parameters page. 2 Select the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box. 3 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Note To see why the DCA algorithm changed channels, choose Monitor and then choose View All under Most Recent Traps. The trap provides the MAC address of the radio that changed channels, the previous channel and the new channel, the reason why the change occurred, the energy before and after the change, the noise before and after the change, and the interference before and after the change. Configuring Coverage Hole Detection (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Disable the 802.11 network as follows:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Global Parameters page. b) Unselect the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box. c) Click Apply. Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > RRM > Coverage to open the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g/n) > RRM >

Coverage page. Select the Enable Coverage Hole Detection check box to enable coverage hole detection, or unselect it to disable this feature. If you enable coverage hole detection, the Cisco WLC automatically determines, based on data received from the access points, if any access points have clients that are potentially located in areas with poor coverage. The default value is selected. In the Data RSSI text box, enter the minimum receive signal strength indication (RSSI) value for data packets received by the access point. The value that you enter is used to identify coverage holes (or areas of poor coverage) within your network. If the access point receives a packet in the data queue with an RSSI value below the value that you enter here, a potential coverage hole has been detected. The valid range is 90 to 60 dBm, and the default value is 80 dBm. The access point takes data RSSI measurements every 5 seconds and reports them to the Cisco WLC in 90-second intervals. In the Voice RSSI text box, enter the minimum receive signal strength indication (RSSI) value for voice packets received by the access point. The value that you enter is used to identify coverage holes within your network. If the access point receives a packet in the voice queue with an RSSI value below the value that you enter here, a potential coverage hole has been detected. The valid range is 90 to 60 dBm, and the default value is 75 dBm. The access point takes voice RSSI measurements every 5 seconds and reports them to the Cisco WLC in 90-second intervals. In the Min Failed Client Count per AP text box, enter the minimum number of clients on an access point with an RSSI value at or below the data or voice RSSI threshold. The valid range is 1 to 75, and the default value is 3. In the Coverage Exception Level per AP text box, enter the percentage of clients on an access point that are experiencing a low signal level but cannot roam to another access point. The valid range is 0 to 100%, and the default value is 25%. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 829 Configuring Off-Channel Scanning Defer Note If both the number and percentage of failed packets exceed the values configured for Failed Packet Count and Failed Packet Percentage (configurable through the Cisco WLC CLI) for a 5-second period, the client is considered to be in a pre-alarm condition. The Cisco WLC uses this information to distinguish between real and false coverage holes. False positives are generally due to the poor roaming logic implemented on most clients. A coverage hole is detected if both the number and percentage of failed clients meet or exceed the values entered in the Min Failed Client Count per AP and Coverage Exception Level per AP text boxes over a 90-second period. The Cisco WLC determines if the coverage hole can be corrected and, if appropriate, mitigates the coverage hole by increasing the transmit power level for that specific access point. Click Apply. Reenable the 802.11 network as follows:

a) Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Global Parameters page. b) Select the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g/n) Network Status check box. c) Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Configuring RRM Profile Thresholds, Monitoring Channels, and Monitor Intervals (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > RRM > General to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) > RRM >

General page. Configure profile thresholds used for alarming as follows:

Note The profile thresholds have no bearing on the functionality of the RRM algorithms. Lightweight access points send an SNMP trap (or an alert) to the Cisco WLC when the values set for these threshold parameters are exceeded. a) In the Interference text box, enter the percentage of interference (802.11 traffic from sources outside of your wireless network) on a single access point. The valid range is 0 to 100%, and the default value is 10%. b) In the Clients text box, enter the number of clients on a single access point. The valid range is 1 to 75, and the default value is 12. c) In the Noise text box, enter the level of noise (non-802.11 traffic) on a single access point. The valid range is 127 to 0 dBm, and the default value is 70 dBm. d) In the Utilization text box, enter the percentage of RF bandwidth being used by a single access point. The valid range is 0 to 100%, and the default value is 80%. Step 3 From the Channel List drop-down list, choose one of the following options to specify the set of channels that the access point uses for RRM scanning:

All ChannelsRRM channel scanning occurs on all channels supported by the selected radio, which includes channels not allowed in the country of operation. Country ChannelsRRM channel scanning occurs only on the data channels in the country of operation. This is the default value. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 830 OL-28744-01 Configuring RRM (CLI) DCA ChannelsRRM channel scanning occurs only on the channel set used by the DCA algorithm, which by default includes all of the non-overlapping channels allowed in the country of operation. However, you can specify the channel set to be used by DCA if desired. To do so, follow instructions in the Dynamic Channel Assignment. Configure monitor intervals as follows:

1 In the Channel Scan Interval text box, enter (in seconds) the sum of the time between scans for each channel within a radio band. The entire scanning process takes 50 ms per channel, per radio and runs at the interval configured here. The time spent listening on each channel is determined by the non-configurable 50-ms scan time and the number of channels to be scanned. For example, in the U.S. all 11 802.11b/g channels are scanned for 50 ms each within the default 180-second interval. So every 16 seconds, 50 ms is spent listening on each scanned channel (180/11 = ~16 seconds). The Channel Scan Interval parameter determines the interval at which the scanning occurs.The valid range is 60 to 3600 seconds, and the default value is 60 seconds for 802.11a radios and 180 seconds for the 802.11b/g radios. Note If your Cisco WLC supports only OfficeExtend access points, we recommend that you set the channel scan interval to 1800 seconds for optimal performance. For deployments with a combination of OfficeExtend access points and local access points, the range of 60 to 3600 seconds can be used. 2 In the Neighbor Packet Frequency text box, enter (in seconds) how frequently neighbor packets (messages) are sent, which eventually builds the neighbor list. The valid range is 60 to 3600 seconds, and the default value is 60 seconds. Note If your Cisco WLC supports only OfficeExtend access points, we recommend that you set the neighbor packet frequency to 600 seconds for optimal performance. For deployments with a combination of OfficeExtend access points and local access points, the range of 60 to 3600 seconds can be used. If the access point radio does not receive a neighbor packet from an existing neighbor within 60 minutes, the Cisco WLC deletes that neighbor from the neighbor list. Note Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Note Click Set to Factory Default if you want to return all of the Cisco WLCs RRM parameters to their factory-default values. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Configuring RRM (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Disable the 802.11 network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable network Choose the Transmit Power Control version by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} tpc-version {1 | 2}

where:

TPCv1: Coverage-optimal(Default) Offers strong signal coverage and stability with negligent intercell interferences and sticky client syndrome. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 831 Configuring RRM (CLI) TPCv2: Interference-optimalFor scenarios where voice calls are extensively used. Tx power is dynamically adjusted with the goal of minimum interference. It is suitable for dense networks. In this mode, there can be higher roaming delays and coverage hole incidents. Step 3 Perform one of the following to configure transmit power control:

Have RRM automatically set the transmit power for all 802.11 radios at periodic intervals by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} txPower global auto Have RRM automatically reset the transmit power for all 802.11a or 802.11b/g radios one time by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} txPower global once Configure the transmit power range that overrides the Transmit Power Control algorithm, use this command to enter the maximum and minimum transmit power used by RRM:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} txPower global {max | min} txpower where txpower is a value from 10 to 30 dBM. The minimum value cannot be greater than the maximum value;

the maximum value cannot be less than the minimum value. If you configure a maximum transmit power, RRM does not allow any access point to exceed this transmit power

(whether the maximum is set at RRM startup, or by coverage hole detection). For example, if you configure a maximum transmit power of 11 dBm, then no access point would transmit above 11 dBm, unless the access point is configured manually. Manually change the default transmit power setting by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} {tpcv1-thresh | tpcv2-thresh} threshold where threshold is a value from 80 to 50 dBm. Increasing this value causes the access points to operate at higher transmit power rates. Decreasing the value has the opposite effect. In applications with a dense population of access points, it may be useful to decrease the threshold to 80 or 75 dBm in order to reduce the number of BSSIDs (access points) and beacons seen by the wireless clients. Some wireless clients may have difficulty processing a large number of BSSIDs or a high beacon rate and may exhibit problematic behavior with the default threshold. Configure the Transmit Power Control Version 2 on a per-channel basis by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} tpcv2-per-chan {enable | disable}

Step 4 Perform one of the following to configure dynamic channel assignment (DCA):

Have RRM automatically configure all 802.11 channels based on availability and interference by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} channel global auto Have RRM automatically reconfigure all 802.11 channels one time based on availability and interference by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} channel global once Disable RRM and set all channels to their default values by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} channel global off Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 832 OL-28744-01 Configuring RRM (CLI) Restart aggressive DCA cycle by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} channel global restart To specify the channel set used for DCA by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel {add | delete} channel_number You can enter only one channel number per command. This command is helpful when you know that the clients do not support certain channels because they are legacy devices or they have certain regulatory restrictions. Step 5 Configure additional DCA parameters by entering these commands:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel dca anchor-time valueSpecifies the time of day when the DCA algorithm is to start. value is a number between 0 and 23 (inclusive) representing the hour of the day from 12:00 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel dca interval valueSpecifies how often the DCA algorithm is allowed to run. value is one of the following: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, or 24 hours or 0, which is the default value of 10 minutes (or 600 seconds). Note If your Cisco WLC supports only OfficeExtend access points, we recommend that you set the DCA interval to 6 hours for optimal performance. For deployments with a combination of OfficeExtend access points and local access points, the range of 10 minutes to 24 hours can be used. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel dca sensitivity {low | medium | high}Specifies how sensitive the DCA algorithm is to environmental changes such as signal, load, noise, and interference when determining whether to change channel. low means that the DCA algorithm is not particularly sensitive to environmental changes. medium means that the DCA algorithm is moderately sensitive to environmental changes. high means that the DCA algorithm is highly sensitive to environmental changes. The DCA sensitivity thresholds vary by radio band, as noted in following table. Table 25: DCA Sensitivity Thresholds Option High Medium Low 2.4-GHz DCA Sensitivity Threshold 5 dB 5-GHz DCA Sensitivity Threshold 5 dB 10 dB 20 dB 15 dB 20 dB config advanced 802.11a channel dca chan-width-11n {20 | 40}Configures the DCA channel width for all 802.11n radios in the 5-GHz band. where 20 sets the channel width for 802.11n radios to 20 MHz. This is the default value. 40 sets the channel width for 802.11n radios to 40 MHz. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 833 Configuring RRM (CLI) Note Note Note If you choose 40, be sure to set at least two adjacent channels in the config advanced 802.11a channel {add | delete} channel_number command in Step 4 (for example, a primary channel of 36 and an extension channel of 40). If you set only one channel, that channel is not used for 40-MHz channel width. If you choose 40, you can also configure the primary and extension channels used by individual access points. To override the globally configured DCA channel width setting, you can statically configure an access points radio for 20-MHz or 40-MHz mode using the config 802.11a chan_width Cisco_AP

{20 | 40} command. If you change the static configuration to global on the access point radio, the global DCA configuration overrides the channel width configuration that the access point was previously using. It can take up to 30 minutes (depending on how often DCA is configured to run) for the change to take effect. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel outdoor-ap-dca {enable | disable}Enables or disables to the Cisco WLC to avoid checks for non-DFS channels. Note This parameter is applicable only for deployments having outdoor access points such as 1522 and 1524. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel foreign {enable | disable}Enables or disables foreign access point interference avoidance in the channel assignment. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel load {enable | disable}Enables or disables load avoidance in the channel assignment. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel noise {enable | disable}Enables or disables noise avoidance in the channel assignment. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel updateInitiates an update of the channel selection for every Cisco access point. Step 6 Configure coverage hole detection by entering these commands:

Note In Cisco WLC software release 5.2 or later releases, you can disable coverage hole detection on a per-WLAN basis. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} coverage {enable | disable}Enables or disables coverage hole detection. If you enable coverage hole detection, the Cisco WLC automatically determines, based on data received from the access points, if any access points have clients that are potentially located in areas with poor coverage. The default value is enabled. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} coverage {data | voice} rssi-threshold rssiSpecifies the minimum receive signal strength indication (RSSI) value for packets received by the access point. The value that you enter is used to identify coverage holes (or areas of poor coverage) within your network. If the access point receives a packet in the data or voice queue with an RSSI value below the value you enter here, a potential coverage hole has been detected. The valid range is 90 to 60 dBm, and the default value is 80 dBm for data packets and 75 dBm for voice packets. The access point takes RSSI measurements every 5 seconds and reports them to the Cisco WLC in 90-second intervals. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} coverage level global clientsSpecifies the minimum number of clients on an access point with an RSSI value at or below the data or voice RSSI threshold. The valid range is 1 to 75, and the default value is 3. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 834 OL-28744-01 Viewing RRM Settings (CLI) config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} coverage exception global percentSpecifies the percentage of clients on an access point that are experiencing a low signal level but cannot roam to another access point. The valid range is 0 to 100%, and the default value is 25%. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} coverage {data | voice} packet-count packetsSpecifies the minimum failure count threshold for uplink data or voice packets. The valid range is 1 to 255 packets, and the default value is 10 packets. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} coverage {data | voice} fail-rate percentSpecifies the failure rate threshold for uplink data or voice packets. The valid range is 1 to 100%, and the default value is 20%. Note If both the number and percentage of failed packets exceed the values entered in the packet-count and fail-rate commands for a 5-second period, the client is considered to be in a pre-alarm condition. The Cisco WLC uses this information to distinguish between real and false coverage holes. False positives are generally due to the poor roaming logic implemented on most clients. A coverage hole is detected if both the number and percentage of failed clients meet or exceed the values entered in the coverage level global and coverage exception global commands over a 90-second period. The Cisco WLC determines if the coverage hole can be corrected and, if appropriate, mitigates the coverage hole by increasing the transmit power level for that specific access point. Step 7 Enable the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} enable network Note To enable the 802.11g network, enter config 802.11b 11gSupport enable after the config 802.11b enable network command. Step 8 Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Viewing RRM Settings (CLI) To see 802.11a and 802.11b/g RRM settings, use these commands:

show advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} ?

where ? is one of the following:

ccx {global | Cisco_AP}Shows the CCX RRM configuration. channelShows the channel assignment configuration and statistics. coverageShows the coverage hole detection configuration and statistics. loggingShows the RF event and performance logging. monitorShows the Cisco radio monitoring. profile {global | Cisco_AP}Shows the access point performance profiles. receiverShows the 802.11a or 802.11b/g receiver configuration and statistics. summaryShows the configuration and statistics of the 802.11a or 802.11b/g access points. txpowerShows the transmit power assignment configuration and statistics. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 835 Debug RRM Issues (CLI) Debug RRM Issues (CLI) Use these commands to troubleshoot and verify RRM behavior:

debug airewave-director ?

where ? is one of the following:

allEnables debugging for all RRM logs. channelEnables debugging for the RRM channel assignment protocol. detailEnables debugging for RRM detail logs. errorEnables debugging for RRM error logs. groupEnables debugging for the RRM grouping protocol. managerEnables debugging for the RRM manager. messageEnables debugging for RRM messages. packetEnables debugging for RRM packets. powerEnables debugging for the RRM power assignment protocol as well as coverage hole detection. profileEnables debugging for RRM profile events. radarEnables debugging for the RRM radar detection/avoidance protocol. rf-changeEnables debugging for RRM RF changes. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 836 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 128 Configuring RRM Neighbor Discovery Packets Information About RRM NDP and RF Grouping, page 837 Configuring RRM NDP (CLI), page 837 Information About RRM NDP and RF Grouping The Cisco Neighbor Discovery Packet (NDP) is the fundamental tool for RRM and other wireless applications that provides information about the neighbor radio information. You can configure the Cisco WLC to encrypt neighbor discovery packets. This feature enables you to be compliant with the PCI specifications. An RF group can only be formed between Cisco WLCs that have the same encryption mechanism. That is, an access point associated to a Cisco WLC that is encrypted can not be neighbors with an access point associated to a Cisco WLC that is not encrypted. The two Cisco WLCs and their access points will not recognize each other as neighbors and cannot form an RF group. It is possible to assign two Cisco WLCs in a static RF group configuration that has mismatched encryption settings. In this case, the two Cisco WLCs do not function as a single RF group because the access points belonging to the mismatched Cisco WLCs do not recognize one another as neighbors in the group. Configuring RRM NDP (CLI) To configure RRM NDP using the Cisco WLC CLI, enter this command:

config advanced 802.11{a|b} monitor ndp-mode {protected | transparent}

This command configures NDP mode. By default, the mode is set to transparent. The following options are available:

ProtectedPackets are encrypted. TransparentPackets are sent as is. Use this command to see the discovery type:

show advanced 802.11{a|b} monitor OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 837 Configuring RRM NDP (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 838 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 129 Configuring RF Groups Information About RF Groups, page 839 Configuring RF Groups, page 841 Viewing the RF Group Status, page 842 Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups, page 843 Information About RF Groups An RF group is a logical collection of Cisco WLCs that coordinate to perform RRM in a globally optimized manner to perform network calculations on a per-radio basis. An RF group exists for each 802.11 network type. Clustering Cisco WLCs into a single RF group enable the RRM algorithms to scale beyond the capabilities of a single Cisco WLC. RF group is created based on following parameters:

User-configured RF network name. Neighbor discovery performed at the radio level. Country list configured on MC. RF grouping runs between MCs. Lightweight access points periodically send out neighbor messages over the air. Access points using the the same RF group name validate messages from each other. When access points on different Cisco WLCs hear validated neighbor messages at a signal strength of 80 dBm or stronger, the Cisco WLCs dynamically form an RF neighborhood in auto mode. In static mode, the leader is manually selected and the members are added to the RF Group. To know more about RF Group modes, RF Group Leader. Note RF groups and mobility groups are similar in that they both define clusters of Cisco WLCs, but they are different in terms of their use. An RF group facilitates scalable, system-wide dynamic RF management while a mobility group facilitates scalable, system-wide mobility and Cisco WLC redundancy. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 839 Information About RF Groups RF Group Leader Starting in the 7.0.116.0 release, the RF Group Leader can be configured in two ways as follows:

Auto ModeIn this mode, the members of an RF group elect an RF group leader to maintain a master power and channel scheme for the group. The RF grouping algorithm dynamically chooses the RF group leader and ensures that an RF group leader is always present. Group leader assignments can and do change (for instance, if the current RF group leader becomes inoperable or if RF group members experience major changes). Static ModeIn this mode, the user selects a Cisco WLC as an RF group leader manually. In this mode, the leader and the members are manually configured and are therefore fixed. If the members are unable to join the RF group, the reason is indicated. The leader tries to establish a connection with a member every 1 minute if the member has not joined in the previous attempt. The RF group leader analyzes real-time radio data collected by the system, calculates the power and channel assignments, and sends them to each of the Cisco WLCs in the RF group. The RRM algorithms ensure system-wide stability and restrain channel and power scheme changes to the appropriate local RF neighborhoods. In Cisco WLC software releases prior to 6.0, the dynamic channel assignment (DCA) search algorithm attempts to find a good channel plan for the radios associated to Cisco WLCs in the RF group, but it does not adopt a new channel plan unless it is considerably better than the current plan. The channel metric of the worst radio in both plans determines which plan is adopted. Using the worst-performing radio as the single criterion for adopting a new channel plan can result in pinning or cascading problems. Pinning occurs when the algorithm could find a better channel plan for some of the radios in an RF group but is prevented from pursuing such a channel plan change because the worst radio in the network does not have any better channel options. The worst radio in the RF group could potentially prevent other radios in the group from seeking better channel plans. The larger the network, the more likely pinning becomes. Cascading occurs when one radios channel change results in successive channel changes to optimize the remaining radios in the RF neighborhood. Optimizing these radios could lead to their neighbors and their neighbors neighbors having a suboptimal channel plan and triggering their channel optimization. This effect could propagate across multiple floors or even multiple buildings, if all the access point radios belong to the same RF group. This change results in considerable client confusion and network instability. The main cause of both pinning and cascading is the way in which the search for a new channel plan is performed and that any potential channel plan changes are controlled by the RF circumstances of a single radio. In Cisco WLC software release 6.0, the DCA algorithm has been redesigned to prevent both pinning and cascading. The following changes have been implemented:

Multiple local searchesThe DCA search algorithm performs multiple local searches initiated by different radios within the same DCA run rather than performing a single global search driven by a single radio. This change addresses both pinning and cascading while maintaining the desired flexibility and adaptability of DCA and without jeopardizing stability. Multiple channel plan change initiators (CPCIs)Previously, the single worst radio was the sole initiator of a channel plan change. Now each radio within the RF group is evaluated and prioritized as a potential initiator. Intelligent randomization of the resulting list ensures that every radio is eventually evaluated, which eliminates the potential for pinning. Limiting the propagation of channel plan changes (Localization)For each CPCI radio, the DCA algorithm performs a local search for a better channel plan, but only the CPCI radio itself and its one-hop neighboring access points are actually allowed to change their current transmit channels. The impact of Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 840 OL-28744-01 Configuring RF Groups an access point triggering a channel plan change is felt only to within two RF hops from that access point, and the actual channel plan changes are confined to within a one-hop RF neighborhood. Because this limitation applies across all CPCI radios, cascading cannot occur. Non-RSSI-based cumulative cost metricA cumulative cost metric measures how well an entire region, neighborhood, or network performs with respect to a given channel plan. The individual cost metrics of all access points in that area are considered in order to provide an overall understanding of the channel plans quality. These metrics ensure that the improvement or deterioration of each single radio is factored into any channel plan change. The objective is to prevent channel plan changes in which a single radio improves but at the expense of multiple other radios experiencing a considerable performance decline. The RRM algorithms run at a specified updated interval, which is 600 seconds by default. Between update intervals, the RF group leader sends keepalive messages to each of the RF group members and collects real-time RF data. Note Several monitoring intervals are also available. See the Configuring RRM section for details. RF Group Name A Cisco WLC is configured with an RF group name, which is sent to all access points joined to the Cisco WLC and used by the access points as the shared secret for generating the hashed MIC in the neighbor messages. To create an RF group, you configure all of the Cisco WLCs to be included in the group with the same RF group name. If there is any possibility that an access point joined to a Cisco WLC may hear RF transmissions from an access point on a different Cisco WLC, you should configure the Cisco WLCs with the same RF group name. If RF transmissions between access points can be heard, then system-wide RRM is recommended to avoid 802.11 interference and contention as much as possible. Configuring RF Groups This section describes how to configure RF groups through either the GUI or the CLI. Note The RF group name is generally set at deployment time through the Startup Wizard. However, you can change it as necessary. Note When the multiple-country feature is being used, all Cisco WLCs intended to join the same RF group must be configured with the same set of countries, configured in the same order. Note You can also configure RF groups using the Cisco Prime Infrastructure. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 841 Viewing the RF Group Status Configuring an RF Group Name (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Controller > General to open the General page. Enter a name for the RF group in the RF-Network Name text box. The name can contain up to 19 ASCII characters. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Repeat this procedure for each controller that you want to include in the RF group. Configuring an RF Group Name (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Create an RF group by entering the config network rf-network-name name command:

Note Enter up to 19 ASCII characters for the group name. See the RF group by entering the show network command. Save your settings by entering the save config command. Repeat this procedure for each controller that you want to include in the RF group. Viewing the RF Group Status This section describes how to view the status of the RF group through either the GUI or the CLI. Note You can also view the status of RF groups using the Cisco Prime Infrastructure. Viewing the RF Group Status (GUI) Step 1 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n > or 802.11b/g/n > RRM > RF Grouping to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) RRM

> RF Grouping page. This page shows the details of the RF group, displaying the configurable parameter RF Group mode, the RF Group role of this Cisco WLC, the Update Interval and the Cisco WLC name and IP address of the Group Leader to this Cisco WLC. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 842 OL-28744-01 Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups Note RF grouping mode can be set using the Group Mode drop-down list. Tip Once a Cisco WLC has joined as a static member and you want to change the grouping mode, we recommend that you remove the member from the configured static-leader and also make sure that a member Cisco WLC has not been configured to be a member on multiple static leaders. This is to avoid repeated join attempts from one or more RF static leaders. Step 2

(Optional) Repeat this procedure for the network type that you did not select (802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n). Viewing the RF Group Status (CLI) Step 1 See which Cisco WLC is the RF group leader for the 802.11a RF network by entering this command:

show advanced 802.11a group Information similar to the following appears:

Radio RF Grouping 802.11a Group Mode............................. STATIC 802.11a Group Update Interval.................. 600 seconds 802.11a Group Leader........................... test (209.165.200.225) 802.11a Group Member......................... test (209.165.200.225) 802.11a Last Run............................... 397 seconds ago This output shows the details of the RF group, specifically the grouping mode for the Cisco WLC, how often the group information is updated (600 seconds by default), the IP address of the RF group leader, the IP address of this Cisco WLC, and the last time the group information was updated. Note If the IP addresses of the group leader and the group member are identical, this Cisco WLC is currently the group leader. A * indicates that the Cisco WLC has not joined as a static member. Note Step 2 See which Cisco WLC is the RF group leader for the 802.11b/g RF network by entering this command:

show advanced 802.11b group Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups Information About Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups After you have created an RF group of Cisco WLCs, you need to configure the access points connected to the Cisco WLCs to detect rogue access points. The access points will then select the beacon/probe-response frames in neighboring access point messages to see if they contain an authentication information element (IE) that matches that of the RF group. If the select is successful, the frames are authenticated. Otherwise, the authorized access point reports the neighboring access point as a rogue, records its BSSID in a rogue table, and sends the table to the Cisco WLC. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 843 Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups Enabling Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Make sure that each Cisco WLC in the RF group has been configured with the same RF group name. Note The name is used to verify the authentication IE in all beacon frames. If the Cisco WLCs have different names, false alarms will occur. Choose Wireless to open the All APs page. Click the name of an access point to open the All APs > Details page. Choose either local or monitor from the AP Mode drop-down list and click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 for every access point connected to the Cisco WLC. Choose Security > Wireless Protection Policies > AP Authentication/MFP to open the AP Authentication Policy page. The name of the RF group to which this Cisco WLC belongs appears at the top of the page. Choose AP Authentication from the Protection Type drop-down list to enable rogue access point detection. Enter a number in the Alarm Trigger Threshold edit box to specify when a rogue access point alarm is generated. An alarm occurs when the threshold value (which specifies the number of access point frames with an invalid authentication IE) is met or exceeded within the detection period. Note The valid threshold range is from1 to 255, and the default threshold value is 1. To avoid false alarms, you may want to set the threshold to a higher value. Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Repeat this procedure on every Cisco WLC in the RF group. Note If rogue access point detection is not enabled on every Cisco WLC in the RF group, the access points on the Cisco WLCs with this feature disabled are reported as rogues. Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 844 Make sure that each Cisco WLC in the RF group has been configured with the same RF group name. Note The name is used to verify the authentication IE in all beacon frames. If the Cisco WLCs have different names, false alarms will occur. Configure a particular access point for local (normal) mode or monitor (listen-only) mode by entering this command:

config ap mode local Cisco_AP or config ap mode monitor Cisco_AP Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for every access point connected to the Cisco WLC. Enable rogue access point detection by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 config wps ap-authentication Specify when a rogue access point alarm is generated by entering this command. An alarm occurs when the threshold value (which specifies the number of access point frames with an invalid authentication IE) is met or exceeded within the detection period. config wps ap-authentication threshold Note The valid threshold range is from 1 to 255, and the default threshold value is 1. To avoid false alarms, you may want to set the threshold to a higher value. Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 on every Cisco WLC in the RF group. Note If rogue access point detection is not enabled on every Cisco WLC in the RF group, the access points on the Cisco WLCs with this feature disabled are reported as rogues. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 845 Configuring Rogue Access Point Detection in RF Groups Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 846 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 130 Overriding RRM Information About Overriding RRM, page 847 Prerequisites for Overriding RRM, page 847 Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings to Access Point Radios, page 848 Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment Globally for a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller, page 852 Information About Overriding RRM In some deployments, it is desirable to statically assign channel and transmit power settings to the access points instead of relying on the RRM algorithms provided by Cisco. Typically, this is true in challenging RF environments and non standard deployments but not the more typical carpeted offices. Note If you choose to statically assign channels and power levels to your access points and/or to disable dynamic channel and power assignment, you should still use automatic RF grouping to avoid spurious rogue device events. You can disable dynamic channel and power assignment globally for a Cisco WLC, or you can leave dynamic channel and power assignment enabled and statically configure specific access point radios with a channel and power setting. While you can specify a global default transmit power parameter for each network type that applies to all the access point radios on a Cisco WLC, you must set the channel for each access point radio when you disable dynamic channel assignment. You may also want to set the transmit power for each access point instead of leaving the global transmit power in effect. Prerequisites for Overriding RRM We recommend that you assign different nonoverlapping channels to access points that are within close proximity to each other. The nonoverlapping channels in the U.S. are 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 149, 153, 157, and 161 in an 802.11a network and 1, 6, and 11 in an 802.11b/g network. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 847 Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings to Access Point Radios Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings to Access Point Radios Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings (GUI) Step 1 Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. This page shows all the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n access point radios that are joined to the Cisco WLC and their current settings. The Channel text box shows both the primary and extension channels and uses an asterisk to indicate if they are globally assigned. Step 2 Step 3 Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the access point for which you want to modify the radio configuration and choose Configure. The 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Cisco APs > Configure page appears. Specify the RF Channel Assignment from the following options:

GlobalChoose this to specify a global value. CustomChoose this and then select a value from the adjacent drop-down list to specify a custom value. Step 4 Configure the antenna parameters for this radio as follows:

1 From the Antenna Type drop-down list, choose Internal or External to specify the type of antennas used with the access point radio. 2 Select and unselect the check boxes in the Antenna text box to enable and disable the use of specific antennas for this access point, where A, B, and C are specific antenna ports. The D antenna appears for the Cisco 3600 Series Access Points. A is the right antenna port, B is the left antenna port, and C is the center antenna port. For example, to enable transmissions from antenna ports A and B and receptions from antenna port C, you would select the following check boxes: Tx: A and B and Rx: C. In 3600 APs, the valid combinations are A, A+B, A+B+C or A+B+C+D. When you select a dual mode antenna, you can only apply single spatial 802.11n stream rates: MCS 0 to 7 data rates. When you select two dual mode antennae, you can apply only the two spatial 802.11n stream rates: MCS 0 to 15 data rates. 3 In the Antenna Gain text box, enter a number to specify an external antennas ability to direct or focus radio energy over a region of space. High-gain antennas have a more focused radiation pattern in a specific direction. The antenna gain is measured in 0.5 dBi units, and the default value is 7 times 0.5 dBi, or 3.5 dBi. If you have a high-gain antenna, enter a value that is twice the actual dBi value (see Cisco Aironet Antenna Reference Guide for antenna dBi values). Otherwise, enter 0. For example, if your antenna has a 4.4-dBi gain, multiply the 4.4 dBi by 2 to get 8.8 and then round down to enter only the whole number (8). The Cisco WLC reduces the actual equivalent isotropic radiated power (EIRP) to make sure that the antenna does not violate your countrys regulations. 4 Choose one of the following options from the Diversity drop-down list:

EnabledEnables the antenna connectors on both sides of the access point. This is the default value. Side A or RightEnables the antenna connector on the right side of the access point. Side B or LeftEnables the antenna connector on the left side of the access point. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 848 OL-28744-01 Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings to Access Point Radios Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 In the RF Channel Assignment area, choose Custom for the Assignment Method under RF Channel Assignment and choose a channel from the drop-down list to assign an RF channel to the access point radio. In the Tx Power Level Assignment area, choose the Custom assignment method and choose a transmit power level from the drop-down list to assign a transmit power level to the access point radio. The transmit power level is assigned an integer value instead of a value in mW or dBm. The integer corresponds to a power level that varies depending on the regulatory domain in which the access points are deployed. The number of available power levels varies based on the access point model. However, power level 1 is always the maximum power level allowed per country code setting, with each successive power level representing 50% of the previous power level. For example, 1 = maximum power level in a particular regulatory domain, 2 = 50% power, 3 = 25% power, 4 = 12.5%

power, and so on. Note See the hardware installation guide for your access point for the maximum transmit power levels supported per regulatory domain. Also, see the data sheet for your access point for the number of power levels supported. If the access point is not operating at full power, the Due to low PoE, radio is transmitting at degraded power message appears under the Tx Power Level Assignment section. Note Choose Enable from the Admin Status drop-down list to enable this configuration for the access point. Click Apply. Have the Cisco WLC send the access point radio admin state immediately to Cisco Prime Infrastructure as follows:

1 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Global Parameters page. 2 Select the 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status check box. 3 Click Apply. Step 10 Step 11 Click Save Configuration. Repeat this procedure for each access point radio for which you want to assign a static channel and power level. Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Disable the radio of a particular access point on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable Cisco_AP Configure the channel width for a particular access point by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} chan_width Cisco_AP {20 | 40}

where 20 allows the radio to communicate using only 20-MHz channels. Choose this option for legacy 802.11a radios, 20-MHz 802.11n radios, or 40-MHz 802.11n radios that you want to operate using only 20-MHz channels. This is the default value. 40 allows 40-MHz 802.11n radios to communicate using two adjacent 20-MHz channels bonded together. The radio uses the primary channel that you choose as well as its extension channel for faster throughput. Each channel has only one extension channel (36 and 40 are a pair, 44 and 48 are a pair, and so on). For example, if you choose OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 849 Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings to Access Point Radios Note a primary channel of 44, the Cisco WLC would use channel 48 as the extension channel. If you choose a primary channel of 48, the Cisco WLC would use channel 44 as the extension channel. Note This parameter can be configured only if the primary channel is statically assigned. Statically configuring an access points radio for 20-MHz or 40-MHz mode overrides the globally configured DCA channel width setting (configured using the config advanced 802.11a channel dca chan-width-11n

{20 | 40} command). If you ever change the static configuration back to global on the access point radio, the global DCA configuration overrides the channel width configuration that the access point was previously using. It can take up to 30 minutes (depending on how often DCA is configured to run) for the change to take effect. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Note Channels 116, 120, 124, and 128 are not available in the U.S. and Canada for 40-MHz channel bonding. Enable or disable the use of specific antennas for a particular access point by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} 11nsupport antenna {tx | rx} Cisco_AP {A | B | C} {enable | disable}

where A, B, and C are antenna ports. A is the right antenna port, B is the left antenna port, and C is the center antenna port. For example, to enable transmissions from the antenna in access point AP1s antenna port C on the 802.11a network, you would enter this command:

config 802.11a 11nsupport antenna tx AP1 C enable Specify the external antenna gain, which is a measure of an external antennas ability to direct or focus radio energy over a region of space entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} antenna extAntGain antenna_gain Cisco_AP High-gain antennas have a more focused radiation pattern in a specific direction. The antenna gain is measured in 0.5 dBi units, and the default value is 7 times 0.5 dBi, or 3.5 dBi. If you have a high-gain antenna, enter a value that is twice the actual dBi value (see Cisco Aironet Antenna Reference Guide for antenna dBi values). Otherwise, enter 0. For example, if your antenna has a 4.4-dBi gain, multiply the 4.4 dBi by 2 to get 8.8 and then round down to enter only the whole number (8). The Cisco WLC reduces the actual equivalent isotropic radiated power (EIRP) to make sure that the antenna does not violate your countrys regulations. Specify the channel that a particular access point is to use by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} channel ap Cisco_AP channel For example, to configure 802.11a channel 36 as the default channel on AP1, enter the config 802.11a channel ap AP1 36 command. The channel you choose is the primary channel (for example, channel 36), which is used for communication by legacy 802.11a radios and 802.11n 20-MHz radios. 802.11n 40-MHz radios use this channel as the primary channel but also use an additional bonded extension channel for faster throughput, if you chose 40 for the channel width. Note Changing the operating channel causes the access point radio to reset. Specify the transmit power level that a particular access point is to use by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} txPower ap Cisco_AP power_level For example, to set the transmit power for 802.11a AP1 to power level 2, enter the config 802.11a txPower ap AP1 2 command. The transmit power level is assigned an integer value instead of a value in mW or dBm. The integer corresponds to a power level that varies depending on the regulatory domain in which the access points are deployed. The number of available power levels varies based on the access point model. However, power level 1 is always the maximum power level allowed per country code setting, with each successive power level representing 50% of the previous power level. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 850 OL-28744-01 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Statically Assigning Channel and Transmit Power Settings to Access Point Radios For example, 1 = maximum power level in a particular regulatory domain, 2 = 50% power, 3 = 25% power, 4 = 12.5%

power, and so on. Note See the hardware installation guide for your access point for the maximum transmit power levels supported per regulatory domain. Also, see data sheet for your access point for the number of power levels supported. Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Repeat Step 2 through Step 7 for each access point radio for which you want to assign a static channel and power level. Reenable the access point radio by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} enable Cisco_AP Have the Cisco WLC send the access point radio admin state immediately to WCS by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} enable network Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the configuration of a particular access point by entering this command:

show ap config {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 7 Cisco AP Name.................................... AP1

... Tx Power Num Of Supported Power Levels ............. 8 Tx Power Level 1 .......................... 20 dBm Tx Power Level 2 .......................... 17 dBm Tx Power Level 3 .......................... 14 dBm Tx Power Level 4 .......................... 11 dBm Tx Power Level 5 .......................... 8 dBm Tx Power Level 6 .......................... 5 dBm Tx Power Level 7 .......................... 2 dBm Tx Power Level 8 .......................... -1 dBm Tx Power Configuration .................... CUSTOMIZED Current Tx Power Level .................... 1 Phy OFDM parameters Configuration ............................. CUSTOMIZED Current Channel ........................... 36 Extension Channel ......................... 40 Channel Width.............................. 40 Mhz Allowed Channel List....................... 36,44,52,60,100,108,116,132,

......................................... 149,157 TI Threshold .............................. -50 Antenna Type............................... EXTERNAL_ANTENNA External Antenna Gain (in .5 dBi units).... 7 Diversity.................................. DIVERSITY_ENABLED 802.11n Antennas Tx A....................................... ENABLED B....................................... ENABLED OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 851 Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment Globally for a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Rx A....................................... DISABLED B....................................... DISABLED C.................................... ENABLED Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment Globally for a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > RRM > Auto RF to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Global Parameters > Auto RF page. Disable dynamic channel assignment by choosing OFF under RF Channel Assignment. Disable dynamic power assignment by choosing Fixed under Tx Power Level Assignment and choosing a default transmit power level from the drop-down list. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. If you are overriding the default channel and power settings on a per radio basis, assign static channel and power settings to each of the access point radios that are joined to the Cisco WLC.

(Optional) Repeat this procedure for the network type that you did not select (802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n). Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Disable the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} disable network Disable RRM for all 802.11a or 802.11b/g radios and set all channels to the default value by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} channel global off Enable the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} enable network Note To enable the 802.11g network, enter the config 802.11b 11gSupport enable command after the config 802.11b enable network command. Step 4 Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 852 OL-28744-01 Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment Globally for a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 853 Disabling Dynamic Channel and Power Assignment Globally for a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 854 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 131 Configuring CCX Radio Management Features Information About CCX Radio Management Features, page 855 Configuring CCX Radio Management, page 856 Information About CCX Radio Management Features You can configure two parameters that affect client location calculations:

Radio measurement requests Location calibration These parameters are supported in Cisco Client Extensions (CCX) v2 and later releases are designed to enhance location accuracy and timeliness for participating CCX clients. For the location features to operate properly, the access points must be configured for normal, monitor, or FlexConnect mode. However, for FlexConnect mode, the access point must be connected to the Cisco WLC. Radio Measurement Requests When you enable the radio measurements requests feature, lightweight access points issue broadcast radio measurement request messages to clients running CCXv2 or later releases. The access points transmit these messages for every SSID over each enabled radio interface at a configured interval. In the process of performing 802.11 radio measurements, CCX clients send 802.11 broadcast probe requests on all the channels specified in the measurement request. The Cisco Location Appliance uses the uplink measurements based on these requests received at the access points to quickly and accurately calculate the client location. You do not need to specify on which channels the clients are to measure. The Cisco WLC, access point, and client automatically determine which channels to use. The radio measurement feature enables the Cisco WLC to also obtain information on the radio environment from the clients perspective (rather than from just that of the access point). In this case, the access points issue unicast radio measurement requests to a particular CCXv4 or v5 client. The client then sends various measurement reports back to the access point and onto the Cisco WLC. These reports include information about the radio environment and data used to interpret the location of the clients. To prevent the access points and Cisco WLC from being overwhelmed by radio measurement requests and reports, only two clients per access point and up to 20 clients per Cisco WLC are supported. You can view the status of radio measurement OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 855 Configuring CCX Radio Management requests for a particular access point or client as well as radio measurement reports for a particular client from the Cisco WLC CLI. The Cisco WLC software improves the ability of the mobility services engine to accurately interpret the location of a device through a CCXv4 feature called location-based services. The Cisco WLC issues a path-loss request to a particular CCXv4 or v5 client. If the client chooses to respond, it sends a path-loss measurement report to the Cisco WLC. These reports contain the channel and transmit power of the client. Note Non-CCX and CCXv1 clients ignore the CCX measurement requests and do not participate in the radio measurement activity. Location Calibration For CCX clients that need to be tracked more closely (for example, when a client calibration is performed), the Cisco WLC can be configured to command the access point to send unicast measurement requests to these clients at a configured interval and whenever a CCX client roams to a new access point. These unicast requests can be sent out more often to these specific CCX clients than the broadcast measurement requests, which are sent to all clients. When location calibration is configured for non-CCX and CCXv1 clients, the clients are forced to disassociate at a specified interval to generate location measurements. Configuring CCX Radio Management Configuring CCX Radio Management (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Network to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Global Parameters page. Under CCX Location Measurement, select the Mode check box to globally enable CCX radio management. This parameter causes the access points connected to this Cisco WLC to issue broadcast radio measurement requests to clients running CCX v2 or later releases. The default value is disabled (or unselected). If you selected the Mode check box in the previous step, enter a value in the Interval text box to specify how often the access points are to issue the broadcast radio measurement requests. The range is 60 to 32400 seconds. The default is 60 seconds. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Follow the instructions in Step 2 of the Configuring CCX Radio Management (CLI) section below to enable access point customization. Note To enable CCX radio management for a particular access point, you must enable access point customization, which can be done only through the Cisco WLC CLI. Step 7 If desired, repeat this procedure for the other radio band (802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n). Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 856 OL-28744-01 Configuring CCX Radio Management Configuring CCX Radio Management (CLI) Step 1 Globally enable CCX radio management by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} ccx location-meas global enable interval_seconds The range for the interval_seconds parameter is 60 to 32400 seconds, and the default value is 60 seconds. This command causes all access points connected to this Cisco WLC in the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network to issue broadcast radio measurement requests to clients running CCXv2 or later releases. Step 2 Enable access point customization by entering these commands:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} ccx customize Cisco_AP {on | off}

This command enables or disables CCX radio management features for a particular access point in the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} ccx location-meas ap Cisco_AP enable interval_seconds The range for the interval_seconds parameter is 60 to 32400 seconds, and the default value is 60 seconds. This command causes a particular access point in the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network to issue broadcast radio measurement requests to clients running CCXv2 or higher. Step 3 Enable or disable location calibration for a particular client by entering this command:

config client location-calibration {enable | disable} client _mac interval_seconds Note You can configure up to five clients per Cisco WLC for location calibration. Step 4 Save your settings by entering this command:

save config Viewing CCX Radio Management Information (CLI) To see the CCX broadcast location measurement request configuration for all access points connected to this Cisco WLC in the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network, enter this command:

show advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} ccx global To see the CCX broadcast location measurement request configuration for a particular access point in the 802.11a or 802.11b/g network, enter this command:

show advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} ccx ap Cisco_AP To see the status of radio measurement requests for a particular access point, enter this command:

show ap ccx rm Cisco_AP status Information similar to the following appears:

A Radio Beacon Request................................. Enabled Channel Load Request........................... Enabled Frame Request.................................. Disabled OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 857 Configuring CCX Radio Management Noise Histogram Request........................ Disabled Path Loss Request.............................. Disabled Interval....................................... 60 Iteration...................................... 5 B Radio Beacon Request................................. Disabled Channel Load Request........................... Enabled Frame Request.................................. Disabled Noise Histogram Request........................ Enabled Path Loss Request.............................. Disabled Interval....................................... 60 Iteration................................... 5 To see the status of radio measurement requests for a particular client, enter this command:

show client ccx rm client_mac status Information similar to the following appears:

Client Mac Address............................... 00:40:96:ae:53:b4 Beacon Request................................... Enabled Channel Load Request............................. Disabled Frame Request.................................... Disabled Noise Histogram Request.......................... Disabled Path Loss Request................................ Disabled Interval......................................... 5 Iteration........................................ 3 To see radio measurement reports for a particular client, enter these commands:

show client ccx rm client_mac report beaconShows the beacon report for the specified client. show client ccx rm client_mac report chan-loadShows the channel-load report for the specified client. show client ccx rm client_mac report noise-histShows the noise-histogram report for the specified client. show client ccx rm client_mac report frameShows the frame report for the specified client. To see the clients configured for location calibration, enter this command:

show client location-calibration summary To see the RSSI reported for both antennas on each access point that heard the client, enter this command:

show client detail client_mac Debugging CCX Radio Management Issues (CLI) Debug CCX broadcast measurement request activity by entering this command:

debug airewave-director message {enable | disable}

Debug client location calibration activity by entering this command:

debug ccxrm [all | error | warning | message | packet | detail {enable | disable}]

The CCX radio measurement report packets are encapsulated in Internet Access Point Protocol (IAPP) packets. Therefore, if the previous debug ccxrm command does not provide any debugs, enter this command to provide debugs at the IAPP level:

debug iapp error {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 858 OL-28744-01 Configuring CCX Radio Management Debug the output for forwarded probes and their included RSSI for both antennas by entering this command:

debug dot11 load-balancing OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 859 Configuring CCX Radio Management Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 860 OL-28744-01 P A R T VIII Configuring Cisco CleanAir Information About CleanAir, page 863 Prerequisites and Restrictions for CleanAir, page 867 Configuring Cisco CleanAir, page 869 Monitoring the Interference Devices, page 877 Configuring a Spectrum Expert Connection, page 885 C H A P T E R 132 Information About CleanAir This chapter describes information about CleanAir. Information About CleanAir, page 863 Information About CleanAir Cisco CleanAir is a spectrum intelligence solution designed to proactively manage the challenges of a shared wireless spectrum. It allows you to see all of the users of the shared spectrum (both native devices and foreign interferers). It also enables you or your network to act upon this information. For example, you could manually remove the interfering device, or the system could automatically change the channel away from the interference. CleanAir provides spectrum management and RF visibility. A Cisco CleanAir system consists of CleanAir-enabled access points, Cisco Wireless LAN Controllers, and Cisco Prime Infrastructure. These access points collect information about all devices that operate in the industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) bands, identify and evaluate the information as a potential interference source, and forward it to the Cisco WLC. The Cisco WLC controls the access points, collects spectrum data, and forwards information to Cisco Prime Infrastructure or a Cisco mobility services engine (MSE) upon request. For every device operating in the unlicensed band, Cisco CleanAir tells you what it is, where it is, how it is impacting your wireless network, and what actions you or your network should take. It simplifies RF so that you do not have to be an RF expert. Wireless LAN systems operate in unlicensed 2.4- and 5-GHz ISM bands. Many devices, such as microwave ovens, cordless phones, and Bluetooth devices also operate in these bands and can negatively affect Wi-Fi operations. Some of the most advanced WLAN services, such as voice over wireless and IEEE 802.11n radio communications, could be significantly impaired by the interference caused by other legal users of the ISM bands. The integration of Cisco CleanAir functionality into the Cisco Unified Wireless Network addresses this problem of radio frequency (RF) interference. CleanAir is supported on mesh AP backhaul at a 5-GHz radio of mesh. You can enable CleanAir on backhaul radios and can provide report interference details and air quality. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 863 Information About CleanAir Role of the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller in a Cisco CleanAir System The Cisco WLC performs the following tasks in a Cisco CleanAir system:

Configures Cisco CleanAir capabilities on the access point. Provides interfaces (GUI, CLI, and SNMP) for configuring Cisco CleanAir features and retrieving data Displays spectrum data. Collects and processes air quality reports from the access point and stores them in the air quality database. The Air Quality Report (AQR) contains information about the total interference from all identified sources represented by the Air Quality Index (AQI) and summary for the most severe interference categories. The CleanAir system can also include unclassified interference information under per interference type reports, which enables you to take action in cases where the interference due to unclassified interfering devices is more. Collects and processes interference device reports (IDRs) from the access point and stores them in the interference device database. Forwards spectrum data to Prime Infrastructure and the MSE. Interference Types that Cisco CleanAir Can Detect Cisco CleanAir can detect interference, report on the location and severity of the interference, and recommend different mitigation strategies. Two such mitigation strategies are persistent device avoidance and spectrum event-driven RRM. Wi-Fi chip-based RF management systems share these characteristics:

Any RF energy that cannot be identified as a Wi-Fi signal is reported as noise. Noise measurements that are used to assign a channel plan tend to be averaged over a period of time to avoid instability or rapid changes that can be disruptive to certain client devices. Averaging measurements reduces the resolution of the measurement. As such, a signal that disrupts clients might not look like it needs to be mitigated after averaging. All RF management systems available today are reactive in nature. Cisco CleanAir is different and can positively identify not only the source of the noise but also its location and potential impact to a WLAN. Having this information allows you to consider the noise within the context of the network and make intelligent and, where possible, proactive decisions. For CleanAir, two types of interference events are common:

Persistent interference Spontaneous interference Persistent interference events are created by devices that are stationary in nature and have intermittent but largely repeatable patterns of interference. For example, consider the case of a microwave oven located in a break room. Such a device might be active for only 1 or 2 minutes at a time. When operating, however, it can be disruptive to the performance of the wireless network and associated clients. Using Cisco CleanAir, you can positively identify the device as a microwave oven rather than indiscriminate noise. You can also determine exactly which part of the band is affected by the device, and because you can locate it, you can understand which access points are most severely affected. You can then use this information to direct RRM in selecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 864 OL-28744-01 Information About CleanAir a channel plan that avoids this source of interference for the access points within its range. Because this interference is not active for a large portion of the day, existing RF management applications might attempt to again change the channels of the affected access points. Persistent device avoidance is unique, however, in that it remains in effect as long as the source of interference is periodically detected to refresh the persistent status. The Cisco CleanAir system knows that the microwave oven exists and includes it in all future planning. If you move either the microwave oven or the surrounding access points, the algorithm updates RRM automatically. Note Spectrum event-driven RRM can be triggered only by Cisco CleanAir-enabled access points in local mode. Spontaneous interference is interference that appears suddenly on a network, perhaps jamming a channel or a range of channels completely. The Cisco CleanAir spectrum event-driven RRM feature allows you to set a threshold for air quality (AQ) that, if exceeded, triggers an immediate channel change for the affected access point. Most RF management systems can avoid interference, but this information takes time to propagate through the system. Cisco CleanAir relies on AQ measurements to continuously evaluate the spectrum and can trigger a move within 30 seconds. For example, if an access point detects interference from a video camera, it can recover by changing channels within 30 seconds of the camera becoming active. Cisco CleanAir also identifies and locates the source of interference so that more permanent mitigation of the device can be performed at a later time. In the case of Bluetooth devices, Cisco CleanAir-enabled access points can detect and report interferences only if the devices are actively transmitting. Bluetooth devices have extensive power save modes. For example, interference can be detected when data or voice is being streamed between the connected devices. Persistent Devices Some interference devices such as outdoor bridges and Microwave Ovens only transmit when needed. These devices can cause significant interference to the local WLAN due to short duration and periodic operation remain largely undetected by normal RF management metrics. With CleanAir the RRM DCA algorithm can detect, measure, register and remember the impact and adjust the DCA algorithm. This minimizes the use of channels affected by the persistent devices in the channel plan local to the interference source. Cisco CleanAir detects and stores the persistent device information in the Cisco WLC and this information is used to mitigate interfering channels. Persistent Devices Detection CleanAir-capable Monitor Mode access point collects information about persistent devices on all configured channels and stores the information in the Cisco WLC. Local/Bridge mode AP detects interference devices on the serving channels only. Persistent Devices Propagation Persistent device information that is detected by local or monitor mode access points is propagated to the neighboring access points connected to the same Cisco WLC to provide better chance of handling and avoiding persistent devices. Persistent device detected by the CleanAir-enabled access point is propagated to neighboring non-CleanAir access points, thus enhancing channel selection quality. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 865 Information About CleanAir Detecting Interferers by an Access Point When a CleanAir-enabled access point detects interference devices, detections of the same device from multiple sensors are merged together to create clusters. Each cluster is given a unique ID. Some devices conserve power by limiting the transmit time until actually needed which results in the spectrum sensor to temporarily stop detecting the device. This device is then correctly marked as down. A down device is correctly removed from the spectrum database. In cases when all the interferer detections for a specific devices are reported, the cluster ID is kept alive for an extended period of time to prevent possible device detection bouncing. If the same device is detected again, it is merged with the original cluster ID and the device detection history is preserved. For example, some bluetooth headsets operate on battery power. These devices employ methods to reduce power consumption, such as turning off the transmitter when not actually needed. Such devices can appear to come and go from the classification. To manage these devices, CleanAir keeps the cluster IDs longer and they are remerged into a single record upon detection. This process smoothens the user records and accurately represents the device history. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 866 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 133 Prerequisites and Restrictions for CleanAir This chapter describes the prerequisites and restrictions for configuring Cisco CleanAir. Prerequisites for CleanAir, page 867 Restrictions for CleanAir, page 868 Prerequisites for CleanAir You can configure Cisco CleanAir only on CleanAir-enabled access points. Only Cisco CleanAir-enabled access points using the following access point modes can perform Cisco CleanAir spectrum monitoring:

LocalIn this mode, each Cisco CleanAir-enabled access point radio provides air quality and interference detection reports for the current operating channel only. FlexConnectWhen a FlexConnect access point is connected to the controller, its Cisco CleanAir functionality is identical to local mode. MonitorWhen Cisco CleanAir is enabled in monitor mode, the access point provides air quality and interference detection reports for all monitored channels. The following options are available:

All All channels DCAChannel selection governed by the DCA list CountryAll channel legal within a regulatory domain OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 867 Restrictions for CleanAir Note Suppose you have two APs, one in the FlexConnect mode and the other in the monitor mode. Also suppose that you have created a profile enabling EAP attack against 802.1x auth. The Airmagnet (AM) tool, which can generate different types of attacks, fails to generate any attack even if you have provided valid AP MAC and STA MAC addresses. But if the AP MAC and STA MAC addresses in the AM tool are swapped, that is, the AP MAC address is specified in the STA MAC field and the STA MAC address is specified in the AP MAC field, then the tool is able to generate attacks, which the AP in the Monitor mode is also able to detect. Note The access point does not participate in AQ HeatMap in Prime Infrastructure. SE-ConnectThis mode enables a user to connect a Spectrum Expert application running on an external Microsoft Windows XP or Vista PC to a Cisco CleanAir-enabled access point in order to display and analyze detailed spectrum data. The Spectrum Expert application connects directly to the access point, bypassing the controller. An access point in SE-Connect mode does not provide any Wi-Fi, RF, or spectrum data to the controller. All CleanAir system functionality is suspended while the AP is in this mode, and no clients are served. This mode is intended for remote troubleshooting only. Up to three active Spectrum Expert connections are possible. Restrictions for CleanAir Access points in monitor mode do not transmit Wi-Fi traffic or 802.11 packets. They are excluded from radio resource management (RRM) planning and are not included in the neighbor access point list. IDR clustering depends on the controllers ability to detect neighboring in-network access points. Correlating interference device detections from multiple access points is limited between monitor-mode access points. Spectrum Expert (SE) Connect functionality is supported for local, FlexConnect, bridge, and monitor modes. The access point provides spectrum information to Spectrum Expert only for the current channel(s). For local, FlexConnect, and bridge modes, the spectrum data is available for the current active channel(s) and for the monitor mode, the common monitored channel list is available. The access point continues to send AQ (Air Quality) and IDR (Interference Device Reports) reports to the controller and perform normal activities according to the current mode. Sniffer and rogue detections access point modes are incompatible with all types of CleanAir spectrum monitoring. Cisco recommends a ratio of 1 monitor mode access point for every 5 local mode access points, this may also vary based on the network design and expert guidance for best coverage. Do not connect access points in SE connect mode directly to any physical port on Cisco 2500 Series Cisco WLCs. Spectrum Expert (Windows XP laptop client) and AP should be pingable, otherwise; it will not work. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 868 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 134 Configuring Cisco CleanAir Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Controller, page 869 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point, page 875 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Controller Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Wireless > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > CleanAir to open the 802.11a (or 802.11b) > CleanAir page. Select the CleanAir check box to enable Cisco CleanAir functionality on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n network, or unselect it to prevent the Cisco WLC from detecting spectrum interference. By default, the value is not selected. Select the Report Interferers check box to enable the Cisco CleanAir system to report any detected sources of interference, or unselect it to prevent the Cisco WLC from reporting interferers. The default value is selected. Note Device Security alarms, Event Driven RRM, and the Persistence Device Avoidance algorithm do not work if Report Interferers are disabled. Select the Persistent Device Propagation check box to enable propagation of information about persistent devices that can be detected by CleanAir. Persistent device propagation enables you to propagate information about persistent devices to the neighboring access points connected to the same Cisco WLC. Persistent interferers are present at the location and interfere with the WLAN operations even if they are not detectable at all times. Ensure that any sources of interference that need to be detected and reported by the Cisco CleanAir system appear in the Interferences to Detect box and any that do not need to be detected appear in the Interferences to Ignore box. Use the >

and < buttons to move interference sources between these two boxes. By default, all interference sources are detected. The possible sources of interference that you can choose are as follows:

Bluetooth Paging InquiryA Bluetooth discovery (802.11b/g/n only) Bluetooth Sco AclA Bluetooth link (802.11b/g/n only) Generic DECTA digital enhanced cordless communication (DECT)-compatible phone Generic TDDA time division duplex (TDD) transmitter Generic WaveformA continuous transmitter OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 869 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Controller JammerA jamming device MicrowaveA microwave oven (802.11b/g/n only) CanopyA canopy bridge device Spectrum 802.11 FHAn 802.11 frequency-hopping device (802.11b/g/n only) Spectrum 802.11 invertedA device using spectrally inverted Wi-Fi signals Spectrum 802.11 non std channelA device using nonstandard Wi-Fi channels Spectrum 802.11 SuperGAn 802.11 SuperAG device Spectrum 802.15.4An 802.15.4 device (802.11b/g/n only) Video CameraAn analog video camera WiMAX FixedA WiMAX fixed device (802.11a/n only) WiMAX MobileA WiMAX mobile device (802.11a/n only) XBoxA Microsoft Xbox (802.11b/g/n only) Step 6 Note Access points that are associated to the Cisco WLC send interference reports only for the interferers that appear in the Interferences to Detect box. This functionality allows you to filter out interferers that you do not want as well as any that may be flooding the network and causing performance problems for the Cisco WLC or Prime Infrastructure. Filtering allows the system to resume normal performance levels. Configure Cisco CleanAir alarms as follows:

a) Select the Enable AQI (Air Quality Index) Trap check box to enable the triggering of air quality alarms, or unselect the box to disable this feature. The default value is selected. b) If you selected the Enable AQI Trap check box in Step a, enter a value between 1 and 100 (inclusive) in the AQI Alarm Threshold text box to specify the threshold at which you want the air quality alarm to be triggered. When the air quality falls below the threshold level, the alarm is triggered. A value of 1 represents the worst air quality, and 100 represents the best. The default value is 35. c) Enter the AQI Alarm Threshold (1 to 100) that you want to set. An alarm is generated when the air quality reaches a threshold value. The default is 35. Valid range is from 1 and 100. d) Select the Enable trap for Unclassified Interferences check box to enable the AQI alarm to be generated upon detection of unclassified interference beyond the severity threshond specified in the AQI Alarm Threshold. Unclassified interferences are interferences that are detected but do not correspond to any of the identifiable interference types. e) Enter the Threshold for Unclassified category trap (1 to 99). Enter a value from 1 and 99. The default is 20. This is the severity index threshold for an unclassified interference category. f) Select the Enable Interference Type Trap check box to trigger interferer alarms when the Cisco WLC detects specified device types, or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is selected g) Make sure that any sources of interference that need to trigger interferer alarms appear in the Trap on These Types box and any that do not need to trigger interferer alarms appear in the Do Not Trap on These Types box. Use the >

and < buttons to move interference sources between these two boxes. By default, all interference sources trigger interferer alarms. For example, if you want the Cisco WLC to send an alarm when it detects a jamming device, select the Enable Interference Type Trap check box and move the jamming device to the Trap on These Types box. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 870 OL-28744-01 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Controller Step 7 Step 8 Click Apply. Trigger spectrum event-driven radio resource management (RRM) to run when a Cisco CleanAir-enabled access point detects a significant level of interference as follows:

a) Look at the EDRRM field to see the current status of spectrum event-driven RRM and, if enabled, the Sensitivity Threshold field to see the threshold level at which event-driven RRM is invoked. b) If you want to change the current status of event-driven RRM or the sensitivity level, click Change Settings. The 802.11a (or 802.11b) > RRM > Dynamic Channel Assignment (DCA) page appears. c) Select the EDRRM check box to trigger RRM to run when an access point detects a certain level of interference, or unselect it to disable this feature. The default value is selected. d) If you selected the EDRRM check box in Step c, choose Low, Medium, High, or Custom from the Sensitivity Threshold drop-down list to specify the threshold at which you want RRM to be triggered. When the interference for the access point rises above the threshold level, RRM initiates a local dynamic channel assignment (DCA) run and changes the channel of the affected access point radio if possible to improve network performance. Low represents a decreased sensitivity to changes in the environment while High represents an increased sensitivity If you selected the EDRRM sensitivity threshold as custom, you must set a threshold value in the Custom Sensitivity Threshold field. The default sensitivity is 35. The EDRRM AQ threshold value for low sensitivity is 35, medium sensitivity is 50, and high sensitivity is 60. e) Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Step 9 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Configure Cisco CleanAir functionality on the 802.11 network by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair {enable | disable} all If you disable this feature, the Cisco WLC does not receive any spectrum data. The default value is enable. Enable CleanAir on all associated access points in a network:

config {802.11a cleanair enable network You can enable CleanAir on a 5-GHz radio of mesh access points. Configure interference detection and specify sources of interference that need to be detected by the Cisco CleanAir system by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair device {enable | disable} type where you choose the type as one of the following:

802.11-fhAn 802.11 frequency-hopping device (802.11b/g/n only) 802.11-invA device using spectrally inverted Wi-Fi signals 802.11-nonstdA device using nonstandard Wi-Fi channels 802.15.4An 802.15.4 device (802.11b/g/n only) allAll interference device types (this is the default value) OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 871 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Controller bt-discoveryA bluetooth discovery (802.11b/g/n only) bt-linkA bluetooth link (802.11b/g/n only) canopyA canopy device cont-txA continuous transmitter dect-likeA digital enhanced cordless communication (DECT)-compatible phone jammerA jamming device mw-ovenA microwave oven (802.11b/g/n only) superagAn 802.11 SuperAG device tdd-txA time division duplex (TDD) transmitter video cameraAn analog video camera wimax-fixedA WiMAX fixed device wimax-mobileA WiMAX mobile device xboxA Microsoft Xbox (802.11b/g/n only) Note Access points that are associated to the Cisco WLC send interference reports only for the interference types specified in this command. This functionality allows you to filter out interferers that may be flooding the network and causing performance problems for the Cisco WLC or Prime Infrastructure. Filtering allows the system to resume normal performance levels. Configure the triggering of air quality alarms by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair alarm air-quality {enable | disable}

The default value is enabled. Specify the threshold at which you want the air quality alarm to be triggered by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair alarm air-quality {enable | disable}config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair alarm air-quality threshold threshold where threshold is a value between 1 and 100 (inclusive). When the air quality falls below the threshold level, the alarm is triggered. A value of 1 represents the worst air quality, and 100 represents the best. The default value is 35. Enable the triggering of interferer alarms by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair alarm device {enable | disable}

The default value is enable. Specify sources of interference that trigger alarms by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair alarm device type {enable | disable}where you choose the type as one of the following:

Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 802.11-fhAn 802.11 frequency-hopping device (802.11b/g/n only) 802.11-invA device using spectrally inverted Wi-Fi signals 802.11-nonstdA device using nonstandard Wi-Fi channels 802.15.4An 802.15.4 device (802.11b/g/n only) allAll interference device types (this is the default value) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 872 OL-28744-01 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Controller bt-discoveryA Bluetooth discovery (802.11b/g/n only) bt-linkA Bluetooth link (802.11b/g/n only) canopyA canopy device cont-txA continuous transmitter dect-likeA digital enhanced cordless communication (DECT)-compatible phone jammerA jamming device mw-ovenA microwave oven (802.11b/g/n only) superagAn 802.11 SuperAG device tdd-txA time division duplex (TDD) transmitter video cameraAn analog video camera wimax-fixedA WiMAX fixed device wimax-mobileA WiMAX mobile device xboxA Microsoft Xbox (802.11b/g/n only) Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Configure the triggering of air quality alarms for unclassified devices by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair alarm unclassified {enable | disable}

Specify the threshold at which you want the air quality alarm to be triggered for unclassified devices by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair alarm unclassified threshold threshold where threshold is a value from 1 and 99 (inclusive). When the air quality falls below the threshold level, the alarm is triggered. A value of 1 represents the worst air quality, and 100 represents the best. The default value is 35. Trigger spectrum event-driven radio resource management (RRM) to run when a Cisco CleanAir-enabled access point detects a significant level of interference by entering these commands:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel cleanair-event {enable | disable}Enables or disables spectrum event-driven RRM. The default value is disabled. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel cleanair-event sensitivity {low | medium | high | custom}Specifies the threshold at which you want RRM to be triggered. When the interference level for the access point rises above the threshold level, RRM initiates a local dynamic channel assignment (DCA) run and changes the channel of the affected access point radio if possible to improve network performance. Low represents a decreased sensitivity to changes in the environment while high represents an increased sensitivity. You can also set the sensitivity to a custom level of your choice. The default value is medium. config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel cleanair-event sensitivity threshold thresholdvalueIf you set the threshold sensitivity as custom, you must set a custom threshold value. The default is 35. Enable persistent devices propagation by entering this command:

config advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel pda-prop {enable | disable}

Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Step 13 See the Cisco CleanAir configuration for the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n network by entering this command:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 873 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on the Controller show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair config Information similar to the following appears:

(Cisco Controller) >show 802.11a cleanair config Clean Air Solution............................... Disabled Air Quality Settings:

Air Quality Reporting........................ Enabled Air Quality Reporting Period (min)........... 15 Air Quality Alarms........................... Enabled Air Quality Alarm Threshold................ 35 Unclassified Interference.................. Disabled Unclassified Severity Threshold............ 20 Interference Device Settings:

Interference Device Reporting................ Enabled Interference Device Types:

TDD Transmitter.......................... Enabled Jammer................................... Enabled Continuous Transmitter................... Enabled DECT-like Phone.......................... Enabled Video Camera............................. Enabled WiFi Inverted............................ Enabled WiFi Invalid Channel..................... Enabled SuperAG.................................. Enabled Canopy................................... Enabled WiMax Mobile............................. Enabled WiMax Fixed.............................. Enabled Interference Device Alarms................... Enabled Interference Device Types Triggering Alarms:

TDD Transmitter.......................... Disabled Jammer................................... Enabled Continuous Transmitter................... Disabled DECT-like Phone.......................... Disabled Video Camera............................. Disabled WiFi Inverted............................ Enabled WiFi Invalid Channel..................... Enabled SuperAG.................................. Disabled Canopy................................... Disabled WiMax Mobile............................. Disabled WiMax Fixed.............................. Disabled CleanAir ED-RRM State........................ Disabled CleanAir ED-RRM Sensitivity.................. Medium CleanAir ED-RRM Custom Threshold............. 50 CleanAir Persistent Devices state............ Disabled CleanAir Persistent Device Propagation....... Enabled Additional Clean Air Settings:

Step 14 See the spectrum event-driven RRM configuration for the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n network by entering this command:

show advanced {802.11a | 802.11b} channel Information similar to the following appears:

Automatic Channel Assignment Channel Assignment Mode........................ AUTO Channel Update Interval........................ 600 seconds [startup]

Anchor time (Hour of the day).................. 0 Channel Update Contribution.................... SNI CleanAir Event-driven RRM option.............. Enabled CleanAir Event-driven RRM sensitivity...... Medium Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 874 OL-28744-01 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired access point and click Configure. The 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Cisco APs > Configure page appears. The CleanAir Capable field shows whether this access point can support CleanAir functionality. If it can, go to the next step to enable or disable CleanAir for this access point. If the access point cannot support CleanAir functionality, you cannot enable CleanAir for this access point. Note By default, the Cisco CleanAir functionality is enabled on the radios. Enable Cisco CleanAir functionality for this access point by choosing Enable from the CleanAir Status drop-down list. To disable CleanAir functionality for this access point, choose Disable. The default value is Enable. This setting overrides the global CleanAir configuration for this access point. The Number of Spectrum Expert Connections text box shows the number of Spectrum Expert applications that are currently connected to the access point radio. Up to three active connections are possible. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Click Back to return to the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. View the Cisco CleanAir status for each access point radio by looking at the CleanAir Status text box on the 802.11a/n

(or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. The Cisco CleanAir status is one of the following:

UPThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio is currently operational (error code 0). DOWNThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio is currently not operational because an error has occurred. The most likely reason for the error is that the access point radio is disabled (error code 8). To correct this error, enable the radio. ERRORThe spectrum sensor for the access point radio has crashed (error code 128), making CleanAir monitoring nonoperational for this radio. If this error occurs, reboot the access point. If the error continues to appear, you might want to disable Cisco CleanAir functionality on the radio. N/AThis access point radio is not capable of supporting Cisco CleanAir functionality. Note You can create a filter to make the 802.11a/n Radios page or the 802.11b/g/n Radios page show only access point radios that have a specific Cisco CleanAir status (such as UP, DOWN, ERROR, or N/A). This feature is especially useful if your list of access point radios spans multiple pages, preventing you from viewing them all at once. To create a filter, click Change Filter to open the Search AP dialog box, select one or more of the CleanAir Status check boxes, and click Find. Only the access point radios that match your search criteria appear on the 802.11a/n Radios page or the 802.11b/g/n Radios page, and the Current Filter parameter at the top of the page specifies the filter used to generate the list (for example, CleanAir Status: UP). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 875 Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Configure Cisco CleanAir functionality for a specific access point by entering this command:

config {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair {enable | disable}Cisco_AP Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the Cisco CleanAir configuration for a specific access point on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n network by entering this command:

show ap config {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 0 Cisco AP Name.................................... CISCO_AP3500

... Spectrum Management Information Spectrum Management Capable.............. Yes Spectrum Management Admin State.......... Enabled Spectrum Management Operation State...... Up Rapid Update Mode........................ Disabled Spectrum Expert connection............... Disabled Spectrum Sensor State................. Configured (Error code = 0) Note See step 7 of Configuring Cisco CleanAir on an Access Point (GUI), on page 875 for descriptions of the spectrum management operation states and the possible error codes for the spectrum sensor state. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 876 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 135 Monitoring the Interference Devices Prerequisites for Monitoring the Interference Devices, page 877 Monitoring the Interference Device (GUI), page 877 Monitoring the Interference Device (CLI), page 879 Monitoring Persistent Devices (GUI), page 880 Monitoring Persistent Devices (CLI), page 880 Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands, page 881 Prerequisites for Monitoring the Interference Devices You can configure Cisco CleanAir only on CleanAir-enabled access points. Monitoring the Interference Device (GUI) Step 1 Choose Monitor > Cisco CleanAir > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n > Interference Devices to open the CleanAir >

Interference Devices page. This page shows the following information:

AP NameThe name of the access point where the interference device is detected. Radio Slot #Slot where the radio is installed. Interferer TypeType of the interferer. Affected ChannelChannel that the device affects. Detected TimeTime at which the interference was detected. SeveritySeverity index of the interfering device. Duty Cycle (%)Proportion of time during which the interfering device was active. RSSIReceive signal strength indicator (RSSI) of the access point. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 877 Monitoring the Interference Device (GUI) DevIDDevice identification number that uniquely identified the interfering device. ClusterIDCluster identification number that uniquely identifies the type of the devices. Step 2 Step 3 Click Change Filter to display the information about interference devices based on a particular criteria. Click Clear Filter to remove the filter and display the entire access point list. You can create a filter to display the list of interference devices that are based on the following filtering parameters:

Cluster IDTo filter based on the Cluster ID, select the check box and enter the Cluster ID in the text box next to this field. AP NameTo filter based on the access point name, select the check box and enter the access point name in the text box next to this field. Interferer TypeTo filter based on the type of the interference device, select the check box and select the interferer device from the options. Select one of the interferer devices:

BT Link MW Oven 802.11 FH BT Discovery TDD Transmit Jammer Continuous TX DECT Phone Video Camera 802.15.4 WiFi Inverted WiFi Inv. Ch SuperAG Canopy XBox WiMax Mobile WiMax Fixed WiFi ACI Unclassified Activity Channels Severity Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 878 OL-28744-01 Monitoring the Interference Device (CLI) Duty Cycle (%) RSSI Step 4 Click Find. The current filter parameters are displayed in the Current Filter field. Monitoring the Interference Device (CLI) This section describes the commands that you can use to monitor the interference devices for the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band. Detecting Interferers by an Access Point See information for all of the interferers detected by a specific access point on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair device ap Cisco_AP When a CleanAir-enabled access point detects interference devices, detections of the same device from multiple sensors are merged together to create clusters. Each cluster is given a unique ID. Some devices conserve power by limiting the transmit time until actually needed which results in the spectrum sensor to temporarily stop detecting the device. This device is then correctly marked as down. A down device is correctly removed from the spectrum database. In cases when all the interferer detections for a specific devices are reported, the cluster ID is kept alive for an extended period of time to prevent possible device detection bouncing. If the same device is detected again, it is merged with the original cluster ID and the device detection history is preserved. For example, some Bluetooth headsets operate on battery power. These devices employ methods to reduce power consumption, such as turning off the transmitter when not actually needed. Such devices can appear to come and go from the classification. To manage these devices, CleanAir keeps the cluster IDs longer and they are remerged into a single record upon detection. This process smoothens the user records and accurately represents the device history. Detecting Interferers by Device Type See information for all of the interferers of a specific device type on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair device type type Detecting Persistent Sources of Interference See a list of persistent sources of interference for a specific access point on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show ap auto-rf {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 879 Monitoring Persistent Devices (GUI) Monitoring Persistent Devices (GUI) To monitor persistent devices on a specific access point using the Cisco WLC GUI:

Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired access point and click Detail. The 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) AP Interfaces > Detail page appears. This page displays the details of the access points along with the list of persistent devices detected by this access point. Details of the persistent devices is displayed under the Persistent Devices section. The following information for each persistent device is available:

Class TypeThe class type of the persistent device. ChannelChannel this device is affecting. DC(%)Duty cycle (in percentage) of the persistent device. RSSI(dBm)RSSI indicator of the persistent device. Last Seen TimeTimestamp when the device was last active. Monitoring Persistent Devices (CLI) To view the list of persistent devices using the CLI, use the following command:

show ap auto-rf {802.11a | 802.11b} ap_name Information similar to the following appears:

Number Of Slots.................................. 2 AP Name.......................................... AP_1142_MAP MAC Address...................................... c4:7d:4f:3a:35:38 Slot ID........................................ 1 Radio Type..................................... RADIO_TYPE_80211a Sub-band Type.................................. All Noise Information

. . Power Level.................................. 1 RTS/CTS Threshold............................ 2347 Fragmentation Threshold...................... 2346 Antenna Pattern.............................. 0 Persistent Interference Devices Class Type

------------------------- ------- ------ ---------- ------------------------

Video Camera Tue Nov 8 10:06:25 2011 Channel DC (%%) RSSI (dBm) Last Update Time 149

-34 100 The following information for each persistent device is available:

Class TypeThe class type of the persistent device. ChannelChannel this device is affecting. DC(%)Duty cycle (in percentage) of the persistent device. RSSI(dBm)RSSI indicator of the persistent device. Last Seen TimeTimestamp when the device was last active. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 880 OL-28744-01 Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands This section describes how to monitor the air quality of the 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radio bands using both the Cisco WLC GUI and CLI. Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands (GUI) Choose Monitor > Cisco CleanAir > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n >Air Quality Report to open the CleanAir

> Air Quality Report page. This page shows the air quality of both the 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radio bands. Specifically, it shows the following information:

AP NameThe name of the access point that reported the worst air quality for the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band. Radio SlotThe slot number where the radio is installed. ChannelThe radio channel where the air quality is monitored. Minimum AQThe minimum air quality for this radio channel. Average AQThe average air quality for this radio channel. InterfererThe number of interferers detected by the radios on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band. DFSDynamic Frequency Selection. This indicates if DFS is enabled or not. Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands (CLI) This section describes the commands that you can use to monitor the air quality of the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band. Viewing a Summary of the Air Quality See a summary of the air quality for the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair air-quality summary Viewing Air Quality for all Access Points on a Radio Band See information for the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n access point with the air quality by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair air-quality Viewing Air Quality for an Access Point on a Radio Band See air quality information for a specific access point on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair air-quality Cisco_AP OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 881 Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands Monitoring the Worst Air Quality of Radio Bands (GUI) Step 1 Choose Monitor > Cisco CleanAir >Worst Air-Quality to open the CleanAir > Worst Air Quality Report page. This page shows the air quality of both the 802.11a/n and 802.11b/g/n radio bands. Specifically, it shows the following information:

AP NameThe name of the access point that reported the worst air quality for the 802.11 radio band. Channel NumberThe radio channel with the worst reported air quality. Minimum Air Quality Index(1 to 100)The minimum air quality for this radio channel. An air quality index

(AQI) value of 100 is the best, and 1 is the worst. Average Air Quality Index(1 to 100)The average air quality for this radio channel. An air quality index (AQI) value of 100 is the best, and 1 is the worst. Interference Device CountThe number of interferers detected by the radios on the 802.11 radio band. Step 2 See a list of persistent sources of interference for a specific access point radio as follows:

a) Choose Wireless > Access Points > Radios > 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n to open the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page. b) Hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired access point radio and click CleanAir-RRM. The 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Cisco APs > Access Point Name > Persistent Devices page appears. This page lists the device types of persistent sources of interference detected by this access point radio. It also shows the channel on which the interference was detected, the percentage of time that the interferer was active (duty cycle), the received signal strength (RSSI) of the interferer, and the day and time when the interferer was last detected. Monitoring the Worst Air Quality of Radio Bands (CLI) This section describes the commands that you can use to monitor the air quality of the 802.11 radio band. Viewing a Summary of the Air Quality (CLI) See a summary of the air quality for the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair air-quality summary Viewing the Worst Air Quality Information for all Access Points on a Radio Band (CLI) See information for the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n access point with the worst air quality by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair air-quality worst Viewing the Air Quality for an Access Point on a Radio Band (CLI) See the air quality information for a specific access point on the 802.11 radio band by entering this command:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 882 OL-28744-01 Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair air-quality Cisco_AP Viewing the Air Quality for an Access Point by Device Type (CLI) See information for all of the interferers detected by a specific access point on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair device ap Cisco_AP See information for all of the interferers of a specific device type on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show {802.11a | 802.11b} cleanair device type type where you choose type as one of the following:

802.11-fhAn 802.11 frequency-hopping device (802.11b/g/n only) 802.11-invA device using spectrally inverted Wi-Fi signals 802.11-nonstdA device using nonstandard Wi-Fi channels 802.15.4An 802.15.4 device (802.11b/g/n only) allAll interference device types (this is the default value) bt-discoveryA bluetooth discovery (802.11b/g/n only) bt-linkA bluetooth link (802.11b/g/n only) canopyA canopy bridge device cont-txA continuous transmitter dect-likeA digital enhanced cordless communication (DECT)-compatible phone jammerA jamming device mw-ovenA microwave oven (802.11b/g/n only) superagAn 802.11 SuperAG device tdd-txA time division duplex (TDD) transmitter video cameraAn analog video camera wimax-fixedA WiMAX fixed device wimax-mobileA WiMAX mobile device xboxA Microsoft Xbox (802.11b/g/n only) Detecting Persistent Sources of Interference (CLI) See a list of persistent sources of interference for a specific access point on the 802.11a/n or 802.11b/g/n radio band by entering this command:

show ap auto-rf {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 883 Monitoring the Air Quality of Radio Bands Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 884 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 136 Configuring a Spectrum Expert Connection Information About Spectrum Expert Connection, page 885 Configuring Spectrum Expert (GUI), page 885 Information About Spectrum Expert Connection To obtain detailed spectrum data that can be used to generate RF analysis plots similar to those provided by a spectrum analyzer, you can configure a Cisco CleanAir-enabled access point to connect directly to a Microsoft Windows XP or Vista PC running the Spectrum Expert application (referred to as a Spectrum Expert console). You can initiate the Spectrum Expert connection semi-automatically from Prime Infrastructure or by manually launching it from the Cisco WLC. This section provides instructions for the latter. Configuring Spectrum Expert (GUI) Before You Begin Prior to establishing a connection between the Spectrum Expert console and the access point, make sure that IP address routing is properly configured and the network spectrum interface (NSI) ports are open in any intervening firewalls. Step 1 Step 2 Ensure that Cisco CleanAir functionality is enabled for the access point that will be connected to the Spectrum Expert console. Configure the access point for SE-Connect mode using the Cisco WLC GUI or CLI. Note The SE-Connect mode is set for the entire access point, not just a single radio. However, the Spectrum Expert console connects to a single radio at a time. If you are using the Cisco WLC GUI, follow these steps:

a) Choose Wireless > Access Points > All APs to open the All APs page. b) Click the name of the desired access point to open the All APs > Details for page. c) Choose SE-Connect from the AP Mode drop-down list. This mode is available only for access points that are capable of supporting Cisco CleanAir functionality. For the SE-Connect mode to appear as an available option, the access point must have at least one spectrum-capable radio in the Enable state. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 885 Configuring Spectrum Expert (GUI) d) Click Apply to commit your changes. e) Click OK when prompted to reboot the access point. If you are using the CLI, follow these steps:

a) To configure the access point for SE-Connect mode, enter this command:

config ap mode se-connect Cisco_AP b) When prompted to reboot the access point, enter Y. c) To verify the SE-Connect configuration status for the access point, enter this command:

show ap config {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP Information similar to the following appears:

Cisco AP Identifier.............................. 0 Cisco AP Name.................................... CISCO_AP3500

... Spectrum Management Information Spectrum Management Capable.............. Yes Spectrum Management Admin State.......... Enabled Spectrum Management Operation State...... Up Rapid Update Mode........................ Disabled Spectrum Expert connection............... Enabled Spectrum Sensor State.................. Configured (Error code = 0) Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 On the Windows PC, access the Cisco Software Center from this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/cisco/software/navigator.html Note Click Product > Wireless > Cisco Spectrum Intelligence > Cisco Spectrum Expert > Cisco Spectrum Expert Wi-Fi, and then download the Spectrum Expert 4.0 executable (*.exe) file. Run the Spectrum Expert application on the PC. When the Connect to Sensor dialog box appears, enter the IP address of the access point, choose the access point radio, and enter the 16-byte network spectrum interface (NSI) key to authenticate. The Spectrum Expert application opens a TCP/IP connection directly to the access point using the NSI protocol. Note The access point must be a TCP server listening on ports 37540 for 2.4 GHz and 37550 for 5 GHz frequencies. These ports must be opened for the spectrum expert application to connect to the access point using the NSI protocol. On the Cisco WLC GUI, the NSI key appears in the Network Spectrum Interface Key field (below the Port Number field) on the All APs > Details for page. To view the NSI key from the Cisco WLC CLI, enter the show ap config {802.11a | 802.11b} Cisco_AP command. When an access point in SE-Connect mode joins a Cisco WLC, it sends a Spectrum Capabilities notification message, and the Cisco WLC responds with a Spectrum Configuration Request. The request contains the 16-byte random NSI key generated by the Cisco WLC for use in NSI authentication. The Cisco WLC generates one key per access point, which the access point stores until it is rebooted. Note You can establish up to three Spectrum Expert console connections per access point radio. The Number of Spectrum Expert Connections text box on the 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Cisco APs > Configure page of the Cisco WLC GUI shows the number of Spectrum Expert applications that are currently connected to the access point radio. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 886 OL-28744-01 Configuring Spectrum Expert (GUI) Step 7 Step 8 Verify that the Spectrum Expert console is connected to the access point by selecting the Slave Remote Sensor text box in the bottom right corner of the Spectrum Expert application. If the two devices are connected, the IP address of the access point appears in this text box. Use the Spectrum Expert application to view and analyze spectrum data from the access point. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 887 Configuring Spectrum Expert (GUI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 888 OL-28744-01 P A R T IX Configuring FlexConnect Configuring FlexConnect, page 891 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs, page 909 Configuring FlexConnect Groups, page 915 Configuring AAA Overrides for FlexConnect, page 923 Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades for FlexConnect APs, page 927 C H A P T E R 137 Configuring FlexConnect Information About FlexConnect, page 891 Restrictions for FlexConnect, page 896 Configuring FlexConnect, page 897 Information About FlexConnect FlexConnect (previously known as Hybrid Remote Edge Access Point or H-REAP) is a wireless solution for branch office and remote office deployments. It enables customers to configure and control access points in a branch or remote office from the corporate office through a wide area network (WAN) link without deploying a controller in each office. The FlexConnect access points can switch client data traffic locally and perform client authentication locally when their connection to the controller is lost. When they are connected to the controller, they can also send traffic back to the controller. In the connected mode, the FlexConnect access point can also perform local authentication. This figure shows a typical FlexConnect deployment. Figure 67: FlexConnect Deployment OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 891 Information About FlexConnect The controller software has a more robust fault tolerance methodology to FlexConnect access points. In previous releases, whenever a FlexConnect access point disassociates from a controller, it moves to the standalone mode. The clients that are centrally switched are disassociated. However, the FlexConnect access point continues to serve locally switched clients. When the FlexConnect access point rejoins the controller

(or a standby controller), all clients are disconnected and are authenticated again. This functionality has been enhanced and the connection between the clients and the FlexConnect access points are maintained intact and the clients experience seamless connectivity. This feature can be used only when both the access point and the controller have the same configuration. Clients that are centrally authenticated are reauthenticated. Session timeout and reauthentication is performed when the access point establishes a connected to the controller. After the client connection has been established, the controller does not restore the original attributes of the client. The client username, current rate and supported rates, and listen interval values are reset to the default values only after the session timer expires. There is no deployment restriction on the number of FlexConnect access points per location. Multiple FlexConnect groups can be defined in a single location. The controller can send multicast packets in the form of unicast or multicast packets to the access point. In FlexConnect mode, the access point can receive multicast packets only in unicast form. FlexConnect access points support a 1-1 network address translation (NAT) configuration. They also support port address translation (PAT) for all features except true multicast. Multicast is supported across NAT boundaries when configured using the Unicast option. FlexConnect access points also support a many-to-one NAT/PAT boundary, except when you want true multicast to operate for all centrally switched WLANs. Note Although NAT and PAT are supported for FlexConnect access points, they are not supported on the corresponding controller. Cisco does not support configurations in which the controller is behind a NAT/PAT boundary. VPN and PPTP are supported for locally switched traffic if these security types are accessible locally at the access point. FlexConnect access points support multiple SSIDs. Workgroup bridges and Universal Workgroup bridges are supported on FlexConnect access points for locally switched clients. FlexConnect supports IPv6 clients by bridging the traffic to local VLAN, similar to IPv4 operation. FlexConnect supports Client Mobility for a group of up to 100 access points. FlexConnect Authentication Process When an access point boots up, it looks for a controller. If it finds one, it joins the controller, downloads the latest software image and configuration from the controller, and initializes the radio. It saves the downloaded configuration in nonvolatile memory for use in standalone mode. Note Once the access point is rebooted after downloading the latest controller software, it must be converted to the FlexConnect mode. This can done using the GUI or CLI. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 892 OL-28744-01 Information About FlexConnect A FlexConnect access point can learn the controller IP address in one of these ways:

If the access point has been assigned an IP address from a DHCP server, it can discover a controller through the regular CAPWAP or LWAPP discovery process. Note OTAP is no longer supported on the controllers with 6.0.196 code and above. If the access point has been assigned a static IP address, it can discover a controller through any of the discovery process methods except DHCP option 43. If the access point cannot discover a controller through Layer 3 broadcast, we recommend DNS resolution. With DNS, any access point with a static IP address that knows of a DNS server can find at least one controller. If you want the access point to discover a controller from a remote network where CAPWAP or LWAPP discovery mechanisms are not available, you can use priming. This method enables you to specify

(through the access point CLI) the controller to which the access point is to connect. Note For more information about how access points find controllers, see the controller deployment guide at: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/wireless/technology/controller/

deployment/guide/dep.html. When a FlexConnect access point can reach the controller (referred to as the connected mode), the controller assists in client authentication. When a FlexConnect access point cannot access the controller, the access point enters the standalone mode and authenticates clients by itself. Note The LEDs on the access point change as the device enters different FlexConnect modes. See the hardware installation guide for your access point for information on LED patterns. When a client associates to a FlexConnect access point, the access point sends all authentication messages to the controller and either switches the client data packets locally (locally switched) or sends them to the controller (centrally switched), depending on the WLAN configuration. With respect to client authentication

(open, shared, EAP, web authentication, and NAC) and data packets, the WLAN can be in any one of the following states depending on the configuration and state of controller connectivity:

central authentication, central switchingIn this state, the controller handles client authentication, and all client data is tunneled back to the controller. This state is valid only in connected mode. central authentication, local switchingIn this state, the controller handles client authentication, and the FlexConnect access point switches data packets locally. After the client authenticates successfully, the controller sends a configuration command with a new payload to instruct the FlexConnect access point to start switching data packets locally. This message is sent per client. This state is applicable only in connected mode. local authentication, local switchingIn this state, the FlexConnect access point handles client authentication and switches client data packets locally. This state is valid in standalone mode and connected mode. In connected mode, the access point provides minimal information about the locally authenticated client to the controller. The following information is not available to the controller:

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 893 Information About FlexConnect Policy type Access VLAN VLAN name Supported rates Encryption cipher Local authentication is useful where you cannot maintain a remote office setup of a minimum bandwidth of 128 kbps with the round-trip latency no greater than 100 ms and the maximum transmission unit (MTU) no smaller than 500 bytes. In local authentication, the authentication capabilities are present in the access point itself. Local authentication reduces the latency requirements of the branch office. Note Local authentication can only be enabled on the WLAN of a FlexConnect access point that is in local switching mode. Notes about local authentication are as follows:

Guest authentication cannot be done on a FlexConnect local authentication-enabled WLAN. Local RADIUS on the controller is not supported. Once the client has been authenticated, roaming is only supported after the controller and the other FlexConnect access points in the group are updated with the client information. Local authentication in connected mode requires a WLAN configuration. Note When locally switched clients that are connected to a FlexConnect access point renew the IP addresses, on joining back, the client continues to stay in the run state. These clients are not reauthenticated by the controller. authentication down, switch downIn this state, the WLAN disassociates existing clients and stops sending beacon and probe requests. This state is valid in both standalone mode and connected mode. authentication down, local switchingIn this state, the WLAN rejects any new clients trying to authenticate, but it continues sending beacon and probe responses to keep existing clients alive. This state is valid only in standalone mode. When a FlexConnect access point enters standalone mode, WLANs that are configured for open, shared, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK authentication enter the local authentication, local switching state and continue new client authentications. In controller software release 4.2 or later releases, this configuration is also correct for WLANs that are configured for 802.1X, WPA-802.1X, WPA2-802.1X, or CCKM, but these authentication types require that an external RADIUS server be configured. You can also configure a local RADIUS server on a FlexConnect access point to support 802.1X in a standalone mode or with local authentication. Other WLANs enter either the authentication down, switching down state (if the WLAN was configured for central switching) or the authentication down, local switching state (if the WLAN was configured for local switching). Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 894 OL-28744-01 Information About FlexConnect When FlexConnect access points are connected to the controller (rather than in standalone mode), the controller uses its primary RADIUS servers and accesses them in the order specified on the RADIUS Authentication Servers page or in the config radius auth add CLI command (unless the server order is overridden for a particular WLAN). However, to support 802.1X EAP authentication, FlexConnect access points in standalone mode need to have their own backup RADIUS server to authenticate clients. Note A controller does not use a backup RADIUS server. The controller uses the backup RADIUS server in local authentication mode. You can configure a backup RADIUS server for individual FlexConnect access points in standalone mode by using the controller CLI or for groups of FlexConnect access points in standalone mode by using either the GUI or CLI. A backup server configured for an individual access point overrides the backup RADIUS server configuration for a FlexConnect. When a FlexConnect access point enters standalone mode, it disassociates all clients that are on centrally switched WLANs. For web-authentication WLANs, existing clients are not disassociated, but the FlexConnect access point stops sending beacons when the number of associated clients reaches zero (0). It also sends disassociation messages to new clients associating to web-authentication WLANs. Controller-dependent activities, such as network access control (NAC) and web authentication (guest access), are disabled, and the access point does not send any intrusion detection system (IDS) reports to the controller. Most radio resource management (RRM) features (such as neighbor discovery; noise, interference, load, and coverage measurements;

use of the neighbor list; and rogue containment and detection) are disabled. However, a FlexConnect access point supports dynamic frequency selection in standalone mode. When web-authentication is used on FlexConnect access points at a remote site, the clients get the IP address from the remote local subnet. To resolve the initial URL request, the DNS is accessible through the subnet's default gateway. In order for the controller to intercept and redirect the DNS query return packets, these packets must reach the controller at the data center through a CAPWAP connection. During the web-authentication process, the FlexConnect access points allows only DNS and DHCP messages; the access points forward the DNS reply messages to the controller before web-authentication for the client is complete. After web-authentication for the client is complete, all the traffic is switched locally. Note If your controller is configured for NAC, clients can associate only when the access point is in connected mode. When NAC is enabled, you need to create an unhealthy (or quarantined) VLAN so that the data traffic of any client that is assigned to this VLAN passes through the controller, even if the WLAN is configured for local switching. After a client is assigned to a quarantined VLAN, all of its data packets are centrally switched. See the Configuring Dynamic Interfaces section for information about creating quarantined VLANs and the Configuring NAC Out-of-Band section for information about configuring NAC out-of-band support. When a FlexConnect access point enters into a standalone mode, the following occurs:

The access point checks whether it is able to reach the default gateway via ARP. If so, it will continue to try and reach the controller. If the access point fails to establish the ARP, the following occurs:

The access point attempts to discover for five times and if it still cannot find the controller, it tries to renew the DHCP on the ethernet interface to get a new DHCP IP. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 895 Restrictions for FlexConnect The access point will retry for five times, and if that fails, the access point will renew the IP address of the interface again, this will happen for three attempts. If the three attempts fail, the access point will fall back to the static IP and will reboot (only if the access point is configured with a static IP). Reboot is done to remove the possibility of any unknown error the access point configuration. Once the access point reestablishes a connection with the controller, it disassociates all clients, applies new configuration information from the controller, and allows client connectivity again. Restrictions for FlexConnect When you apply a configuration change to a locally switched WLAN, the access point resets the radio, causing associated client devices to disassociate (including the clients that are not associated to the modified WLAN). However, this behavior does not occur if the modified WLAN is centrally switched. We recommend that you perform a configuration change only during a maintenance window. You can deploy a FlexConnect access point with either a static IP address or a DHCP address. In the case of DHCP, a DHCP server must be available locally and must be able to provide the IP address for the access point at bootup. FlexConnect supports up to four fragmented packets or a minimum 500-byte maximum transmission unit (MTU) WAN link. FlexConnect is supported only on the following access points: 1040, 1130, 1140, 1250, 1240, 1260, 1600, 1550, 2600, 3500, 3600, OEAP 600, ISR 891, and ISR 881. Round-trip latency must not exceed 300 milliseconds (ms) between the access point and the controller, and CAPWAP control packets must be prioritized over all other traffic. In cases where you cannot achieve the 300 milliseconds round-trip latency, you can configure the access point to perform local authentication. Client connections are restored only for locally switched clients that are in the RUN state when the access point moves from standalone mode to connected mode. After the access point moves from the standalone mode to the connected mode, the access points radio is also reset. The configuration on the controller must be the same between the time the access point went into standalone mode and the time the access point came back to connected mode. Similarly, if the access point is falling back to a secondary or backup controller, the configuration between the primary and secondary or backup controller must be the same. A newly connected access point cannot be booted in FlexConnect mode. To use CCKM fast roaming with FlexConnect access points, you must configure FlexConnect Groups. NAC out-of-band integration is supported only on WLANs configured for FlexConnect central switching. It is not supported for use on WLANs configured for FlexConnect local switching. The primary and secondary controllers for a FlexConnect access point must have the same configuration. Otherwise, the access point might lose its configuration, and certain features (such as WLAN overrides, VLANs, static channel number, and so on) might not operate correctly. In addition, make sure to duplicate the SSID of the FlexConnect access point and its index number on both controllers. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 896 OL-28744-01 Configuring FlexConnect The QoS profile per-user bandwidth contracts are not supported for FlexConnect locally switched WLANs. The QoS per-user bandwidth contracts are only supported for centrally switched WLANs and APs in the local mode. Do not connect access points in FlexConnect mode directly to a 2500 Series Controller. If you configure a FlexConnect access point with a syslog server configured on the access point, after the access point is reloaded and the native VLAN other than 1, at time of initialization, few syslog packets from the access point are tagged with VLAN ID 1. This is a known issue. MAC Filtering is not supported on FlexConnect access points in standalone mode. However, MAC Filtering is supported on FlexConnect access points in connected mode with local switching and central authentication. Also, Open SSID, MAC Filtering, and RADIUS NAC for a locally switched WLAN with FlexConnect access points is a valid configuration where MAC is checked by ISE. FlexConnect does not support IPv6 ACLs, neighbor discovery caching, and DHCPv6 snooping of IPv6 NDP packets. FlexConnect does not display any IPv6 client addresses within the client detail page. FlexConnect Access Points with Locally Switched WLAN cannot perform IP Source Guard and prevent ARP spoofing. For Centrally Switched WLAN, the wireless controller performs the IP Source Guard and ARP Spoofing. To prevent ARP spoofing attacks in FlexConnect AP with Local Switching, we recommend that you use ARP Inspection. When you enable local switching on WLAN for the Flexconnect APs, then APs perform local switching. However, for the APs in local mode, central switching is performed. For Wi-Fi Protected Access version 2 (WPA2) in FlexConnect standalone mode or local-auth in connected mode or CCKM fast-roaming in connected mode, only Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is supported. For Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) in FlexConnect standalone mode or local-auth in connected mode or CCKM fast-roaming in connected mode, only Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) is supported. WPA2 with TKIP and WPA with AES is not supported in standalone mode, local-auth in connected mode, and CCKM fast-roaming in connected mode. AVC is not supported on APs in FlexConnect local switched mode. Configuring FlexConnect Note The configuration tasks must be performed in the order in which they are listed. Configuring the Switch at a Remote Site Step 1 Attach the access point that will be enabled for FlexConnect to a trunk or access port on the switch. Note The sample configuration in this procedure shows the FlexConnect access point connected to a trunk port on the switch. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 897 Configuring FlexConnect Step 2 See the sample configuration in this procedure to configure the switch to support the FlexConnect access point. In this sample configuration, the FlexConnect access point is connected to trunk interface FastEthernet 1/0/2 with native VLAN 100. The access point needs IP connectivity on the native VLAN. The remote site has local servers/resources on VLAN 101. A DHCP pool is created in the local switch for both VLANs in the switch. The first DHCP pool (NATIVE) is used by the FlexConnect access point, and the second DHCP pool (LOCAL-SWITCH) is used by the clients when they associate to a WLAN that is locally switched. The bolded text in the sample configuration shows these settings. A sample local switch configuration is as follows:

ip dhcp pool NATIVE network 209.165.200.224 255.255.255.224 default-router 209.165.200.225 dns-server 192.168.100.167

!

ip dhcp pool LOCAL-SWITCH network 209.165.201.224 255.255.255.224 default-router 209.165.201.225 dns-server 192.168.100.167

!

interface FastEthernet1/0/1 description Uplink port no switchport ip address 209.165.202.225 255.255.255.224

!

interface FastEthernet1/0/2 description the Access Point port switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q switchport trunk native vlan 100 switchport trunk allowed vlan 101 switchport mode trunk

!

interface Vlan100 ip address 209.165.200.225 255.255.255.224

!

interface Vlan101 ip address 209.165.201.225 255.255.255.224 end

!

Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect You can configure the controller for FlexConnect in two environments:

Centrally switched WLAN Locally switched WLAN The controller configuration for FlexConnect consists of creating centrally switched and locally switched WLANs. This table shows three WLAN scenarios. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 898 OL-28744-01 Table 26: WLANs Example WLAN employee Security WPA1+WPA2 Authentication Central Switching Central employee-local WPA1+WPA2

(PSK) Local Local guest-central Web authentication Central Central employee

-local-auth WPA1+WPA2 Local Local Configuring FlexConnect Interface Mapping (VLAN) management (centrally switched VLAN) 101 (locally switched VLAN) management (centrally switched VLAN) 101 (locally switched VLAN) Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect for a Centrally Switched WLAN Used for Guest Access Before You Begin You must have created guest user accounts. For more information about creating guest user accounts, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller System Management Guide. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. From the drop-down list, choose Create New and click Go to open the WLANs > New page . From the Type drop-down list, choose WLAN. In the Profile Name text box, enter guest-central. In the WLAN SSID text box, enter guest-central. From the WLAN ID drop-down list, choose an ID for the WLAN. Click Apply. The WLANs > Edit page appears. In the General tab, select the Status check box to enable the WLAN. In the Security > Layer 2 tab, choose None from the Layer 2 Security drop-down list. In the Security > Layer 3 tab:

a) Choose None from the Layer 3 Security drop-down list. b) Choose the Web Policy check box. c) Choose Authentication. Note If you are using an external web server, you must configure a preauthentication access control list (ACL) on the WLAN for the server and then choose this ACL as the WLAN preauthentication ACL on the Layer 3 tab. Step 11 Step 12 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 899 Configuring FlexConnect Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. From the drop-down list, choose Create New and click Go to open the WLANs > New page. From the Type drop-down list, choose WLAN. In the Profile Name text box, enter a unique profile name for the WLAN. In the WLAN SSID text box, enter a name for the WLAN. From the WLAN ID drop-down list, choose the ID number for this WLAN. Click Apply to commit your changes. The WLANs > Edit page appears. You can configure the controller for FlexConnect in both centrally switched and locally switched WLANs:

To configure the controller for FlexConnect in a centrally switched WLAN:

a) In the General tab, select the Status check box to enable the WLAN. b) If you have enabled NAC and have created a quarantined VLAN and want to use it for this WLAN, select the interface from the Interface/Interface Group(G) drop-down list in the General tab. c) In the Security > Layer 2 tab, choose WPA+WPA2 from the Layer 2 Security drop-down list and then set the WPA+WPA2 parameters as required. To configure the controller for FlexConnect in a locally switched WLAN:

a) In the General tab, select the Status check box to enable the WLAN. b) If you have enabled NAC and have created a quarantined VLAN and want to use it for this WLAN, select the interface from the Interface/Interface Group(G) drop-down list in the General tab. c) In the Security > Layer 2 tab, select WPA+WPA2 from the Layer 2 Security drop-down list and then set the WPA+WPA2 parameters as required. d) In the Advanced tab:

Select or unselect the FlexConnect Local Switching check box to enable or disable local switching of client data associated with the APs in FlexConnect mode. Note The guidelines and limitations for this feature are as follows:

When you enable local switching, any FlexConnect access point that advertises this WLAN is able to locally switch data packets (instead of tunneling them to the controller). When you enable FlexConnect local switching, the controller is enabled to learn the clients IP address by default. However, if the client is configured with Fortress Layer 2 encryption, the controller cannot learn the clients IP address, and the controller periodically drops the client. Disable the client IP address learning feature so that the controller maintains the client connection without waiting to learn the clients IP address. The ability to disable this option is supported only with FlexConnect local switching; it is not supported with FlexConnect central switching. For FlexConnect access points, the interface mapping at the controller for WLANs that is configured for FlexConnect Local Switching is inherited at the access point as the default VLAN tagging. This mapping can be changed per SSID and per FlexConnect access point. Non-FlexConnect access points tunnel all traffic back to the controller, and VLAN tagging is determined by each WLANs interface mapping. Select or unselect the FlexConnect Local Auth check box to enable or disable local authentication for the WLAN. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 900 OL-28744-01 Configuring FlexConnect Select or unselect the Learn Client IP Address check box to enable or disable the IP address of the client to be learned. Select or unselect the VLAN based Central Switching check box to enable or disable central switching on a locally switched WLAN based on AAA overridden VLAN. Note These are the guidelines and limitations for this feature:

Multicast on overridden interfaces is not supported. This feature is available only on a per-WLAN basis, where the WLAN is locally switched. IPv6 ACLs, CAC, NAC, and IPv6 are not supported. IPv4 ACLs are supported only with VLAN-based central switching enabled and applicable only to central switching clients on the WLAN. This feature is applicable to APs in FlexConnect mode in locally switched WLANs. This feature is not applicable to APs in Local mode. This feature is not supported on APs in FlexConnect mode in centrally switched WLANs. This feature is supported on central authentication only. This features is not supported on web authentication security clients. Layer 3 roaming for local switching clients is not supported. Select or unselect the Central DHCP Processing check box to enable or disable the feature. When you enable this feature, the DHCP packets received from AP are centrally switched to the controller and then forwarded to the corresponding VLAN based on the AP and the SSID. Select or unselect the Override DNS check box to enable or disable the overriding of the DNS server address on the interface assigned to the locally switched WLAN. When you override DNS in centrally switched WLANs, the clients get their DNS server IP address from the AP, not from the controller. Select or unselect the NAT-PAT check box to enable or disable Network Address Translation (NAT) and Port Address Translation (PAT) on locally switched WLANs. You must enable Central DHCP Processing to enable NAT and PAT. Step 9 Step 10 Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect (CLI) config wlan flexconnect local-switching wlan_id enableConfigures the WLAN for local switching. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 901 Configuring FlexConnect Note When you enable FlexConnect local switching, the controller waits to learn the client IP address by default. However, if the client is configured with Fortress Layer 2 encryption, the controller cannot learn the client IP address, and the controller periodically drops the client. Use the config wlan flexconnect learn-ipaddr wlan_id disable command to disable the client IP address learning feature so that the controller maintains the client connection without waiting to learn the clients IP address. The ability to disable this feature is supported only with FlexConnect local switching; it is not supported with FlexConnect central switching. To enable this feature, enter the config wlan flexconnect learn-ipaddr wlan_id enable command. Note When a WLAN is locally switched (LS), you must use the config wlan flexconnect learn-ipaddr wlan-id {enable | disable} command. When the WLAN is centrally switched (CS), you must use the config wlan learn-ipaddr-cswlan wlan-id {enable |

disable} command. config wlan flexconnect local-switching wlan_id {enable | disable}Configures the WLAN for central switching. config wlan flexconnect vlan-central-switching wlan_id {enable | disable}Configures central switching on a locally switched WLAN based on an AAA overridden VLAN. The guidelines and limitations for this feature are as follows:

Multicast on overridden interfaces is not supported. This feature is available only on a per-WLAN basis, where the WLAN is locally switched. IPv6 ACLs, CAC, NAC, and IPv6 are not supported. IPv4 ACLs are supported only with VLAN-based central switching enabled and applicable only to central switching clients on the WLAN. This feature is applicable to APs in FlexConnect mode in locally switched WLANs. This feature is not applicable to APs in Local mode. This feature is not supported on APs in FlexConnect mode in centrally switched WLANs. This feature is supported on central authentication only. This features is not supported on web authentication security clients. Layer 3 roaming for local switching clients is not supported. Use these commands to get FlexConnect information:

show ap config general Cisco_APShows VLAN configurations. show wlan wlan_idShows whether the WLAN is locally or centrally switched. show client detail client_macShows whether the client is locally or centrally switched. Use these commands to obtain debug information:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 902 OL-28744-01 Configuring FlexConnect debug flexconnect aaa {event | error} {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of FlexConnect backup RADIUS server events or errors. debug flexconnect cckm {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of FlexConnect CCKM. debug flexconnect {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of FlexConnect Groups. debug pem state {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of the policy manager state machine. debug pem events {enable | disable}Enables or disables debugging of policy manager events. Configuring an Access Point for FlexConnect Configuring an Access Point for FlexConnect (GUI) Ensure that the access point has been physically added to your network. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Wireless to open the All APs page. Click the name of the desired access point. The All APs > > Details page appears. From the AP Mode drop-down list, choose FlexConnect to enable FlexConnect for this access point. Note The last parameter in the Inventory tab indicates whether the access point can be configured for FlexConnect. Click Apply to commit your changes and to cause the access point to reboot. Choose the FlexConnect tab to open the All APs > Details for (FlexConnect) page. If the access point belongs to a FlexConnect group, the name of the group appears in the FlexConnect Name text box. Select the VLAN Support check box and enter the number of the native VLAN on the remote network (such as 100) in the Native VLAN ID text box. Note By default, a VLAN is not enabled on the FlexConnect access point. After FlexConnect is enabled, the access point inherits the VLAN ID associated to the WLAN. This configuration is saved in the access point and received after the successful join response. By default, the native VLAN is 1. One native VLAN must be configured per FlexConnect access point in a VLAN-enabled domain. Otherwise, the access point cannot send and receive packets to and from the controller. To preserve the VLAN mappings in the access point after an upgrade or downgrade, it is necessary that the access point join is restricted to the controller for which it is primed. That is, no other discoverable controller with a different configuration should be available by other means. Similarly, at the time the access point joins, if it moves across controllers that have different VLAN mappings, the VLAN mappings at the access point may get mismatched. Note Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Click Apply. The access point temporarily loses its connection to the controller while its Ethernet port is reset. Click the name of the same access point and then click the FlexConnect tab. Click VLAN Mappings to open the All APs > Access Point Name > VLAN Mappings page. Enter the number of the VLAN from which the clients will get an IP address when doing local switching (VLAN 101, in this example) in the VLAN ID text box. To configure Web Authentication ACLs, do the following:

a) Click the External WebAuthentication ACLs link to open the ACL mappings page. The ACL Mappings page lists details of WLAN ACL mappings and web policy ACLs. b) In the WLAN Id box, enter the WLAN ID. c) From the WebAuth ACL drop-down list, choose the FlexConnect ACL. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 903 Configuring FlexConnect Note To create a FlexConnect ACL, choose Wireless > FlexConnect Groups > FlexConnect ACLs, click New, enter the FlexConnect ACL name, and click Apply. d) Click Add. e) Click Apply. To configure Local Split ACLs:

a) Click the Local Split ACLs link to open the ACL Mappings page. b) In the WLAN Id box, enter the WLAN ID. c) From the Local-Split ACL drop-down list, choose the FlexConnect ACL. Note To create a FlexConnect ACL, choose Wireless > FlexConnect Groups > FlexConnect ACLs, click New, enter the FlexConnect ACL name, and click Apply. If a client that connects over a WAN link associated with a centrally switched WLAN has to send some traffic to a device present in the local site, the client has to send traffic over CAPWAP to the controller and then get the same traffic back to the local site either over CAPWAP or using some offband connectivity. This process unnecessarily consumes WAN link bandwidth. To avoid this issue, you can use the split tunneling feature, which allows the traffic sent by a client to be classified based on the packet contents. The matching packets are locally switched and the rest of the traffic is centrally switched. The traffic that is sent by the client that matches the IP address of the device present in the local site can be classified as locally switched traffic and the rest of the traffic as centrally switched. To configure local split tunneling on an AP, ensure that you have enabled DCHP Required on the WLAN, which ensures that the client associating with the split WLAN does DHCP. Note Local split tunneling is not supported on Cisco 1500 Series, Cisco 1130, and Cisco 1240 access points, and does not work for clients with static IP address. d) Click Add. To configure Central DHCP processing:

a) In the WLAN Id box, enter the WLAN ID with which you want to map Central DHCP. b) Select or unselect the Central DHCP check box to enable or disable Central DHCP for the mapping. c) Select or unselect the Override DNS check box to enable or disable overriding of DNS for the mapping. d) Select or unselect the NAT-PAT check box to enable or disable network address translation and port address translation for the mapping. e) Click Add to add the Central DHCP - WLAN mapping. To map a locally switched WLAN with a WebAuth ACL, follow these steps:

a) In the WLAN Id box, enter the WLAN ID. b) From the WebAuth ACL drop-down list, choose the FlexConnect ACL. Note To create a FlexConnect ACL, choose Wireless > FlexConnect Groups > FlexConnect ACLs, click New, enter the FlexConnect ACL name, and click Apply. c) Click Add. Note The FlexConnect ACLs that are specific to an AP have the highest priority. The FlexConnect ACLs that are specific to WLANs have the lowest priority. From the WebPolicy ACL drop-down list, choose a FlexConnect ACL and then click Add to configure the FlexConnect ACL as a web policy. Note You can configure up to 16 Web Policy ACLs that are specific to an access point. Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Note Repeat this procedure for any additional access points that need to be configured for FlexConnect at the remote site. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 904 Configuring FlexConnect Configuring an Access Point for FlexConnect (CLI) config ap mode flexconnect Cisco_APEnables FlexConnect for this access point. config ap flexconnect radius auth set {primary | secondary} ip_address auth_port secret Cisco_APConfigures a primary or secondary RADIUS server for a specific FlexConnect access point. Note Only the Session Timeout RADIUS attribute is supported in standalone mode. All other attributes as well as RADIUS accounting are not supported. Note To delete a RADIUS server that is configured for a FlexConnect access point, enter the config ap flexconnect radius auth delete {primary | secondary} Cisco_AP command. config ap flexconnect vlan wlan wlan_id vlan-id Cisco_APEnables you to assign a VLAN ID to this FlexConnect access point. By default, the access point inherits the VLAN ID associated to the WLAN. config ap flexconnect vlan {enable | disable} Cisco_APEnables or disables VLAN tagging for this FlexConnect access point. By default, VLAN tagging is not enabled. After VLAN tagging is enabled on the FlexConnect access point, WLANs that are enabled for local switching inherit the VLAN assigned at the controller. config ap flexconnect vlan native vlan-id Cisco_APEnables you to configure a native VLAN for this FlexConnect access point. By default, no VLAN is set as the native VLAN. One native VLAN must be configured per FlexConnect access point (when VLAN tagging is enabled). Make sure the switch port to which the access point is connected has a corresponding native VLAN configured as well. If the FlexConnect access points native VLAN setting and the upstream switch port native VLAN do not match, the access point cannot transmit packets to and from the controller. Note To save the VLAN mappings in the access point after an upgrade or downgrade, you should restrict the access point to join the controller for which it is primed. No other discoverable controller with a different configuration should be available by other means. Similarly, at the time the access point joins, if it moves across controllers that have different VLAN mappings, the VLAN mappings at the access point might get mismatched. Configure the mapping of a Web-Auth or a Web Passthrough ACL to a WLAN for an access point in FlexConnect mode by entering this command:

config ap flexconnect web-auth wlan wlan_id cisco_ap acl_name {enable | disable}

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 905 Configuring FlexConnect Note The FlexConnect ACLs that are specific to an AP have the highest priority. The FlexConnect ACLs that are specific to WLANs have the lowest priority. Configure a Policy ACL on an AP in FlexConnect mode by entering this command:

config ap flexconnect acl {add | delete} acl_name cisco_ap Note You can configure up to 16 Policy ACLs that are specific to an access point. To configure local split tunneling on a per-AP basis, enter this command:

config ap local-split {enable | disable} wlan-id acl acl-name ap-name Configure central DHCP on the AP per WLAN by entering this command:

config ap flexconnect central-dhcp wlan-id ap-name {enable override dns | disable | delete}

Note The gratuitous ARP for the gateway is sent by the access point to the client, which obtained an IP address from the central site. This is performed to proxy the gateway by the access point. Use these commands on the FlexConnect access point to get status information:

show capwap reap statusShows the status of the FlexConnect access point (connected or standalone). show capwap reap associationShows the list of clients associated to this access point and their SSIDs. Use these commands on the FlexConnect access point to get debug information:

debug capwap reapShows general FlexConnect activities. debug capwap reap mgmtShows client authentication and association messages. debug capwap reap loadShows payload activities, which are useful when the FlexConnect access point boots up in standalone mode. debug dot11 mgmt interfaceShows 802.11 management interface events. debug dot11 mgmt msgShows 802.11 management messages. debug dot11 mgmt ssidShows SSID management events. debug dot11 mgmt state-machineShows the 802.11 state machine. debug dot11 mgmt stationShows client events. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 906 OL-28744-01 Configuring FlexConnect Configuring an Access Point for Local Authentication on a WLAN (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID of the WLAN. The WLANs > Edit page appears. Clicked the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (WLAN Name) page. Select the FlexConnect Local Switching check box to enable FlexConnect local switching. Select the FlexConnect Local Auth check box to enable FlexConnect local authentication. Caution Do not connect access points in FlexConnect mode directly to 2500 Series Controllers. Step 6 Click Apply to commit your changes. Configuring an Access Point for Local Authentication on a WLAN (CLI) Before You Begin Before you begin, you must have enabled local switching on the WLAN where you want to enable local authentication for an access point. For instructions on how to enable local switching on the WLAN, see the Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect (CLI) section. config wlan flexconnect ap-auth wlan_id {enable | disable}Configures the access point to enable or disable local authentication on a WLAN. Caution Do not connect the access points in FlexConnect mode directly to Cisco 2500 Series Controllers. show wlan wlan-id Displays the configuration for the WLAN. If local authentication is enabled, the following information appears:

. Web Based Authentication...................... Disabled Web-Passthrough............................... Disabled Conditional Web Redirect...................... Disabled Splash-Page Web Redirect...................... Disabled Auto Anchor................................... Disabled FlexConnect Local Switching........................ Enabled FlexConnect Local Authentication................... Enabled FlexConnect Learn IP Address....................... Enabled Client MFP.................................... Optional Tkip MIC Countermeasure Hold-down Timer....... 60 Call Snooping.................................... Disabled Roamed Call Re-Anchor Policy..................... Disabled

. Connecting Client Devices to WLANs Follow the instructions for your client device to create profiles to connect to the WLANs you created in the Configuring the Controller for FlexConnect. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 907 Configuring FlexConnect In the example scenarios (see Table 26: WLANs Example), there are three profiles on the client:

1 To connect to the employee WLAN, create a client profile that uses WPA/WPA2 with PEAP-MSCHAPV2 authentication. After the client becomes authenticated, the client gets an IP address from the management VLAN of the controller. 2 To connect to the local-employee WLAN, create a client profile that uses WPA/WPA2 authentication. After the client becomes authenticated, the client gets an IP address from VLAN 101 on the local switch. 3 To connect to the guest-central WLAN, create a client profile that uses open authentication. After the client becomes authenticated, the client gets an IP address from VLAN 101 on the network local to the access point. After the client connects, the local user can type any HTTP address in the web browser. The user is automatically directed to the controller to complete the web-authentication process. When the web login page appears, the user enters the username and password. To determine if a clients data traffic is being locally or centrally switched, choose Monitor > Clients on the controller GUI, click the Detail link for the desired client, and look at the Data Switching parameter under AP Properties. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 908 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 138 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs Information About Access Control Lists, page 909 Restrictions for FlexConnect ACLs, page 909 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (GUI), page 910 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (CLI), page 912 Viewing and Debugging FlexConnect ACLs (CLI), page 913 Information About Access Control Lists An access control list (ACL) is a set of rules used to limit access to a particular interface (for example, if you want to restrict a wireless client from pinging the management interface of the controller). ACLs enable access control of network traffic. After ACLs are configured on the controller, you can apply them to the management interface, the AP-Manager interface, any of the dynamic interfaces, or a WLAN. ACLs enable you to control data traffic to and from wireless clients or to the controller CPU.You can configure ACLs on FlexConnect access points to enable effective usage and access control of locally switched data traffic on an access point. The FlexConnect ACLs can be applied to VLAN interfaces on access points in both the Ingress and Egress mode. Existing interfaces on an access point can be mapped to ACLs. The interfaces can be created by configuring a WLAN-VLAN mapping on a FlexConnect access point. The FlexConnect ACLs can be applied to an access points VLAN only if VLAN support is enabled on the FlexConnect access point. Restrictions for FlexConnect ACLs FlexConnect ACLs can be applied only to FlexConnect access points. The configurations applied are per AP and per VLAN. You can configure up to 512 ACLs on a controller. Non-FlexConnect ACLs that are configured on the controller cannot be applied to a FlexConnect AP. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 909 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (GUI) FlexConnect ACLs do not support direction per rule. Unlike normal ACLs, Flexconnect ACLs cannot be configured with a direction. An ACL as a whole needs to be applied to an interface as ingress or egress. You can define up to 512 FlexConnect ACLs, each with up to 64 rules (or filters). Each rule has parameters that affect its action. When a packet matches all the parameters pertaining to a rule, the action set pertaining to that rule is applied to the packet. ACLs in your network might have to be modified because Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points (CAPWAP) use ports that are different from the ones used by the Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP). All ACLs have an implicit deny all rule as the last rule. If a packet does not match any of the rules, it is dropped by the corresponding access point. ACLs mapping on the VLANs that are created on an AP using WLAN-VLAN mapping, should be performed on a per-AP basis only. VLANs can be created on a FlexConnect group for AAA override. These VLANs will not have any mapping for a WLAN. ACLs for VLANs that are created on a FlexConnect group should be mapped only on the FlexCconnect group. If the same VLAN is present on the corresponding AP as well as the FlexConnect group, AP VLAN will take priority. This means that if no ACL is mapped on the AP, the VLAN will not have any ACL, even if the ACL is mapped to the VLAN on the FlexConnect group. Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose Security > Access Control Lists > FlexConnect Access Control Lists. The FlexConnect ACL page is displayed. This page lists all the FlexConnect ACLs configured on the controller. This page also shows the FlexConnect ACLs created on the corresponding controller. To remove an ACL, hover your mouse over the blue drop-down arrow adjacent to the corresponding ACL name and choose Remove. Add a new ACL by clicking New. The Access Control Lists > New page is displayed. In the Access Control List Name text box, enter a name for the new ACL. You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Click Apply. When the Access Control Lists page reappears, click the name of the new ACL. When the Access Control Lists > Edit page appears, click Add New Rule. The Access Control Lists > Rules > New page is displayed. Configure a rule for this ACL as follows:

a) The controller supports up to 64 rules for each ACL. These rules are listed in order from 1 to 64. In the Sequence text box, enter a value (between 1 and 64) to determine the order of this rule in relation to any other rules defined for this ACL. Note If rules 1 through 4 are already defined and you add rule 29, it is added as rule 5. If you add or change a sequence number of a rule, the sequence numbers of the other rules are automatically adjusted to maintain a continuous sequence. For instance, if you change a rules sequence number from 7 to 5, the rules with sequence numbers 5 and 6 are automatically reassigned as 6 and 7, respectively. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 910 OL-28744-01 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (GUI) b) From the Source drop-down list, choose one of these options to specify the source of the packets to which this ACL is applicable:

AnyAny source (This is the default value.) IP AddressA specific source. If you choose this option, enter the IP address and netmask of the source in the corresponding text boxes. c) From the Destination drop-down list, choose one of these options to specify the destination of the packets to which this ACL applies:

AnyAny destination (This is the default value.) IP AddressA specific destination. If you choose this option, enter the IP address and netmask of the destination in the text boxes. d) From the Protocol drop-down list, choose the protocol ID of the IP packets to be used for this ACL. The protocol options that you can use are the following:

AnyAny protocol (This is the default value.) TCP UDP ICMPInternet Control Message Protocol ESPIP Encapsulating Security Payload AHAuthentication Header GREGeneric Routing Encapsulation IP in IPPermits or denies IP-in-IP packets Eth Over IPEthernet-over-Internet Protocol OSPFOpen Shortest Path First OtherAny other Internet-Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) protocol Note If you choose Other, enter the number of the desired protocol in the Protocol text box. You can find the list of available protocols in the INAI website. The controller can permit or deny only the IP packets in an ACL. Other types of packets (such as Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packets) cannot be specified. If you chose TCP or UDP, two additional parameters, Source Port and Destination Port, are displayed. These parameters enable you to choose a specific source port and destination port or port range. The port options are used by applications that send and receive data to and from the networking stack. Some ports are designated for certain applications, such as Telnet, SSH, HTTP, and so on. e) From the DSCP drop-down list, choose one of these options to specify the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value of this ACL. DSCP is an IP header text box that can be used to define the quality of service across the Internet. AnyAny DSCP (This is the default value.) SpecificA specific DSCP from 0 to 63, which you enter in the DSCP text box OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 911 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (CLI) f) From the Action drop-down list, choose Deny to cause this ACL to block packets, or Permit to cause this ACL to allow packets. The default value is Deny. g) Click Apply. The Access Control Lists > Edit page is displayed on which the rules for this ACL are shown. h) Repeat this procedure to add additional rules, if any, for this ACL. Click Save Configuration. Step 7 Configuring FlexConnect ACLs (CLI) config flexconnect acl create nameCreates an ACL on a FlexConnect access point. The name must be an IPv4 ACL name of up to 32 characters. config flexconnect acl delete nameDeletes a FlexConnect ACL. config flexconnect acl rule action acl-name rule-index {permit |deny}Permits or denies an ACL. config flexconnect acl rule add acl-name rule-indexAdds an ACL rule. config flexconnect acl rule change index acl-name old-index new-indexChanges the index value for an ACL rule. config flexconnect acl rule delete nameDeletes an ACL rule. config flexconnect acl rule dscp acl-name rule-index {0-63 | any }Specifies the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value of the rule index. DSCP is an IP header that can be used to define the quality of service across the Internet. Enter a value between 0 and 63 or the value any. The default value is any. config flexconnect acl rule protocol acl-name rule-index {0-255 | any}Assigns the rule index to an ACL rule. Specify a value between 0 and 255 or any. The default is any. config flexconnect acl rule destination address acl-name rule-index ipv4-addr subnet-maskConfigures a rule's destination IP address, netmask and port range. config flexconnect acl rule destination port range acl-name rule-index start-port end-portConfigures a rules destination port range. config flexconnect acl rule source address acl-name rule-index ipv4-addr subnet-maskConfigures a rule's source IP address and netmask. config flexconnect acl apply acl-nameApplies an ACL to the FlexConnect access point. config flexconnectacl rule swap acl-name index-1 index-2Swaps the index values of two rules. config ap flexconnect vlan add acl vlan-id ingress-aclname egress-acl-name ap-nameAdds a VLAN on a FlexConnect access point. config flexconnect acl rule source port range acl-name rule-index start-port end-portConfigures a rules source port range. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 912 OL-28744-01 Viewing and Debugging FlexConnect ACLs (CLI) Viewing and Debugging FlexConnect ACLs (CLI) show flexconnect acl summaryDisplays a summary of the ACLs. show flexconnect acl detailed acl-nameDisplays the detailed information about the ACL. debug flexconnect acl {enable | disable}Enables or disables the debugging of FlexConnect ACL. debug capwap reapEnables debugging of CAPWAP. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 913 Viewing and Debugging FlexConnect ACLs (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 914 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 139 Configuring FlexConnect Groups Information About FlexConnect Groups, page 915 Configuring FlexConnect Groups, page 917 Configuring VLAN-ACL Mapping on FlexConnect Groups, page 922 Information About FlexConnect Groups To organize and manage your FlexConnect access points, you can create FlexConnect Groups and assign specific access points to them. All of the FlexConnect access points in a group share the same backup RADIUS server, CCKM, and local authentication configuration information. This feature is helpful if you have multiple FlexConnect access points in a remote office or on the floor of a building and you want to configure them all at once. For example, you can configure a backup RADIUS server for a FlexConnect rather than having to configure the same server on each access point. The following figure shows a typical FlexConnect deployment with a backup RADIUS server in the branch office. Figure 68: FlexConnect Group Deployment OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 915 Information About FlexConnect Groups FlexConnect Groups and Backup RADIUS Servers You can configure the controller to allow a FlexConnect access point in standalone mode to perform full 802.1X authentication to a backup RADIUS server. You can configure a primary backup RADIUS server or both a primary and secondary backup RADIUS server. These servers can be used when the FlexConnect access point is in of these two modes: standalone or connected. FlexConnect Groups and CCKM FlexConnect Groups are required for CCKM fast roaming to work with FlexConnect access points. CCKM fast roaming is achieved by caching a derivative of the master key from a full EAP authentication so that a simple and secure key exchange can occur when a wireless client roams to a different access point. This feature prevents the need to perform a full RADIUS EAP authentication as the client roams from one access point to another. The FlexConnect access points need to obtain the CCKM cache information for all the clients that might associate so they can process it quickly instead of sending it back to the controller. If, for example, you have a controller with 300 access points and 100 clients that might associate, sending the CCKM cache for all 100 clients is not practical. If you create a FlexConnect that includes a limited number of access points

(for example, you create a group for four access points in a remote office), the clients roam only among those four access points, and the CCKM cache is distributed among those four access points only when the clients associate to one of them. Note CCKM fast roaming among FlexConnect and non-FlexConnect access points is not supported. FlexConnect Groups and Opportunistic Key Caching Starting in the 7.0.116.0 release, FlexConnect groups enable Opportunistic Key Caching (OKC) to enable fast roaming of clients. OKC facilitates fast roaming by using PMK caching in access points that are in the same FlexConnect group. This feature prevents the need to perform a full authentication as the client roams from one access point to another. Whenever a client roams from one FlexConnect access point to another, the FlexConnect group access point calculates the PMKID using the cached PMK. To see the PMK cache entries at the FlexConnect access point, use the show capwap reap pmk command. This feature is supported on Cisco FlexConnect access points. Note The FlexConnect access point must be in connected mode when the PMK is derived during WPA2/802.1x authentication. When using FlexConnect groups for OKC or CCKM, the PMK-cache is shared only across the access points that are part of the same FlexConnect group and are associated to the same controller. If the access points are in the same FlexConnect group but are associated to different controllers that are part of the same mobility group, the PMK cache is not updated and CCKM roaming will fail. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 916 OL-28744-01 Configuring FlexConnect Groups FlexConnect Groups and Local Authentication You can configure the controller to allow a FlexConnect access point in standalone mode to perform LEAP, EAP-FAST authentication for up to 100 statically configured users. The controller sends the static list of usernames and passwords to each FlexConnect access point when it joins the controller. Each access point in the group authenticates only its own associated clients. This feature is ideal for customers who are migrating from an autonomous access point network to a lightweight FlexConnect access point network and are not interested in maintaining a large user database or adding another hardware device to replace the RADIUS server functionality available in the autonomous access point. Note This feature can be used with the FlexConnect backup RADIUS server feature. If a FlexConnect is configured with both a backup RADIUS server and local authentication, the FlexConnect access point always attempts to authenticate clients using the primary backup RADIUS server first, followed by the secondary backup RADIUS server (if the primary is not reachable), and finally the FlexConnect access point itself (if the primary and secondary are not reachable). The number of FlexConnect groups and access point support depends on the platform that you are using. You can configure the following:

Up to 100 FlexConnect groups and 25 access points per group for a Cisco 5500 Series Controller. Up to 1000 FlexConnect groups and 50 access points per group for a Cisco Flex 7500 Series Controller in the 7.2 release. Up to 2000 FlexConnect groups and 100 access points per group for Cisco Flex 7500 and Cisco 8500 Series Controllers in the 7.3 release. Up to 20 FlexConnect groups and up to 25 access points per group for the remaining platforms. Configuring FlexConnect Groups Configuring FlexConnect Groups (GUI) Step 1 Choose Wireless > FlexConnect Groups to open the FlexConnect Groups page. This page lists any FlexConnect groups that have already been created. Note If you want to delete an existing group, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that group and choose Remove. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 917 Configuring FlexConnect Groups Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Click New to create a new FlexConnect Group. On the FlexConnect Groups > New page, enter the name of the new group in the Group Name text box. You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Click Apply. The new group appears on the FlexConnect Groups page. To edit the properties of a group, click the name of the desired group. The FlexConnect Groups > Edit page appears. If you want to configure a primary RADIUS server for this group (for example, the access points are using 802.1X authentication), choose the desired server from the Primary RADIUS Server drop-down list. Otherwise, leave the text box set to the default value of None. If you want to configure a secondary RADIUS server for this group, choose the server from the Secondary RADIUS Server drop-down list. Otherwise, leave the field set to the default value of None. Configure the RADIUS server for the FlexConnect group by doing the following:

a) Enter the RADIUS server IP address. b) Choose the server type as either Primary or Secondary. c) Enter a shared secret to log on to the RADIUS server and confirm it. d) Enter the port number. e) Click Add. To add an access point to the group, click Add AP. Additional fields appear on the page under Add AP. Perform one of the following tasks:

To choose an access point that is connected to this controller, select the Select APs from Current Controller check box and choose the name of the access point from the AP Name drop-down list. Note If you choose an access point on this controller, the MAC address of the access point is automatically entered in the Ethernet MAC text box to prevent any mismatches from occurring. To choose an access point that is connected to a different controller, leave the Select APs from Current Controller check box unselected and enter its MAC address in the Ethernet MAC text box. Note If the FlexConnect access points within a group are connected to different controllers, all of the controllers must belong to the same mobility group. Click Add to add the access point to this FlexConnect group. The access points MAC address, name, and status appear at the bottom of the page. Note If you want to delete an access point, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for that access point and choose Remove. Click Apply. Enable local authentication for a FlexConnect Group as follows:

a) Ensure that the Primary RADIUS Server and Secondary RADIUS Server parameters are set to None. b) Select the Enable AP Local Authentication check box to enable local authentication for this FlexConnect Group. The default value is unselected. c) Click Apply. d) Choose the Local Authentication tab to open the FlexConnect > Edit (Local Authentication > Local Users) page. e) To add clients that you want to be able to authenticate using LEAP, EAP-FAST, perform one of the following:

f) Upload a comma-separated values (CSV) file by selecting the Upload CSV File check box, clicking the Browse button to browse to an CSV file that contains usernames and passwords (each line of the file needs to be in the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 918 OL-28744-01 Configuring FlexConnect Groups following format: username, password), and clicking Add to upload the CSV file. The clients names appear on the left side of the page under the User Name heading. g) Add clients individually by entering the clients username in the User Name text box and a password for the client in the Password and Confirm Password text boxes, and clicking Add to add this client to the list of supported local users. The client name appears on the left side of the page under the User Name heading. Note You can add up to 100 clients. h) Click Apply. i) Choose the Protocols tab to open the FlexConnect > Edit (Local Authentication > Protocols) page. j) To allow a FlexConnect access point to authenticate clients using LEAP, select the Enable LEAP Authentication check box. k) To allow a FlexConnect access point to authenticate clients using EAP-FAST, select the Enable EAP-FAST Authentication check box. The default value is unselected. l) Perform one of the following, depending on how you want protected access credentials (PACs) to be provisioned:

To use manual PAC provisioning, enter the server key used to encrypt and decrypt PACs in the Server Key and Confirm Server Key text boxes. The key must be 32 hexadecimal characters. To allow PACs to be sent automatically to clients that do not have one during PAC provisioning, select the Enable Auto Key Generation check box m) In the Authority ID text box, enter the authority identifier of the EAP-FAST server. The identifier must be 32 hexadecimal characters. n) In the Authority Info text box, enter the authority identifier of the EAP-FAST server in text format. You can enter up to 32 hexadecimal characters. o) To specify a PAC timeout value, select the PAC Timeout check box and enter the number of seconds for the PAC to remain viable in the text box. The default value is unselected, and the valid range is 2 to 4095 seconds when enabled. p) Click Apply. In the WLAN-ACL mapping tab, you can do the following:

a) Under Web Auth ACL Mapping, enter the WLAN ID, choose the WebAuth ACL, and click Add to map the web authentication ACL and the WLAN. b) Under Local Split ACL Mapping, enter the WLAN ID, and choose the Local Split ACL, and click Add to map the Local Split ACL to the WLAN. Note You can configure up to 16 WLAN-ACL combinations for local split tunneling. Local split tunneling does not work for clients with static IP address. In the Central DHCP tab, you can do the following:

a) In the WLAN Id box, enter the WLAN ID with which you want to map Central DHCP. b) Select or unselect the Central DHCP check box to enable or disable Central DHCP for the mapping. c) Select or unselect the Override DNS check box to enable or disable overriding of DNS for the mapping. d) Select or unselect the NAT-PAT check box to enable or disable network address translation and port address translation for the mapping. e) Click Add to add the Central DHCP - WLAN mapping. Click Save Configuration. Repeat this procedure if you want to add more FlexConnects. Note To see if an individual access point belongs to a FlexConnect Group, you can choose Wireless > Access Points

> All APs > the name of the desired access point in the FlexConnect tab. If the access point belongs to a FlexConnect, the name of the group appears in the FlexConnect Name text box. Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 919 Configuring FlexConnect Groups Configuring FlexConnect Groups (CLI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Add add or delete a FlexConnect Group by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name {add | delete}

Configure a primary or secondary RADIUS server for the FlexConnect group by entering this command:

config flexconect group group-name radius server auth {{add {primary | secondary} ip-addr auth-port secret} |

{delete {primary | secondary}}}

Add an access point to the FlexConnect Group by entering this command:

config flexconnect group_name ap {add | delete} ap_mac Configure local authentication for a FlexConnect as follows:

a) Make sure that a primary and secondary RADIUS server are not configured for the FlexConnect Group. b) To enable or disable local authentication for this FlexConnect group, enter this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap {enable | disable}

c) Enter the username and password of a client that you want to be able to authenticate using LEAP, EAP-FAST by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap user add username password password Note You can add up to 100 clients. d) Allow a FlexConnect access point group to authenticate clients using LEAP or to disable this behavior by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap leap {enable | disable}

e) Allow a FlexConnect access point group to authenticate clients using EAP-FAST or to disable this behavior by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap eap-fast {enable | disable}

f) To download EAP Root and Device certificate to AP, enter this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap eap-cert download g) Allow a FlexConnect access point group to authenticate clients using EAP-TLS or to disable this behavior by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap eap-tls {enable | disable}

h) Allow a FlexConnect access point group to authenticate clients using PEAP or to disable this behavior by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap peap {enable | disable}

i) Enter one of the following commands, depending on how you want PACs to be provisioned:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap server-key keySpecifies the server key used to encrypt and decrypt PACs. The key must be 32 hexadecimal characters. config flexconnect group group_name radius ap server-key autoAllows PACs to be sent automatically to clients that do not have one during PAC provisioning. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 920 OL-28744-01 Configuring FlexConnect Groups j) To specify the authority identifier of the EAP-FAST server, enter this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap authority id id where id is 32 hexadecimal characters. k) To specify the authority identifier of the EAP-FAST server in text format, enter this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap authority info info where info is up to 32 hexadecimal characters. l) To specify the number of seconds for the PAC to remain viable, enter this command:

config flexconnect group group_name radius ap pac-timeout timeout where timeout is a value between 2 and 4095 seconds (inclusive) or 0. A value of 0, which is the default value, disables the PAC timeout. Configure a Policy ACL on a FlexConnect group by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group-name acl {add | delete} acl-name Configure local split tunneling on a per-FlexConnect group basis by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name local-split wlan wlan-id acl acl-name flexconnect-group-name {enable |

disable}

To set multicast/broadcast across L2 broadcast domain on overridden interface for locally switched clients, enter this command:

config flexconnect group group_name multicast overridden-interface {enable | disable}

Configure central DHCP per WLAN by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group-name central-dhcp wlan-id {enable override dns | disable | delete}

Configure policy acl on FlexConnect group by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name policy acl {add | delete} acl-name Configure web-auth acl on flexconnect group by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name web-auth wlan wlan-id acl acl-name {enable | disable}

Configure wlan-vlan mapping on flexconnect group by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group_name wlan-vlan wlan wlan-id{add | delete}vlan vlan-id To set efficient upgrade for group, enter this command:

config flexconnect group group_name predownload {enable | disable | master | slave} ap-name retry-count maximum retry count ap-name ap-name Save your changes by entering this command:

save config See the current list of flexconnect groups by entering this command:

show flexconnect group summary See the details for a specific FlexConnect Groups by entering this command:

show flexconnect group detail group_name Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 921 Configuring VLAN-ACL Mapping on FlexConnect Groups Configuring VLAN-ACL Mapping on FlexConnect Groups Configuring VLAN-ACL Mapping on FlexConnect Groups (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Choose Wireless > FlexConnect Groups. The FlexConnect Groups page appears. This page lists the access points associated with the controller. Click the Group Name link of the FlexConnect Group for which you want to configure VLAN-ACL mapping. Click the VLAN-ACL Mapping tab. The VLAN-ACL Mapping page for that FlexConnect group appears. Enter the Native VLAN ID in the VLAN ID text box. From the Ingress ACL drop-down list, choose the Ingress ACL. From the Egress ACL drop-down list, choose the Egress ACL. Click Add to add this mapping to the FlexConnect Group. The VLAN ID is mapped with the required ACLs. To remove the mapping, hover your mouse over the blue drop-down arrow and choose Remove. Configuring VLAN-ACL Mapping on FlexConnect Groups (CLI) Add a VLAN to a FlexConnect group and map the ingress and egress ACLs by entering this command:

config flexconnect group group-name vlan add vlan-id acl ingress-acl egress acl Viewing VLAN-ACL Mappings (CLI) See the FlexConnect group details by entering this command:

show flexconnect group detail group-name See the VLAN-ACL mappings on the access point by entering this command:

show ap config general ap-name Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 922 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 140 Configuring AAA Overrides for FlexConnect Information About Authentication, Authorization, Accounting Overrides, page 923 Restrictions for AAA Overrides for FlexConnect, page 924 Configuring AAA Overrides for FlexConnect on an Access Point (GUI), page 924 Configuring VLAN Overrides for FlexConnect on an Access Point (CLI), page 925 Information About Authentication, Authorization, Accounting Overrides The Allow Authentication, Authorization, Accouting (AAA) Override option of a WLAN enables you to configure the WLAN for authentication. It enables you to apply VLAN tagging, QoS, and ACLs to individual clients based on the returned RADIUS attributes from the AAA server. AAA overrides for FlexConnect access points introduce a dynamic VLAN assignment for locally switched clients. AAA overrides for FlexConnect also support fast roaming (Opportunistic Key Caching [OKC]/ Cisco Centralized Key management [CCKM]) of overridden clients. VLAN overrides for FlexConnect are applicable for both centrally and locally authenticated clients. VLANs can be configured on FlexConnect groups. If a VLAN on the AP is configured using the WLAN-VLAN, the AP configuration of the corresponding ACL is applied. If the VLAN is configured using the FlexConnect group, the corresponding ACL configured on the FlexConnect group is applied. If the same VLAN is configured on the FlexConnect group and also on the AP, the AP configuration, with its ACL takes precedence. If there is no slot for a new VLAN from the WLAN-VLAN mapping, the latest configured FlexConnect group VLAN is replaced. If the VLAN that was returned from the AAA is not present on the AP, the client falls back to the default VLAN configured for the WLAN. Before configuring a AAA override, the VLAN must be created on the access points. These VLANs can be created by using the existing WLAN-VLAN mappings on the access points, or by using the FlexConnect group VLAN-ACL mappings. AAA Override for IPv6 ACLs In order to support centralized access control through a centralized AAA server such as the Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) or ACS, the IPv6 ACL can be provisioned on a per-client basis using AAA Override attributes. In order to use this feature, the IPv6 ACL must be configured on the controller and the WLAN must be configured with the AAA Override feature enabled. The AAA attribute for an IPv6 ACL is OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 923 Restrictions for AAA Overrides for FlexConnect Airespace-IPv6-ACL-Name similar to the Airespace-ACL-Name attribute used for provisioning an IPv4-based ACL. The AAA attribute-returned contents should be a string that is equal to the name of the IPv6 ACL as configured on the controller. Restrictions for AAA Overrides for FlexConnect Before configuring a AAA override, VLANs must be created on the access points. These VLANs can be created by using the existing WLAN-VLAN mappings on the access points, or by using the FlexConnect group VLAN-ACL mappings. At any given point, an AP has a maximum of 16 VLANs. First, the VLANs are selected as per the AP configuration (WLAN-VLAN), and then the remaining VLANs are pushed from the FlexConnect group in the order that they are configured or displayed in the FlexConnect group. If the VLAN slots are full, an error message is displayed. AAA for locally switched clients supports only VLAN overrides. Dynamic VLAN assignment is not supported for web authentication from a controller with Access Control Server (ACS). Configuring AAA Overrides for FlexConnect on an Access Point (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Wireless > All > APs. The All APs page is displayed. This page lists the access points associated with the controller. Click the corresponding AP name. Click the FlexConnect tab. Enter a value for Native VLAN ID. Click the VLAN Mappings button to configure the AP VLANs mappings. The following parameters are displayed:

AP NameThe access point name. Base Radio MACThe base radio of the AP. WLAN-SSID-VLAN ID MappingFor each WLAN configured on the controller, the corresponding SSID and VLAN IDs are listed. Change a WLAN-VLAN ID mapping by editing the VLAN ID column for a WLAN. Centrally Switched WLANsIf centrally switched WLANs are configured, WLANVLAN mapping is listed. AP Level VLAN ACL MappingThe following parameters are available:

VLAN IDThe VLAN ID. Ingress ACLThe Ingress ACL corresponding to the VLAN. Egress ACLThe Egress ACL corresponding to the VLAN. Change the ingress ACL and egress ACL mappings by selecting the mappings from the drop-down list for each ACL type. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 924 OL-28744-01 Configuring VLAN Overrides for FlexConnect on an Access Point (CLI) Group Level VLAN ACL MappingThe following group level VLAN ACL mapping parameters are available:

VLAN IDThe VLAN ID. Ingress ACLThe ingress ACL for this VLAN. Egress ACLThe egress ACL for this VLAN. Step 6 Click Apply. Configuring VLAN Overrides for FlexConnect on an Access Point (CLI) To configure VLAN overrides on a FlexConnect access point, use the following command:

config ap flexconnect vlan add vlan-id acl ingress-acl egress-acl ap_name OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 925 Configuring VLAN Overrides for FlexConnect on an Access Point (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 926 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 141 Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades for FlexConnect APs Information About FlexConnect AP Upgrades, page 927 Restrictions for FlexConnect AP Upgrades for FlexConnect Access Points, page 927 Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades (GUI), page 928 Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades (CLI), page 928 Information About FlexConnect AP Upgrades Normally, when upgrading the image of an AP, you can use the pre-image download feature to reduce the amount of time the AP is unavailable to serve clients. However, it also increases the downtime because the access point cannot serve clients during an upgrade. The Pre-image download feature can be used to reduce this downtime. However, in the case of a branch office set up, the upgrade images are still downloaded to each access point over the WAN link, which has a higher latency. A more efficient way is to use the FlexConnect AP Upgrade feature. When this feature is enabled, one access point of each model in the local network first downloads the upgrade image over the WAN link. It works similarly to the master-slave or client-server model. This access point then becomes the master for the remaining access point of the similar model. The remaining access points then download the upgrade image from the master access point using the pre-image download feature over the local network, which reduces the WAN latency. Restrictions for FlexConnect AP Upgrades for FlexConnect Access Points The primary and secondary controllers in the network must have the same set of primary and backup images. If you configured a FlexConnect group, all access points in that group must be within the same subnet or must be accessible through NAT. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 927 Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades (GUI) Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose Wireless > FlexConnect Groups. The FlexConnect Groups page appears. This page lists the FlexConnect Groups configured on the controller. Click the Group Name link on which you want to configure the image upgrade. Click the Image Upgrade tab. Select the FlexConnect AP Upgrade check box to enable a FlexConnect AP Upgrade. If you enabled the FlexConnect AP upgrade in the previous step, you must enable the following parameters:

Slave Maximum Retry CountThe number of attempts the slave access point must try to connect to the master access point for downloading the upgrade image. If the image download does not occur for the configured retry attempts, the image is upgraded over the WAN. Upgrade ImageSelect the upgrade image. The options are Primary, Backup, and Abort. Click FlexConnect Upgrade to upgrade. Step 6 From the AP Name drop-down list, click Add Master to add the master access point. You can manually assign master access points in the FlexConnect group by selecting the access points. Step 7 Click Apply. Configuring FlexConnect AP Upgrades (CLI) config flexconnect group group-name predownload {enable | disable}Enables or disables the FlexConnect AP upgrade. config flexconnect group group-name predownload master ap-nameManually assigns an access point as the master access point. config flexconnect group group-name predownload slave retry-count ap-nameSets the access point as a slave access point with a retry count. config flexconnect group group-name predownload startInitiates the image download on the access points in the FlexConnect group. config ap image predownload {abort | primary | backup}Assigns the image type that must be downloaded for the preimage upgrade. show flexconnect group group-nameDisplays the summary of the FlexConnect group configuration. show ap image allDisplays the details of the images on the access point. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 928 OL-28744-01 P A R T X Configuring Mobility Groups Configuring Mobility Groups, page 931 Viewing Mobility Group Statistics, page 943 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility, page 945 Validating WLAN Mobility Security Values, page 951 Using Symmetric Mobility Tunneling, page 953 Running Mobility Ping Tests, page 955 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring for Clients with Static IP Addresses, page 957 Configuring Foreign Mappings, page 961 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6, page 963 C H A P T E R 142 Configuring Mobility Groups Information About Mobility, page 931 Information About Mobility Groups, page 935 Prerequisites for Configuring Mobility Groups, page 938 Configuring Mobility Groups (GUI), page 940 Configuring Mobility Groups (CLI), page 941 Information About Mobility Mobility, or roaming, is a wireless LAN clients ability to maintain its association seamlessly from one access point to another securely and with as little latency as possible. This section explains how mobility works when controllers are included in a wireless network. When a wireless client associates and authenticates to an access point, the access points controller places an entry for that client in its client database. This entry includes the clients MAC and IP addresses, security context and associations, quality of service (QoS) contexts, the WLAN, and the associated access point. The controller uses this information to forward frames and manage traffic to and from the wireless client. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 931 Information About Mobility This figure shows a wireless client that roams from one access point to another when both access points are joined to the same controller. Figure 69: Intracontroller Roaming When the wireless client moves its association from one access point to another, the controller simply updates the client database with the newly associated access point. If necessary, new security context and associations are established as well. The process becomes more complicated, however, when a client roams from an access point joined to one controller to an access point joined to a different controller. It also varies based on whether the controllers are operating on the same subnet. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 932 OL-28744-01 Information About Mobility This figure shows intercontroller roaming, which occurs when the wireless LAN interfaces of the controllers are on the same IP subnet. Figure 70: Intercontroller Roaming When the client associates to an access point joined to a new controller, the new controller exchanges mobility messages with the original controller, and the client database entry is moved to the new controller. New security context and associations are established if necessary, and the client database entry is updated for the new access point. This process remains transparent to the user. Note All clients configured with 802.1X/Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security complete a full authentication in order to comply with the IEEE standard. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 933 Information About Mobility This figure shows intersubnet roaming, which occurs when the wireless LAN interfaces of the controllers are on different IP subnets. Figure 71: Intersubnet Roaming Inter-subnet roaming is similar to inter-controller roaming in that the controllers exchange mobility messages on the client roam. However, instead of moving the client database entry to the new controller, the original controller marks the client with an Anchor entry in its own client database. The database entry is copied to the new controller client database and marked with a Foreign entry in the new controller. The roam remains transparent to the wireless client, and the client maintains its original IP address. In inter-subnet roaming, WLANs on both anchor and foreign controllers need to have the same network access privileges and no source-based routing or source-based firewalls in place. Otherwise, the clients may have network connectivity issues after the handoff. In a static anchor setup using controllers and ACS, if AAA override is enabled to dynamically assign VLAN and QoS, the foreign controller updates the anchor controller with the right VLAN after a Layer 2 authentiation

(802.1x). For Layer 3 RADIUS authentication, the RADIUS requests for authentication are sent by the anchor controller. Mobility is not supported for SSIDs with security type configured for Webauth on MAC filter failure. Note If a client roams in web authentication state, the client is considered as a new client on another controller instead of considering it as a mobile client. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 934 OL-28744-01 Information About Mobility Groups Information About Mobility Groups A mobility group is a set of controllers, identified by the same mobility group name, that defines the realm of seamless roaming for wireless clients. By creating a mobility group, you can enable multiple controllers in a network to dynamically share information and forward data traffic when inter-controller or inter-subnet roaming occurs. Controllers in the same mobility group can share the context and state of client devices as well as their list of access points so that they do not consider each others access points as rogue devices. With this information, the network can support inter-controller wireless LAN roaming and controller redundancy. Note Controllers do not have to be of the same model to be a member of a mobility group. Mobility groups can be comprised of any combination of controller platforms. Figure 72: Example of a Single Mobility Group As shown above, each controller is configured with a list of the other members of the mobility group. Whenever a new client joins a controller, the controller sends out a unicast message (or multicast message if mobility multicast is configured) to all of the controllers in the mobility group. The controller to which the client was previously connected passes on the status of the client. For example, if a controller supports 6000 access points, a mobility group that consists of 24 such controllers supports up to 144,000 access points (24 * 6000 = 144,000 access points). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 935 Information About Mobility Groups Mobility groups enable you to limit roaming between different floors, buildings, or campuses in the same enterprise by assigning different mobility group names to different controllers within the same wireless network. This figure shows the results of creating distinct mobility group names for two groups of controllers. Figure 73: Two Mobility Groups The controllers in the ABC mobility group share access point and client information with each other. The controllers in the ABC mobility group do not share the access point or client information with the XYZ controllers, which are in a different mobility group. Likewise, the controllers in the XYZ mobility group do not share access point or client information with the controllers in the ABC mobility group. This feature ensures mobility group isolation across the network. Every controller maintains information about its peer controllers in a mobility list. Controllers can communicate across mobility groups and clients may roam between access points in different mobility groups if the controllers are included in each others mobility lists. In the following example, controller 1 can communicate with either controller 2 or 3, but controller 2 and controller 3 can communicate only with controller 1 and not with each other. Similarly, clients can roam between controller 1 and controller 2 or between controller 1 and controller 3 but not between controller 2 and controller 3. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 936 OL-28744-01 Information About Mobility Groups Table 27: Example Controller 1 Mobility group: A Mobility list:

Controller 1 (group A) Controller 2 (group A) Controller 3 (group C) ?

Controller 2 Mobility group: A Mobility list:

Controller 1 (group A) Controller 2 (group A) Controller 3 Mobility group: C Mobility list:

Controller 1 (group A) Controller 3 (group C) The controller supports seamless roaming across multiple mobility groups. During seamless roaming, the client maintains its IP address across all mobility groups; however, Cisco Centralized Key Management

(CCKM) and proactive key caching (PKC) are supported only for inter-mobility-group roaming. When a client crosses a mobility group boundary during a roam, the client is fully authenticated, but the IP address is maintained, and mobility tunneling is initiated for Layer 3 roaming. Messaging Among Mobility Groups The controller provides intersubnet mobility for clients by sending mobility messages to other member controllers. The controller sends a Mobile Announce message to members in the mobility list each time that a new client associates to it. The controller sends the message only to those members that are in the same group as the controller (the local group) and then includes all of the other members while sending retries. You can configure the controller to use multicast to send the Mobile Announce messages. This behavior allows the controller to send only one copy of the message to the network, which destines it to the multicast group that contains all the mobility members. To derive the maximum benefit from multicast messaging, we recommend that it be enabled on all group members. Using Mobility Groups with NAT Devices Mobility message payloads carry IP address information about the source controller. This IP address is validated with the source IP address of the IP header. This behavior is a problem when a NAT device is introduced in the network because it changes the source IP address in the IP header. In the guest WLAN feature, any mobility packet, that is being routed through a NAT device is dropped because of the IP address mismatch. The mobility group lookup uses the MAC address of the source controller. Because the source IP address is changed due to the mapping in the NAT device, the mobility group database is searched before a reply is sent to get the IP address of the requesting controller. This process is done using the MAC address of the requesting controller. When configuring the mobility group in a network where NAT is enabled, enter the IP address that is sent to the controller from the NAT device rather than the controllers management interface IP address. Also, make sure that the following ports are open on the firewall if you are using a firewall such as PIX:

UDP 16666 for tunnel control traffic IP protocol 97 for user data traffic UDP 161 and 162 for SNMP OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 937 Prerequisites for Configuring Mobility Groups Note Client mobility among controllers works only if auto-anchor mobility (also called guest tunneling) or symmetric mobility tunneling is enabled. Asymmetric tunneling is not supported when mobility controllers are behind the NAT device. See the Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility and Using Symmetric Mobility Tunneling sections for details on these mobility options. Prerequisites for Configuring Mobility Groups Before you add controllers to a mobility group, you must verify that the following requirements have been met for all controllers that are to be included in the group:

IP connectivity must exist between the management interfaces of all controllers. Note You can verify IP connectivity by pinging the controllers. Note Mobility control packets can use any interface address as the source, based on routing table. It is recommended that all controllers in the mobility group should have the management interface in the same subnet. A topology where one controller's management interface and other controller's dynamic interface are on same subnet not recommended for seamless mobility. When controllers in the mobility list use different software versions, Layer 2 or Layer 3 clients have limited roaming support. Layer 2 or Layer 3 client roaming is supported only between controllers that use the same version or with controllers that run versions 7.X.X. Note If you inadvertently configure a controller with a failover controller that runs a different software release, the access point might take a long time to join the failover controller because the access point starts the discovery process in CAPWAP and then changes to LWAPP discovery. All controllers must be configured with the same virtual interface IP address. Note If necessary, you can change the virtual interface IP address by editing the virtual interface name on the Controller > Interfaces page. Note If all the controllers within a mobility group are not using the same virtual interface, inter-controller roaming may appear to work, but the handoff does not complete, and the client loses connectivity for a period of time. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 938 OL-28744-01 Prerequisites for Configuring Mobility Groups You must have gathered the MAC address and IP address of every controller that is to be included in the mobility group. This information is necessary because you will be configuring all controllers with the MAC address and IP address of all the other mobility group members. Note You can find the MAC and IP addresses of the other controllers to be included in the mobility group on the Controller > Mobility Groups page of each controllers GUI. When you configure mobility groups using a third-party firewall, for example, Cisco PIX, or Cisco ASA, you must open port 16666, and IP protocol 97. For intercontroller CAPWAP data and control traffic, you must open the ports 5247 and 5264. This table lists the protocols and port numbers that must be used for management and operational purposes:

Table 28: Protocol/Service and Port Number Protocol/Service SSH/Telnet TFTP NTP SNMP HTTPS/HTTP Syslog Port Number TCP Port 22 or 29 UDP Port 69 UDP Port 123 UDP Port 161 for gets and sets and UDP port 162 for traps. TCP port 443 for HTTPS and port 80 for HTTP TCP port 514 Radius Auth/Account UDP port 1812 and 1813 Note To view information on mobility support across controllers with different software versions, see the Cisco Wireless Solutions Software Compatibility Matrix. Note You cannot perform port address translation (PAT) on the firewall. You must configure one-to-one network address translation (NAT). OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 939 Configuring Mobility Groups (GUI) Configuring Mobility Groups (GUI) Step 1 Choose Controller > Mobility Management > Mobility Groups to open the Static Mobility Group Members page. This page shows the mobility group name in the Default Mobility Group text box and lists the MAC address and IP address of each controller that is currently a member of the mobility group. The first entry is the local controller, which cannot be deleted. Note If you want to delete any of the remote controllers from the mobility group, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the desired controller and choose Remove. Step 2 Perform one of the following to add controllers to a mobility group:

If you are adding only one controller or want to individually add multiple controllers, click New and go. OR If you are adding multiple controllers and want to add them in bulk, click EditAll and go to. Note The EditAll option enables you to enter the MAC and IP addresses of all the current mobility group members and then copy and paste all the entries from one controller to the other controllers in the mobility group. Step 3 Step 4 Click New to open the Mobility Group Member > New page. Add a controller to the mobility group as follows:

1 In the Member IP Address text box, enter the management interface IP address of the controller to be added. Note If you are configuring the mobility group in a network where network address translation (NAT) is enabled, enter the IP address that is sent to the controller from the NAT device rather than the controllers management interface IP address. Otherwise, mobility will fail among controllers in the mobility group. 2 In the Member MAC Address text box, enter the MAC address of the controller to be added. 3 In the Group Name text box, enter the name of the mobility group. Note The mobility group name is case sensitive. 4 In the Hash text box, enter the hash key of the peer mobility controller, which should be a virtual controller in the same domain. You must configure the hash only if the peer mobility controller is a virtual controller in the same domain. 5 Click Apply to commit your changes. The new controller is added to the list of mobility group members on the Static Mobility Group Members page. 6 Click Save Configuration to save your changes. 7 Repeat Step a through Step e to add all of the controllers in the mobility group. 8 Repeat this procedure on every controller to be included in the mobility group. All controllers in the mobility group must be configured with the MAC address and IP address of all other mobility group members. The Mobility Group Members > Edit All page lists the MAC address, IP address, and mobility group name (optional) of all the controllers currently in the mobility group. The controllers are listed one per line with the local controller at the top of the list. Note If desired, you can edit or delete any of the controllers in the list. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 940 OL-28744-01 Configuring Mobility Groups (CLI) Step 5 Add more controllers to the mobility group as follows:

1 Click inside the edit box to start a new line. 2 Enter the MAC address, the management interface IP address, and the name of the mobility group for the controller to be added. Note Note You should enter these values on one line and separate each value with one or two spaces. The mobility group name is case sensitive. 3 Repeat Step a and Step b for each additional controller that you want to add to the mobility group. 4 Highlight and copy the complete list of entries in the edit box. 5 Click Apply to commit your changes. The new controllers are added to the list of mobility group members on the Static Mobility Group Members page. 6 Click Save Configuration to save your changes. 7 Paste the list into the text box on the Mobility Group Members > Edit All page of all the other controllers in the mobility group and click Apply and Save Configuration. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Choose Multicast Messaging to open the Mobility Multicast Messaging page. The names of all the currently configured mobility groups appear in the middle of the page. On the Mobility Multicast Messaging page, select the Enable Multicast Messaging check box to enable the controller to use multicast mode to send Mobile Announce messages to the mobility members. If you leave it unselected, the controller uses unicast mode to send the Mobile Announce messages. The default value is unselected. If you enabled multicast messaging in the previous step, enter the multicast group IP address for the local mobility group in the Local Group Multicast IP Address text box. This address is used for multicast mobility messaging. Note In order to use multicast messaging, you must configure the IP address for the local mobility group. Click Apply to commit your changes. If desired, you can also configure the multicast group IP address for nonlocal groups within the mobility list. To do so, click the name of a nonlocal mobility group to open the Mobility Multicast Messaging > Edit page, and enter the multicast group IP address for the nonlocal mobility group in the Multicast IP Address text box. Note If you do not configure the multicast IP address for nonlocal groups, the controller uses unicast mode to send mobility messages to those members. Step 11 Step 12 Click Apply to commit your changes. Click Save Configuration to save your changes. Configuring Mobility Groups (CLI) Step 1 Check the current mobility settings by entering this command:

show mobility summary OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 941 Configuring Mobility Groups (CLI) Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Create a mobility group by entering this command:

config mobility group domain domain_name Note Enter up to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters for the group name. Spaces are not allowed in mobility group names. Add a group member by entering this command:

config mobility group member add mac_address ip_address Note If you are configuring the mobility group in a network where network address translation (NAT) is enabled, enter the IP address that is sent to the controller from the NAT device rather than the controllers management interface IP address. Otherwise, mobility will fail among controllers in the mobility group. Enter the config mobility group member delete mac_address command if you want to delete a group member. Note To configure the hash key of a peer mobility controller, which is a virtual controller in the same domain, enter this command:

config mobility group member hash peer-ip-address key Enable or disable multicast mobility mode by entering this command:

config mobility multicast-mode {enable | disable} local_group_multicast_address where local_group_multicast_address is the multicast group IP address for the local mobility group. This address is used for multicast mobility messaging. If you enable multicast mobility mode, the controller uses multicast mode to send Mobile Announce messages to the local group. If you disable multicast mobility mode, the controller uses unicast mode to send the Mobile Announce messages to the local group. The default value is disabled.

(Optional) You can also configure the multicast group IP address for nonlocal groups within the mobility list. To do so, enter this command:

config mobility group multicast-address group_name IP_address If you do not configure the multicast IP address for nonlocal groups, the controller uses unicast mode to send mobility messages to those members. Verify the mobility configuration by entering this command:

show mobility summary To see the hash key of mobility group members in the same domain, enter this command:

show mobility group member hash Save your changes by entering this command:

save config Repeat this procedure on every controller to be included in the mobility group. All controllers in the mobility group must be configured with the MAC address and IP address of all other mobility group members. Enable or disable debugging of multicast usage for mobility messages by entering this command:

debug mobility multicast {enable | disable}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 942 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 143 Viewing Mobility Group Statistics Viewing Mobility Group Statistics (GUI), page 943 Viewing Mobility Group Statistics (CLI), page 944 Viewing Mobility Group Statistics (GUI) Step 1 Choose Monitor > Statistics > Mobility Statistics to open the Mobility Statistics page. This page contains the following fields Group Mobility Statistics Rx ErrorsGeneric protocol packet receive errors, such as packet too short or format incorrect. Tx ErrorsGeneric protocol packet transmit errors, such as packet transmission fail. Responses RetransmittedMobility protocol that uses UDP and resends requests several times if it does not receive a response. Because of network or processing delays, the responder may receive one or more retry requests after it initially responds to a request. This text box shows a count of the response resends. Handoff Requests ReceivedTotal number of handoff requests received, ignored, or responded to. Handoff End Requests ReceivedTotal number of handoff end requests received. These requests are sent by the anchor or foreign controller to notify the other about the close of a client session. State Transitions DisallowedPolicy enforcement module (PEM) that has denied a client state transition, usually resulting in the handoff being aborted. Resource UnavailableNecessary resource, such as a buffer, was unavailable, resulting in the handoff being aborted. Mobility Initiator Statistics Handoff Requests SentNumber of clients that have associated to the controller and have been announced to the mobility group. Handoff Replies ReceivedNumber of handoff replies that have been received in response to the requests sent. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 943 Viewing Mobility Group Statistics (CLI) Handoff as Local ReceivedNumber of handoffs in which the entire client session has been transferred. Handoff as Foreign ReceivedNumber of handoffs in which the client session was anchored elsewhere. Handoff Denys ReceivedNumber of handoffs that were denied. Anchor Request SentNumber of anchor requests that were sent for a three-party (foreign-to-foreign) handoff. The handoff was received from another foreign controller, and the new controller is requesting the anchor to move the client. Anchor Deny ReceivedNumber of anchor requests that were denied by the current anchor. Anchor Grant ReceivedNumber of anchor requests that were approved by the current anchor. Anchor Transfer ReceivedNumber of anchor requests that closed the session on the current anchor and transferred the anchor back to the requestor. Mobility Responder Statistics Handoff Requests IgnoredNumber of handoff requests or client announcements that were ignored because the controller had no knowledge of that client. Ping Pong Handoff Requests DroppedNumber of handoff requests that were denied because the handoff period was too short (3 seconds). Handoff Requests DroppedNumber of handoff requests that were dropped due to either an incomplete knowledge of the client or a problem with the packet. Handoff Requests DeniedNumber of handoff requests that were denied. Client Handoff as LocalNumber of handoff responses sent while the client is in the local role. Client Handoff as ForeignNumber of handoff responses sent while the client is in the foreign role. Anchor Requests ReceivedNumber of anchor requests received. Anchor Requests DeniedNumber of anchor requests denied. Anchor Requests GrantedNumber of anchor requests granted. Anchor TransferredNumber of anchors transferred because the client has moved from a foreign controller to a controller on the same subnet as the current anchor. Step 2 If you want to clear the current mobility statistics, click Clear Stats. Viewing Mobility Group Statistics (CLI) See mobility group statistics by entering the show mobility statistics command. To clear the current mobility statistics, enter the clear stats mobility command. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 944 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 144 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility Information About Auto-Anchor Mobility, page 945 Guidelines and Limitations, page 946 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (GUI), page 947 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (CLI), page 947 Information About Auto-Anchor Mobility You can use auto-anchor mobility (also called guest tunneling) to improve load balancing and security for roaming clients on your wireless LANs. Under normal roaming conditions, client devices join a wireless LAN and are anchored to the first controller that they contact. If a client roams to a different subnet, the controller to which the client roamed sets up a foreign session for the client with the anchor controller. However, when you use the auto-anchor mobility feature, you can specify a controller or set of controllers as the anchor points for clients on a wireless LAN. In auto-anchor mobility mode, a subset of a mobility group is specified as the anchor controllers for a WLAN. You can use this feature to restrict a WLAN to a single subnet, regardless of a clients entry point into the network. Clients can then access a guest WLAN throughout an enterprise but still be restricted to a specific subnet. Auto-anchor mobility can also provide geographic load balancing because the WLANs can represent a particular section of a building (such as a lobby, a restaurant, and so on), effectively creating a set of home controllers for a WLAN. Instead of being anchored to the first controller that they happen to contact, mobile clients can be anchored to controllers that control access points in a particular vicinity. When a client first associates to a controller of a mobility group that has been preconfigured as a mobility anchor for a WLAN, the client associates to the controller locally, and a local session is created for the client. Clients can be anchored only to preconfigured anchor controllers of the WLAN. For a given WLAN, you should configure the same set of anchor controllers on all controllers in the mobility group. When a client first associates to a controller of a mobility group that has not been configured as a mobility anchor for a WLAN, the client associates to the controller locally, a local session is created for the client, and the client is announced to the other controllers in the mobility list. If the announcement is not answered, the controller contacts one of the anchor controllers configured for the WLAN and creates a foreign session for the client on the local switch. Packets from the client are encapsulated through a mobility tunnel using EtherIP and sent to the anchor controller, where they are decapsulated and delivered to the wired network. Packets to the client are received by the anchor controller and forwarded to the foreign controller through a mobility tunnel using EtherIP. The foreign controller decapsulates the packets and forwards them to the client. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 945 Guidelines and Limitations If multiple controllers are added as mobility anchors for a particular WLAN on a foreign controller, the foreign controller internally sorts the controller by their IP address. The controller with the lowest IP address is the first anchor. For example, a typical ordered list would be 172.16.7.25, 172.16.7.28, 192.168.5.15. If the first client associates to the foreign controller's anchored WLAN, the client database entry is sent to the first anchor controller in the list, the second client is sent to the second controller in the list, and so on, until the end of the anchor list is reached. The process is repeated starting with the first anchor controller. If any of the anchor controller is detected to be down, all the clients anchored to the controller are deauthenticated, and the clients then go through the authentication/anchoring process again in a round-robin manner with the remaining controller in the anchor list. This functionality is also extended to regular mobility clients through mobility failover. This feature enables mobility group members to detect failed members and reroute clients. Guidelines and Limitations Mobility list members can send ping requests to one another to check the data and control paths among them to find failed members and reroute clients. You can configure the number and interval of ping requests that are sent to each anchor controller. This functionality provides guest N+1 redundancy for guest tunneling and mobility failover for regular mobility. You must add controllers to the mobility group member list before you can designate them as mobility anchors for a WLAN. You can configure multiple controllers as mobility anchors for a WLAN. Auto-anchor mobility supports web authentication but does not support other Layer 3 security types. You must configure the WLANs on both the foreign controller and the anchor controller with mobility anchors. On the anchor controller, configure the anchor controller itself as a mobility anchor. On the foreign controller, configure the anchor as a mobility anchor. Auto-anchor mobility is not supported for use with DHCP option 82. When using the guest N+1 redundancy and mobility failover features with a firewall, make sure that the following ports are open:

UDP 16666 for tunnel control traffic IP Protocol 97 for user data traffic UDP 161 and 162 for SNMP A client, when it moves from anchor controller to foreign controller, sends th In case of roaming between anchor controller and foreign mobility, the client addresses learned at the anchor controller is shown at the foreign controller. You must check the foreign controller to view the RA throttle statistics. For Layer 3 RADIUS authentication, the RADIUS requests for authentication are sent by the anchor controller. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 946 OL-28744-01 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (GUI) Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Configure the controller to detect failed anchor controllers within a mobility group as follows:

a) Choose Controller > Mobility Management > Mobility Anchor Config to open the Mobility Anchor Config page. b) In the Keep Alive Count text box, enter the number of times a ping request is sent to an anchor controller before the anchor is considered to be unreachable. The valid range is 3 to 20, and the default value is 3. c) In the Keep Alive Interval text box, enter the amount of time (in seconds) between each ping request that is sent to an anchor controller. The valid range is 1 to 30 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. d) In the DSCP Value text box, enter the DSCP value. The default is 0. e) Click Apply to commit your changes. Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the blue drop-down arrow for the desired WLAN or wired guest LAN and choose Mobility Anchors. The Mobility Anchors page appears. This page lists the controllers that have already been configured as mobility anchors and shows the current state of their data and control paths. Controllers within a mobility group communicate among themselves over a well-known UDP port and exchange data traffic through an Ethernet-over-IP (EoIP) tunnel. They send mpings, which test mobility control packet reachability over the management interface over mobility UDP port 16666 and they send epings, which test the mobility data traffic over the management interface over EoIP port 97. The Control Path text box shows whether mpings have passed (up) or failed (down), and the Data Path text box shows whether epings have passed (up) or failed (down). If the Data or Control Path text box shows down, the mobility anchor cannot be reached and is considered failed. Select the IP address of the controller to be designated a mobility anchor in the Switch IP Address (Anchor) drop-down list. Click Mobility Anchor Create. The selected controller becomes an anchor for this WLAN or wired guest LAN. Note To delete a mobility anchor for a WLAN or wired guest LAN, hover your cursor over the blue drop-down arrow for the anchor and choose Remove. Click Save Configuration. Repeat Step 4 and Step 6 to set any other controllers as mobility anchors for this WLAN or wired guest LAN. Configure the same set of mobility anchors on every controller in the mobility group. Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (CLI) The controller is programmed to always detect failed mobility list members. To change the parameters for the ping exchange between mobility members, enter these commands:

config mobility group keepalive count countSpecifies the number of times a ping request is sent to a mobility list member before the member is considered to be unreachable. The valid range is 3 to 20, and the default value is 3. config mobility group keepalive interval secondsSpecifies the amount of time (in seconds) between each ping request sent to a mobility list member. The valid range is 1 to 30 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 947 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (CLI) Disable the WLAN or wired guest LAN for which you are configuring mobility anchors by entering this command:

config {wlan | guest-lan} disable {wlan_id | guest_lan_id}

Create a new mobility anchor for the WLAN or wired guest LAN by entering one of these commands:

config mobility group anchor add {wlan | guest-lan} {wlan_id | guest_lan_id}

anchor_controller_ip_address config {wlan | guest-lan} mobility anchor add {wlan_id | guest_lan_id}

anchor_controller_ip_address Note The wlan_id or guest_lan_id must exist and be disabled, and the anchor_controller_ip_address must be a member of the default mobility group. Note Auto-anchor mobility is enabled for the WLAN or wired guest LAN when you configure the first mobility anchor. Delete a mobility anchor for the WLAN or wired guest LAN by entering one of these commands:

config mobility group anchor delete {wlan | guest-lan} {wlan_id | guest_lan_id}

anchor_controller_ip_address config {wlan | guest-lan} mobility anchor delete {wlan_id | guest_lan_id}

anchor_controller_ip_address Note The wlan_id or guest_lan_id must exist and be disabled. Note Deleting the last anchor disables the auto-anchor mobility feature and resumes normal mobility for new associations. Save your settings by entering this command:

save config See a list and status of controllers configured as mobility anchors for a specific WLAN or wired guest LAN by entering this command:

show mobility anchor {wlan | guest-lan} {wlan_id | guest_lan_id}

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 948 OL-28744-01 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (CLI) Note The wlan_id and guest_lan_id parameters are optional and constrain the list to the anchors in a particular WLAN or guest LAN. To see all of the mobility anchors on your system, enter the show mobility anchor command. The Status text box shows one of these values:

UPThe controller is reachable and able to pass data. CNTRL_PATH_DOWNThe mpings failed. The controller cannot be reached through the control path and is considered failed. DATA_PATH_DOWNThe epings failed. The controller cannot be reached and is considered failed. CNTRL_DATA_PATH_DOWNBoth the mpings and epings failed. The controller cannot be reached and is considered failed. See the status of all mobility group members by entering this command:

show mobility summary Troubleshoot mobility issues by entering these commands:

debug mobility handoff {enable | disable}Debugs mobility handoff issues. debug mobility keep-alive {enable | disable} allDumps the keepalive packets for all mobility anchors. debug mobility keep-alive {enable | disable} IP_addressDumps the keepalive packets for a specific mobility anchor. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 949 Configuring Auto-Anchor Mobility (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 950 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 145 Validating WLAN Mobility Security Values Information About WLAN Mobility Security Values, page 951 Information About WLAN Mobility Security Values For any anchoring or mobility event, the WLAN security policy values on each controller must match. These values can be validated in the controller debugs. This table lists the WLAN mobility security values and their corresponding security policy. Table 29: WLAN Mobility Security Values Security Hexadecimal Value 0x00000000 0x00000001 0x00000002 0x00000004 0x00000008 0x00000010 0x00000020 0x00000040 0x00000080 0x00000100 0x00000200 0x00000400 Security Policy Security_None Security_WEP Security_802_1X Security_IPSec*

Security_IPSec_Passthrough*

Security_Web Security_PPTP*

Security_DHCP_Required Security_WPA_NotUsed Security_Cranite_Passthrough*

Security_Fortress_Passthrough*

Security_L2TP_IPSec*

OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 951 Information About WLAN Mobility Security Values Security Hexadecimal Value 0x00000800 Security Policy Security_802_11i_NotUsed Note Controllers running software release 6.0 or later do not support this security policy. 0x00001000 Security_Web_Passthrough Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 952 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 146 Using Symmetric Mobility Tunneling Information About Symmetric Mobility Tunneling, page 953 Guidelines and Limitations, page 954 Verifying Symmetric Mobility Tunneling (GUI), page 954 Verifying if Symmetric Mobility Tunneling is Enabled (CLI), page 954 Information About Symmetric Mobility Tunneling When symmetric mobility tunneling is enabled, all client traffic is sent to the anchor controller and can then successfully pass the RPF check. Figure 74: Symmetric Mobility Tunneling or Bi-Directional Tunneling Symmetric mobility tunneling is also useful in the following situations:

If a firewall installation in the client packet path drops packets because the source IP address does not match the subnet on which the packets are received. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 953 Guidelines and Limitations If the access-point group VLAN on the anchor controller is different than the WLAN interface VLAN on the foreign controller. In this case, client traffic could be sent on an incorrect VLAN during mobility events. Guidelines and Limitations Symmetric mobility tunneling is enabled by default. Verifying Symmetric Mobility Tunneling (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > Mobility Management > Mobility Anchor Config to open the Mobility Anchor Config page. The Symmetric Mobility Tunneling Mode text box shows Enabled. Verifying if Symmetric Mobility Tunneling is Enabled (CLI) Verify that symmetric mobility tunneling is enabled by entering this command:

show mobility summary Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 954 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 147 Running Mobility Ping Tests Information About Mobility Ping Tests, page 955 Guidelines and Limitations, page 955 Running Mobility Ping Tests (CLI), page 956 Information About Mobility Ping Tests Controllers in a mobility list communicate with each other by controlling information over a well-known UDP port and exchanging data traffic through an Ethernet-over-IP (EoIP) tunnel. Because UDP and EoIP are not reliable transport mechanisms, there is no guarantee that a mobility control packet or data packet will be delivered to a mobility peer. Mobility packets may be lost in transit due to a firewall filtering the UDP port or EoIP packets or due to routing issues. Guidelines and Limitations Controller software release 4.0 or later releases enable you to test the mobility communication environment by performing mobility ping tests. These tests may be used to validate connectivity between members of a mobility group (including guest controllers). Two ping tests are available:

Mobility ping over UDPThis test runs over mobility UDP port 16666. It tests whether the mobility control packet can be reached over the management interface. Mobility ping over EoIPThis test runs over EoIP. It tests the mobility data traffic over the management interface. Only one mobility ping test per controller can be run at a given time. Note These ping tests are not Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) based. The term ping is used to indicate an echo request and an echo reply message. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 955 Running Mobility Ping Tests (CLI) Note Any ICMP packet greater than 1280 bytes will always be responded with a packet that is truncated to 1280 bytes. For example, a ping with a packet that is greater than 1280 bytes from a host to the management interface is always responded with a packet that is truncated to 1280 bytes. Running Mobility Ping Tests (CLI) To test the mobility UDP control packet communication between two controllers, enter this command:

mping mobility_peer_IP_address The mobility_peer_IP_address parameter must be the IP address of a controller that belongs to the mobility list. To test the mobility EoIP data packet communication between two controllers, enter this command:

eping mobility_peer_IP_address The mobility_peer_IP_address parameter must be the IP address of a controller that belongs to the mobility list. To troubleshoot your controller for mobility ping, enter these commands:

config logging buffered debugging show logging To troubleshoot your controller for mobility ping over UDP, enter this command to display the mobility control packet:

debug mobility handoff enable Note We recommend using an ethereal trace capture when troubleshooting. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 956 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 148 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring for Clients with Static IP Addresses Information About Dynamic Anchoring for Clients with Static IP, page 957 Guidelines and Limitations, page 958 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients (GUI), page 958 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients (CLI), page 959 Information About Dynamic Anchoring for Clients with Static IP At times you may want to configure static IP addresses for wireless clients. When these wireless clients move about in a network, they could try associating with other controllers. If the clients try to associate with a controller that does not support the same subnet as the static IP, the clients fail to connect to the network. You can now enable dynamic tunneling of clients with static IP addresses. Dynamic anchoring of static IP clients with static IP addresses can be associated with other controllers where the clients subnet is supported by tunneling the traffic to another controller in the same mobility group. This feature enables you to configure your WLAN so that the network is serviced even though the clients use static IP addresses. How Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients Works The following sequence of steps occur when a client with a static IP address tries to associate with a controller:

1 When a client associates with a controller, for example, WLC-1, it performs a mobility announcement. If a controller in the mobility group responds (for example WLC-2), the client traffic is tunneled to the controller WLC-2. As a result, the controller WLC 1 becomes the foreign controller and WLC-2 becomes the anchor controller. 2 If none of the controllers responds, the client is treated as a local client and authentication is performed. The IP address for the client is updated either through an orphan packet handling or an ARP request processing. If the IP subnet of the client is not supported in the controller (WLC-1), WLC-1 sends another static IP mobile announce and if a controller (for example WLC-3) that supports the client's subnet responds to that announcement, the client traffic is tunneled to that controller, that is WLC-3. As a result, the controller WLC 1 becomes the export foreign controller and WLC-3 becomes the export anchor controller. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 957 Guidelines and Limitations 3 Once the acknowledgement is received, the client traffic is tunneled between the anchor and the controller

(WLC-1). Note If you configure WLAN with an interface group and any of the interfaces in the interface group supports the static IP client subnet, the client is assigned to that interface. This situation occurs in local or remote

(static IP Anchor) controller. Note A security level 2 authentication is performed only in the local (static IP foreign) controller, which is also known as the exported foreign controller. Guidelines and Limitations Do not configure overridden interfaces when you perform AAA for static IP tunneling, this is because traffic can get blocked for the client if the overridden interface does not support the clients subnet. This can be possible in extreme cases where the overriding interface group supports the clients subnet. The local controller must be configured with the correct AAA server where this client entry is present. The following restrictions apply when configuring static IP tunneling with other features on the same WLAN:

Auto anchoring mobility (guest tunneling) cannot be configured for the same WLAN. FlexConnect local authentication cannot be configured for the same WLAN. The DHCP required option cannot be configured for the same WLAN. You cannot configure dynamic anchoring of static IP clients with FlexConnect local switching. Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Choose WLANs to open the WLANs page. Click the ID number of the WLAN on which you want to enable dynamic anchoring of IP clients. The WLANs > Edit page is displayed. Choose the Advanced tab to open the WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page. Enable dynamic anchoring of static IP clients by selecting the Static IP Tunneling check box. Click Apply to commit your changes. Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 958 OL-28744-01 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients (CLI) Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients (CLI) config wlan static-ip tunneling {enable | disable} wlan_id Enables or disables the dynamic anchoring of static IP clients on a given WLAN. To monitor and troubleshoot your controller for clients with static IP, use the following commands:

show wlan wlan_idEnables you to see the status of the static IP clients feature. . Static IP client tunneling.............. Enabled

.. debug client client-mac debug dot11 mobile enable debug mobility handoff enable OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 959 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 960 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 149 Configuring Foreign Mappings Information About Foreign Mappings, page 961 Configuring Foreign Controller MAC Mapping (GUI), page 961 Configuring Foreign Controller MAC Mapping (CLI), page 961 Information About Foreign Mappings Auto-Anchor mobility, also known as Foreign Mapping, allows you to configure users that are on different foreign controllers from different physical location to obtain IP addresses from a subnet or group of subnets based on their physical location. Configuring Foreign Controller MAC Mapping (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Choose the WLANs tab. The WLANs page appears listing the available WLANs. Click the Blue drop down arrow for the desired WLAN and choose Foreign-Maps. The foreign mappings page appears. This page also lists the MAC addresses of the foreign controllers that are in the mobility group and interfaces/interface groups. Choose the desired foreign controller MAC and the interface or interface group to which it must be mapped and click on Add Mapping. Configuring Foreign Controller MAC Mapping (CLI) To add foreign controller mapping, enter this command:

config wlan mobility foreign-map add wlan-id foreign_ctlr_mac interface/interface_grp name OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 961 Configuring Foreign Controller MAC Mapping (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 962 OL-28744-01 C H A P T E R 150 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 Information About Proxy Mobile IPv6, page 963 Guidelines and Limitations, page 963 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (GUI), page 964 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (CLI), page 965 Information About Proxy Mobile IPv6 Proxy Mobile IPv6 (PMIPv6) is a network-based mobility management protocol that supports a mobile node by acting as the proxy for the mobile node in any IP mobility-related signaling. The mobility entities in the network track the movements of the mobile node and initiate the mobility signaling and set up the required routing state. The main functional entities are the Local Mobility Anchor (LMA) and Mobile Access Gateway (MAG). The LMA maintains the reachability state of the mobile node and is the topological anchor point for the IP address of the mobile node. The MAG performs the mobility management on behalf of a mobile node. The MAG resides on the access link where the mobile node is anchored. The controller implements the MAG functionality. In the Cisco 5500 Series, Cisco WiSM2, and Cisco 8500 Series controllers, PMIPv6 Mobility Access Gateway

(MAG) support for integration with Local Mobility Anchor (LMA) such as Cisco ASR 5000 Series in cellular data networks. For PMIPv6 clients, controller supports both central web authentication and local web authentication. Guidelines and Limitations IPv6/dual stack clients are supported. IPv6 clients are not supported. IPv6 addresses for the client are not learnt if the WLAN is marked for PMIPv6. PMIPv6 is not supported on local switching WLANs on FlexConnect APs. Roaming between controllers is supported only on PMIPv6-enabled WLANs. OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 963 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (GUI) Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (GUI) Step 1 Step 2 Choose Controller > PMIPv6 > General to open the PMIPv6 General page. Enter the values for the following parameters:

Maximum Bindings AllowedMaximum number of binding updates that the controller can send to the MAG. The valid range is between 0 to 40000. Binding LifetimeLifetime of the binding entries in the controller. The valid range is between 10 to 65535 seconds. The default value is 3600. The binding lifetime should be a multiple of 4 seconds. Binding Refresh TimeRefresh time of the binding entries in the controller. The valid range is between 4 to 65535 seconds. The default value is 300 seconds. The binding refresh time should be a multiple of 4 seconds. Binding Initial Retry TimeoutInitial timeout between the proxy binding updates (PBUs) when the controller does not receive the proxy binding acknowledgments (PBAs). The valid range is between 100 to 65535 seconds. The default value is 1000 seconds. Binding Maximum Retry TimeoutMaximum timeout between the proxy binding updates (PBUs) when the controller does not receive the proxy binding acknowledgments (PBAs). The valid range is between 100 to 65535 seconds. The default value is 32000 seconds. Replay Protection TimestampMaximum amount of time difference between the timestamp in the received proxy binding acknowledgment and the current time of the day. The valid range is between 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default value is 7 milliseconds. Minimum BRI Retransmit TimeoutMinimum amount of time that the controller waits before retransmitting the BRI message. The valid range is between 500 to 65535 seconds. The default value is 1000 seconds. Maximum BRI Retransmit TimeoutMaximum amount of time that the controller waits before retransmitting the Binding Revocation Indication (BRI) message. The valid range is between 500 to 65535 seconds. The default value is 2000 seconds. BRI RetriesMaximum number of times that the controller retransmits the BRI message before receiving the Binding Revocation Acknowledgment (BRA) message. The valid range is between 1 to 10. The default value is 1. Click Apply. To clear your configuration, click Clear Domain. To create the LMA, follow these steps:

a) Choose Controller > PMIPv6 > LMA and click New. b) Enter the values for the following parameters:

Member NameName of the LMA connected to the controller. Member IP AddressIP address of the LMA connected to the controller. c) Click Apply. To create a PMIPv6 profile, follow these steps:

a) Choose Controller > PMIPv6 > Profiles and click New. b) On the PMIPv6 Profile > New page, enter the values for the following parameters:

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 964 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (CLI) Profile NameName of the profile. Network Access IdentifierName of the Network Access Identifier (NAI) associated with the profile. LMA NameName of the LMA to which the profile is associated. Access Point NodeName of the access point node connected to the controller. c) Click Apply. On the PMIPv6 Profile > New page, enter the values for the following parameters:

Step 6 Profile NameName of the profile. Network Access IdentifierName of the Network Access Identifier (NAI) associated with the profile. LMA NameName of the LMA to which the profile is associated. Access Point NodeName of the access point node connected to the controller. Step 7 To configure PMIPv6 parameters for a WLAN, follow these steps:

a) Choose WLANs > WLAN ID to open the WLANs > Edit page. b) Click the Advanced tab. c) Under PMIP from the PMIP Mobility Type drop-down list, choose the mobility type from the following options:

NoneConfigures the WLAN with Simple IP PMIPv6Configures the WLAN with only PMIPv6 d) From the PMIP Profile drop-down list, choose the PMIP profile for the WLAN. e) In the PMIP Realm box, enter the default realm for the WLAN. f) Click Apply. Click Save Configuration. Step 8 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (CLI) Step 1 To configure MAG, use these commands:

To configure maximum binding update entries allowed, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag binding maximum units To configure the binding entry lifetime, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag lifetime units To configure the binding refresh interval, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag refresh-time units OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 965 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (CLI) To configure the initial timeout between PBUs if PBA does not arrive, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag init-retx-time units To configure the maximum initial timeout between PBUs if PBA does not arrive, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag max-retx-time units To configure the replay protection mechanism, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag replay-protection {timestamp window units | sequence-no | mobile-node-timestamp}

To configure the minimum or maximum amount of time in seconds that the MAG should wait before it retransmits the binding revocation indication (BRI) message, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag bri delay {min | max} units To configure the maximum number of times the MAG should retransmit the BRI message before it receives the binding revocation acknowledgment (BRA) message, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag bri retries units To configure the list of LMAs for the MAG, enter this command:

config pmipv6 mag lma lma-name ipv4-address ip-address Step 2 Step 3 To configure a PMIPv6 domain name, enter this command:

config pmipv6 domain domain-name Note This command also enables the MAG functionality on the controller. To add a profile to a PMIPv6 domain, enter this command:

config pmipv6 add profile profile-name nai {user@realm | @realm | *} lma lma-name apn apn-name Note NAI stands for network access identifier. APN stands for access point name. Step 4 To delete a PMIPv6 entity, enter this command:

config pmipv6 delete {domain domain-name | lma lma-name | profile profile-name nai {user@realm | @realm | *}}

Step 5 To configure the PMIPv6 parameters for the WLAN, use these commands:

To configure the default realm for the WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan pmipv6 default-realm {realm-name | none} wlan-id To configure the mobility type for a WLAN or for all WLANs, enter this command:

config wlan pmipv6 mobility-type {none | pmipv6} {wlan-id | all}

To configure the profile name for a PMIPv6 WLAN, enter this command:

config wlan pmipv6 profile-name name wlan-id Save your changes by entering this command:

save config To see the PMIPv6 configuration details, use the following show commands:

To see the details of a profile of a PMIPv6 domain, enter this command:

show pmipv6 domain domain-name profile profile-name Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 OL-28744-01 Step 6 Step 7 966 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (CLI) To see a summary of all the PMIPv6 profiles, enter this command:

show pmipv6 profile summary To see the global information about the PMIPv6 for a MAG, enter this command:

show pmipv6 mag globals To see information about the MAG bindings for LMA or NAI, enter this command:

show pmipv6 mag bindings {lma lma-name | nai nai-name}

To see statistical information about MAG, enter this command:

show pmipv6 mag stats domain domain-name peer peer-name To see information about PMIPv6 for all clients, enter this command:

show client summary To see information about PMIPv6 for a client, enter this command:

show client details client-mac-address To see information about PMIPv6 for a WLAN, enter this command:

show wlan wlan-id OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 967 Configuring Proxy Mobile IPv6 (CLI) Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 968 OL-28744-01 I N D E X 11n Mode parameter 83 1250 series access points 801, 802, 803 and PoE Status field 803 operating modes when using PoE 801 transmit power settings when using PoE 802 7920 AP CAC parameter 593 7920 Client CAC parameter 593 7920 support mode 592 configuring 592 described 592 7921 support mode 592 802.11a (or 802.11b) > Client Roaming page 117 802.11a (or 802.11b) > Voice Parameters page 140, 143, 151 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) > EDCA Parameters page 153 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Global Parameters page 75, 856 802.11a (or 802.11b/g) Network Status parameter 75, 86, 87 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) Radios page 145, 848 802.11a/n Radios page (from Monitor Menu) 692, 695 802.11g Support parameter 75 802.11h Global Parameters page 86 802.11h, described 86 802.11n 83, 807 clients 807 devices 83 802.1X authentication for access points 701, 703, 704 802.1Q VLAN trunk port 290 802.1X 556, 568 dynamic key settings 556 configuring 556 described 568 configuring 703, 704 the switch 704 using the CLI 703, 704 described 701 802.1x Authentication parameter 702 802.3 bridging 103, 104 configuring using the CLI 104 configuring using the GUI 103, 104 802.3 Bridging parameter 104 802.3 frames 103 802.3X flow control, enabling 104 A Access Control List Name parameter 426 access control lists (ACLs) 274, 425, 426, 430, 431, 910 applying to a WLAN 431 using the CLI 431 applying to the controller CPU 431 using the CLI 431 configuring 430, 431 using the CLI 430, 431 counters 426, 430 configuring using the CLI 430 configuring using the GUI 426 rules 425, 430, 910 using with the debug facility 274 Access Control Lists > Edit page 428, 912 Access Control Lists > New page 426 Access Control Lists page 426 Access Mode parameter 95, 210 access point core dumps, uploading 723 using the GUI 723 access point count, approved tiers for 5500 series controllers 56 access point event logs, viewing 254 access point groups 624, 625, 626, 627 assigning access points to 625, 626 using the CLI 626 using the GUI 625 creating 626 using the CLI 626 removing 624, 626 using the CLI 626 using the GUI 624 viewing 626, 627 assisted roaming 116 authorization list 714 authorizing 709, 710, 711 using LSCs 711 using MICs 710 using SSCs 709 access point monitor service, debugging 283 access point radios, searching for 693, 696 access points 116, 242, 684, 685, 709, 710, 711, 714, 719, 727, 728 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-1 Index access points (continued) LEDs 242 interpreting 242 priming 684 supporting oversized images 727, 728 verifying that they join the controller 685 viewing join information 719 using the GUI 719 Accounting Server parameters 640 ACL Name parameter 428, 429 ACL. See access control lists (ACLs) 425, 909 Action parameter 428, 912 active exploits 513 Add AAA Client page (on CiscoSecure ACS) 353, 376 Add AP button 918 Add New Rule button 426 Admin Status parameter 315, 316 administrator access 208 Admission Control (ACM) parameter 140 AES-CCMP 568 Aggregated MAC Service Data Unit (A-MSDU) 85 aggregation method, specifying 85 AirMagnet Enterprise Analyzer 280 Aironet IE parameter 614 Airopeek 280 All APs > Access Point Name > VLAN Mappings page 903 All APs > Details for (Advanced) page 682, 724, 796 configuring link latency 796 All APs > Details for (Credentials) page 699, 702 All APs > Details for (FlexConnect) page 903 All APs > Details for (General) page 903 All APs > Details for (High Availability) page 761, 774 All APs page 687, 844 AnchorTime parameter 827 Anonymous Provision parameter 403 Antenna Gain parameter 848 Antenna parameter 848 Antenna Type parameter 848 AP > Clients > Traffic Stream Metrics page 145 AP Authentication Policy page 435 AP Core Dump parameter 724 AP Ethernet MAC Addresses parameter 712 AP Failover Priority parameter 774 AP Group Name parameter 624 AP Groups > Edit (APs) page 625 AP Groups page 624, 646 AP local authentication 907 AP Local Authentication on a WLAN 907 Using GUI 907 Using the CLI 907 AP Mode parameter 280, 744, 844, 903 AP Name parameter 625 AP Primary Discovery Timeout parameter 760 ap-count evaluation licenses, activating 64, 65 using the CLI 64, 65 using the GUI 64 AP-manager interface 292, 299 and dynamic interfaces 292 described 299 AP801 access point 705 described 705 using with a controller 705 Applying ACLs to a WLAN 429 Applying ACLs to the controller CPU 429 Assignment Method parameter 849 authenticated local authentication bind method 394, 396 Authority ID Information parameter 403, 919, 921 Authority ID parameter 403, 919 Authorize LSC APs against auth-list parameter 714 Authorize MIC APs against auth-list or AAA parameter 714 auto-anchor mobility 945, 947 configuring 947 using the GUI 947 overview 945 AutoInstall 39, 40, 41, 42 described 39, 42 example operation 42 obtaining 40 DHCP addresses for interfaces 40 TFTP server information 40 selecting configuration file 41 using 39 Average Data Rate parameter 124, 127, 588 Average Real-Time Rate parameter 124, 127, 589 Avoid Cisco AP Load parameter 827 Avoid Foreign AP Interference parameter 827, 944 Avoid Non-802.11a (802.11b) Noise parameter 827 B Back-up Primary Controller Name field 760 Back-up Secondary Controller Name parameter 760 bandwidth-based CAC 138, 140, 142 described 138 enabling 140, 142 using the CLI 142 using the GUI 140 Beacon Period parameter 75 Bind Username parameter 394 browsers supported 30 Burst Data Rate parameter 124, 127, 589 Burst Real-Time Rate parameter 124, 127, 589 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-2 OL-28744-01 Index C CA Server URL parameter 711 CAC 143, 144, 146, 592 configuring for 7920 phones 592 enabling 143, 144 using the CLI 144 using the GUI 143 viewing using the CLI 146 capacity adder license. See licenses 55 CCKM 569, 916 configuring 569 FlexConnect groups 916 CCX 614, 791 configuring Aironet IEs 614 using the CLI 614 described 614 link test 791 viewing a clients version 614 using the GUI 614 CCX Layer 2 client roaming 116, 117, 118, 119 configuring 118 using the CLI 118 debugging using the CLI 119 described 116, 117 obtaining information using the CLI 118 CCX radio management 855 features 855 flexconnect considerations 855 CCX Version parameter 614 CCXv5 Req button 270 CDP > AP Neighbors > Detail page 162 CDP > Interface Neighbors > Detail page 161 CDP > Traffic Metrics page 162 CDP Advertisement Version parameter 159 CDP AP Neighbors page 162 CDP Protocol Status parameter 159 CDP State parameter 160 Certificate Authority (CA) certificates 193, 194, 195, 401, 404 downloading 193, 194, 195 using the CLI 194, 195 using the GUI 193 overview 193 using with local EAP 401, 404 Certificate File Name parameter 214 Certificate File Path parameter 214 Certificate Issuer parameter 403 Certificate Password parameter 191, 214 Certificate Type parameter 714 Change Rules Priority parameter 466 Channel Announcement parameter 86 Channel Assignment Leader parameter 828 Channel Assignment Method parameter 826 Channel parameter 280, 848 Channel Quiet Mode parameter 86 Channel Scan Duration parameter 831 Channel Width Parameter 828 Check Against CA Certificates parameter 403 Check Certificate Date Validity parameter 403 chokepoints for RFID tag tracking 168 CIDS Sensor Add page 482 CIDS Shun List page 483 ciphers 568, 569, 570 configuring 569, 570 described 568 Cisco 2500 Series Controller 8 Cisco 3300 Series Mobility Services Engine (MSE), using with wIPS 497 Cisco 5500 Series Wireless LAN Controllers 9, 289, 290, 301, 303 described 9 multiple AP-manager interfaces 301, 303 ports 289, 290 Cisco 7921 Wireless IP Phones 591 Cisco AV-pairs 637, 638 Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM). See CCKM 568 Cisco Clean Access (CCA) 645 Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) 157, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163 configuring 159, 160, 161 using the CLI 160, 161 using the GUI 159, 160 described 157 enabling using the GUI 159, 160 supported devices 157 viewing neighbors 161, 162, 163 using the CLI 163 using the GUI 161, 162 viewing traffic information 163 using the CLI 163 Cisco Discovery Protocol parameter 159 Cisco License Manager (CLM) 71 and the controller license agent 71 Cisco Licensing website 68 Cisco Logo parameter 219 Cisco Unified Wireless Network (UWN) Solution 6 Cisco Wireless Solution 3 described 6 described 3 CiscoSecure Access Control Server (ACS) 352 Clear Filter link 526, 689, 719 Clear Stats button 944 Clear Stats on All APs button 719 CLI 36, 38, 39, 52, 247 enabling wireless connections 52 logging into 36 logging out 38 navigating 39 troubleshooting commands 247 using 36, 39 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-3 Index Client Certificate Required parameter 402 client location, using Prime Infrastructure 8 client MFP 434 Client Protection parameter 436 client reporting 270 described 270 client roaming, configuring 119 Client Type parameter 755 clients 614, 615, 807, 808, 907 connecting to WLANs 907 viewing 807, 808 using the CLI 808 using the GUI 807, 808 viewing CCX version 614, 615 using the CLI 615 using the GUI 614 Clients > AP > Traffic Stream Metrics page 145 Clients > Detail page 755 viewing client details 755 viewing the status of workgroup bridges 755 Commands > Reset to Factory Defaults page 171 Community Name parameter 95 conditional web redirect 637, 638 described 638 Conditional Web Redirect parameter 639 Configuration File Encryption parameter 199 configuration files 199, 200, 203 downloading 199, 200 using the GUI 199, 200 editing 203 configuration wizard 15, 27 CLI version 27 described 15 Configuration Wizard - 802.11 Configuration page 25 Configuration Wizard - Management Interface Configuration page 20 Configuration Wizard - Miscellaneous Configuration page 21 Configuration Wizard - Service Interface Configuration page 19 Configuration Wizard - Set Time page 26 Configuration Wizard - SNMP Summary page 18, 20 Configuration Wizard - System Information page 17 Configuration Wizard - Virtual Interface Configuration page 22 Configuration Wizard Completed page 27 Configure Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients 959 Using the CLI 959 Configure option for RRM override 848 Configure RF Group 823 Configure RF Group Mode 822 Using CLI 823 Using GUI 822 Configuring a Spectrum Expert 885 Configuring ACLs - GUI 426 Configuring Cisco Cleanair 871 Using the CLI 871 Configuring Cisco CleanAir 869 Using the GUI 869 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (CLI) 440 Configuring Client Exclusion Policies (GUI) 439 Configuring Controller (GUI) 16 Configuring Country Codes (CLI) 783 Configuring Country Codes (GUI) 782 Configuring Coverage Hole Detection on a WLAN (GUI) 641 Configuring Dynamic Anchoring of Static IP Clients 958 Using the GUI 958 Configuring FlexConnect APs using the CLI. 906 configuring for the debug facility 276 Configuring Sniffing on an Access Point 280 Using the GUI 280 Configuring Web Redirect (GUI) 639 Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points protocol

(CAPWAP) 679, 680, 683 debugging 683 described 679 restrictions 680 viewing MTU information 683 Controller Time Source Valid parameter 436 controllers 4, 5, 8, 178, 179, 202, 684 configuration 202 saving 202 discovery process 684 multiple-controller deployment 5 overview 8 platforms 8 single-controller deployment 4 upgrading software 178, 179 using the CLI 179 using the GUI 178 core dump files 257, 260 described 257 uploading from a 5500 series controller to a TFTP or FTP server 260 Core Dump page 258 Country Code parameter 783 country codes 781, 784 described 781 viewing using the CLI 784 Country page 783 Coverage Exception Level per AP parameter 829 coverage hole detection 640, 829, 830, 834 configuring per controller 829, 830, 834 using the CLI 834 using the GUI 829, 830 disabling on a WLAN 640 described 640 coverage hole detection and correction 821 Coverage Hole Detection Enabled parameter 641 CPUs, 5500 series controllers 245 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-4 OL-28744-01 Index crash files 256 uploading 256 using the CLI 256 Creating Multiple AP Manager Interfaces - CLI 324 Creating Multiple AP-Manager Interfaces (GUI) 324 Custom Signatures page 490 D data encryption 682, 683, 746 and OfficeExtend access points 746 configuring 682, 683 using the CLI 682, 683 using the GUI 682 Data Encryption parameter 682, 744 Data Path parameter 947 Data Rates parameter 76 date 43 configuring through NTP server 43 DCA Channel Sensitivity parameter 827 DCA Channels parameter 828 debug commands, sending 721 debug facility 274, 275 described 274, 275 default enable password 697 Default Mobility Group parameter 940 Default Routers parameter 538 default-group access point group 622 Description parameter 386 Destination parameter 427, 911 Destination Port parameter 427, 911 Detect and Report Ad-Hoc Networks parameter 456 device certificates 190, 191 downloading 190, 191 using the GUI 190, 191 overview 190 DHCP Addr. Assignment Required parameter 535 DHCP option 43, in controller discovery process 684 DHCP option 82 421, 422 configuring 422 using the GUI 422 described 421 example 421 DHCP Option 82 Remote ID Field Format parameter 422 DHCP Parameters page 90, 91 DHCP proxy 89, 91 configuring 91 using the CLI 91 described 89 DHCP scopes 537 described 537 DHCP Scopes page 537 DHCP Server IP Addr parameter 535 DHCP servers 533 internal 533 DHCP Timeout 91 configurie using GUI 91 diagnostic channel 265 configuring 265 using the GUI 265 described 265 Diagnostic Channel parameter 265 directed roam request 117 Direction parameter 428 disabled clients, configuring a timeout 545 discovery request timer, configuring 762 distribution system ports 290 Diversity parameter 848 DNS Domain Name parameter 538 DNS IP Address parameter 726 DNS Servers parameter 538 Domain Name parameter 726 domain name server (DNS) discovery 684 Download button 191, 194, 227 downloading a CA certificate 194 downloading a customized web authentication login page 227 downloading a device certificate 191 Download File to Controller page 188, 193, 199, 226 downloading a customized web authentication login page 226 downloading CA certificates 193 downloading configuration files 199 downloading login banner file 188 Download SSL Certificate parameter 214 DSCP parameter 428, 911 DTIM 549 DTLS 55 DTLS data encryption. See data encryption 680 DTPC Support parameter 76 Dynamic Anchoring for Clients with Static IP Addresses 957 Configuring 957 dynamic AP management 297, 312 for dynamic interface 312 for the management interface 297 Dynamic AP Management parameter 296, 311 for dynamic interface 311 for management interface 296 dynamic AP-manager interface 292 dynamic channel assignment (DCA) 819, 828, 829, 833, 834 40-MHz channelization 828 configuring 829, 833, 834 using the CLI 833, 834 using the GUI 829 described 819 dynamic interface example 302 dynamic transmit power control, configuring 76 Dynamic WEP Key Index parameter 401 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-5 Index E EAP Profile Name parameter 403 EAPOL-Key Max Retries parameter 402 EAPOL-Key Timeout parameter 402 EDCA Profile parameter 153 Edit QoS Profile page 124 Edit QoS Role Data Rates page 127 Egress Interface parameter 235 Email Input parameter 235 Enable AP Local Authentication parameter 918 Enable Authentication for Listener parameter 72 Enable Check for All Standard and Custom Signatures parameter 491 Enable Counters parameter 426 Enable Coverage Hole Detection parameter 829 Enable CPU ACL parameter 429 Enable Default Authentication parameter 72 Enable DHCP Proxy parameter 90 Enable Dynamic AP Management parameter 324 Enable EAP-FAST Authentication parameter 919 Enable LEAP Authentication parameter 919 Enable Least Latency Controller Join parameter 744 Enable Link Latency parameter 744, 796 Enable Listener parameter 72 Enable Low Latency MAC parameter 153 Enable LSC on Controller parameter 711 Enable NAT Address parameter 296 Enable Notification parameter 72 Enable OfficeExtend AP parameter 744 Enable Password parameter 699 Enable Server Status parameter 394 Enable Tracking Optimization parameter 785 Encryption Key parameter 576 end-user license agreement (EULA) 58, 59 enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA) parameters 154, 155 configuring using the CLI 154, 155 enhanced neighbor list 116 request (E2E) 116 described 116 Enter Saved Permission Ticket File Name parameter 68 EoIP port 955 epings 956 error codes, for failed VoIP calls 599 Ethernet connection, using remotely 38 evaluation licenses 56 installed on 5500 series controllers 56 event reporting for MFP 434 Expedited Bandwidth parameter 141 Expiration Timeout for Rogue AP and Rogue Client Entries parameter 456 Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) 404, 405, 407 setting local timers 404, 405 Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) (continued) timeout and failure counters 407 per access point 407 per client 407 F factory default settings 171 resetting using the GUI 171 failover priority for access points 773, 774 configuring 774 using the GUI 774 configuring 774 using the CLI 774 described 773 viewing using the CLI 774 failover protection 12 Fallback Mode parameter 357 fast heartbeat timer 759, 760, 761 configuring 760, 761 using the CLI 761 using the GUI 760 described 759 fast SSID changing 101 configuring using the GUI 101 fault tolerance 892 File Compression parameter 724 File Name to Save Credentials parameter 68 file transfers 11 File Type parameter 177, 182, 184, 188, 191, 193, 195, 198, 199, 226, 262 downloading a CA certificate 193 downloading a configuration file 199 downloading a customized web authentication login page 226 downloading a device certificate 191 Login Banner 188 upgrading controller software 177, 182, 184 uploading a configuration file 198 uploading packet capture files 262 uploading PACs 195 filter, using to view clients 807, 808 Fingerprint parameter 482 FlexConnect 892, 894, 896, 902, 906 authentication process 892, 896 bandwidth restriction 894 debugging 902, 906 FlexConnect Group Support 917 FlexConnect groups 915, 916, 917 backup RADIUS server 916 CCKM 916 described 915 local authentication 917 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-6 OL-28744-01 Index FlexConnect Mode AP Fast Heartbeat Timeout parameter 760 Fragmentation Threshold parameter 76 FTP server guidelines 174 G General (controller) page 321, 842 configuring an RF group 842 enabling link aggregation 321 General (security) page 383 General page 401 Generate Rehost Ticket button 68 Global AP Failover Priority parameter 774 Global Configuration page 760, 774 configuring backup controllers 760 configuring failover priority for access points 774 global credentials for access points 699 overriding 699 using the CLI 699 using the GUI 699 Group Mode parameter 843, 943 Group Name parameter 918, 940 Guest LAN parameter 235 guest user accounts 208 viewing 208 using the CLI 208 using the GUI 208 Guest User parameter 386 Guest User Role parameter 386 guest WLAN, creating 207 GUI 29, 30 guidelines 30 using 29 Guidelines and Limitations for Predownloading 181 H Headline parameter 219 hex2pcap sample output 277 Holdtime parameter 159 HTTP Access parameter 31 HTTP Configuration page 31 HTTPS Access parameter 31 Hysteresis parameter 117 I Identity Request Max Retries parameter 401 Identity Request Timeout parameter 401 IDS sensors 481 described 481 IDS signatures 487, 491, 492, 493, 494 described 487 frequency 492 MAC frequency 492, 493 measurement interval 492 pattern 491 quiet time 492, 494 tracking method 491 IGMP Snooping 651 IGMP Timeout parameter 108 IKE Diffie Hellman Group parameter 357 IKE Phase 1 parameter 357 Index parameter for IDS 482 infrastructure MFP 434 components 434 Ingress Interface parameter 235 Injector Switch MAC Address parameter 803 inline power 801 Install License button 58 inter-controller roaming 115, 932 described 115 example 932 inter-release mobility 938 inter-subnet mobility 937 inter-subnet roaming 116, 934 described 116 illustrated 934 Interface groups 328, 331 Interface Name parameter 625, 646 Interface parameter 535 interfaces 291, 309 overview 291, 309 Interfaces > Edit page 324 creating multiple AP-manager interfaces 324 interference 820 Interference threshold parameter 830 Interferences 864 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 106, 108, 109 snooping 106 configuring 108, 109 using the CLI 109 using the GUI 108 Interval parameter 827 intra-controller roaming 115, 931 described 115 illustrated 931 Inventory page 789 Invoke Channel Update Now button 826 Invoke Power Update Now button 824 IP address-to-MAC address binding 121 described 121 IP Mask parameter 95 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-7 Index IPSec parameter 356 J Japanese country codes 782 K Keep Alive Count parameter 947 Keep Alive Interval parameter 947 Key Encryption Key (KEK) parameter 356 Key Index parameter 576 key permutation 575, 576, 577 configuring 576, 577 described 575 Key Size parameter 576 Key Wrap Format parameter 355 Key Wrap parameter 355, 356 L LAG Mode on Next Reboot parameter 321 Last Auto Channel Assignment parameter 828 Layer 2 7 operation 7 Layer 2 Security parameter 569, 576, 639 Layer 3 7, 350 operation 7 security 350 described 350 Layer 3 Security parameter 235, 580, 582, 585, 639 for VPN passthrough 580, 585 for web authentication 582 for web redirect 639 for wired guest access 235 LDAP 395 choosing server priority order 395 configuring 395 using the GUI 395 LDAP server 395 assigning to WLANs 395 LDAP Servers page 394 LDAP Servers parameter 403 Lease Time parameter 538 LEDs 242, 810 configuring 810 interpreting 242 license agent 71 described 71 License Commands page 58 License Detail page 60, 63 licenses 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 67, 68, 69, 70 installing 58, 59 using the CLI 59 using the GUI 58, 59 obtaining 56, 58 rehosting 67, 68, 69 described 67 using the GUI 68, 69 removing 59, 60 using the CLI 59 using the GUI 60 saving 58, 59 using the CLI 59 using the GUI 58 SKUs 57 transferring to a replacement controller after an RMA 70 viewing 60 using the CLI 60 Licenses page 59, 63 Lifetime parameter 207, 386 lightweight mode, reverting to autonomous mode 708 link aggregation (LAG) 319, 320 described 319 illustrated 320 link latency 746, 795 and OfficeExtend access points 746 described 795 Link Status parameter 315 link test 791, 792 performing 792 using the CLI 792 using the GUI 792 types of packets 791 Link Test 792 button 792 option 792 Link Trap parameter 316 Listener Message Processing URL parameter 72 load-based CAC 138, 141 described 138 enabling 141 using the GUI 141 Lobby Ambassador Guest Management > Guest Users List page 207 Local Auth Active Timeout parameter 401 Local Authentication on a WLAN 907 using the GUI 907 local authentication, local switching 893 local EAP 400, 406, 407, 408 debugging 407, 408 example 400 viewing information using the CLI 406 Local EAP Authentication parameter 403 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-8 OL-28744-01 Index Local Management Users > New page 206 Local Management Users page 205 Local Mode AP Fast Heartbeat Timer parameter 760 Local Net Users > New page 386 local significant certificate (LSC) 711, 712 configuring 711, 712 using the GUI 711, 712 described 711 Local Significant Certificates (LSC) - AP Provisioning page 711 Local Significant Certificates (LSC) - General page 711 local user database, capacity 205 location 856 Max RF Bandwidth parameter 141, 143 Max-Login Ignore Identity Response parameter 402 maximum local database entries 383 configuring using the GUI 383 Maximum Local Database Entries parameter 383 Maximum Number of Sessions parameter 72 MCS data rates 83 Member MAC Address parameter 940 memory 12 types 12 memory leaks, monitoring 263 Message Authentication Code Key (MACK) parameter 356 message logs 247, 250, 251, 254 calibration 856 login banner file 187, 188, 189, 190 clearing 190 described 187 downloading 188, 189 using the CLI 189 using the GUI 188, 189 logs 255, 257, 271 RSNA 271 uploading 255, 257 using the CLI 257 using the GUI 255 LWAPP-enabled access points 708, 709, 721, 722, 723, 725 debug commands 721 disabling the reset button 725 retrieving radio core dumps 722 reverting to autonomous mode 708, 709 sending crash information to controller 721 uploading 722, 723 access point core dumps 723 radio core dumps 722, 723 M MAC address of access point 725 displayed on controller GUI 725 MAC filtering 541, 545 configuring on WLANs 541, 545 management frame protection (MFP) 433 types 433 Management Frame Protection parameter 436 management frame validation 434 management interface 295 described 295 Management IP Address parameter 744 management over wireless 417 described 417 Master Controller Configuration page 685 Master Controller Mode parameter 685 Max HTTP Message Size parameter 72 configuring 247 using the GUI 247 viewing 250, 251, 254 using the CLI 254 using the GUI 250, 251 Message Logs page 250 Message parameter for web authentication 219 Metrics Collection parameter 142 MFP Client Protection parameter 435 MIC 575 Min Failed Client Count per AP parameter 829 Minimum RSSI parameter 117 MMH MIC 576, 577 configuring 576, 577 mobility 931 overview 931 Mobility Anchor Create button 947 Mobility Anchors option 947 mobility anchors. See auto-anchor mobility 945 mobility groups 839, 935, 937 difference from RF groups 839 illustrated 935 messaging among 937 mobility ping tests, running 955 MODE access point button 725 Mode parameter 117, 856 monitor intervals, configuring using the GUI 831 Monitoring 881 mpings 956 multicast client table, viewing 110 Multicast Groups page 109 multicast mode 105, 107, 108 described 105, 107 guidelines 108 Multicast Optimization 335 Multicast page 108 Multicast VLAN 335 using the GUI 335 multiple country codes 783 configuring 783 using the CLI 783 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-9 Index multiple country codes (continued) configuring (continued) using the GUI 783 N NAC in-band mode 644 NAC out-of-band integration 643, 645 diagram 645 guidelines 643 NAC out-of-band support 646, 647 configuring for a specific access point group 646, 647 using the CLI 647 using the GUI 646 NAC State parameter 625, 646 NAT address 296, 297, 311, 312 for dynamic interface 311, 312 for management interface 296, 297 NAT devices in mobility groups 937 Native VLAN ID parameter 903 Neighbor Discovery Packet 837 Neighbor Packet Frequency parameter 831 Netbios Name Servers parameter 538 Netmask parameter 538 Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) 168 Network parameter 538 NTP server 43 configuring to obtain time and date 43 Number of Attempts to LSC parameter 711 Number of Hits parameter 428 O OfficeExtend Access Point Home page 748 OfficeExtend access points 733, 734, 742, 743, 745, 749 and NAT 734 configuring 743, 745, 749 a personal SSID 749 using the GUI 743, 745 described 733 firewall requirements 742 supported access point models 734 typical setup 733 viewing statistics 749 OfficeExtend Access Points 284 LEDs 284 positioning 284 OfficeExtend AP parameter 745 online help, using 30 operating system 6 security 6 operating system (continued) software 6 Order Used for Authentication parameter 357, 379 Over-ride Global Credentials parameter 699, 702, 703, 745 Override Global Config parameter 229, 235 Override Interface ACL parameter 429 Overview of CleanAir 863 P P2P Blocking parameter 552 packet capture files 260, 261, 262, 263 described 260 sample output in Wireshark 261 uploading 262, 263 using the CLI 262, 263 Params parameter 711 Passive clients 649 password guidelines 702 Password parameter 195, 386, 698, 702 for access point authentication 702 for access points 698 for local net users 386 for PACs 195 passwords 247 viewing in clear text 247 PEAP parameter 402 peer-to-peer blocking 551 described 551 Personal SSID parameter 749 Physical Mode parameter 315 Physical Status parameter 315 ping link test 791 ping tests 955 PMK cache lifetime timer 570 PMKID caching 570 PoE Status parameter 803 Pool End Address parameter 538 Pool Start Address parameter 538 Port Number parameter 235, 315, 356, 379, 394 for controller 315 for LDAP server 394 for RADIUS server 356 for TACACS+ server 379 for wired guest access 235 Port parameter for IDS 482 ports 315 configuring 315 Ports page 315 Power Injector Selection parameter 803 Power Injector State parameter 803 Power Neighbor Count parameter 824 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-10 OL-28744-01 Index Power over Ethernet (PoE) 11, 803, 804 configuring 803, 804 using the CLI 804 using the GUI 803, 804 described 11 Power Over Ethernet (PoE) parameter 316 Power Threshold parameter 824 preauthentication access control list (ACL) 225, 431, 899 applying to a WLAN 431 using the CLI 431 for external web server 225, 899 Preauthentication ACL parameter 430, 639 Predownloading an image 180 Primary Controller parameters 761 Primary RADIUS Server parameter 918 Priority Order > Local-Auth page 401 Priority Order > Management User page 357, 379 Privacy Protocol parameter 210 proactive key caching (PKC), with mobility 937 probe requests, described 787 product authorization key (PAK) 56, 57 obtaining for license upgrade 56 registering 57 Profile Name parameter 235, 524, 618 protected access credentials (PACs) 195, 196, 197, 401, 919 overview 195 uploading 195, 196, 197 using the CLI 196, 197 using the GUI 195 using with local EAP 401, 919 Protection Type parameter 435, 844 Protocol parameter 427, 911 Protocol Type parameter 125 PSK 568 described 568 PSK Format parameter 569 Q QBSS 592 QoS 123, 587 levels 123, 587 QoS profiles 124, 125, 126 configuring 124, 125, 126 using the CLI 125, 126 using the GUI 124, 125 QoS roles 126, 128 configuring 126, 128 using the CLI 128 using the GUI 126, 128 Quality of Service (QoS) parameter 588 Quarantine parameter 311, 646 for dynamic interface 311 NAC out-of-band integration 646 quarantined VLAN 296, 311, 646, 895, 900 configuring 296, 311 using 900 with FlexConnect 895 with NAC out-of-band integration 646 Query Interval parameter 482 R radio core dumps 721, 722 described 721 uploading 722 using the GUI 722 radio measurement requests 855, 856, 857 configuring 856, 857 on the CLI 857 on the GUI 856 overview 855 viewing status using the CLI 857 radio resource management (RRM) 821, 823, 826, 828, 829, 831, 836, 841, 843, 847, 848, 852, 855 CCX features. See CCX radio management 855 configuring 831 monitor intervals using the GUI 831 coverage hole detection 821, 829 configuring per controller using the GUI 829 described 821 debugging 836 disabling dynamic channel and power assignment 852 using the CLI 852 overriding RRM 847 specifying channels 826, 828 statically assigning channel and transmit power settings 848 using the GUI 848 update interval 841, 843 Wireless > 802.11a/n (or 802.11b/g/n) > RRM > TPC parameter 823 radio resource management (RRM) settings 835 viewing using the CLI 835 radio resource monitoring 818 RADIUS 352, 353, 358, 359, 360, 916 KEK parameter 359 MACK parameter 359 configuring on ACS 352, 353 FIPS standard 358 server fallback behavior 360 using FlexConnect 916 RADIUS authentication attributes 361 RADIUS authentication attributes, Airespace 364 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-11 Index rc4-preference, configuring for web administration 32 Re-sync button 483 Redirect URL After Login parameter 219 Refresh-time Interval parameter 159 Regenerate Certificate button 213 Rehost Ticket File Name parameter 68 rehosting a license. See licenses 67 Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. See RADIUS 351 Request Max Retries parameter 402 Request Timeout parameter 402 Reserved Roaming Bandwidth parameter 141 Reset Link Latency button 796 Reset Personal SSID parameter 744 resetting the controller 204 RF Channel Assignment parameter 852 RF group leader 840 described 840 RF group name 841 described 841 RF groups 839, 840, 841, 842, 843 cascading 840 configuring 842 using the GUI 842 overview 839, 841 pinning 840 viewing status 842, 843 using the CLI 843 using the GUI 842, 843 RF-Network Name parameter 842 RFID tags 167, 169 tracking 169 described 167 debugging using the CLI 169 RFID tracking on access points, optimizing 786 using the GUI 786 RLDP. See Rogue Location Discovery Protocol (RLDP) 454 roam reason report 117 roaming and real-time diagnostics 271, 272 described 271 logs 271, 272 described 271 viewing 272 rogue access points 457, 458, 844 alarm 844 automatically containing 457, 458 using the CLI 458 using the GUI 457 rogue detection 457, 746 and OfficeExtend access points 746 Rogue Detection parameter 456, 744 Rogue Location Discovery Protocol parameter 456 Rogue Policies page 456 rogue states 463 Role Name parameter 127 Role of the Controller 864 Role parameter 386 RRM. See radio resource management (RRM) 817 RSNA logs 271 configuring 271 described 271 S Save and Reboot button 194 Save Licenses button 59 saving configuration settings 202 Scan Threshold parameter 118 Scope Name parameter 538 SE-Connect 885 Search AP window 692, 696, 719 Search WLANs window 526, 687 Secondary Controller parameters 761 Secondary RADIUS Server parameter 918 security 349 overview 349 Select APs from Current Controller parameter 918 self-signed certificate (SSC) 709 used to authorize access points 709 Sequence parameter 426, 910 serial number for controller, finding 69 serial number of controller, finding 68 Server Address parameter 482 Server Index (Priority) parameter 355, 378, 394 Server IP Address parameter 280, 355, 378, 394 for LDAP server 394 for RADIUS server 355 for TACACS+ server 378 for wireless sniffer 280 Server Key parameter 403, 919 Server Status parameter 356, 379 Server Timeout parameter 356, 379, 395 service port 291 service-port interface 297, 306, 307 configuring 297, 306 using the GUI 297, 306 described 307 Set Priority button 63 Set to Factory Default button 831 Severity Level Filtering parameter 248 Shared Secret Format parameter 355, 378 Shared Secret parameter 355, 378 Short Preamble Enabled parameter 409 shunned clients 481 described 481 Signature Events Summary page 492 Sniff parameter 280 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-12 OL-28744-01 Index sniffing. See wireless sniffing 279 SNMP engine Id 94 SNMP v1 / v2c Community page 95 SNMP v3 users 210 changing default values using the GUI 210 SNMP V3 Users page 210 SNMP, configuring 94 software, upgrading 173, 176, 178 guidelines 173 using the CLI 178 using the GUI 176 Source parameter for ACLs 427, 911 SpectraLink NetLink phones 409 overview 409 Spectrum Expert 885 configuring using GUI 885 Splash Page Web Redirect parameter 639 SSH 49, 50, 51, 281, 744, 746 and OfficeExtend access points 744, 746 configuring 49, 50 using the CLI 49, 50 troubleshooting access points 51, 281 using the GUI 51, 281 SSH parameter 51, 282 SSID 517, 523, 524 configuring 524 using the CLI 524 using the GUI 524 described 517, 523 SSL certificate 33, 34, 35 loading 33, 34, 35 using the CLI 35 using the GUI 33, 34 SSL Protocol 31 SSLv2 for web authentication, disabling 218 SSLv2, configuring for web administration 32 State parameter 482, 492 stateful DHCPv6 IP addressing 607 static IP address 726 configuring 726 using the GUI 726 Static IP address 726 described 726 Static IP parameter 726 Status parameter 95, 235, 524, 538, 618 for DHCP scopes 538 for guest LANs 235 for SNMP community 95 for WLANs 524, 618 Summary page 49 Switch IP Address (Anchor) parameter 947 SX/LC/T small form-factor plug-in (SFP) modules 290 symmetric mobility tunneling 953, 954 illustrated 953 symmetric mobility tunneling (continued) overview 953 verifying status 954 using the CLI 954 Symmetric Mobility Tunneling Mode parameter 954 syslog 271, 272, 273 described 271 logs 272, 273 Syslog Configuration page 248 Syslog Facility parameter 249 syslog server 248 removing from controller 248 severity level filtering 248 Syslog Server IP Address parameter 248 system logging 247 configuring 247 using the GUI 247 system logs, viewing using the CLI 254 System Messages 242 System Resource Information page 246 system resources 245, 246 viewing using the CLI 246 viewing using the GUI 245 T TACACS+ 373, 374, 377, 379 accounting 374 authentication 373 authorization 373 configuring 379 using the GUI 379 described 373 roles 377 TACACS+ (Authentication, Authorization, or Accounting) Servers

> New page 378 TACACS+ (Authentication, Authorization, or Accounting) Servers page 378 TACACS+ Administration .csv page (on CiscoSecure ACS) 381, 382 Telnet 51, 281, 282 troubleshooting access points 51, 281, 282 using the CLI 51, 282 using the GUI 51, 281, 282 Telnet parameter 51, 282 Telnet sessions 48, 49 configuring 48, 49 using the GUI 48, 49 Telnet-SSH Configuration page 48 Tertiary Controller parameters 761 text2pcap sample output 278 Time to Live for the PAC parameter 403, 919 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-13 Index time zone 45, 46 configuring using the CLI 46 configuring using the GUI 45 time-length-values (TLVs), supported for CDP 157, 158 time, configuring 43 using the NTP server 43 timestamps, enabling or disabling in log and debug messages 253, 254 traffic specifications (TSPEC) request 138 examples 138 traffic stream metrics (TSM) 139, 145, 146, 148 described 139 viewing statistics 145, 146, 148 using the CLI 146, 148 using the GUI 145 Transfer Mode parameter 177, 182, 184, 191, 193, 195, 198, 199, 226, 262 downloading a CA certificate 193 downloading a configuration file 199 downloading a customized web authentication login page 226 downloading a device certificate 191 upgrading controller software 177, 182, 184 uploading a configuration file 198 uploading a PAC 195 uploading packet capture files 262 Transition Time parameter 118 transmit power 849 statically assigning using the CLI 849 statically assigning using the GUI 849 transmit power levels 849 transmit power threshold, decreasing 832 trap logs 743 for OfficeExtend access points 743 Trap Logs page 596 troubleshooting 246, 264, 717, 721 access point join process 717, 721 CCXv5 clients 264 problems 246 Troubleshooting OEAPs 284 tunnel attributes and identity networking 447 Tx Power Level Assignment parameter 852 Type parameter 235, 523, 618 U U-APSD 139, 145, 146 described 139 viewing status 145, 146 using the CLI 146 using the GUI 145 UDP port 955 UDP, use in RADIUS 351 unicast mode 105 unique device identifier (UDI) 789, 790 described 789 retrieving 789, 790 using the CLI 790 using the GUI 789, 790 Upload button 196, 256, 262, 490 Upload CSV File parameter 918 Upload File from Controller page 195, 198, 262, 722 URL to Send the Notifications parameter 72 USB console port, using on a 5500 series controller 317, 318 Use AES Key Wrap parameter 355 User Access Mode parameter 206 User Attribute parameter 395 User Base DN parameter 394 User Credentials parameter 395 User Name parameter 386 User Object Type parameter 395 User parameter 195 User Profile Name parameter 210 Username parameter 698, 702, 703 Using CLI to monitor the Air quality 881 Using GUI to monitor air quality 881 using the GUI 428 V Validate Rogue Clients Against AAA parameter 456 Validity parameter 195 VCI strings 716 Verify Certificate CN Identity parameter 403 virtual interface 305 described 305 VLAN ID parameter 646, 903 VLAN Identifier parameter 300, 311 for AP-manager interface 300 for dynamic interface 311 VLAN Select 327 VLANs 294, 309 described 309 guidelines 294 Voice RSSI parameter 829 voice settings 142 configuring 142 using the GUI 142 voice-over-IP (VoIP) telephone roaming 116 VoIP calls, error codes 599 VoIP snooping 595 described 595 VoIP Snooping and Reporting parameter 596 VPN Gateway Address parameter 580 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-14 OL-28744-01

 

 

Index VPN passthrough 579, 586 configuring using the GUI 586 described 579 W Web Auth Type parameter 229, 235 web authentication 213, 214, 215, 218, 581 certificate 213, 214 obtaining using the GUI 213, 214 configuring a WLAN for 581 web authentication login page 217, 219, 221, 224, 227 customizing from an external web server 224 using the GUI 581 described 215 process 218 successful login page 218 choosing the default 219, 221 using the CLI 219, 221 using the GUI 224 default 217 modified default example 224 previewing 219, 227 Web Authentication Type parameter 219, 225, 227 Web Login page 225 web mode 31 described 31 Web Policy parameter 430, 639 Web Session Timeout parameter 31 web-browser security alert 216 webauth bundle 225 webauth.tar files 229 WEP keys, configuring 556 WGB parameter 755 WGB Wired Clients page 755 wired guest access 233, 234 configuration overview 234 described 233 described 497 wireless sniffing 279, 280 configuring 280 using the GUI 280 prerequisites 280 supported software 279 WLAN ID parameter 524, 618 wireless intrusion prevention system (wIPS) 497 WLAN mobility security values 951 WLAN Profile parameter 386 WLAN SSID parameter 207, 625, 646 configuring for guest user 207 mapping an access point group to a WLAN 625, 646 WLANs 523, 524, 525, 545, 556, 618, 907 WLANs > Edit (Advanced) page 265, 641 configuring the diagnostic channel 265 WLANs > Edit (Security > AAA Servers) page 229, 640 choosing RADIUS or LDAP servers for external authentication 229 disabling accounting servers on a WLAN 640 WLANs > Edit (Security > Layer 3) page 639 checking security settings 556 connecting clients to 907 creating 618 using the GUI 618 deleting 523, 525 using the CLI 525 using the GUI 523 enabling or disabling 524, 525 using the CLI 525 using the GUI 524 session timeout 545 described 545 configuring web redirect 639 WLANs > Edit page 235, 524, 618 WLANs page 523, 524, 530, 618, 947 WMM 137, 592, 593 configuring 593 described 592 with CAC 137 debugging 756 described 751 illustrated 734, 744, 748, 749, 752 sample configuration 754 viewing status 755 using the CLI 755 using the GUI 755 world mode 76, 77 WPA2 Policy parameter 569 wplus license. licenses 55 wplus license. See licenses 55 WMM parameter 153, 154 workgroup bridges (WGBs) 734, 744, 748, 749, 751, 752, 754, 755, 756 OL-28744-01 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-15 Index Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release 7.4 IN-16 OL-28744-01

 

 

GETTING STARTED GUIDE Cisco Aironet 3700P Access Points 1 About this Guide 2 Introduction to the Access Point 3 Safety Instructions 4 Unpacking 5 Configurations 6 Access Point Ports and Connectors 7 Configuring the Access Point 8 Mounting the Access Point 9 Deploying the Access Point on the Wireless Network 10 Installing Modules 11 Troubleshooting 12 Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information 13 Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 14 Access Point Specifications Created: November, 2013, 2 1 About this Guide This Guide provides instructions on how to install and configure your Cisco Aironet 3700P Access Point. This guide also provides mounting instructions and limited troubleshooting procedures. The 3700P Access Point is referred to as the access point in this document. 2 Introduction to the Access Point The 3700P series supports high-performing Spectrum Intelligence which sustains three spatial stream rates over a deployable distance with high reliability when serving clients. The 3700P series provides high reliability and overall wireless performance. The 3700P series (model number AIR-CAP3702P-x-K9) offers dual-band radios (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) with external antennas. The access points support full inter-operability with leading 802.11ac clients, and support a mixed deployment with other access points and controllers. Note The x in the model numbers represents the regulatory domain. Refer to Regulatory Domains section on page 7 for a list of supported regulatory domains. The features of the 3700P series are:

Processing sub-systems (including CPUs and memory) and radio hardware which supports:

Network management CleanAirAutomatic detection, classification, location and mitigation of RF interference ClientLink 3.0 BeamForming to 802.11a/g/n/ac clients. VideoStream Location WIDS/WIPS Security Radio Resource Management (RRM) Rogue detection Management Frame Protection (MFP) Throughput, forwarding, and filtering performance scaled to meet 3 spatial stream, 1.3-Gbps data-rates

32 MB flash size

802.11af/at CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) 3

2.4 GHz and 5 GHz 802.11n radios with the following features:

4TX x 4RX 3-spatial streams, 1.3-Gbps PHY rate Spectrum intelligence DPD (Digital Pre-Distortion) technology Cisco Vector Beamforming Radio hardware is capable of explicit compressed beamforming (ECBF) per 802.11n standard 3 Safety Instructions Translated versions of the following safety warnings are provided in the translated safety warnings document that is shipped with your access point. The translated warnings are also in the Translated Safety Warnings for Cisco Aironet Access Points, which is available on Cisco.com. Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device. Statement 1071 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Warning Read the installation instructions before you connect the system to its power source. Statement 1004 Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes. Statement 1074 Warning This product relies on the buildings installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection. Ensure that the protective device is rated not greater than:

20A. Statement 1005 4 Warning Do not operate your wireless network device near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Statement 245B Warning In order to comply with FCC radio frequency (RF) exposure limits, antennas should be located at a minimum of 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more from the body of all persons. Statement 332 Caution Caution The fasteners you use to mount an access point on a ceiling must be capable of maintaining a minimum pullout force of 20 lbs (9 kg) and must use all 4 indented holes on the mounting bracket. This product and all interconnected equipment must be installed indoors within the same building, including the associated LAN connections as defined by Environment A of the IEEE 802.af Standard. Note The access point is suitable for use in environmental air space in accordance with section 300.22.C of the National Electrical Code and sections 2-128, 12-010(3), and 12-100 of the Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, C22.1. You should not install the power supply or power injector in air handling spaces. Note Use only with listed ITE equipment. 4 Unpacking To unpack the access point, follow these steps:

Step 1 Unpack and remove the access point and the accessory kit from the shipping box. Step 2 Return any packing material to the shipping container and save it for future use. 5 Step 3 Verify that you have received the items listed below. If any item is missing or damaged, contact your Cisco representative or reseller for instructions. The access point Mounting bracket (selected when you ordered the access point) Adjustable ceiling-rail clip (selected when you ordered the access point) 5 Configurations The 3702P access point contains two simultaneous dual-band radios, the 2.4-GHz MIMO radio and the 5-GHz 802.11ac MIMO radio. External Antennas The 3702P access point is configured with up to four external dual-band dipole antennas, and two 2.4-GHz/ 5-GHz dual-band radios. The radio and antennas support frequency bands 24002500 MHz and 51805865 MHz through a common dual-band RF interface. Features of the external dual-band dipole antennas are:

Four RTNC antenna connectors on the top of the access point

Four TX/RX antennas These antennas are supported on the 3702P:

AIR-ANT2513P4M-N

AIR-ANT2524DB-R

AIR-ANT2524DW-R

AIR-ANT2524DG-R

AIR-ANT2524V4C-R

AIR-ANT2544V4M-R

AIR-ANT2566P4W-R Countries Supported Click this URL to browse to a list of countries and regulatory domains supported by the 3700P:

www.cisco.com/go/aironet/compliance 6 6 Access Point Ports and Connectors The 3702P model access point has external antenna connectors and the LED indicator on the top of the model, as shown in Figure 1. Figure 1 Access Point Ports and Connections (top)3702P Model 1 4 1 Dual-band antenna connector A 2 Dual-band antenna connector B 3 Dual-band antenna connector C 4 Dual-band antenna connector D The ports and connections on the bottom of the access point are shown in Figure 2. 2 3 7 Figure 2 Access Point Ports and Connections (bottom)-AIR3702P 1 5 6 352029 2 3 4 1 Kensington lock slot DC Power connection 2 3 Gbit Ethernet port 4 Console port Security padlock and hasp (padlock not included) 5 6 Mounting bracket pins (feet for desk or table-top mount) 7 Configuring the Access Point This section describes how to connect the access point to a wireless LAN controller. Because the configuration process takes place on the controller, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide for additional information. This guide is available on Cisco.com. 8 The Controller Discovery Process The access point uses standard Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol

(CAPWAP) to communicate between the controller and other wireless access points on the network. CAPWAP is a standard, interoperable protocol which enables an access controller to manage a collection of wireless termination points. The discovery process using CAPWAP is identical to the Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP) used with previous Cisco Aironet access points. LWAPP-enabled access points are compatible with CAPWAP, and conversion to a CAPWAP controller is seamless. Deployments can combine CAPWAP and LWAPP software on the controllers. The functionality provided by the controller does not change except for customers who have Layer 2 deployments, which CAPWAP does not support. In a CAPWAP environment, a wireless access point discovers a controller by using CAPWAP discovery mechanisms and then sends it a CAPWAP join request. The controller sends the access point a CAPWAP join response allowing the access point to join the controller. When the access point joins the controller, the controller manages its configuration, firmware, control transactions, and data transactions. Note Note Note For additional information about the discovery process and CAPWAP, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Software Configuration Guide. This document is available on Cisco.com. CAPWAP support is provided in controller software release 5.2 or later. However, your controller must be running release 7.6.0.0 or later to support 3700P series access points. You cannot edit or query any access point using the controller CLI if the name of the access point contains a space. Note Make sure that the controller is set to the current time. If the controller is set to a time that has already occurred, the access point might not join the controller because its certificate may not be valid for that time. Access points must be discovered by a controller before they can become an active part of the network. The access point supports these controller discovery processes:

Layer 3 CAPWAP discoveryCan occur on different subnets than the access point and uses IP addresses and UDP packets rather than MAC addresses used by Layer 2 discovery. 9

Locally stored controller IP address discoveryIf the access point was previously joined to a controller, the IP addresses of the primary, secondary, and tertiary controllers are stored in the access points non-volatile memory. This process of storing controller IP addresses on an access point for later deployment is called priming the access point. For more information about priming, see the Performing a Pre-Installation Configuration section on page 11.

DHCP server discoveryThis feature uses DHCP option 43 to provide controller IP addresses to the access points. Cisco switches support a DHCP server option that is typically used for this capability. For more information about DHCP option 43, see the Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 section on page 38.

DNS discoveryThe access point can discover controllers through your domain name server

(DNS). For the access point to do so, you must configure your DNS to return controller IP addresses in response to CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER.localdomain, where localdomain is the access point domain name. Configuring the CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER provides backwards compatibility in an existing customer deployment. When an access point receives an IP address and DNS information from a DHCP server, it contacts the DNS to resolve CISCO-CAPWAP-CONTROLLER.localdomain. When the DNS sends a list of controller IP addresses, the access point sends discovery requests to the controllers. Preparing the Access Point Before you mount and deploy your access point, we recommend that you perform a site survey (or use the site planning tool) to determine the best location to install your access point. You should have the following information about your wireless network available:

Access point locations.

Access point mounting options: below a suspended ceiling, on a flat horizontal surface, or on a desktop. Note You can mount the access point above a suspended ceiling but you must purchase additional mounting hardware: See Mounting the Access Point section on page 14 for additional information.

Access point power options: power supplied by the recommended external power supply (Cisco AIR-PWR-B), a DC power supply, PoE from a network device, or a PoE power injector/hub

(usually located in a wiring closet). Note Access points mounted in a buildings environmental airspace must be powered using PoE to comply with safety regulations. 10 Cisco recommends that you make a site map showing access point locations so that you can record the device MAC addresses from each location and return them to the person who is planning or managing your wireless network. Installation Summary Installing the access point involves these operations:

Performing a pre-installation configuration (optional)

Mounting the access point

Grounding the access point

Deploying the access point on the wireless network Performing a Pre-Installation Configuration The following procedures ensure that your access point installation and initial operation go as expected. A pre-installation configuration is also known as priming the access point. This procedure is optional. Note Performing a pre-installation configuration is an optional procedure. If your network controller is properly configured, you can install your access point in its final location and connect it to the network from there. See the Deploying the Access Point on the Wireless Network section on page 14 for details. Pre-Installation Configuration Setup The pre-installation configuration setup is shown in Figure 3. 11 Figure 3 Pre-Installation Configuration Setup Controller Layer 3 devices Cisco Aironet access points 8 8 4 2 7 2 To perform pre-installation configuration, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Make sure that the Cisco wireless LAN controller DS port is connected to the network. Use the CLI, web-browser interface, or Cisco WCS procedures as described in the appropriate Cisco wireless LAN controller guide. a. Make sure that access points have Layer 3 connectivity to the Cisco wireless LAN controller Management and AP-Manager Interface. b. Configure the switch to which your access point is to attach. See the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Configuration Guide, Release x.x for additional information. c. Set the Cisco wireless LAN controller as the master so that new access points always join with it. d. Make sure DHCP is enabled on the network. The access point must receive its IP address through DHCP. e. CAPWAP UDP ports must not be blocked in the network. f. The access point must be able to find the IP address of the controller. This can be accomplished using DHCP, DNS, or IP subnet broadcast. This guide describes the DHCP method to convey the controller IP address. For other methods, refer to the product 12 documentation. See also the Using DHCP Option 43 section on page 18 for more information. Step 2 Apply power to the access point:

a. The access point is 802.3af (15.4 W) compliant and can be powered by any 802.3af-compliant device. Note The access point is downgraded to 3x3 when it is connected to a 15.4W supply. For the access point to operate at its full potential, using an 802.3at PoE switch or AIR-PWRINJ4 power injector is recommended. The recommended external power supply for the access point is the Cisco AIR-PWR-B power supply. The access point can also be powered by the following optional external power sources:

Access point power injector (AIR-PWRINJ5) Any 802.3af compliant power injector Note The 3702 series access point requires a Gigibit Ethernet link to prevent the Ethernet port from becoming a bottleneck for traffic because wireless traffic speeds exceed transmit speeds of a 10/100 Ethernet port. b. As the access point attempts to connect to the controller, the LEDs cycle through a green, red, and amber sequence, which can take up to 5 minutes. Note If the access point remains in this mode for more than five minutes, the access point is unable to find the Master Cisco wireless LAN controller. Check the connection between the access point and the Cisco wireless LAN controller and be sure that they are on the same subnet. If the access point shuts down, check the power source. c. d. After the access point finds the Cisco wireless LAN controller, it attempts to download the new operating system code if the access point code version differs from the Cisco wireless LAN controller code version. While this is happening, the Status LED blinks dark blue. If the operating system download is successful, the access point reboots. e. Step 3 Configure the access point if required. Use the controller CLI, controller GUI, or Cisco Prime Infrastructure to customize the access-point-specific 802.11ac network settings. 13 Step 4 Step 5 If the pre-installation configuration is successful, the Status LED is green indicating normal operation. Disconnect the access point and mount it at the location at which you intend to deploy it on the wireless network. If your access point does not indicate normal operation, turn it off and repeat the pre-installation configuration. Note When you are installing a Layer 3 access point on a different subnet than the Cisco wireless LAN controller, be sure that a DHCP server is reachable from the subnet on which you will be installing the access point, and that the subnet has a route back to the Cisco wireless LAN controller. Also be sure that the route back to the Cisco wireless LAN controller has destination UDP ports 5246 and 5247 open for CAPWAP communications. Ensure that the route back to the primary, secondary, and tertiary wireless LAN controller allows IP packet fragments. Finally, be sure that if address translation is used, that the access point and the Cisco wireless LAN controller have a static 1-to-1 NAT to an outside address. (Port Address Translation is not supported.) 8 Mounting the Access Point Cisco Aironet 3702 series access points can be mounted in several configurations, including on a suspended ceiling, on a hard ceiling or wall, on an electrical or network box, and above a suspended ceiling. Click this URL to browse to complete access point mounting instructions:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/wireless/access_point/mounting/guide/apmount.html 9 Deploying the Access Point on the Wireless Network After you have mounted the access point, follow these steps to deploy it on the wireless network:

Step 1 Connect and power up the access point. 14 Step 2 Observe the access point LED (for LED descriptions, see Checking the Access Point LED b. c. section on page 18). a. When you power up the access point, it begins a power-up sequence that you can verify by observing the access point LED. If the power-up sequence is successful, the discovery and join process begins. During this process, the LED blinks sequentially green, red, and off. When the access point has joined a controller, the LED is green if no clients are associated or blue if one or more clients are associated. If the LED is not on, the access point is most likely not receiving power. If the LED blinks sequentially for more than 5 minutes, the access point is unable to find its primary, secondary, and tertiary Cisco wireless LAN controller. Check the connection between the access point and the Cisco wireless LAN controller, and be sure the access point and the Cisco wireless LAN controller are either on the same subnet or that the access point has a route back to its primary, secondary, and tertiary Cisco wireless LAN controller. Also, if the access point is not on the same subnet as the Cisco wireless LAN controller, be sure that there is a properly configured DHCP server on the same subnet as the access point. See the Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 section on page 38 for additional information. Step 3 Reconfigure the Cisco wireless LAN controller so that it is not the Master. Note A Master Cisco wireless LAN controller should be used only for configuring access points and not in a working network. 10 Installing Modules Modules are devices that are purchased as seperate items. When they are installed in the Cisco Aironet 3700P series access point, they give the access point additional capabilities. Modules connect to the access points module port. No special tools are required to install a module. Installing a Module Follow these steps to install a module:

Step 1 Remove the module from the packaging. Step 2 Power down the access point. 15 Step 3 Peel off the label from the back of the 3700P series access point to reveal the module port connector. 1 2 1 9 7 3 5 4 3 1 Openings for modules antennas. 2 Label covering port connector. Step 4 Align the modules connector with the connector on the back of the access point and click the module into place. 16 0 8 3 5 4 3 Step 5 Screw down the thumb screws on the module. Note If the screws are not tightened, the module will not be recognized and may not operate correctly. Make sure not to over-tighten, only hand-tighten the screws. Step 6 Power up the access point. When the access point boots up, it will recognize the module. 17 11 Troubleshooting If you experience difficulty getting your access point installed and running, look for a solution to your problem in this guide or in additional access point documentation. These, and other documents, are available on Cisco.com. You can access the Cisco support forum for more troubleshooting tips, at the following URL:

https://supportforums.cisco.com/community/netpro/wireless-mobility Guidelines for Using Cisco Aironet Lightweight Access Points Keep these guidelines in mind when you use 3702 series lightweight access points:

The access point can only communicate with Cisco wireless LAN controllers.

The access point does not support Wireless Domain Services (WDS) and cannot communicate with WDS devices. However, the controller provides functionality equivalent to WDS when the access point joins it.

CAPWAP does not support Layer 2. The access point must get an IP address and discover the controller using Layer 3, DHCP, DNS, or IP subnet broadcast.

The access point console port is enabled for monitoring and debug purposes. All configuration commands are disabled when the access point is connected to a controller. Using DHCP Option 43 You can use DHCP Option 43 to provide a list of controller IP addresses to the access points, enabling them to find and join a controller. For additional information, refer to the Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 section on page 38. Checking the Access Point LED The location of the access point status LED is shown in Figure 4. Note Regarding LED status colors: it is expected that there will be small variations in color intensity and hue from unit to unit. This is within the normal range of the LED manufacturers specifications and is not a defect. 18 Figure 4 Access Point LED Location 1 352031 1 Status LED The access point status LED indicates various conditions and are described in Table 1. Table 1 LED Status Indications Message Type Boot loader status sequence Status LED Blinking green Message Meaning DRAM memory test in progress DRAM memory test OK Board initialization in progress Initializing FLASH file system FLASH memory test OK Initializing Ethernet Ethernet OK Starting Cisco IOS Initialization successful 19 Table 1 LED Status Indications (continued) Message Type Association status Operating status Boot loader warnings Boot loader errors Status LED Green Blue Blinking blue Cycling through green, red, and off Rapidly cycling through blue, green, and red Blinking red Blinking blue Red Blinking green Red Blinking red and blue Blinking red and off Cisco IOS errors Red Cycling through blue, green, red, and off 20 Message Meaning Normal operating condition, but no wireless client associated Normal operating condition, at least one wireless client association Software upgrade in progress Discovery/join process in progress Access point location command invoked Ethernet link not operational Configuration recovery in progress (MODE button pushed for 2 to 3 seconds) Ethernet failure or image recovery (MODE button pushed for 20 to 30 seconds) Image recovery in progress (MODE button released) DRAM memory test failure FLASH file system failure Environment variable failure Bad MAC address Ethernet failure during image recovery Boot environment failure No Cisco image file Boot failure Software failure; try disconnecting and reconnecting unit power General warning; insufficient inline power Troubleshooting the Access Point Join Process Access points can fail to join a controller for many reasons: a RADIUS authorization is pending;

self-signed certificates are not enabled on the controller; the access points and controllers regulatory domains dont match, and so on. Using the access point GUI, you can view join process failures in the AP Join Stats page. To view this page, select Monitor > Statistics > AP Join, and then click the MAC address of the AP. Alternatively, you can use the following CLI command to get a list of all APs that attempted to join the controller:

show ap join stats summary all To view details of a join process failure, use the following command:

show ap join stats detailed <ap base radio MAC address>

Controller software enables you to configure the access points to send all CAPWAP-related errors to a syslog server. You do not need to enable any debug commands on the controller because all of the CAPWAP error messages can be viewed from the syslog server itself. The state of the access point is not maintained on the controller until it receives a CAPWAP join request from the access point. Therefore, it can be difficult to determine why the CAPWAP discovery request from a certain access point was rejected. In order to troubleshoot such joining problems without enabling CAPWAP debug commands on the controller, the controller collects information for all access points that send a discovery message to it and maintains information for any access points that have successfully joined it. The controller collects all join-related information for each access point that sends a CAPWAP discovery request to the controller. Collection begins with the first discovery message received from the access point and ends with the last configuration payload sent from the controller to the access point. You can view join-related information for up to three times the maximum number of access points supported by the platform for the 2500 series controllers and the Controller Network Module within the Cisco 28/37/38xx Series Integrated Services Routers. Note The maximum number of access points varies for the Cisco WiSM2, depending on which controller software release is being used. When the controller is maintaining join-related information for the maximum number of access points, it does not collect information for any more access points. An access point sends all syslog messages to IP address 255.255.255.255 by default when any of the following conditions are met:

21

An access point running software release 5.2 or later has been newly deployed.

An existing access point running software release 5.2 or later has been reset after clearing the configuration. If any of these conditions are met and the access point has not yet joined a controller, you can also configure a DHCP server to return a syslog server IP address to the access point using option 7 on the server. The access point then starts sending all syslog messages to this IP address. When the access point joins a controller for the first time, the controller sends the global syslog server IP address (the default is 255.255.255.255) to the access point. After that, the access point sends all syslog messages to this IP address until it is overridden by one of the following scenarios:

The access point is still connected to the same controller, and the global syslog server IP address configuration on the controller has been changed using the config ap syslog host global syslog_server_IP_address command. In this case, the controller sends the new global syslog server IP address to the access point.

The access point is still connected to the same controller, and a specific syslog server IP address has been configured for the access point on the controller using the config ap syslog host specific Cisco_AP syslog_server_IP_address command. In this case, the controller sends the new specific syslog server IP address to the access point.

The access point is disconnected from the controller and joins another controller. In this case, the new controller sends its global syslog server IP address to the access point.

Whenever a new syslog server IP address overrides the existing syslog server IP address, the old address is erased from persistent storage, and the new address is stored in its place. The access point also starts sending all syslog messages to the new IP address provided the access point can reach the syslog server IP address. You can configure the syslog server for access points and view the access point join information only from the controller CLI. A detailed explanation of the join process is on Cisco.com at the following URL:

http://www.Cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6366/products_tech_note09186a00808f8599.shtml 22 12 Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information This section provides declarations of conformity and regulatory information for the Cisco Aironet 3700P Series Access Points and any additional modules that can be installed into the Cisco Aironet 3700P Series Access Point. You can find additional information at this URL:

www.cisco.com/go/aironet/compliance Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Access Point Models AIR-CAP3702P-A-K9 Module Models

(Not applicable) Manufacturer:

Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA Certification Number LDK102087P Certification Number

(Not applicable) This device complies with Part 15 rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 23 This device operates in the 5150-5250MHz and 5470-5725MHz bands and is therefore restricted to indoor operation only per FCC guidance. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment. This equipment generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. Increase separation between the equipment and receiver. The Part 15 radio device operates on a non-interference basis with other devices operating at this frequency. Any changes or modification to the product not expressly approved by Cisco could void the users authority to operate this device. Within the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.47-5.725 GHz bands, this device is restricted to indoor operations to reduce any potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite System (MSS) operations. Caution Caution 24 VCCI Statement for Japan Warning This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. 25 Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Access Points in Japan This section provides guidelines for avoiding interference when operating Cisco Aironet access points in Japan. These guidelines are provided in both Japanese and English. Japanese Translation 03-6434-6500 7 9 6 8 0 2 English Translation This equipment operates in the same frequency bandwidth as industrial, scientific, and medical devices such as microwave ovens and mobile object identification (RF-ID) systems (licensed premises radio stations and unlicensed specified low-power radio stations) used in factory production lines. 1. Before using this equipment, make sure that no premises radio stations or specified low-power radio stations of RF-ID are used in the vicinity. If this equipment causes RF interference to a premises radio station of RF-ID, promptly change the frequency or stop using the device; contact the number below and ask for recommendations on avoiding radio interference, such as setting partitions. If this equipment causes RF interference to a specified low-power radio station of RF-ID, contact the number below. Contact Number: 03-6434-6500 2. 3. 26 Statement 371Power Cable and AC Adapter English Translation When installing the product, please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/AC adaptors. Using any other cables/adaptors could cause a malfunction or a fire. Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law prohibits the use of UL-certified cables (that have the UL shown on the code) for any other electrical devices than products designated by CISCO. The use of cables that are certified by Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law (that have PSE shown on the code) is not limited to CISCO-designated products. Industry Canada Canadian Compliance Statement Access Point Models AIR-CAP3702P-A-K9 Module Models

(Not applicable) Certification Number 2461B-102087 P Certification Number

(Not applicable) This Class B Digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. 27 This device complies with Class B Limits of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Cisco Aironet Access Points are certified to the requirements of RSS-210. The use of this device in a system operating either partially or completely outdoors may require the user to obtain a license for the system according to the Canadian regulations. For further information, contact your local Industry Canada office. This device has been designed to operate with antennas having a maximum gain of 13 dBi. Antennas having a gain greater than 13 dBi are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted for successful communication. Operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. Users are advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. French Translation Cet appareil numerique de la classe B respecte les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada. Cet appareil respecte les limites prescrites pour les appareils de classe B par Industrie Canada. Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrences nuisibles, et

(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences, y compris celles susceptibles de perturber le fonctionnement de lappareil. Les points d'acces Aironet de Cisco sont certifis conformment aux exigences du CNR-210. L'utilisation de cet appareil dans un systme fonctionnant partiellement ou entirement l'extrieur peut ncessiter l'obtention d'une licence pour le systme,conformment la rglementation canadienne. Pour plus de renseignements, communiquez avec le bureau local d'Industrie Canada. Cet appareil a t conu pour fonctionner avec une antenne d'un gain maximum de 13 dBi. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser des antennes ayant un gain suprieur 13 dBi avec cet appareil. L'antenne doit avoir une impdance de 50 ohms. 28 Afin de rduire le risque d'interfrence aux autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas suprieure au niveau requis pour obtenir une communication satisfaisante. La bande 5 150-5 250 MHz est rservs uniquement pour une utilisation l'intrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux. Les utilisateurs tes aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., qu'ils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein Access Point Models:

AIR-CAP3702P-A-K9 Module Models:

(Not applicable) 29 Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC & Medical Directive 93/42/EEC 30 The following standards were applied:

EMCEN 301.489-1 v1.8.1; EN 301.489-17 v2.1.1 Health & SafetyEN60950-1: 2005; EN 50385: 2002 RadioEN 300 328 v 1.7.1; EN 301.893 v 1.5.1 The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10.4 and Annex III of Directive 1999/5/EC has been followed. 31 This device also conforms to the EMC requirements of the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC. Note This equipment is intended to be used in all EU and EFTA countries. Outdoor use may be restricted to certain frequencies and/or may require a license for operation. For more details, contact Cisco Corporate Compliance. The product carries the CE Mark:

Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure This section contains information on compliance with guidelines related to RF exposure. Generic Discussion on RF Exposure The Cisco products are designed to comply with the following national and international standards on Human Exposure to Radio Frequencies:

US 47 Code of Federal Regulations Part 2 Subpart J

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers /

IEEE C 95.1 (99) International Commission on Non Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 98

Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits on Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in the range from 3kHz to 300 GHz

Australia Radiation Protection Standard To ensure compliance with various national and international Electromagnetic Field (EMF) standards, the system should only be operated with Cisco approved antennas and accessories. This Device Meets International Guidelines for Exposure to Radio Waves The 3700P series device includes a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves (radio frequency electromagnetic fields) recommended by international guidelines. The guidelines were developed by an independent scientific organization (ICNIRP) and include a substantial safety margin designed to ensure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. 32 As such the systems are designed to be operated as to avoid contact with the antennas by the end user. It is recommended to set the system in a location where the antennas can remain at least a minimum distance as specified from the user in accordance to the regulatory guidelines which are designed to reduce the overall exposure of the user or operator. Separation Distance MPE 0.63 mW/cm2 Distance 20 cm (7.87 inches) Limit 1.00 mW/cm2 The World Health Organization has stated that present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of wireless devices. They recommend that if you are interested in further reducing your exposure then you can easily do so by reorienting antennas away from the user or placing he antennas at a greater separation distance then recommended. This Device Meets FCC Guidelines for Exposure to Radio Waves The 3700P series device includes a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves (radio frequency electromagnetic fields) as referenced in FCC Part 1.1310. The guidelines are based on IEEE ANSI C 95.1 (92) and include a substantial safety margin designed to ensure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. As such the systems are designed to be operated as to avoid contact with the antennas by the end user. It is recommended to set the system in a location where the antennas can remain at least a minimum distance as specified from the user in accordance to the regulatory guidelines which are designed to reduce the overall exposure of the user or operator. The device has been tested and found compliant with the applicable regulations as part of the radio certification process. Separation Distance MPE 0.63 mW/cm2 Distance 20 cm (7.87 inches) Limit 1.00 mW/cm2 The US Food and Drug Administration has stated that present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of wireless devices. The FCC recommends that if you are interested in further reducing your exposure then you can easily do so by reorienting antennas away from the user or placing the antennas at a greater separation distance then recommended or lowering the transmitter power output. 33 This Device Meets the Industry Canada Guidelines for Exposure to Radio Waves The 3700P series device includes a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves (radio frequency electromagnetic fields) as referenced in Health Canada Safety Code 6. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed into the limit to ensure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. As such the systems are designed to be operated as to avoid contact with the antennas by the end user. It is recommended to set the system in a location where the antennas can remain at least a minimum distance as specified from the user in accordance to the regulatory guidelines which are designed to reduce the overall exposure of the user or operator. Separation Distance MPE 0.63 mW/cm2 Distance 20 cm (7.87 inches) Limit 1.00 mW/cm2 Health Canada states that present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of wireless devices. They recommend that if you are interested in further reducing your exposure you can easily do so by reorienting antennas away from the user, placing the antennas at a greater separation distance than recommended, or lowering the transmitter power output. Additional Information on RF Exposure You can find additional information on the subject at the following links:

Cisco Systems Spread Spectrum Radios and RF Safety white paper at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/cc/pd/witc/ao340ap/prodlit/rfhr_wi.htm

FCC Bulletin 56: Questions and Answers about Biological Effects and Potential Hazards of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields

FCC Bulletin 65: Evaluating Compliance with the FCC guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields

FCC Bulletin 65C (01-01): Evaluating Compliance with the FCC guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields: Additional Information for Evaluating Compliance for Mobile and Portable Devices with FCC limits for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Emission You can obtain additional information from the following organizations:

World Health Organization Internal Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection at this URL: www.who.int/emf

United Kingdom, National Radiological Protection Board at this URL: www.nrpb.org.uk

Cellular Telecommunications Association at this URL: www.wow-com.com

The Mobile Manufacturers Forum at this URL: www.mmfai.org Administrative Rules for Cisco Aironet Access Points in Taiwan This section provides administrative rules for operating Cisco Aironet access points in Taiwan. The rules for all access points are provided in both Chinese and English. Chinese Translation 35 English Translation Administrative Rules for Low-power Radio-Frequency Devices Article 12 For those low-power radio-frequency devices that have already received a type-approval, companies, business units or users should not change its frequencies, increase its power or change its original features and functions. Article 14 The operation of the low-power radio-frequency devices is subject to the conditions that no harmful interference is caused to aviation safety and authorized radio station; and if interference is caused, the user must stop operating the device immediately and can't re-operate it until the harmful interference is clear. The authorized radio station means a radio-communication service operating in accordance with the Communication Act. The operation of the low-power radio-frequency devices is subject to the interference caused by the operation of an authorized radio station, by another intentional or unintentional radiator, by industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) equipment, or by an incidental radiator. Chinese Translation 36 English Translation Low-power Radio-frequency Devices Technical Specifications 4.7 Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.7.7 Within the 5.25-5.35 GHz band, U-NII devices will be restricted to indoor operations to reduce any potential for harmful interference to co-channel MSS operations. The U-NII devices shall accept any interference from legal communications and shall not interfere the legal communications. If interference is caused, the user must stop operating the device immediately and can't re-operate it until the harmful interference is clear. Manufacturers of U-NII devices are responsible for ensuring frequency stability such that an emission is maintained within the band of operation under all conditions of normal operation as specified in the user manual. Operation of Cisco Aironet Access Points in Brazil This section contains special information for operation of Cisco Aironet access points in Brazil. Access Point Models:

AIR-CAP3702P-T-K9 Regulatory Information Figure 5 contains Brazil regulatory information for the access point models identified in the previous section. 37 Figure 5 Brazil Regulatory Information Portuguese Translation Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. English Translation This equipment operates on a secondary basis and consequently must accept harmful interference, including interference from stations of the same kind. This equipment may not cause harmful interference to systems operating on a primary basis. Declaration of Conformity Statements All the Declaration of Conformity statements related to this product can be found at the following location: http://www.ciscofax.com 13 Configuring DHCP Option 43 and DHCP Option 60 This section contains a DHCP Option 43 configuration example on a Windows 2003 Enterprise DHCP server for use with Cisco Aironet lightweight access points. For other DHCP server implementations, consult product documentation for configuring DHCP Option 43. In Option 43, you should use the IP address of the controller management interface. 38 Note DHCP Option 43 is limited to one access point type per DHCP pool. You must configure a separate DHCP pool for each access point type. The 3700P series access point uses the type-length-value (TLV) format for DHCP Option 43. DHCP servers must be programmed to return the option based on the access points DHCP Vendor Class Identifier (VCI) string (DHCP Option 60). The VCI string for the 3700P series access point is:

Cisco AP c3700 Note If your access point was ordered with the Service Provider Option (AIR-OPT60-DHCP) selected in the ordering tool, the VCI string for the access point contains ServiceProvider. For example, a 3700P with this option will return this VCI string:

Cisco AP c3700-ServiceProvider The format of the TLV block is listed below:

Type: 0xf1 (decimal 241)

Length: Number of controller IP addresses * 4

Value: List of WLC management interfaces To configure DHCP Option 43 in the embedded Cisco IOS DHCP server, follow these steps:

Enter configuration mode at the Cisco IOS CLI. Step 1 Step 2 Create the DHCP pool, including the necessary parameters such as default router and name server. A DHCP scope example is as follows:

ip dhcp pool <pool name>

network <IP Network> <Netmask>

default-router <Default router>

dns-server <DNS Server>

Where:

<pool name> is the name of the DHCP pool, such as AP3702

<IP Network> is the network IP address where the controller resides, such as 10.0.15.1

<Netmask> is the subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0

<Default router> is the IP address of the default router, such as 10.0.0.1

<DNS Server> is the IP address of the DNS server, such as 10.0.10.2 Step 3 Add the option 60 line using the following syntax:

option 60 ascii VCI string For the VCI string, Cisco AP c3700. The quotation marks must be included. 39 Step 4 Add the option 43 line using the following syntax:

option 43 hex <hex string>

The hex string is assembled by concatenating the TLV values shown below:

Type + Length + Value Type is always f1(hex). Length is the number of controller management IP addresses times 4 in hex. Value is the IP address of the controller listed sequentially in hex. For example, suppose that there are two controllers with management interface IP addresses, 10.126.126.2 and 10.127.127.2. The type is f1(hex). The length is 2 * 4 = 8 = 08 (hex). The IP addresses translate to 0a7e7e02 and 0a7f7f02. Assembling the string then yields f1080a7e7e020a7f7f02. The resulting Cisco IOS command added to the DHCP scope is option 43 hex f1080a7e7e020a7f7f02. 14 Access Point Specifications For foll listing of the technical specifications for 3700P series access points, see the Cisco Aironet 3700 Series Access Points Data Sheet, at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/products/collateral/wireless/3700-series-access-point/data_sheet_c78-7 29421.html 43 Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. San Jose, CA Asia Pacific Headquarters Cisco Systems (USA) Pte. Ltd. Singapore Europe Headquarters Cisco Systems International BV Amsterdam, The Netherlands Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco Website at www.cisco.com/go/offices. Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R) 2013 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA on recycled paper containing 10% postconsumer waste.